JP2023080933A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To develop such a model that realizes more novel game property in a game machine adopting a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous for a player.SOLUTION: A disc light source is lighted in a second mode when a second variation right display is displayed as new reservation at a stage A, but the disc light source is not lighted in the second mode when the second variation right display is displayed as new reservation at a stage D. At the stage A, when a variation right display corresponding to some reservation is displayed with the second variation right display with the satisfaction of a variation display start condition of the first completion reservation as opportunity, the disc light source can be lighted in the second mode. On the other hand, at the stage D, when the variation right display corresponding to some reservation is displayed with the second variation right display with the satisfaction of the variation display start condition of the first completion reservation as opportunity, the disc light source is not lighted in the second mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 220

Description

It relates to a pachinko game machine.

As a recent pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered when a game ball enters the starting hole on the game board (game area), and if you win the jackpot lottery, you win a big hit (special game ) state, and a large winning opening provided on the game board can be opened to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines constructed in this way, there are a probability variable game state for increasing the probability of winning in the big win lottery and a time shortening game state for increasing the efficiency of pattern variation for notifying the lottery result in the big win lottery. There is also a gaming machine which has such a game state and creates a game progress state that is advantageous for the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, there are game machines that enhance the interest of the game by devising the structure of the game board surface or devising the content of the presentation. As an example of the configuration for devising the contents of the production, there is a configuration in which the production is changed by executing the pending change production.

JP 2009-136435 A

However, since many such game machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that the development of a machine capable of realizing further novel game characteristics is desired.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
A plurality of types of production modes are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of production modes can be displayed on the production display section, and when displaying the production display contents, the one corresponding to the displayed production mode is displayed. configured to allow
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
As the production mode, at least a normal production mode (for example, stage A) corresponding to the normal game state and a specific production mode (for example, stage D) corresponding to the specific game state are provided,
In the normal production mode (for example, stage A), when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first light emitting unit While configured to be capable of emitting light in two modes (e.g., red), in the specific production mode (e.g., stage D), the second variable right display (e.g., When the white square icon) is displayed, the first light emitting unit is configured not to emit light in the second mode (for example, red),
In the normal production mode (for example, stage A), the certain variable right display is displayed as the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied. While the first light emitting unit is configured to be capable of emitting light in the second mode (for example, red) when the Triggered by the above, the first light emitting unit emits light in the second mode (e.g., red) when the certain variable right display is displayed as the second variable right display (e.g., white square icon). The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured not to be played.

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize a further novel game property in the gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart of decoration symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of second decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flow chart for determining a drawing stop symbol on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a display mode image diagram of decorative symbols on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative symbol production table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram relating to the configuration of an effect display device in a pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is an image diagram of executing a transparent effect in a pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flow chart of the second main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flow chart of prefetch suspension content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol reserve content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flow chart of the notice effect/design stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flow chart of decorative design display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flow chart of the first main game announcement effect/arrangement stop symbol determination process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flow chart of the second main game announcement effect/arrangement stop symbol determination process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flow chart of first main game win time look-ahead determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of pending display mode change control processing on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a hold change image diagram in a specific advance notice effect on the sub-main control unit side in a pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of pending digestion transmission image display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image diagram of pending digestion transmission image change on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flow chart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flow chart of the first drawing content determination process during time saving on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display control processing during time saving on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flow chart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the display mode and display position of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to the display area of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the variable display period of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to decorative symbols to be used in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to the stop display mode of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an example of display priorities in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in hold display in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each game state in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to erasure of the pending display in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a working diagram of the sorting member unit of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of symbol standby display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display mode in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of pending change display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a pending occurrence display image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of a pending digestion display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a holding passage route image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flow chart of second main game win time look-ahead determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a first decorative symbol effect content determination table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative symbol effect content determination table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flow chart of prefetching display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of second decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of a stop symbol display at the time of a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an image diagram of executing an interrupt effect in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory drive control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of decoration design content determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a first decorative symbol effect content determination table on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a screen display during variable standby in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a screen display for volume adjustment or light amount adjustment in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a screen display during normal fluctuation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a screen display during SP reach in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing the transition of update of pending display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the final display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the hitting warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability that pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed during the look-ahead effect display and the probability that pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed during trigger variation, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between power-off (not RAM clear) and decorative symbols after power-off recovery in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the relationship between power off (RAM clear) and decorative symbols after power off and recovery in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reach voice and the probability of displaying pseudo-continuous symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a full-rotation effect in a pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a variation mode of decorative symbols for each stage in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing display contents of decorative symbols during variation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design when re-fluctuation is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when specific symbols are displayed and a super ready-to-win effect is produced in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in which an advanced symbol is displayed corresponding to the advance notice type and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super ready-to-win effect is produced when different display modes of the same notice type are performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super ready-to-win effect is obtained in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment when different display modes of the same look-ahead effect type are performed and a super ready-to-win effect is obtained. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing display transition when developing into the same super ready-to-win effect via different displays in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing into a super ready-to-win effect via a button effect in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing display transitions when a super ready-to-win effect occurs in different effect stages in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing display transition when re-fluctuation is executed in a different production stage in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pseudo consecutive symbols and the specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pseudo consecutive symbols and the specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing display transition when the first decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the variation speed of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 157 is an image diagram relating to a case where a power cut occurs during execution of a losing variation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 158 is an image diagram relating to a case where a power failure occurs during the execution of the big hit variation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 159 is an image diagram relating to a case where a power failure occurs when the look-ahead effect is not executed in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 160 is an image diagram relating to a case where a power failure occurs during execution of a look-ahead effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 161 is an image diagram regarding execution of the performance of the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 162 is an image diagram regarding the action of the non-time-reduction gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 163 is an image diagram regarding the final variation in the time shortening gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 164 is an image diagram regarding the display priority at the time of error in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 165 is an image diagram regarding the display priority when executing the button effect in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 166 is an image diagram regarding the first decorative symbols and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 167 is an image diagram relating to the features of the first decorative symbols depending on the game state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the execution timing of each action etc. in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing execution timings of actions, etc. in the variable standby state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. Fig. 170 shows the execution of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the right column, and the middle column in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-reduced time gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing timing and execution time; Fig. 171 shows the execution of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the right column, and the middle column in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing timing and execution time; FIG. 172 shows the execution timing of each action of the first decorative symbols on the left, right, and middle rows in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, and It is a figure which shows execution time. FIG. 173 is an image diagram from the determination stop of the losing symbols to the first re-variation of the pseudo consecutive symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 174 is an image diagram from the variation start action 2 to the fixed position action 2 of the pseudo consecutive symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 175 is an image diagram from the fixed position action 2 to the shaking action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 176 is an image diagram from the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row to the fixed stop in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. Fig. 177 shows the pattern of the first main game pattern in the state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-time shortened game state in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an image diagram of a display from a mode in which the first decorative pattern that has undergone a pattern change corresponding to the fluctuation is fixed and stopped as a losing pattern to the second shake action, and a display from the jackpot end demonstration to the second shake action. . FIG. 178 shows the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols in the middle column in the normal symbol fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. 1 is an image diagram showing an overlapping relationship with one decorative pattern. FIG. Fig. 179 is a fixed position action when executing a chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern fluctuations of the first main game symbols in the non-time shortened gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is an image diagram showing . FIG. 180 shows a fixed position action in response to a trigger hold when executing a chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is an image figure. Fig. 181 shows a fixed position action when executing a chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the time-reduced gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is an image diagram showing. FIG. 182 is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 183 shows the detailed configuration of the display device. FIG. 184 shows an example of the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol reservation display section. FIG. 185 shows an example of the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section. FIG. 186 is a diagram relating to a size comparison between the display device and the game ball. FIG. 187 is a diagram relating to the display mode of the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section and the second decorative symbol. FIG. 188 is a diagram relating to the positions of the round indicator lamp and the round indicator. FIG. 189 is a diagram relating to the operation check of the movable accessory after the power is turned off. FIG. 190 is a timing chart when power failure occurs. FIG. 191 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 192 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 193 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 194 is a flow chart of second main game win time look-ahead determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 195 is a flow chart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 196 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 197 is a flow chart of button repeated effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 198 is a flow chart of a single button performance execution process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 199 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 200 is an image diagram of execution of repeated hit effect in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 201 is a flowchart of the button repeated effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 202 is Modified Example 1 of the execution image diagram of repeated hitting effects in the pachinko game machine according to Modified Example 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 203 is an example of the first main game success/failure lottery table (second main game success/failure lottery table) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 204 is a transition diagram regarding a setting change method in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 205 is a transition diagram regarding a setting change method in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 206 is a transition diagram regarding the setting confirmation method in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 207 is an image diagram regarding button vibration in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 208 is an operation diagram regarding power-off in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 209 is an image diagram of button effects in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 210 is a list of button lamp lighting modes in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 211 is an image diagram of a button effect in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 212 is an action diagram regarding execution of a special game in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 213 is a list of instruction displays in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 214 is an image diagram of an effect during a big win in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 215 is an image diagram of a button effect in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 216 is an image diagram relating to a pending change effect that can be executed in stage A in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 217 is an image diagram relating to a pending change effect that can be executed in stage B in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 218 is an image diagram relating to specific effects and game machine settings that can be executed in a non-time-reduction gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 219 is an image diagram regarding a specific effect during execution of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 220 is an image diagram relating to a hold change effect that can be executed in a non-time-reduced gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing output timing of holding sound and light emission timing of the board lamp in the non-shortening game state in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 222 is an image diagram relating to a hold change effect that can be executed during a special effect, during a special effect, and during a super ready-to-win effect in a non-reduced time gaming state in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 223 is an image diagram relating to a hold change effect that can be executed during the initialization operation based on power-on in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 224 is an image diagram regarding the initialization operation during symbol variation and the holding change effect after the initialization operation in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 225 is an image diagram relating to a pending change effect accompanied by a specific advance notice effect suggesting icon change in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 226 is an image diagram relating to a pending change effect accompanied by a specific advance notice effect in a pattern change next to a certain pattern change in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 227 is an image diagram relating to the pending change effect when the alternative display is executed in the pachinko game machine.

First, the meaning of each term used in this specification will be explained. "Entering a ball" includes not only winning a prize in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a gate where prize balls are not paid out. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. Easy state. Also, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (on the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as a retracted state) ) (so-called tongue-type attacker), advance state=easy-win state, retreat state=non-easy-win state. “Random numbers” are random numbers used in lotteries (computer-based lotteries) to determine certain game content in pachinko gaming machines, and include pseudo-random numbers in addition to strictly-defined random numbers (for example, random numbers are hard soft random numbers as random numbers, pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random numbers" that affect the results of games, specifically, "random numbers (random numbers for lottery)" related to the transition to special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of identification information are determined. ``variation mode determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, ``symbol determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, and ``hit pattern determination random number'' for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, etc., and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be indicated in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but the entrance that triggers the acquisition of random numbers (for example, the start gate, the gate, the general winning entrance) ) is called one random number obtained by one ball entry. called). Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, winning random number) may serve as another type of random number (for example, symbol determination random number). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the large winning port can be open, a non-probability variable game state (low probability state) in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state (high probability state) with a high transition lottery probability to the game state, auxiliary game state (so-called high base state, for example, start In the case where the variable member is attached to the mouth, it is possible to lengthen the open period of the variable member, increase the winning probability of opening the variable member, and shorten the time for notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member. Optional, such as a state in which all of these are valid or a state in which at least one is valid), a non-assisted game state (low base state) without assistance for winning a prize at the starting gate that triggers the transition to a special game lottery is a combination of one or more of "Variable display stop time" means the time to hold the identification information in a stopped state when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. After the lapse of time, the change related to the remaining suspension is started (the change start condition and the acceptance/rejection determination permission condition are satisfied). In addition, in this specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game pattern (special pattern) or a decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design). The main game symbols (special symbols) are identification information whose display is controlled on the main control board side, and the decorative symbols (designs for production, design) are identification information as effects displayed on the sub control board side. is. The term “identification information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission from a light emitting means (e.g., liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color), physical typical display (for example, a pattern drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Production” refers to the display content that enhances the interest of the game, such as changes, stops, notices, etc. of identification information, moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc. A combination of The "decorative pattern" may be in any form as long as the type of pattern can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.). Visual items, such as figures (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, letters, symbols, pictures, patterns, etc., are described. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image object on the activated line with a combination of the same numbers and symbols, it is notified that a big win has occurred. "First decorative design (first design for production)" and "second decorative design (second design for production)" are both "decorative designs (design for production, design)". However, it corresponds to one that is configured to be able to independently notify the occurrence of a big hit (for example, the "first decorative pattern (first effect symbol)" becomes "777" to notify the occurrence of a big hit) It is also possible, and it is also possible to notify the occurrence of a big hit with the "second decorative pattern (second effect pattern)" becoming "777"). "Variation mode" means, for example, variation time (variation time of main game pattern (special pattern), variation time of decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design), fluctuation time of normal pattern), decorative pattern A decoration pattern that can be visually recognized by the player by scrolling display (drawing pattern, design) from top to bottom (otherwise, scrolling display from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc. is also possible) A decorative design (design design, design) that can be visually recognized by the player by switching the type of design (design design, design), rotating and displaying the decorative design (design design, design) on the spot and rotating it halfway or once. , binding) (Such scrolling display, rotating display, etc. may be referred to as "switching display mode") and the like. ``Temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) / not to temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) decorative patterns (drawing patterns, design)'' means that ``temporarily stop → change again'' is one set, and this one set is performed / It is synonymous with not doing it. "Re-fluctuation" refers to the situation of "temporarily stopping decorative patterns (drawing patterns, layout) → re-fluctuation", "starting fluctuation → temporarily changing decorative patterns (drawing patterns, layout) It is a term that includes the situation such as "stop" and "start of re-fluctuation → temporarily stop the decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design) (temporary stop after the second time)", and in pseudo-continuous production Pseudo fluctuations and revival fluctuations in the revival production (for example, during the super reach production, the combination of decorative patterns (drawing patterns, design) that indicate a loss are temporarily stopped, and the production stage that shifts after the super reach production ends. It is a term that indicates a variation that stops deterministically after temporarily stopping to a decorative pattern that indicates a hit after performing a re-fluctuation at . It is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically, after that, the so-called main game symbols are stop-displayed together with the stop-display) to notify the occurrence or non-occurrence of a big hit. In addition, the "decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design)" is based on the second element (for example, numbers), and the first element (presence/content of accompanying information such as characters and "SUPER") and the third element (For example, a color effect) or the like may be attached. In addition, "decorative pattern (drawing pattern, design)", when the production mode is different, even if the second element is the same (same number, same alphabet, same letter, same symbol, etc.), the first The element and/or the third element may be configured differently. In addition, due to the difference in the first element and / or the third element, the degree of expectation that the reach variation will be a big hit, and the expectation that the symbol variation related to the look-ahead effect will be a big hit when a specific symbol combination is stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect. Each time, the profit rate for the player, such as the number of rounds at the time of winning the big win and the game state after the end of the big win, may be different. In addition, when configured in such a way, a high probability state and high base state (high probability high base state), a low probability state and high base state (low probability high base state), a high probability state and low base state (high In the low probability base state), the first element and / or the third element is advantageous for the player compared to the case of the low probability state and low base state (low probability low base state) which is the normal game state It may be configured to be In addition, the "information display unit" is for displaying information including an advance notice effect, etc., and is, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp may be shown. In addition, the "effect display section" is for displaying effects including advance notice effects, etc., and includes, for example, effect display devices, 7-segment LEDs, LED lamps, etc., and may indicate each of these alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (entire unit) such as effect display device + 7-segment LED + LED lamp may be shown.

The following embodiment is a model (first class first class compound machine) in which two conventional first class pachinko game machines are mixed. However, it is not limited to this in any way, and it is within the scope even if it is applied to other game machines (for example, conventional type 1, type 2, type 3, pachinko game machines such as general electric players) . Note that this embodiment is only an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. Moreover, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limiting, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

Prior to a detailed description of the present invention, a brief configuration according to the present invention will now be described.

In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, two types of decorative patterns (drawing patterns, decoration patterns), a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern, are provided, and the first decorative pattern is hidden or visually recognized. A configuration for displaying (variable display) the second decorative pattern in a difficult situation will be described in detail in (this embodiment).

Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (this embodiment), at the temporary stop timing of the middle row during the execution of pseudo continuous variation, special symbols and specific numbers (numbers only) (Modification 1 from the present embodiment) will be described in detail.

Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (this embodiment), at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, the more the temporary stop timing is in the latter half {or the pseudo continuous number within the variation (Modification 2 from this embodiment) will be described in detail.

In the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, the display area SG10 of the performance display device SG is configured to be able to execute a transparent performance in which the characters in the performance display device SG become visible, and the transparent performance is being executed. (Modification 3 from the present embodiment) will be described in detail with respect to the configuration in which the effect display is executed in the second decorative design display device even when the first decorative design is hidden.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern as decorative patterns (design patterns, decoration patterns), and is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect, and the special pattern is A configuration that can be stopped as a fixed stop symbol of the final variation of the look-ahead effect (fluctuation related to trigger suspension) and can be stopped as a pseudo continuous symbol of pseudo continuous variation will be described in detail in (Second Embodiment). .

Of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, from the configuration of (second embodiment), when executing the holding change effect (production in which the holding display mode changes) based on winning the prefetch lottery, change to a specific holding display mode (Modification 1 from the second embodiment) will be described in detail. The hold change effect is an effect that suggests that there is a trigger hold within the hold by the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, the pending change effect is a effect that suggests that the relevant symbol change is trigger pending by the display mode of the change icon.

Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (second embodiment), the appearance rate of special symbols (forecast lottery winning rate and angel zone) due to fluctuations on the first main game side and fluctuations on the second main game side (Modification example 2 from the second embodiment) will be described in detail.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, in the time-reduced game state, the time for one variation of the first decorative symbol can be a time value for multiple variations of the second decorative symbol (or the main game symbol). This configuration will be described in detail in (third embodiment).

Various configurations related to the display mode, display position, display area, priority, etc. of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, which are applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described in detail in (Fourth Embodiment). explain.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a configuration in which the display corresponding to the two suspensions of the first suspension display and the second suspension display is displayed on the effect display device (Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment ) will be described in detail.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, a parallel lottery can be executed, and the decorative patterns (drawing patterns, decoration patterns) corresponding to the fluctuation of the first main game patterns are the first decorative patterns and the second main game patterns. A configuration in which the decorative design (design design, design) corresponding to the variation is used as the second decorative design will be described in detail in (Fifth Embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the configuration obtained by changing the configuration related to the area where the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed from the configuration of (fifth embodiment) (change from fifth embodiment) Example 1) explains in detail.

A configuration applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention will be described in detail in (Sixth Embodiment).

(this embodiment)

Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, referring to FIG. 1, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. A pachinko machine mainly consists of a machine frame and a game board. These will be described in order below.

First, the game machine frame of the pachinko game machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22 and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine to a position to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray D22, and the like. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the game machine, and output sounds (sound effects) according to the game state and the like.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, First big prize gate C10, second big prize gate C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out port D36 is installed. Each element will be described in detail below.

Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start opening detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information.

Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start port corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start opening B10 includes a second main game start opening ball detection device B11s and a second main game start electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information. Next, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d changes between a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter the second main game starter B10 and an open state in which game balls are easier to enter than in the normal state.

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap vertically, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the The upper part of the 2 main game start port B10 is blocked. In addition, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10 And it is configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the side of the second main game start port B10, but it is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the side of the first main game start port A10. may Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter B10 are arranged so as to overlap vertically, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starter is arranged. A10 and the second main game start port B10 may be arranged apart from each other. In such a configuration, a member may be provided to cover the upper portion of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. In addition, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. A game ball flowing down the right side (with reference to the center of the game area) may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10 while being less likely to be guided to the first main game start port A10. It should be noted that "easily guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the number of incoming balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start hole H10, and generates auxiliary game start entrance ball information indicating the entrance ball at the time of entrance. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starter H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start opening H10 is such that a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easily guided. It is configured to be difficult to be guided {however, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game starting openings H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out-port D36, the first big prize-winning port C10 and the second big prize-winning port C20 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and flow down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, the first big winning hole C10 is horizontally long and is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a prize winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is shaped and positioned above the upper right of the out opening D36 and below the second big winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first big winning hole C10 includes a first big winning hole winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first big winning hole electric accessory C11d (and a first big winning and a solenoid C13). Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering the first big winning hole C10. to generate The first big winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 between a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first big winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins (the first 1. Excite the big winning opening solenoid C13 to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called It may be a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape that opens when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops with a big hit symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is positioned above the upper right of the out opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second large winning opening and a solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. to generate A game ball entered into the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d changes the second big winning hole C20 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second big winning hole C20 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called It may be a tongue type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is associated with the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes display, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g). A symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is provided. Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is equal to the first main game (second main game). It corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". ” and ``-'' for failure {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game pattern is displayed. It is preferable to display by a symbol or the like using In addition, the display of the number of holds is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display the number of holds for up to four (for example, it is composed of one lamp, number 1: lighting, number of holds 2: flashing at low speed, number of holds 3: flashing at medium speed, number of holds 4: flashing at high speed}.

It should be noted that the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to play a role in production, so in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is used. is set to an inconspicuous size. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a role in production and the decorative symbol of the first main game side (decorative symbol of the second main game side) is not displayed. In this case, the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG, which will be described later.

Next, the performance display device SG executes the display of performance images including decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) that fluctuate and stop in conjunction with the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols. It is a device that Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which effects including variable display of decorative symbols are executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first reservation display area SG12 (and a second reservation display area SG13) that displays the main game reservation information, and a plurality of lines of decoration patterns (first decorations) imitating a slot machine game, for example. and a decorative design display area SG11 for displaying moving images of patterns and second decorative patterns). In this embodiment, the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display, but may be composed of other display means such as mechanical drums or LEDs. Next, the first reservation display area SG12 (and the second reservation display area SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the reservation lamps of the main game symbols.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding auxiliary game symbols. Specifically, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reserve display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol variations pending (the number of auxiliary game symbol variations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the performance display device SG, and has functions such as the passage of game balls, the protection of the performance display device SG, decoration, and the like. Also, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and controls the overall game operation (i.e., the game A main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players), and a sub-main control unit SM that performs display control etc. related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content. Supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prize winning holes, the sub control board S having a sub-sub control unit SS for executing the performance display and controlling the overall performance. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out game balls to the upper ball tray D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation of the payout unit KE10, and a game of the upper ball tray D20. A launching device D42 that shoots balls (stored balls) into the game area D30 one by one, a launch control board D40 that controls the shooting operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine. , a power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko game machine, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (opposite side to the game side).

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) based on the information (signal, command, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to control and the main control board M , sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. (In this example, the sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS are one board ) and a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S performs various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation and stoppage of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), sound from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , a sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display, stop display, pending display and advance notice display of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) on the effect display device SG. It comprises two controls of a sub-sub-control SS for execution. In addition, the main control board M, prize ball payout control board KH, sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for pre-storing a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. Equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.). Here, although not shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to have an unused area in order to prevent a modified program or the like from being written by fraud. It is preferable (eg, filling unused areas with all 0's, writing used areas down to younger addresses, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data referenced by game machines with different specifications, or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable to configure so as not to provide data such as data for Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to use the area at a lower address so as not to provide an unused program area. Schematic configurations of the substrates and electrical connections between the substrates and devices will be described below.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, the second 1 large winning entrance winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning winning winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (although not shown, a general winning entrance is an entrance that has prize balls but does not carry out a symbol lottery. )}, drive solenoids (not shown above, first big winning opening solenoid C13, second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc., input and output essential for progress of the game It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control section SM, sub-sub control section SS), and prize ball payout is performed based on the game progress. etc. to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) to the sub control board S about the performance/game progress state and the like. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). It is configured to be able to output game-related information from to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used for the communication method). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE for executing game ball payout, and a device that can be operated by a player and receives a game ball lending request and sends the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R that transmits. In addition, although not shown, in this embodiment, a control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (shooting handle, launching motor, ball feeding device etc.) are also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separated and adjacent to the gaming machine. However, it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money or the like may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), etc., a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effects for effects, as described above. It is connected to a drive (not shown). In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS. Lighting control of the illumination lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. is configured to In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as separate boards). (Although it may be possible to do so, there are merits such as a space merit and a reduction in the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Also, the division of work between the two controllers can be appropriately changed, for example, the sub-sub-controller SS executes voice control (preferable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Also, instead of giving physical prize balls as prize balls, electronic values may be given.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B, first and second main game shared peripheral C, auxiliary game peripheral H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to production, and a prize ball payout control board KH that controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on payout instructions from the main control board M, and are connected so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE having a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub-control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It consists of elements such as a ROM and a RAM that are used for processing, and a CPU that is used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. FIG. The details of each means (apparatus) will be described below.

First, the main control board M comprises game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and progress of the game such as a special game or a specific game. and the game progress means MP that governs the current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability fluctuation game state, time shortened game state), special game state}, state related to the auxiliary game (easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbols and variation mode information related to main game symbols and auxiliary game symbols, on/off status of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ], etc., and various game information (for example, stop pattern information, stop pattern attribute information {for example, 16R big win, 8R big win, 4R big win, loss} on the game peripheral device side. , Information on variation mode (for example, variation time), start signal/state information/end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} Information transmission control means MT (and command transmission buffer for accumulating unsent commands MT10) and prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH to pay out predetermined prize balls based on the winning of game balls into various prize winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ includes a ball entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls into each ball entrance (starting opening, etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be obtained, and determines the result of the determination. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entered into each starting hole during variable display as holding balls within the upper limit number. are doing. In addition, the game progress means MP directly determines the opening and closing of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10, and the display control means MP10 for controlling the variation and stop display of each pattern. A second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and a first main With respect to the game, the second main game and the auxiliary game, there is a specific game control means MP50 for determining to which game state the current game state is to be shifted, and for performing processing for shifting the game state based on the decision. are doing. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start opening A10, and a second main game start opening. A second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and an auxiliary game start opening for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start opening H10. A ball entry determining means MJ11-H, a first big winning hole entering ball determining means MJ11-C10 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first big winning hole C10, and a second big winning hole C20 It has a second big winning hole entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game pattern determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start port B10 It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and according to the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B that acquires a game pattern determination random number, etc.), and an auxiliary game for determining whether or not to acquire the auxiliary game side selection random number and acquiring the random number based on the determination result. and random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the "random number" in the claims and this specification including the above is, for example, "0" to "65535" or " A value randomly selected from a predetermined range of 0 to 255. Moreover, the random numbers may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method of expressing values in order along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed (initial value ) is determined by an accidental value (initial value update method), a combination of these methods, and the like. Obtaining random numbers in this way makes it possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are difficult for the player to predict. Conversely, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating random numbers, it is preferable to generate new random numbers without using the random numbers used in the previous lottery.

Next, the holding control means MJ30 controls the holding digestion control means MJ31 that controls the processing related to holding digestion and fluctuation start, and the first main game side random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol fluctuation permission is not granted. A first main game symbol reservation means MJ32 for determining whether or not to temporarily store the random number in the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the permission for symbol variation is obtained based on the determination result. - A, in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, it is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number obtained, and based on the determination result, symbol variation permission is granted for the random number. Second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32-B, and auxiliary game side random numbers obtained in the situation where auxiliary game pattern fluctuation permission is not granted are temporarily stored. Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for judging whether or not to store, and holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted based on the judgment result. have.

Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol reservation means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol reservation means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H are combined with a reservation order of random numbers that can store up to four numbers. 1st main game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, 2nd main game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and auxiliary game symbol reserved information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form of are doing.

Next, the game content determining means MN includes a lottery lottery means MN10 for determining whether the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game starter electric accessory B11d can be opened. special game transition determining means MN20 (for example, turning on the winning flag internally), symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number and a variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on. Here, the success/failure lottery means MN10 consist of a first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbols, and a second main game success/failure lottery means that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the second main game symbols. It has MN11-B and an auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success/failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the first main game symbols. a first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A, a second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the second main game symbols, and a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Each has an auxiliary game success or failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing the win/loss lottery based on the main game random number, the win/fail lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same value as any of all the winning random number values, or determines whether or not the winning random number value is When part or all of the random numbers are continuous numbers, the success/failure judgment is executed by judging whether or not the main game random numbers are equal to or less than the upper limit of the winning random numbers and equal to or more than the lower limit. . Accurate determination processing can be performed by executing such a right/wrong determination. Conversely, if the success/failure judgment is performed by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or comparing only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, if the range of random numbers is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) as a random value, it is vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of flowing current to the main control board M, and all the bits in the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a danger of being lost. In addition, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery. }.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 includes a first main game symbol determination means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), A second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining a stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number) obtained, and an auxiliary game symbol based on the obtained auxiliary game symbol winning random number. and an auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H for determining the stop symbols of the MN41-H.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining stop symbols related to the first main game symbols, The lottery table MN41ta-A for determining the first main game pattern includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal game state lottery table, probability variable game → lottery table for first main game probability variable game state, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining stop symbols related to the second main game symbols. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ according to the winning/failure result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game state lottery table, probability variation game → lottery table for second main game probability variation game state, time reduction game → lottery table for second main game time reduction game state). An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H referred to when determining the stop symbols related to the auxiliary game symbols, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game → normal auxiliary game lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determination means MN50 is the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbols based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game pattern based on the obtained game content determination random number (second main game random number), It has an auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbols. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal lottery table for game state, probability variable game → first main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game → lottery table for first main game time reduction game state). In addition, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbols. , The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to the win/fail result and game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → second main game normal game status lottery table, probability variable game→second main game probability variable game state lottery table, time reduction game→second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game pattern, and the auxiliary game variation mode The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ according to the game state (normal game→auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game→auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling the stop display after changing the 1st main game symbol, and on the auxiliary game symbol display part H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the auxiliary game symbol for a predetermined time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that performs control to stop and display after varying the game symbols.

Here, the first/second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a first/second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes a timer MP11t-H for managing auxiliary game symbol variations capable of measuring time.

Next, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B is used to determine whether or not the conditions for opening and closing the second main game starter electric accessory B11d are satisfied. The second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B and the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t that measures the driving (opening) time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. -B.

Next, the special game control means MP30 includes a condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition conditions are satisfied. (Specifically, a special game content determination means MP32 that determines the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big winning Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and a special game time management means MP34 for opening and closing the opening and closing times of the C10 and the second big winning hole C20. Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes the first and second big winning opening electric role opening/closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first big winning opening electric role C11d and the second big winning opening electric role C21d. , and a winning ball counter MP33c for counting winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. In addition, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table details are not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 includes probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variable game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time reduction game state is satisfied. It has a time saving game end condition determination means MP52 for determining. Here, the time saving game end condition determination means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of times of time saving. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variable game in which the lottery probability to the special game is higher than in the normal game, or a time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game pattern is relatively shorter than in the normal game. Point.

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game pattern and the number of fluctuations of the second main game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (a probability fluctuation game without time reduction number limit except for). That is, the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted each time the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern change (stop). In addition, the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the time reduction game end condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) with a predetermined probability every time the pattern changes. (in the case of a pachinko game machine having a so-called falling lottery function). It should be noted that the time-reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time-reduction flag is on, or that the auxiliary game time-reduction flag is on, that is, the time-reduction gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is operating (including high probability high base state, low probability high base state), and non-time reduction game state is open time extension function is not operating (low probability low base state is included). It should be noted that the time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state. In addition, the high-probability-low base state as another game state is a time-reduced game state when executing a time-reduced game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbols is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state, and the main game symbols. When the variation time of is not a time shortening game relatively shorter than that in the normal game state, it is preferable to set it as a non-time shortening game state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (the game from the fluctuation of the first main game symbols to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the fluctuation of the second main game symbols to the stop). first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, ON/OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) MB20b, and a specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of times of time saving, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) .

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C stop the currently varying first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

In addition, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game pattern information for temporarily storing information such as stop patterns related to the currently fluctuating auxiliary game patterns (auxiliary game patterns in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are the first main game peripheral device A, which is the peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is the peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control section SM are the decorative patterns (the first decorative patterns and the second decorative It relates to the display of only information that does not affect the outcome of the game, including variations in symbols). These peripheral devices will be described in order below.

First, the first main game peripheral device A consists of a first main game starting port A10 that triggers the shift to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that is capable of displaying the first main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that is capable of displaying stationary and variable second main game symbols. and have

Next, the shared peripheral device C for the first and second main games is closed during the normal game, and is opened under predetermined conditions during the special game (big win). and a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H is the auxiliary game start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

Next, sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing and display control processing of the effect content related to the effect display and an information transmission/reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. Each of the above means will be described in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing pattern information and display instruction information relating to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that governs the variation mode of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the determination process of the stop symbol, and the display control process, and the decorative symbol display control means SM21. 1 decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) reserved number management and reserved display processing; background effect display control means SM23 responsible for background image determination processing and display control processing; It has an advance notice effect display control means SM24 that controls content determination processing and display control processing, and a ready-to-win effect display control means SM25 that controls reach effect content determination processing and display control processing.

Here, the decorative design display control means SM21, based on the information from the main control board M side, the decorative design (in this embodiment, two types of decorative design (hereinafter referred to as the first decorative design, the second decorative design The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are independent from each other, and the game is played by combining three number patterns of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. The result can be notified} and the design display content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode, and various information (variation mode design display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing information, stop design information, various flags, etc.); It has a drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Here, the design display content determination means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the content of design variation referred to when determining the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) effect content, display update timing, display update content are determined (or set) decorations that are referred to It further has a symbol effect table SM21ta-2. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed and controlled independently by the performance display control means SM20 based on the information from the main control board M side. By making good use of the decorative patterns, it is configured to increase the interest in the performance and to make it easier to grasp the progress of the game, but this point will be described later.

Next, the design reservation information display control means SM22 has a design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding the reservation related to the decorative design (the first decorative design and the second decorative design). .

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display contents of the background effect and the information related to the background effect display. and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b.

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display control means SM24 includes the notice effect display content determination means SM24n for determining the display contents and display timing of the notice effect, and the information relating to the notice effect display. and a temporary storage means SM24b for information related to the advance notice effect for temporarily storing the information.

Next, the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, the ready-to-win effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the ready-to-win effect, and information related to the ready-to-win effect display. and a ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing the.

The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS includes sub-information transmission/reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-main control unit SM, and image display for displaying an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. and a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further has an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control section SM side and information relating to various image displays.

The performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to a performance display device SG that displays an image related to the performance based on information from the performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative design display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative designs (first decorative design and second decorative design), and a first reservation display area SG12 (and second display area) for displaying main game reservation information. 2 reserved display area SG13).

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be capable of transmitting information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control. means controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. It should be noted that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the main control board M and one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of the flow of general processing in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly consists of processing steps (indicated by rectangles), judgments (indicated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (indicated by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, etc. . Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in a separate flowchart, those referring to the separate flowchart are shown as subroutines (indicated by rectangles with double lines on the left and right sides). . Here, in the development stage of a game machine, game machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (subroutines that are not normally used) are configured not to be left behind, thereby preventing execution of processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraud.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. 1(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and presses the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation to clear the contents of the RAM has been intentionally carried out by the manager of the game arcade or the like. In the case of Yes at step 1002, at step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, the information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, at step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing (Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process, which will be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the contents stored in the RAM area). comparison with the amount of information available). Next, at step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M will store (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M. An information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at that timing, or the command may be set at that timing and a control command (to be described later) may be sent). may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at approximately every 4.0 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) is permitted {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing arrives, (b) in the figure is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, random number counter incrementing process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

In addition, it is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured so as not to be a value that causes a special game to be executed (immediately after the start of program processing, noise or fraudulent to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process for determining the execution of the special game is executed.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, hardware interrupt at approximately 4.0 ms intervals), at step 1100, the main control board M executes auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessary product drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1300, the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes main game symbol display processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1500, the main control board M executes special game operation condition determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process which will be described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize winning opening into which the game ball has entered. The payout control board KH is caused to execute and the processing for managing the results, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (output of information to an external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (transmits the command set in each processing described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt processing. Return to the processing that was in progress. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received by the sub-main control unit SM is important (for example, by receiving another command after receiving a certain command, the process is normally executed). Therefore, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M side decided to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands were set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the game machine is powered off, the process of FIG. be done. That is, at step 1020, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, at NMI interrupt), the main control board M sets power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, at step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start opening H10 (inflow, passage in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, 4). determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition judgment executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information indicating how many balls are reserved. is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Incidentally, even if No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flow chart of the electric accessary product driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessary product open flag is off. Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and sets the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). Along with acquiring, referring to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, the stop symbol is determined based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the holding ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H updates the reservation information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the relevant reservation ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C, and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols has reached. do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbols of the game symbols are fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display part H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B, based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag), the second main game A predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory to the starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game short time flag is off seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and at the opening time of the electric accessory It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in steps 1240 and 1242, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, and the auxiliary game state temporary The electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238; if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224; (Processing of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, the process proceeds to the next step immediately after displaying the stop symbol in step 1226, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by branching using the stop display fixing flag and timer. achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-A detects first main game start entrance ball information from the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1304, at step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining winning or losing, the symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, the variation pattern of the main game symbol (special symbol) ( Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for determining the variation time) are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are obtained in succession at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the obtained first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, at step 1310, the suspension control means MJ30 sends the command transmission buffer for transmitting information indicating that the first main game random number has been obtained (first main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. FIG. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1312 also in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304 .

Next, in step 1312, the second main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B detects the second main game start entrance ball from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. Determine whether information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1314, at step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, three random numbers are acquired as the second main game content determination random numbers, the winning/failure lottery random number, the pattern lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number, as in the case of the first main game content determining means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game acquisition range) are set to the same. Next, at step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the obtained second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, at step 1320, the suspension control means MJ30 sends information indicating that the second main game random number has been obtained (second main game suspension generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in the MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). It should be noted that even if No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

In this embodiment, as the information to be transmitted to the sub-main control section SM in steps 1310 and 1320, information indicating that the random number has been obtained is transmitted. The pending number may be sent together, and these pieces of information can be used as information indicating that the random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the pending digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not there is a pending second main game symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1401, at step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1401, at step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 1500).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game pattern, regardless of the presence of a reserved ball of the first main game pattern (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game pattern). Although it is configured to preferentially execute the pending digestion of the second main game symbol, it is not limited to this (pending digestion based on the winning order, and simultaneous parallel execution of both main game symbols It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws lots).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flow chart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) relating to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1403, the pending digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbols are not fluctuating, and the main game symbols are on hold. Although not shown in this example, if a variable fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display pattern after the main game pattern is confirmed) is provided, during the variable fixed time, the next fluctuation start condition may be configured so as not to satisfy

If Yes at step 1403, at steps 1405 and 1406, the pending digestion control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). While reading the temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game Deletion from the design reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and shifting the remaining information temporarily stored (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the success/failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, A main game pattern winning lottery is executed based on a main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, a winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the probability varying gaming state is higher than that in the non-probability varying gaming state. It should be noted that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this at all. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small win) that cannot shift the game state is not exemplified, but it may be configured so that a small win occurs (a small win is won). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, for example, (1) the probability of winning a small win is different between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first main game side is better than the second main game side. (2) If a small win is won, the game state after the end of the small win is the same as the game state before the start of the small win. (If a big win is won, the game state after the end of the big win may be different from the game state before the start of the big win.) (3) Big wins are on the first main game side and the second main game side. The probability of winning is the same between and, and the probability of winning increases due to the state of the probability variable game, whereas the probability of winning is different between the first main game side and the second main game side for the small win. and the winning probability is not changed by entering the probability fluctuation gaming state. ★ such as "2 ★ 2" and "3 ★ 9" correspond to "special symbols") can be stopped, (5) As a stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation that won the small hit, three of the same symbol Specific numbers that are combinations of numbers that are not uniform and have a certain regularity (for example, order such as "234", reverse order such as "432", odd number order such as "357" etc.) can be stopped, (6) From the player's point of view, a big win (2R or more, the number of rounds is different When viewed from the player's point of view, it looks like a similar opening mode (the small win is only one round, and the big win opening is opened multiple times in that one round, and the big win is opened the same number of times as the multiple times). Executed within a round)} (in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to stop and display a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small win or a big win), ( 8) In the second decorative pattern, the "special pattern" dedicated to the small win does not stop (or sometimes does not stop); is stopped and displayed, the ratio of whether it is a small win or a big win differs depending on the type of combination of decorative patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, by matching three patterns, the probability If the stop symbols include decorative symbols that make it almost certain (or definite) that the transition to the variable gaming state is included, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than if they are not included). good too.

Next, at step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbols are related based on the main game symbol lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined and temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates ("4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B" in this example) are selected. It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbols is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. In addition, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples and are not limited to these {for example, the lost symbols are not limited to one type of symbol, and may be configured to provide multiple types of symbols. Alternatively, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of variation and/or selection rate of the main game pattern is different from before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). may be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) draws the lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode), the main game pattern win-or-fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, variation A variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the mode lottery random number), temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the lottery result of the main game pattern, the main game time saving flag state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation, It is configured to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols. That is, when the winning lottery result of the main game pattern is a win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time shortening game state) Generally, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is short, and when the number of reservations is 2 to 3, the variation time is relatively short compared to when the number of reservations is 0 to 1. It is configured so that the mode can be determined easily (only when losing). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. In addition, it may be configured so that the pattern fluctuation time on the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time saving flag is ON) is relatively long {symbol fluctuation on the second main game side is configured to be advantageous to the player, the pattern fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side is reduced, and the second main game side is likely to be suspended (which is advantageous to the player). (because it is intended to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the first main game side start opening and the second main game side start opening cannot be separated). In addition, an example of the effect executed when each variation mode is selected is shown in the "effect mode executed on the sub side". In addition, as an effect mode executed on the sub-side, a pseudo-continuous variation (effect in which multiple symbol variations appear to occur during one time variation display of the main game symbols), which will be described later, is performed. After prompting the player whether or not, a "pseudo continuous failure effect" that notifies that the pseudo continuous variation will not be executed may be provided. Random number allocation (execution frequency) of ``Pseudo continuous failure effect → stop losing results'' in the game state is higher when the number of reservations is 0 to 1 than when the number of reservations is 2 to 3. (Both the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state may be configured as such). It may be configured to inform the player that the pseudo-continuous variation will be performed after prompting the player whether or not the variation will be performed. In addition, "pseudo consecutive failure effect" and "pseudo consecutive success effect" are effects using "special symbols" or specific numbers described later, for example, when "pseudo consecutive failure effect" is executed, After prompting the player whether or not the "special pattern" will temporarily stop in the middle row, the decorative pattern after one frame of the "special pattern" will stop (temporarily stop) in the middle row, and the "pseudo continuous success effect" will be performed. When it is executed, after prompting the player whether or not the "special symbol" should be temporarily stopped in the middle row, the "special symbol" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle row. there is In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortened game state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time shortened game state The content of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short-time variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all five seconds or longer). In addition, the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, at step 1414, the game content determination means MN outputs the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , information related to the determined main game symbols such as variation mode information, commands related to the current game state, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, at step 1416, the first/second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time period related to the main game symbol variation time to the first/second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, at step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( On the second main game symbol display section B21g), the main game symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variation modes stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, at step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Go to step 1420 .

On the other hand, if No at step 1403, at step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and change It is determined whether or not the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, at step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1420, at step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation will end to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, at step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

Next, at step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes at step 1430, at step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, at step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). Note that even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes at step 1470, at step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1 (decrement). Next, at step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time saving number) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in steps 1476 and 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then (process of step 1500). Incidentally, even if No in step 1452, step 1470 or step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, at step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, the specific game flag (main game probability variation flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag). Next, at step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, at step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game shift permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Incidentally, even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, at step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 1602, at steps 1604 and 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game shift permission flag and the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. to turn on. Next, at step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612. FIG.

On the other hand, if No at step 1602, at step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is ON. Then, if Yes in step 1610 , the process proceeds to step 1612 . Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 determines that the special game is not permitted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, at step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, just before the start of each round. Determine whether or not there is If Yes in step 1612, that is, if it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 sets the release pattern in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, at step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big winning mouth electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning mouth electric role C21d) of the first big winning mouth C10 to make the first big winning. The opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and started. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614-1620.

Next, at step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the side of the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, at step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, 10 It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (ball). If Yes at step 1624 , go to step 1628 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) and determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the big winning opening is Determine whether or not it has passed. If Yes at step 1626 , the process also proceeds to step 1628 . If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 executes the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second big winning opening C20). The driving is stopped to close the first big winning hole C10 (or the second big winning hole C20). Next, at step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer). Next, at step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes at step 1634, at step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 sets the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is to end in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, at step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Incidentally, even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability variable jackpot symbol (after the execution of the special game, the probability variable game state It is a big hit pattern to be shifted, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes at step 1652, at step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stop symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability variable game state after the execution of the special game, 4A and 4B in this example), step 1656. Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag and auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1997 process).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26, control processing executed by the sub-main control unit SM will be described. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-control board S (especially on the side of the sub-main control unit SM) in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 1(a) is the process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after reset such as when power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the game machine is powered on, in step 2002, the sub-main control section SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, When various information commands are received → Reset the information related to the performance at the time of power failure in the RAM on the sub side). Next, at step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of reservations (for example, the value of the drawing reservation reservation counter) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). It should be noted that the effect being executed is not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next variation. After that, the process shifts to loop processing for repeatedly executing (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. to run. Next, at step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process which will be described later. Next, at step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a special game-related display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a background effect control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode of performing loop processing of the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) after resetting. Further, the processing of FIG. 1(c) is the interrupt processing of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line of the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM receives the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line described above). Then, at step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command sent from the main control board M side in the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is resumed.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main control board M side, a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to new reservation occurrence It is determined whether or not the reservation information related to the game design has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 controls the binding reservation counter in the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game, Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the second main game). Next, in step 2106, the design reservation information display control means SM22, based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, the reservation information (especially, the random number and the reservation prefetch group information related to the main game symbol lottery) ) is temporarily stored in the book binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2111, the design reserve information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to see if it has received a pattern variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 2111, at step 2112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the design reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the design reservation information related to the pattern variation (particularly, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. , to shift the remaining pending information. Next, at step 2116, the design reservation information display control means SM22 turns on the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2118 also in the case of No in step 2111 .

Next, in step 2118, the design reservation information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display the display on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first reservation display area SG12 and the second reservation display area SG13). The same number of reserved images as the drawing reservation counter value in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2200).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, at step 2202, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 2202, at step 2204, the design display content determination means SM21n turns off the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2206, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( The first decorative symbol (as described above, displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) by referring to the stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation. is a so-called decorative symbol to be controlled, and details of its display size and operation contents will be described later). 7" and other numbers (hitting numbers), and in the case of a losing pattern, numbers such as "1, 3, 5"} and a variation mode {for example, a variation mode related to the main game pattern is for a short time In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, and in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach performance) Temporarily stored in related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. ) is one line, and if the same number patterns are aligned on the effective line, it means a big win (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it means a loss). In addition, in the left, middle, and right rows (or only in the middle row), in addition to number patterns, "special patterns" (when displayed on the effective line, do not mean a big hit, but after that, a big hit The display size and details of the operation will be described later) can be stopped (temporarily stopped), and the number patterns can also be temporarily stopped during the pattern fluctuation. It is It should be noted that the temporary stop means that the decorative symbols of all columns are temporarily stopped and displayed during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbols to the stop display, and the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative symbols are , refers to a state in which variable display can be started again during the relevant period (hereinafter used with the same meaning). In addition, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo-continuous variation is not included in the stop mode that can be temporarily stopped (provisional stop), is not fixed, and notifies the big hit. A "special symbol" during execution of the look-ahead effect is configured so as not to be included in the stop mode in which a temporary stop (provisional stop) and a fixed stop are possible and a big hit is announced. .

Next, at step 2208, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( With reference to the stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, the second decorative symbol (as described above, the display is controlled based on the information from the main control board M side. (The details of the display size and operation contents will be described later.) (For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7.7.7 ", etc., and in the case of a losing pattern, a random number such as "1, 3, 5"} and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game pattern fluctuates for a short time In the case of , non-reach, if it is a long-time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect related Temporarily stored in information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. , and if the same number patterns are aligned on the activated line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the activated line, it means a loss). In addition, only number patterns can be stopped in the left, middle, and right columns (the "special pattern" does not stop like the first decorative pattern), and it is configured so as not to temporarily stop during the pattern fluctuation. . In this way, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to independently determine the display contents for notifying the success or failure of the main game symbols, that is, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols The decorative symbols have, as their basic properties, the property that they can independently notify the win/loss results related to the main game symbols.

Next, at step 2216, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the winning/failure result of the main game symbols and the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the details of the decorative design performance by referring to the decorative design performance table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design performance table 1 to the decorative design performance table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation details, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2218, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (step 2300). Transition. Note that even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

In the above description, the main game symbols whose display is controlled on the main control board M side are those on the first main game side (first main game symbols) or those on the second main game side ( Although it is not mentioned whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, even if the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may be determined in correspondence with the second main game symbols. Regardless of which of the variable displays is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be executed in conjunction with it. However, in the time shortened game state (state accompanied by so-called power supply state), this is not the case. It is possible to exemplify a state in which only one of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is allowed to perform the variable display in conjunction with any of the display.

Here, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 (decorative symbol effect table 1, decorative symbol effect table 2) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 1; And, it is an example of the decorative symbol production table 2, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit. In the drawings, for simplicity, the first decorative design may be referred to as the first design, and the second decorative design may be referred to as the second design (the same shall apply hereinafter). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the result of winning or failing the main game pattern (illustrated in the leftmost column, in this example, "losing" or "big hit") and decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) variation mode (illustrated in the second column on the left, in this example only in the case of "pseudo continuous failure (total performance time 30 seconds)" "super reach (total performance time 60 seconds)" example) and obtained random numbers (random numbers obtained on the sub-main board SM side, part of which is shown in the third column on the left). In this example, it is configured to be able to determine "Main effect A-1 (losing) pseudo-run 1", "Main effect B-1 (big win) no pseudo-run", etc.). Then, when the content of the decorative pattern effect is determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, when the decorative pattern effect content = “A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1”, “display update timing” = “at the start of fluctuation (0 seconds later)” and “display update content” = “equipment Figure fluctuation start (all columns of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern)", "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first drawing temporary stop display (left column), 2nd binding non-display". Then, as will be described later, according to the elapsed time related to the variation time of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the "display update content" reaching the "display update timing" is the first decorative symbol. It will be executed sequentially with respect to each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (losing) pseudo run 1" is determined, after all columns of the first decorative symbols and all columns of the second decorative symbols are variably displayed, "display update timing" = "variation start 12 seconds later", if display control is performed so that all rows of the first decorative pattern are hidden (not displayed even if they are being variably displayed), then the second decorative pattern is , Display is controlled so that all columns are variably displayed (the variably displayed state becomes visible), and when "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of variation" is reached, the first decorative pattern , the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, while the display of the second decorative pattern is controlled so that all columns are not displayed (even the variable display is not displayed). . Thus, the basic operation in the example of this example is that when the first decorative symbol is visible (easily visible) to the player, the second decorative symbol is visible to the player. While being in a state of being invisible (difficult to see), when the first decorative pattern is in a state of being invisible (difficult to see) to the player, the second decorative pattern is visible to the player ( In other words, in order to ensure that the player is notified that the symbols are changing, the second decorative symbols are displayed complementarily. In addition, the production pattern (series of display contents) defined by "A-1 (losing) pseudo-continuation 1" is different from the production pattern defined by the name of other decorative symbol production contents (that is, the display contents are different ). In addition, the range of random numbers is "0 to 1023" in all variation modes, and this figure extracts a part of the random number range in the design variation mode (therefore, it corresponds to a certain design variation mode The random number range of the acquired random number value and the random number range of the acquired random number value corresponding to the different illustration variation mode are different from each other, but both are "0 to 1023". range).

Here, in the present embodiment, so-called pseudo-continuous variation can be executed. (Losing) pseudo-run 2” and “B-2 (big hit) pseudo-run 2”. For example, in the decorative pattern effect content “A-2 (losing) pseudo-continuation 2”, “display update timing” = “at the start of fluctuation (after 0 seconds)”, “display update content” = “start of design fluctuation (first 1 decorative design and all rows of the second decorative design)" is executed, "Display update timing" = "12 seconds after start of fluctuation", "13 seconds after start of fluctuation", "14 seconds after start of fluctuation" Display update content” = “1st drawing temporary stop display (left column)” (left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “1st drawing temporary stop display (right column)” (1st decorative pattern The right column is the stop display), and the "first design special design temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decoration design is the above-mentioned "special design" stop display) are sequentially executed. Then, after that, in the "display update timing" = "15 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "first decoration fluctuation start (all columns)" (only the first decoration pattern is displayed again with fluctuation) After execution, "display update timing" = "26 seconds after start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after start of fluctuation", "28 seconds after start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "1st layout temporary stop display ( left column)” (the left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “first binding temporary stop display (right column)” (the right column of the first decorative pattern is stopped display), “first binding special pattern "Temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbols is stopped and displayed with the above-mentioned "special symbols") is sequentially executed, so that for the player, during the one-time fluctuation display of the main game symbols, the As for one decorative pattern, it seems as if multiple pattern fluctuations have occurred (the appearance of this pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the manner in which the "special pattern" is stopped and displayed can be seen in the image diagram of FIG. 40). ).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is not displayed (a state in which the stationary display/variable display is not displayed), and the middle row of the first decorative pattern is the above-mentioned "special pattern" The second decorative pattern is variably displayed when the game is temporarily stopped by pressing the second decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is not displayed in other cases. That is, when the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol or can determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is hidden (the first decorative symbol If the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol or cannot determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbol" is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) cannot be distinguished}, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, so that the player can always choose one of them. The decoration pattern (either the first decoration pattern or the second decoration pattern) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In this embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" does not temporarily stop. Since the main purpose is to increase This is because symbols that may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game, such as symbols that foretell the possibility of a big win afterward, are not displayed. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), it may include a state of being displayed fluctuating at high speed (a fluctuating state in which an afterimage is visible). In the case of "display" (including both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the state of being displayed fluctuating at a low speed (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, slowly from above and (temporary) fluctuation state toward the planned stop position) may be included.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second decorative design is configured so as not to temporarily stop in the middle of the fluctuation (and the "special design" does not stop), but it is not limited to this, and the second decorative design As with the first decorative symbol, it may be configured such that a temporary stop can be made during the fluctuation (or a pseudo fluctuation can occur). That is, in the case of such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative symbols and all the rows of the second decorative symbols have substantially the same operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and the stop display is performed. It is configured so that the types of symbols to be displayed are different.

Further, the second decorative symbols need not always be displayed during the variable display of the main game symbols, and the display conditions and display mode of the second decorative symbols may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) During the occurrence of a specific effect (instead of making the first decorative pattern invisible, the entire display area on the effect display device SG is used to reproduce a movie moving image, or a so-called effect (2) At the time of a specific ready-to-win effect (the second decorative pattern is displayed), It is time to execute a ready-to-win performance in which the degree of expectation for a big hit remarkably increases instead of making the 1 decorative pattern invisible, for example, the content of the performance displayed on the performance display device SG is forcibly stopped temporarily. The second decorative pattern is displayed only when executing the so-called freeze reach production), and the second decorative pattern is hidden in other ready-to-win productions (especially when executing the ready-to-win production with low expectations for big hits), 3) Differentiate the appearance position of the second decorative pattern on the effect display device SG according to the effect pattern (for example, the above-described movable accessory for effect advances to a state that covers the display area on the effect display device SG). (4) The first decorative pattern can be moved, reduced, or enlarged. On the other hand, it is impossible to move, reduce, or enlarge the display of the second decorative design, or the probability of execution of movement, reduction, or enlargement, the width of movement, the reduction rate, the magnification rate, etc. It may be lower than, etc.

In addition, during a specific ready-to-win effect or in a situation where the first decorative pattern forms a ready-to-win state (for example, in a situation where the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped with the same pattern), the second decorative pattern fluctuates. It may be configured as shown.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. If Yes at step 2302, at step 2304, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design content decision flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2306, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2309, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. It should be noted that even if No in step 2302 , the process proceeds to step 2310 .

Next, at step 2310, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2310, at step 2312, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2314, the decorative design display control means SM21 performs the first decoration based on the first decoration variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the pattern variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative design (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 2330 .

On the other hand, if No at step 2314, at step 2318, the decorative design display control means SM21 changes the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative pattern has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2318, at step 2320, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is time to stop the above-mentioned "special design" ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only in the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 puts an angel zone flag (for notifying that the expectation of a big hit will increase) in the flag area of the temporary storage means SM21b of the decoration display related information. A flag that triggers the display of the background image) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324 . On the other hand, if the answer to step 2320 is No, the process proceeds to step 2324 as well. Next, at step 2324, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative design (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 2999). is executed) and the process proceeds to step 2330 . In the present embodiment, when the angel zone flag is turned on, an "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect. , (1) during pattern fluctuations with relatively high expectations for big hits (for example, pattern fluctuations that result in reach), (2) at the time of stoppage of pattern fluctuations related to holding scheduled to be completed before pattern fluctuations with high expectations for big hits, etc. In addition, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to turn on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or may be temporarily stopped in the case of (2) described above. You may stop after confirming.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the first composition variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2326, at step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command for the notice image and reach image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2326 , the process proceeds to step 2330 .

Next, in step 2330, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative design is normally displayed (as described above, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative design). or when it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, and when the second decorative symbol is hidden). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second design display flag (with respect to the second decorative design in the non-display state) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. flag for switching between ON=OFF and display=ON) is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, if No at step 2330, at step 2334, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the second design display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. .

Next, at step 2336, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbols are to be stopped and displayed has been received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes at step 2336, at step 2338, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (determined display command) of the first decorative design (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 2340, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, at step 2342, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). do. Note that even if No in step 2310 or step 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350).

In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM uses the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 to manage the timing related to the variation display of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like. However, the method of managing the timing related to the variation of the first decorative pattern, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. is not limited to this. Timing, notice image/reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are all determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received content. The effect may be executed (displayed) at any time (the same applies to the second decorative pattern).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flow chart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, at step 2352, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first design fluctuating flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second design display flag is ON. . In the case of Yes at step 2354, at step 2356, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display execution command for the second decorative design (command for variably displaying the second decorative design) (display command transmission at step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2354, at step 2358, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design variable display erase command (command for hiding the second decorative design) (step 2999). (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360 .

Next, at step 2360, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbols are to be stopped and displayed has been received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes at step 2360, at step 2362, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (determined display command) of the second decorative design (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 2364, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the second design display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. Incidentally, even if No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern and the pending display (the pending regarding the first main game pattern and the pending regarding the second main game pattern may be displayed at the same time) are the effects display device. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the fixed display timing (timing when the main game symbols are stopped and displayed). Since the first decorative design is the main decorative design, the first decorative design has higher visibility than the second decorative design (the display area is presumably larger). Further, in the present embodiment, the variation start timing and the variation end timing (determined display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 2402, at step 2404, background effect display control means SM23 refers to main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. Big hit start display is performed on the SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of big win), and the process proceeds to step 2412 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2402 , the process proceeds to step 2412 .

Next, at step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (this is the reason for the game performance and the big win). It may be executed appropriately as necessary based on the type, etc.).

Next, at step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display an effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot being executed and the jackpot symbols being stopped ( It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) (For example, in the case of a special game related to the latent probability variable jackpot symbol, the transition to the probability variable game state after the special game is completed. An effect that the player cannot recognize is executed). Next, at step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes at step 2414, at step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the end of the big win on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big win). Next, at step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). . Note that even if No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of background effect control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2502, at step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed when the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped) as the background effect, and step 2506. transition to Next, at step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the change (a part of the pseudo-continuous change) that triggered the transition to the "Angel Zone" has ended. determine whether If Yes at step 2506, at step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, if No at step 2502, at step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. . If Yes at step 2512, at step 2514, a stage transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example) is executed (stage transition lottery is executed at the start of each fluctuation). . Next, at step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2516, at step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, the stages are looped in the order of flatland stage→space stage→volcano stage→flatland stage). Go), the background effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520 . It should be noted that step 2520 is also executed when the result of step 2506, step 2512 or step 2516 is No.

Next, at step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the command is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side). is transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided, and the first decorative pattern is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative pattern to be displayed (variable display) in a state where the display/variation display is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the player can always select one of the decorative symbols. A user-friendly game machine can be provided that can be visually recognized and can accurately determine whether or not the stopped symbols and the jackpot symbols are stopped.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, the temporary stop symbol in the middle row always stops the "special symbol", and during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the first 2 The decorative pattern is configured to be hidden, but the display control method of the decorative pattern is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as Modification 1 from the present embodiment, and only the points of modification from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 (decorative symbol effect table 3, decorative symbol effect table 4) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 3, especially part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, and , the decorative pattern effect table 4, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit). First, the first decorative pattern will be described in detail as to the changes from the present embodiment. In Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed even during fluctuation. Also, for example, when executing a pseudo-continuous variation such as "A-6 (losing) pseudo consecutive 2 (specific appearance)", at the timing of temporary stop of the middle symbol, the specific appearance is stopped in addition to the "special symbol" configured to be able to Here, a specific pattern is different from a "special pattern" in that all columns (left, middle, and right) are stopped with numbers, but are stopped according to a certain rule. (For example, an order such as "345"), and is configured to inform the player that the pseudo-continuous variation is being executed by stopping the specific number. In addition, in the modification 1 from the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, in the case of a loss, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, it is easier to stop the specific number than the "special symbol". On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the "special symbols" are easier to stop than the specific symbols at the timing of the temporary stop of the middle row. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the is stopped. It should be noted that the game is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if the expectation of a big hit is higher when the specific number stops than when the "special symbol" stops. Also, when the pseudo-variation is executed in the pseudo-continuous variation, all the symbols are changed again, that is, after the three symbols are temporarily stopped, the three symbols are changed again, but in such a case , If the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped in the middle row and then the middle row changes again, the decoration pattern in the middle row at the start of the re-fluctuation is no longer a "special pattern" {for example, "6 7 (★ = special symbol), it will change again in the state of "667" (it is desirable that the middle symbol is the right symbol or the left symbol "± 1" frame)} Alternatively, when the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, three patterns of "667" are temporarily stopped behind the "special pattern", and then the "special pattern" is changed again. The first decorative pattern in the left row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row, and the first decorative pattern in the right row may be changed again when they are erased. In such a case, by setting the display priority of the image of the "special symbol" in the middle row higher than the first decorative symbol in the middle row, the "special symbol" is displayed in the form of a pseudo continuous variation that displays the specific number. Since it is only necessary to display it, it is possible to prevent the method of determining the first decorative pattern from becoming complicated.

Next, changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the second decorative design. In Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols are always displayed while the main game symbols are changing. In the case of ready-to-win, the second decorative pattern is also temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern is also fixedly displayed at the fixed display timing of the first decorative pattern. (The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.). In addition, the variable display mode of the second decorative pattern is not limited to this. In this case, the second decorative pattern is hidden, that is, during the variable display of the first decorative pattern, during the temporary stop of the left and right columns, and at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the specific number is stopped. In the case of middle row, the second decorative pattern is hidden, while when the "special pattern" is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed (or temporarily stop display). In addition, all the second decorative symbols may be stopped and temporarily stopped in accordance with the stop and temporary stop of the first decorative symbols. Also, the second decorative pattern may be always changed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first decorative pattern, and only when the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern may be fixed and stopped.

With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous variation can be achieved by configuring the specific number to be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. It is possible to provide a plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop at the time of execution, and to make the degree of expectation for a big win different depending on the stop modes, so that the player can pay attention to which of the stop modes is. As a result, the amusement of the game is enhanced.

In addition, in the modification 1 from the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern is configured to be variably displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured not to variably display (hide), or may be configured to hide only a specific column (for example, middle column).

In addition, in Modification 1 from the present embodiment, it is configured such that the specific outcome (or "special symbol") can be temporarily stopped at the timing of the temporary stop of the middle row, but the specific outcome (or "special symbol") ) may be changed in the display mode of the left and right columns, for example, (1) the same number in the left column and the right column, and ±1 (For example, "4, 5, 4" or a "special symbol" is placed at the position of 5 in the middle row), (2) in the same stop mode as a losing eye that is not a specific eye (3) Temporary stop in all columns at the same time (5) If the left and right column decorative patterns are numbers separated by "2" or more, the middle column decorative patterns are numbers separated by "2" or more from the left and/or right columns. It may be assumed that, for example, the temporary stop is made due to a failure at . In addition, the appearance condition of the specific outcome may also be changed. For example, it is likely to appear when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appear only when they are the same). For example, it may be configured to differ from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, the appearance of the "special pattern" (or the specific pattern) after the reach is higher than the appearance of the "special pattern" (or the specific pattern) when it is not the reach, or After that, there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {for example, "7 ★ 7" has a higher expectation of a big hit than "7 ★ 8" (★ = special symbol). Alternatively, it may be configured such that there is a high possibility of temporary stop again. In addition, as shown in (1), the left column and the right column are the same number, and the middle column is the same number ± 1 number, or the middle column and the right column are the numbers of the left column. In the case of numbers such as ±1 or ±2, in other words, when the numbers in the middle and right columns are predetermined based on the numbers in the left column, only the numbers displayed in the left column are determined by lottery. For the numbers displayed in the middle and right columns, the same numbers as the numbers displayed in the left column determined by lottery or the numbers displayed in the left column determined by lottery are ±1 or ±2. (that is, the numbers to be displayed in the middle and right columns are not determined by lottery or the like, but the numbers corresponding to the numbers to be displayed in the left column are determined). For example, if the left column is N (N is a number from 1 to 8, for example), the middle column is N+1, and the right column is N, the numbers displayed in the left column are determined by lottery or the like from 1 to 8. . If the number in the left column is determined to be "4", the middle column will be 4 + 1 = "5", the right column will be the same "4" as the left column, and the specific outcome will be "4, 5, 4" set. By configuring in this way, a specific number is set using a table in which only the numbers in the left column are set without using a table in which a plurality of specific numbers are set as a combination of the left column, the middle column, and the right column. is possible, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine the specific number in the decorative symbol display content determination process of step 2200 . In the above example, the numbers in the left column are determined by lottery, and the numbers in the middle and right columns are determined based on the numbers in the left column. For column numbers, left and right column numbers may be determined, and for right column numbers, left and middle column numbers may be determined.

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
Here, although the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative symbol during pseudo continuous variation was mentioned in the present embodiment and modification example 1 from the present embodiment, the display mode of the first decorative symbol during pseudo continuous variation other than the configuration New playability can be created by the configuration of the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is Modified Example 2 from the present embodiment, and only the points changed from Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 29 and 30 (decorative symbol effect table 5, decorative symbol effect table 6) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 5, in particular, part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, and , the decorative pattern production table 6, especially a part of the case where the winning result is a big hit). First, the first decorative design will be described in detail with respect to the modification 1 from the present embodiment. In the modification 2 from the present embodiment, the "special symbols" that are displayed during the variation of the first decorative symbol and that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo-continuous variation are "special symbol A" and " There are two types of "special pattern B". Here, the "special symbol A" is configured to be temporarily stopped from the first middle row temporary stop timing (even after this timing) in the pseudo continuous variation, while the "special symbol B" is a pseudo continuous variation. It is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the second middle row temporary stop timing in the fluctuation. Further, the specific number is configured so that a temporary stop can be made from the first middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo-continuous variation (even after this timing). That is, at the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, two types of "special symbol A" and the specific outcome can be temporarily stopped as the stop mode, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous variation At the temporary stop timing, as a stop mode, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are configured so that three types of specific numbers can be temporarily stopped. There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the second middle row temporary stop timing in the pseudo continuous variation than at the temporary stop timing. In this way, in the temporary stop timings in the middle row of the pseudo-continuous variation, the number of types of stop modes may be increased toward the second half of the temporary stop timings, or the number of types of stop modes may be increased toward the second half of the temporary stop timings. may be configured to reduce In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes increases as the temporary stop timing in the second half is reached, there is a stop mode with a high degree of expectation that the variation will be a big hit as a selection candidate type each time the pseudo variation is performed. It may be configured to be newly added, and by configuring in such a way, the player will pay attention each time the simulated variation is performed. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing in the second half is reached, a stop mode with a low expectation that the variation will be a big hit is selected as the type of selection candidate each time the pseudo variation is performed. It may be configured to be deleted, and with such a configuration, it is possible to guarantee the degree of expectation that the variation will be a big hit every time the pseudo variation is executed. In addition, since the second decorative pattern has the same configuration as that of Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment, at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation, the temporary stop timing can be temporarily stopped as the temporary stop timing is in the latter half. By increasing the number of stop modes, the player will pay attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stop mode at the time of the temporary stop, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(Modification 3 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two kinds of decorative patterns, a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern, are provided. state), or in a situation where it is difficult to see, the second decorative design is displayed (variable display), but the configuration using the second decorative design is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as modification example 3 from this embodiment, and only the modifications from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are steps 2232 (variant 3) to step 2236 (variant 3), step 2900 (variant 3), step 2246 (variant 3) and step 2248 (variant 3), that is, step 2204 At step 2232 (variant 3), after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the current game state is the probability variable game state. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2232 (variant 3), in step 2234 (variant 3), the design display content determining means SM21n sets the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to the probability variable display mode (during the probability variable gaming state display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed), and proceeds to step 2900 (variant 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2232 (variant 3), in step 2236 (variant 3), the design display content determination means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to the non-variable display mode ( The display mode of decorative symbols to be displayed during the non-probability variation gaming state) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variant 3). Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the display modes of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to be different depending on whether or not the probability variation gaming state, and the first decoration When the pattern display mode changes (for example, when the non-probability variable game state shifts to the probability variable game state), the display mode of the second decoration pattern is also changed along with the change. It should be noted that the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not limited to a configuration in which they differ only depending on whether the state is a variable probability game state. It may be configured so as to differ depending on which production (production stage) is.

Next, at step 2900 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n executes design stop design determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 2246 (Variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbols based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbols. Next, at step 2248 (variant 3), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbols based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbols, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the design stopping design determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variant 3) in FIG. 31 in the third modification from the present embodiment. First, at step 2902, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol stop symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the number of rounds to be executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum number of rounds ( In this example, it is determined whether or not 16R). In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to three "outline" designs (for example, "777") and Decide on one of the three sets of "black" patterns (for example, "444") (three sets of "white" patterns are selected) is 1:1 with the total allocation ratio selected), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design to three "black" designs (for example, "444"). One of them is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, three sets of "outline" symbols (for example, "777") are the maximum number of rounds (in this example, 16R) in the case of a special game. In other words, when three white symbols are stopped, it is almost certain (or certain) that the special game with the maximum number of rounds (in this example, 16R) will be executed. (which may be relatively more profitable for the player than a set of three "black" symbols).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2902, in step 2910, the design display content determination means SM1n determines the stop design of the first decorative design based on the information regarding the stop design of the main game design. Next, at step 2912, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop design of the second decorative design to a predetermined lost design (in this example, "345"), and the stop design of the second decorative design is only one pattern. ), and shifts to the next process {process of step 2246 (variant 3)}. It should be noted that the number of types of stop symbols of the second decorative design may not be limited to one pattern, but it is desirable that the number of types of stop designs of the first decorative design is smaller than that of the first decorative design. Further, the stop symbol when the second decorative symbol is lost is a predetermined missing symbol (in this example, "345"), while the stop symbol when the first decorative symbol is lost is selected from a plurality of candidates. (for example, randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), the frequency of stopping the predetermined losing symbol at the time of losing is higher for the second decorative symbol than for the first decorative symbol ( It may be configured such that a predetermined lost symbol does not stop as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol). In addition, for all the stoppable losing symbols of the second decorative symbols (for example, only one pattern of "375" may be used), when three of the same symbols are aligned, the highest value for the player is obtained in any game state. It may be configured such that at least one profitable symbol (eg, "7" symbol) is always included (eg, "375" and "276" may stop).

Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram relating to the display mode of the decorative design in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the modification example 3 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are changed depending on whether the gaming state is the non-probability varying gaming state or the probability varying gaming state. The display modes (in this example, display colors, display attributes such as color pattern, shape, size, etc.) are configured to be different. Specifically, in the non-probability variation gaming state, only the "7" pattern is displayed in "white" along with the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and all patterns other than "7" are " While it is configured to be displayed in "black" (becomes a non-variable display mode), when it is in the probability variation gaming state, "3" symbols and "7" symbols are displayed along with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in "white", and all the symbols other than "3" and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured such that the display mode can be different (probability variable display mode) depending on the game state. The condition that the display mode is different is not limited to whether it is in the probability variable game state, but it may be in the time reduction game state or not, and it is different depending on which background production (production stage) is being executed. It may be configured to allow In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can be changed depending on whether it is in the probability variable gaming state is the "3" symbol. It is included in a combination of predetermined losing symbols ("345" in this example) that causes the second decorative symbol to stop at the time of losing (becomes a stop symbol in the left column), and in a non-probability variable gaming state. , the stop symbols of the second decorative symbols at the time of loss are all displayed in "black", while in the probability variation gaming state, the stop symbols of the second decorative design at the time of loss are displayed in "white" from the left column. , “black”, and “black”. In this figure, the configuration is after comparison between the non-probability variation gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. There may be (the non-probability variable gaming state in this figure may be the non-time shortened gaming state, and the probability variable gaming state may be the time shortening gaming state), the non-time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variable gaming state and the time shortening game It may be a configuration after comparing the state and the probability variation gaming state (the non-probability variation gaming state in this figure is the non-time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state is the time shortening game state and probability variation game state). It should be noted that such replacement of comparison fitting is applicable to all configurations, such as any embodiment and modification of the present application.

Next, FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 (decorative symbol effect table 7, decorative symbol effect table 8) are the decorative symbol effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 7, especially part of the case where the win/loss result is a loss, And, it is an example of the decorative symbol production table 8, especially a part of the case where the hit/fail result is a big hit). The difference from the present embodiment is that the item of decorative design type is changed to display update type, and three items of "first decorative design", "second decorative design" and "transparent liquid crystal" are provided. In the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is configured to be able to execute a transparent effect, and during the period when the transparent effect is being executed, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but the second decorative pattern is displayed (see "33 seconds" of the display update timing).

Next, FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2327-1 (variant 3) and step 2327-2 (variant 3). In 1 (variant 3), the notice effect display control means SM24 performs a transparent effect (effect It is determined whether or not it is time to execute an effect in which the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. If Yes in step 2327-1 (variant 3), in step 2327-2 (variant 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). and transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2328. FIG. In addition, when the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent, and the state in which the accessories in the effect display device SG are driven can be visually recognized, and the first decorative pattern is displayed. is erased (becomes hidden), and the second decorative design is continuously displayed by the second decorative design display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, a pending number display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG (to the right when viewed from the player). By configuring in this way, the player can visually recognize the number of pending games even during execution of the transparent effect.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 2410 (variant 3), that is, after setting the command related to the big hit display in step 2408, or when the special game flag is on, step 2410 ( In Variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command (step (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2412 . Thus, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols are displayed even during execution of the special game. Whether or not the special game is being executed can be determined even during execution of the special game.

Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative pattern display device is provided on the far side (as seen from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light ( Light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), so that the second decorative pattern and the pending number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Further, by outputting light from the light source, it is possible to display effects in the display area SG10. The display of the second decorative symbol and the display area of the reserved number by the two decorative symbol display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG can be visually recognized. It should be noted that even during execution of the transparent effect, the effect display on the second decorative pattern display device is being executed, so that the player can visually recognize the effect. By configuring in this way, even in a situation where the transparent effect is being executed, the player can recognize the changing state of the decorative symbols and the number of reservations by visually recognizing the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device. Become. In addition, the display of the number of reservations may differ depending on the game state (for example, the first main game reservation number is displayed in the non-time reduction game state, and the display the second main game reserve number), the first main game reserve number and the second main game reserve number may always be displayed, or the sum of the first main game reserve number and the second main game reserve number may be configured to display the number of pending Note that the configuration for displaying effects in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the display area SG10 can be switched between a transmissive state and a non-transmissive state. (For example, light is output from the oblique rear of the display area, etc.), or a light guide plate (a transmissive plate-shaped member that vertically scatters light emitted from the light emitting element that enters from the side) is used. A display area (so-called edge-light type) in which display is performed through a display area, a display area made of an organic EL, or the like may be used. In addition, as an example of a configuration using a light guide plate, as seen from the player side, from the front side, "transmissive liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)", "light guide plate {arranged close to the transparent liquid crystal (approximately 5 mm), and the light guide plate A light source A for spreading light to the light guide plate is arranged near the outer periphery of the light guide plate}”, “Light source B constantly outputting light to the lower left of the display area SG10”, “role item”, “role When the light source C for emphasizing the object to be seen by the player is arranged in order, and a transmission effect is executed (when the player wants to emphasize the character to be seen by the player), the output of the light source A is turned OFF (light source The output of A may be reduced more than when the transparent effect is not executed), the output of the light source B and the light source C is turned ON, and the transparent effect is not executed (the player does not want to show the character to the player, and If you want to show the effect in the display area SG10 to the player), the output of the light source A and the light source B is turned on, and the output of the light source C is turned off may be configured). Further, the display of the second decorative design and the number of reserved display areas is not limited to the configuration of this example, for example, the second decorative design display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10) By , The second decorative pattern and the pending number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 by a mechanism similar to the mechanism in which the effect is displayed by outputting light from the light source toward the display area SG10, that is, Since the second decorative pattern display device substitutes for the light source, the second decorative pattern display device always outputs light even when the transmission performance is executed and the light source does not output the light, so that the second decorative pattern display device always outputs the light. And the display in the reserved number display area may be configured to be visible at all times (the light guide plate is used to prevent transmission of liquid crystal).

Next, FIG. 39 is an image diagram of execution of a transparent effect in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. In this example, the pseudo continuous variation is executed twice in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state) (Pseudo consecutive 2 variation) One symbol variation is performed. This is an example of a case where First, a certain decorative design (first decorative design and second decorative design) starts to change, and then the special design is temporarily stopped as the first middle row temporary stop design. After that, the variation of certain decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) is started again, and after that, the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of a certain decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) is started again, and the display area SG10 becomes a transparent state due to the execution of the transparent effect, and the back of the display area SG10 (game The player can visually recognize the state in which the accessory is driven (as viewed from the player). After that, the transparent effect is completed (the display area SG10 becomes non-transparent), and the accessory behind the display area SG10 (from the player's point of view) becomes invisible, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern is performed again. Visible (displayed). After that, in the case of losing, the first decorative design and the second decorative design stop at the losing design {the second decorative design stops at a predetermined losing design ("345"), and the first decorative design stops at the losing design. It is a combination of stop symbols that can be different from the losing symbol ("787")}. Also, in the case of a big hit, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped at the big winning design {the big winning design of the first decorative design and the big winning design of the second decorative design are the same combinations of stop designs. is going}. After that, a special game is executed, and even during execution of the special game, the second decorative symbols continue to be stop-displayed in the same jackpot pattern as when the special game is started. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special game, a transparent effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be set to a transparent state), for example, after the special game ends, the effect of informing whether or not the probability variable game state will be entered. By structuring so that the transparent effect can be executed immediately before execution, the player can increase the expectation of shifting to the probability variable game state after the end of the special game by visually recognizing the transparent effect. In addition, even if the transparent effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative pattern and the reserved number display area is maintained (because it is visible), so the progress of the game is not hindered. is configured as follows. As an example of display of decorative patterns during a special game, for example, during a special game, in order to inform the player which three decorative patterns are combined to form a big hit, only one pattern is displayed. (For example, if '777' results in a big hit, '7' is displayed), and when the transparent effect is executed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible, so that the aligned symbols are not visible to the player. may be configured to maintain the display of the second decorative symbol and the pending number display area even during the special game in order to make it recognizable.

With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state, and the character objects in the effect display device SG are visible. Even if the effect is executable and the first decorative pattern is hidden during execution of the transparent effect, the effect display in the second decorative pattern display device is executed, so the player can display the second decorative pattern. By visually recognizing the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the changing state of the decorative symbols and the number of reservations, so that the gaming machine can be made more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the end of the special game related to the entry into the first main game start port A10 and the game state transition distribution after the end of the special game related to the entry into the second main game start port B10 Different rates and different display attributes of decorative symbols (first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols) depending on whether or not the probability variable gaming state is present can suggest or notify the player of high profit. By making the number of types of symbols different, the game ball is more likely to enter the second main game start port B10 than the non-probability variable game state in which the game progresses by entering the game ball into the first main game start port A10. The number of types of display attributes of the jackpot pattern in which the transition to the probability variation gaming state is almost definite (or definite) after the special game ends is increased, and it is possible to appropriately suggest or inform the player whether or not the current game state is highly profitable for the player.

In addition, in the modification 3 from the present embodiment, regardless of the variation of either the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the The decorative symbols of the display attributes are variably displayed, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the variations of the first main game symbols and the decorative symbols corresponding to the variations of the second main game symbols are displayed (and display attributes) in common. (The display attributes and display areas of the decorative symbols are not differentiated between the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols).

(Second embodiment)
Here, in this embodiment, two kinds of decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are provided so that the result of the pattern fluctuation can be accurately recognized. can also be applied to a configuration that enables execution of Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 40 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is steps 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), the purpose of which is information to be referred to when determining the contents of the look-ahead effect. That is, in step 1308, after storing the first main game content determination random number, in step 1322 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 sets the flag of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. By referring to the area, it is determined whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1324 (second), in step 1326 (second), the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), the winning result and the stop symbol related to the stored suspension is determined in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting commands relating to the newly generated suspension validity result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999).

Next, in step 1330 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 predetermines the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group related to the suspension based on the suspension information (fluctuation mode determination random number) (variation mode determination random number). For mode random number delimiter information and variation mode groups, see main game table 3 in FIGS. 41 and 42), and move to step 1332 (second). If No in step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process proceeds to step 1332 (second). In the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1332 (second), the hold control means MJ30 issues a new hold command (a hold generation command for the first main game content determination random number, a command for variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) to the sub It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control section SM (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. FIG. Incidentally, when the symbol information is transmitted to the sub-side as in the second embodiment, the sub-side may execute an effect suggesting a big hit as the effect to be executed. It is desirable to have a structure capable of notifying the player of the stop symbol of the main game symbol that is the big hit (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the big hit).

Thus, in the second embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (first main game content determination random number or second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when suspension occurs), the variation mode random number separator information and the variation mode configured to determine a group;

In addition, at the timing when the suspension occurs, the main game content determination random number information, win/fail random number delimiter information, variation mode random number delimiter information, and variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side. Information to be transmitted to is not limited to this, information related to the stop pattern of the main game pattern, information related to the profit mode of the main game pattern that will be a big hit (number of special game rounds related to the main game pattern scheduled to be stopped, etc. ), the number of reservations immediately after winning the reservation (either the number of reservations on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side, or the number of reservations on both the first main game side and the second main game side) , etc. {The win/fail random number separator information is the respective game states on the first main game side (second main game side) and the random value (or random value range) And, it is one of the random number delimiter information grouped by linking the success or failure lottery result, for example, even if it is a probability fluctuation gaming state or a non-probability fluctuation gaming state, it is a loss, a probability fluctuation gaming state Even if it is in a non-probability variation gaming state, it is a win, and if it is in a non-probability variation gaming state, it is a win, but if it is in a non-probability variation gaming state, it is a loss.}.

Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1334 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game Determine whether the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (second), in step 1338 (second), the suspension control means MJ30, based on the suspension information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number), the winning result and the stop symbol related to the stored suspension is determined in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 sends the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command related to the newly generated suspension validity result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999).

Next, in step 1342 (second), the suspension control means MJ30 predetermines the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group related to the suspension based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number) (variation mode determination random number). For mode random number delimiter information and variation mode groups, see main game table 3 in FIGS. 32 and 33), and move to step 1344 (second). Next, in step 1344 (second), the hold control means MJ30 issues a new hold command (a hold generation command for the second main game content determination random number, a command for variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the next processing (processing of step 1400) is performed. .

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1334 (second), at step 1336 (second), the holding control means MJ30 determines that the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. Determine whether or not If Yes in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1338 (second).

In steps 1308 and 1318, the first main game content determination random number and the second main game content determination random number are stored. is stored, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers It is preferable to configure it so that other information such as value is not stored (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc.). to prevent it from being lost). In addition, regarding the success or failure lottery random number, the change in the game state (the change in the game state related to the already recorded suspension) from the acquisition of the success or failure lottery random number to the execution of the success or failure lottery related to the success or failure lottery random number Not only the change, but also the possibility that the game state will change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of execution of the lottery lottery related to the lottery random number is unpredictable). is configured to store the lottery random number until it is executed. In the second embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information can be transmitted only when the hold related to the first main game occurs in the non-time-reduced game state. is configured so that it can be transmitted only when a hold related to the second main game occurs, but regardless of whether it is a hold related to the first main game or a hold related to the second main game in any game state. In such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether or not to use the received command. Further, a specific example of the command relating to the win/fail result information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D000H: Lost if low probability, D001H: Losing if low probability, Win if high probability, D002H: Win both low probability and high probability". Yes, a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R probability odd hit, D101H: 16R probability non-variability hit, D102H: 2R probability odd hit", to the sub-main control unit SM A specific example of the command related to the variation pattern random number delimiter information to be transmitted is "D200H: delimiter 1, D201H: delimiter 2, D202H: delimiter 3".

Next, FIGS. 41 and 42 (main game table 3) are the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. is an example. The difference from the present embodiment is that the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information are provided. Random number delimiter information is determined, and the number of variation mode groups (the number of delimited random numbers) and the variation time and random value range of the variation mode group differ (for example, , the same group 1 can have different ranges of random numbers), and by transmitting variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the variation mode group corresponding to the game state can be changed to the sub side. is configured to be derivable by That is, when the game state transitions between when the suspension occurred and when the suspension was completed, the variation mode group scheduled when the suspension occurred and the variation mode group executed when the suspension was completed may differ. (For example, when the hold occurred, the variation mode group was scheduled to be Group 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state, but when the hold was completed, the time-reduced gaming state occurred, so the actual variation mode group became Group 2. However, regarding the variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned across all game states, when the sub-side receives the variation mode random number delimiter information (after that game state Without considering the transition), it is possible to normally execute the so-called pending look-ahead effect. In addition, the fluctuation mode random number division information in FIGS. Depending on whether the state is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state, it is configured to form different variation mode random number division information, but is not limited to this, and whether it is a variation on the first main game side. One variation mode random number division including whether it is a variation on the second main game side, whether the winning lottery result is a win or a loss, and whether the game state is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state. It may be configured to form information. In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortened game state, which is an irregular symbol variation, the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time shortened game state The content of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short-time variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of holds (for example, the variation time is all five seconds or longer). In addition, the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2003 (second). Based on the information received from the control board M side), the number of reservations (for example, the drawing reservation reservation counter value) is restored. In addition, the information related to the effect being executed and the prefetch effect will not be restored (because the information related to the contents of the hold will not be resent from the main side), and the "preparing" screen will be displayed until the next change starts. . With this configuration, when a power failure occurs when the background effect is the "angel zone background", which will be described later, the information stored on the sub side is lost. After the return of , there is no information indicating that the trigger is pending, and the background effect is changed from the "angel zone background" to another background effect (background effect such as a flat stage, which will be described later). As a result, even if there is a discrepancy between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to power interruption (for example, due to noise at the time of power interruption or recovery from power interruption). Also, it is possible to avoid a situation where the main side is fluctuating with low expectations, while the sub side executes zone effects with high expectations. It should be noted that the processing after power failure recovery is not limited to this. It may be configured to maintain the "Angel Zone Background". In the case of such a configuration, for example, an evacuation area is provided on the sub side so that information can be maintained even during a power outage, and in the event of a power outage, the information related to the performance is backed up in the evacuation area, and the power outage is restored. It may be configured to restore backed-up information from time to time. In addition, it may be configured to receive again the information related to the contents of the hold from the main side at the time of restoration from power failure, the start of fluctuation, the stop of fluctuation, and the occurrence of hold (also for hold other than the newly generated hold). {Although not particularly shown in this example, when the power is restored, only the information related to the number of holds is transmitted from the main side (information related to the content of the hold is not transmitted) . Therefore, the information related to the hold that existed at the time of the power failure does not exist after the power is restored, so the pre-reading effect cannot be executed for the hold. (It may be configured to receive information related to and execute a prefetch effect for the hold). It should be noted that if power interruption occurs during the fluctuation of the decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), if there is no function to maintain the information at the time of power interruption, the main side A black screen (for example, a screen displaying "preparing", etc.) is displayed until the end command is received}. In the second embodiment, switching the background effect to display the "angel zone background" may be referred to as shifting to the "angel zone". Note that power failure recovery may be referred to as power recovery, recovery from power failure, or the like.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are steps 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second) and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104 At step 2120 (second step), after adding 1 to the drawing reservation counter, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 receives the new reservation correctness result and stop pattern information transmitted from the main control board M side. is temporarily stored in the book binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the design pending information display control means SM22, based on the pending generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, the pending information (in particular, the variation mode group, the variation mode random number , etc.) are temporarily stored in the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. In addition, if the information related to the win/fail result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information is not transmitted from the main side, in step 2120 (second) or step 2122 (second), This information will not be temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, at step 2124 (second), the binding reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new reservation is the reservation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the binding reservation information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and step 2126 (second). transition to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the binding reservation information display control means SM22 executes second main game winning time look-ahead determination processing described later, and step 2126 (second 2).

Next, in step 2126 (second), the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b to see if the new pending is trigger pending. It is determined whether or not (information indicating that the trigger is pending is added in step 2576 or step 2622). If Yes at step 2126 (second), at step 2650 (second), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes prefetch pending content determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2118 . On the other hand, if No in step 2126 (second), the process proceeds to step 2118 as well.

On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the design reservation counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the design reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information related to the design variation (especially, the success/failure result, stop design information, (variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information) are deleted from the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, the remaining reservation information is shifted, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. This process will be described by dividing it into two processes, ie, the process related to the prefetch lottery prohibition condition and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the former prefetching lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2552, the pending prefetching effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game pending (first main game pending) It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is digested with priority over the game side. In the case of Yes at step 2552, at step 2554, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2554, at step 2558, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and if there is a pending having information indicating trigger pending in the pending. Determine whether or not there is Here, the trigger suspension is a suspension of winning the prefetching lottery at the time of winning (first prefetching lottery at the time of winning the first main game, prefetching lottery at the time of the second main game winning). In the case of Yes at step 2558, at step 2560, the suspension look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the design suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not there is a suspension prior to the new suspension that will result in a big hit. determine whether If Yes at step 2560 , go to step 2562 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery processing, first, in step 2562, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new pending is a big hit pending. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k executes a win-time prefetch lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new pending, Go to step 2574 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562, in step 2568, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the new pending variation mode group is group 3. determine whether As described above, in the second embodiment, when determining whether or not a prefetch lottery can be executed, it is configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode group. Incidentally, when determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes at step 2568, at step 2570, the suspension lookahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a win-time lookahead lottery for the new suspension with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example), Go to step 2574 . On the other hand, if step 2568 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2574 .

Next, at step 2574, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determining means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery is won. In the case of Yes at step 2574, at step 2576, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k puts "trigger pending" in the new hold that has been won in the prefetch lottery at the time of winning in the temporary storage means SM22b for the design reserve information. The information to the effect that it exists is added and temporarily stored, and the next process {process of step 2126 (second)} is performed.

On the other hand, if No at step 2552 (if there is a second main game hold in the hold), at step 2578, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores the binding hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" from the information related to the stored hold (if there is no hold that has information to the effect that it is a trigger hold, this process is not executed and the next ), and then to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. Incidentally, even if No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}. In addition, in the processing of step 2578, when there is (occurs) a hold on the second main game side, in a gaming machine with a preferential completion of the second main game side as in the second embodiment, the newly generated second Since the hold on the main game side is consumed first, it is not possible to change the planned order of variation, and this is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which a look-ahead effect over a plurality of variations is not normally executed. In addition, as a prohibition condition for the look-ahead lottery, the condition that there is no hold of a specific variation mode group (or hold of a specific variation mode random number delimiter information) in the hold before the new hold is set as a prohibition condition good too.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flow chart of the second main game win time look-ahead determination process relating to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. This process will be described by dividing it into two processes, ie, the process related to the prefetch lottery prohibition condition and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2602, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether the current game state is the time reduction game state. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and if there is a suspension having information indicating that it is a trigger suspension in the suspension. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes at step 2604, at step 2606, the suspension look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not there is a suspension that will result in a big hit in the suspension before the new suspension. determine whether If Yes at step 2606 , go to step 2608 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery processing, first, in step 2608, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new pending is a big hit pending. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes at step 2608, at step 2610, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k, for the new hold, a predetermined probability (with a probability lower than the winning rate of the look-ahead lottery when winning the first main game for the big hit hold) Yes, in this example, a win-time look-ahead lottery that wins at 1/5) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the pending look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new pending variation mode group is group C. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether the new hold is performed with a predetermined probability (with a probability lower than the winning rate of the prefetch lottery when winning the first main game for the lost hold). Yes, in this example, a win-time look-ahead lottery that wins on 1/15) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620 . On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process proceeds to step 2620 as well.

Next, at step 2620, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k determines whether or not the win-time look-ahead lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2620, at step 2622, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k puts "trigger pending" in the new hold that has won the win-time look-ahead lottery in the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information to the effect that it exists is added and temporarily stored, and the next process {process of step 2126 (second)} is performed. Note that even if No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2126 (second) process}.

As described above, in the second embodiment, both when the new hold becomes a big hit and when it becomes a loss, the prefetch lottery for the hold on the first main game side is more than the prefetch lottery for the hold on the second main game side. The lottery is easier to win (predictive lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a big hit reservation = 1/3>predictive lottery when the second main game hold is a big hit reservation Winning rate = 1/5, Prefetching lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a losing hold = 1/10 > Prefetching lottery winning rate when the second main game hold is a big hit hold = 1 /15). By configuring in this way, even in the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as a look-ahead effect, the "special symbol" related to the first main game side appears more than the "special symbol" related to the second main game side. It's getting easier.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flow chart of the prefetch suspension content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2652, the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger pending is a big hit pending. In the case of Yes at step 2652, at step 2654, the binding pending information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the pending trigger by referring to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit), and then proceeds to the next process (step 2118). processing). On the other hand, if No at step 2652, at step 2656, the display mode of the pending trigger is determined by referring to the pending display mode determination table (when lost), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a pending display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) and a pending display mode determination table (at the time of losing). In the second embodiment, the types of display modes that can be selected when determining the display mode of trigger suspension that can change when performing a suspension change effect with reference to the table for determining a pending display mode (at the time of a big hit) are rainbow color, There are four of red, green, and blue, and the types of display modes that can be selected when making a determination with reference to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of failure) are three of red, green, and blue, and pending display. A lottery is drawn using a random number exclusively for mode determination. In addition, red is most likely to be selected when referring to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and blue is most likely to be selected at the time of referring to the pending display mode determination table (at the time of losing). The expectation level of the jackpot for each display mode of the reservation when is occurred (expectation to hit the jackpot due to the pattern change related to the reservation) is selected only when the rainbow color is a big hit, and the color other than the rainbow color is the expectation level Red, green, and blue are in order from the highest. It should be noted that the changeable display mode is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the types are increased or decreased, or the changeable colors are changed. In addition, in this example, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by the display color of the pending, but it is not limited to this, for example, in the case of a big hit (or together with the expectation of a big hit ), it may be configured to suggest the game state after execution of the special game. In such a configuration, especially during the probability variable gaming state, the display color of the suspension suggests the degree of expectation for shifting to the probability variable gaming state after the execution of the special game in the case of a big win in the suspension. (For example, if the reserved display color is red, the probability variation expectation is high, if it is blue, the probability variation expectation is low, etc.) By configuring so, it is possible to determine whether the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player continues or ends. It is possible to execute an inciting and effective production.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the pending change effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit can differ depending on the display mode selected from a plurality of types of pending display modes. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of suspension change performances during execution of the look-ahead performance (from the timing of winning the look-ahead lottery to the end of the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the trigger suspension). In this way, for example, when the pending change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, if the display mode of the pending change in the first pending change effect is blue, the second time The display mode of the suspension that changes in the suspension change performance is changed to green or red, that is, each time the suspension change performance is executed, the display mode changes (ranks up) to the suspension display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. It is desirable to configure it so that it will go (in order not to impair the player's sense of expectation). In addition, the production related to the pending display change is not limited to this, and as a result, a production mode that does not involve the pending display change may be provided. An effect mode (so-called false pattern) in which an effect occurs and the pending display does not change as it is, and an effect mode in which the pending display change is executed after that may be provided.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is about step 2206 (second) and step 2250 (second), the purpose of which is to stop the first decorative pattern (including temporary stop), especially the above-mentioned " To change a factor for determining a "special pattern" (that is, a pattern that does not mean a big win, but foretells that a big win may occur later). That is, in step 2204, after the pattern content determination permission flag is turned on, in step 2206 (second), the design display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n). refers to the symbol information (variation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the contents of the design variation, and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. {For example, when the variation mode related to the main game pattern is a short-time variation, non-reach, and when it is a long-time variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. (and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), and the process proceeds to step 2208.

Also, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative design effect and setting the display update timing and the display update contents, in step 2250 (second), the design display content determination means SM21n performs the advance notice effect/decoration, which will be described later. A drawing stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218 . That is, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (including the time of temporary stop) is determined by the advance notice effect/design stop symbol determination process, which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flow chart of the notice effect/design stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2252, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the change is related to trigger hold. If Yes at step 2252, at step 2254, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 2260, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "special notice effect candidates". Here, the "special notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is the "angel zone background" described later. Next, at step 2262, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stopped symbol (temporary stopped symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information about the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable that the aforementioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. In the case of "background" (that is, the state where the existence of a reservation with a high degree of expectation for a big hit has already been notified), the above-mentioned "special pattern" (that is, although it does not mean a big win, a big win can occur after that) This is because if the symbols foreseeing the above are stopped and displayed, similar information will be reported twice, which may lead to an incomprehensible effect for the player.

On the other hand, if No at step 2252, at step 2256, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. If Yes at step 2256, at step 2258, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the angel zone entering flag is off. If Yes at step 2258 , go to step 2264 . On the other hand, if No in step 2258 , go to step 2260 .

Next, at step 2264, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "normal notice effect candidates". Here, the "normal notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is other than the "angel zone background" described later. Next, at step 2266, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 2268, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stationary symbol in the middle row of the first decorative symbol to be the "special symbol", and based on the information regarding the stationary symbol of the main game symbol, the first decorative symbol is displayed. Designs to be temporarily stopped on the left and right columns are determined (symbols different from those on the left and right columns are temporarily stopped), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2218).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2256, in step 2270, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the variation mode group of the variation is group 3. In addition to being excluded from the lottery of the angel zone transition lottery described later, the change related to the hold of Group 3 who did not win the look-ahead lottery (the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning) (did not become a trigger hold) will be subject to lottery}. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines that the variation is a pseudo-continuous variation (a variation in which the pseudo-variation is executed at least once; in this example, FIGS. 21 and 22 show examples). A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) is determined as a variation to be executed. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the announcement effect display control means SM24 selects an angel zone transition lottery (changing the background effect to or not) is executed. Next, at step 2276, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transfer lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2276, at step 2278, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from "normal notice effect candidates →special notice effect candidates after the special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, in FIG. 21). In the case of A-1 and A-2, until 14 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the content of the notice effect is determined from the "normal notice effect candidate", and after 14 seconds from the start of the change, which is the first middle row temporary stop timing , determine the content of the notice effect from the "candidates for the special notice effect"). Next, at step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the main game symbol for the first time (the first time in the pseudo-continuous variation) to the "special symbol" (the background effect is changed to the angel zone). (decorative pattern that informs the player that the stop mode), and shift to the next process (process of step 2218). Incidentally, the temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous variation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol.

On the other hand, if No at step 2270, step 2272 or step 2276, at step 2282, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the "normal notice effect candidates". Next, at step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (the process of step 2218). ).

In the second embodiment, in step 2274, an angel zone transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not the transition to the variable angel zone is possible (the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle of the variation is set as a "special symbol", and the special symbol is selected). Whether or not to shift to the angel zone with the temporary stop as a trigger) is determined, but it is not limited to this, and the combination of the first pseudo-continuous pattern (first middle row temporary stop pattern) and the notice effect A plurality of candidates may be provided, and at the time of pseudo continuous variation, the combination of the pseudo consecutive symbols and the advance notice effect may be determined from among the combination candidates. Specifically, as the combination candidates, "pseudo-continuous pattern A, notice effect 1", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect 2", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect 3", "pseudo-consecutive pattern A, notice effect" Effect 4”, “Special pattern, notice effect 1” and “Special pattern, notice effect 2” are provided, and six combination candidates are provided. It may be configured such that when the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the advance notice effect in which the symbol is the "special symbol" is selected, the transition to the angel zone is made during the fluctuation. Incidentally, the method of determining the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advance notice effect is not limited to the case of the pseudo-continuous variation, and may be used in the case of other variation modes as well. Further, the combination is not limited to the pseudo-continuous pattern and the advance notice effects, and may include background effects, sound modes, and the like.

In addition, as a method of determining the notice effect, the basic notice effect of the notice effect (executable notice effect regardless of the background effect being executed, effect to be executed in the first half of the fluctuation, etc.) was decided first. After that, based on the determined basic notice effect, decide the effect that is not the notice effect such as background effect, execute the decided effect (notice effect, background effect, etc.), and then decide An undetermined effect of the advance notice effects may be determined based on the basic advance notice effects and the effects other than the advance notice effects such as the determined background effects (the determination method may be repeated a plurality of times). , may be configured to determine all of the advance notice effects to be executed in the variation). By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the notice effect to be executed with the variation at a plurality of timings, and all the notice effects to be executed with the variation are determined at one timing. Defects and the like in production can be reduced. In this example, (1) "fixed stop": the fixed stop is executed after a temporary stop, and if the pattern combination that is fixed and stopped is a big hit (three of the same pattern are aligned), the game shifts to a special game. (2) “Temporary stop”: Temporary stop is executed before fixed stop (for example, shaking fluctuation), and once Pseudo-variation can be executed by temporarily stopping in the middle of the fluctuation in the design fluctuation and then changing again, (3) If the "special design" is displayed during the execution of the look-ahead effect, the "special design" is fixed as a stop. It is configured not only to be displayed, but also to be displayed as a temporary stop before final stop. Also, in this example, fixed stop and final stop are synonymous, and "stop" is used for both fixed stop and temporary stop. , and the stop design in the variation of the decorative design is used for both the temporary stop design and the fixed stop design (if the stop design of the decorative design is "777", etc., the stop design = It is a fixed stop pattern).

Here, the lower part of the same figure is an image diagram showing an example of the notice effect/arrangement stop design display. As shown in the upper part of the same image diagram, in this example, when transitioning to the angel zone in the change, the normal background effect (an example of the background effect that is not the angel zone background effect) is being executed as the background effect, The "special symbol" is stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. Also, with the temporary stop of the "special symbol" as a trigger, an angel zone background effect is executed as a background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In this example, the case of a big hit is exemplified, but the background effect is similarly switched even in the case of a loss {in this case, the temporary stop of the "special pattern" is The decorative pattern may be a loose pattern (different pattern), but it may not be (the same pattern) (=the "special pattern" may be temporarily stopped after reach)}.

Also, as shown in the middle of the same image diagram, in this example, when other pseudo-continuous fluctuations without transition to the angel zone are performed (when the angel zone transition lottery is not won), the normal background effect is used as the background effect is being executed, the first middle row temporary stop symbol is "pseudo continuous symbol A" (different from the "special symbol", a temporary stop symbol that informs the player that the pseudo continuous variation is being executed. ) temporarily stops. Next, even after the "pseudo continuous symbol A" is temporarily stopped, the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped.

Also, as shown in the lower part of the same image diagram, in this example, under the circumstances where the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, if the winning lottery is won, the change will stop when the fluctuation is stopped. As a pattern, the missing pattern (separate eyes) stops. After that, the next variation is started, and the "special symbol" is stopped as the stop symbol of the variation (that is, the variation is the pre-reading angel zone entry variation). Next, when the "special symbol" stops, the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect from the next change (that is, the next change is the first change in the look-ahead zone). In this example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol variation related to the suspension scheduled to be consumed before the trigger suspension, it is not temporarily stopped except for the fixed stop (previous temporary stop). (It is not used when changing again after temporarily stopping as a stop symbol of pseudo fluctuation). That is, in the symbol variation related to the suspension scheduled to be consumed before the trigger suspension, the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension from "the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped → the pseudo variation is executed and the symbol variation becomes a loss" It cannot be done until the Angel Zone background is displayed. Thus, in the second embodiment, the angel zone background effect is executed with the stop (or temporary stop) of the "special symbols" as a trigger, so that the player can stop the "special symbols". (or temporary stop), it is possible to recognize that it will move to the angel zone, and not only when the fluctuation stops (when the stop is related to the confirmation display), but also at the time of the temporary stop during fluctuation It is possible to have a sense of anticipation for the stop (or temporary stop) of the "symbol".

As shown in the figure, when the "special symbol" stops as a temporary stop symbol during pseudo continuous fluctuation, the same number on the left column and the right column stops (temporary stop) (at the time of reach (Same as the stop mode) On the other hand, when the "special pattern" stops as the final stop pattern of the next change after winning the prefetch lottery, different numbers (discrete eyes) in the left and right columns are configured to stop. there is

Next, FIG. 50 is a flow chart of background effect control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, after setting "angel zone background" as the background effect in step 2504, in step 2506 (second), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines the variation (a part of pseudo-continuous variation) that triggered the transition to the "Angel Zone" (or related change) {The change that triggered the transition of the "Angel Zone" (or the change related to the hold) is the change related to the trigger hold, or the change related to the change angel zone transition} has ended or not. judge. If Yes in step 2506 (second), go to step 2508 ; if No, go to step 2520 .

With the configuration as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern as the decorative patterns, and is configured to be capable of executing a so-called reserved look-ahead effect. When the "special symbol" is stop-displayed as the first decorative symbol, a background change effect indicating that the degree of expectation for transition to the special game increases is executed. Then, regarding the hold that is the order of digestion before the hold (trigger hold) that triggers the hold look-ahead effect, the "special design" is stopped and displayed as a fixed stop design when the design of the first decorative design changes at the time of digestion of the hold. Therefore, the significance of the stop display of the "special symbol" in this case is that "symbol variation has ended" and "the degree of expectation for transition to the special game has increased". On the other hand, regarding the trigger hold, when the pattern of the first decorative pattern fluctuates at the time of digestion of the hold, the "special design" can be stop-displayed as a temporary stop design. , ``symbol fluctuation re-fluctuation'' and ``expectation for shift to special game increased''. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the same kind of "special symbols" have different meanings depending on the timing (or situation) when they are stopped and displayed. It can be done.

In addition, in the second embodiment, regarding the hold that is in the order of digestion before the trigger hold, when the pattern of the first decorative pattern changes at the time of digestion of the hold, the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop symbol. , Regarding the trigger hold, when the pattern of the first decorative pattern fluctuates at the time of digestion of the hold, the "special pattern" is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop pattern, and the "special pattern" is the same type. However, it is not limited to this, and the "special design" in the former case may be set to "special design A", and the "special design" in the latter case may be set to "special design B". By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the meaning of the stop display of the "special symbols" in both. Also, the probability of displaying the "special symbol" in the former case may be lower than the probability of displaying the "special symbol" in the latter case.

Also, in this example, the number of symbol rows for the first and second decorative symbols is three, and the number of effective lines is one. Triggered by the stop of the symbol row and/or the effective line increases (for example, the effective line becomes 9 lines) (2) Triggered by the stop of the "special symbol", the symbol row and/or the effective line The number of lines decreases (for example, the number of symbol rows becomes two, and one symbol stops, resulting in a reach state, and the number of symbol rows becomes one. It is almost definite (or definite) that it is a hit. , and after that, the difference in the profit rate given to the player is notified by the type of symbol that is stopped and displayed).

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, depending on the timing (or situation) when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed, the "special symbol" has a different meaning. It is possible to create even more novel production methods by enhancing the interlocking with. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as modification 1 from the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 51 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the modification 1 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2220 (second modification 1) to step 2224 (second modification 1). The content of the effect in 3 is configured to be associated with the changed display mode. That is, in step 2216, after determining the content of the decorative design effect and setting the display update timing and display update content, in step 2220 (second variation 1), the design pending information display control means SM22 outputs the design pending information. By referring to the temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the suspension display mode related to the change is a dedicated effect display mode (specific suspension display mode different from other suspension display modes, red in this example). do. In the case of Yes in step 2220 (second variation 1), in step 2222 (second variation 1), the announcement effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the announcement effect from the "dedicated announcement effect candidates". Here, the "dedicated advance notice effect candidate" is a effect candidate that is selected only in the change related to suspension of the dedicated effect display mode (in this example, red) that is a specific suspension display mode. , a configuration in which a battle effect with a specific enemy character is executed. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation related to the "dedicated notice effect candidate" is configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is relatively high compared to the other notice effect candidates. Next, at step 2223 (second variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, at step 2224 (second variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, and step 2218. transition to If No in step 2220 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2250 (second). Here, if the configuration is made so that the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the reserved display mode is a dedicated effect display mode and the first decorative symbol is displayed. It is possible to further enhance interlocking with the fact that the "special symbol" is likely to be selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol).

By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment, as the notice effect candidate, the reserved effect display mode (red in this example), which is a specific reserved display mode, is displayed. At the time of execution of a pending change effect (a effect in which the pending display mode changes) based on the winning of the pre-reading lottery, , it is possible to provide a notice effect that is executed only when the change to a specific hold display mode is performed, and by increasing the expectation of a big hit when the effect is executed, the player can expect a hold when the hold changes. Attention is paid to the display color (holding change execution mode), and the amusement of the game is enhanced. Further, in the modification 1 from the second embodiment, the effect to be executed by the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension is not determined when the trigger suspension occurs, but is determined when the trigger suspension is completed. By configuring in this way, "trigger suspension occurs → suspension display mode is determined and displayed in that display mode → trigger suspension is canceled → suspension display related to trigger suspension Based on the aspect, the effect to be executed in the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension can be determined. It should be noted that there is no problem in applying the configuration related to the pending digestion transfer image, which will be described later, to Modification 1 from the second embodiment.

In addition, in the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, a pending change effect is executed as a so-called pending look-ahead effect, and when the pending display mode becomes a dedicated effect display mode (red in this example), the notice effect content is configured to be selected from the "dedicated notice effect candidates", but the suspension change effect is executed at the timing when the "special symbol" as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol is stopped. and the stop of the "special design" may be further linked, for example, as the "special design", "special design A" and "special design B" are provided, In this case, the suspension change performance may be changed to a suspension display mode other than red, and when the "special symbol B" stops, the suspension change performance may be changed to a red suspension display mode. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to further enhance the linkage between the so-called reservation look-ahead effect and the "special symbol".

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, it is configured to further enhance the linkage between the so-called pending look-ahead effect and the "special symbol". An example of such a configuration is Modification 2 from the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 52 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the modification 2 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250(1) (second modification 2) and step 2250(2) (second modification 2), the purpose of which is To control to change the selection rate of "special symbols" depending on whether the symbol variation is on the game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. That is, in step 2216, after determining the contents of the decorative design effect and setting the display update timing and display update contents, in step 2226 (second variation 2), the design display contents determination means SM21n temporarily stores the main side information. With reference to the means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (second variant 2), in step 2250 (1) (second variant 2), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the first main game notice effect and design stop pattern, which will be described later. Execute the process and move to step 2218 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (second variant 2), in step 2250 (2) (second variant 2), the design display content determining means SM21n causes the second main game notice effect and design stop, which will be described later. A pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218 .

Next, FIG. 53 shows the first main game announcement effect/arrangement stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (1) (second modification 2) in FIG. 52 in modification example 2 from the second embodiment. is a flow chart. The processing of this subroutine is the same as the notice effect/design stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), so the description is omitted. In the second embodiment, the same process is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side. The purpose is to execute separate processes on the first main game side and the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 54 shows the second main game announcement effect/arrangement stop symbol determination process related to the subroutine of step 2250 (2) (second modification 2) in FIG. 52 in the modification 2 from the second embodiment. is a flow chart. Since the processing of this subroutine is similar to the notice effect/design stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), only the differences from this processing will be described in detail. Step 2250 (second) differs from the notice effect/design stop symbol determination process in step 2286 (second change 2) and step 2288 (second change 2). If there is no trigger pending in step 2286 (second variation 2), the announcement effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is the change related to group C. Determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 2286 (second variation 2), at step 2272, the announcement effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether the variation is a pseudo-continuous variation. determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (second variation 2), the announcement effect display control means SM24 sets a predetermined probability (1 A lottery for moving to the angel zone, which is less than /10, and in this example, 1/30), is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2276 . If No in step 2286 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2282 .

With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery (pseudo The "special pattern" is temporarily stopped by continuous variation, and the winning probability of the lottery of whether or not the angel zone background is displayed as a background effect is different, so that the pattern variation on the first main game side is different. It is possible to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" in the first decorative symbol depending on whether it is a symbol variation on the side of the second main game. By differentiating the accompanying performance tendency and the performance tendency accompanying the pattern variation on the second main game side, the range of the performance can be widened and the interest in the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, in the modification 2 from the second embodiment, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the second main game hold cannot become a trigger hold. Suspension look-ahead effect for the suspension of the game side is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time-reduced game state, compare the appearance rate of "special symbols" related to the pending look-ahead effect on the first main game side and the appearance rate of "special symbols" related to the pending look-ahead effect on the second main game side. However, the appearance rate is different (higher on the first main game side). Furthermore, as described above, the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the "special symbol" in the pseudo continuous variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. ("Special symbols" are temporarily stopped with a higher probability in response to symbol fluctuations on the first main game side), and the likelihood of trigger suspension is also on the first main game side. , depends on whether the hold is on the second main game side (the hold on the first main game side is more likely to be the trigger hold), so the trigger hold occurs → the hold that is completed before the trigger hold At the time of digestion, the "special pattern" is confirmed and displayed (so-called pending look-ahead effect is executed) → When the trigger hold is digested, the "special pattern" is temporarily stopped (so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed). It is also possible to configure the probability of occurrence of the series of effects to be higher on the first main game side than on the second main game side. In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the pseudo continuous variation in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol and the pseudo continuity in the symbol variation related to the second main game symbol The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the variation, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as a look-ahead effect in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol When comparing the difference with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation, the difference related to the pseudo-continuous variation (the former difference) is smaller.

In addition, in this example, (1) the first main game side and the second main game side may have the same selection probability (appearance rate) of "special symbols", and (2) the holding of a big hit is possible. When it exists in the second main game reserve, the "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect does not appear due to the fluctuation of the second main game symbol. (4) In the case of a big hit variation of the second main game symbol, a "special symbol" related to pseudo-continuous variation may appear. (5) "special symbols" related to pseudo-continuous variations appear or are likely to appear in the case of a big hit variation of the first main game symbols. In addition, in the modification 2 from the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is configured to appear both during the look-ahead effect and during the pseudo-continuous change, but the "special symbol A" can appear only during the look-ahead effect. "Special symbol" and "Special symbol B" are regarded as "special symbols" that can appear only at the time of pseudo continuous variation. It may be configured such that "special symbol A" does not appear in variation, and "special symbol B" has a low appearance rate in variation of the second main game symbol.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, as a so-called pending look-ahead effect, the background change effect and the pending change effect are configured to be executable, but by changing the execution mode of the pending look-ahead effect, a new playability is created. Is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as Modified Example 3 from the second embodiment, and only the modified points from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2700 (second variant 3) and step 2750 (second variant 3). In the second variation 3), the sub control board S executes a pending display mode change control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2750 (second variation 3), the sub control board S executes pending digestion transmission image display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2300 .

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 55 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (second variation 3), the purpose of which is to notify that a certain hold is being digested (symbols are changing) at the time of digestion of a certain hold. image can be displayed. That is, in step 2112, after subtracting 1 from the design reservation counter value, in step 2130 (second variation 3), the design reservation information display control means SM22 displays the reservation information related to the design variation (in particular, the display mode and variation mode group information) to "suspended digestion transmission image information" temporarily stored (overwritten and stored) in the preliminary announcement effect-related information temporary storage means SM24b as information relating to the "holding consumption transmission image" to be continuously displayed even after consumption), and the process proceeds to step 2128 (second). do. In addition, in the modification 3 from the second embodiment, the second main game win look-ahead determination process is deleted (the look-ahead lottery is executed only on the first main game side).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second modification 3) of FIG. 56 in modification example 3 from the second embodiment. Here, this process will be described by dividing it into two processes, ie, the process related to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the processing related to the former prefetch lottery prohibition condition, first, in step 2580, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the temporary storage means SM22b for the pending prefetch effect, and the new pending is the second main game. It is determined whether or not it is a hold (a hold that is prioritized over the first main game hold). In the case of Yes at step 2580, at step 2582, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2584, at step 2586, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the pending variation mode group before the new hold becomes group 1. (There is no hold that will result in a big hit before the new hold, hold that can be a long variable time, or trigger hold). If Yes at step 2584 , go to step 2586 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery processing, first, in step 2586, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new pending variation mode group is Determine whether or not it is Group 3 {Variation related to the hold whose variation mode group is Group 3, even if the number of holds at the start of the change is large (for example, the number of holds is 2 or 3) , a relatively long fluctuation time}. In the case of Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, if the hold is a big hit hold, the probability is 2/3, and if the hold is a loss hold, the probability is 1/8). A prefetching lottery is executed when winning a prize. Next, at step 2590, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determining means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2590, at step 2591, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds information to the effect that it is "trigger pending" to the new hold that has won the win-time look-ahead lottery, and displays the hold. The mode is determined to be "yellow block reservation", and stored in the temporary storage area of temporary storage information for layout reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the prefetching lottery at the time of winning, and the display mode of the hold can be different from the display mode of the normal hold. Next, in step 2592, the pending look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether the new hold (trigger hold) is appropriate or not, and based on the number of holds at the present time, a hold change plan ( For example, the production execution plan (e.g., change to green block reservation at the start of the next fluctuation, change to red block reservation at the start of the next fluctuation, etc.) is determined, and stored in the temporary storage area of the temporary storage means SM22b, The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2580 (when the new suspension is the second main game suspension), in step 2596, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores in the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" from the information related to the first main game hold that is being held (If there is no hold that has the information that it is a trigger hold in the hold, this process is executed and proceed to the next process), change the pending display mode to "normal pending" (for example, white pending) and store it in the pending information temporary storage area of the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, step 2594 transition to It should be noted that if step 2582 , step 2584 , step 2586 or 2590 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2594 .

Next, at step 2594, the pending look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines the pending display mode of the new hold to be "normal hold" (for example, white hold), It is stored in the pending information temporary storage area, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118). Here, in the processing of steps 2596 and 2594, when there is (occurs) a hold on the side of the second main game, in a gaming machine with preferential completion of the second main game side as in this example, the newly occurred Since the hold on the second main game side is consumed first, it is not in the order of change that was planned, and the prefetch effect over multiple changes (for example, the hold display mode change effect based on the hold change plan) is not executed normally. This is a configuration to avoid

Next, FIG. 58 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 55 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are Step 2208 (Second Variation 3), Step 2222 (Second Variation 3) to Step 2226 (Second Variation 3) and Step 2228 (Second Variation 3), that is, In step 2206 (second), after determining the variation mode of the first decorative pattern, in step 2208 (second variation 3), design display content determination means SM21n (and notice effect display content determination means SM24n, ready-to-win effect display) The content determination means SM25n) refers to the design variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol {for example, when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, non- In the case of reach, long-time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach performance related information temporary storage means SM25b). Temporarily store. Next, at step 2216, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the winning/failure result of the main game symbols and the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, determine the details of the decorative design performance by referring to the decorative design performance table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design performance table 1 to the decorative design performance table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the design variation details, The display update timing and display update contents are set and temporarily stored in the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2222 (second variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n randomly determines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variation. Here, as shown in the illustration of the content of the notice on the right side of the figure, in this example, the contents of the notice effect that can be executed are configured to differ depending on the image (so-called stay stage) set as the background effect. The content lottery for the announcement effect to be executed may be executed based on an appropriate random number obtained by the sub-main control section SM, the result of the change, winning symbols, change time, and the like. Here, the content of the notice effect marked with a star in the same image diagram is the specific notice effect in this example, and is configured so that different specific notice effects can be executed based on the stay stage (specific notice effect will be explained later in the process). Also, the contents of the notice effect (in this example, the effect that can be executed before the ready-to-win effect etc.) are not limited to this. (In that case, the pending digestion transmission image described later in the pseudo-continuous effect and the display mode of the suspension may be changed, and the pending digestion transmission image described later may be changed by the advance notice effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect. (You may change the display mode of

Next, at step 2224 (second variation 3), the layout display content determining means SM21n refers to the "holding digest transmission image information" temporarily stored in the preliminary announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the change is It is determined whether or not the change is related to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2224 (second variant 3), in step 2226 (second variant 3), the design display content determination means SM21n stores the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (or the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). ), and based on the "holding digestion transmission image information" related to the propriety of the change, the variation mode, or the notice effect, the pending digestion transmission image change plan (for example, when the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped: yellow block hold → green block Suspension, continuous button hits during reach: execution plan of effects such as change from green block hold to red star hold, etc.) is determined, stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to step 2218. It should be noted that even if No in step 2224 (second variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2218 .

Next, in steps 2218 and 2228 (second variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. , the on-hold display mode change processing execution flag is turned on, and the next processing (processing of step 2300) is performed.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the pending display mode change control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second variant 3) of FIG. 55 in the third variant from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b to determine whether or not the pending display mode change processing execution flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2702, at step 2704, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. In the case of Yes at step 2706, at step 2708, the book binding pending information display control means SM22 confirms the pending change plan stored in the book binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 2710, the design pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change the pending display mode during the change, based on the pending change plan.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the design reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the preliminary announcement performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and during the preliminary announcement performance executed during the fluctuation, the specific preliminary announcement performance (see FIG. 49) is displayed. ) is determined. In the case of Yes at step 2712, at step 2714, the design reservation information display control means SM22 is based on the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the advance notice mode temporarily stored in the advance notice performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. , determines whether or not the execution timing of the specific advance notice effect has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2714, the process proceeds to step 2718 (in accordance with the execution of the specific advance notice effect, the pending display mode is changed).

Here, FIG. 60 is a hold change image diagram in the specific advance notice effect. In this example, an example will be described in which the display mode of the suspension is changed by a grassy notice in a flat zone (in particular, a grassy notice in which a snake appears as a specific notice effect). First, in a state where a trigger hold exists in the hold, a change related to the hold before the trigger hold starts {in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this point is normal hold (white hold)}.

Next, a grassy notice, which is a notice effect during the change, is executed, and an image of searching for something by pushing through the grass is displayed.

Next, an image is displayed in which a snake (expectation for a big hit during the variation is "low") appears from behind a bush.

Here, if there is no plan to change the pending display during the change, an image of a snake appearing from behind the grass and leaving the screen is displayed, and the advance notice effect ends.

On the other hand, if there is a plan to change the pending display during the change, unlike the above case, an image of a snake appearing from behind the bush and jumping into the pending (at this point, the trigger is normally held) is displayed. be. After that, the display mode of the hold (trigger hold) where the snake jumped in changes, and is displayed in a hold display mode different from the normal hold (in this example, a small hold). It should be noted that an effect (so-called fake effect) in which the display mode of the suspension does not change even if the specific advance notice effect is executed may be executed.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2712 (when the specific advance notice effect is not executed during the change), in step 2716, the design pending information display control means SM22 performs a general purpose pending change effect (executable independently of other effects). In addition, it is an effect that can be executed in any effect stage, for example, an effect that the hold explodes) Set a command to display (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999 ) and go to step 2718 .

Next, in step 2718, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger pending based on the pending change plan stored in the pending binding information temporary storage means SM22b, and It is stored in the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 2720, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 turns off the pending display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the next processing {step 2750 (Second variation 3) processing}. If No at step 2704, step 2706 or step 2710, the process proceeds to step 2720. If No at step 2702 or step 2714, proceed to the next process {step 2750 (second variation 3) process}. Transition.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of pending digestion communication image display processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second variation 3) of FIG. 55 in modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, at step 2752, the design reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the pattern changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2752, at step 2754, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the preliminary announcement performance related information temporary storage means SM24b to determine whether the pending digestion transmission image displaying flag is off. determine whether In the case of Yes at step 2754, at step 2756, the composition pending information display control means SM22 controls the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image based on the pending digestion transmission image information temporarily stored in the preliminary announcement performance related information temporary storage means SM24b. (initial display mode) is determined. Here, the pending digestion transmission image is an image that continuously displays the suspension related to the variation during the variation (after the variation starts and the suspension related to the variation is digested). . By displaying the pending digestion transmission image, the player can easily recognize that the change is related to the small hold even during the change related to the hold (for example, the small hold) in which the display mode has changed in the hold. , during the change, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image.

Next, at step 2758, the design pending information display control means SM22 turns on the pending digestion transmission image displaying flag in the flag area of the preliminary announcement performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, if step 2754 is No, the process proceeds to step 2760 as well.

Next, at step 2760, the design pending information display control means SM22 refers to the preliminary announcement performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, and confirms the pending digestion transfer image change plan. Next, at step 2762, the design pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image or delete it during the change based on the pending digestive transfer image change plan. do. In the case of Yes at step 2762, at step 2764, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 controls the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the pending digestion transmission image change plan. It is determined whether or not the change timing (for example, the start of re-fluctuation after the temporary stop display of pseudo consecutive symbols, the execution of a predetermined effect, a predetermined period during the ready-to-win effect) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2764, at step 2766, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 sets the pending digestion transmission image display mode change condition (for example, pressing the sub-input button during a predetermined period, maximum number of pending, etc.) is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in steps 2768 and 2770, the binding pending information display control means SM22 sets a command to display a general-purpose pending change effect (for example, a pending effect that explodes) (display command transmission in step 2999). (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image based on the pending digestion transmission image change plan (for example, red star pending, green square pending, no display, etc. display mode), and stores it in the temporary storage means SM22b for binding reservation information, and the process proceeds to step 2780. It should be noted that if step 2762 or step 2766 is No, the process proceeds to step 2780 as well.

Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of the image change of pending digestion transfer. The change of the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image in Modification 3 from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in a flow as illustrated in the figure. In this example, a pattern is illustrated in which the battle presentation does not end in the first half and shifts (develops) to the battle presentation (second half). First, a change related to trigger hold (currently, small hold) starts, and small hold is displayed as a hold digestion transfer image.

Next, a battle effect (first half) is executed as the effect during the change. In this example, if the pending digestion transmission image is a small hold, the display mode of the small hold can be changed by pressing the sub-input button a predetermined number of times during the execution of the battle effect (first half) in the variation. is configured to In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub-input button during execution of the battle effect (first half). Since it is not executed in particular, the operation of the sub-input button is the input of a so-called hidden command (back button).

If you press the button repeatedly (press the sub-input button a predetermined number of times) during the battle production (first half), each time you press the sub-input button, an attack will be added to the Zako hold displayed as the hold digestion transmission image. Effect image is displayed.

Next, when the number of times the sub-input button is pressed in the battle production (first half) reaches a predetermined number of times, an image in which Zako hold, which is a hold digestion transfer image, explodes is displayed, and based on the hold digestion transfer image change plan, The display mode of the pending digestion transfer image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of pending is changed to red star pending or no display). In addition, even after the transition to the battle production (second half), the pending digestion transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display mode after the display mode is changed. Since there is an intention to predict the degree of expectation for the big hit of the change according to the display mode of the transmission image, even after the shift to the battle production (second half), the pending digestion transmission image continues to be displayed in the display mode after the display mode change. }.

On the other hand, if the button is not repeatedly hit (or the number of repeated hits is less than a predetermined number) in the battle production (first half), the slow hold, which is the hold digest transmission image, is automatically exploded at the timing of shifting to the battle production (second half). When the image is displayed, the display of the pending digestion transmission image is erased. clears the display regardless of the contents of the In addition, in this example, the degree of expectation for a big hit in Zako Reservation is medium, and the degree of expectation for a big hit in Reservation of Red Star is a high degree of expectation. Further, when the battle effect (second half) is executed, the degree of expectation for big wins rises at once compared to the case where the battle effect (first half) is executed. Here, under the situation where the expectation of a big hit has increased after shifting to the battle production (second half), if the display of Zako reservation with a medium level of expectation of a big hit is continued, the battle production that is a production with a high expectation of a big hit Although it may spoil the interest of the (second half), at the timing when the high-expectation production {this example, battle production (second half)} starts, the production with low expectations (in this example, Zako hold) By erasing, such a situation can be avoided. Although not particularly shown in this example, even if the number of times the sub-input button is pressed is less than a predetermined number, at the timing of changing the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, based on the pending digestion transmission image change plan It may be configured to automatically change the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image. In such a configuration, for example, the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is automatically changed only when the change to the display mode that suggests that the expectation of the big hit is high in the variation is scheduled. may be configured as follows. In addition, when the button is not repeatedly hit (or the number of repeated hits is less than a predetermined number), the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image is automatically changed at a predetermined timing only when the change is a big hit or a variable probability big hit. (So-called winning effect can be executed).

Also, when transitioning to the battle production (second half) without going through the battle production (first half) {For example, design change start (all columns) → notice production 1, design temporary stop display (left column) → design temporary Stop display (right column) → Instigate reach development → Battle reach (second half) image display → Design temporary stop display (middle row) → Execution of production according to success → Production confirmation display (all rows) }, i.e., when the period during which the button is repeatedly hit {in this example, the battle production (first half)} does not exist and the battle production (second half) is entered, the timing of the transition to the battle production (second half). Then, the pending digestive transfer image, which is the pending digestive transfer image, is automatically exploded, and the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image is changed and displayed based on the pending digestive transfer image change plan. Although not particularly shown in this example, the number of times the sub-input button is pressed, which is necessary to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, has a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation (a high-expectation pending display mode ) may be configured so that a larger number of times is likely to be selected. Also, although not particularly shown in the present example, when the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image changes, in addition to the general-purpose pending change effect, the effect that suggests the content of the change (for example, when the zako hold explodes It may be configured to be able to execute a death warning that emits a line to. The contents suggested by the death notice include the degree of expectation for the big hit of the change and the content of the scheduled performance (for example, "Achichii!" = 60% or more expectation for the big hit, "Congratulations!" = = development of battle reach with the boss character, etc.), but if the player does not press the sub-input button, the degree of expectation for the big win related to the change is set. Assuming that the player does not want to make a prediction, it is preferable to configure so as not to execute the death spell prediction related to the degree of expectation of the big hit of the variation (only the death spell prediction related to the performance content scheduled to be executed can be executed). . That is, only when the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image is changed by the player's operation, it is possible to execute the advance notice performance related to the degree of expectation of the big hit of the variation based on the result of the success or failure of the variation. It should be noted that the battle effect (first half) effect can be executed in "a4" and "b4", which are variable times of 30 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if No in step 2764 (if it is not the timing to change the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image), in step 2772, the binding pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending digestive transfer image. It is determined whether or not it is time to erase the In the case of Yes at step 2772, at step 2774, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 sets the display mode erasing conditions for the pending digestion transfer image (for example, no pressing of the sub-input button during a predetermined period, number of times of pressing the sub-input button is less than a predetermined number of times, etc.) is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2774, in steps 2776 and 2778, the binding pending information display control means SM22 sets a command to display a general-purpose pending change effect (for example, a pending effect that explodes) (display command transmission in step 2999). transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process) and change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image to "no display" (change to "no display" regardless of the content of the pending digestion transmission image change plan ) and temporarily stored in the book binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2780.

Next, in step 2780, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 sets a command to display the pending digestion transmission image based on the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image temporarily stored in the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2752, in step 2782, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 turns off the pending digestion transmission image display flag in the flag area of the binding display related information temporary storage means SM21b. . Next, at step 2784, the design pending information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image to "no display" and temporarily stores it in the temporary design pending information storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 displays the pending digestion transfer image based on the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image temporarily stored in the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (this process Then, the command to hide the pending digestion transmission image is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the next process (process of step 2300) transition to

In addition, in the modification 3 from the second embodiment, it is configured so that the pending digestion transmission image can be displayed, but the pending digestion transmission image may not always be displayed. It may be configured such that the pending digestion transmission image corresponding to the suspension digested as it is is not displayed, and the suspension digestion transmission image corresponding to the suspension whose suspension display mode is changed from the normal suspension is displayed. With such a configuration, the player confirms the pending digestion transmission image at the timing when the player wants to know the degree of expectation for the big win of the symbol change, and if the pending digestion transmission image is displayed, the expectation is relatively high, If it is not displayed, it can be easily recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively low.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flow chart of background effect control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 46 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2524 (second variant 3) to step 2534 (second variant 3). In 2 change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 changes the decorative design based on the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the start timing has been reached. If Yes at step 2524 (second variation 3), at step 2526 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the design suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, It is determined whether or not there is a holding that wins the prefetching lottery at the time of winning the first main game. If Yes in step 2526 (second variant 3), in step 2528 (second variant 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an angel zone transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example). do. Next, at step 2530 (second variant 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2528 (second variant 3) and determines whether or not the angel zone shift lottery has been won. . If Yes in step 2530 (second variant 3), in step 2532 (second variant 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Turn on and move to step 2504 .

Also, in step 2504, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect, in step 2534 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 stores the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the design pending information temporary storage means SM11b. By referring to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension has ended. If Yes in step 2534 (second variation 3), go to step 2508 ; if No, go to step 2520 .

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment, the sub-main control can It is possible to change and display the display mode of the suspension on the part SM side, and when a predetermined notice effect (in this example, a specific notice effect, especially a low-expectation notice effect) is executed, the predetermined notice effect It is configured to be able to change and display the pending display mode in accordance with the advance notice effect and the movement of the displayed image. As a result, even in the announcement performance with low expectation of big win in the variation, the display mode of the suspension may be changed, so that the player's interest in the announcement performance can be increased and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible. In addition, when the degree of expectation for a big hit increases after shifting to the battle production (second half), if the display of Zako reservation with a medium degree of expectation for a big hit is continued, a battle production that is a production with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Since it may spoil the interest of the (second half), even if there is no operation by the player, at the timing when the high-expectation production {this example, battle production (second half)} starts, the low-expectation production ( In this example, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the performance from being spoiled by hiding the non-significant hold). Also, the condition is that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub-input button SB a predetermined number of times) during a period in which a predetermined effect {for example, battle reach (first half)} is being executed while the symbols are changing. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image, so that it is possible to make it a player participation type production, and a player who does not want to know the variation of the expected degree of jackpot by the production can perform the predetermined operation. By not doing so, it is possible to provide a game in which the selection is made such that the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image becomes an effect (for example, deletion of the pending digestion transmission image) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the modification example 3 from the second embodiment, the background change effect and the pending change effect are provided as the look-ahead effect, and only the hold change effect is executed multiple times during the execution of the look-ahead effect. is not limited, and the background change effect may be executed multiple times during execution of the look-ahead effect (for example, it may change to the "true angel zone background" even after changing to the "angel zone background"). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the more times it is executed), the higher the expectation of a big hit due to the fluctuation related to the prefetch effect being executed (rank It is desirable to configure it so that It should be noted that the background change effect does not change (rank up) during execution of the symbol change related to trigger suspension.

(Third Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are configured to start and stop varying substantially at the same time as the main game symbols, but the variation mode of the decorative symbols is not limited to this. . Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as the third embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, the second big winning hole C20 has a specific area C22 which is an area that triggers the transition to the probability varying gaming state by entering a ball.

First, FIG. 64 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) shows the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B) and first main game lottery table MN11ta-B in the third embodiment. This is an example of the main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). Differences from the present embodiment are that the probability of big wins in the probability variable gaming state is lowered, and that short-open big wins and long-open big wins are provided as big wins. Here, the short opening jackpot means that the second big winning hole C20 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and a long open jackpot means that the second big winning hole C20 is opened for a long time in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second big winning hole C20 is opened) during the big win. (eg, 30 seconds) is a jackpot that can be unlocked. In addition, in the third embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the distribution game execution round described above, so that the game property such as shifting to the probability fluctuation game state after the special game being executed is completed. It is (so-called ball confirmation machine).

Next, FIGS. 65 and 66 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables that are referred to when losing and in the time reduction game state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "0". ” and “1 to 3” have different table contents. In the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbols selected in the time-reduced game state, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and the other variation modes are a long variation. Depending on whether the variation mode of the second main game symbols is a short variation or a long variation, the method of determining the variation mode of the decorative symbols (especially the first decorative symbols) is configured to be different (details will be described later). . In addition, in the time shortening game state, the game is mainly played on the second main game side (since the game is played by hitting to the right, only the pattern variation on the second main game side is executed. Alternatively, the variation of the second main game symbols is easier to execute than the variation of the first main game symbols).

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the time shortened game state, the variation time of the second decorative symbols is the same as the variation time of the second main game symbols. The variation time of the 2 decorative symbols is also determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of symbol variation (may differ depending on the number of reservations).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, the game is mainly progressed on the second main game side (because the game is progressed by hitting to the right, the second main game is played). Only the symbol variation on the game side is executed), and the first main game suspension basically does not occur. In the case of a short-time (for example, 3 seconds) variation time, only one type of content may be used, and in the case of a big hit, only one type of long-time (for example, 30 seconds) variation time may be included (time Since the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the shortened game state is an irregular symbol variation, there is no problem even if the content of the variation mode determination table has a simple configuration). In addition, in order to cause the second main game suspension during the irregular pattern fluctuation, the contents of the variation mode determination table related to the first main game symbols related to the loss in the time-reduced gaming state are set for a short period of time regardless of the number of suspensions. is not selected (for example, the variation time is 5 seconds or longer). In addition, the number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game reservation and the second main game reservation, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main game It is the game pending number, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, it is the second main game pending number.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), the purpose of which is to end the probability variation gaming state by the number of times the main game pattern has changed (to the non-probability variation gaming state transfer). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes at step 1454 (third), at step 1456 (third), the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the probability variable number counter MP51c (decrements). Next, at step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes at step 1458 (third), at step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1462 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. It should be noted that even if No in step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process proceeds to step 1470 . In addition, the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, pattern variation is executed in the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is completed by the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c becomes 0 (so-called ST) However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it is configured so that the probability variation game state does not end depending on the number of symbol variations (it can end when the special game is won), and the jackpot related to the first main game is configured. The ratio of the big hits related to the second main game to long open big wins is higher than the ratio of long open big wins, and the big wins related to the second main game also include short open big wins. good.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1611 (third), step 1700 (third) and step 1650 (third), that is, after the special game start display instruction command is set in step 1608, or When the special game execution flag is ON at step 1610, at step 1611 (third), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the round currently being executed is a distribution game. It is determined whether or not it is an execution round (a round in which the second big winning hole C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, in this example, 2R and 4R). In the case of Yes at step 1611 (third), at step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes distribution game execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1634 . On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process proceeds to step 1612 . Also, at step 1638, after setting the special game end display instruction command, at step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a game state determination process after the special game ends, which will be described later. It shifts to processing (processing of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 69 is a flow chart of distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is ON. If Yes in step 1702 , go to step 1716 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1702, at step 1704, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (7A, 4B, 5B and 7B, and the second main game jackpot symbols are all long open symbols). In the case of Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 sets a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds, An open pattern designed so that the ball entering the specific area C22 is almost definite (or definite) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710 . In the case of No in step 1704, in step 1708, the distribution game execution control means MP36 selects a short opening pattern (for example, opening for 0.1 seconds) as the opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 and an opening pattern designed so that the non-entering of the specific area C22 is almost definite (or definite)), and the process proceeds to step 1710 .

Next, at step 1710, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1712, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1714, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big winning opening C20 according to the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

Next, at step 1716, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have entered the second big winning hole C20. do. If Yes at step 1716 , go to step 1720 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1716, in step 1718, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second big winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes at step 1718 , go to step 1720 . Next, at step 1720, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big winning opening C20. Next, at step 1722, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes at step 1724, at step 1726, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability variation shift reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1728. . Note that if step 1724 is No, the process also proceeds to step 1728 . Next, at step 1728, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1634). Note that even if No in step 1718, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1634).

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, at step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 1662, at step 1664, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability variation transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 times) to the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, at step 1668, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1662, in step 1670, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) to the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1672.

Next, at step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1674, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third). Then, the sub control board S refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2010 (third), the process proceeds to step 2300, and in the case of No, in step 2850 (third), the sub control board S performs the time saving medium decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Execute and go to step 2400 .

Next, FIG. 72 is a flow chart of the decorative design display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, after turning off the design content determination permission flag in step 2204, The design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2230 (third), the process proceeds to step 2206, and in the case of No, in step 2800 (third), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the first device during time saving, which will be described later. The figure content determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2208 . It should be noted that the processing of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (there is no symbol content determination flag). In the third embodiment, the first decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row, and the number of effective lines (lines that become effective by arranging the same number patterns) is one. It means a big hit if the same number patterns are aligned on the activated line (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the activated line, it means a loss). Also, in the left, middle, and right rows (or in the middle row), only number patterns can be stopped (temporarily stopped) (the above-mentioned "special patterns" do not stop, or the appearance frequency itself is extremely low probability) and can be temporarily stopped during symbol fluctuation (or the probability of temporary stop is extremely low). In addition, the second decorative pattern is composed of three columns, the left row, the middle row, and the right row. If the number patterns are aligned, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number patterns are not aligned on the effective line, it will be a loss). Also, in the left, middle and right rows (or in the middle row), only the number patterns can be stopped (temporarily stopped) (the above-mentioned "special patterns" do not stop), and during the pattern fluctuation It is configured to be temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flow chart of the first layout content determination process during time saving, according to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) of FIG. 72 in the third embodiment. First, at step 2802, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the first decorative design is currently stopped. In the case of Yes at step 2802, at step 2804, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the second main game pending content (particularly, win/fail result and variation time) related to the symbol variation (main game symbol variation), and Confirm the content of the second main game pending (especially the variable time) in the order of completion of the first and second ones, that is, the content of the second main game pending (especially the win/fail result and the variable time) excluding the third hold. . Next, at step 2806, the design display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not there is a suspension (including the design variation) with a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) or more related to the confirmed suspension, and , Based on the digestion order of the suspension (including the design variation) that has a variation time of a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) or more, referring to the table for determining the first design variation mode during time saving, the first decorative design Determine the variation mode.

Here, the right part of the figure is an example of a table for determining the first layout variation mode during time saving in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is stopped (timing of step 2806), the second main game pending number, the second main game symbol variation and the second main game symbol The variable time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the variable time related to game suspension. In addition, as described above, among the variations of the second main game symbols, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and other than "b0 (1 second)" is a long variation.

Specifically, when there are two or more second main game reserves, it is determined whether or not there is a reserve with a long fluctuation in the pattern variation, the first reserve and the second reserve. , when there is no long fluctuation holding, the fluctuation time for 3 fluctuations of the second main game pattern becomes the fluctuation time of the first decoration pattern. For example, when the number of second main game reservations is 3 and the number of second main game reservations maintains "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, the first one: 1 second, 2 Eye: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second”, the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game holdings is maintained at “1 to 3” is, “the variation” and “ The total time of "first one" and "second one" is 3 seconds, and at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbols relating to the second hold stop changing, the first decorative symbols also stop. . Incidentally, the second decorative symbols are configured to stop at the same time (or approximately at the same time) as the main game symbols stop varying in each variation.

On the other hand, if there are two or more second main game reserves, and if there is a long fluctuation reserve in any of the relevant pattern variation, the first reserve and the second reserve, the first The variation time until the variation of the main game symbols related to the reservation, which is a long variation in the order of execution, is the variation time of the first decorative symbols. For example, when the number of second main game reservations is 3 and the number of second main game reservations maintains "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, the first one: 10 seconds, 2 Eye: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second”, the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game holdings is maintained at “1 to 3” is, “the variation” and “ The first decoration symbol is also stopped at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbol related to the first hold, which is a long variation, stops fluctuating.

In addition, when the second main game hold is one or less, it is determined whether or not there is a long change hold until the hold that becomes the final order of execution (including the symbol change), and a long change is made. If there is no pending, the total variation time of the symbol variation of the second main game symbol and all suspensions becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of second main game reservations is 1 and the number of second main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "this fluctuation: 1 second, the first game: 1 second" , the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3" is 2 seconds, which is the total of "the variation" and "1st symbol", and 1 symbol At the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbols related to the holding of eyes stop changing, the first decorative symbols also stop.

On the other hand, if the second main game hold is 1 or less, and if there is a hold with a long fluctuation until the hold that becomes the final order of play (including the pattern fluctuation), the order of play that is the earliest. The variation time up to the variation of the main game symbols related to the long variation hold becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbols. For example, when the second main game hold is 1 and the change time when the number of second main game holds is maintained at "1 to 3" is "the change: 1 second, the first: 10 seconds" , the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of second main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3" is 11 seconds, which is the total of "this fluctuation" and "first one", and is a long fluctuation At the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the main game symbols related to the first hold stop changing, the first decorative symbols also stop.

In the third embodiment, at the timing of step 2806, that is, at the timing after the consumption of the reservation, the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern is determined, but it is not limited to this, and the timing before the consumption of the reservation is determined. At the timing, the second main game pending information may be checked to determine the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol.

Next, at step 2808, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the hold information confirmed at step 2804, and determines whether or not there is a hold for a big hit in the confirmed second main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the stop design of the first decorative design based on the information regarding the stop design of the main game design related to the holding of the big hit, and step 2810. 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2808, in step 2812, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the stop design of the first decorative design to be the losing eye, and proceeds to step 2814. In addition, in the process of step 2812, the stop pattern of the first decorative pattern is set in the ready-to-win mode (the left and right row stop patterns are the same, for example, "4.6. 4") or a loose pattern (the stop symbols in the left and right columns are not the same, for example, "4, 6, 3"). Next, in step 2814, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the time saving first design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (step 2208 processing). Note that even if No in step 2802, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time shortening game state, the game mainly progresses on the second main game side (because the game progresses by hitting right, the second Since only the pattern variation on the main game side is executed), basically the first main game suspension does not occur, but the first main game suspension occurs when the player executes a left stroke. In that case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbol has the same variation time as the main game symbol until the variation related to the first main game suspension is completed.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flow chart of decorative design display control processing during time saving according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) in FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, at step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbols have started to change. In the case of Yes at step 2852, at step 2854, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design fluctuating flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2856, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, if step 2852 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2858 .

Next, at step 2858, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2858, at step 2860, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer values of the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, at step 2862, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first decorative design is stopped. In the case of Yes at step 2862, at step 2864, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the variable display of the first decorative design, and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2862, in step 2865, the decorative design display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative design, and proceeds to step 2866.

Next, at step 2866, the decorative design display control means SM21 variably displays the second decorative design. Next, at step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes image display such as temporary stop display, notice image display, ready-to-win image display, etc. related to the variation of the main game symbol that has been determined. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols can be temporarily stopped and displayed in the time-reduced game state, but are configured not to be temporarily stopped in the stop modes such as "special symbols" and pseudo continuous symbols. In addition, as a specific example of temporary stop, the first decorative pattern is reach (the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped in the pattern fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation for a long time (for example, 30 seconds or more). It may be configured such that the second decorative design is temporarily stopped during the period when the first decorative design is ready, or the first decorative design is temporarily stopped as a pseudo-continuous change before the first decorative design becomes a reach. .

Next, at step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbols have stopped. In the case of Yes at step 2870, at step 2872, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative design has come. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms and displays the first decorative design. Next, at step 2876, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2872, in step 2878, the decorative design display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative design, and proceeds to step 2880.

Next, at step 2880, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms and displays the second decorative design. Next, at step 2882, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Note that even if No in step 2858 or step 2870, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Here, the upper part of the same figure is a decorative design variation image diagram during time saving, and illustrates an example of the action related to the variation of the decorative design in the third embodiment. First, the "main game symbol variation start state" means that the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start to vary at the timing when the main game symbol (especially the second main game symbol) starts to vary. or not. Incidentally, the hatched portion indicates that the decorative design (first decorative design) is in the process of changing. It also displays whether or not the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) stop varying at the timing when the main game symbols (particularly, the second main game symbols) stop varying. Incidentally, the hatched portion indicates that the decorative design (first decorative design) is in the process of changing. In this way, the second decorative symbols start and stop varying at the same (or approximately the same) timing as the variation of the main game symbols (especially, the second main game symbols) (in accordance with the variation of the main game symbols). On the other hand, the second decorative symbols are configured to start and stop varying every three times the main game symbols (in particular, the second main game symbols) vary. In other words, the first decorative symbols are configured so that one symbol variation can be executed over a plurality of variation periods of the main game symbols (and the second decorative symbols).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, by determining the variation time of the first decorative symbol based on the number of suspensions and the variation time of the second main game suspension, By configuring the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern to be the value of the plural times of fluctuation time of the second main game pattern, the game is played as if the plural fluctuations of the main game patterns were one fluctuation. As in the third embodiment, even if the number of fluctuations of the main game symbols, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation gaming state, is large (200 in this example), the number of fluctuations is small (200 in this example). For example, 100 times) can be shown to the player, and it is possible to reduce that the progress of the game becomes boring due to continuous loss fluctuations during the probability fluctuation game state, and the probability fluctuation game It can be made to feel that the probability of a big hit in the state is higher than it actually is.

In the third embodiment, the second decorative pattern is fixed and stopped three times during the period in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped once. The maximum number of 3 times is smaller than the second main game holding upper limit number of 4 times (if the second main game holding upper limit number is exceeded, the first decoration pattern will be changed (because a situation may occur in which the second main game hold is completely consumed).

In addition, the board structure of the third embodiment may be changed, for example, the game ball almost certainly passes through the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10 when hitting to the right. Arranged so as to overlap vertically on the route (the auxiliary game start opening H10 is arranged on the upper side as seen from the player), and almost all of the game balls that flow down the route and pass through the auxiliary game start opening H10 It may be configured so that the ball can enter the second main game start opening B10. In the case of such a configuration, in the time shortening game state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10 to when it enters the second main game start port B10, "the auxiliary game symbol Since it is desirable to be able to: start of fluctuation → end of fluctuation of auxiliary game symbols → open the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d”, “the auxiliary game pattern fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, the second main game start electric It is preferable to configure the opening mode of the accessory B11d to be "open for 6 seconds→close". In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from entering the second main game start port B10 when hitting to the right in the time shortening game state, the second main game It is desirable to set the number of prize balls at the starting port B10 to 1 ball (the number of prize balls at the first main game starting port A10 is 3 balls).

In addition, in the third embodiment, while the first decorative symbol is stopped, the content of the second main game reserve is confirmed, and the fluctuation time related to the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. In the case where a long-variation holding of the main game symbols exists before the second execution order, the first decorative symbols are also stopped at the same time when the symbol variation related to the long-variation holding is stopped. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first decorative design may not depend on the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative design. The variation time of the decorative pattern is configured to be different.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as described above, when there are two or more second main game reserves, and any of the pattern fluctuation, the first reserve, and the second reserve, a long fluctuation When there is a hold, the fluctuation time until the change of the main game pattern related to the hold that becomes the long fluctuation of the first order of execution is the fluctuation time of the first decorative pattern. If there is no long variation in any of the symbol variation, the first retained symbol, and the second retained symbol, the variation time for the three variations of the second main game symbol is the variation of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of second main game reservations is 3 and the number of second main game reservations is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second , 1st piece: 1 second, 2nd piece: 1 second, 3rd piece: 1 second”, the number of 1st decorative symbols when the number of second main game holdings maintains “1 to 3” The variation time is scheduled to be 3 seconds, which is the total of ``this variation'', ``1st piece'', and ``2nd piece'', but the second main game hold is not maintained at ``1 to 3'', For example, if the actual variation time is "the variation: 1 second, the first one: 1 second, the second one: 5 seconds", the variation time of the first decorative pattern is "the variation" and " A total of 7 seconds for "1st piece" and "2nd piece", and the variation time of the first decorative pattern can be different depending on whether or not there is an additional pending occurrence.

In addition, in the third embodiment, while the first decorative symbol is stopped, the content of the second main game reserve is confirmed, and the fluctuation time for the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. During the stop, the effect related to the first decorative pattern may be determined, for example, when "lightning running effect" is executed on the effect display device SG at the start of fluctuation in a certain first decorative pattern variation. Then, during the suspension of the first decorative symbol variation, confirm the subsequent variation of the second decorative symbol (or the variation of the second main game symbol), and in the next first decorative symbol variation, "lightning It may be determined whether or not to re-execute the "running effect". It should be noted that the more the "lightning running effect" continues, the higher the expectation of a big hit in the first decorative symbol variation (or the main game symbol variation included in the first decorative symbol variation) related to the effect. It is desirable to configure it to be high. The timing of confirming the variation of the second decorative symbols (or the variation of the second main game symbols) may be changed. In contrast to the fact that only the contents of the fluctuation related to the second main game hold can be confirmed, if the confirmation is made at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern or the timing of the end of the fluctuation, the second that occurred during the period during which the first decorative pattern is fluctuating Since it is also possible to confirm the change contents of the second main game hold, it is desirable that the confirmation timing is after the end of the change of the first decorative symbol.

(Fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed in detail on the effect display device, but such a configuration can be applied to the above-described implementation. It is not limited to only morphological configurations. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a right-handed instruction display indicating that a right-handed shot should be performed in a game situation in which a right-handed shot (a shooting mode in which a game ball is shot toward the right side of the board surface) is to be performed. It has a right-handed display control means SM27 that controls the display of.

First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3400 (fourth), that is, when execution of (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM, is started, in step 3400 (fourth), The sub control board S executes right-handed instruction display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100 .

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right-handed hitting instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) of FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In this example, it is determined whether or not the time shortening gaming state in step 3402, but is not limited to this, whether or not the gaming state should be executed to the right (for example, probability variation game state, probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, etc.) may be determined. If Yes in step 3402 , the process proceeds to step 3406 .

In the case of No in step 3402, in step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command to display the right-handed instruction display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). Here, the upper right part of the same figure is a display image diagram of the instruction display for hitting to the right. As shown in the figure, the right-handed instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG, and is configured to notify the player that the game should be played right-handed at present. Since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to hit to the right, the indication of hitting to the right is configured to have a higher display priority (details will be described later). In addition, the display basically displayed on the constant effect display device SG, such as the second decorative pattern and the reserved display (including the first reserved display and the second reserved display), which will be described later, is not the right-handed instruction display. You may configure so that they do not overlap.

In addition, the right-handed display mode in each game state or situation may always be the same display mode even if the game state or situation (such as when a special game is being executed and when a special game is not being executed) is different. It may be configured so that the display mode can be different (for example, the size is different) depending on the state or situation. In addition, when the display mode is configured to be different, for example, during the big win, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be configured to be different depending on the opening mode of the big winning hole. A right-handed instruction display during a big win in which all opening modes are long open is a relatively large first display pattern, and a right-handed instruction display during a big win in which all the opening modes of the big prize openings are short open is relatively small. As a second display pattern, a right-handed instruction display during a big win in which a long opening and a short opening are mixed as the opening mode of the big winning opening is relatively large in a round in which the big winning opening is long open. Therefore, in the round in which the big winning hole is opened for a short time, the player may proceed while switching the right-handed instruction display so that the second display pattern is relatively small.

In addition, in the case where the first right-handed instruction display with a relatively small display area and the second right-handed instruction display with a relatively large display area can be displayed as the right-handed instruction display, the following is performed. may be configured.
(1) In a situation in which a player should hit to the right (for example, a time-reduced game state), the first right-handed instruction display is displayed, and in the situation in which the player should hit to the right, the game is played to indicate that the player is hitting to the left. When the machine detects (for example, in the time shortened game state, when three game balls enter the first main game start opening A10 that can be entered by hitting left), the second right hitting instruction display is displayed for a predetermined time (the first right-handed instruction display remains displayed).
(2) The first right-handed instruction display is displayed near the four corners (for example, upper right) of the effect display device SG, and the second right-handed instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. Further, the display area for the first hitting to right instruction display and the display area for the second hitting to right instruction display do not overlap. It should be noted that the display area for the first hitting to right instruction display and the display area for the second hitting to right instruction display may be configured to overlap. The display priority of the first hitting-to-right instruction display may be higher than the degree.
(3) The display priority in the effect display device SG is "first right-handed instruction display → second right-handed instruction display → notice effect → fluctuating decorative pattern"("second right-handed Instruction display → first right-handed instruction display → notice effect → changing decorative pattern"), for example, when the display area of the second right-handed instruction display and the display area of the changing decorative pattern overlap , the second right-handed instruction display is displayed on the front (becomes visible).
(4) The first right-handed instruction display can overlap with the first decorative symbol during the variation in the auxiliary game state {during the main game symbol variation (during the first decorative symbol variation, the second decorative symbol variation)}. However, it does not overlap with the second decorative pattern (for example, when a "symbol enlargement effect" occurs in which at least a part of the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged). However, the first right-handed instruction display does not overlap with any of the first decorative design and the second decorative design during the fluctuation stop. Also, the first right-handed instruction display is the first reserve display for the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87), or the second reserve display for the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, eg, FIG. 87). Furthermore, the first right-handed instruction display may overlap with a predetermined advance notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}, but a specific notice effect {for example, a speech notice Notice to be displayed)} does not overlap.
(5) The second right-handed instruction display can overlap with the first decorative symbol during the variation in the auxiliary game state {during the main game symbol variation (during the first decorative symbol variation, the second decorative symbol variation)}. (For example, not only when the "symbol enlargement effect" occurs in which at least a part of the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged, but also during scrolling from top to bottom) , does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. In addition, the second right-handed instruction display is the first reserve display for the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) or the second reserve display for the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, eg, FIG. 87). Further, the second right-handed instruction display includes a predetermined advance notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect {for example, a speech notice (a notice to display the character's speech)}. Both can overlap.
(6) When the first decorative symbol is in the process of changing the main game symbols (during the first decorative design change, during the second decorative design change), the first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, , see FIG. 87) and the second pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see FIG. 87, for example). Furthermore, when the first decorative symbols are in the process of changing the main game symbols (+during the fluctuation of the first decorative symbols), a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect { For example, it may overlap with the line announcement (announcement of displaying the character's lines)}.
(7) When the second decorative symbol is in the process of changing the main game symbols (during the first decorative symbol variation, during the second decorative symbol variation), the first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, , see FIG. 87) and the second pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see FIG. 87, for example). Furthermore, when the second decorative symbol is in the process of varying the main game symbols (+during the variation of the second decorative symbol), it can overlap with the predetermined announcement effect {for example, the group announcement (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. It does not overlap with a specific announcement effect {for example, a speech announcement (an announcement displaying a character's speech)}.
(8) The first pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) overlaps with the predetermined notice effect {for example, the group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific announcement effect {for example, a speech announcement (an announcement displaying a character's speech)}.
(9) The second pending display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) overlaps with the predetermined notice effect {for example, the group notice (see the lower right diagram in FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific announcement effect {for example, a speech announcement (an announcement displaying a character's speech)}.

Further, in the case where the display mode of the right-handed instruction display can be changed depending on the game state or situation, the following configuration may be used.
(1) During execution of a small hit, the right-handed instruction display is displayed in a relatively small size (for example, one arrow), which is different from when no small win is being executed.
(2) A probability variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state when the special game is not being executed, a non-probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state when the special game is not being executed, and a case where the special game is being executed is in the non-time-reduction gaming state.
(3) As the time shortening gaming state, there are a non-probability varying gaming state and time shortening gaming state and a probability varying gaming state and time shortening gaming state.
(4) When the special game is not being executed, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed in the non-probability-variable gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state and the probability-variable gaming state and non-time-reduced gaming state. On the other hand, during the execution of the special game, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a display prompting left-handed player is not displayed).
(5) In the time shortening game state, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a left-handed player's instruction is not displayed).
(6) In the non-time-reduced game state or the time-reduced game state, if the above-described first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display can be displayed, the non-time-reduced game state The display mode of the first hitting to right instruction display is different between the and the time shortening game state, but the display mode of the second hitting to right instruction display is the same.
(7) The display prompting left-handed is for a predetermined period (for example, after the situation changes from right-handed to left-handed, for a predetermined period, and in the left-handed situation, an auxiliary game start opening that makes it easy to enter the ball when executing right-handed. is displayed for a predetermined period from the detection of right-handed hitting, such as when a game ball enters the ball (becomes hidden after a predetermined period of time), while the right-handed instruction display is in a situation where right-handed hitting is required The period in which the display is always displayed or the right-handed instruction display is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

If No at step 3404, at step 3408, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command to erase the right-handed instruction display, and proceeds to the next process (step 2100). Incidentally, in step 3408, if the indication of hitting to the right is not displayed, the processing is not executed.

Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the display mode and display position of the decorative design in the fourth embodiment. This figure illustrates how the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are displayed and displayed depending on the combination of the game state and the background effect. In addition, all four display examples shown in FIG. ing. First, the upper left part of the figure illustrates a case where the game state is the non-variable probability game state and the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers arranged in a horizontal line. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers lined up in a horizontal line. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the game state is the probability variation game state, and the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Chinese numerals, and the display position is a row of three numbers in a convex shape. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers lined up in a horizontal line. Further, when the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "black" in both cases of "777" and "777". , the display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" both in the case of "777" and in the case of "777".

Next, in the lower left part of the figure, the game state is the non-variable probability game state, and the background effect being executed is the "night stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers arranged in a diagonal line. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers lined up in a horizontal line. Next, in the lower right part of the figure, the game state is the probability varying game state and the background effect being executed is the "night stage". In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "777" and Chinese numerals, and the display position is a row of three numerals in a concave shape. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "777" and Arabic numerals, and the display positions are three numbers lined up in a horizontal line. Further, when the background effect being executed is "night stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "white" in both cases of "777" and "777". , the display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" both in the case of "777" and in the case of "777".

Thus, in the same figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative symbol differs depending on the game state.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(3) The display position of the first decorative symbol differs depending on the game state.
(4) The display position of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative symbols does not differ even if the game state differs.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effect is different.
(7) The display position of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the game state differs.
(8) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effects are different.
is configured as

In addition, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different due to the difference in the background effect or the game state, as shown in FIG. In the case of a configuration in which the display mode is a combination of the above, the display mode of the first decorative pattern may be different by making the pattern different (for numbers, Chinese numerals and Arabic numerals may be used. may be different or may be the same). Also, the display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the pattern is attached. In addition, as a configuration that can suggest the game state after the end of the big win when the big win is achieved by the display color of the numbers of the decorative patterns, the big win is started by aligning three numbers whose display color is green. In such a case, it is not certain whether or not the probability variable gaming state will occur after the end of the big win. It may be configured so that it is almost certain (or definite) that the probability variation gaming state is entered. For example, in the non-probability variation gaming state, "3" is green and "7" is red, In the probability variation gaming state, "3" and "7" may be red ("3" has the same property as "7" in the probability variation gaming state). Also, as a difference in nature between green and red, when a big win is started by stopping the green decorative pattern, a big win with 8 rounds (or 8 rounds or more) is started. In other words, when the red decorative pattern is stopped and the big win is started, the number of execution rounds may be set to 16 rounds to start the big win, or the green decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win. In this case, the ratio of the pattern variation to be a big hit is 10%, while when the red decorative pattern is a reach, the ratio of the pattern variation to be a big hit is 50%. good. Also, when "1" results in a reach, the ratio of the pattern variation to a big hit is 10%, while when "7" results in a reach, the percentage of the pattern variation to a big hit. It may be configured to be 50%. In addition, in the case where the display mode of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different due to the difference in the background effect or the game state, the display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the number of the first decorative pattern is accompanied by a letter. For example, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, the character "SUPER" is not attached to the first decorative symbol "7", while in the probability fluctuation gaming state, the first decorative symbol "7" ” may be accompanied by the characters “SUPER”. Also, in the case of a big hit in the first main game pattern (especially in the non-time-reduced game state), the character "SUPER" is not attached to "7", and the big hit in the second main game pattern (especially in the time-reduced game state) ), the character “SUPER” is attached to “7”, or the character “SUPER” is attached to “7” in a big hit in the first main game pattern (especially during a non-time-reduced game state) , the probability that the character "SUPER" will accompany "7" in the big hit in the second main game symbol (especially during the time-reduced game state) may be increased. Furthermore, when the character "SUPER" is attached, a 16R jackpot is confirmed (a configuration in which a 16R probability variable hit is confirmed is also possible), but when the character "SUPER" is not attached, a 16R jackpot is confirmed. is not determined (16R probability variable hit may not be determined) or 4R jackpot is determined. It should be noted that the characters "SUPER" can be attached to the first decorative design, but the characters "SUPER" are not necessarily attached to the second decorative design. Further, the first decorative symbols other than "7" (especially, the even-numbered designs) are configured so that the character "SUPER" is not attached even if they are the first decorative symbols.

Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to the display area of the decorative design in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the area in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be displayed on the effect display device SG is illustrated. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left part of the figure, the first decorative design is variably displayed around the center of the display area SG10, and the second decorative design is variably displayed around the upper left part of the display area SG10. configured to be As for the range of the display area SG10 in which the decorative patterns can be displayed in consideration of whether the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed or the jackpot is being executed, the second decorative pattern is the range shown in the upper right part of the figure, and the first decorative pattern. is in the range shown in the bottom right of the illustration. As illustrated, in the fourth embodiment, the area in which the first decorative design can be displayed is larger than the area in which the second decorative design can be displayed. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, while the display of the second decorative pattern does not move during the variable display, the display of the first decorative pattern moves during the variable display (for example, the upper part of the display area SG10 ), the movement range of the first decorative design is larger than the movement range of the second decorative design.

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the variable display period of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed is illustrated. First, in the upper left part of the figure, since the main game symbols are being varied, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are variably displayed. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are ready-to-win display. Next, in the lower left part of the figure, a battle effect is executed as an SP reach effect, and during the execution of the battle effect, it is desired to make the player pay attention to the battle effect (whether the result of the battle effect will be a big hit or not). ), the display of the first decorative pattern is erased (becomes non-display). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern is continuously displayed as the ready-to-win display, and if the player wants to check the status of the decorative pattern during the battle production, he/she can confirm the ready-to-win state by visually recognizing the display of the second decorative pattern. You can recognize that you are inside. After that, the battle effect is won, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stop-displayed as the jackpot pattern. Thus, while the main game symbols are fluctuating, the display of the first decorative symbols is erased (while the battle effect is being executed), while the second decorative symbols are always displayed. The display period of the second decorative design is relatively longer than the display period of the design. It should be noted that the second decorative design may be configured not to be the ready-to-win display even when the first decorative design is to be the ready-to-win display. Further, even when the first decorative design is performing the above-described pseudo-continuous variation, the second decorative design may not be configured to perform the pseudo-continuous variation. In addition, the second decorative design may not always be displayed. For example, the second decorative design may be hidden while the first decorative design is displayed, or the display area SG10 may be covered as a specific effect. When such an effect with a large display area is executed, the second decorative pattern may be hidden (difficult to see).

Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to the decorative design to be used in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, the structure which concerns on the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to 4th Embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbols are fluctuating, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is completed, and the big hit pattern "7A" is stopped as the stop pattern of the first main game pattern, so that the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped as big hit patterns. will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative symbols use Arabic numerals, which are symbols common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and "777" is stopped in this example. Also, as the second decorative symbols, Arabic numerals are used when the first main game symbols fluctuate, and when "7A" stops, "777" stops.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbols are fluctuating, and the first and second decorative symbols are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the variation of the second main game symbols is completed, and the big hit symbol "7B" is stopped as the stop symbol of the second main game symbols, so that the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are stopped as big winning symbols. will be displayed. As for the first decorative pattern, "777" is stopped. On the other hand, the second decorative symbols are configured such that when the second main game symbols fluctuate, alphabets are used, and when "7B" stops, "AAA" stops. Thus, in the first decorative symbols, the symbols used when the first main game symbols are changed and the symbols used when the second main game symbols are changed are the same (the display area of the symbols and the design of the symbols are the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbols, the symbols used when the first main game symbols fluctuate differ from the symbols used when the second main game symbols fluctuate (the designs of the symbols to be displayed fluctuatingly and stopped are different). are doing). Incidentally, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be displayed on the same display device, or may be displayed on different display devices. Also, the first pending display and the second pending display, which will be described later, may be displayed on the same display device, or may be displayed on different display devices. In addition, when displaying on different display devices for both the decorative pattern and the reserved display, each display device may be a liquid crystal display device (having a plurality of liquid crystal display devices), or a liquid crystal display device may be used. It is good also as a device and an LED lamp.

Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to a stationary display mode of decorative symbols in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that, similarly to FIG. 80, FIG. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbols are fluctuating, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game pattern is completed, and the big hit pattern "7A" is stopped as the stop pattern of the first main game pattern, so that the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped as big hit patterns. will be displayed. Incidentally, the first decorative symbols use Arabic numerals, which are symbols common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and "777" is stopped in this example. Also, the second decorative pattern uses Arabic numerals, and "777" is stopped.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main game symbols are fluctuating at a timing different from that in the upper part of the figure, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. After that, the variation of the first main game pattern is completed, and the jackpot pattern "7A" (the same jackpot pattern as in the upper part of the figure) is stopped as the stop pattern of the first main game pattern. The second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the big hit pattern. The first decorative design has the Arabic numeral "333" stopped, and the second decorative design has the Arabic numeral "777" stopped. In this way, even when the main game symbols have the same stop symbol, the first decorative symbol has a plurality of types of stop display modes ("777", "333", etc.), while the second decorative symbol is , When the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same, there is only one type of stop display mode ("777"). As a specific example of a candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, first, the stop display mode of the first decorative design is a stop display mode suggesting a 16R jackpot. are "333" and "777", and in the case of a stop display mode suggesting an 8R (or 8R or more) jackpot, they are "111" and "555", and 4R (or 4R or more) "222", "444", "666" and "888" in the case of the stop display mode suggesting a big win of . In addition, the stop display mode of the second decorative pattern is only "333" in the case of the stop display mode suggesting a 16R jackpot, and a stop suggesting an 8R (or 8R or more) jackpot. In the display mode, it is only "111", and in the case of the stop display mode, which suggests a 4R (or 4R or more) jackpot, it is only "222". In addition, as another specific example, the stop of the first decorative symbol suggests that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is made after the end of the big hit (the transition to the probability variation gaming state is almost definite (or definite)) Candidates for the display mode are "111", "333", "555" and "777", which do not suggest transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the jackpot The candidates for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol are "222", "444", "666" and "888". In addition, the candidates for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol suggesting a transition to the probability varying gaming state after the end of the big hit (the transition to the probability varying gaming state is almost definite (or definite)) are: 111", and the candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that does not suggest transitioning to the probability varying gaming state after the jackpot (it is not definite that the transition to the probability varying gaming state is performed) is "222". Only.

Next, FIG. 82 is an example of display priority in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, with those with high display priority shown in the upper row and those with low display priority shown in the lower row. In addition, when the display content with a high display priority and the display content with a low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when the right-handed instruction display and the first decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner , regarding the display of the overlapping part, the right-handed instruction display with high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so as to be visible), and the first decorative pattern with low display priority is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (hidden by the display of the right-handed instruction display and becomes invisible). The display priority in this example is, from the highest to the highest, as follows: "error display -> right-handed instruction display -> power saving display (power saving screen) -> second decorative pattern -> notice effect -> first decorative pattern -> hold display". . The display priority may be changed, but since the "error display", "right-handed instruction display", and "power saving display (power saving screen)" have a large impact on the profit of the player, display priority is given. It is undesirable to change the degree. Further, the order of display priority may be changed between the advance notice effect, the first decorative pattern and the reserved display, but the display priority of any of the advance notice effect, the first decorative pattern and the reserved display is the display of the second decorative pattern. It is preferable to configure it to be lower than the priority. In addition, it is desirable to display the "right-handed instruction display" in a position that is not obscured by other display objects (including character YK, etc.), and the display content with a higher priority than the "right-handed instruction display" has been newly added. In such a case, it is preferable that the area in which the newly provided display content is displayed does not overlap with the area in which the "right-handed instruction display" is displayed. In addition, regarding the "power saving display (power saving screen)", it is configured not to be displayed during the execution of the pattern change, and the power saving switch provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine and the sub input on the front side of the pachinko game machine Switching to the power saving mode by operating the button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc., and in the non-time shortening game state or the time shortening game state, there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side, This is a display indicating that the power of the gaming machine is in a power saving state during the fluctuation stop and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stop. It should be noted that the display during power saving (power saving screen) is displayed when there is no suspension on the first main game side and no suspension on the second main game side, during the fluctuation stop, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stop. Although an example is shown in which the standby movie is displayed at the timing of executing the standby movie, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Display a waiting movie while the fluctuation is stopped and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped without both the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold. After the standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds, the standby movie is terminated. When there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, while the fluctuation is stopped and 262 seconds after the fluctuation is stopped (after the standby movie ends), a power saving display (power saving screen) is displayed. After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) is continuously displayed.
(2) Display a waiting movie while the fluctuation is stopped and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped without both the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold. After the standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds, the standby movie is terminated. When there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, while the fluctuation is stopped and 262 seconds after the fluctuation is stopped (after the standby movie ends), a power saving display (power saving screen) is displayed. After the power saving display (power saving screen) is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 48 seconds), the second standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) and the standby movie are alternately displayed.
(3) Display a standby movie while the fluctuation is stopped and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped without both the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold. After the standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds, the standby movie is terminated. There is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and while the fluctuation is stopped, and 272 seconds after the fluctuation has stopped (10 seconds after the standby movie ends), the power saving display (power saving screen ). After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) is continuously displayed.
(4) Display a waiting movie while the fluctuation is stopped and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped without both the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold. After the standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds, the standby movie is terminated. There is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and while the fluctuation is stopped, and 272 seconds after the fluctuation has stopped (10 seconds after the standby movie ends), the power saving display (power saving screen ). After the power saving display (power saving screen) is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 38 seconds), the second standby movie is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, the power saving display (power saving screen) and the standby movie are alternately displayed.

Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that FIG. 7 illustrates a configuration related to a display mode of decorative patterns applicable to the fourth embodiment, and has a configuration different from that of FIG. 77 described above. First, in the upper part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and under the condition that the first and second decorative symbols are fluctuating, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (the game state is It is in a time shortened game state, and in the time shortened game state, it has a game property in which the game progresses by hitting to the right). After that, the area where the first decorative pattern is variably displayed overlaps the area where the right-handed instruction display is displayed, and since the right-handed instruction display has a higher priority, it is displayed on the front. In addition, the display areas of the second decorative pattern and the indication of hitting to the right are configured so as not to overlap each other.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbols are changing, and under the condition that the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are being changed and displayed, a flock of sheep appears as an advance notice effect. The display area of the notice effect overlaps both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and the priority is "second decorative pattern > notice effect > first decorative pattern", so the sheep is displayed. and the first decorative pattern are overlapped, the display of the sheep is displayed in front, and when the display of the sheep and the second decorative pattern are overlapped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the front. Become. It should be noted that, as in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment described later, when there are a plurality of holding display areas on the effect display device SG (holding display on the first main game side and holding display on the second main game side display exists, the first reserved display and the second reserved display exist, etc.), a new reserved display area SG10 is provided at the lower left of the display area SG10 in the figure (not shown). The holding display in the upper right part of the display area SG10 is set as the first holding display, and the newly provided holding display is set as the second holding display, etc.). good.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device SG, To provide a user-friendly game machine in which a player can check the status of decorative patterns even when he/she wants to check the situation by configuring the second decorative patterns to be displayed even when the first decorative patterns are erased. In addition, even when it is desired to show the performance to the player such as the SP ready-to-win performance, by erasing the display of the first decorative pattern, the performance desired to be shown can be made more conspicuous. Further, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative design to be higher than that of the first decorative design, when the first decorative design is hidden and the status of the decorative design is desired to be checked, the second decorative design can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to configure so that the situation in which the image becomes invisible is unlikely to occur.

In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative pattern may be displayed as a combination of three patterns, while the second decorative pattern may be displayed as one pattern. In addition, there are four types of stop display modes for one symbol in the first decorative design, two types of stop display modes for one symbol in the second decorative design, and so on. The number of types of display modes may be greater than the number of types of stop display modes for one symbol of the second decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the probability that the stop display mode of the first decorative pattern (the display mode of the combination of three patterns) is continuously the same over a predetermined number of pattern fluctuations is lower than that of the second decorative pattern. It can be constructed so that the probability that the stop display mode will be the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol variations is higher. In addition, two display areas of "○" and "×" are provided as the display area of the second decorative pattern, and when the pattern variation is stopped and displayed in the big hit (or small hit) pattern, the "○" is lit. It may be configured so that "x" is lit and displayed when the symbol variation is lost. In such a configuration, the display of the second decorative pattern does not move on the display area SG10, but blinks "o" or "x" to notify that the pattern is changing. may be configured as follows. In addition, as the display area for the second decorative symbols, two display areas, an area in the shape of "○" and an area in the shape of "☆", are provided. , and when the second main game pattern fluctuates, the variable display and stop display are performed in the "☆" shaped area, and "○" or The blinking of "☆" notifies that the pattern is changing, and when the pattern change is stop-displayed as a big win (or small win), the symbol "○" or "☆" is lighted and displayed. When the variation is stopped and displayed in the missing pattern, it may be configured so that "○" or "☆" is extinguished and displayed. The pattern used when the game pattern changes and the pattern used when the second main game pattern changes are the same (the display area of the pattern and the design of the pattern are the same, and the player only visually recognizes the first decorative pattern). Then, it is difficult to distinguish between the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol, for example, "777"). In addition, in the second decorative symbols, the symbols used when the first main game symbols are varied are different from the symbols used when the second main game symbols are varied (areas for variable display and stop display are different). (The design of the symbols for variable display and static display are different). Further, as described above, in the case where two display areas are provided as the display areas for the second decorative symbols, the area having the shape of "○" and the area having the shape of "☆", the first main game symbols When the big win (or small win) pattern is stopped and displayed, "○" is lighted and displayed, and when the second main game pattern is stopped and displayed with the big win (or small win) pattern, "☆" is displayed. When the first main game symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols, "○" is turned off and displayed, and when the second main game symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols, "☆" is displayed. When the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol that is the big win (or the small win) symbol, the symbol "333" is displayed. ", "777", etc. can be stopped and displayed, and when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, "326" or " 761” or the like. With such a configuration, the number of kinds of stop display modes of the second decorative symbols is stopped when the main game symbols (first main game symbols or second main game symbols) become a big win (or a small win). There is only one type of stop display mode that can be obtained, and only one type of stop display mode that can be stopped when the main game pattern (first main game pattern or second main game pattern) is lost, while the first decoration As for the number of types of stop display modes of symbols, there are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a big win (or a small win), and There are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when a game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed in detail on the effect display device, but such a configuration can be applied to the above-described implementation. It is not limited to only morphological configurations. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as Modified Example 1 from the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth modification 1). In 1), the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2400 .

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 84 in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2118-1 (fourth modification 1) and step 2118-2 (fourth modification 1). After the information is temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area, at step 2116, the design reservation information display control means SM22 turns on the design content determination permission flag, or at step 2111, the design reservation information display control means SM22 has not received the pattern variation display start instruction command from the main side, in step 2118-1 (fourth variant 1), the binding pending information display control means SM22 sets the binding pending counter value as the first pending display. The same number of pending images (lamp-shaped pending display on the effect display device SG) are lit and displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2118-2 (fourth variation 1), the binding reservation information display control means SM22 displays the binding reservation counter value as a second reservation display on the effect display device SG in numerical value, and then The processing (processing of step 2200) is started. In addition, the display mode of the second pending display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting and blinking of an LED lamp different from the display on the effect display device SG. It is sufficient that the pending display and the second pending display are different.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative design display control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth modification 1) of FIG. 84 in modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, at step 3502, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 3502, at step 3504, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design content decision flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 3506, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 3508, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the design variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. It should be noted that even if No in step 3502 , the process proceeds to step 3510 .

Next, at step 3510, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 3510, at step 3512, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 3514, the decorative design display control means SM21, based on the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the decorative design. Determine whether or not it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , go to step 3526 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the decorative design display control means SM21 performs decoration based on the design variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 3518, at step 3520, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 3526 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, in step 3522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect-related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM24b). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 3522, at step 3524, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image and reach image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3526 . It should be noted that even if No in step 3522 , the process proceeds to step 3526 .

Next, at step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game symbol is displayed from the main control board M side). (determines whether or not information indicating that the symbol is to be stopped is received). In the case of Yes at step 3526, at step 3528, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design stop display command (determined display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 2999). be done). Next, at step 3530, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 3532, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). do. Note that even if No in step 3510 or step 3526, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in pending display in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, in the upper left part of the figure, a first pending display and a second pending display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Incidentally, the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. Also, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are stopped and displayed. After that, the hold on the first main game side is canceled and the next symbol change starts, so that the first hold display related to the first main game side and the second hold display related to the first main game side change. (The display changes from the indication that the number of pending coins on the first main game side is two to the indication that it is one). After that, with the same pattern variation, a hold on the first main game side occurs (a game ball enters the first main game start port A10), and the number of holds on the first main game side changes. The 1st pending display on the 1st main game side and the 2nd pending display on the 1st main game side change (change from the display that the number of pending on the 1st main game side is 1 to 2) to do). In this way, the first suspension display and the second suspension display are displayed at the suspension digestion timing when the pattern variation is started and the suspension occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game start port. is configured to change.

Next, in the left middle row, a first pending display and a second pending display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side, respectively, are displayed. Incidentally, the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are variably displayed. After that, during the same fluctuation, a pending change effect (a effect in which the display mode of the pending can change) is executed as a pending look-ahead effect. It should be noted that the effect mode of the hold change effect shown in the same figure is a effect intended for the hold on the first main game side, and whether the display mode of the first hold display changes when the first hold display is hit by a flame. It is a production that incites whether or not. Thereafter, as a result of the pending change effect, the first pending display on the first main game side changes, while the second pending display on the first main game side does not change. Thus, only the first pending display can change when the pending prefetch effect is executed, and the second pending display is configured not to change. It should be noted that even when the hold change effect is executed for the hold on the second main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side can change, while the second hold display on the second main game side configured not to change. It should be noted that the pending prefetch effect is executed by the process exemplified in the above-described second embodiment and the like.

As shown in the figure, the features of the first pending display and the second pending display are as follows:
(1) When the number of reservations is the same, the display mode of the first reservation display can change, while the display mode of the second reservation display does not change.
(2) The display mode of the first pending display can change without an increase or decrease in the pending number (consumption of pending or occurrence of pending), while the display mode of the second pending display does not change without an increase or decrease in the pending number.
(3) When an action is executed on the display related to the suspension as the suspension change effect and the performance in which the display mode of the suspension changes is executed, the suspension display to be the target of the performance is the first suspension display, The suspension change effect is not executed for the second suspension display.

Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each game state in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the presence or absence of the display of the first pending display and the second pending display in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, applicable in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, and the display mode are shown. An example configuration is shown. First, in <<Example 1>> in the upper part of the figure, the first pending display and the second pending display are displayed in both the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state. The display mode of the first pending display is different between the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state (the first pending display related to the first main game side and the first pending display related to the second main game side are different). In <<Example 1>> in the upper part of the figure, the first holding display corresponding to the holding of the first main game side, the first holding display corresponding to the holding of the second main game side, and the first holding display corresponding to the holding of the second main game side A second hold display corresponding to the hold of and a second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side are displayed, that is, on the first main game side and the second main game side, Neither the first pending display (area where the first pending display is displayed) nor the second pending display (area where the second pending display is displayed) is shared.

Next, in <<Example 2>> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first holding display on the first main game side, the first holding display on the second main game side, and the first main game A second pending display on the side and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. In addition, in the time shortening game state, a first pending display on the second main game side, a second pending display on the first main game side, and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, a right-hand shot is executed in the time-reduced game state, and the second main game symbol is varied (the game ball is entered into the second main game start port B10) to progress the game. In the case of pachinko gaming machines (particularly in the case of a gaming machine in which the hold on the second main game side is prioritized over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is Since it is not very important for the player, the first pending display on the first main game side may be configured to be hidden. Also, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side, so the second reservation display on the first main game side is displayed. is configured as follows.

Next, in <<Example 3>> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first holding display on the first main game side, the second holding display on the first main game side, and the second main game is displayed, and the first pending display of the second main game side is not displayed. In addition, in the time shortening game state, a first pending display on the second main game side, a second pending display on the first main game side, and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, a right-hand shot is executed in the time-reduced game state, and the second main game symbol is varied (the game ball is entered into the second main game start port B10) to progress the game. In the case of pachinko gaming machines (particularly in the case of a gaming machine in which the hold on the second main game side is prioritized over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is Since it is not very important for the player, the first pending display on the first main game side may be configured to be hidden. In addition, in a non-time-reduced game state, a left-handed stroke is executed, and the first main game pattern is changed (a game ball is entered into the first main game start port A10) to progress the game. In the case of a pachinko game machine (especially when the second main game start port B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball executed left-handed), the hold on the second main game side is not very important for the player. , the first pending display on the second main game side may be configured to be hidden. It should be noted that, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second pending display on the side and the second pending display on the second main game side are configured to always be displayed. In addition, in the same figure, although the configuration related to the presence or absence of the hold display is different between the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, it is not limited to this, and the non-probability variation gaming state and the probability variation The configuration related to the presence or absence of the pending display may be different from the game state, and the configuration related to the presence or absence of the pending display may be different due to the difference in the production mode. In addition, the display mode of the first pending display is different due to the difference in the game state shown in <<Example 1>> above, but the display mode of the second pending display is not different. 3>> is also applicable. As described above in <<Example 1>><<Example2>><<Example3>>,
(1) When the game state is different (for example, between the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state, or between the non-probability variable game state and the probability variable game state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , the display mode of the first pending display is different, but the display mode of the second pending display is the same.
(2) If the production mode is different (for example, between the daytime stage in FIG. 77 and the night stage in FIG. 77, or between a predetermined production stage indicating that the pending prefetch production is being executed and a stage other than the prescribed production stage or according to one of a plurality of types of production stages that can be manually switched), the display mode of the first suspension display is different, but the display mode of the second suspension display is the same.
(3) When the game state is different (for example, between the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state, or between the non-probability fluctuation game state and the probability fluctuation game state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state) , the presence or absence of the display of the first pending display is different, but the second pending display is always displayed regardless of the game state (however, priority is given to the pending display such as the special game state or the error state). (It is possible that neither the first pending display nor the second pending display is displayed when there is information desired to be displayed.)
(4) If the production mode is different (for example, between the daytime stage in FIG. 77 and the night stage in FIG. 77, or between a predetermined production stage indicating that the pending prefetch production is being executed and a stage other than the prescribed production stage or according to one of a plurality of types of production stages that can be manually switched), the presence or absence of the first pending display is different, but regardless of which production mode is the second pending display is always displayed (However, in display modes such as demo screen display and error display, which have information to be displayed with priority over pending display, neither the first pending display nor the second pending display is assumed to be displayed. can also be used).
It has characteristics such as It should be noted that the above features are applicable to both the holding on the first main game side and the holding on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to erasure of the pending display in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, a first pending display and a second pending display corresponding respectively to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Also, the number of reservations is 2 on the first main game side and 0 on the second main game side. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game side are variably displayed. After that, the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win display with the same variation, and after that, the battle presentation is executed as the SP ready-to-win presentation with the same variation. During the execution of the battle effect, the first pending display is erased (hidden) for both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second pending display is displayed for the first main game side and the second main game side. Any display on the second main game side continues to be displayed. Thus, in the modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, the display area SG10 is displayed during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect in which the player pays attention to whether or not the pattern variation being executed will result in a big hit. It is configured to erase the first pending display in order to occupy (using most of the area of the display area SG10) and execute the battle effect. In addition, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second pending display on the side and the second pending display on the second main game side are configured to always be displayed. In the same figure, when the SP reach is executed, the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is not displayed, but the second Although the pending display (the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is illustrated as being displayed, it is not limited to this, and during the big hit (some period or all the time), the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second pending display (the second The second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) may remain displayed. In addition, at the time of execution of SP reach, the first pending display (the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second pending display (the first The second pending display on the main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side) remain displayed may be always applied during the execution period of SP reach, or in the execution period of SP reach May be applied to some periods.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment, two pending displays, the first pending display and the second pending display, are displayed on the effect display device SG. With regard to the first suspension display, the display mode changes to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit related to suspension, or the display is erased when the player wants to pay attention to the SP reach effect. The display mode (whether or not to display) is adjusted to suit the situation, and by using it as a part of the presentation suggesting a big hit or the like, the amusement of the game can be enhanced. In addition, the second pending display is always displayed and the display mode is configured not to change, so that when the player wants to check the current pending number, the pending number can be recognized without causing any doubt. is configured as follows.

Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment may be configured to display a pending digestion transfer image as exemplified in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. In such a configuration, the pending digestive transfer image corresponding to the first pending display may be displayed, and the pending digestive transfer image corresponding to the second pending display may not be displayed. The reserved display corresponding to the first reserved display is a display mode in which the reserved display mode is the same as or similar to the first reserved display. For example, the first reserved display is a display in the shape of "○". And, when it is displayed in one of the display colors "red", "green", "blue", and "white", the pending digestion transmission image corresponding to the first pending display is also "○ , and the display color is one of "red", "green", "blue", and "white". In addition, the display mode of the first suspension display immediately before the suspension on the main game side corresponding to the first suspension display is terminated, and the display mode is displayed immediately after the suspension on the main game side corresponding to the first suspension display is terminated. The display mode may be the same as that of the pending digestion transfer image.

In addition, when it is configured to be able to display the pending digestion transfer image, the configuration may be as follows. In addition, only one of the following configurations may be employed, or a plurality of components may be combined. In addition, a configuration that employs only one of them or a configuration that combines a plurality of components, and one or more of the configurations of <<Example 1>>, <<Example 2>>, or <<Example 3>> in FIG. 88 described above can be combined with
(1) In the non-time-reduced game state, the pending digestion transfer image of the first main game side can be displayed, but the pending digestion transfer image of the second main game side is not displayed.
(2) In the non-reduced time gaming state, both the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side and the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(3) In the time shortening game state, the pending digestion transfer image of the second main game side can be displayed, but the pending digestion transfer image of the first main game side is not displayed.
(4) In the time reduction game state, both the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side and the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(5) The pending digestion transfer image can be displayed in the non-time-reduced game state, but the suspended digestion transfer image is not displayed in the time-reduced game state.
(6) The ratio of displaying the pending digestion transfer image in the time-reduced gaming state is higher than the ratio of displaying the pending digestion transfer image in the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first main game side pending digestive transfer images are always displayed)
(7) The display mode of the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced game state can be changed during symbol fluctuation.
(8) The display mode of the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state does not change during symbol fluctuation (when configured so that the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side can be displayed).
(9) It is possible to change the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image on the second main game side in the time shortening game state during the pattern fluctuation. However, the rate at which the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced game state changes during pattern fluctuation is higher than the rate at which the hold digestion transfer image on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced game state changes during pattern fluctuation. less likely to do so.
(10) The display mode of the pending digestion transfer image on the first main game side in the time shortening game state does not change during symbol fluctuation (when configured so that the pending digestion transfer image on the second main game side can be displayed).
(11) The pending digestive transfer image is a first pending digestive transfer image and a second pending digestive transfer image, unlike the above-described pending display having two pending displays such as a first pending display and a second pending display. We do not have two pending digestive transfer images such as images, we only have one pending digestive transfer image.
(12) During SP reach, etc., the first pending display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89 described above, but the pending digestive transmission image remains displayed.
It may be configured as described above. Further, in the above, the configuration related to the display of the pending digestion transmission image in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state is described, but in the above configuration, ' may be replaced with 'non-probability varying gaming state and probability varying gaming state', or may be replaced with 'production mode A and production mode B'.

(Fifth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, as the display of the decorative patterns corresponding to one main game pattern, two displays of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG. , The configuration for simultaneously displaying two decorative patterns on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative patterns are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG, which is different from the configuration described above, is the fifth embodiment, and only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 90 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. A difference from the second embodiment is that a distribution starter unit C50 having a first main game starter A10 and a second main game starter B10 is provided. Details of the distribution starter unit C50 will be described later, but as shown, the distribution starter unit C50 is provided with a first main game starter A10 and a second main game starter B10. , The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. Also, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area is configured to easily flow down near the second main game starter electric accessory B11hd attached to the distribution starter unit C50. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is ON, the second main game start electric accessory B11hd is configured to be easily opened, so the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag is On), by executing a right hit, the second main game starter electric accessory B11hd opens and the game ball enters the second main game starter B10 (second main game A game ball entered from the vicinity of the starter electric accessory B11hd is configured so that it is difficult to enter the first main game starter A10 and easy to enter the second main game starter B10. ing).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG is configured as a second decorative design display area SG14 (hereinafter referred to as a sub-region SG14), which is an area in which the second decorative design can be variably displayed; A first decorative symbol display area SG15 (hereinafter referred to as main area SG15), which is an area where one decorative symbol can be variably displayed, and a common area that displays both the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold. It has a hold display part SG16 and a hold passage route SG17 through which a hold digested display, which is a display related to a digested hold, passes. In addition, above the performance display device SG, a movable accessory YK for performance is provided, which is driven when a performance such as an SP ready-to-win performance is executed to prompt the player whether or not the game will be a big hit. there is

Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and operation diagram of the sorting start port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution start port unit C50 includes a common ball entrance C51 into which game balls flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game that is provided below the common ball entrance C51 and flows down from the common ball entrance C51. A starting point distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left and right direction around a support shaft) that distributes balls regularly in the left and right direction, and a starting point distribution member C50y provided below the starting point distribution member C50y. A first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10 provided below the start port distribution member C50y. The sorting starting port unit C50 configured in this way causes the game balls that have flowed into the common ball inlet C51 to tilt in the left-right direction of the starting port sorting member C50y, as indicated by the dotted line in the figure. , it is configured to guide to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. For example, the case where the starting point distributing member C50y is tilting leftward is defined as the "first position", and the case where the starting point distributing member C50y is tilting rightward is defined as the "second position". position", the game ball flowing into the common ball entrance C51 is guided toward the first main game start opening A10 under the condition that the start opening distribution member C50y is at the "second position", While the starting opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position", the game ball flowing into the common ball entrance C51 under the condition that the starting opening distribution member C50y is at the "first position" Along with being guided to the game start opening B10 side, the start opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". In this example, the tilting motion of the starting port distribution member C50y in the left-right direction is performed by the weight of the game ball. , A game ball is alternately distributed to either one of the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 (after distributing one game ball to either one, one game ball is distributed to the other) It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls. In the fifth embodiment, parallel lottery can be executed, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are configured to be variable at the same time. , the holding on the first main game side and the holding on the second main game side can be generated substantially evenly, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols can be frequently changed at the same time. It is

Next, FIG. 92 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 1400 (1) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). By configuring in this way, it is possible for the second main game side to start changing when the first main game side changes, and also when the second main game side changes, the first main game side changes. can start (so-called parallel lottery).

Next, FIG. 93 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1407-1, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the first (second) fluctuation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation) and the first main game symbols are not in fluctuation (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbols are not in fluctuation). ), and the main game pattern is reserved, and the small winning game is not in progress. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, when executing the processing related to the first main game symbols, there is no problem even if the second main game symbols are fluctuating, but the first main game symbols are fluctuating. If there is, the fluctuation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

Next, at step 1407-2, the game content determining means MN reads the main game side random number. Next, at step 1407-3, the game content determination means MN deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts (holds) the remaining hold information. Next, at step 1407-4, the game content determining means MN executes a main game symbol win/loss lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, at step 1407-5, the game content determining means MN determines stop symbols for the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the winning/losing lottery result, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, at step 1407-6, the game content determination means MN draws based on the main game symbol win/loss lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, variation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, at step 1407-7, the game content determining means MN issues a command (a command to the sub-control board S side, such as a symbol variation display start command, etc.) relating to the determined main game symbol information and game state information. to set. Next, at step 1407-8, the game content determination means MN sets the first main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 (second main game symbol variation management timer) for a predetermined time period related to the variation time of the main game symbols based on the variation mode. Set the symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) and start the timer. Next, at step 1407-9, the game content determination means MN displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On part B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) is started. Next, at step 1407-10, the game content determining means MN turns on the first (second) fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, if No at step 1407-1, at step 1407-11, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the first (second) fluctuating flag is turned on. If Yes in step 1407-11, go to step 1407-12.

Next, at step 1407-12, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the first main game symbols (second main game symbols) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1407-12, at step 1407-13, the game content determining means MN displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as fixed stop symbols, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. On the other hand, if No at step 1407-12, at step 1407-14, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 1407-14, at step 1407-15, the game content determination means MN sends the first (second) forced stop execution command (a command to the sub side, and the first main game side has won a big hit). In this case, the second main game symbol will be lost and information will be sent to forcibly stop, and if the second main game side wins, the first main game symbol will be lost and information to be forcibly stopped is set). (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1407-16, the game content determination means MN displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbols on the part B21g) is stopped by changing the stop symbols to the losing symbols, the losing symbols are controlled to be displayed as fixed stop symbols, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbols stop at the big hit symbols, the second main game symbols that are fluctuating are forcibly stopped due to a loss, and the second main game symbols hit the big hit. When the game is stopped at a symbol, the first main game symbol during fluctuation is forcibly stopped due to a loss. In addition, when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is forced to stop due to a loss, a command to force the stop to the sub-control board S side is set immediately before the forced stop. (The effect when the sub-control board S side receives the command will be described later).

Next, at step 1407-17, the game content determining means MN sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation will end, to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1407-18, the game content determining means MN turns off the first (second) fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1407-19. Next, at step 1407-19, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1407-19, at step 1407-20, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device activation flag, and proceeds to step 1450. FIG. On the other hand, if step 1407-19 is No, the process proceeds to step 1450 without executing step 1407-20.

Next, at step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes the above-described specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). Incidentally, even if No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 are used to determine the variation mode of the main game table 3 and the second main game symbols used to determine the variation mode of the first main game symbols in the fifth embodiment. It is the main game table 3 that is played. Since the contents of the table are the same as those in the second embodiment, the description is omitted. It should be noted that the content of the effect corresponding to the determined variation of the main game symbols will be described later.

Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side in the fifth embodiment. Differences from the second embodiment are step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth) and step 3300 (fifth). When execution of (b), which is a repetitive processing routine of the main control unit SM, is started, in step 2050 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes symbol standby display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100. Transition. Also, after the sub-control board S executes the reservation information management process at step 2100, at step 2200 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes a decorative design display content determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to step 2300. do. Also, after the sub-control board S executes the first decorative symbol display control process in step 2300, in step 2350 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the second decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later. Go to step 2400 . Also, after the sub-control board S executes special game-related display control processing in step 2400, in step 2500 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes background effect control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 3300 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes a role product driving control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2999 .

Next, FIG. 97 is a flow chart of symbol standby display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. flag) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines that both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are newly stopped (the first decorative design is stopped and displayed). In the situation, the second decorative pattern is newly stopped display, or in the situation where the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the first decorative pattern is newly stopped display). judge. In the case of Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and displays the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t (which is an increment timer, and both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped). Start a timer for measuring the elapsed time since Next, at step 2058, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2060 also in the case of No in step 2052 .

Next, in step 2060, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t, and the timer value is the standby execution value (the decorative design stopped and displayed in the main area is placed in the standby state). It is a timer value, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has reached 20 seconds or more. In the case of Yes at step 2060, at step 2062, the decorative design display control means SM21 displays the decorative design stopped and displayed in the main area in a standby state. The standby state ends when either the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the right part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative design display area. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, there are first decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols and second decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols. and decorative patterns can be variably displayed at the same time, one of which is displayed in the main area and the other is displayed in the sub-area. It should be noted that the main area is configured so that the area that can be displayed is larger than the sub-area. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed in the main area are displayed with pictures and numbers, and the decorative patterns displayed in the sub-region are displayed only with numbers (numbers , the first decorative pattern is Arabic numerals and the second decorative pattern is Chinese numerals). In addition, as shown in the figure, both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped and displayed under the condition that the first decorative design is displayed in the main area as a pattern and a number. After 20 seconds have elapsed, the display of the first decorative pattern in the main area is changed to the display of only the pattern. This display of only the pattern is called a standby state. The main area and the sub-areas may be provided within the same liquid crystal (for example, within the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), or may be provided in separate devices. As a specific example provided in separate devices, for example, a performance display device A and a performance display device B are provided as performance display devices, the performance display device A having a main area, and the performance display device B having a main area. A sub-area may be provided, and in the case of such a configuration, the size of the display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A. good. Also, the number of effect display devices and the number of decorative pattern display areas (main area, sub-area, etc.) may be three or more (providing first area, second area, third area, etc.).

Returning to the description of the flow chart, at step 2064, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets and stops the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t. Next, at step 2066, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). . Note that even if No in step 2054 or step 2060, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100).

Next, FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display mode in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed in the main area are displayed with patterns and numbers, and the decorative patterns displayed in the sub-area are displayed only with numbers. The numerals in the pattern are displayed in Arabic numerals, and the numerals in the second decorative pattern are displayed in Chinese numerals. Also, the number of types of the first decorative design and the number of types of the second decorative design are four types each. In addition, although the details will be described later, the display mode of the decorative pattern when there is a trigger suspension that is a suspension related to whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed is the first sub-region symbol table or the second sub-region symbol table That is, the display mode of the first decorative design and the display mode of the second decorative design in the sub-region, and the display mode of the first decorative design when the trigger suspension exists And the display mode of the second decorative pattern is the same.

Next, FIG. 99 shows the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. Differences from the second embodiment are steps 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, in step 2128 (second), the drawing pending information display control means After SM22 deletes the pending information and shifts the remaining pending information, in step 2130 (fifth), the binding pending information display control means SM22 determines that the pending this time is the pending related to the first main game side. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines that the pending display variably displayed in the main area in the main route (holding passage route) passes. area, details of which will be described later) is set, and a command is set to execute a hold completion display (an effect that allows the player to recognize that the hold has been completed), and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2132 (fifth), the design reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the first decorative design and the second decorative design are in a standby state. do. In the case of Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 controls the sub-route (an area through which the pending display variably displayed in the sub-area in the pending passage route passes). , details of which will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). If No in step 2132 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, if the hold is completed on the first main game side, or if the hold is completed in the standby state, the hold is completed in the main route, and the standby display is executed. When the hold on the side of the second main game is terminated in a situation where no state exists, the display of the pending termination is executed in the sub-route.

Next, in step 2138 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is trigger pending in the pending. If Yes at step 2138 (fifth), at step 3050 (fifth), the drawing pending information display control means SM22 executes pending change display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2116 . On the other hand, if No in step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to step 2116 without executing the processing of step 3050 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of pending change display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fifth) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the pending digestion is the pending digestion passing through the first main route after the occurrence of trigger suspension. In the case of Yes at step 3052, at step 3054, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the trigger pending is a big hit pending. In the case of Yes at step 3054, at step 3056, the drawing pending change scenario determination table for the jackpot time is referred to, and the pending change scenario (to A scenario for determining when and how the pending display mode related to the trigger pending changes until the pattern variation is started is determined.

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big win and a table for a loss are shown as pending change scenario determination tables. As shown in the figure, the hold change scenario is the number of holds when the trigger hold occurs (the number of holds that will be digested before the trigger hold at the time when the trigger hold occurs), and the It will be determined by the result of the suitability of the symbol variation. In addition, the illustrated "before 1 fluctuation" is the pending display mode just before the trigger pending is digested, and the expectation of a big hit in the pending display mode of the "before 1 change" The proportion of the total of the cases of winning and the cases of losing) is "rainbow → red → blue" from the highest. In addition, the pending display mode is configured to be changeable for each pattern variation, but as the completion of the trigger pending approaches, the pending display mode does not change, or changes to a display mode with a high expectation of a big win. It is structured as follows. That is, it is constructed so as not to change to a hold display mode with a low expectation of a big hit as the trigger hold is being consumed, and is constructed so as not to impair the player's expectation of the trigger hold.

Returning to the explanation of the flow chart, at step 3058, the binding pending information display control means SM22 refers to the pending passing route display color determination table for jackpot time, determines the display color of the pending passing route, and performs the next processing ( processing of step 2116). In the case of No at step 3054, at step 3060, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the table for determining the pending change scenario for the time of failure, and determines the pending change scenario based on the number of holds at the time of occurrence of the trigger hold. do. Next, at step 3062, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 refers to the pending passing route display color determination table for failure, determines the display color of the pending passing route, and performs the next processing (processing of step 2116). ). Incidentally, even if No in step 3052, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2116).

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big hit and a table for a losing time are shown as reserved passage route display color determination tables. As shown in the figure, the display color of the hold passage route is determined by the result of the success or rejection of the pattern variation related to the trigger hold. The degree of expectation for the jackpot of the hold passage route display color (ratio of the hit to the sum of the hit and the loss of the trigger hold) is "Rainbow → Red → Blue → No change" from the highest. It has become. Although the pending passage route is configured to be determined only by the timing of the first pending release after the occurrence of the trigger pending, it is not limited to this, and is configured to be variable and changeable every time until the trigger pending is completed. may In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to configure so as not to change to a display mode with a low expectation of a big hit as the execution of the trigger suspension approaches, similar to the change in the suspension display mode (holding change effect) described above. . In addition, regarding the change in the display mode of the reserved display mode and the reserved passing route display color, although it is not specifically illustrated at what timing in the pattern variation, the notice effect at the start of the pattern variation and during the pattern variation It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed at various timings according to the effect to be executed, such as execution timing, when suspension occurs, and when suspension is completed. The change of the reserved display mode or the reserved passing route display color to a display mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit gives a sense of expectation. In the fifth embodiment, the display color of the suspended passage route SG17, which is the display color of the suspended passage route, suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit with the trigger pending (when the trigger pending becomes a big hit, the trigger pending is lost). The display color of the reserved passage route is more likely to change than in the case, or the display color of the reserved passage route is likely to be a display color with a high degree of expectation for a big hit), but it is not limited to this. It is displayed and has a display mode of the pending digestion transfer image, and when the display mode is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pattern variation related to the pending digestion transfer image, the pending passage route display color , the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image can be different, that is, it may be configured so that the degree of expectation for the big win suggested by the pending digestion transfer image can be different, or the ease of changing the display mode of the pending digestion transfer image They may be configured differently. In addition, depending on the display color of the reserved passage route, it is configured so that the performance contents of the pattern variation related to the digested reservation that passed through the reserved passage route SG17 can be different (the ratio of execution of the performance with high expectation of big hit can be different). You may

Next, FIG. 101 is an image diagram of pending occurrence display in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since parallel lottery can be executed, a situation in which the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold at the same time frequently occurs. However, the hold display is configured to be displayed on the common hold display portion SG16 common to the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. In addition, regardless of whether the hold that has occurred is the hold on the first main game side or the hold on the second main game side, (The most recent pending is displayed in the first area, and the pending display already displayed is "1 → 2 ” is shifted and displayed). It should be noted that the hold display mode is also the same for the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side. It is configured so that it cannot be determined whether it is a hold display on the side or a hold display on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 102 is a display image diagram of pending digestion in the fifth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the display in the common pending display section SG16 when the number of pending is four. As shown in the figure, two holds on the first main game side and two holds on the second main game side are displayed. No. 2 displays "B1" which is the second main game side's hold, No. 3 displays "A2" which is the first main game side's hold, and No. 4 displays "B2" which is the second main game side's hold. It is Under such circumstances, the pending display when the pending is being consumed will be described in detail below.

The middle part of the figure shows an example of the order of the symbol changes related to the above-mentioned four holds, and the lower part of the figure shows an example of how the hold display is erased in the common hold display section SG16. With reference to these, a detailed description will be given of how the pattern variation is executed and the pending display is erased in the fifth embodiment. First, when the pattern variation related to A1, which is the hold on the first main game side, starts to be executed, the hold display in the area No. 1, which is the hold display related to A1, is erased, and the remaining hold is shifted and displayed. be. The display in the common hold display section SG16 is "No. 1: B1, No. 2: A2, No. 3: B2". Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed at the symbol variation start timing related to A1. 10 seconds after that, execution of the pattern variation related to B1, which is pending on the second main game side, is started. The display in the common hold display section SG16 is "No. 1: A2, No. 2: B2". Thereafter, after 20 seconds from the start of the symbol variation related to A1, the symbol variation related to B1 ends. In addition, the symbol variation related to A1 is in the process of variation. When the symbol variation related to B1 is completed, the suspension related to B2 is canceled and the symbol variation is started. It is configured such that the pending indication of the first area that was being displayed is erased. That is, visually, from the state where the first and second areas in the common reservation display section SG16 are lit, the display in the first area is extinguished, and then the display in the second area is the first area. will be shifted to . On the other hand, since the hold actually completed is the hold related to "B2", the display in the first area is the hold display related to "A2". Thus, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the hold that is actually consumed is the first main game side or the second main game side, the hold display displayed in the first area is It will be erased (turned off).

Next, FIG. 103 is a holding passage route image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, the pending passage route SG17 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area SG10. The holding passage route has a main route through which the holding display variably displayed in the main region passes, and a sub-route through which the holding display variably displayed in the sub region passes. First, the left part of the figure is an example of a case where the pending digestion display when the pending is digested passes through the main route. In the situation where it is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area). A case will be described where "A1", which is held on the first main game side, is completed first. First, by digesting "A1", the pending display in the first area is erased, and the pending digested display moves toward the pending passage route SG17. After that, since the pattern variation on the first main game side related to the suspension of "A1" is executed in the main area, the suspension completion display related to "A1" passes through the main route and goes to the main area. Become. Next, the right part of the same figure is an example of the case where the pending digestion display when the pending is digested passes through the sub-route. In the situation where it is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area). A case will be described where "B1", which is pending on the second main game side, is completed first. First, by digesting "B1", the pending display in the first area is erased, and the pending digested display moves toward the pending passage route SG17. After that, since the pattern variation on the second main game side related to the suspension of "B1" is executed in the sub-region, the suspension completion display related to "B1" passes through the sub-route and goes to the sub-region. . Thus, in the fifth embodiment, depending on whether the symbol variation is executed in the main area or in the sub-area, the area through which the pending digestion display in the pending passage route SG17 passes is the main route. is configured to determine whether the

Next, FIG. 104 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process related to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that steps 2552 and 2578 are omitted. That is, in the fifth embodiment, even if there is a hold on the second main game side, the first main game It is configured to be able to execute the look-ahead effect related to the holding on the side. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the first main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time-reduced game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is also executed in the time-reduced game state. It may be configured to allow In addition, although it is configured so that the prefetch lottery on the first main game side can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of pending occurrence, it is not limited to this, and the main game pattern variation start timing and main game pattern variation. It may be configured so that the prefetching lottery can be executed even at a timing in the middle.

Next, FIG. 105 is a flow chart of second main game win time look-ahead determination processing related to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth). The SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the game is currently in the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2604. If No in step 2602 (fifth), the next process (process of step 2118) is performed.

In addition, when the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines in step 2608 that the new hold is a big hit hold, in step 2610 (fifth), the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines a predetermined probability. (In this example, 1/3) is executed pre-reading lottery at the time of winning, and the process proceeds to step 2620 . In addition, when the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines that the new hold is the hold of group C in step 2612, in step 2616 (fifth), the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines that a predetermined probability (In this example, 1/10). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, even when there is a hold on the first main game side, the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the second main game side can be executed. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the second main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time-reduced game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is also executed in the time-reduced game state. It may be configured to allow In addition, it is configured so that the second main game side pre-reading lottery can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of pending occurrence, but it is not limited to this, and the main game pattern fluctuation start timing and main game pattern fluctuation It may be configured so that the prefetching lottery can be executed even at a timing in the middle. Also, in step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the winning rate is the same as the prefetching lottery winning rate on the first main game side.

Next, FIG. 106 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2249-1, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 2249-1, at step 2249-2, the design display content determination means SM21n turns off the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2249-3, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. In the case of Yes at step 2249-3, at step 2249-5, the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly executed hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes at step 2249-5, at step 2249-6, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as the main area. Next, at step 2249-7, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the first main game symbols, and 1 Determine the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design. Next, at step 2249-8, the design display content determination means SM21n selects the first design content determination flag (according to the design variation on the first main game side) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag that is turned on when such content is determined is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

Further, in the case of No at step 2249-5, at step 2249-10, the design display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the pattern variation related to the newly digested pending pattern is a pattern variation from the standby state. judge. In the case of Yes at step 2249-10, at step 2249-11, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as the main area. Next, at step 2249-12, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the second main game symbols, 2 Determine the stop pattern and variation mode of the decorative pattern, and proceed to step 2249-15. In this way, when the decorative pattern newly starts to fluctuate from the standby state, it is variably displayed in the main area regardless of whether the decorative pattern is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern. is configured as follows. In addition, when the decorative pattern which newly started to fluctuate from the standby state is the second decorative pattern, and when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate while the second decorative pattern is fluctuating, the first decorative pattern fluctuates. Until then, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, but when the first decorative design starts to variably display, the first decorative design is variably displayed in the main area and the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-area. or even if the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the second decorative pattern is continuously variably displayed in the main area and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-area. It may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner. As described above, since the second decorative pattern is the second decorative pattern that has newly started to fluctuate from the standby state, when the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern is displayed. , The display of the first decorative pattern and the pattern in the main area are the same, and the display of the numbers is different (the first decorative pattern is Arabic numerals, and the second decorative pattern is Chinese numerals).

If No at step 2249-10, at step 2249-13, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as a sub-area. Next, at step 2249-14, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the second main game symbols, 2 Determine the stop design and variation mode of the decorative design. Next, at step 3100 (fifth), the design display content determining means SM21n executes main area interrupt processing A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, at step 2249-15, the design display content determination means SM21n selects the second design content determination flag (which corresponds to the design variation on the second main game side) in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. A flag that is turned on when such content is determined is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

Next, at step 3350 (fifth), the design display content determination means SM21n executes a performance content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 2300). If No at step 2249-3, at step 3150 (fifth), a prefetching display control process, which will be described later, is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2300). Note that even if No in step 2249-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). In the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbol starts to fluctuate in the standby state, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in the main area in a variable manner. However, it is not limited to this, and in situations other than when an interrupt effect is executed, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are always variably displayed in the main area (even in the standby state). Alternatively, the second decoration symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols may be variably displayed in the sub-region.

Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of effect display content determination processing related to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n reads out the result of the lottery for the symbol change based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, at step 3354, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the first decorative symbol effect content determination table based on the winning/failure lottery result and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and determines the symbol variation. The content of the production concerned is determined. Next, in step 3358, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines and temporarily stores the first half priority and the second half priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect contents related to the symbol variation, and performs the next process. (Processing of step 2300). The first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. Also, in the case of No at step 3354, in other words, if the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the second main game side, at step 3360, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n determines the result of the lottery and the second decoration symbol. Based on the variation mode, the second decorative symbol effect content determination table is referred to, and the effect content related to the symbol variation is determined. Next, in step 3362, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines the priority of the symbol change based on the determined effect contents related to the symbol change, temporarily stores the priority, and performs the next process (the process of step 2300). ). Note that priority will be described later.

Next, FIG. 108 is an example of a first decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the first decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the win/fail result of the first main game symbol and the variation time (fluctuation mode). The first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements for determining whether or not to execute the effect, are configured to be determined. It should be noted that the degree of priority is relatively higher in the case of a hit or fail result than in the case of a loss. In addition, when the variable time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variable time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority for the period before the start of execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the pattern change, and the second half priority is the priority for the period after the start of execution of the SP reach effect. Thus, the pattern variation (contents of effect) in which the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. It should be noted that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 109 is an example of a second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the second decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the win/fail result of the second main game symbol and the variation time (fluctuation mode), and the determined effect content causes an interruption. It is configured to determine the priority, which is an element for determining whether or not to execute the effect. In addition, unlike the first decorative design, the second decorative design does not have the two priorities of the first half priority and the second half priority, but has only one priority. It should be noted that the degree of priority is relatively higher in the case of a hit or fail result than in the case of a loss. In addition, when the variable time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variable time is short. It should be noted that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 110 is a flow chart of main area interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the second decorative design related to the design variation. Next, in step 3104, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n sets the interrupt enable flag (if the pattern variation of the determined second decorative pattern is A flag that is turned on when the variation is such that an interrupt effect can be executed is turned on. Next, at step 3108, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n sets the character initialization flag (orienting the movable accessory YK to the initial position) in the flag area of the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. flag) is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2249-15). Incidentally, even if No in step 3104 or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, after determining to variably display the second decorative design in the sub-region, the pattern variation of the second decorative design is interrupted (variably displayed in the sub-region It is configured to determine whether or not it is possible to execute the effect of exchanging the display areas of the decorative symbols and the decorative symbols variably displayed in the main area. Further, when it is determined that the second decorative pattern can be interrupted, the position of the movable accessory YK is confirmed, and when the movable accessory YK is in operation, the movable accessory YK is initialized. configured to control to drive to a position; By configuring in this way, although the details will be described later, at the timing of executing the interrupt effect (the first timing among a plurality of timings), the proportion of the movable accessory YK stopping at the initial position is increased. can do.

Next, FIG. 111 is a flow chart of the display control processing during prefetching according to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3152, the design display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly completed hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes at step 3152, at step 3154, the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly executed hold is not the trigger hold. In the case of Yes at step 3154, at step 3156, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as the look-ahead first area, and proceeds to step 3158. FIG. Here, in the fifth embodiment, during execution of the look-ahead effect (from the start of execution of the first symbol variation after the presence of the trigger suspension to the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension), the first decoration The display area of the pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured to change, and like the image of the effect display device during prefetching in the lower part of the figure, the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the lower left part of the display area SG10. 1 area is provided, and a look-ahead second area in which the second decorative pattern is variably displayed is provided in the lower right part of the display area SG10, and the look-ahead first area and the look-ahead second area are configured to have approximately the same display area. It is Also, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured to display only numbers, as in the case of displaying in the sub-regions. As described above, in the case where two effect display devices are provided, one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device with the larger display area) displays two decorative patterns (the first display device). The decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) may be configured to be variably displayed (or stopped).

Returning to the description of the flow chart, in the case of No in step 3154, in step 3158, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design to be "look-ahead first area→spread during SP reach", and step 3158. transition to Thus, in the fifth embodiment, during execution of the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension during execution of the look-ahead effect, the variation of the decorative pattern related to the trigger suspension is enlarged and displayed in the central part of the display area SG10, and the SP reach It is configured so that a production is executed. The decorative pattern that is not enlarged (for example, the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed) is variably displayed at a position that does not overlap the display area of the enlarged decorative pattern. All you have to do is Next, at step 3158, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the first sub-region symbol table based on the information about the stop symbols and the variation mode of the first main game symbols, and determines the stop symbols and the first decorative symbols. Determine the mode of variation. As described above, since the variation mode of the decorative design during execution of the look-ahead effect is determined by referring to the first sub-region design table or the second sub-region design table, the display mode of the decorative design is displayed in the sub-region. It is a display of only numbers similar to . Next, at step 3160, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the first design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next processing (step 2300 processing). ).

If No at step 3152, at step 3162, the design display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly executed hold is not the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3162, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design as the look-ahead second area, and proceeds to step 3168. In the case of No at step 3162, at step 3166, the design display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative design to be "look-ahead second area→expanded during SP reach", and proceeds to step 3168. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger suspension is the suspension relating to the first decorative design or the suspension relating to the second decorative design, it is enlarged and displayed at the time of execution of the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension. is configured as follows. Next, at step 3168, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table based on the information about the stop symbols and the variation mode of the second main game symbols, and determines the stop symbols and the second decorative symbols. Determine the variation mode. Next, at step 3170, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the second design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next processing (step 2300 processing). ).

Next, FIG. 112 is a flow chart of the first decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, after the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command for the first decorative design in step 2316. After the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative design in step 2324, after the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, Alternatively, if it is determined in step 2326 that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-win image, in step 2344 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 controls the main control board M It is determined whether or not the first forced stop execution command from the side has been received. If Yes in step 2344 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2336 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2344 (fifth), in step 2346 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the variable display area (if the look-ahead effect is not being executed, the main area or sub-area ) to set a stop display command (confirmed display) to stop the first decorative pattern with a forced losing pattern, and the process proceeds to step 2340 . It should be noted that the display mode of the forced losing design of the first decorative design or the second decorative design will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, FIG. 113 is a flow chart of the second decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 2350 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2366, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the second design content determination flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2366, at step 2368, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the second design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2370, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the second design fluctuating flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2372, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2374. It should be noted that even if No in step 2366 , the process proceeds to step 2374 .

Next, at step 2374, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second design fluctuating flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2374, at step 2376, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, at step 2378, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 performs the second decoration based on the second decoration variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the pattern variation start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2378, at step 2379, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the second decorative design (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 3200 (fifth).

On the other hand, if No at step 2378, at step 2380, the decorative design display control means SM21 changes the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative pattern has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2380, at step 2381, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit is sent to the SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2380, in step 2382, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the first composition variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2382, at step 2383, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image and reach image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). Note that even if No in step 2382, the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

Next, at step 3200 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes a main area interrupt process B, which will be described later. Next, at step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes at step 2384, at step 2385, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 refers to the decoration display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second main game symbol has been stop-displayed (for example, The main side information temporary storage means SM11b is referred to, and it is determined whether or not information indicating that the second main game symbol is to be stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes at step 2385, at step 2386, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the second decorative design stop display command (determined display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side sent to). Next, at step 3250 (fifth), the decorative design display control means SM21 executes main area interrupt processing C, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2390. FIG.

Further, in the case of No at step 2384, at step 2388, the decorative design display control means SM21 displays the second decorative design in the area (main area or sub-area if the look-ahead effect is not being executed) where the variable display is performed. A stop display command (determined display) for stopping at forced losing symbols is set, and the process proceeds to step 2390 . It should be noted that the display mode of the forced losing design of the first decorative design or the second decorative design will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Next, at step 2390, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, at step 2392, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the second design fluctuating flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). transition to Note that even if No in step 2374 or step 2385, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Next, FIG. 114 is an image diagram of a stop symbol display at the time of a big hit in the fifth embodiment. First, the case where the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area. After that, since the first main game symbol has stopped at the big win symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed in the main area ("777" in the figure). In addition, when the first decorative symbol is stop-displayed as the jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol is stopped-displayed as the forced losing symbol. It should be noted that the forced losing symbol of the second decorative symbol is "giraffe", which is stopped and displayed only when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the second decorative pattern is stop-displayed as a forced losing pattern, the background effect in the sub-region becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced losing pattern is stopped-displayed).

Next, the case where the second decorative symbol displayed in the sub-area shown in the lower part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area. After that, since the second main game symbol has stopped at the big win symbol, the second decoration symbol corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed in the sub area ("777" in the figure). Further, when the second decorative symbol is stop-displayed as the big hit symbol, the first decorative symbol is stopped-displayed as the forced losing symbol. The forced losing symbol of the first decorative symbol is "zoo", which is stopped and displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the first decorative pattern is stop-displayed as a forced losing pattern, the background effect in the main area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced losing pattern is stopped-displayed). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbols are forced to stop due to a loss due to the first main game symbols stopping at the jackpot symbols, the second decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. and a forced losing pattern of the first decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed when the first main game pattern is forcibly stopped due to the second main game pattern stopping at the jackpot pattern. are configured to have different display modes. Incidentally, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub-area are different. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be "blue" and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub-area may be "red". In addition, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub-area may all be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub-area may be the same. The display mode may be partially the same as the display mode (only the color is the same, but the pattern is different, etc.).

Next, FIG. 115 is a flow chart of main area interrupt processing B relating to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3202, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the second decorative design has arrived. In this example, the first interrupt timing is the timing five seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern, and it is configured to determine whether or not the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. there is In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the interrupt enable flag (it is turned on when the variation of the second decorative design itself can be interrupted in the above-described main area interrupt process A). flag) is on. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the fluctuation state of the first decorative design during fluctuation is in the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative pattern, the part before the start of the SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of the SP reach is the second half, and the variation in which the SP reach is not executed has only the first half. I'm assuming not.

In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines the first half priority of the first decorative design that is fluctuating in the main area and the priority of the second decorative design that is fluctuating in the sub-area. are compared, and the process moves to step 3212 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3210, the decorative design display control means SM21 gives priority to the latter half priority of the first decorative design that is changing in the main area and priority of the second decorative design that is changing in the sub area. degree, and move to step 3212 . Next, at step 3212, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative design is higher than the priority of the first decorative design. In addition, the priority of the first decorative pattern is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210 . If Yes at step 3212, at step 3214, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is not activated (when the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position , the effect mode of the interrupt effect when execution is started), sets a command to execute the determined interrupt effect, and proceeds to step 3220 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode at the time when the accessory is activated (the movable accessory YK is activated by other than the interrupt effect). state) is determined, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. In this way, when the priority of the second decorative pattern is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the first decorative pattern, the interrupt effect can be executed. It is configured so that the effect mode of the interrupt effect is different depending on whether or not the game is stopped at . In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the interrupt effect is executed when the degree of expectation for the big hit of the pattern change is high (the priority of the second decorative pattern is high), so it is conspicuous when the player sees it ( It is more suitable to execute in a flashy) production mode. Therefore, it is preferable to execute both the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10) and the operation of the movable accessory rather than only the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interrupt effect while the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as described above, when the movable accessory YK is activated at the time of execution of the main area interrupt process A, the movable accessory YK is configured to move to the initial position, thereby executing the interrupt effect. As the effect mode of , the ratio of selecting the effect mode when the movable accessory is not activated can be increased. Incidentally, the interrupt effect (interrupt effect executed at the first interrupt timing) in steps 3216 and 3218 may be referred to as a first interrupt effect.

Next, at step 3220, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command to switch the display of decorative designs between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to step 3222. It should be noted that even if No in step 3202 , step 3204 or step 3212 , the process proceeds to step 3222 . Here, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub-area, and the second decorative symbol (second main game symbol) is displayed. In the case of a big hit, if the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not changed, the second decorative pattern variably displayed in the sub-region smaller than the main region is the big hit pattern. , and the joy of the player's winning is reduced. Therefore, by executing an interrupt performance and using the variable display of the second decorative pattern to be the big win as the main region, the big win pattern can be stopped and displayed in the main region, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. .

Next, at step 3222, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative design is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3222, in step 3224, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative design has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative pattern is the timing five seconds before the end of the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern. In the case of Yes at step 3224, at step 3226, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative design being changed is a design change that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3226, in step 3228, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative design is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or higher. In the case of Yes at step 3228, at step 3230, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is in operation as an effect during variation of the first decorative symbol. In the case of Yes at step 3230, at step 3232, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, at step 3234, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command to switch the display of decorative designs between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2384). Note that even if No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228, or step 3230, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2384). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, even if it is not determined that the priority of the second decorative design is higher than the priority of the first decorative design at the first interrupt timing, at the second interrupt timing When the following conditions are satisfied, the interrupt effect is executed as the second interrupt effect.
(1) While the second decorative pattern is fluctuating in the sub-region,
(2) Variation of the second decorative pattern becomes a big hit,
(3) the priority of the changing second decorative pattern is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or higher;
(4) The movable accessory YK is not operating as an effect during the variation of the first decorative pattern.
When the above conditions are satisfied, an interrupt effect is executed.

Although not shown, the second interrupt effect is configured to be executed when the movable accessory YK is not operating, so the effect mode should be such that the movable accessory YK is activated. is preferred. Further, the performance mode of the second interrupt performance may be a performance mode in which the player can determine that the variation of the second decorative pattern is a pattern variation that will result in a big win when the movable accessory YK is activated. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area and the second decorative design is variably displayed in the sub-area, the interrupt effect is executed and the first decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area, and the second decorative symbols are variably displayed in the main area. When the variation is a loss, the timing when the variation of the second decorative pattern related to the interrupt performance ends, and when the pattern variation on the second main game side related to the interrupt performance is a big win, the timing of the end of the big win. , the first decorative design is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative design is variably displayed in the sub-area. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 117, but the third interrupt timing shown in FIG. It may be the timing just before the stop or the timing just before the fixed stop of the symbol variation. Furthermore, if it is the last timing of interrupt timings that exist in a plurality of times during one symbol variation period, it may be determined that the symbol variation is in progress. In addition, when an interrupt effect is executed, or when the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are exchanged, for example, when the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is performed. When the first decorative design is displayed in the sub-region and the second decorative design is displayed in the main region, the variable display of the second decorative design displayed in the main region is performed. Until the end, the display areas of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured not to be exchanged (during the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern in which the interrupt effect is executed, the next fluctuation of the first decorative pattern starts It is preferable to keep the second decorative pattern variably displayed in the main area even when the second decorative pattern is displayed.

Next, FIG. 116 is an image diagram of executing an interrupt effect in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of the effect mode when the movable accessory is activated is illustrated. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area. After that, 5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation of the second decorative pattern, and at the time of the first interrupt timing, the movable accessory YK is activated as an effect corresponding to the variation of the first decorative pattern. In this case, an interrupt effect will be executed, but since the movable accessory YK cannot be operated as an interrupt effect, the effect mode of "liquid crystal display only" (effect mode in which the movable accessory YK does not operate) ), an interrupt effect is executed. In the same figure, it is illustrated that the movable accessory YK, which has been operated as the effect related to the first decorative pattern, returns to the initial position.

Next, in the lower part of the same figure, there is illustrated an effect mode when the movable accessory is not activated. First, under the condition that the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed in the main area and the decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed in the sub-area, the second decorative symbols are displayed. Five seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, and when the first interrupt timing comes, the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In this case, since it is possible to operate the movable accessory YK as an interrupt effect, the interrupt effect is performed in the production mode of "liquid crystal display + movable accessory activation" (the effect mode in which the movable accessory YK is activated). will be executed. In the same figure, it is illustrated that the movable accessory YK is operating at the central portion of the effect display device SG as an interrupt effect related to the second decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 117 is a flow chart of main area interrupt processing C related to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3252, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative design being changed is a design change that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative design is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes at step 3254, at step 3256, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the third interrupt effect as an interrupt effect. Next, at step 3258, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command to switch the display of decorative designs between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2390). Note that even if No in step 3252 or step 3254, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2390). In this way, even if the interrupt effect (second interrupt effect) cannot be executed at the second interrupt timing, (1) the pattern variation of the executed second decorative pattern is a variation that becomes a big hit, and (2) execution. When both of the two conditions that the priority of the applied second decorative pattern is a predetermined value (3 in this example) or more are satisfied, a third interrupt effect is performed as an interrupt effect at the timing when the second decorative pattern is stopped. is configured to run In addition, the stop timing of the second decorative pattern is called the third interrupt timing. In addition, as the effect mode of the third interrupt effect, since the execution of the third interrupt effect = the start of the big win, the effect mode of congratulating the player as if the big win is confirmed, or the same effect as at the start of the big win. can be configured to run. Moreover, it is possible to adopt an effect mode in which the movable accessory YK is activated. In addition, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the third interrupt effect is different between when the movable accessory YK is in operation and when it is not in operation as the effect content related to the variation of the first decorative pattern.

Next, FIG. 118 is a flow chart of background effect control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2500 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines that the prefetching flag (flag that turns on when the prefetch effect is being executed) is off. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes at step 2522, at step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes at step 2524, at step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the timing for starting the variation of the decorative symbols in the first main area after the occurrence of the trigger suspension has arrived. In the case of Yes at step 2626, at step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the end of the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension, and based on the result of the trigger suspension, until the calculated time elapses. Determines the preview production scenario during the look-ahead. Here, the lower part of the same figure is an image diagram of execution of the forewarning effect during look-ahead. In the same figure, the preview effect scenario during prefetching is determined, and the state in which the prefetch effect is executed is illustrated. First, at the start timing of variation of the first decorative pattern after the occurrence of the trigger suspension (timing of start of variation of the decorative symbol whichever of the first and second decorative symbols starts to fluctuate earlier), the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension ends. By calculating the time up to, the pre-reading announcement effect scenario during the period is determined. After that, when 20 seconds have passed since the timing of starting the first symbol variation, the display of "Atsui" is executed as a notice of the dialogue. After that, when 40 seconds have passed since the timing of starting the first pattern variation, a cut-in effect is executed. After that, when 60 seconds have passed since the timing of starting the first symbol variation, an effect is executed in which the movable accessory YK is activated. After that, when 70 seconds have passed since the initial symbol variation start timing, the symbol variation relating to the trigger suspension is terminated. In the fifth embodiment, since the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are variably displayed at the same time, if the notice effect is executed based on the fluctuation time of one pattern change, the notice effect relating to any of the symbol changes is being executed, that is, it may be recognized which symbol variation is the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension, and the interestingness of the symbol variation related to the suspension other than the trigger suspension becomes low. put away. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, by managing the execution timing of the notice effect according to the elapsed time from the start of the first variation of the decoration pattern after the occurrence of the trigger suspension, the interest of the whole look-ahead effect is enhanced.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, at step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the prefetching flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, at step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "prefetching background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. In this way, the "prefetching background" is configured to be initially set when Yes in step 2526, that is, at the first variation start timing of the decorative pattern in the main area after the occurrence of the trigger hold. In other words, the timing of switching from the "normal background" to the "prefetching background" is the start timing of the symbol variation. Further, when the background effect is "background during prefetching", as described above with reference to FIG. A look-ahead second area in which the second decoration pattern is variably displayed is provided in the lower right part of the display area SG10, and the look-ahead first area and the look-ahead second area are arranged side by side and variably displayed in the same display area. It will happen. In the case of No at step 2522, at step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the pattern variation related to the trigger pending has ended. If Yes at step 2534, at step 2536, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the look-ahead flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2538. It should be noted that even if No in step 2524 or step 2526 , the process proceeds to step 2538 . Next, at step 2538, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "normal background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. If No at step 2534, at step 2540, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "prefetching background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fifth) process}. It should be noted that there is no problem with any display modes as long as the player can visually distinguish between the "prefetching background" and the "normal background".

Next, FIG. 119 is a flow chart of the character object driving control process related to the subroutine of step 3300 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect contents related to the symbol variation have been newly determined. In addition, in step 3302, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect other than the execution of the look-ahead effect has been determined. In the case of Yes at step 3302, at step 3304, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an operation schedule for the movable accessory YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes at step 3304, at step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK based on the variation mode and effect contents of the decorative symbols relating to the symbol variation, and proceeds to step 3314. If No at step 3302, at step 3308, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a new preview effect scenario has been determined. Incidentally, in step 3308, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect during execution of the look-ahead effect has been determined. In the case of Yes at step 3308, at step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an operation schedule for the movable accessory YK in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes at step 3310, at step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 activates the movable accessory YK based on the preview effect scenario during reading ahead, and proceeds to step 3314. It should be noted that even if No in step 3304 , step 3308 or step 3310 , the process proceeds to step 3314 .

Next, at step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the character initialization flag (the change in the second decorative pattern is an interruptible change). It is determined whether or not the flag for activating the movable accessory YK to the initial position, which is turned on when the movable accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position at the time of determination, is on. In the case of Yes at step 3314, at step 3316, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK toward the initial position. Next, at step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the character initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 3320 also in the case of No in step 3314 . Thus, in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the pattern variation of the second decorative pattern is an interruptible variation, if the movable accessory YK is operating from the initial position, the operation It is configured to execute the control of returning the movable accessory YK that is being held to the initial position. Next, at step 3320, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not it is now time to execute an interrupt effect. If Yes at step 3320, at step 3322, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the interrupt effect to be executed is an interrupt effect in which the movable accessory YK operates. In addition, as an interrupt effect in which the movable accessory YK is activated, for example, a second interrupt effect in which an interrupt effect (first interrupt effect), which is the effect mode when the movable accessory is not activated, is executed at the first interrupt timing. is executed, the third interrupt effect is executed, and the like. In the case of Yes at step 3322, at step 3324, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the movable accessory YK based on the effect mode of the interrupt effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Note that even if No in step 3320 or step 3322, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device in parallel. A lottery can be executed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side is set as the first decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side is set as the second decorative pattern, whereby the first main game side symbol variation and symbol variation of the second main game side can be displayed at the same time. In addition, the first decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area, the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the sub-area having a smaller display area than the main area, and the second decorative pattern displayed in the sub-area. When there is a high degree of expectation for a big hit in the pattern variation related to the above, the variable display of the decorative pattern desired to be shown to the player is performed by executing an interrupt effect and displaying the second decorative pattern in the main area. The main area can be made to look larger, and the game becomes more interesting.

(Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are displayed in the sub area. When the priority of the decorative pattern is high (for example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high), an interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area, but the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is defined as Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment, and only the modifications from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 120 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are steps 2249-16 (fifth modification 1) to step 2249-26 (fifth modification 1). If it is determined that there is no trigger pending within the . In the case of Yes at step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), at step 2249-17 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the decorative design display area as the main area. Next, at step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly completed hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the first main game symbols. Based on this, the first main area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8. On the other hand, if No at step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), at step 2249-20 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbols and variation mode of the second main game symbols. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the second decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8.

Also, in the case of No at step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), at step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determination means SM21n determines that the newly digested hold is the first main game side It is determined whether or not it is a hold related to In the case of Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display area of the decorative design to the design of the previous first decorative design. Determine the same display area as the variation. Next, at step 2249-23 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the first main area symbol table or the first sub symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the first main game symbols. The area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Further, if No in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-24 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the decorative design display area to the previous second decorative design. It is determined to be the same display area as the pattern variation of. Next, at step 2249-25 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determination means SM21n determines the second main area symbol table or the second sub symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbols and the variation mode of the second main game symbols. The area symbol table is referred to determine the stop symbol and variation mode of the second decorative symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth variant 1). Next, at step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the decorative design display area related to the design variation is a sub-area. If Yes in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), go to step 3100 (fifth); if No, go to step 2249-15. Thus, in the modification 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative design starts to fluctuate when not in the standby state, the previous design in both the first decorative design and the second decorative design It is configured to be changed in the area (either the main area or the sub-area) that has been variably displayed by the change. Further, in the case of the standby state, if the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, regardless of whether the decorative pattern to newly start fluctuating is the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, a new pattern from the standby state A decorative pattern that starts to change afterward is variably displayed in the main area, and a decorative pattern that starts to change later is variably displayed in the sub-area.

Next, FIG. 121 is an example of a second decorative symbol effect content determination table in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. In the modification 1 from the fifth embodiment, it is not fixedly determined which of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is mainly displayed in the main area. Similar to the decorative pattern, the determined effect content determines the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements for determining whether or not the interrupt effect is executed. It should be noted that the degree of priority is relatively higher in the case of a hit or fail result than in the case of a loss. In addition, when the variable time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the variable time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority for the period before the start of execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the pattern change, and the second half priority is the priority for the period after the start of execution of the SP reach effect. Thus, the symbol variation (contents of effect) in which the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. It should be noted that the priority is a number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 122 is a flow chart of the main area interrupt process A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 120 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3112 (fifth variant 1), step 3102 (fifth variant 1), step 3104 (fifth variant 1), step 3114 (fifth variant 1) and step 3116 (fifth variant 1). 5 Variant 1), that is, in step 3112 (Fifth Variant 1), the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub-region is the second decorative symbol. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3102 (fifth variation 1), the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the first half of the second decorative symbols related to the symbol variation. Next, in Step 3104 (Fifth Variation 1), the notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 3104 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3106. If No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Further, in the case of No in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the first half of the first decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. . In the case of Yes in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), in step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n sets the first half priority of the confirmed first decorative symbol to a predetermined value (in this example, , and 2) determine whether or not. If Yes in step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and if No, the next process (step 2249-15 process) is performed. Thus, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, both the case where the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in the sub-region and the case where the second decorative design is variably displayed in the sub-region are both Since it is configured so that the interrupt effect can be executed even in the case, it is determined whether the variation of the decorative pattern currently displayed in the sub-region is a change that can execute the interrupt effect. Further, since the timing of executing the process is the timing before the start of the SP reach (timing before the start of symbol variation), the first half priority is confirmed as the priority.

Next, FIG. 123 is a flow chart of the first decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is step 3200 (fifth variation 1), that is, after the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the variable display command for the first decorative design in step 2316, decoration is performed in step 2324. After the symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, or in step 2326 When the decorative pattern display control means SM21 determines that the display timing of the preview image or the ready-to-win image has not been reached, in step 3200 (Fifth Variation 1), the decorative pattern display control means SM21 performs main area interrupt processing, which will be described later. Execute B and move to step 2344 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 124 is a flow chart of main area interrupt processing B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth modification 1) of FIG. 123 in modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3236, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing decorative design is being changed in the sub-region. In addition, in the modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interrupt process B in FIG. When it is executed in the decorative design display control process, it is determined with respect to the second decorative design. In the case of Yes at step 3236, at step 3237, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing for the decorative design displayed in the sub-region has arrived. In this example, the first interrupt timing is the timing after 5 seconds from the start of variation of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols displayed in the sub-area at the first interrupt timing can execute the interrupt effect. It is configured to determine whether In the case of Yes at step 3237, at step 3238, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the interruptible flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 3238, at step 3239, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing state of the decorative design being changed in the main area is in the first half. In this example, in the variation of the decorative pattern, the part before the start of the SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of the SP reach is the second half, and the variation in which the SP reach is not executed has only the first half. and

In the case of Yes at step 3239, at step 3240, the decorative design display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative design that is changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative design that is changing in the sub area. , go to step 3242-1. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3239, at step 3241, the decorative design display control means SM21 divides the second half priority of the decorative design that is changing in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative design that is changing in the sub area. Compare and move to step 3242-1. Next, at step 3242-1, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the decorative design displayed in the sub-region is higher than the priority of the decorative design changed in the main region. determine whether It should be noted that the priority of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241 . In the case of Yes in step 3242-1, in step 3242-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3242-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is not activated (the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). 3242-5, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3242-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3242-2, in step 3242-4, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 changes the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the movable accessory is activated (the movable accessory YK is in operation), sets a command to execute the determined interrupt effect, and proceeds to step 3242-5. In this way, when the first half priority of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the sub-region is higher than the first half priority or the latter half priority of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the main region, an interrupt effect is executed. However, the effect mode of the interrupt effect is different depending on whether or not the movable accessory YK is stopped at the initial position.

Next, at step 3242-5, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command to switch the display of decorative designs between the main area and the sub-area, and proceeds to step 3242-6. Note that even if No in step 3237, step 3238 or step 3242-1, the process proceeds to step 3242-6.

Next, at step 3242-6, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the variation of the decorative design is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3242-6, in step 3242-7, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative design interrupt timing has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 3242-7, at step 3242-8, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative design being changed in the sub-region is a design change that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3242-8, in step 3242-9, the decorative design display control means SM21 determines whether the second half priority of the decorative design currently fluctuating in the sub-region is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more. Determine whether or not (the second interrupt timing is a timing after the SP reach start timing, so the second half priority is determined). In the case of Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative design display control means SM21 checks whether or not the movable accessory YK is in operation as the effect during variation of the decorative design being varied in the main area. judge. In the case of Yes at step 3243-1, at step 3243-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the second interrupt effect. Next, at step 3243-3, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a command for exchanging the display of the decorative design between the main area and the sub-area, and performs the next processing {step 2344 (fifth) processing. }. Note that even if No in step 3242-6, step 3242-7, step 3242-8, step 3242-9, or step 3243-1, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2344 (fifth) process}. In addition, in the modification example 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the interruption effect is executed and the display of the decorative symbols in the main area and the sub-area is switched, the decorative symbols are newly displayed in the main area. Whether or not the symbol variation associated with 2 results in a big hit, the display area of the decorative symbol after that is configured to be the display area after execution of the interrupt effect. Specifically, when the first decorative design is displayed in the main area and the second decorative design is displayed in the sub-area, an interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative design is displayed in the main area. , the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-region, and even if the result of the pattern variation of the second decorative pattern is a loss as a result of the execution of the interrupt effect, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main region in the next pattern variation. The pattern is displayed, and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-region. The third interrupt timing shown in FIG. 124 may be the symbol variation end timing=symbol variation stop timing, the timing just before the temporary stop of the symbol variation, or the timing just before the fixed stop of the pattern variation. may be Furthermore, if it is the last timing of interrupt timings that exist in a plurality of times during one symbol variation period, it may be determined that the symbol variation is in progress.

Next, FIG. 125 is a flow chart of the main area interrupt process C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 123 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are Step 3260 (Fifth Modification 1) and Step 3262 (Fifth Modification 1). It is determined whether or not the pattern variation of the decorative pattern that is fluctuating in the sub-region is the pattern variation that will result in a big win. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), in step 3262 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets the second half priority of the symbol variation of the decorative symbol being varied in the sub-region to a predetermined value. (In this example, 3) is determined (since the third interrupt timing is the timing after the SP reach start timing, the second half priority is determined). If Yes in step 3262 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3256. If No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2340).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment, two decorative patterns, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, are displayed on the effect display device. As a configuration, parallel lottery can be executed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the first main game side is set as the first decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side is set as the second decorative pattern, It can be constructed such that the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side are displayed at the same time. Further, among the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the decorative pattern whose variable display is started first in the standby state is displayed in the main area, and the decorative pattern whose variable display is started after that is displayed in the sub-area. Thus, the value of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be made equal, and the first decorative pattern is displayed in the main area and the second decorative pattern is displayed in the main area. By frequently changing the display case, the player can be made to pay attention to both the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side.

(Sixth embodiment)
Here, although some of them have been described in the above-described embodiments, an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the above-described embodiments is referred to as a sixth embodiment, which will be described in detail below. For example, a configuration including the first decorative pattern (first effect pattern) and the second decorative pattern (second effect pattern) described in the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern (first effect pattern) of the fourth embodiment In addition to the configuration of the image display that overlaps the design) and the second decorative design (the design for second effect), one or more of the configurations described in the sixth embodiment can be appropriately provided. Also, the configuration of the image display that overlaps with the hold display of the fourth embodiment may be changed to one or a plurality of configurations described in the sixth embodiment, or one or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate. Supplementally, it is not limited to the above-exemplified combinations, and as long as the configurations described in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, one or more configurations described in the sixth embodiment can be used as appropriate. It may be changed, or one or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate, including combination with an image display configuration that overlaps with the advance notice effect of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG.

<<Significance of terms>>
The significance of each term in the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configurations and effects related to the following terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Non-time reduction game state>
The non-time shortening gaming state is a gaming state showing a low-probability base state (normal gaming state). It should be noted that the high probability low base state in which the variation time of the main game pattern is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state and the time reduction game is not executed may be set as the non-time reduction game state.
<Effect of non-time reduction game state>
(1) Mainly, the game can be played on the first main game side.

<Time reduction game state>
The time shortening gaming state is a gaming state showing a high certainty-high base state and a low certainty-high base state. It should be noted that the time reduction game state may be a high-probability low base state in which a time reduction game is executed in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbols is relatively shorter than that in the normal game state.
<Effect of non-time reduction game state>
(1) Mainly, the game can be played on the second main game side.

<Decorative design (design for production)>
The decorative symbols are images that are controlled by the sub-control board S and suggest or notify the result of the winning lottery on the main game side, and have a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol. After starting the variation of the decorative pattern, it is temporarily stopped, and then fixedly stopped. In addition, it is configured to be capable of suggesting or notifying the result of the winning lottery on the main game side by the stop display mode (stop symbol) at the time of fixed stop.
<Effect of decorative pattern>
(1) The decoration pattern makes it easy for the player to recognize that the game is changing, that the game is waiting for a change, the result of the winning lottery, and the like.

<First decorative pattern (first production pattern)>
The first decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed so as to be easily visible to the player. It is a decorative pattern composed of image objects such as characters, symbols, and pictures. In addition, as a third element in the first decorative pattern, a color effect of the character-type image object itself (first element) such as a character-type image object, a color effect attached to the outside of the character-type image object, and a number image A color effect of the number image object itself such as an object (second element) or a color effect attached to the outside of the number image object may be provided. Furthermore, the first decorative pattern displays only the first element or the second element according to the game state (low probability low base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state) It may be an aspect. In addition, depending on the game state, the aspect of each element may be configured to be different. For example, in the first decorative pattern of "7", in the low probability low base state, the image object of the lion facing the front ( 1st element), but in other game states (for example, high probability high base state or low probability high base state), it is a sideways lion image object (first element), or in a low probability low base state An image object of the number "7" (second element), but in other game states (for example, high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state), an image object of the Chinese character "seven" (second element) Or, in the low-probability-low base state, the "7" image object or the effect around the "7" image object is red (third element), but other game states (for example, high-probability-high base state or In the low-probability-high base state), the image object of "7" or the effect around the image object of "7" is gold (third element), and in the low-probability-low base state, the lion image object is yellow (third element ), but in other game states (for example, high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state), the lion image object may be gold (third element). Also, depending on the game state, the presence or absence of each element may be different. ), but does not have a lion image object (first element) in other gaming states (for example, high probability base state or low probability height base state) (that is, only the second element and the third element, or , only the second element), or in the low-probability-low base state, it has a color effect (third element) attached to the outside of the "7" image object or the character-type image object, but other game states ( For example, high probability high base state or low probability high base state) does not have a color effect (third element) attached to the outside of the “7” image object or character type image object (that is, the first element and the first element 2 elements only, or only the second element). It should be noted that, like the game state, it may be configured such that the mode and presence/absence of each element are different depending on the stage or mode.
<Effect of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the production during fluctuation.
(2) The result of the game can be notified by stopping the display of the first decorative symbol.

<Second decorative pattern (second production pattern)>
The second decorative design is a decorative design that indicates that it is fluctuating at all times or when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative design or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative design, and is the first decorative design. A decorative pattern composed of image objects such as numbers (including Chinese numerals), alphabets, letters, symbols, and patterns that are the same or similar to the second element of the second element, and is smaller than the second element of the first decorative pattern ing. Although the second decorative pattern is composed only of the second element and does not include the first element or the third element, the second decorative pattern is the same as or similar to the first element of the first decorative pattern. However, a first element smaller than the first element of the first decorative pattern may be attached. Also, a third element that is the same as or similar to the third element of the first decorative pattern may be attached.
<Effect of second decorative pattern>
(1) In the case of constant display: The second decorative symbol can notify the result of the game by definitely stop-displaying it.
(2) When the first decorative design is difficult or invisible 1: When the first decorative design is definitely stop-displayed, the second decorative design may also be definitely stop-displayed, but the second decorative design is is preferably displayed (temporary stop) only when it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative pattern or the first decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized without definitely stopping display. In this case, the game is played with this temporary stop display. can report the results of
(3) When the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be seen 2: The second decorative pattern is only variable display without temporary stop display and definite stop display, and the first decorative pattern is difficult or visible Even if it is not possible, it is possible to clearly notify that it is changing.

<Pattern variation of the first decorative pattern>
The first decorative symbol is in a form that is temporally synchronized with the fluctuations of the main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol), and is faster than the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The change is performed in the display area SG10 in an easily visible manner. In addition, the fluctuation from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern or the start of the re-fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time is called an accelerated fluctuation, and the fluctuation after the elapse of the predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern or the start of the re-fluctuation is called high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation from high-speed fluctuation to temporary stop or definite stop is called deceleration fluctuation. In the case of high-speed fluctuation, the first decorative pattern is in a transparent state (for example, the transparency of the first decorative pattern is set to 50, which is semi-transparent out of 0 to 100, and is displayed behind the first decorative pattern. In addition, the background image of the production stage, which has a lower display priority than the first decorative pattern, can be visually recognized through the first decorative pattern). When fluctuating and decelerating fluctuating, the first decorative pattern is in a non-transmissive state (for example, the transparency of the first decorative pattern is set to 0, which is completely opaque from 0 to 100, and the first decorative pattern The background image of the performance stage displayed on the rear surface and having a lower display priority than the first decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized through the first decorative pattern), and the player can easily visually recognize the background image. As a modification, the decorative pattern may be non-display during the above-described high-speed fluctuation period.
<Effect of design variation of the first decorative design>
(1) The first decorative symbol can make it easier for the player to recognize that it is changing.

<Pattern variation of the second decorative pattern>
The second decorative symbols fluctuate in time synchronization with the fluctuations of the main game symbols (first main game symbols, second main game symbols) and the first decorative symbols. The second decorative symbols are variably displayed at a constant speed without acceleration or deceleration so that the player can confirm that the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols are always changing during the variation, and are displayed in a transparent state. However, similar to the first decorative pattern, acceleration fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, and deceleration fluctuation may be performed, and it may be in a transparent state.
<Effect of design variation of the second decorative design>
(1) The second decorative pattern can clearly notify that the first decorative pattern is changing even when the first decorative pattern is difficult or invisible, and the player can recognize that it is changing. can be made easier.

<Main area>
The main area is a display area (first decorative design display area SG15) for displaying the first decorative design. The first decorative pattern is variably displayed or statically displayed in the main area.
<Effect of main area>
(1) A first decorative pattern can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to perform variable display rich in performance.

<Sub-area>
The sub-region is a display region (second decorative design display region SG14) for displaying the second decorative design. The second decorative pattern is variably displayed or statically displayed within the sub-region.
<Effect of sub-area>
(1) A second decorative pattern can be displayed.

<Waiting for change>
The variable waiting state is a state in which the main game symbols and the decorative symbols are not changed. During the fluctuation stop, it may also be referred to as a fluctuation stop state.
<Effects during variable standby>
(1) During variable standby, it is possible to notify that the game is not in progress.

<Standby movie (standby demo screen)>
The waiting movie is a display of a moving image showing the player that there is no change.
<Effect of standby movie>
(1) By displaying a waiting movie, it is possible to suggest that the table is empty and that a game can be played.

<Hold display>
The pending display is an image that is controlled by the sub-control board S and shows the number of variations that have not been executed on the main game side.
<Effect of pending display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the unchanged number.

<First hold display>
The first pending display is a pending display that is displayed so that the player can easily view it.
<Effect of the first hold display>
(1) Players can perceive unchanging numbers.
(2) The possibility of winning can be suggested by changing the display mode of the first pending display.

<Second hold display>
The second reserved display is a reserved display which is displayed so as to be visible to the player at all times or when the player has difficulty in visually recognizing the first reserved display or when the player cannot visually recognize the first reserved display.
<Effect of second hold display>
(1) Players can perceive unchanging numbers.

<First reserved display area>
The first reserved display area SG12 is an area for displaying the first reserved display. A display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display may be performed.
<Effect of the first reserved display area>
(1) A first pending display can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to display the upper limit number of the first pending display.

<Second reserved display area>
The second pending display area SG13 is an area for displaying the second pending display.
<Effect of second reserved display area>
(1) A second pending display can be displayed.

<Shift Display (Shift Animation)>
A shift display (shift animation) is a display of a moving image when the first pending display displayed when the pending number is decreased.
<Effect of shift display (shift animation)>
(1) It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the number of reservations has decreased.

<Pending Occurrence Display (Pending Occurrence Animation)>
A pending occurrence display (a pending occurrence animation) is a display of a moving image when a new first pending display is displayed when the pending number increases.
<Effect of Occurrence Display (Pending Occurrence Animation)>
(1) It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the number of reservations has increased.

<Reservation display for production of the relevant fluctuation (reservation digestion transmission image, fluctuation corresponding image)>
The suspension display for effecting the variation is also referred to as a suspension digestion transmission image or a variation corresponding image, and is an image displayed when a certain suspension is digested.
<Effect of pending display for production of the change>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning with respect to fluctuations that are currently fluctuating.

<Reserved display area for effecting the change>
The suspension display area for effecting the change is an area for displaying an image to be displayed when a certain suspension is completed.
<Effect of the reserved display area for effecting the change>
(1) It is possible to display a pending display for effecting the change.
(2) It can be suggested that the pending display for effecting the change is displayed.

<Display Priority>
The display priority indicates the priority of the images and moving images displayed on the effect display device (the order in which they are displayed from the front side of the effect display device).
<Effect of display priority>
(1) When a plurality of images or moving images are displayed in an overlapping manner, it can be configured so that the player can easily see the images or moving images.

<Volume adjustment screen display>
The volume adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that volume adjustment is possible, and displays an image that indicates the currently set volume, the volume adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of volume adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that volume adjustment is possible.
(2) A player can easily adjust the volume.

<Light intensity adjustment screen display>
The light amount adjustment screen display indicates that the light amount can be adjusted, and displays an image showing the currently set light amount, the light amount adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of light intensity adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the amount of light can be adjusted.
(2) A player can easily adjust the amount of light.

<Stage (production stage)>
A stage (production stage) is also called a mode (production mode), and is a production mode indicated by a background image.
<Effect of stage (production stage)>
(1) Display corresponding to the stage (first decorative pattern, advance notice, etc.) can be performed.

<Concealment Mode (Concealment Stage)>
The latent mode (latent stage) is a production stage (production mode) in which it is unclear whether the game state is a variable probability game state or a non-variable probability game state.
<Effect of latent mode>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state.

<Tempai>
Tenpai is also known as reach or reach state, and the symbol rows other than the symbol row that is scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end among multiple symbol rows are the same decorative symbols, and are scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end. This is a state in which the symbol row of is fluctuating.
<Effect of Tenpai>
(1) If the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol stopped in another symbol row is stopped in one more symbol row, it can be indicated that it is a win.

<Reach production>
The ready-to-win effect is a effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning of the variation, and is a effect that occurs mainly after Tenpai. The reach effects include normal reach (normal reach effect), super reach (super reach effect, SP reach effect, SP reach effect, first half of super reach, latter half of super reach), and the like. Mainly, the period from the establishment of reach until the development to super reach (or, if it does not become super reach, the period from the establishment of reach to the stop (temporary stop) of all symbols) is called normal reach, and it develops after the establishment of reach. The production is called super reach (also called post-reach development production).
<Effect of reach performance>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of hit expectation of the variation.

<Notice (notice display, production)>
The notice (notice display, effect) is mainly to suggest the degree of expectation of the change, but it can be used to suggest that there is a hit within the hold (eg: pre-reading notice, pre-reading effect, etc.) There is also
<Effect of notice (notice display, effect)>
(1) It is possible to incite whether the variation is a hit or not.
(2) It is possible to incite whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
Temporary stop (temporary stop display) means that the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and it appears that the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, but in fact, the decorative pattern is slightly moving (also called shaking fluctuation). is).
<Effect of temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
(1) It is possible to make it appear as if multiple fluctuations are being performed.
(2) It is possible to influence whether or not to make a definite stop (in other words, whether to change again without making a definite stop, or whether to win without making a definite stop, etc.).

<Pseudo Ren>
Pseudo-run, which is also called re-fluctuation in a broad sense, is an effect that makes it appear that the decorative pattern is fluctuating multiple times in one fluctuation.
<Effect of pseudo-ream>
(1) It is possible to make it appear as if the decorative pattern is changing multiple times within one change.

<Pseudo ream suggestion pattern>
The pseudo-run suggestive symbol is one of the special decorative symbols displayed when prompting whether or not a pseudo-run will occur.
<Effect of pseudo-representation pattern>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not a pseudo-run will occur.

<Pseudo consecutive (re-fluctuation) pattern>
A pseudo-run (re-fluctuation) symbol is one of special decoration symbols indicating that a pseudo-run (re-fluctuation) will occur.
<Effect of pseudo consecutive (re-fluctuation) pattern>
(1) It is possible to deterministically notify the occurrence of pseudo-running (re-fluctuation).

<Development pattern>
The development pattern is one of the special decorative patterns indicating that the ready-to-win effect will occur.
<Effect of development pattern>
(1) It is possible to definitely notify that the ready-to-win effect will occur.

<Look-ahead performance>
The look-ahead effect is a effect that suggests that there is a hit in the hold. On the condition that the trigger suspension has occurred (when it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension that has occurred), the look-ahead effect is executed.
<Effect of look-ahead effect>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Trigger pending>
The trigger suspension is a suspension that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect (determined to execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension that has occurred).
<Effect of holding trigger>
(1) It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect.
(2) It is possible to suggest the possibility of winning by the fluctuation of the trigger pending.

<Right shot instruction display>
The right-handed instruction display is based on the premise that the second main game start opening or the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the board, but is mainly displayed in the time-reduced game state, indicating that the right-handed should be executed. is displayed.
<Effect of right-handed instruction display>
(1) In the time shortening game state, the player can be urged to hit to the right.

<Hitting method warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display)>
The hitting warning display is a display that indicates the recommended hitting when the hitting is different from the recommended hitting in the current game state.
(1) It is possible to urge the player to perform a beating method corresponding to the game state.

<Default display>
The default display is a display mode determined in advance as an initial state.
<Effect of default display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the display is in the initial state.

<Effect display>
The effect display is a special effect displayed on the performance display device for the image itself, the movement of the character in the moving image, the movement of the movable accessory, and the like.
<Effect display effect>
(1) It is possible to emphasize the image itself, the movement of a character in a moving image, the movement of a movable accessory, and the like.

<Full rotation>
The full-rotation effect is a state in which the first decorative symbols or the second decorative symbols are scrolled at a low speed while the symbols are aligned.
<Effect of full rotation>
(1) It is possible to definitely notify that the variation will be a hit.

<Promotion performance>
The promotion production is a production that incites whether or not it is changed from a non-probability variation pattern to a probability variation pattern or whether it is changed from a low round per (for example, 4R per) to a high round per (for example, 16R per). It is a performance. A promotion performance can occur not only during fluctuation but also during a big win. The promotion effect that incites whether or not the non-probability pattern is changed to the probability pattern is called the probable promotion effect, and the promotion effect that instigates whether or not the low round hit is changed to the high round hit is sometimes called the round promotion effect.
<Effect of promotion production>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not the non-probability variation pattern is changed to the probability variation pattern.
(2) It is possible to incite whether or not to change from a low round hit to a high round hit.

<Reach Voice>
A reach voice is an announcement suggesting the degree of expectation of winning or the like by a sound generated when a reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has passed since the reach is established.
<Effect of Reach Voice>
(1) When it becomes a reach, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning in combination with image display, movement of movable accessories, and the like.

<Action at start of fluctuation (operation at start)>
The first decorative pattern is a special pattern action (first element such as a character, second element such as a number, third element such as a color effect, etc.) , a combination of these or any one or more elements, compared to immediately before the start of fluctuation (at the time of display of stoppage of fluctuation), enlarges, shrinks, rotates, emits light, or adds one or more elements to any one or more elements Or, operation such as deleting one or more elements from a combination of a plurality of elements) can start pattern variation. And, the action at the start of fluctuation is action A at the start of fluctuation, action with a flashier pattern than action A at the start of fluctuation (the action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the magnification is high, the rotation is There are multiple types such as action B at the start of fluctuation, which is fast, strong light emission, etc.). It is configured such that the action B at the start of variation is more likely to occur than the pattern variation. In other words, the action B at the start of fluctuation is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than the action A at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in the time shortening game state, it is preferable to start without an action at the start of fluctuation, but it may be accompanied with an action at the start of fluctuation. It is preferable to configure so that the possibility of an action at the start of variation is lower than in the non-time-reduced gaming state in order to proceed. In addition, when starting the pattern change that becomes a pseudo-continuation or reach effect, or when starting the normal pattern change of the losing before the trigger suspension of the look-ahead effect, the first decoration of the left column, the middle column, and the right column The pattern is configured to start changing with an action at the start of the change, and in the normal pattern change of the losing pattern without the pseudo-running or the ready-to-win production, the pseudo-running or the ready-to-win production, or the losing pattern fluctuation without the look-ahead production. may be configured so as not to accompany the action at the start of variation when starting the symbol variation. As for the second decorative design, it is preferable not to execute the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, but the same action at the time of starting the fluctuation as for the first decorative design may be executed.
<Effect of action at the start of fluctuation (action at start)>
(1) The start timing of fluctuation can be clearly indicated by starting the fluctuation with the action at the start of fluctuation. In addition, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for winning or the like at the timing of the start of variation.

A specific example of adding one or more elements to any one or more elements as an action at the start of fluctuation is as follows.
(1) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed only of the first element, but when the fluctuation starts, the second element is added, and the first decorative pattern is composed of the first element and the second element. Executes the action at start of fluctuation.
(2) The first decorative design just before the start of fluctuation consists of only the first element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first decorative design consists of the first element and the third element. Executes the action at start of fluctuation.
(3) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed only of the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the first element is added, and the first decorative pattern is composed of the first element and the second element. Executes the action at start of fluctuation.
(4) The first decorative design immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed only of the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first decorative design composed of the second element and the third element Executes the action at start of fluctuation.
(5) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the first element and the second element, but when the fluctuation starts, the third element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern composed of.
(6) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the first element and the third element, but when the fluctuation starts, the second element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern composed of.
(7) The first decorative pattern immediately before the start of fluctuation is composed of the second element and the third element, but when the fluctuation starts, the first element is added, and the first element, the second element, and the third element. Execute the action at the start of fluctuation with the first decorative pattern composed of.
The above (1) to (7) may be actions at the start of fluctuation by all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns, or any of the left, middle, and right columns. The action at the start of fluctuation may be by one column, or the action at the start of fluctuation may be by any two of the left, middle, and right columns.

<Fixed position action (Fixed position operation)>
For any of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column, when the pattern variation is temporarily stopped after starting (at the timing of the temporary stop immediately after the temporary stop), a special Symbol actions can be executed. And the fixed position action is a fixed position action A, and a more flashy pattern action than the fixed position action A (action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the magnification is high, the rotation is fast, the light is emitted There are multiple types such as fixed-position action B, which is strong, etc.), and high-expected pattern variations such as pseudo-runs and reach effects are better than low-expectation normal symbol variations that do not lead to pseudo-runs and reach effects. , and the fixed-position action B is configured to occur easily. That is, the fixed-position action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than the fixed-position action A. The fixed position action may be executed at a timing different from that of the action at the start of variation, and the action may be the same action as the action at the start of variation, or may be similar to or different from the action at the start of variation. In the case of an action different from the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action may be such that the first decorative pattern is enlarged at a lower position than the first decorative pattern of the action at the start of fluctuation and then returned to the upper position. Also, as for the fixed position action, different fixed position actions may be executed according to the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element , first element type, second element type). When performing a positional action corresponding to the type of the first decorative symbol (e.g., the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion , a lion performs a pounce action, and if the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action of waving both hands. Further, a fixed-position action dedicated to the chance look-ahead effect may be provided to be used when fixing and stopping the chance symbol combination in the chance look-ahead effect. An example of this fixed-position action dedicated to the look-ahead effect is to perform an action to make the first decorative pattern bounce, and then perform an action to expand it. In addition, in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to temporarily stop without a fixed position action, but it may be accompanied by a fixed position action. It is preferable to configure so that the possibility of accompanying the fixed position action is lower than the non-time shortening game state. In addition, when temporarily stopping the first decorative pattern of the pattern fluctuation that becomes a pseudo-continuation or ready-to-win production, or when temporarily stopping the first decorative pattern in a losing pattern fluctuation before the trigger suspension of the look-ahead production, left column, right In the display area (fixed position display area) where the first decorative pattern of the row is temporarily stopped, it is configured to be temporarily stopped with a fixed position action, and pseudo-continuous and ready-to-win effects are not produced. The first decorative symbols in the left column and the right column may be configured so as not to be accompanied by the fixed position action in the normal pattern variation of the losing pattern which is not accompanied by the pattern variation of the losing pattern or the look-ahead effect. Although it is preferable not to execute the fixed position action for the second decorative design, the same fixed position action as for the first decorative design may be executed. In the pattern variation that becomes a pseudo run, if the first decorative symbols in the middle row temporarily stop and then change again, the first decorative symbols in the middle row may also perform the fixed position action in the fixed position display area. .
<Effect of fixed position action (fixed position operation)>
(1) Temporary stop timing can be clearly indicated by temporarily stopping the first decorative symbol with a fixed position action. In addition, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning and the like.

<Shaking action (shaking motion)>
The first decorative symbol can execute a swing action, which is a special symbol action, during symbol fluctuation or during a fluctuation standby state (fixed stop state). A state in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped and neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held is referred to as a variable standby state. For example, if the pattern is fluctuating, the shaking action (also referred to as shaking fluctuation) is executed after the first decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped. A shaking action is executed when a predetermined time elapses after the first decorative symbols in the middle row and right row are fixed and stopped. The shaking action may be executed at a different timing than the action at the start of fluctuation and the fixed position action, and the action may be the same action as the action at the start of fluctuation and the fixed position action, or may be a similar action, or a different action. It's okay. Further, the shaking action may be different depending on the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the first It may be configured to perform an action corresponding to a two-factor type). When executing a shaking action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion, An example would be a lion performing a head bobbing action, and if the first element is a chick, the chick would perform a head bobbing action. Further, the shaking action during the super ready-to-win production or the battle ready-to-win production may be configured to be different from the shaking action during the normal ready-to-win production. For example, the shaking action during the Super Reach production and the Battle Reach production has a smaller first decorative pattern than the shaking action during the Normal Reach production, and the first element is erased and the shaking action is performed with only the second element. The swinging width is small, and the swinging action is slow (the cycle of one swing is longer than that of the normal ready-to-win effect). In addition, although it is preferable not to execute the shaking action for the second decorative design, the same shaking action as for the first decorative design may be executed. In addition, in the state before the temporary stop, that is, the acceleration fluctuation, the high speed fluctuation, and the deceleration fluctuation, this shaking action is not accompanied (the fluctuation display is performed without performing any pattern action). In addition, in the time shortening game state, the swing action is executed during the pattern fluctuation, but the swing action is not executed during the variable standby state (determined stop state). In addition, the shaking action includes shaking action A and shaking action B, which is a flashier pattern action than shaking action A (the display area used in the action is large, the magnification is high, the rotation is fast, the light is strong, etc.). A plurality of types may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, pattern changes with high expectations such as pattern changes with a large number of pseudo-runs and super reach effects are better than pattern changes with low expectations such as pattern changes with a small number of pseudo-runs and normal reach effects. It is configured such that the shaking action B is more likely to occur than the fluctuation. That is, swing action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than swing action A.
<Effect of shaking action>
(1) By executing the shaking action, it is possible to indicate that the game is temporarily stopped, in other words, that the game is in a state before the fixed stop (a situation in which it is not yet decided whether the game is a hit or a loss). In addition, the effect for the first decorative symbol can be executed not only during the variation but also after the fixed stop.

<Tenpai action (special action)>
The first decorative pattern is the first temporarily stopped first decorative pattern (for example, the first decorative pattern in the left column) and the second temporarily stopped first decorative pattern (for example, the first decorative pattern in the right column), or When the first decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped at the same time (for example, the first decorative symbol in the left row and the first decorative symbol in the right row) are the same symbol Tenpai (a state in which a reach state is formed), a special symbol action You can perform a tenpai action. A tenpai action can be executed at a different timing than an action at the start of a change, a fixed position action, or a swing action, and the action can be the same action as the action at the start of a change, a fixed position action, or a swing action, or a similar action. or a different action. As for the tenpai action, different tenpai actions may be executed according to the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first 1 element type, 2nd element type, etc.). When executing a tenpai action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), if the first element is a lion, An example might be a lion performing a roaring action, and if the first element is a chick, the chick performs an action of blowing off the upper and lower shells. Also, in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to execute the tenpai action when the tenpai (the state in which the ready-to-win state is formed) is performed, but the tenpai action does not have to be executed. Here, in the case of configuring so as to execute the tenpai action when tenpai (a state in which the ready-to-win state is formed) is performed in the time-reduced gaming state, when tenpai (a state in which the ready-to-reach state is formed) is performed in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the tenpai It is preferable to configure so that the possibility of accompanying the tenpai action when tenpai (a state in which the reach state is formed) is lower than when the action is executed. In addition, Tenpai Action is a flashier pattern action than Tenpai Action A and Tenpai Action A. ) may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, pattern changes with high expectations such as pattern changes with a large number of pseudo-runs and super reach effects are better than pattern changes with low expectations such as pattern changes with a small number of pseudo-runs and normal reach effects. It is configured such that tenpai action B is more likely to occur than variation. In other words, the tenpai action B is configured as an action with a higher degree of expectation than the tenpai action A. As for the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform the tenpai action during the fluctuation, but the same tenpai action as the first decorative symbol may be performed.
<Effect of Tenpai Action (special action)>
(1) It is possible to highlight the type of the tened first decorative pattern to the player.

<Decisive Action (Decisive Action)>
The first decorative pattern is a decision action that is a special pattern action by the first decorative patterns in the left row, middle row, and right row when displaying a jackpot pattern via a reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, etc.) can be executed. The decision action can be executed at a different timing than the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the swing action, and the tenpai action. It can be similar actions or different actions. Also, in the time shortening game state, it is preferable to execute the deciding action, but it is not necessary to execute the deciding action. Here, if it is configured to execute a decision action when displaying a jackpot pattern via a reach performance (normal reach performance, super reach performance, etc.) in a time-reduced gaming state, the reach performance ( When displaying the jackpot pattern via the reach production (normal reach production, super reach production, etc.) than when executing the decision action when displaying the jackpot pattern via the normal reach production, super reach production, etc.) It is preferable to configure it so that it is less likely to involve a decisive action. In addition, the decisive action is a decisive action A, and a flashier pattern action than the decisive action A (action execution time is long, the display area used in the action is large, the magnification is high, the rotation is fast, the light emission is strong, etc. ) may be provided. When configured in this way, stop at a symbol combination (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively large number of rounds) that shifts to a probability variable game state or a time reduction game state after a big hit such as "777". In the case of display, a symbol combination such as "222" that shifts to a non-probability variable game state or a non-time reduction game state after a big hit (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively small number of rounds). It is configured such that the decision action B is more likely to occur than in the case of stopping display at . In addition, in the case of a symbol combination (or a symbol combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively large number of rounds) such as "777" that shifts to a probability variable game state or a time-reduced game state after a big hit. A pattern combination in which a decisive action is generated, but after a big win such as "222", the pattern combination shifts to a non-probability variable game state or a non-time reduction game state (or a pattern combination corresponding to a special game with a relatively small number of rounds). In the case of stopping display at , the configuration may be such that no decision action occurs. Although it is preferable not to execute the deciding action for the second decorative pattern, the deciding action similar to that for the first decorative pattern may be executed.
<Effect of decision action (decision action)>
(1) When displaying the jackpot symbols, the fact that the jackpot will be won can be emphasized to the player.

FIG. 126 shows the display screen during variable standby displayed on the effect display device SG and the display priority. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-reduced time game state will be described. Currently, fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stopped (before transition to the waiting movie described later), "437" is displayed as the first decorative symbol in a stopped state. , The second decoration symbol is similarly displayed as "437" in a stopped state, the second suspended display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second suspended display on the second main game side is displayed as "0". It is displayed, and the pending display for the effect of the change (it is displayed when the first pending display is erased when the change starts, and is displayed until the end or partway through the change ( When the next variation is started even after the display ends, the suspension display for the effect of the variation corresponding to the next variation is displayed)), the first suspension display on the first main game side, the second main game side is not displayed. The display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side are different, and the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side is The number indicating the number of reservations is hollowed out, and the number indicating the number of reservations is not hollowed out in the display mode of the second reservation display on the second main game side. The display priority is as follows: second decorative design>second reserved display>first decorative design. In addition, the display priority may be the second reserved display > second decorative design > first decorative design, and since the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, the second decoration Design=second reserved display>first decorative design.

Next, the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-shortening game state will be described. Currently, there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds as a specific time) has passed since the fluctuation stop, and the time is not shortened The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side that were displayed in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the gaming state are not displayed. . In addition, similar to the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced game state, the suspension display for the effect of the variation, the first suspension display on the first main game side, and the first suspension display on the second main game side are displayed. not Here, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stop, a waiting movie is displayed to indicate that the fluctuation is on standby (variation stop), and the waiting movie uses part of the reach effect. , and information on the right of the character (first element) used in the first decorative pattern is displayed. There are a plurality of types of characters displayed during this standby movie, and they are the same characters (first element) used in each first decorative pattern, but are specific first decorative patterns and second elements. is a first decorative pattern of "7" (for this "7", for example, a first decorative pattern indicating that a special game that triggers a transition to a high-precision high base state by becoming a number double) will be executed , the character (second element) corresponding to the first decorative pattern indicating that the special game with the largest number of rounds is executed by becoming the number double, is the other first decorative pattern and the first decorative pattern. The first decorative pattern with two elements of "6" (for this "6", for example, the first The character (second element) corresponding to the character (second element) that corresponds to the standby movie (Alternatively, the character corresponding to the first decorative pattern whose second element is "6" may be configured not to be displayed in the waiting movie at all).

In addition, in the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced gaming state or the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the suspension display area for the variation (the place where the suspension for the variation is displayed) Although the configuration has been explained in which the display for showing the status) and the first suspension display area on the first main game side (the display for indicating the location where the suspension is displayed) are not displayed, they may be displayed. For example, each display area may be partitioned as a reserved display area for effecting the change and a first reserved display area on the first main game side. As a result, even during the variable standby (variable stop), it is possible to suggest that the display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display or the pending display for the effect of the variation is displayed. In addition, in the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-reduced time gaming state, in the same way as (in the same position) as the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-reduced time gaming state, the second decoration symbol, the second pending display (first Main game side, second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the number that has not changed in the first reserved display, but can recognize that the number is not changed in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in addition to the waiting movie, and the second reserved display. The display may be configured to allow the recognition of unchanged numbers.

Next, the variable waiting screen display 1 in the time reduction game state will be described. Currently, there is no suspension on the first main game side and no suspension on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stopped (before transition to the waiting movie) , the first decorative symbol is displayed in a state of being stopped at "437", the second decorative symbol is similarly displayed in a state of being stopped at "437", and the second pending display on the first main game side is "0". Display, the second reserve display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", "→→ right hit →→" is displayed as the right hitting instruction display, and the suspension display for the effect of the change is displayed, the first main game The first pending display on the side and the first pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. It should be noted that, similarly to the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-shortening game state, the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side are different. , In the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side, the number indicating the pending number is hollowed out, and in the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side, the number indicating the pending number is Not hollowed out. The display priorities are as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative design>second reserved display>first decorative design. In addition, the display priority may be right-handed instruction display > second reserved display > second decorative design > first decorative design, and right-handed instruction display is the second decorative design and second reserved display. Since there is no superimposition, it may be right-handed instruction display>second decorative design=second reserved display>first decorative design.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the time shortening game state will be described. Currently, during the fluctuation stop, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds as a specific time) has passed since the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol displayed in the fluctuation waiting screen display 1 in the time shortening game state, the second 2 Decorative symbols, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed. It should be noted that, similarly to the variation waiting screen display 1 in the non-time-reduced game state, the suspension display for the effect of the variation, the first suspension display on the first main game side, and the first suspension display on the second main game side are displayed. not In addition, similar to the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the variable stop, a standby movie indicating variable standby (variable stop) is displayed. The standby movie is the same as the standby movie displayed in the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time-reduced game state.

In addition, in the variable standby screen display 1 in the time shortening game state or the variable standby screen display 2 in the time shortened game state, the suspension display area for the effect of the change (to indicate the place where the suspension for the effect of the change is displayed) display) and the second main game side first suspension display area (display for showing the place where suspension is displayed) are not displayed, but they may be displayed. For example, a display may be performed in which each display area is partitioned as a reserved display area for effecting the change and a first reserved display area on the second main game side. Thus, even during the time shortening game, it is possible to suggest displaying the pending display for effect of the change, and to make it easy to recognize the number of first pending displays on the second main game side. Also, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the time shortened game state, in the same way as the variable standby screen display 1 in the time shortened game state (in the same position), the second decorative pattern, the second pending display (first main game side, second main game side), may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the number that has not changed in the first pending display, but can recognize that it is not changing in the second decorative pattern in addition to the waiting movie, and the number that has not changed in the second pending display. It can be configured to recognize numbers.

In addition to the configuration of the screen display described above, various screen display configurations are possible. 1, the second holding display on the first main game side and the second holding display on the second main game side are not displayed; If there is no hold on either side and a predetermined period has passed, the variable standby screen display 1 can be shifted to the variable standby screen display 2, but in the time shortening game state, the variable standby screen display 1 is displayed. , Even if there is no suspension on the first main game side and no suspension on the second main game side and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the transition from the variable standby screen display 1 to the variable standby screen display 2 is not performed. good too.

Next, the volume adjustment screen display and the light intensity adjustment screen display will be described with reference to FIG. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the volume adjustment in the non-time-reduction game state will be described. In the non-time shortening game state, the volume can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop) or during the variable. Volume adjustment is performed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the volume adjustment screen (display indicating the volume, display of the cross button indicating the volume adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the volume adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) When the sub-input button SB is operated, the display of the volume adjustment screen ends. If it is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the non-reduced time gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which visibility is especially desired. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the effect pending for the change If there is a display or a hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen during the fluctuation in a smaller size than during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , for example, a simple reduction of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating volume, display of cross button SB-2 indicating volume adjustment method, sub-input indicating end of volume adjustment screen The display of the button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen semi-transparent may be reduced respectively), only the display indicating the volume may be displayed, or the display indicating the volume and the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method may be displayed. It is good also as only two combinations of. If only the display indicating the volume is used, or only the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is as follows: second decorative pattern>second reserved display>volume adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the change). In addition, the display priority is 2nd decorative design = 2nd reserved display, 2nd decorative design < 2nd reserved display, 1st decorative design < 1st reserved display (and reserved display for production of the change), even if good. If a button operation related to volume adjustment (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed during display of the standby movie, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the volume adjustment in the time shortening game state will be described. In the time shortening game state, the volume can be adjusted during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) or during the fluctuation. In the time shortening game state, if it is in the variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first main game side, the second reserve display on the second main game side, right hand An instruction display may be displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which visibility is especially desired. If there is a change in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserved display on the first main game side, the second reserved display on the second main game side, and the reserved display for effecting the change If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and although not shown, during fluctuation, the volume adjustment screen is displayed smaller than during fluctuation standby (variation stop). is preferable, and for example, it may be configured so that the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern do not overlap. For example, a simple reduction of the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating volume, display of cross button SB-2 indicating volume adjustment method, sub-input button indicating to end the volume adjustment screen SB display and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent) may be reduced, or only the display indicating the volume may be displayed, or the display indicating the volume and the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method may be displayed. Only a combination of the two may be used. If only the display indicating the volume is used, or only the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern that is fluctuating but to overlap with the first decorative pattern that is fluctuating. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priorities are as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative pattern>second reserved display>volume adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second reserved display>second decorative design, second decorative design>second reserved display>right-handed instruction display, second reserved display>second decorative design>right-handed instruction display , and furthermore, second decorative design=second reserved display, first decorative design<first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation).

Next, the light amount adjustment in the non-shortening game state will be described. In the non-reduced time gaming state, the light amount can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop). Light amount adjustment is performed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2. In addition, while the light intensity adjustment screen (display indicating the light intensity, display of the cross button indicating the light intensity adjustment method, display of the sub-input button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen, display of the image that makes the screen translucent) When the sub-input button SB is operated, the display of the light amount adjustment screen ends. If it is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the non-reduced time gaming state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. , the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the effect pending for the change If there is a display or a hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the light amount adjustment screen during the fluctuation in a smaller size than during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). For example, a simple reduction of the light intensity adjustment screen during variable standby (variation stop) (display indicating light intensity, display of cross button SB-2 indicating light intensity adjustment method, sub-input indicating termination of light intensity adjustment screen The display of the button SB and the display of an image that makes the screen semi-transparent may be reduced respectively), or only the display indicating the amount of light may be displayed, or the display indicating the amount of light and the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light may be displayed. It is good also as only two combinations of. In the case of displaying only the amount of light, or combining only the display of the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, the light amount adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which visibility is especially desired. If it is fluctuating in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the effect pending for the change If there is display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and the light quantity adjustment screen is not displayed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during the fluctuation. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is as follows: second decorative pattern>second reserved display>light amount adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the change). In addition, the display priority is 2nd decorative pattern = 2nd reserved display, 2nd decorative pattern < 2nd reserved display, 1st decorative pattern < 1st reserved display (and reserved display for production of the change), even if good. If a button operation related to light intensity adjustment (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed during display of the standby movie, display of the standby movie is ended and a light intensity adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, light amount adjustment in the time shortening game state will be described. In the time shortening game state, the light amount can be adjusted during the variable standby (variable stop). In the time shortening game state, if it is in the variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first main game side, the second reserve display on the second main game side, right hand An instruction display may be displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the light amount adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. For example, a simple reduction of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display showing light intensity, display of cross button SB-2 showing light intensity adjustment method, sub-input button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen The display of SB and the display of an image that makes the screen translucent are each reduced), or only the display indicating the amount of light, or the display indicating the amount of light and the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light. Only a combination of the two may be used. In the case of displaying only the amount of light, or combining only the display of the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light, the display mode may be the same as during the variable standby (variable stop) mode. , may be made different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, the size may be reduced). Also, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern may be configured so as not to overlap. Furthermore, the light amount adjustment screen displayed in a small size may be configured so as not to overlap the second decorative pattern that is changing, but to overlap the first decorative pattern that is changing. As a result, the light amount adjustment screens can be overlapped except for the display for which visibility is especially desired. If there is a change in the time shortening game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserved display on the first main game side, the second reserved display on the second main game side, and the reserved display for effecting the change If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the light intensity can be adjusted even during the fluctuation. It may be configured to display an adjustment screen. The display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second decorative pattern>second reserved display>light amount adjustment screen>first decorative pattern>first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation). In addition, the display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display>second reserved display>second decorative design, second decorative design>second reserved display>right-handed instruction display, second reserved display>second decorative design>right-handed instruction display , and furthermore, second decorative design=second reserved display, first decorative design<first reserved display (and reserved display for effecting the variation).

Next, screen display during normal fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. The dashed line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates the display location when the object is displayed. First, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the second pending display "2" on the first main game side, and the second on the second main game side. 2 Suspended display "0", Suspended display for the effect of the change, 1st suspended display on the first main game side (2 pieces) are displayed, and the 1st suspended display on the 2nd main game side is displayed. do not have. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time-reduced game state, when a ball is entered into the second main game start port B10, the first pending display of the second main game side is displayed, and the second main game side second The hold display is counted up (added), and when the fluctuation related to the hold on the second main game side is started, the first hold display on the second main game side is decremented by one, and the second hold display on the second main game side. is counted down (subtracted). Specifically, currently, there are two holds on the first main game side, two first hold displays on the first main game side, "2" on the second hold display on the first main game side, The first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed, the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and a ball is newly entered into the second main game start gate B10. When there is, one first pending display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second pending display on the second main game side is updated from "0" to "1". The display priority is as follows: sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) > second reserved display > main region (variation display of the first decorative pattern, temporary stop display of the first decorative pattern) > reserved display for effecting the variation > The first pending display on the first main game side > the first pending display on the second main game side. The display priority may be sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) < second reserved display, sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern) = second reserved display, or the main region The display priority of (variation display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to be the lowest among these, and the first suspended display on the first main game side < the second main game 1st pending display on the side, 1st pending display on the 1st main game side = 1st pending display on the 2nd main game side.

Next, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is fluctuating, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the second pending display "0" on the first main game side, the second on the second main game side 2 Suspension display "2", Suspension display for the effect of the change, 1st suspension display (2 pieces) on the 2nd main game side, right-handed instruction display, 1st suspension on the 1st main game side display is not shown. In addition, in the normal fluctuation screen display in the time shortened game state, even if a ball is entered into the first main game start port A10, the first holding display on the first main game side is not displayed, but The second pending indication is configured to count up. The display priority is as follows: right-handed instruction display> sub-area (variation display of the second decorative design)> second reserved display> main area (variation display of the first decorative design, temporary stop display of the first decorative design)> the variation Retained display for effect>First retained display on the second main game side. The display priority may be sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern)<second reserved display, sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern)=second reserved display, or the main region. The display priority of (variation display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to be the lowest among these, and the first pending display on the first main game side may be displayed. , Retaining display for effect of the change> First reserving display on the first main game side> First reserving display on the second main game side, or Reserving display for effecting the change> First reserving on the second main game side Display>The first pending display on the first main game side may be set.

Here, the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 128 will be supplemented.

In the non-time-reduced game state (state without electric support state), the first main game side hold display is displayed in the display mode of "●" as the first hold display. On the other hand, in the time-reduced gaming state (state accompanied by an electrical support state), the second main game side pending display is displayed in the display mode of "heart (solid)" as the first pending display. In addition, the second pending display is the same regardless of whether it is in the non-time-reduced gaming state or the time-reduced gaming state, but the second pending display on the first main game side is "hollowed numbers". This is the display mode, and the second reserved display on the second main game side is in the display mode of "filled numbers". It should be noted that the difference between the display mode of the second pending display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second pending display on the second main game side is indicated not only by hollowing out or filling in, but also by using different colors of numbers, etc. may be configured.

In addition, in the case of the configuration of the starting port (see the fifth embodiment) in which the ball is alternately entered into the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10, the first reservation on the first main game side The display mode of the display and the display mode of the first suspension display on the second main game side may be the same, and the first suspension and It may be configured to display the first pending display on the second main game side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 the ball has entered.

In the main area, the first decorative pattern is displayed from top to bottom (or bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) using the entire effect display device SG in the left, middle, and right columns. Moving scroll display (specifically, the first decorative patterns displayed in the main area are sequentially switched while scrolling in the order of 1→2→...→7→8→...1→... is displayed, and temporary stop → fixed stop is performed in the order of left and right center.), but in the sub-region, the second decorative pattern is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device SG in the left column, the middle column, and the right column. It is displayed as if it is fluctuating on the spot (that is, it is scroll-displayed moving from top to bottom (or from bottom to top, left to right, right to left, etc.) using the entire effect display device SG. Fluctuation display that appears to move from top to bottom, bottom to top, left to right, or right to left only in some display areas, or rotate horizontally or vertically only in some display areas A variable display of a switching display mode in which the display of the second decorative pattern recognized by the player is switched in the partial display area by rotating half or one time. In addition, the first decorative pattern may be displayed not only by scroll display but also by horizontal rotation or vertical rotation display that is fluctuating on the spot. In addition, the first decorative pattern, which has a role to liven up the production, is configured so that the type of variable display varies depending on the game state and the production stage (for example, the first decorative pattern is a low-probability-low base state or production mode A Although it is a scroll display in the high-precision high base state and production mode B, it is a rotating display), while realizing the diversity of production, the second decorative pattern that has the role of grasping the fluctuation situation and stop situation. Regarding, the type of variable display is the same regardless of the game state or the production stage (for example, the second decorative pattern is the same in the low probability low base state and production mode A, and in the high probability high base state and production mode B Also, it is preferable to use only scroll display or only rotating display).

Also, as shown in FIG. 128, in the non-time-reduced game state, the effect pending display of the variation and the first main game-side first pending display are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time-reduced game state, At the lower left of the effect display device SG, the effect pending display of the change and the first pending display on the second main game side are displayed, and the player is currently playing mainly through which starting port. (The first main game start port A10 is the main in the non-time shortened game state, and the second main game start port B10 is the main in the time shortened game state). ' or 'Heart (filled in)'), or the display position of the first reserved display on the first main game side or the first reserved display on the second main game side (in the non-time reduction game state, the first main game side 1 pending display is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time shortening game state, the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG). ing. The display mode and display position of the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are the same regardless of whether it is in the non-reduced time game state or the reduced time game state. is.

Here, the first holding display on the first main game side, the first holding display on the second main game side, and the second holding display on the first main game side that can be displayed during fluctuations in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state The display patterns of the pending display and the second pending display on the second main game side, including modification examples, will be described in detail below.
(1) First pending display (1-1) In the non-time-reduced game state, only the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed) to shorten the time. In the gaming state, only the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-2) In the non-time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the first main game side and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Only 1 pending display is displayed (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-3) In the non-time-reduced game state, only the first reserved display on the first main game side is displayed (the first reserved display on the second main game side is not displayed), and in the time-reduced game state, the first main game display is displayed. A first pending display on the game side and a first pending display on the second main game side are displayed.
(2) Second pending display In both the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. .

The area where the first pending display on the first main game side, the first pending display on the second main game side, and the pending display for the effect of the change are collectively referred to as the first pending display area, and the first pending display on the first main game side The area where the second pending display and the second pending display on the second main game side are displayed may be collectively referred to as the second pending display area. Supplementally, in the second reserved display area, unlike the first reserved display area, display corresponding to the change display of the change, such as the hold display for effecting the change, is not performed. In other words, the second suspension display for indicating that the number is fluctuating is not additionally displayed, and only the number of suspensions (the number of non-fluctuations) is displayed.

The effect pending display of the variation is the same display mode regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side. Specifically, in the non-time-reduced game state, the fluctuation on the first main game side and the fluctuation on the second main game side are larger than the first hold display on the first main game side. If it is displayed as "●" and if it is a time shortened game state, it is from the first hold display on the second main game side, regardless of whether it is a fluctuation on the first main game side or a fluctuation on the second main game side It is displayed as a large "heart (filled)". It should be noted that the suspension display for effect of the change can be displayed only in the case of the change on the first main game side (when the change start condition on the first main game side is satisfied) in the non-time-reduced game state {that is, It is configured so that it is not displayed in the fluctuation of the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game side is satisfied)}, and if it is in the time shortening game state, the fluctuation of the second main game side (the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the game side is satisfied) {that is, the fluctuation on the first main game side (when the fluctuation start condition on the first main game side is satisfied) is not displayed}. good too. In addition, as an effect according to the degree of expectation of the change, the display mode of the pending display for the effect of the change may be changed. etc.), or the shape may change (default shape (here, "circle" for the first main game, "heart" for the second main game) → ☆, etc.), and the number of display patterns , in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the number of patterns in the variation of the first main game side (for example, the default color, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color patterns in total 6 colors. Hit expectation is The default color < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow color.) is the number of patterns in the variation of the second main game side (for example, default color, red, rainbow color, total 3 color patterns. Win The degree of expectation is greater than the default color < red < rainbow color. Equipped with a total of 6 color patterns of green, red, and rainbow colors.The hit expectation is the default color<blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow color.) is the number of patterns ( For example, a default color, red, and rainbow colors are provided, and the expected win rate is higher than the default color<red<rainbow color.). Note that the same pattern number relationship may also be adopted for the undigested hold (first hold display).

The display priority of the first pending display and the second pending display is the second pending display>the first pending display, and when both pending displays are displayed even during normal fluctuation, The display priority of the second pending display is set higher than the display priority of the first pending display. For example, when a notice image (displayed on the entire screen such as the next notice), SP reach, the first decorative pattern, etc. are displayed, the second pending display> notice image (or SP reach, the first decorative pattern, etc.) > The first pending display is displayed.

Whether or not the overlap between the first decorative design and the second decorative design and whether or not the overlap between the first reserved display and the second reserved display is possible are as follows, including modified examples (if necessary, FIG. 126, FIG. 128, etc. ).
(1) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the second decorative design (1-1) During the fluctuation standby (variation stop), the first decorative design and the second decorative design overlap (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part is , the second decorative design is displayed in front of the first decorative design), the stop display positions of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are determined (not shown).
(1-2) During the fluctuation standby (change stop), the first decorative design and the second decorative design do not overlap, and during the fluctuation, the first decorative design and the second decorative design overlap (depending on the display priority, overlap In the part, the stop display positions of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are determined so that the second decorative design is displayed in front of the first decorative design.
For example, if it is a non-time-reduced game state, it may be configured as (1-1), if it is a time-reduced game state, it may be configured as (1-2), and if it is a non-time-reduced game state (1- The configuration of 2) may be used, and the configuration of (1-1) may be used even in the time shortening game state.
(2) Possibility of overlap between the first pending display and the second pending display The first pending display on the main game side) and the second pending display (the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side) do not overlap, the first pending display and the second The display position of the pending display is determined. It should be noted that this is also applicable during the fixed stop.

Whether or not the first decorative design and the first reserved display overlap, Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap, Whether or not the first decorative design and the second reserved display overlap, Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display Whether duplication is possible or not is as follows.
(A) Non-time-reduced gaming state (1) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the first reserved display During both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation, the first decorative design and the first reserved display The display positions of the first decorative design and the first reserved display are determined so as to overlap (the overlapping portion is displayed in front of the first reserved display in the first decorative design due to the display priority).
(2) Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the second reserved display A display position of the second pending display is determined.
(3) Possibility of overlap between the first decorative design and the second reserved display The first decorative design and the second reserved display overlap during both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation (depending on the display priority, the overlapping part , the display positions of the first decorative pattern and the second reserved display are determined so that the second reserved display is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative design and the first reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the first reserved display A display position of the first pending display is determined. In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative design and the first reserved display are determined to overlap at least during fluctuation, and similarly in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative design and the second reserved display It is defined to overlap at least during variation, and may or may not be defined to overlap during standby for variation.
(B) Time reduction game state (1) Whether the first decorative pattern and the first reserved display can be overlapped The first decorative pattern and the first reserved display overlap during both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation The display positions of the first decorative pattern and the first reserved display are determined so as not to occur. It should be noted that it may be constructed so as to overlap rarely (lower frequency than the non-time-reduced game state) during fluctuation.
(2) Whether or not the second decorative design and the second reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the second reserved display A display position of the second pending display is determined.
(3) Overlapping of the first decorative design and the second reserved display Whether or not the first decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap during both fluctuation standby (variation stop) and fluctuation, so that the first decorative design and the second reserved display do not overlap A display position of the second pending display is determined. It should be noted that it may be constructed so as to overlap rarely (lower frequency than the non-time-reduced game state) during fluctuation.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative design and the first reserved display overlap Whether the second decorative design and the first reserved display do not overlap, both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation, the second decorative design and the first reserved display A display position of the first pending display is determined.

Next, screen display during SP reach will be described with reference to FIG. First, the screen display 1 during SP reach in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, it is in the SP reach, the second decorative pattern variation display in the sub-region, the second reservation display "2" on the first main game side, the second reservation display "0" on the second main game side, the variation The pending display for effect is displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first pending display on the first main game side are not displayed. Needless to say, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (however, up to hold 4), and the second main game start port B10. When the game ball is entered in , the second reservation display on the second main game side is updated (however, up to reservation 4). In addition, the first pending display can be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen (flat stage screen, etc.) which is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state after the end of the SP reach, but at this time SP The first pending display is displayed including the number of balls entered during the reach. Specifically, if the number of holds increases from 2 to 3 during SP reach, the first hold display will not be displayed during SP reach, but three first hold displays will be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen. of. The display priority is as follows: sub-area (variation display of the second decorative pattern)>second reserved display>reserved display for effect of the change>SP ready-to-win effect.

Next, the screen display 2 during SP reach in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, the SP reach is in progress, the movable accessory YK has moved to the front of the effect display device SG, the second decorative pattern is displayed in the sub-area, and the second suspended display "2" on the first main game side. , the second pending display "0" on the second main game side, the pending display for effecting the change is displayed, the variable display of the first decorative pattern in the main area, and the first pending display on the first main game side are not shown. It should be noted that the suspension display for effecting the change may be configured not to be displayed.

In this way, under certain circumstances {during SP reach, during operation of movable accessories, promotion production (production to incite whether or not to promote from even-numbered patterns, which are non-variable patterns, to odd-numbered patterns, which are probability-variable patterns), error screen display In the middle class}, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first pending display on the first main game side are not displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to visually recognize the SP reach. . It should be noted that even during the SP reach, the first decoration symbol may be displayed in the main area in a variable display or the first holding display on the first main game side may be displayed. In this case, the first decoration in the main area may be displayed. The variable display of the pattern is preferably displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the effect display device SG (almost the same size as the variable display of the second decorative pattern or slightly larger than the variable display of the first decorative pattern), in the main area. By displaying the variable display of the first decorative pattern in , it is possible to show the player the reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") or the reach pattern (for example, displaying only one "4"). Become. The display priority is as follows: sub-region (variation display of the second decorative pattern)>second reserved display>reserved display for the effect of the change>liquid crystal effect {effect display (in FIG. 129, the star-shaped movable accessory YK falls. It is an effect on the effect display device SG that makes it look as if it is shining upward with the falling position as a reference)}.

Next, updating of the first pending display and the second pending display will be described with reference to FIG. 130 . First, the fluctuation is finished, and the fluctuation is stopped with two holdings on the first main game side. Next, a new change on the first main game side has just started, the first pending display on the first main game side begins to shift its display position (shift animation starts), and the second display on the first main game side begins to shift. The hold display is decremented from "2" to "1" immediately after the fluctuation starts. Next, before the shift of the first reservation display on the first main game side ends, a game ball is newly entered into the first main game start port A10, and the first A pending occurrence display (holding occurrence animation) is performed in which the first pending display on the main game side increases by one, and the second pending display on the first main game side immediately changes from "1" to " 2”.

Here, the characteristic configuration shown using FIG. 130 will be supplemented.

When a new hold occurs (when a game ball newly enters the starting hole), the execution time (for example, 1000 ms) of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) of the first hold display {from the lower part of the effect display device SG It is an effect that the hold gradually appears and is displayed in a fixed position (the place where the Nth hold is displayed), and the time from the start of appearance to the completion of display is 1000 ms} is the update time of the second hold display ( addition time and subtraction time, which are configured to be longer than, for example, 100 ms). Also, the execution time (for example, 1500 ms) of the shift display (shift animation) of the first hold display {The hold displayed in the place where the Nth hold is displayed moves, and the N-1th It moves to the place where the suspension is displayed, and then it is displayed in a fixed position (the place where the N-1th suspension is displayed). is configured to be longer than the update time of the second pending display. Furthermore, the update time of the second pending display is shorter than the variable fixed time (for example, the fixed variable time of the first main game symbol is 500 ms, and the fixed variable time of the second main game symbol is 300 ms), and the shortest variation. It is configured to be shorter than the time (3000 ms in this embodiment).

Regarding the fixed variable time, the fixed variable time for the first main game symbols was set to 500 ms, and the fixed variable time for the second main game symbols was set to 300 ms. The fixed time and the variable fixed time of the second main game pattern may be the same time, or each variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms for the non-time-reduced game state and 300 ms for the time-reduced game state) is predetermined according to the game state. may have been In addition, it may be set so that the variation fixing time of the symbol variation is different according to the number of reservations, and in this case, when the symbol variation is started in a situation where there are 2 to 4 reservations, or when the fixed stop is made, the first main game side 500 ms when there is a hold or a hold on the second main game It is preferable to set the variable fixed time to 0 ms when there is also no side hold, but the variable fixed time is not limited to this time. In addition, the fixed variable time of the first decorative symbols and the fixed fixed time of the second decorative symbols are preferably set so as to match the fixed fixed time of the first main game symbols and the fixed fixed time of the second main game symbols. However, the variable fixed time may be different from the variable fixed time of the first main game symbols and the variable fixed time of the second main game symbols.

Immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the first pending display can simultaneously (overlap) display the shift display (shift animation) and the pending occurring display (suspended occurring animation) {that is, the first pending display can display the pending When execution of shift indication (shift animation) is started during execution of occurrence indication (pending occurrence animation), pending occurrence indication (pending occurrence animation) and Shift display (shift animation) can be executed at the same time, and execution of pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation) is started during execution of shift display (shift animation), shift display (shift animation ) can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the shift display (shift animation) and pending occurrence display (pending occurrence animation). } However, it is impossible to display subtraction and addition at the same time in the second pending display. It will happen. When the number of reservations increases immediately before the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation starts, the second reservation display performs the display of addition (due to the start of fluctuation) and then the display of subtraction (due to the start of fluctuation). It should be noted that both subtraction and addition require the time required for this update display (for example, updating from "2" to "1" or from "1" to "2") (because the number display switches) required time) is 100 ms.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) blue hold change" will be described. First, it is in a fluctuation stop state in a state where there are four holds. Next, a change is started, and the number of holds becomes 4 due to the new ball entry, and further, the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new ball entry is blue hold. Next, the change just before the blue hold ends, and the change just before is a loss ("861"), and the change is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to Blue Suspension is started, and Blue Suspension is displayed as a production suspension display (blue) for the variation. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with blue reservation, a shorter fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation is started with red reservation (in other words, a fluctuation time with a low expectation of winning is likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, it is 7 reach, and 7 reach is higher than other reach (eg, 2 reach)). 2 decorative pattern does not become a specific reach mode, and continues the variable display), but when the fluctuation starts with blue retention, a specific reach mode than when the fluctuation starts with red retention described later is less likely to occur. Next, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) that is a hit, but when the fluctuation starts with blue reservation, it fluctuates with red reservation. It has a lower probability of being in a particular final appearance than it is in the beginning. Next, the case of "(2) red hold change" will be described. The basic flow is the same as "(1) blue pending change", but the display mode of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) is different. First, it is in a fluctuation stop state in a state where there are four holds. Next, a change is started, and the number of suspensions becomes 4 due to the new entry, and further, the display mode of the first suspension display corresponding to the new entry is red suspension. Next, the change immediately before the red hold ends, and the change immediately before is a loss ("861"), and the change is stopped. Next, a variation corresponding to Red Suspension is started, and Red Suspension is displayed as a production suspension display (red) for the variation. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with red holding, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with blue holding (in other words, a fluctuation time with a high degree of expectation for winning is likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode and continues to display variable), but is red reserved. When the change starts, the probability of a specific reach state is higher than when the change starts with blue pending. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits is displayed, but when the fluctuation starts with red reservation, it changes with blue reservation The probability of being in a particular final display mode is higher than in the case of starting. As an example, the probability of reaching reach with blue reservation is 90% of the variation related to blue reservation, and the probability of reaching reach with red reservation is 99% of the variation related to red reservation, and the difference is 9% is. In addition, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode (eg, 7 reach) in blue retention is 5% in the case of reach due to fluctuations related to blue retention, and a specific reach mode in red retention (eg, 7 reach) The probability of becoming a reach is 30% when it becomes a reach due to a change related to red holding. The difference is 25%. In this way, the probability of reaching a reach in both blue hold and red hold is set high and the difference between them is set not to be large, and the probability of a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) is set not to be so high. In addition, it is desirable that the difference between them should be relatively large. As a result, while the expectation that the reach will be achieved by changing the hold is secured to some extent, by setting a difference in the degree of expectation for the subsequent development (what number will reach the reach), the first hold display The content suggested by the difference in display mode can be complicated. It should be noted that these numerical values (percentages) are examples and can be changed as appropriate, but such magnitude relationships are desirable.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) the number of reservations is 1" will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension with one hold. Then the fluctuation is started. In addition, when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations of 1, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations of 4, which will be described later. Next, the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern does not have a specific reach mode and continues the variable display), but the specific reach The probability of becoming a mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits is displayed, but the probability of becoming a specific final display mode is regardless of the number of reservations. They are the same or slightly different. Next, the case of "(2) the number of reservations is 4" will be described. The flow at the time of fluctuation is the same as "(1) The number of reservations 1", so it is omitted, but when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations 4, a shorter fluctuation time is selected than when the fluctuation starts with the number of reservations 1. easy to be In addition, as described in the description of "(1) number of reservations 1", the first decorative pattern has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative pattern has a specific reach mode) However, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode is the same or a slight difference regardless of the number of reservations, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are hits. Although the final display mode (here, 7 sets) is displayed, the probability of becoming a specific final display mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode, the second decorative pattern may also be in the ready-to-reach mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the relationship between the game state and the final display mode will be described. First, the non-time reduction game state will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension with one hold. Next, the variation is started, the first decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state (here, 7 ready-to-win) (the second decorative pattern is not in the ready-to-reach state and continues the variable display), and finally, the first decoration. Although the design and the second decorative design are the final display mode indicating the winning mode, as the final display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design, in addition to the design matching (for example, "777"), the latent mode It is configured so that a mode transition pattern (for example, a "hidden" pattern) indicating transition to the mode can be displayed. Next, the time reduction game state will be explained. Description of the flow of variation is omitted because it is the same as the non-time-reduced game state. In the time shortening game state, the final display mode indicating the winning mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is only pattern matching (for example, "777"), and the mode transition pattern indicating transition to the hiding mode. is configured not to be displayed. That is, the number of candidates for the final display mode is larger in the non-reduced time game state than in the reduced time game state for both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols. By configuring in this way, the hit from the non-time-reduced game state includes the transition to the latent mode to provide various game characteristics, and the hit from the time-reduced game state does not include the transition to the latent mode. , the game state can be recognized by the player. Furthermore, after a specific reach mode (here again, 7 reach with high expectations is desirable), there are "767", "787", and "777" in the non-reduced time game state, and as an example, each appears 1/3 On the other hand, there are "787" and "777" in the time shortening game state, and as an example, it is configured to appear 1/2 each, and in the time shortening game state, by lowering the probability of being out, it becomes 7 reach. In this case, it is possible to restrict the medium pattern from coming off without reaching 7, so that the degree of expectation can be raised more than in the non-time shortening game state.

In the non-reduced time gaming state, as the final display mode indicating the winning mode, the first decoration pattern can display a mode transition pattern indicating transition to the hiding mode, but the second decoration pattern can display the first decoration. The mode transition pattern displayed in the pattern may not be displayed, and it may be configured to indicate that the transition to the latent mode is performed in a different final display mode. In addition, it may be configured to display a combination of odd-numbered symbols or a combination of even-numbered symbols, and furthermore, it may be configured so that the odd-numbered symbol combination has a higher probability of being in the probability change state in the latent mode than the even-numbered symbol combination. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the relationship between the game state and the warning display for hitting (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) will be described. First, the display of the hitting warning in the non-reduced time game state will be described. First, it is in a state where there is one hold on the first main game side and the fluctuation is stopped. Here, there is no display showing how to hit the player. Next, when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the first pending display on the second main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are updated, and furthermore, a left-handed warning is given. The display is performed until the end condition (for example, 10 seconds, the ball is entered into the first main game start gate A10, etc.) is satisfied, and a warning is given by voice along with the left-handed warning display (for example, "Left-handed please” x 3 times). The left-handed warning display can be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display. configured to not be displayed. It should be noted that even if the ball is entered in the first main game start gate A10 in the non-time-reduced game state, and the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are updated, it is left-handed. No warning is displayed. Next, a description will be given of how to play warning display in the time-reduced game state. First, there is one hold on the second main game side, and the fluctuation is stopped. Here, a right hitting instruction display (“→→ right hitting→→”), which is a display showing the player how to hit, is displayed. The right hitting instruction display (“→→ right hitting →→”) is displayed in the time shortening game state, and does not depend on the update display of the pending number (for example, addition of the second pending display), and shortens the time. If it is in a game state, it will be continuously displayed. Next, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second pending display on the first main game side is updated (the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed), and furthermore, , The right-handed warning display is performed until the end condition (for example, entering the ball in the second main game start port B10, etc.) is satisfied, and the right-handed warning display is combined with a voice warning (for example, "Right-handed please"). The right-handed warning display can be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize it, but it overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display. configured to not be displayed. Note that even if a ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state and the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, a right-handed warning is issued. No display is performed. In addition, without displaying the hitting method warning display (left hitting warning display, right hitting warning display) on the effect display device SG, an audio warning ("Please hit right", "Please hit left") is output. It may be configured to be

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols (re-change probability) will be described. First, the flow of production will be described using the case of "blue hold change -> re-change (pseudo-continue)". First, there are three reserves on the first main game side, and the first reserve display is displayed in blue reserve, and is in a change stop state. Next, a change due to blue suspension is started (blue is displayed as a suspension display for the effect of the variation), and with "6" on the left column and "7" on the right column, a pseudo continuous suggestion As a preliminary announcement, a pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol (here, translucent "NEXT") in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (here, non-transparent "NEXT") to be described later is translucent is displayed from the top to the bottom of the effect display device SG. is displayed by scrolling to Next, a pseudo-run suggestive symbol is scroll-displayed to approximately the center of the effect display device SG, and a pseudo-run symbol indicating that a pseudo-run will occur is displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbols have stopped, next, all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column, are re-flushed. ing. As the first decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols can be displayed, but as the second decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed. Next, the display mode of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) (in this example, blue hold change, red hold change) and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols will be described. As described above, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed, a pseudo-continuous pattern that changes again occurs. Well, for example, with blue reserves with low expectations of winning, the probability of recurrence (probability of pseudo-runs) is low, and with red reserves with high expectations of winning, the probability of recurrence is high (that is, The probability of re-fluctuation may be configured as follows: red hold>blue hold). In the above description, the case where the pseudo-continuous suggesting symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed from the display where the left symbol and the right symbol are not the same (not reachable) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed. In addition to the configuration in which the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed from the same reach display, and the configuration in which the first decorative symbol can be re-varied (pseudo-continuous), the second decorative symbol is also re-variable (pseudo-continuous). ) possible configuration, a configuration in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is a specific symbol (for example, "7"), and the symbol columns in which the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed are the left column and the right column. There may be. Further, the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without scrolling display. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the probability that the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed during the look-ahead effect display (re-variation probability) and the trigger variation (variation related to the hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect) The relationship between the probability of symbol display (re-change probability) will be described. First, it is in a state of suspension of fluctuation with two holds. Next, the change is started, and the background is displayed in translucent black, which is the highly anticipated display mode of the look-ahead effect. In this way, when the high-expectation display mode of the look-ahead effect is displayed, the pseudo-suggestive symbols and the pseudo-suggestive symbols may not be displayed. may be displayed, but with a low probability. Next, the background is continuously displayed in translucent black, and the fluctuation is stopped. Then the trigger variation is started and the background is the normal background (not translucent black). Next, in a state where "6" is displayed in the left column and "7" is displayed in the right column, pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols are displayed by scrolling from top to bottom on the effect display device SG. Next, the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol is scroll-displayed to substantially the center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed substantially in the center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbols have stopped, next, all symbol rows, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column, are re-flushed. ing. In this way, in the change related to the hold before the change related to the hold that triggered the occurrence of the look-ahead effect (so-called trigger change), the display mode of the look-ahead effect is a highly expected display mode (here, a translucent black background) can be displayed, but the pseudo-continuous pattern is not displayed and re-variation (pseudo-continuous) does not occur, or when the look-ahead effect display mode is a high-expectation display mode, the look-ahead effect may be configured so that the probability of re-variation (pseudo-run) occurring due to the pseudo-running pattern being displayed is lower than when the display mode is low expectation, and in the trigger variation, the high expectation of the look-ahead effect Since the display mode of the degree cannot be displayed and the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be displayed, a re-variation (pseudo-continuous) may occur, or the pseudo-continuous change may occur more than the variation related to the hold before the trigger variation. It may be configured such that the pattern is displayed and the probability of occurrence of re-variation (pseudo-run) increases. Further, the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without scrolling display. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, referring to FIG. 137, decorative patterns after power off and after power off (if RAM is not cleared, that is, S1002→S1008→S1010→S1012→S1014→... in FIG. 5). I will explain the relationship between First, (A) will be explained. First, since it is staying in stage A (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, after the power is turned off, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and ``8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)'' is displayed, just like before the power was turned off. there is The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after the power is turned off, etc. Here, "861" is displayed. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, after the power is turned off, Stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. there is The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, (C), which is a modification of (A), will be described. First, it is staying in stage A (during suspension of fluctuation), and the first decoration pattern is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, when the power is restored from the power interruption, the stage A set as the default stage is displayed. , 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" are displayed. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. In this case, only the first decorative pattern is changed. It returns with the default display of the pattern "2 (ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)".

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the relationship between the decorative designs after power-off and after power-off recovery (in the case of RAM clear; S1002→S1004→S1006→ . . . in FIG. 5) will be described. First, (A) will be described. First, since it is staying in stage A (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power failure, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. , 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)”. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before or after the power is turned off, etc. Here, "331" is displayed. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (while fluctuation is stopped), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)" is displayed. . The second decorative pattern is displayed as "861" in numerals. Next, a power failure occurs, and nothing is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, the RAM is cleared to recover from the power failure, and stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed. ), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)”. The display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed as "331" in numerals.

Thus, when the RAM is cleared (RAM is cleared and the power is restored), a predetermined display mode (here, stage A , the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are both "331"), which makes it easier for the player, game staff, etc. to grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

It should be noted that the default display of the first decoration pattern "3 (penguin), 3 (penguin), 1 (chick)" when the RAM is cleared may be changed to a display mode that can be displayed only when the RAM is cleared, or during a normal game. However, for example, it may be configured to display as a premium effect in which the big win is almost guaranteed. Also, the display mode when the RAM is cleared is set to the same display mode as the default display mode when the power is restored (the same display mode as (C) in FIG. 137), and when the RAM is cleared, the first decoration pattern is set to "2 ( Ally), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)", and the second decorative pattern may be displayed as a number "246".

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, reach voice, which is the production at the time of reach (announcement that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by the sound generated when reach is established) and the probability of displaying pseudo consecutive symbols (probability of recurrence) I will explain the relationship between In addition, the expected hit rate of reach voice is reach < chance < development < super hot. In addition, it should be supplemented in advance that this figure explains the probability of re-fluctuation due to the reach voice when the reach is established in the fluctuation that develops into a predetermined SP reach after the reach is established. First, (A) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, fluctuation is started, reach is established, and the sound of "reach" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "reach" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to be high. Next, (B) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the sound of "chance" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "chance" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to middle. Next, (C) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the sound of "development" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is not displayed on the effect display device SG, but develops into a super ready-to-win effect, and the super ready-to-win effect is displayed. In this way, when the ready-to-win state is established and the "developed" ready-to-win voice is generated, the probability of re-fluctuation is 0, and the super ready-to-win performance is directly developed without re-fluctuation. Next, (D) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "Gekiatsu" is generated as the reach voice. Next, "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern, is displayed substantially in the center (middle row of the first decorative symbol) of the effect display device SG, and is changed again (pseudo-continuous). In this way, when the reach voice of "very hot" is generated when the reach is established, the re-fluctuation probability is set to be low.

In this way, it is configured so that the more reach voices with high hit expectations occur, the lower the probability of re-fluctuation (pseudo-run), but among the reach voices with high hit expectations, some reach voices occur In this case, the reach voice of "development" is configured so that re-fluctuation (pseudo continuation) does not occur. In addition, even if some of the reach voices with high hit expectations (for example, “development” reach voices) When some reach voices (e.g. "development" reach voices) occur, configure the re-change probability to be set high (e.g. higher re-change probability than when "chance") may

In other words, the hit expectation by the reach voice is reach < chance < development < super hot, and the probability of re-fluctuation (pseudo consecutive) by the reach voice is
(1) development (including non-occurrence)<extremely hot<chance<reach (2) extremely hot<chance<development≤reach, it is possible to configure an order different from the hit expectation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the display mode of decorative symbols in the full rotation effect will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three pending. Then the fluctuations start and reach. Next, the characters "Full rotation" are displayed in the approximate center of the effect display device SG, and the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative symbols are aligned (for example, "777" or "888 ” etc.), scrolling display is performed at a slower speed than normal fluctuations (for example, the state in the second figure). As described above, the first decorative symbols can be scroll-displayed in a state in which the patterns are aligned. , the left, middle, and right columns are individually variably displayed in a state in which the patterns are not aligned, and the speed does not slow down (=maintains a constant speed). Next, substantially at the same time as the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a state in which only numbers are aligned. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern may also be variably displayed in a state in which the patterns are aligned (for example, "777" or "888") so as to be synchronized with the first decorative pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the variation mode of decorative symbols for each stage will be described. First, stage A will be described. In stage A, when the variation starts, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a scroll display that moves from top to bottom in the display area of the effect display device SG, and the second decorative pattern is displayed on the spot (the second A variable display is performed by a scroll display that appears to move from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). Next, stage B will be described. In stage B, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative pattern is horizontally rotated on the spot to change the pattern. A variable display is performed by a scroll display that appears to move from top to bottom in the decorative pattern display area). As described above, since the first decorative pattern is a pattern that is easy for the player to visually recognize, the player does not become bored by changing the variation mode depending on the stage, and the second decorative pattern is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Since it is a pattern, it is displayed in the same variation mode without changing the variation mode depending on the stage. Here, stage A is a stage corresponding to a non-time-reduced gaming state (or non-time-reduced gaming state and non-probability variable gaming state), stage B is a time-reduced gaming state (or time-reduced gaming state and probability variable gaming state), or both stage A and stage B are stages corresponding to non-time-reduced gaming state (or non-time-reduced gaming state and non-probability variable gaming state), It may be configured such that transition from stage A to stage B is possible. Also, the stage may be referred to as a production mode.

In addition, scroll display in which the display area of the effect display device SG moves from top to bottom, scroll display in which the display area of the effect display device SG moves from right to left, and variable display in which the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally on the spot , etc. may be referred to as a variable display format, that is, a variable display format in which the display area of the effect display device SG is scrolled from top to bottom, and a variable display in which the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally on the spot. The variable display format is different from the variable display format that executes .

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the details of the display contents of the decorative symbols during variation will be described. First, (A) will be described. (A) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in the fluctuation pattern to be a reach. First, at stage B, fluctuation is stopped. Next, the variation is started, and the pattern rows of the left, middle and right columns of the first decorative pattern are varied in a variation mode in which the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally, and the pattern of the second decorative pattern is changed. In each of the left, middle, and right symbol columns, the symbols fluctuate in a vertical scrolling manner on the spot. In each pattern row of the first decorative pattern, the patterns are regularly changed in order of "1→2→3→...→7→8→1→...", and in the second decorative pattern, No matter what the variation of the first decoration pattern is, the predetermined pattern variation is uniformly performed, and is ``275''→“864”→“387”→“641”→“728”→“413”. →“156”→“532”→“275”→ . Next, at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established at "7" in the first decorative symbol, and at the timing when the fluctuating "6" is positioned in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). , "275" is positioned within the sub-region as the second decorative symbol that is fluctuating. In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the patterns in the left row and the right row are different, and reach is not established.

Next, (B) will be described. (B) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative design and the second decorative design in a variation pattern that does not result in a reach but a loss. First, at stage B, fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left, middle, and right pattern rows of the first decorative pattern, the pattern is changed by rotating horizontally (high-speed fluctuation). 2. In each of the left, middle, and right pattern rows of the decorative pattern, the patterns are fluctuated in a fluctuating mode of vertical scrolling on the spot. Next, it is the timing just before the left column stops. At this time (for a moment), "868" is displayed (however, since the right symbol is fluctuating at high speed, it is not a ready-to-win). The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at normal speed (the second decorative pattern fluctuates only at almost normal speed. It may be configured to fluctuate at low speed during full rotation production), at this time (for a moment However), "864" is displayed. Next, it is time to stop the left column, the left column of the first decorative pattern is stopped (temporarily stopped), the middle and right columns of the first decorative pattern are in high speed fluctuation, and at this time (in an instant ), but "168" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "387" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the stop of the right column. , and the middle row is in the process of high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "165" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at the normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "641" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the right pattern. The middle row is in the process of high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "166" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "728" is displayed. Next, it is the timing just before the end of the variable time, "1" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column of the first decorative pattern, and "6" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right column, The middle row is during low speed fluctuation, and "116" is displayed. The second decorative pattern is fluctuating at normal speed, and "413" is displayed. Next, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, a fluctuation stop command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S to indicate the end of the fluctuation time (also for stopping display of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern), Both the first decorative design and the second decorative design stop changing (fixed stop) at "126".

In the first decorative pattern, from just before the stop (temporary stop) of the left and right columns to stop (temporary stop), or from just before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) to the fluctuation stop (fixed stop), The pattern is changed in the order that is arranged continuously in advance and the fluctuation is stopped (fixed stop), but in the second decorative pattern, the fluctuation is changed from just before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) to the fluctuation stop (fixed stop). The pattern displayed immediately before the stop (fixed stop) is changed to the final stop pattern in an instant, and the variation stops (fixed stop). In this example, in the first decorative pattern, from just before the left column stop (temporary stop) to the left column stop (temporary stop), the left column is changed to "8 → 1", and the right column stop ( Temporary stop) to the right column stop (temporary stop), the right column is changed from "5 to 6", and from just before the fluctuation stop (definite stop) to the fluctuation stop The columns are changed from "1 to 2". In the second decorative pattern, since it continues to fluctuate at the normal speed until the fluctuation stops, the pattern displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is instantly changed to the final stop symbol "126". , the left column is changed to "3→1", the middle column is changed to "6→2", and the right column is changed to "2→6". However, since the patterns are displayed at random during the fluctuation of the second decorative pattern, the pattern displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (determined stop) and the final stop pattern may coincidentally continue.

In addition, the pattern arrangement pattern of the second decorative pattern may be regular and continuous. ·” may be displayed, but in this case, the symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right columns are displayed differently. Specifically, if it is a specification to display with one shift, the left column starts with "1" and is "1 → 2 → 3 → ...", and the middle column starts with "2" and is "2 → 3 → 4". →...", the right column starts from "3" and changes like "3→4→5→...", and changes to the final stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop (fixed stop).

Thus, in the first decorative pattern, the pattern displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the pattern (final stop pattern) displayed at the time of stopping the fluctuation (fixed stop) are continuous or continuous. In many cases, in the second decorative pattern, the pattern displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the pattern (final stop pattern) displayed at the time of stopping the fluctuation (fixed stop) are not continuous or are not continuous. There are many things.

Next, the relationship between the pseudo-continuous symbols, the developmental symbols, and the pseudo-continuous symbols and the developmental symbols will be described. In the following description, the configuration for displaying the first decorative pattern, the first reserved display, etc. during super reach is shown, but as described above, the first decorative pattern, the first reserved display, etc. are displayed during super reach. A configuration in which no display is made may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing the display mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design when re-fluctuation is executed. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". The first decorative design is composed of characters and numerical designs, and the second decorative design is composed only of numerical designs. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. Next, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern both display "6" in the left pattern and the right pattern to form a reach, and further, in the main area, re-variation (for example, pseudo-continuous variation) is performed. Translucent "NEXT" symbols ("re-variation suggestive symbol", "pseudo-continuous suggestive symbol (pseudo-continuous suggestive effect)") suggesting whether or not to continue are displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen. Next, when the re-fluctuation is executed, the non-transmissive "NEXT" pattern (also called "re-fluctuation pattern" or "pseudo-continuous pattern") is placed approximately in the center of the liquid crystal screen instead of the translucent "NEXT" pattern. Is displayed. At this time, no pattern suggesting re-change is displayed in the sub-region. In the main area, after the non-transparent "NEXT" pattern is displayed, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start to change again. The stop situation is also called “temporary stop”). At this time, since the number of reservations is still 3, it can be seen that one symbol variation is shown as if the symbol is varied a plurality of times. Next, in the symbol variation performed again, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach again with "7", and then execute the super reach effect, and since the variation was a loss, the first decorative symbol, the second Both of the decorative symbols are determined and stopped at a reach-losing symbol ("717") that is not double. In addition, during the Super Reach effect, the battle effect of friendly characters and enemy characters is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, so even if it is the first decoration pattern, only the number pattern is displayed in small size in the upper right of the screen ( Also referred to as a "retreat display mode"), the player is made to pay attention to the battle performance, and after the battle performance is completed, decoration patterns composed of characters and number patterns are displayed in the same manner as at the start of variation. It should be noted that the pseudo consecutive suggestive symbols are displayed at a predetermined position {for example, the central part of the medium pattern row (approximately in the center of the effect display device SG), near the pending display, etc.} without being scrolled. It may be suggested that a re-variation (pseudo-run) will be performed, and in this case, the pseudo-run symbol is configured to be scrolled and displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol row (approximately at the center of the effect display device SG). You can

Next, FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when specific symbols are displayed and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. Next, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern have "6" displayed on the left and right patterns to form a reach, and furthermore, in the main area, a specific pattern ( After the "development" or "development!!!", which is also called a development pattern, is displayed, the super ready-to-win effect is executed. It should be noted that when the specific symbols are displayed in the main area, the symbols indicating that the super ready-to-win effect will develop are not displayed in the sub-area. Also, "development" and "development!!!" are different symbols, but even if either one is displayed, the super ready-to-win effect, which is the same destination of development, can be executed. In addition, "development" and "development !!!" have different expectations for winning, and when "development !!!" degree is high. In addition, multiple types of super reach effects are provided, for example, super reach effects with different characters have different expectations of winning, and super reach effects are configured in multiple stages such as the first half of super reach and the latter half of super reach. However, as a development pattern for super reach production, not only a pattern that goes through the first half of super reach and then the second half of super reach, but also a pattern that displays the second half of super reach without going through the first half of super reach is provided. good too. Therefore, when "development" or "development!!!" ("development"→super ready-to-win effect A and "development!!!"→super ready-to-win effect A have different expectations for big wins). Also, in the case where the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach are displayed, the first half of Super Reach is displayed when "Development" is displayed and when "Development!!!" is displayed. However, it is also possible to configure so that the ratio of the second half of the super reach is different. Of course, according to the type of development pattern ("development", "development!!!", etc.), it may be configured such that the possibility of developing into a super reach with a high expectation of a big hit among a plurality of types of super reach is different. In addition, a low-expectation super reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, a super reach performance by Kirin described later) and a high-expectation super reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, a battle production that is a super reach production ) may be provided in plurality.

As a supplement, here, the first decorative pattern is composed of the second element (for example, numbers) and the first element (for example, characters) at the time of start of fluctuation, at the time of stop of fluctuation, and before the development of super reach. However, under certain circumstances caused by the production pattern (for example, during super reach, during movable role movement, during probability change promotion production, during error screen display.Here is super reach.) Only the second element (number) consists of

Next, FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition when advanced symbols are displayed corresponding to the advance notice type and a super ready-to-win effect is produced. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Here, the notice display during the pattern change ("comment notice" that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit with letters in the oval frame, "timer" that displays the time until the production that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit is displayed Notice”, and “next notice” indicating that the change will result in super reach) are performed. First, when "chance", which is a "comment notice", is displayed, next, a specific symbol "development" indicating development to a super ready-to-win effect is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. On the other hand, when "00:10:00" (a display indicating that some kind of effect will occur in 10 seconds), which is a "timer notice", is displayed, it is a specific symbol indicating that the super ready-to-win effect will develop. After "Development!!!" is displayed, a super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when "next time SP ready-to-win", which is "next time notice", is displayed, the specific pattern is not displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. In this way, "development" is displayed after "comment notice", "development!!!" is displayed after "timer notice", and specific symbols are not displayed after "next notice". is done. It should be noted that, here, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after "comment notice" and "development!!!" is displayed after "timer notice", respectively, but this is not the case. "Development!!!" can be displayed after "Comment notice" and "Timer notice" can be followed by "Development!!!" may be higher than the percentage of "timer notice" followed by "expansion!!!" The rate at which "development" is displayed after is high. In addition, there is a difference in the degree of expectation for the jackpot between the aforementioned "development" and "development!!!" ” also has a difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is as follows: comment notice < timer notice < next notice.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be adopted, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super ready-to-win effect is produced when different display modes are performed for the same notice type. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Here, a notice display {"comment notice" ("chance" and "great heat!!" are both comment notices) that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit with letters in an oval frame] is performed during the pattern change. will be First, when "chance" is displayed, next, "development", which is a specific pattern indicating that the super ready-to-win effect will develop, is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. On the other hand, when "Super heat!!" is displayed, the super ready-to-win effect is executed after the specific symbol "development!!!" is displayed to indicate that the super ready-to-win effect will develop. In this way, "chance" is associated with "development", and "hot fever!!" is associated with "development!!!". It should be noted that here, it is assumed that "chance" is associated with "development", and that "hot heat!!" is associated with "development!!!", respectively. It is not limited, and it is configured so that "development!!!" can be displayed after "chance" and "development" can be displayed after "hot heat!!", and "development!!!" can be displayed after "chance". The percentage of "development!!!" displayed after "hot heat!!" The percentage of “development” displayed after “chance” may be higher than “chance”. In addition, as mentioned above, there is a difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit between “development” and “development !!!” !” has a higher expectation of a big hit than “Chance”.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be employed, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different look-ahead effect is performed and a super ready-to-win effect is obtained. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, the first pending display changes to blue and the decoration pattern is stopped at "861". Next, in the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension (the suspension that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect. Here, the blue suspension display.), "development" is displayed, and the super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the pattern combination of the decorative symbols at the time of stoppage of the variation is a chance number look-ahead consecutive number (here, "123"), "Development!!!" is displayed in the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension. , a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In addition, when the chance look-ahead occurs, a special effect is generated around the fixed and stopped first decorative pattern to make it easier to recognize that the chance look-ahead has occurred, and the special effect is generated for the second decorative pattern. It may be configured so as not to In this way, "development" is displayed after the pending change effect is displayed as the prefetch effect, and "development !!!" is displayed after the chance eye is displayed as the prefetch effect. there is In addition, here, after the pending change production, "development" is displayed, and after the chance eye look ahead, "development !!!" is displayed. "Development!!!" is displayed even after the pending change effect, and the percentage of "development!!!" may be high, and in this case, "development" may be displayed after the chance lookahead, and the percentage of "development" displayed after the chance lookahead is higher than the rate at which "development" is displayed after the pending change production " The rate at which "development" is displayed may be high. As mentioned above, there is a difference in the expectation of a big hit between "development" and "development !!!" Expectations for the big win are high. It should be noted that, in this example, the correspondence between the pending change production and the development pattern ("development", "development !!!") in the chance eye look-ahead was explained, but if it is a look-ahead production, even if it is another production Well, for example, it can also be applied to "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone", which are background change effects. In addition, in this example, the difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit in one look-ahead effect (holding change effect or look-ahead of the chance) was explained, but whether or not a plurality of types of look-ahead effects were being executed at the same time Depending on the number of pre-reading effects present (complex number of pre-reading effects), it may be configured such that the corresponding relationship with the development pattern (“development” “development !!!”) is different. For example, when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is executed, the development pattern in the trigger fluctuation is better when the hold change effect and the chance eye lookahead (two types of prefetch effect) are executed is likely to be displayed, or when only the pending change effect (one type of prefetch effect) is being executed, the percentage of “development !!!” type) is being executed, it may be configured so that the percentage of “development !!!” is displayed is higher. ) is executed, even if the percentage of “development” displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is being executed is higher good. In addition, similar to the development pattern, the pseudo-continuous pattern is also a pseudo-continuous pattern ("NEXT") depending on whether or not multiple types of pre-reading effects were being executed at the same time or the number of pre-reading effects being executed at the same time (complex number of pre-reading effects). "NEXT!!!") may be configured to have a different correspondence relationship. For example, when the pending change effect and the chance look-ahead (two types of the look-ahead effect) are executed than when only the pending change effect (one type of the look-ahead effect) is executed, pseudo-continuous trigger fluctuation If the pattern is easy to display, or if only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the ratio of “NEXT !!!” It may be configured so that the percentage of “NEXT!!!” displayed is higher when two types) are being executed. The percentage of “NEXT” displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is being performed is higher than the rate of “NEXT” being displayed when the type) is being performed. good too.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be adopted, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a different display mode is performed for the same look-ahead effect type, resulting in a super ready-to-win effect. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Here, a new hold display ("trigger hold display") is displayed in blue (that is, blue is determined in the pending change effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects). Next, when the trigger suspension display remains blue and does not change, "development" is displayed in the pattern variation related to the trigger suspension, and a super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the trigger pending display changes from blue to red, the symbol variation associated with the trigger pending is "development!!!" is displayed, and a super ready-to-win effect (not shown) is executed. In this way, after the blue color is displayed in the pending change effect, "development" is displayed, and after the red color is displayed in the pending change effect, "development!!!" is displayed. . Here, it is assumed that "Development" is displayed after blue, and "Development!!!" is displayed after red, respectively. In this case, the ratio of "Development!!!" displayed after red and "Development!!!" displayed after blue may be higher than the ratio of "Development!!!" displayed after blue. In some cases, "development" may be displayed after red, and "development" may be displayed more frequently after blue than "development" is displayed after red. There is also a difference in the degree of expectation for a big win between blue and red, which are the display modes of the pending change effect, and the degree of expectation for a big win is higher in red than in blue. In this example, the description was made using the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the development pattern (“development”, “development !!!”) in the pending change effect, but if it is a look-ahead effect, it does not have to be a pending change effect. For example, it can also be applied to the "Angel Zone" and "True Angel Zone", which are background change effects.

Next, FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing display transition when developing to the same super ready-to-win effect via different displays. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after the specific symbol "development" or "development !!!" is displayed, which indicates that the super reach production will develop, a low expectation super reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation (first half of super reach) ), an effect in which a giraffe destroys a medium pattern is executed, and a reach-losing symbol combination (“656”) is displayed in a low-expectation super-reach effect. In addition, during the low-expectation super reach, the first decoration pattern is displayed only in the number pattern, but it may be the first decoration pattern composed of the number pattern and the character pattern. Next, a high-expectation super ready-to-win production (second half of super ready-to-win) with a relatively high degree of expectation for big hit is executed. Here, even if any of "development" and "development!!!" !”, the rate of development to the high-expectation-level super-reach production is different. is displayed, the high-expectation super-reach effect is executed at a rate of 50%. In addition, 90% when "development" is displayed and 50% when "development !!!" It will return to the normal screen without developing into a reach effect.

Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing the display transition when developing into the super ready-to-win effect via the button effect. First, the decorative designs (first decorative design, second decorative design) are in the process of changing. Next, the decoration pattern forms a reach, and a button effect is executed that enables the player to operate the sub-input button SB. At the time of the button presentation, the first decoration pattern is only numbers, the left pattern is displayed at the left end of the liquid crystal screen, the right pattern is displayed at the right end of the liquid crystal screen, and a plurality of patterns that can be selected by the player's operation of the sub-input button SB are displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen. is displayed in a circle. The multiple patterns include "6", which is a winning pattern, "Development" and "Development !!!", which indicate that it will be a super reach effect, "5", which is a losing pattern, and "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous pattern. is displayed. When a plurality of patterns rotate in a circle and the sub-input button SB can be operated, a button image with "PUSH" written is displayed in the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen, and the sub-input button SB is operated. Taking this as an opportunity, one pattern is displayed. Here, a predetermined "development" is displayed, and after that, although not shown, a super ready-to-win effect is executed. When the sub-input button SB is not operated, after the validity period of the sub-input button SB has elapsed, "development" is displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. Incidentally, the pattern displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated is determined in advance by the advance notice lottery of the sub-control board S performed at the start of the variation.

Note that the production in this example may be changed as follows.
(1) Before developing into a super ready-to-win effect (=up to the stage where the illustrated development pattern is displayed), the first decorative pattern is not displayed only with a number pattern, but is composed of a number pattern and a character pattern. The configuration may be such that the first decorative pattern is displayed.
(2) Depending on the type of button image (e.g., large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the percentage of symbols to be stopped may differ. When is displayed, the percentage of symbols other than losing symbols such as "NEXT", "Development", "Development!!!", and winning symbols will be displayed higher than when small button images are displayed. may
(3) Depending on the type of button image (e.g., large button image, small button image, default color, red, rainbow color, etc.), the ratio of displayed developed patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns may differ. For example, when a large button image is displayed, the percentage of displayed development patterns is higher than when a small button image is displayed, the percentage of “development!!!” It is also possible to set a high percentage of symbols to be displayed, a high percentage of "NEXT!!!" to be displayed, and the like.
(4) Any image may be displayed at a predetermined timing without displaying the button image. In addition, it is possible to have a pattern in which a button image is displayed (a pattern in which the player can operate the button) and a pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (a pattern in which the player cannot operate the button). Often, in this case, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is configured to have a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing, or the pattern other than the losing pattern (“NEXT”, "Development", "Development!!!", winning symbols, etc.) may be displayed at a higher rate. Furthermore, even if the ratio of the developed symbols displayed is different between the pattern in which the button image is displayed and the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the pattern in which the button image is displayed can increase the percentage of “Development!!!” displayed).
(5) Pseudo-continuous symbols may include not only "NEXT" but also multiple types such as "NEXT!!!". !” may be configured to increase the expectation of a big hit, or “NEXT!!!” may be displayed in an array pattern in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle. An arrangement pattern in which "NEXT!!!" is displayed at the same time may be provided.
(6) There may be a plurality of types of arrangement patterns in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circular shape, and when a plurality of types are provided, fluctuations with high expectations for big hits (for example, big hit fluctuations, super reach effects) variation, etc.), the ratio of displaying an array pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than in the case of a variation with a low degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, fluctuation without reach, loss, etc.). good. For example, an arrangement pattern with a high probability of winning a big hit may be an arrangement pattern with no missing symbols (for example, an arrangement pattern displayed as “6 (jackpot pattern), development, development, NEXT, development !!!”) or “development ” instead of “Development!!!”・Arrangement patterns in which "Development!!!" is displayed, etc.).

As in (3), the proportion at which the development pattern is displayed varies depending on the display mode of the notice of the change (button effect, comment notice, timer notice, etc.), or the display mode of the notice of the change By configuring the display ratio of the pseudo-continuous symbols to be different according to the change, if the display mode of the advance notice of the change is highly expected, the possibility that the advanced symbols and the pseudo-continuous symbols will be displayed becomes high. can be configured so that the degree of expectation of a big hit can be easily grasped.

Next, FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super ready-to-win effect is obtained in different effect stages (also referred to as effect modes). First, the production stage A will be described in detail. In the performance stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a ready-to-win effect is formed, and after the specific symbol "development" indicating development to a super-to-win effect is displayed, the super-to-win effect is executed. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. In the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after forming the reach, the super reach production is executed as it is (that is, the specific symbol "development" indicating that the reach is developed is not displayed), or when the reach is formed, the production stage After displaying a "development (an aspect in which the inside of a Chinese character is hollowed out as shown)" different from A, a super ready-to-win effect is executed. That is, in this example, the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage, but the display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ (is the same), and the first decoration is displayed according to the production stage. Although an advanced design can be displayed in the design, the second decorative design is configured so as not to display an advanced design.

Next, FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing display transition when re-fluctuation is executed in different production stages. First, the production stage A will be described in detail. In the performance stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after a reach is formed and the "NEXT" symbol indicating that the re-variation is to be executed is displayed, the symbol variation is started again. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. In the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, after the symbol combination "678" (order) indicating that the re-variation is executed in the first decorative symbol is displayed (temporarily stopped), the symbol variation is started again, or the reach is formed, after displaying the "NEXT (the form in which the inside of the alphabet is hollowed out as shown)" different from the production stage A, the pattern variation is started again. It should be noted that, depending on which production stage re-fluctuation was performed, if re-fluctuation is performed twice {variation start → temporary stop → re-fluctuation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re- Fluctuation)} and when re-fluctuation is performed three times {variation start → temporary stop → re-fluctuation → temporary stop → re-fluctuation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-fluctuation)} You may make it differ from the big-hit expectation degree of . For example, in production stage A (for example, the daytime stage or a non-predictive stage other than the angel zone), the average jackpot expectation is 5% when re-variation is performed twice, and re-variation is performed 3 times. The average jackpot expectation is 25% when the The expected jackpot is 40% on average when the is executed twice, and the expected jackpot is 50% when the revariation is executed three times, with a difference of 10% (a difference of 1.25 times ). The difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit (the degree of expectation for the execution of a special game) is obtained by subtracting it in percentage display, by dividing the degree of expectation for a big hit (1/N), or the like. In addition, although the display mode of the first decorative pattern differs depending on the production stage (production stage A, production stage B), the display form of the second decorative pattern is the same, and the first decorative pattern is the "NEXT" pattern. Although it can be displayed, the second decorative design may be configured so that the "NEXT" design is not displayed. It should be noted that both production stage A and production stage B have been mainly explained as being non-predictive stages in non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state (game state similar to the above-mentioned daytime stage), but are not limited to this. , production stage A is a non-prefetch stage in a non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state (for example, the above-mentioned daytime stage), production stage B is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time-reduced game state (for example, The production stage A and the production stage B are configured as the above-mentioned night stage), and both the production stage A and the production stage B are configured as a look-ahead stage in the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the production stage A and the production stage B are both the probability fluctuation game state and It is also possible to configure as a non-prefetching stage in the time reduction game state, and if a plurality of production stages are provided, it is possible to apply the production form shown in this example regardless of the game state.

In addition, in FIG. 152, the configuration regarding the “NEXT” symbol, which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is illustrated, but the development symbol may also be configured in the same manner as in FIG. That is, (1) the development pattern temporarily stops as the first decorative pattern in the production stage A, while the development pattern does not temporarily stop as the first decorative pattern in the production stage B, (2) the development pattern in the production stage A. is temporarily stopped in the display mode A as the first decorative pattern, while in the production stage B, the developed pattern is temporarily stopped in the display mode B as the first decorative pattern (the display mode is different from the production stage A). may be configured.

Next, FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing the display transition when the pseudo consecutive symbols and the specific symbols are displayed and the super ready-to-win effect is executed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a translucent "NEXT" pattern, which is a re-change suggesting pattern that suggests that a reach is formed and that re-change is to be executed, is displayed. When the translucent "NEXT" pattern is moved from the top to the bottom of the liquid crystal screen and re-fluctuation is executed, the non-transparent "NEXT" pattern is displayed and then pattern fluctuation is started again. The symbol variation is performed again, the ready-to-win state is formed again, and "development" indicating that the super ready-to-win effect is executed instead of the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed this time. After that, the super ready-to-win effect is executed, and since the variation was a loss, the game is fixed and stopped with a ready-to-win losing pattern ("717"). As shown in this figure, it is possible to display a specific symbol (eg, "development") after displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol (eg, "NEXT"), while displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol after displaying a specific symbol. It may be configured so that it cannot be displayed. In addition, the ratio of specific symbols to be displayed depends on whether or not pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed (=whether or not re-fluctuation is performed), the number of times pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed (=number of re-fluctuations), etc. can be different. For example, the greater the number of re-changes, the more likely the specific pattern is displayed (= the higher the percentage of specific patterns displayed without displaying the lost pattern), and the higher the number of re-changes , which has a high expectation of a big hit, may be displayed at a higher rate even if the specific symbols are displayed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 154, even when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (during the display of pseudo continuous symbols and during the display of advanced symbols), the second decorative symbols are displayed in the left, middle, and right columns. The variable display is continued in all, and further, the variable display of the second decorative symbols may be continued in all of the left, middle, and right columns even during super reach.

Next, FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing display transition when the first decorative patterns are displayed in an overlapping manner. First, the first decorative pattern is stopped at "861", but the left pattern (elephant) and the middle pattern (giraffe), and the middle pattern (giraffe) and the right pattern (chick) are displayed in duplicate. At this time, the middle pattern (giraffe) is placed behind the LCD screen (the player side is in front) from the left pattern (elephant) and right pattern (chick), and the left pattern (elephant) and right pattern (chick) are partly It is hidden. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the decorative pattern starts pattern fluctuation. Next, a reach is formed, and the medium pattern is displayed as a low-speed fluctuation display. At this time, the middle pattern is arranged in front of the liquid crystal screen than the left and right patterns forming the reach. In this figure, the chick ("1") as the medium symbol is displayed at low speed and does not stop, and then the pseudo-continuous symbol ("NEXT" symbol) is displayed at low speed and stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. ing. After that, although not shown, after a re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is executed, a super ready-to-win effect is executed, and since the variation was a loss, the game is fixed and stopped with a reach-to-loss pattern (“717”). When displaying the reach-losing pattern, the middle pattern (chick) is placed behind the LCD screen from the left pattern (lion) and the right pattern (lion), just like before the start of the fluctuation, and part of the middle pattern (chick) is hidden. As for the second decorative symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not displayed redundantly at any timing. In addition, even if a development pattern ("Development" or "Development!!!") is displayed instead of a pseudo-continuation pattern, the relationship between the left and right symbols and the middle symbol will be displayed when the pseudo-continuation symbol is displayed. It can be the same as when The display mode may be a display mode in stage C or a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with a high chance of winning). In other words, the display mode in this figure may be a display mode that is not displayed in stage A or stage B but may be displayed in stage C, or a display mode that can be displayed in stage C. It may be a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with a high degree of expectation when reach is performed) rather than in a short-term variation).

Next, FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative design and the second decorative design. First, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start pattern fluctuation. At this time, the speed of the first decorative pattern is gradually increased from low speed to high speed pattern fluctuation (low speed→medium speed→high speed). On the other hand, the second decorative pattern has a constant pattern fluctuation speed, and is always a high-speed pattern fluctuation. Next, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern become high speed, and when the reach is formed by the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, in the first decorative pattern, the middle pattern becomes a low speed pattern fluctuation, and the second decorative pattern becomes a high speed. In the 2 decorative patterns, the middle pattern is a high-speed pattern variation. After that, during execution of the super reach effect, the left pattern and the right pattern in which both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern form the reach are stopped (or temporarily stopped), and only the middle pattern is at high speed. Pattern is changing. After the end of the super ready-to-win effect, the variation was a loss, so the game is fixed and stopped with a ready-to-win losing symbol (“686”). In this figure, while the super ready-to-win effect is being executed, only the middle pattern is changed while forming the ready-to-win in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. During execution of medium or specific super ready-to-win production, all the first decorative symbols and all the second decorative symbols may be varied. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern may also have a plurality of fluctuation speeds, and in this case, it is preferable that the second decorative pattern is less likely to change in fluctuation speed than the first decorative pattern. For example, low speed is not used in the second decorative pattern, but medium speed is used (in addition, low speed, medium speed, and high speed are used in the first decorative pattern). In addition, it is possible to configure the second decorative pattern so as not to temporarily stop in the middle, specifically, it is configured to always be at high speed or stop (fixed stop), or high speed, medium speed and stop (fixed stop). and the like.

Here, the pseudo consecutive symbols and development symbols in the time shortening game state are supplemented. In the time shortening game state, it may be constructed such that the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advanced symbols can be displayed, but it is more preferable to construct so that the pseudo-continuous symbols and the advanced symbols cannot be displayed. This is because, in the time-reduced game state, the variation time is relatively shorter than in the normal state (non-time-reduced game state), and there are fewer effects suggesting a big win within one variation. When displaying pseudo-continuous symbols or advanced symbols, since the selection has a relatively long fluctuation time, the interval between big wins (the period from the end of one big win to the start of the next big win) is lengthened. As a result, the speed at which the number of balls increases during the consecutive villas will be slowed down. In addition, in this way, in the time shortening game state, a short variation time is likely to be selected, and the effect amount is also small. It is preferable that it consists only of elements (numbers).

Next, FIG. 157 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of a loss variation. First, (a) in the non-variable probability game state and the non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 4, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the effect display device SG. In the non-variable probability game state and the non-reduced time game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is "number + character", and the display mode of the second decorative pattern is "number" only. . (b) After that, the hold is digested, the hold digestion transmission image (may be referred to as the hold image, the hold display, the hold, etc.) corresponding to the digested hold is displayed, and the pattern fluctuation that becomes a loss starts. be done. Note that the pending display (sometimes referred to as a pending image) and the pending digestion transfer image may be collectively referred to as a variable rights image. In addition, the first reserved display and the second reserved display may be collectively referred to as reserved display, and a plurality or all of the first reserved display, the second reserved display, and the reserved digestion transfer image are referred to as variable rights images. Sometimes.

<When power failure did not occur>
After that, (c) stop display is performed at "817" of "numbers + characters" where the first decorative design is a failing design, and stop display is performed at "817" of "numbers" where the second decorative design is a failing design. In addition, when the next variation starts, the first decorative design is the "number + character""817" decorative design, and the second decorative design is the "number""817" decorative design. start scrolling). Here, as a modification, instead of variably displaying both the first decorative design and the second decorative design, only the first decorative design may be variably displayed and the second decorative design may not be displayed.

<When power is generated>
After the above-mentioned (b), (d) power interruption occurs in the middle of the pattern variation. (e) After that, the power supply is restored and the variation of the main game symbols is resumed, but the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are not variably displayed (become hidden) during the execution of the symbol variation. It should be noted that the variation time of the pattern variation is 50 seconds, and if the power failure occurs at the timing 10 seconds after the start of the variation (it may be the case that the power failure processing is executed), after the power is restored It is configured to perform the remaining 40 seconds of variation.

(f) After that, the pattern variation that has been executed is finished, and the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with "numbers + characters" which is "711", which is a stop mode dedicated to power failure, and "711". , the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. The stop display here may be a confirmed display or a temporary stop display (the same applies to other configurations), but it is preferably applied only to the first decorative pattern. It is desirable that the second decorative pattern is only fixedly stopped (not temporarily stopped). (g) After that, the suspension is canceled, and the next symbol variation is started. Here, as a modification, the stop display of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols may not be intervened. The first and second decorative symbols are hidden until the stop display (variable fixed time that is the period during which the stop display is maintained) after the variable display ends, and the variable display of the next main game pattern is started. It may be configured such that the first decorative design and the second decorative design are re-displayed on this occasion.

As described above, in the figure, when the power is turned off, after the power is restored, "711" of "numbers and characters" is displayed as the first decorative pattern as the stop pattern exclusively for when the power is restored, and the second decorative pattern is displayed. "711" of "number" is displayed in the pattern. That is, except after power is restored, "711" is not stop-displayed (not selected as a stop design) as a missing design in either the first decorative design or the second decorative design. As a modification, the lost symbol "711" may be configured to be stopped and displayed other than after the power is restored. However, in any case, it is desirable that two out of the three digits of the lost pattern displayed after the power is restored have the same number or different numbers for each of the three digits, and the reach mode (for example, It is desirable not to be a winning pattern (for example, three symbols are the same number such as "777" and "222").

In addition, the timing at which "711" of "number + character" is displayed as the first decorative symbol and the timing at which "711" of "number" is displayed as the second decorative symbol are determined and stopped timing of the main game symbol ( the timing at which the fixed stop starts). In this case, at the timing when the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are stopped and displayed. Also, as described above, the main game symbols are determined as the timing at which "711" of "number + character" is displayed as the first decorative symbol and the timing at which "711" of "number" is displayed as the second decorative symbol. It may be the timing at which the next symbol variation starts after the game is stopped (timing at which the first decorative symbol starts to vary). In this case, at the timing when the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed, the first decorative design and the second decorative design have started to fluctuate (without stop display).

It should be noted that the stop mode of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are both scheduled to be "817" in the case where the power interruption does not occur and in the case where the power interruption occurs. However, if a power failure occurs, it is configured to display "711" exclusively for power failure. That is, the planned stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different in the case where the power interruption occurs during the fluctuation and in the case where the power interruption does not occur. display mode after stopping) can be displayed.

It should be noted that the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same stop symbols regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. With this configuration, even if the power supply is interrupted during pattern fluctuation due to a power outage in the game hall or the like, the stop pattern of the main game pattern is not changed, so that the result of the game is not affected. On the other hand, by making the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol special symbols for the time of power failure, the occurrence of power failure can be appropriately notified to the player and the manager.

In addition, as described in (a) of FIG. 157, in the same figure, the case where the symbol variation starts in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state is exemplified, but it is not limited to this. However, the configuration illustrated in the figure can also be applied to other game states. Similarly, even if the game state is described in figures other than FIG. 157, it is merely an example, and it should be supplemented that it can be applied to other game states.

Next, FIG. 158 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of the big hit variation. First, (a) in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 4, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the effect display device SG. In the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state, the display mode (sometimes referred to as display format) of the first decorative symbols is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols. (sometimes referred to as display format) is only "numbers". (b) After that, the suspension is digested, the suspension digestion transmission image corresponding to the digested suspension is displayed, and the symbol variation for the big win is started.

Here, the display format of the first decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern is "number", "number + character", etc., and the display format for "number" "777" and "number" "666" are the same, and the display format is different between "777" in "number" and "777" in "number+character".

<When power failure did not occur>
(c) After that, the first decorative pattern is stopped at "777" of "number + character", which is a big win pattern, and the second decorative pattern is stopped at "777" of "number", which is a big hit pattern. . (d) After that, the jackpot is started. During the big win, the display position of the first decorative pattern is changed to the upper left of the performance display device SG, and the size of the display area is reduced from "numbers + characters" to "numbers" only. As a modified example, instead of three-digit numbers, one-digit numbers (for example, only "7" when a big win is made with "777", only "2" when a big win is made with "222", etc.) may be used. Also, the second decorative pattern is hidden. (e) After that, when the jackpot ends, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed as "777" with only "numbers" which are jackpot patterns, after which the suspension is terminated and the next pattern variation is started. It will happen. It should be noted that when the next variation starts, the decorative design of "777" (the first decorative design and the second decorative design, or only the first decorative design may be used) will start to fluctuate. After the end of the big win, the game state before the start of the big win, that is, the non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state, is shifted to the probability variable game state and time shortened game state. The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in , are both composed only of "numbers" (the display format is "numbers" only). In addition, the game state to be shifted after the big hit is only an example, and the same configuration can be applied as long as it is different from the game state before the start of the big win.

<In case of power failure>
(f) After that, a power cut occurs in the middle of the pattern variation. (g) After that, the power supply is restored and the variation of the main game symbols is resumed, but the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are not variably displayed (become hidden) during the execution of the symbol variation.

(h) After that, the symbol variation for the big win, which has been executed, ends, and the big win is executed. When the jackpot is started, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the stop mode "711" exclusively for when the power is turned off. During the big win, the display position of the first decorative pattern is changed to the upper left of the performance display device SG, the size of the display area is reduced, and the display format is changed from "numbers + characters" to "numbers" only. As a modification, instead of the three-digit number, a symbol (such as “?” or “???”) may be used instead, or the first decorative pattern or “?” (“???”) may be used. may not be displayed at all. Also, the second decorative pattern is hidden. (g) After that, the jackpot ends, the suspension is canceled, and the next symbol variation starts. It should be noted that when the next variation starts, the first decorative design and the second decorative design "711" with only "numbers" will start to fluctuate (only the first decorative design and can also be used). After the end of the big win, the game state before the start of the big win, that is, the non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state, is shifted to the probability variable game state and time shortened game state. Both the first decorative design and the second decorative design in are composed only of "numbers". In addition, the game state to be shifted after the big hit is only an example, and the same configuration can be applied as long as it is different from the game state before the start of the big win. In addition, regarding the performance during the big hit (jackpot performance), if the power failure does not occur, the performance will differ depending on the type of the jackpot (whether it is a 16R big hit or a 4R big hit). The 16R big hit will be a big hit production A if there is no power cutoff, and the 4R big hit will be a big hit production B if the power cutoff does not occur). It is preferable that the big hit effect be the same regardless (the 16R big win when the power is cut off and the 4R big win when the power is cut become the big win effect C).

In this way, in the same figure, when a power failure occurs, "711" is displayed as a stop symbol exclusively for when the power is restored during the jackpot after the power is restored and in the decorative symbols after the jackpot is finished (see Although the configuration in which both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed is illustrated, only the first decorative pattern may be displayed. In this way, even when the power is interrupted during the symbol variation that will result in a big hit, the stop symbol "711", which is exclusive after the power is restored, will be activated in the same way as when the power is interrupted during the symbol variation that will result in a loss. configured to be displayed.

In the figure, the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is hidden during the big win, but this is not a limitation, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed during the big win. may also be hidden, or both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Also, during the big hit, the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Also, in the configuration in which the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is not displayed during the big win, as described above, three "7" patterns are arranged before the start of the big win, and only one is displayed during the big win. may be configured to display In addition, in the embodiment in which the first decorative pattern is displayed during the big hit, as a modification, instead of the first decorative pattern, a third decorative pattern in a new display mode (display format) (for example, "numbers" of the first decorative pattern) " are Arabic numerals, whereas the "numbers" of the third decorative pattern are Roman numerals).

Also, the timing at which "711" is displayed may be the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot ends, or immediately after the start of the time-reduced gaming state), or when the first pattern variation after the jackpot ends. The start timing (the timing at which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern start the variable display) may be used.

It should be noted that the stop mode of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is scheduled to be "777" for both the case where the power interruption does not occur and the case where the power interruption occurs. However, when power failure occurs, "711" dedicated to power failure is displayed during and/or after the big win. That is, the planned stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different in the case where the power interruption occurs during the fluctuation and in the case where the power interruption does not occur. display mode after stopping) is displayed.

As detailed in FIGS. 157 and 158, when a power cut occurs during execution of symbol variation executed in a predetermined game state (for example, non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state) , when the power is cut off during the execution of the pattern variation that becomes a big hit, and when the power is cut off during the execution of the design variation that becomes a loss, at the start of the next variation after the power is restored (or the next time immediately before the start of fluctuation, immediately before digestion of the hold), the same symbol combination (combination of numbers) is displayed for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol ("711" in the figure). However, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is configured to be different. More specifically, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the symbol variation that results in a loss, as shown in (f) and (g) of FIG. (display format), and if a power failure occurs during the execution of the symbol variation that will result in a big hit, as shown in FIG. It has become. With respect to the second decorative pattern, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the pattern variation that will result in a loss, or if the power is cut off during the execution of the pattern variation that will result in a big hit, the power supply will not be affected. The display mode (display format) and pattern combination (combination of numbers) of the second decorative pattern after restoration (at the start of the next fluctuation after the power is restored, just before the start of the next fluctuation, just before the holding digestion, etc.) are the same.

In this way, even in the pattern variation started in the same game state, depending on whether the pattern variation is a loss variation or a big hit variation, power interruption occurs during the pattern variation, and then the power supply is restored. By configuring the display mode (display format) of one decorative pattern to be different, it is possible to appropriately inform the player of the game situation even after the power is cut off. Here, the combination of the "number" of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is configured to be "711" regardless of whether the pattern variation is a losing variation or a big hit variation. After the power supply is restored, the player can ask whether the pattern variation that caused the power failure was a big hit variation or a losing variation, and if it was a big hit variation, which "numbers" were aligned to make a big hit. It is possible to uniformly and fairly display information that cannot be known by conventional methods, and furthermore, it is displayed in a manner that indicates a failure, so that the player who has visually recognized the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern has a loss. It can be configured to be less noticeable.

157 and 158, the same game state is any state controlled by the main control board M, such as a time reduction game state, a probability variation game state, a limited frequency state (game state related to variation patterns), etc. It may be applied to any state controlled by the sub-control board S such as the production mode.

Next, FIG. 159 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of a big hit variation. First, (a) in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 3, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are variably displayed on the effect display device SG. Note that the look-ahead effect is not executed, in other words, there is no trigger pending within the pending. (b) After that, at a predetermined timing, a big hit determination effect is executed as an advance notice effect during symbol variation. The advance notice effect in the figure is a different effect from the look-ahead effect, and is a effect that suggests the result of the pattern variation being executed. Also, the jackpot determination effect is a effect for notifying that a big win is definite, and in the figure, "Rainbow!" is displayed. That is, when the big hit confirmation effect is executed as the notice effect during the symbol change, it is certain that the big win pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the symbol change. In addition, when the big hit confirmation production is executed, it may be decided that the big hit will be 1000/1000 after that, and when the big hit confirmation production is executed, 999/1000 (approximate to 1 without limit) Probability) may be determined to be a big hit. Further, the notice effect in the figure may be referred to as the variable notice effect, the non-prefetch notice effect, or the like.

(c) After that, the power is cut off during the symbol variation in which the big hit confirmation effect is executed as the advance notice effect during the symbol variation. (d) After that, the power supply is restored and the variation of the main game pattern is resumed. Is displayed). (e) After that, the main game symbol is stopped at the big win symbol ("7A" corresponding to the 16R big win), and the big win is started. When the big win starts (or the big win start demonstration time starts), the performance display device SG erases the characters during screen return and switches to the screen display during the big win. In addition, during the big hit, "711" is displayed as the first decorative pattern exclusively for when the power is restored, and the second decorative pattern is not displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be constructed so that neither the first decorative pattern nor the second decorative pattern is displayed during the big hit, or both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed. may be configured. Also, during the big hit, the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Also, in the configuration in which the first decorative pattern is displayed and the second decorative pattern is not displayed during the big win, as described above, "?" and "???" are configured to be displayed during the big win. Alternatively, the specifications may be such that the first decorative pattern and "?" ("???") are not displayed at all. In addition, regarding the performance during the big hit (jackpot performance), if the power failure does not occur, the performance will differ depending on the type of the jackpot (whether it is a 16R big hit or a 4R big hit). The 16R big hit becomes the big win performance A when there is no power failure, and the 4R big win becomes the big win performance B when the power failure does not occur), but when the power failure occurs, the performance is the same regardless of the big win type. (The 16R jackpot when the power is cut off and the 4R jackpot when the power cut is turned off are the jackpot effects C).

(f) After that, the big win is completed, the suspension is anew, and the next symbol variation is started. At the start of the next symbol variation (or after the jackpot ends and before the symbol variation starts), for the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, "711" dedicated to power return is displayed as a "number". The Rukoto. It should be noted that the game state after the end of the jackpot is exemplified in the case of shifting to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state.

Next, FIG. 160 is an image diagram relating to the case where a power failure occurs during execution of the look-ahead effect. First, (a) in a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state, the number of reservations is 2, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device SG, A new suspension occurs and the number of suspensions becomes 3, and a big win determination performance, which is a suspension change performance, is executed as a look-ahead performance for the newly generated suspension image (indicated by "☆" in the figure). (b) After that, a power cut occurs during the same symbol variation. In addition, when the big hit confirmation effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, it does not notify that the pattern variation being executed (or the pattern variation that has started execution) will be a big hit, but the pattern variation that is the target of the look-ahead effect. In other words, it informs that it is certain that the symbol variation associated with the trigger suspension will result in a big hit.

(c) After that, the power supply is restored and the variation of the main game pattern is resumed, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not displayed while the symbol variation is being executed (they become non-display and the characters during the screen recovery are Is displayed). (d) After that, the symbol variation that leads to a loss is executed a plurality of times, and the symbol variation related to the holding that triggers the execution of the big hit confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect starts. In addition, when the hold that triggers the execution of the big hit confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect is digested, the display mode of the pending ingestion transmission image after that is the display mode of the hold image that is the big hit determination effect executed as the look-ahead effect is the same as In this case, it may be configured so that the big hit confirmation effect (displayed as "☆" in the same figure), which is a pending change effect as the look-ahead effect, is not executed during the pattern variation that causes multiple losses, or multiple times of loss. It may be configured to restart during any one of the symbol variations during the symbol variation. Also, the display mode of the pending digestion transmission image may be different from the display mode of the pending image that is the big hit confirmation effect executed as the look-ahead effect (for example, "●" display).

(e) After that, the symbol variation targeted for the big win determination effect is finished, and the big win symbol ("7A" corresponding to the 16R big win) is stopped and displayed. Since the jackpot pattern is stopped in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode (display format) of "numbers + characters", and "777" is displayed in a stopped state. As for the decorative pattern, "777" is stopped and displayed in the display mode (display format) of "number". (f) During the big hit, "777" is displayed as the first decorative design, and the second decorative design is not displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be constructed so that neither the first decorative pattern nor the second decorative pattern is displayed during the big hit, or both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed. may be configured. Also, during the big hit, the first decorative pattern may be hidden and the second decorative pattern may be displayed. Also, in the configuration in which the first decorative pattern is displayed during the big win and the second decorative pattern is hidden, as described above, three "7" symbols are displayed before the start of the big win, and only one is displayed during the big win. may be configured to display

(g) After that, the jackpot ends. After the end of the big win and before the start of the pattern variation, the big win symbol "777" related to the executed big win is displayed as a "number" for the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols. "777" is displayed as a "number" because the state is shifted to the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state after the big hit is completed.

In this way, when the big hit confirmation effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, and when the power supply is interrupted during the pattern variation during which the big win confirmation effect is executed, the stop pattern after the end of the big win to be executed thereafter is "777". There is, and it is configured not to be a symbol combination dedicated to the time of power return.

As detailed in FIGS. 159 and 160, when the power supply is interrupted after the big hit confirmation effect is executed due to the big hit fluctuation, the first decorative pattern immediately after the end of the big win is the number dedicated to power recovery. While the combination is displayed, when the power supply is cut off after the big win confirmation performance is executed as the look-ahead performance, the first decorative pattern immediately after the big win is not displayed exclusively for when the power is restored, but before the start of the big win. It is configured so that it can be a big hit pattern that is stopped and displayed on the screen. By configuring in this way, when the variation results in a big hit, even if the power is cut off, the jackpot will start immediately. When the first decorative pattern is displayed by a combination of numbers dedicated to the time of power failure, and when the big win is achieved after executing the pattern variations for a predetermined number of times, when the power is interrupted, the period from the restoration of the power to the end of the big win is determined. Since the period is long, the first decoration pattern is displayed in the jackpot pattern immediately after the jackpot is finished, so that the occurrence of the power failure can be preferentially notified according to the game situation and the jackpot is executed. It is possible to selectively use the case of giving priority to the fact that it has been done.

In addition, in FIG. 160, as an example of the look-ahead effect, the pending change effect was illustrated, but the look-ahead effect applicable to this example is not limited to this, and the look-ahead zone effect accompanied by the background change (specifically, the background Normally, the "mountain" background is displayed as a production, but due to the occurrence of a hold that triggers the execution of the look-ahead zone production, the display may switch to the "sky" background or "space" background, etc. The background is more likely to hit the jackpot than the "mountain" background, and the "space" background is more likely to hit the jackpot than the "sky" background, and the waiting stage that triggered the execution of the look-ahead zone effect confirms the hit). , A countdown look-ahead effect in which numbers are subtracted and displayed at the start of pattern fluctuation (specifically, a countdown look-ahead effect is displayed so that "0" is displayed when the hold that triggered the execution of the countdown look-ahead effect is digested. It is a production that subtracts the number each time the hold that is digested before the hold that triggered the execution is digested, and the color of the number is "white", "red", "rainbow", If it is "Rainbow", it can be applied to various prefetch effects such as the effect that the big hit in the hold that triggered the execution of the countdown prefetch effect is confirmed). In addition, in the embodiment in which the first decorative pattern is displayed during the big hit, as a modification, instead of the first decorative pattern, a third decorative pattern in a new display mode (display format) (for example, "numbers" of the first decorative pattern) " are Arabic numerals, whereas the "numbers" of the third decorative pattern are Roman numerals). Note that the background effect is sometimes referred to as an effect mode.

Next, FIG. 161 is an image diagram regarding execution of the performance of the role product. First, (a) in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, the number of reservations is 3, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed on the production display device SG, as a super ready-to-win production. A battle effect is being executed (execution is started after 30 seconds from the start of pattern variation). In addition, since the super ready-to-win effect is being executed, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the upper right row of the effect display device while the left pattern and the right pattern are displayed in a tenpie state, and the second decorative pattern is tenpie. All patterns are displayed fluctuating. (b) After that, as a super reach effect, the main character's attack hits the enemy character, and the role effect (effect accompanied by the driving of the movable character) is executed (execution starts 50 seconds after the start of the pattern fluctuation) ). In this way, the role product presentation in the figure plays a role of definitely informing the player that the symbol variation being executed will result in a big win.

Here, the movable accessory (sometimes referred to as the movable accessory YK) during execution of the accessory production in FIG. During the execution of the performance of the performance ("initial position → stop for 5 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the performance display device SG → initial position"), or the performance display device SG The first decorative pattern is not displayed, and the second decorative pattern maintains variable display. Also, the first reserved display is hidden, and the second reserved display continues to be displayed. Note that the first pending display is displayed before the battle effect is started as the super ready-to-win effect, but may be hidden after the battle effect is started. Also, during execution of the performance of the character, as shown in (b), since the movable character after the movement is driven in front of the second decorative pattern, when the second decorative pattern is viewed from the front, part of the pattern (Second decorative pattern in the left column) visibility is reduced, but in order to improve it, as a modification, the display position of the second decorative pattern is changed even before the movable accessory is driven. However, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed behind the movable accessory (so that the visibility of the second decorative symbol is not hindered by the movable accessory).

Here, in the figure, as the second pending display, an image with a pending number of 3 is displayed, that is, the pending number on the first main game side or the pending number on the second main game side In the shortened game state, the number of reservations on the first main game side, and in the time shortened game state, the number of reservations on the second main game side) is exemplified. It may be constructed such that both the number of reservations on the main game side and the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed (for example, images of two numbers such as "3" and "0" are displayed). In such a configuration, both the number of reservations on the first main game side and the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed regardless of the performance mode or the game state. may be configured as follows. Moreover, it should be supplemented that such a configuration is not limited to the configuration shown in the same figure, and can be applied to all embodiments or configurations according to this example.

(c) After that, an effect of defeating the enemy character is executed, and both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed as big hit patterns. Although not shown, after that, the first decorative pattern is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The display size and display mode (display format) of the decorative symbols are not changed, and then the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are fixed and stopped.

(d) On the other hand, in the non-variable probability game state and the non-time reduction game state, there is no suspension and the symbols are stopped, power cutoff occurs. (e) After that, the power is restored, and the operation check of the movable accessory is executed as the initial operation after the power is restored.

Here, the movable accessory at the time of the operation check in the same figure is driven in the manner of "initial position → stop for 2 seconds at a predetermined position in front of the effect display device SG → initial position", and the operation check is being performed. , the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are not displayed (the effect display device SG displays that the screen is being restored). Also, the time from the start of the operation check to the end is 10 seconds.

(f) After that, a suspension occurs during the operation check of the movable accessory (while it is returning to the initial position), the suspension is digested, and the pattern fluctuation is started, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern will start the variable display. The timing of resuming the display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern after the power is restored includes (1) the timing when the suspension occurs, (2) the timing when the suspension is terminated, and (3) a predetermined time after the power is restored. Elapsed timing or the like may be used.

In this way, when the character effect is executed, the first decorative pattern is hidden and the second decorative pattern is displayed. Both the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed.

Although (d) to (f) in FIG. 4 illustrate the case where the power is cut off while the symbols are stopped, the following configuration may be used.
(1) Power outage occurs during pattern fluctuation (2) Power is restored (3) Pattern fluctuation resumes based on power restoration, and an operation check is executed in which the movable accessory stops in front of the effect display device for 2 seconds. However, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display are not displayed (the screen displays the characters "Returning to the screen").
(4) Since the pattern variation was terminated during the execution of the action check of the movable accessory and a suspension occurred, a new pattern variation is started. When the new symbol variation starts, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the first reserved display, and the second reserved display may be displayed as described above. In the case of the configuration as described above, in the new symbol variation in (4), when executing the effects such as (a) to (c) in FIG. 161, the operation check is performed after the new symbol variation starts In order to complete within 10 seconds (because the power supply is restored and the operation check is started during the pattern change before the new pattern change), the operation check will not be performed overlapping with the super reach effect (battle effect). Furthermore, the action check is not performed in duplicate with the performance of the character.

Note that the character effect may be executed when, as shown in FIG. It may be configured to be executed in order to notify the player that the possibility of becoming is relatively high. The configuration shown in the figure is applicable to any configuration.

In addition, as shown in the same figure, in the case of executing a role production that definitely notifies that the pertinent symbol variation will result in a big hit by executing it, the role production is performed from the start of the symbol variation that will result in a big win. The time to start driving the movable accessory (50 seconds in the figure) is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored (10 seconds in the figure). . In addition to the production pattern in which 50 seconds are required from the start of fluctuation until the start of driving of the movable role related to the role production, as in the flow of production in the same figure, the driving of the movable role related to the role production is started. A production pattern requiring 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation until the start of the movement, a production pattern requiring 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation until the start of driving of the movable role related to the performance of the role, and start of driving the movable role related to the performance of the role. A plurality of movable character object driving production patterns may be provided, such as a production pattern that requires 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation to until, but in any of these production patterns, the movement related to the character production from the start of the fluctuation of the pattern fluctuation It is preferable that the time required to start driving the accessory exceeds 10 seconds, which is the time from the start to the end of the operation check after power is restored.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the case where the symbol variation is executed like "the symbol variation that becomes a loss → the symbol variation that becomes a big hit", immediately before the end of the symbol variation that becomes a loss (for example, 0 of the fixed stop) .1 second)), and even if the power is restored after that, after the operation check after the power is restored, it is definitely notified that the pattern variation being executed will be a big hit. can be executed, and a situation in which the player cannot grasp the game situation can be prevented.

In addition, as shown in the same figure, in the case of executing a role production that definitely notifies that the pertinent symbol variation will result in a big hit by executing it, the role production is performed from the start of the symbol variation that will result in a big win. is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation check after the power is restored (10 seconds in the figure) after the driving of the movable accessory ends and the first decorative pattern is displayed again. It has become.

Also, in the figure, the case of the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state is illustrated, but the configuration of the same figure can be applied to any gaming state. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be employed, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Further, the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) The first decorative symbol becomes a reach ("7↓7"), and then stop display ("787") when the reach is lost.
(2) After that, the game is not executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, no game ball is entered into the ball entrance and no pattern variation is executed), so that the standby state is entered and the standby movie is displayed. be. While the waiting movie is being displayed, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are hidden (only the first decorative design may be hidden).
(3) When the power is turned off while the standby movie is being displayed, and then the power is restored, the standby movie is not displayed and the first decorative symbol is a stop symbol (for example, "711") dedicated to when the power is restored. ) (the second decorative pattern is also displayed as “711”).
(4) If the game state during the display of the standby movie is the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol after the power is restored is "711" of "numbers + characters" (the second 2 The decorative symbol is "711" with only "numbers" displayed), and the game state during the standby movie display is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (for example, probability variable game state and time shortened game state), the first decorative pattern after the power is restored is displayed as "711" with only "numbers" (the second decorative pattern is displayed as "711" with only "numbers"). .
It may be configured as described above. It should be noted that, when power is restored, as described above, the operation check of the movable accessory may be performed.

Next, FIG. 162 is an image diagram regarding power-off.

<In the case of non-time reduction game state>
(a) It is in a non-reduced time game state, and decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. As for the first decorative design, "711" is stop-displayed in "numbers + characters", and as for the second decorative design, "711" (numbers only) is stop-displayed. (b) After that, a power failure occurs. (c) After that, the power is restored, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The second decorative pattern has the same pattern combination (combination of the same numbers) and display mode (display format) as before the power was turned off. On the other hand, the first decorative pattern is the same pattern combination (combination of the same numbers) as before the power is turned off, but the display mode (display format) is changed to "numbers" only. In addition, in the same figure, when the power is cut off in the situation where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-shortening game state, only the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbols is changed and the symbol combination is changed. (combination of numbers) is the same, but it is not limited to this, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern and the pattern combination (number combination) may be changed. As an example, in a non-time-reduced game state, when the first decorative symbol is "numbers + characters" and "283" is stopped and displayed, power is cut off, and then the power is restored. The decorative pattern may be configured to be displayed as "711" exclusively for when the power is restored in the form of "numbers". Even if only the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern can be changed before the power is turned off and after the power is restored, the display mode (display format) and the pattern combination (combination of numbers) are changed. Even in the case of such a configuration, it may be configured so that only "numbers" are displayed after the power is restored, and then "numbers + characters" are displayed at the timing when pattern variation starts.

<In the case of time reduction game state>
(d) It is in the time reduction game state, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. As for the first decorative design, "711" is stopped and displayed by "numbers + characters", and as for the second decorative design, "711" (numbers only) is stopped and displayed. (e) After that, a power failure occurs. (f) After that, the power is restored, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are displayed again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The second decorative pattern has the same pattern combination (combination of the same numbers) and display mode (display format) as before the power was turned off. In addition, the first decorative pattern is also the same pattern combination (combination of the same numbers) as before the power cutoff, and the display mode (display format) is also the same as before the power cutoff: "numbers + characters". .

In addition, in the same figure, the case where the power is cut off while the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-time-reduced game state and the situation where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the time-reduced game state are shown. Although the comparison is made with the case where the power failure occurs, the probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state and the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state may be compared, or the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state may be compared. The time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state may be compared. In addition, as shown in the same figure, when the power is restored after the power is turned off in the situation where the decoration pattern is stopped and the suspension is not occurring, and when the power is restored after the power is turned off in the situation where the decoration pattern is displayed fluctuating. 157, the power recovery screen shown in FIG. 157(e) may not be displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 157, when the power is restored after the power is turned off in a situation where no suspension has occurred and the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, a power restoration screen such as that shown in FIG. 157(e) is displayed. Alternatively, the display time may be shortened compared to the case where the power is restored after the power is turned off while the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the non-reduced time gaming state, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is different between before the power is turned off and after the power is restored, but only the pattern combination (number combination) is different. Alternatively, both the combination of symbols (combination of numbers) and the display mode (display format) may be different. In addition, although "numbers" and "numbers + characters" have been exemplified as configurations with different display modes (display formats), the present invention is not limited to this, and character designs, character types, number colors, arithmetic The display mode may be different depending on whether it is a numeral or a Chinese numeral, the size, or the like (similarly applicable to other configurations). Also, in the case where a power outage occurs in the time-reduced game state in the same figure, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is the same before the power outage and after the power is restored, but the symbol combination ( number combination) may be configured differently (eg, before power failure: "283", after power recovery: "711").

In addition, in the non-reduced time gaming state (and non-probability variable gaming state), a plurality of types of production stages (also referred to as production modes) are prepared, and the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is changed according to the production stage. may be configured to As an example, as shown in FIG. 141, at least a production stage A and a production stage B may be provided, and the production stage A may be configured to be changeable (shiftable) to the production stage B. In this case, the production stage "Numbers" have a common format, such as "numbers + characters A" in stage A, and "numbers + characters B" in stage B. ("Character A" means a character corresponding to a "number" to be displayed among a plurality of types of characters belonging to the animal type of character type A. For example, if "8" means "elephant" Correspondingly, "character B" means a character corresponding to a "number" to be displayed among a plurality of types of characters belonging to the fruit type that is character type B. For example, if "8" is "watermelon". applies, and the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern is the same in both the production stage A and the production stage B). On the other hand, in the time reduction game state (and the probability variable game state), the production stage may be one type of production stage C, and the production stage C may be configured to have a display mode (display format) of only "numbers". Here, when the power supply is restored after the occurrence of the power failure in the non-time reduction game state (and the non-probability variable game state), the production stage (after the screen is restored) will always be the production stage A, and the production stage B will be performed. If the power is turned off and then restored in a situation where the first decorative pattern is "number + character B" and "711" is stopped, the stage will be stage A and the first decorative pattern will be "number + character B", "711" is stop-displayed, and "711" is stop-displayed with only "numbers" as the first decoration pattern in the effect stage C of the time reduction game state (and the probability variation game state). If the power supply is turned off and then restored, the production stage C is maintained and the first decoration pattern is only "numbers" and "711" is stopped and displayed. Similarly, if the power supply is restored after the power failure occurs in the non-time reduction game state (and the non-probability variable game state), the production stage will always be the production stage A. If the power supply is turned off and then restored in the situation where "283" is stopped and displayed with "number + character B", the stage will be stage A and the first decorative pattern will be "number + character B" with "711". It will be stopped and displayed, and in the situation where the first decorative symbol is only "numbers" and "283" is stopped and displayed at the production stage C in the time reduction game state (and the probability variable game state), the power is turned off and after that When the power supply is restored, the production stage C is maintained and the first decoration pattern is only "number" and "711" is stopped and displayed. It is supplemented that such a relationship between the game state, the performance stage, and the first decorative symbol (and the second decorative symbol) can be applied to all configurations according to this example. In addition, when the power is restored after the power failure occurs in the non-time shortening game state (and the non-variable probability game state), and when the production stage is configured to always be the production stage A, the first decoration in the production stage B In the situation where the symbol is "number + character B" and "283" is stopped and displayed, if the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the stage will be stage A and the first decorative symbol will be "number + character A" and " 711” may be stopped.

In the figure, the case of the non-time-reduced game state and the case of the time-reduced game state are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the case of the non-probability-variable game state and the case of the probability-variable game state are compared. It may be applied to the case of comparison, or may be applied to the case of comparing the case of the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state with the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. It should be noted that the comparison of applicable game states is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. Similarly, the configuration comparing the case of the non-probability varying gaming state and the case of the probability varying gaming state may be applied to the case of comparing the case of the non-time shortening gaming state and the case of the time shortening gaming state. Alternatively, it may be applied to compare the non-probability varying gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state with the probability varying gaming state and time shortening gaming state. Similarly, the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state and the probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state are compared. It may be applied to the case of comparing the case, or may be applied to the case of comparing the case of the non-probability variation gaming state and the case of the probability variation gaming state.

Next, FIG. 163 is an image diagram regarding the final variation in the time shortening game state. In the same figure, after the big hit is completed, the state is shifted to the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and the number of times of time saving is given 100 times.

(a) The 99th symbol variation in the time shortening game state is completed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. As for the first decorative design, "613" is displayed as stationary in the "number", and as for the second decorative design, "613" (number only) is displayed as stationary. In addition, there is only one hold, and since this is a time-reduced game state, a right-handed instruction display (an image prompting the player to hit right-handed) is displayed.

(b) After that, the 100th symbol variation starts as the final variation in the time shortening game state. (c) After that, a power cut occurs during the final variation in the time-reduced game state. (d) After that, the power is restored, and at the first timing after the power is restored, the right-handed instruction display is displayed again, and the display mode is the same as before the power was turned off. In addition, the display of the second decorative pattern is also displayed in the same display mode (display format) as before power-off. As a modification, the right-handed instruction display may be displayed again, but the second decorative pattern may not be displayed again. (e) After that, at the second timing after the power is restored, the first decorative pattern is displayed again in the same display mode (display format) and pattern combination (combination of numbers) as before the power was turned off. is displayed again in a display mode (display format) of only "" and a combination of numbers "711". The first decorative symbol displayed again is fixed and stopped, and during the variable fixed time at the time of this fixed stop, the time-reduced gaming state is maintained (when the variable fixed time ends, the non-time-reduced game state transition), and the right-handed instruction display is still continuously displayed. (f) After that, the variable fixed time ends at the third timing after the power supply is restored, the game shifts to the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the first decorative pattern changes to a display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time-reduced gaming state. ("number + character" and "711"). In this way, after the power is restored, the first decorative pattern is displayed again after the right-handed instruction display is displayed again.

By configuring in this way, even if power failure occurs in the middle of the final variation in the time shortening game state, by visually recognizing the stop display of the first decorative pattern after the power is restored, the power can be displayed in any game state. It is possible to recognize whether a disconnection has occurred, and for example, in a game machine where the variation time of decorative symbols in the time-reduced game state is short, it is difficult to determine at what timing the time-reduced game state ends. Therefore, it is particularly suitable.

In addition, since it takes time for the player to shoot a game ball with a right stroke and the main game pattern starts to change, when the power is cut off in the time shortened game state and the power is restored, By configuring to display the right-handed instruction display before the display of the first decorative pattern, it is possible to teach the player an appropriate firing position rather than re-displaying the decorative pattern when the power is cut off. By giving priority, subsequent games can proceed smoothly.

In FIG. 163, the re-display timing of the second decorative symbol after the power is restored may be before the re-display timing of the right-handed instruction display, or substantially the same as the re-displayed timing of the right-handed instruction display. , or may be substantially the same as the redisplay timing of the first decorative symbol. Also, as described above, the effect mode in the non-time-reduced game state and the effect mode in the time-reduced game state may be different. With such a configuration, when power failure does not occur, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the time shortened game state is temporarily stopped until the first decorative symbol of the 100th rotation, which is the final variation of the time shortened game state, is temporarily stopped. is a display mode (display format), and during the temporary stop (the game state during this temporary stop is still the time-reduced game state), although it is in the time-reduced game state, the second corresponding to the non-time-reduced game state The display mode (display format) is changed to 1 decorative design, after which the first decorative design is fixed and stopped, and at the same time, the second decorative design, which was fluctuating at the time of the temporary stop of the first decorative design, is also fixed and stopped, After that, it may be configured to shift to a non-time-reduced gaming state, and to maintain the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol in a display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time-reduced gaming state (in this case, The display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern does not change).

Also, in FIG. 163, after the first decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode (display format) before the power is turned off at the timing of (e), the display mode (display format) does not change with the passage of time, and then When a new hold occurs and the pattern variation starts, the first decoration pattern may be displayed in a display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time-reduced gaming state.

In addition, in FIG. 163, after the timing of (c), without going through (d), at the timing of (e), the first decorative pattern is displayed in the display mode (display format) before the power is turned off. can be configured to Also, at the timing after (e) (the timing after the variable fixed time has elapsed), based on the game state switching from the time-reduced game state to the non-time-reduced game state, a left-handed instruction is displayed. After the timing of (f), that is, immediately after the shift to the non-time-reduced game state and immediately after the first fluctuation starts, the left-handed instruction display is continuously displayed for a predetermined time and then erased. good too. The display priority at that time is configured to be in the order of left-handed instruction display>second decorative design>second reserved display>first decorative design. Note that the left-handed instruction display is configured by image objects that are the same as or similar to the left-handed strike warning display shown in FIG. In addition, although the above has described the left-handed instruction display when the power is turned off and the power is restored, unlike FIG. Even if it progresses to the non-time-reduced gaming state, the fluctuation in the non-time-reduced gaming state, which is the 100th next variation of the time-reduced gaming state (the first time after shifting to the non-time-reduced gaming state Immediately after the start of the variation), it may be configured so that a left-handed instruction is displayed, and in such a configuration, if the power is cut off at the 100th rotation of the time shortening game state and the power is restored, the time Even immediately after the start of the variation in the non-time-reduced game state, which is the 100th next variation in the shortened game state (the first variation after shifting to the non-time-reduced game state), the left-handed instruction display is not performed. may be configured.

Further, the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) Suspension does not occur, and decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
(2) A power failure occurs.
(3) The power supply is restored, the effect display device displays that the screen is being restored, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are not displayed.
(4) In the situation where the effect display device is displaying that the screen is returning, a new suspension occurs and the main game symbols start to fluctuate, but the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols remain hidden. becomes.
(5-1) After a predetermined period of time has passed since the power supply was restored, the effect display device ends the display indicating that the screen is being restored, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern resumes.
(5-2) Alternatively, after the power is restored, a predetermined time, which is a time during which the display of screen restoration on the effect display device can be finished, has passed, but since the main game symbols are fluctuating, the screen is restored. continues, and when the variation of the main game symbols is completed, the display of the screen returning on the effect display device is completed, and the variation display of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols is resumed (suspension further occurs (if pending) or a stop indication is given (if pending has not occurred, ie a new change cannot be initiated).
It may be configured as described above.
That is, it may be configured to act like "(1)→(2)→(3)→(4)→(5-1)", or "(1)→(2)→(3)". →(4)→(5-2)”.

Next, FIG. 164 shows a configuration relating to display priority (display priority) in the effect display device SG when an error occurs. A high display priority means that the display is on the front side (front layer) of the player, and a low display priority means that the display is on the rear side (back layer) of the player's view. is that

First, (a) the receiver (upper tray) full tank abnormality is detected, and an error display of "Please remove the ball" is displayed on the performance display device SG. In addition, the error display overlaps the display area of the first decorative pattern, and the display priority of the error display is higher than that of the first decorative pattern. Specifically, the error display of "please pull out the ball" is displayed in the front layer than the display of the first decorative pattern that is displayed as "711" in "numbers + characters". Also, the display area of the error display does not overlap with the display area of the second decorative pattern. Specifically, the display area of the error display "Please pull out the ball" does not overlap with the display of the second decorative pattern displaying "711".

After that, (b) the cross button SB-2 is operated (either the right button or the left button) to display the volume adjustment screen. When the cross button SB-2 for displaying the volume adjustment screen is operated, the volume is not adjusted (that is, only the volume adjustment screen is displayed) regardless of whether the right button is operated or the left button is operated. As a modification, when the right button is operated, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume is increased by one level, and when the left button is operated, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume is decreased by one level. may be configured as follows. In a situation where the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted based on the operation of the cross button SB-2 while the volume adjustment screen is displayed (for example, the operation of the right button of the cross button SB-2 Pressing increases the volume by one step, and pressing the left button of the cross button SB-2 decreases the volume by one step). Further, the display area of the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative pattern and the error display, but does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. The display priority is "error display→volume adjustment screen→first decoration pattern" from the highest. That is, by displaying the volume adjustment screen, part of the display of the first decorative pattern that is displayed as "711" in "number + character" becomes invisible, while "Please pull out the ball ” is configured to be visible. Also, when the volume adjustment screen is displayed, pressing the right button of the cross button SB-2 increases the volume by one level, or pressing the left button of the cross button SB-2 increases the volume by one level. When the volume becomes low, the speaker may output a sound that makes it possible to recognize the volume level after the change (which can be output each time the right button or left button of the cross button SB-2 is operated).

In this way, in the figure, while the saucer (upper tray) full state abnormality is occurring, in other words, in a situation where the error display, the first decorative pattern, and the second decorative pattern are displayed, the cross button SB- By operating 2, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. In other words, the volume can be adjusted even while the pan (upper pan) is full. In the figure, the case where the tray (upper tray) is full is exemplified, but this is only an example, and it may be applied to the situation where other errors occur. In addition, it is not necessary to operate as shown in the figure while all errors are occurring. It may be configured so that the volume adjustment screen is not displayed and the volume cannot be adjusted even if the operation is performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferentially notify the information to be notified to the player, such as error display, and to play the game by visually recognizing the second decorative pattern even if the visibility of the first decorative pattern is lowered. The player can grasp the situation of In addition, although the volume adjustment screen overlaps the error display and reduces visibility, the fact that the volume adjustment screen is displayed itself is visible, so the player can tell that the volume can be adjusted at present. By operating the cross button SB-2, the volume output from the speaker changes, so the player can adjust the volume without any problem. In order to recognize the current volume level, a confirmation sound may be output from the speaker each time the cross-shaped button SB-2 is operated to adjust the volume (the volume of the confirmation sound changes according to the volume level). do).

Although the display conditions and display priority of the volume adjustment screen and the volume adjustment operation are described in detail in FIG. However, to display the light intensity adjustment screen, unlike the volume adjustment screen, it is necessary to operate the up button or the down button of the cross button SB-2. Operation of the upper button or lower button of button SB-2 (When the upper button is operated, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed and the light intensity increases by one level, and when the lower button is operated, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. The difference is that the amount of light is reduced by one step).

The display areas of the error display and the second decorative pattern may be overlapped, or the display priority of the error display may be higher than that of the second decorative pattern.

In addition, the game machine detects that the tray (upper tray) is full (the tray (upper tray) is full), and the game machine detects that the tray (upper tray) is full error state A until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the occurrence of a full tank error), and the gaming machine detects a tray (upper tray) full occurs), and the situation in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the game machine detected the tray (upper tray) full-up error (the tray (upper tray) full-up error occurred) In the case of state B, the configuration may be as follows.

When the first decorative pattern is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped), when it is configured to output a stop sound (a sound effect at the time of stop, also called stop SE), an error display is displayed on the effect display device SG. When the display is in the error state A, when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped), a stop sound (stop SE) is output, and an error display is displayed on the effect display device SG. In the case of the error state B, when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (or temporarily stopped), the stop sound (stop SE) may not be output.

It should be noted that the fixed stop may be a temporary stop immediately before the fixed stop, specifically, "the first decorative pattern is changing → the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped → the stop sound is output → Shaking fluctuation is performed → the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Further, the temporary stop may be applied to the temporary stop of a special symbol related to the pseudo continuous variation.

It should be noted that when a predetermined error occurs (for example, the saucer (upper tray) full tank error) is defined as error state A, and when a specific error occurs (for example, starting entrance winning error) is defined as error state B, which is applied to the above configuration. You may

In addition, in the figure, the case where the error display and/or the volume adjustment screen is displayed during the stop display of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern is illustrated, but it is not limited to this, and the first Even when the error display and/or the volume adjustment screen are displayed while the decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable display (the first decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped), the same display priority as in the figure is displayed. configuration may be applied. In other words, the same configuration regarding the display priority as in the figure may be applied to any timing during the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in the figure can be applied to any game state. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the same figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be adopted, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 165 shows the configuration regarding the display priority (display priority) in the effect display device SG when executing the button effect. First, (a) the number of reservations is 2, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are fluctuating. After that, (b) at a predetermined timing of the change, a button effect is executed, and an operation suggestion image (a button image with "PUSH" written substantially in the center of the liquid crystal screen) is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display area of the operation suggesting image overlaps that of the first decorative pattern, and the display priority of the operation instructing image is higher than that of the first decorative pattern. Further, the display areas of the operation suggestion image and the second decorative pattern do not overlap.

<Pattern 1>
After that, since the sub-input button was operated while (c) the operation suggesting image was being displayed (the effective period of the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect), the post-operation image in the button effect was “Gekiatsu!! !” is displayed on the effect display device SG (the operation suggestion image is erased). The display area of the post-operation image overlaps with the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the second reserved display (sometimes referred to as a second reserved image). "symbol->second reserved display->image after operation->first decoration pattern". In addition, the display area of the post-operation image is larger than that of the operation suggestive image, and by configuring in this way, the player operates the sub-input button SB with the desire to see the post-operation image more conspicuous. You can increase the frequency. In addition, since the second decorative design and the second reserved display are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate, the order of the display priority of the second decorative design and the second reserved display may be changed, The display priority may be the same. Further, in pattern 1 of FIG. 11, the post-operation image is configured to overlap the second pending display, but the post-operation image may be configured not to overlap the second pending display.

<Pattern 2>
After the above-mentioned (b), since the sub-input button was operated during (d) display of the operation suggesting image (effective period of the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect), the post-operation image in the button effect , “CHANCE!” is displayed on the effect display device SG (the operation suggestion image is erased). The display area of the post-operation image overlaps with the first decorative design and the first reserved display (which may be configured to overlap with the reserved digestion transfer image), but does not overlap with the second decorative design. The display priority is "first reserved display→post-operation image→first decorative pattern" in descending order. In addition, the display area of the post-operation image is larger than that of the operation suggestive image, and by configuring in this way, the player operates the sub-input button SB with the desire to see the post-operation image more conspicuous. You can increase the frequency. In addition, in the case of acting as in (d), the display priority of the second decorative pattern may be higher than that of the first reserved display. In addition, in pattern 2 of the figure, the post-operation image is configured so as not to overlap the second pending display, but is not limited to this, and the post-operation image overlaps the first pending display and the second pending display. may be configured to In such a configuration, the display priority of the post-operation image may be configured to be lower than the display priority of the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

It should be noted that it may be configured to have a plurality of types of operation suggestive images, for example, it is configured to have an operation suggestive image A that is displayed relatively frequently and an operation suggestive image B that is displayed relatively infrequently. In this case, only the operation suggesting image A may act like pattern 1 or pattern 2 above, and the operation suggesting image B may not act like pattern 1 or pattern 2 above. As an example, the display area of the operation suggesting image A may be smaller than that of the post-operation image, but the display area of the operation suggesting image B may be larger than that of the post-operation image.

In addition, in the figure, it is configured such that the button effect starts (displays an operation suggestive image) in a situation where the symbol variation is not ready-to-win, but it is not limited to this, and during execution of the super ready-to-win effect. It may be configured to display a button effect (operation suggestion image). In such a configuration, the operation suggestion image and the post-operation image may be configured to have a higher display priority than the image during the super reach effect (for example, the image of the main character and the image of the enemy character). . The display priority with other elements may be the same as in the configuration of FIG.

Next, FIG. 166 shows the configuration regarding the display mode (display format) and variation pattern of the first decorative design. In the configuration shown in the figure, as the limited frequency states described above, there are a limited frequency state A (a state in which the variation pattern table A is referred to) and a limited frequency state B (a state in which the variation pattern table B is referred to). It has a normal state (a state in which a normal fluctuation pattern table is referred to) as a state related to a variation pattern different from the frequency state.

(a) It is a time reduction game state, the state related to the variation pattern is limited frequency state A, and the first decorative pattern is displayed as "617" in "number". Further, in the limited frequency state A, the variation pattern is configured as follows. In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortening game state, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, in the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A ) to determine the variation pattern. Also, in the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the non-reduced time gaming state, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A) is used to determine the variation pattern. In addition, the limited frequency state A (variation pattern table A) may be provided with a limited frequency state (variation pattern table) corresponding to the number of reservations on the second main game side, for example, when the number of reservations is "1" Limited frequency state A1 (variation pattern table A1) to be used, Limited frequency state A2 (variation pattern table A2) to be used when the number of reservations is "2", Limited frequency state A3 to be used when the number of reservations is "3" (Variation pattern table A3), Limited frequency state A4 (Variation pattern table A4) used when the number of reservations is "4", etc. You may provide a limited frequency state (variation pattern table) individually, or reserve Limited frequency state A12 (variation pattern table A12) used when the number is "1" or "2", Limited frequency state A34 (variation pattern table A34) used when the number of reservations is "3" or "4" A limited frequency state (fluctuation pattern table) that is common to a portion of the number of reservations may be provided, such as.
<When you lose>
Random number: 0-499 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 500-799 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 800-999 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds
Random number: 0 to 299 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 300 to 499 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 500 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds

After that, the pattern variation of the main game pattern is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, and the game state remains the time shortening game state, but the state regarding the variation pattern is switched from the limited frequency state A to the limited frequency state B. . "617" is still displayed in the "number" of the first decorative pattern. Further, in the limited frequency state B, the variation pattern is configured as follows. In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortening game state, the limited frequency state B (fluctuation pattern table B) is applied regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. is configured to determine a variation pattern using Also, if the limited frequency state A (fluctuation pattern table A) is not used in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the non-reduced time gaming state, the second main game side is held. Regardless of the number, the limited frequency state B (fluctuation pattern table B) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the limited frequency state B (variation pattern table B) may be provided with a limited frequency state (variation pattern table) corresponding to the number of reservations on the second main game side, for example, when the number of reservations is "1" Limited frequency state B1 (variation pattern table B1) to be used, limited frequency state B2 (variation pattern table B2) to be used when the number of reservations is "2", limited frequency state B3 to be used when the number of reservations is "3" (fluctuation pattern table B3), limited frequency state B4 (fluctuation pattern table B4) used when the number of reservations is "4", and so on. Limited frequency state B12 (variation pattern table B12) used when the number is "1" or "2", limited frequency state B34 (variation pattern table B34) used when the number of reservations is "3" or "4" A limited frequency state (fluctuation pattern table) that is common to a portion of the number of reservations may be provided, such as.
<When you lose>
Random number: 0 to 299 → Fluctuation time: 3 seconds Random number: 300 to 499 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 500 to 849 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 850 to 919 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 920 to 979 → Variable time: 60 seconds Random number: 980-999 → Variable time: 120 seconds
Random number: 0 to 99 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 100 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 200 to 399 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 400 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds

After that, the symbol variation of the main game symbol is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, the time shortening game state is terminated, the game state becomes the non-time shortening game state, and the state regarding the variation pattern changes from the limited frequency state B. It switches to a normal state (a normal fluctuation pattern table that is a normal state relating to fluctuation patterns different from the limited frequency state). As the first decorative pattern, "617" is displayed by "numbers + characters". Moreover, in the normal state, the variation pattern is configured as follows. It should be noted that the normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table) is preferably provided with a normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table) corresponding to the number of reservations on the first main game side. For example, normal state 1 (normal fluctuation pattern table 1) used when the number of holds is "1", normal state 2 (normal fluctuation pattern table 2) used when the number of holds is "2", and the number of holds " Normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table) may be provided, normal state 12 (normal fluctuation pattern table 12) used when the number of reservations is "1" and "2", and used when the number of reservations is "3" and "4" A normal state (normal fluctuation pattern table) common to a part of the number of reservations may be provided, such as the normal state 34 (normal fluctuation pattern table 34).
<When you lose>
Random number: 0 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 5 seconds Random number: 200 to 699 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 700 to 919 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 920 to 979 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 980 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds <at the time of hit>
Random number: 0 to 99 → Fluctuation time: 10 seconds Random number: 100 to 199 → Fluctuation time: 30 seconds Random number: 200 to 399 → Fluctuation time: 60 seconds Random number: 400 to 999 → Fluctuation time: 120 seconds

Thus, in the configuration in the same figure, after the big hit is completed, the state is shifted to the time-reduced game state, and if the big win is not won after that, "the time-reduced game state and the limited frequency state A are varied by 50 → the time-reduced game. The state and limited frequency state B is configured to transition like 50 variations → non-time reduction game state and normal state.

In addition, in the figure, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is different between the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state. The display mode (display format) of the first decoration pattern is the same in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, which are the same game state in the state. By configuring in this way, even if the background effect is designed to switch to various effect modes even in the same game state, the game can be played by visually recognizing the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern. It is possible to grasp the state, for example, at the end of the time-reduced game state (a situation in which the player cannot accurately grasp whether the time-reduced game state has ended), when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed Also, by visually recognizing the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol, it is possible to accurately recognize in which game state the big win was achieved.

In the same figure, in the time reduction game state, it is configured to transition between two limited frequency states, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to transition between three or more limited frequency states. In such a case, as in the case of the configuration of FIG. 11, if the game state is the same, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbols may be the same even if the limited frequency state is different. .

In addition, in the figure, the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern varies depending on the game state (whether it is a time-reduced game state) or a state related to a variation pattern (whether it is a limited frequency state). Regardless, it's all "numbers". In addition, it has a special effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B, which is a special effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B. 10th variation, 20th variation, . When the number of times (for example, 10 times) or less is reached, a display such as "Time saving number of times remaining XX times!" This "remaining number of time reduction suggesting effect" is not displayed in the non-time reduction game state. In addition, this "time-saving remaining number suggesting effect" overlaps with the first decorative pattern, but is displayed large enough not to overlap with the second decorative pattern. In addition, it is preferable that the display priority is the effect of suggesting the remaining number of times of shortening time>the first decorative pattern. However, the display priority may be the first decorative pattern>remaining number of times of shortening time suggesting effect in order to give priority to the notification of the success/failure determination result.

It should be noted that the time-reduced game state in the same figure may be a game state related to the variation pattern of the main game pattern, or an auxiliary game pattern (probability that the auxiliary game pattern stops with a winning pattern, variation time of the auxiliary game pattern, It may be a game state related to the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric accessory, etc.), or may serve as both. Also, this definition is not limited to the configuration in the figure, but can be applied to all configurations according to this example.

In the same figure, (a) time-reduced game state and limited frequency state A and (b) time-reduced game state and limited frequency state B are the same background effect (or effect mode), but (c) Different background effects (or effect modes) are provided in the non-time-reduced game state and the normal state. In this case, until the first decorative symbol of the final variation in the limited frequency state B is temporarily stopped, the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the limited frequency state B (time shortening gaming state) is maintained. During the temporary stop (the game state during this temporary stop is still the limited frequency state B and the time shortened game state), although it is in the limited frequency state B (time shortened game state), it corresponds to the non-time shortened game state. The display mode (display format) is changed to the first decorative design, and then the first decorative design is fixed and stopped, and at the same time, the second decorative design, which was fluctuating when the first decorative design was temporarily stopped, is also fixed and stopped. After that, it may be configured to shift to the non-time-reduced gaming state, and to maintain the display mode (display format) of the first decorative symbols in the display mode (display format) corresponding to the non-time-reduced gaming state (in this case , the display mode (display format) of the second decorative pattern does not change). Further, as modifications, (a) time-reduced game state and limited frequency state A, (b) time-reduced game state and limited frequency state B, and (c) non-time-reduced game state and normal state, respectively. Background effects (or effect modes) may be configured to be different. Note that the production mode may also be referred to as a production stage, and is a production mode indicated by a background image. Examples include the daytime stage and night stage illustrated in FIG. 77 and the like, stage A and stage B illustrated in FIG. The stage mode corresponds to the production mode. That is, both the present configuration and the configuration illustrated in FIG. 142 and the like may be employed. Moreover, it is not limited to this, and there is no problem in adopting a combination of a plurality of configurations related to the production mode (production stage, background production, background image) according to this example.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 32, the game adopting the configuration in which the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is larger than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. In the machine, the configuration shown in the figure may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, in all game states (including all game states), the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates for the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol. ) may be employed, or in a predetermined game state of 1 or more, the number of stop symbols (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol is greater than the number of candidates of the stop symbol (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol. A configuration in which the number of candidates for the symbol combination) is larger may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 167 shows a configuration relating to the features of the first decorative symbols depending on the game state.

<a: Time reduction game state>
In the time shortening game state, "787" is not stop-displayed together with the first decorative design and the second decorative design ("232" can be stop-displayed) as a stop design (combination of numbers) that will result in a loss. The display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is "number". Further, the display of the hold display and the hold digestion transmission image is only the display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side. That is, even if a hold on the first main game side occurs, the hold display and hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold on the first main game side will not be displayed. Further, in the time shortening game state, the special symbol (“Continued” in the figure) is configured not to be stopped and displayed as the temporary stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. It should be noted that, in the time-reduced gaming state, if reach of 7 symbols occurs ("7↓7"), it becomes a big hit (does not lose). ” may be configured to be stopped and displayed. In addition, although this configuration can be applied as long as it is in the time reduction game state, it is preferable to apply it to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state.

<b, c: non-time reduction game state>
(b) In the non-reduced time gaming state, it is configured so that "787" may be stop-displayed together with the first and second decorative symbols as a stop symbol (combination of numbers) that will result in a loss ( "232" may also be statically displayed). It should be noted that the display mode (display format) of the first decorative pattern is "numbers + characters". Further, the display of the hold display and the hold digestion transmission image is only the display corresponding to the hold on the first main game side. That is, even if a hold on the second main game side occurs, the hold display and hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold on the second main game side will not be displayed. It should be noted that, in the non-reduced time gaming state, there is a case where a reach of 7 symbols occurs ("7 ↓ 7") as well. may be configured so that can be stopped and displayed. In addition, although this configuration can be applied as long as it is in the non-time reduction gaming state, it is preferable to apply it to the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state.

In addition, in the (c) non-reduced time gaming state, a special symbol ("Continued" in the figure) can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol of the first decoration symbol. Here, the special symbols are symbols that are not stopped and displayed as fixed stop symbols, such as "continued" symbols that temporarily stop when pseudo continuous variation is executed, and "development" symbols that are temporarily stopped before the super reach effect is executed. It has become.

By configuring in this way, in the time-reduced gaming state, since the player pays attention to the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, the number of types of stop modes of the first decorative symbols can be reduced, or a predetermined While simplifying the display mode (the number of display types) of the first decorative pattern, such as preventing the special pattern from being stopped and displayed, in the non-time-reduced game state, in order to entertain the process of winning a big win, By increasing the number of types of stop mode of the first decorative pattern, or by enabling the stop display of a predetermined special pattern, etc., the display mode (the number of display types) of the first decorative pattern is diversified, thereby improving the game state. An appropriate production environment can be constructed by

In addition, in the same figure, the time-reduced gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state are compared, but the probability-variable gaming state and the non-probability-variable gaming state may be compared. A comparison may be made between the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B), or comparison may be made between the performance modes controlled by the sub-control board S (the performance mode A and the performance mode B). In the case of comparison in the performance mode, etc., it may be configured in combination with the configuration (stage A, stage B) relating to the performance mode described above with reference to FIG. 141 . More specifically, the production mode in the non-time-reduced gaming state (which may be a non-probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state) in the figure is Stage A in FIG. 141. Both the configuration of FIG. 141 and the configuration of FIG. 141 may be adopted as stage B in FIG.

It should be noted that while a predetermined special symbol can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol in a non-time shortened game state, it is configured not to be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol in a time shortened game state. It may be constructed such that it can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol in both the shortened game state and the time shortened game state.

Further, the animation of the first decorative symbol may be stopped when the main game symbol is fixed and stopped, but the animation of the first reserved display may not be stopped. In the case of the first decorative pattern, the animation means that the pattern is moving such as swinging, the pattern of the numbers that make up the pattern is moving, or the character that is making up the pattern is moving. In the case of the first reserved display, the first reserved display is rotated, the pattern in the first reserved display is accompanied by movement, and the like. As an example of the period during which the animation of the first decorative pattern is stopped, fixed variable time can be exemplified. In addition, regarding the second decorative pattern and the second reserved display, the animation itself is not executed even during fluctuation or during fixed fluctuation (during stop display, during fixed fluctuation time), and the second decorative pattern is There are only variable display and variable fixed (stop display), and the second pending display only displays the pending number (including addition and subtraction).

In addition, the first decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and then variably displayed again, and may be stopped and displayed with a different combination of symbols than when temporarily stopped and displayed. It may be configured so that there is no such case. As a specific example,
(1) The first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate → Develops into a super reach effect → As a result of the super reach effect, “666” is temporarily stopped and displayed → All patterns start to fluctuate again → “777” is temporarily stopped → Shaking fluctuation → Fixed stop (2) The first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate → Temporary stop display at the pattern combination “6 consecutive 6” with the middle pattern as a special pattern → All patterns start to fluctuate again → Develop into a super reach production → Super reach production As a result, "666" may be configured as temporary stop display→shaking fluctuation→definite stop as described above. The second decorative design in (1) and (2) continues to variably display until the first decorative design is shaken and fluctuated (immediately before the first decorative design is fixed and stopped), and at the same time as the first decorative design is fixed and stopped. Confirm stop.
With this configuration, the first decorative symbols play a role in enlivening the game by executing various effects, while the second decorative symbols can accurately notify the result of the game.

In addition, the first decorative pattern can change its mode by operating the operation member (for example, sub-input button, cross button, etc.) controlled by the sub-control board S, but the second decorative pattern is controlled by the sub-control board S. The mode does not change depending on the operation of the operating member (for example, sub-input button, cross button, etc.). Here, the mode change means that part or all of the design of the pattern is changed, the case where the temporarily stopped first decorative pattern returns and temporarily stops, or the case where the first decorative pattern moves forward (slides) and stops temporarily It is a change related to a variation mode such as a case, a temporary stop display of a special symbol, a change of the speed of the variation display of the first decorative symbol, and the like. With this configuration, the first decorative symbols play a role in enlivening the game by executing various effects, while the second decorative symbols can accurately notify the result of the game.

Next, FIG. 168 shows specific pattern variations on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, reach variations that perform normal reach effects for winning A3 in FIG. 12, super reach effects for winning A6, battle reach, etc.) It shows the execution timing of each action etc. in the reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of the production. In addition, instead of the non-time-reduced game state, it may be various variations of the time-reduced game state shown in FIG. It may be a reach variation that performs the second half, or a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the second main game pattern rather than a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. may be It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is possible to hold the trigger of the look-ahead effect as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. It is clear that

In FIG. 168, execution timing of each action etc. will be described in chronological order, and detailed description will be omitted here. Detailed aspects of each action (a) to (n2) shown in FIG. 168 correspond to (a) to (n2) in FIGS. . First, in (a), in a non-time-reduced game state, there is a hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. This is the timing when the corresponding first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. is digested, and the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol start to be displayed in a variable manner. c) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that have started the variable display execute the acceleration fluctuation, and (d) is the timing for the left, middle, and right columns that have executed the acceleration fluctuation. (e) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column, which has performed the high-speed variation, performs the deceleration variation, and (f) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column performs the high-speed variation. (g) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern performs the fixed position action 1, (g) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the right column that has performed the high speed variation performs the deceleration variation, (h) is the timing in the right column is the timing at which the first decorative symbol executes the fixed position action 1, (i) is the timing at which the pseudo consecutive pattern executes the deceleration variation, and (j) is the timing at which the pseudo consecutive pattern executes the fixed position action 1 (k) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 1, (l) is the timing at which the pseudo continuous pattern executes the re-variation, and (m) is the timing to execute the action 2 at the start of fluctuation when the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start re-fluctuation (pseudo-run), and (n) is the left where re-fluctuation starts The first decorative symbols in the row, the middle row, and the right row are the timing for executing the acceleration variation, and (o) is the timing for executing the acceleration variation, and the first decoration symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row execute the high-speed variation. (p) is the timing for the first decorative symbol in the left column that has performed the high speed variation to perform the deceleration variation, and (q) is the timing for the first decorative symbol in the left column to perform the fixed position action 2. (r) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column that has performed the high-speed variation executes the deceleration variation, and (s) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column performs the fixed position action 2 (t) is the timing after the first decorative symbol in the right column executes the fixed position action 2, and (u) is the timing after the first decorative symbol in the left and right columns is tenpai. (v) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns perform the shaking action 1, and (w) is the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols perform the deceleration variation. , (x) is the timing at which the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 2, (y) is the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 2, and (z) (a2) is the timing at which the pseudo-continuous pattern executes re-variation, and (a2) is the timing to execute the action 3 at the start of fluctuation when starting the re-variation (pseudo-continuous) of the left, middle, and right columns. Yes, (b2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns that have started re-fluctuation execute the acceleration fluctuation, and (c2) is the left row and middle row that have executed the acceleration fluctuation. , (d2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the right column performs the high-speed variation, (d2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the left column, which has performed the high-speed variation, performs the deceleration variation, (e2) is The first decorative pattern in the left column is the timing for executing the fixed position action 3, (f2) is the timing for the first decorative pattern in the right column that has executed the high speed fluctuation to execute the deceleration fluctuation, and (g2) is , the timing at which the first decorative pattern in the right column executes the fixed position action 3, (h2) is the timing after the first decorative pattern in the right column executes the fixed position action 3, and (i2) is , (j2) is the timing for the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns to perform the tenpai action 2, (j2) is the timing for the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns to perform the shake action 2, (k2 ) is the timing at which the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 3, (l2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows execute the determined action, (m2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns shake and fluctuate, and (n2) is the timing at which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. It's time to execute.

The specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state shown in FIG. 168 starts the symbol variation of the first main game symbol at the timing of (b). Then, at the timing of (f) to (k), the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are temporarily stopped, and then at the timing of (l), the first re-variation (pseudo continuous) is performed. Start. As for the first decorative symbol, the second re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) is started at the timing of (m). This first re-variation (pseudo-run) is called a non-reach pseudo-run (pseudo-run in a non-tempered state). Then, the reach effect is executed from the timing of the tenpai action 1 of (u) of the first re-variation (pseudo-continuation) to the fixed position action 2 of (y), and at the timing of (q) to (y), the left column, The first decorative symbols in the middle row and the right row temporarily stop, respectively, and then start the second re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) at the timing of (z). As for the first decorative symbol, the second re-fluctuation (pseudo run) is started at the timing of (a2). This second re-fluctuation (pseudo-run) is called a post-reach pseudo-run (pseudo-run after the state of tenpai). Then, the ready-to-win effect is executed from the timing of the tenpai action 2 of (i2) of the second re-variation (pseudo continuation) to the fixed position action 3 of (k2). In addition, for the production sound (BGM), stage BGM is output from (a) to (u), reach BGM is output from (u) to (y), and stage BGM is output from (z) to (i2). Then, reach BGM is output from (i2) to (k2), and jackpot BGM (for example, effect sound of a winning action) is output from (l2) to (n2). It should be noted that the stage BGM may switch its content with a re-variation (pseudo-continuation) as a trigger. Dedicated BGM1, (z)-(i2) stage BGM3 or pseudo-continuous dedicated BGM2 may be output, or stage BGM1 (a)-(k), stage (l)-(u) BGM2 or pseudo-continuous BGM, stage BGM2 or pseudo-continuous BGM may be output from (z) to (i2). Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbols such as (j) and (x) perform a fixed-position action, pseudo-continuous symbol display-dedicated BGM may be output.

FIG. 169 shows execution timings of actions, etc. in the variable standby state. (a3) of FIG. 169 is a different situation from (a) to (n2) of FIG. 168, in which both the first main game side and the second main game side are held in the non-reduced time game state. It shows the timing when the variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation where the first main game symbol is not fixed and stopped at the losing symbol. Then, in (b3) to (f3) after (a3), the first main game symbol in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state. The state (variation standby state) in which the first decorative symbol, which has undergone symbol variation in response to the symbol variation, is a lost symbol and is fixed and stopped, continues. In addition, (a3) of FIG. 169 shows the symbol variation corresponding to the first main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-reduced time game state. 169(a3) shows the timing when the variation of one decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a losing symbol, but in the non-reduced time game state, both the first main game side and the second main game side are held. It may be the timing when the first decorative symbols, which have changed in pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game symbols in the state where the second main game symbols have not been drawn, are confirmed and stopped as a losing symbol, or the first main game side may be held in the time shortening game state. It may be the timing at which the first decorative symbol, which has undergone symbol variation in response to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in a situation where there is neither nor a hold on the second main game side, is confirmed and stopped as a losing symbol, or it may be time. In a shortened game state, the first decorative pattern, which is changed in pattern corresponding to the pattern change of the first main game pattern in a state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held, is determined as a losing pattern. It may be the timing of stopping. Then, in (b3) to (f3) after (a3), the first main game symbol in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state. (b3) ~ (f3) shows a state in which the state (variation standby state) in which the first decorative pattern, which has undergone a pattern change corresponding to the pattern change, is a lost pattern and is fixed and stopped, continues, but (b3) to (f3) The first decorative pattern, which is changed in pattern corresponding to the pattern change in the second main game pattern in a state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the time shortening game state, is a losing pattern. The fixed stop state (variable standby state) may be continued, or the state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the time reduction game state. The state (variation standby state) in which the first decorative symbols, which have changed in symbols corresponding to the symbol variations in the second main game symbols, are fixed and stopped as losing symbols, may be continued, or the time may be shortened. In a game state, when there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, the first decorative pattern, which has undergone a pattern change corresponding to the pattern change of the first main game pattern, is determined and stopped as a lost pattern. It may be a state in which the state (variable standby state) continues. Further, (a3) of FIG. 169 is the second corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the non-reduced time game state. 169 (a3) shows the timing when the variation of the decorative pattern is determined and stopped with the losing pattern, but as (a3) in FIG. In a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held after the end of the big win, the timing may be such that "777" or the like is displayed as the big win pattern. In the case of such a configuration, (b3) to (f3) after (a3) are in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side after the end of the jackpot. A state in which "777" or the like is displayed as a jackpot symbol (variation standby state) continues.

In FIG. 169, the execution timing of each action etc. will be described in chronological order, and detailed description will be omitted here. Since the detailed aspects of each action (a3) to (f3) shown in FIG. 169 correspond to (a3) to (f3) in FIG. 177, the details will be explained with reference to FIG. First, in (a3), the symbols fluctuated in response to the symbol fluctuations of the first main game symbols in a state where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side holds in the non-time-reduced game state. (b3) is the timing at which the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are displayed in the variable standby state, and (c3) is the timing in the variable standby state. (d3) is the timing at which the displayed volume adjustment screen and light amount adjustment screen are erased, (d3) is the timing at which the first ornamental pattern performs the first shaking action during the variable standby state, and (e3) is the timing. , is the timing for executing the waiting movie in the variable standby state, and (f3) is the timing for the first decorative symbol to execute the second shaking action during the variable standby state. The timing at which the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen displayed in the variable standby state are erased is (d3), and the timing at which the first decorative symbol performs the first shaking action during the variable standby state is (c3 ).

As for BGM (effect sound), the stage BGM is output from (a3) to (d3), and the output of the stage BGM is stopped (the output is set to 0) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the shaking action of (d3). After the output of the stage BGM is stopped (e3) and (f3), the stage BGM is not output. Here, the timing to stop the output of the stage BGM (set the output to 0) is preferably the timing after (d3) and the timing before (e3). The timing may be the same as the timing.

Next, FIG. 170 shows specific pattern variations on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state (for example, reach variations that perform normal reach effects for winning A3 in FIG. 12, super reach effects for winning A6, battle reach, etc.) It is a diagram showing the execution timing and execution time of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the right column, and the middle column in the reach fluctuation that performs the first half and the second half of the production. In addition, instead of the non-time-reduced game state, various variation modes of the time-reduced game state shown in FIG. 13 may be used. It may be the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the main game symbol. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting the reach variation that performs the normal reach performance of the hit of A3, the super reach performance of the hit of A6, and the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the battle reach performance, group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. As a variation mode group, it is clear that it can be a trigger suspension of the look-ahead effect.

First, when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts a specific symbol variation in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol in the left column changes the action 1 at the start of variation to H1. seconds to run. After that, fixed position action 1 for T1 seconds, shaking action for Y1 seconds, fluctuation start action 2 for H4 seconds, fixed position action 2 for T4 seconds, shaking action for Y3 seconds, tenpai action 1 for TP1 seconds, shaking action 1 Y4 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 for H7 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T7 seconds, shaking action for Y6 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP3 seconds, shaking action 2 for Y7 seconds, and decision action for K1 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the left row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column is H2 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T2 seconds for fixed position action 1, Y2 seconds for shaking action, 5 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T5 seconds for fixed position action 2, Tenpai Execute action 1 for 2 seconds TP, shake action 1 for Y5 seconds, action 3 at the start of fluctuation for H8 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T8 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP4 seconds, shake action 2 for Y8 seconds, and decision action for K2 seconds do. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the right column is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row is H3 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T3 seconds for fixed position action 1, H6 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T6 seconds for fixed position action 2, and H9 for action 3 at the start of fluctuation. Seconds, fixed position action 3 is executed for T9 seconds, and decision action is executed for K3 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting the reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of the winning super reach effect and the winning battle reach effect, it is configured not to execute the fixed position action 3 in the middle row in the case of winning shown in FIG. 170 . .

In addition, as a temporary display mode, the special symbol (pseudo-continuous pattern) used in the first pseudo-continuous variation is the timing of the fixed position action 1 in the middle row, and the special symbol (pseudo-continuous pattern) used in the second pseudo-continuous variation after that. symbol) is displayed at the timing of fixed position action 2 in the middle row. At that time, the special symbol may be displayed by performing a fixed position action. Then, the group notice shown in FIG. 83 is given at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing earlier than the middle of Y7 seconds) after execution of tenpai action 2 in the left and right columns and during execution of shaking action 2. It is constructed so that it is executed for a time, but is not executed during execution of shake action 1 after execution of tenpai action 1 in the left and right columns. In addition, the pending change effect shown in FIG. 87 is after the execution of action 1 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns and up to the fixed position action 1 of the first decorative symbols in the left column. Between (change timing 1), after the execution of the action 2 at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns, and until the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern in the left column (change timing 2) Executed after the execution of the action 3 at the start of variation of the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative pattern and before the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the left column (change timing 3). It is possible to execute the pending change performance at all the timings of the change timings 1 to 3, or to execute the pending change performance at any one timing or at the timing 2 of the timings 1 to 3. good too.

The execution time and variable fixed time of each action in FIG. 170 have the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds one)
(1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < right column shake action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(2) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(2-1) Left column fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds )
(2-2) Right column fixed position action T seconds (any one of T2, T5, or T8 seconds) < Right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(3) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(3-1) Left row tenpai action TP seconds (either one of TP1 or TP3 seconds) < left row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, or Y7 seconds)
(3-2) Right column tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP2 or TP4 seconds) < right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(4) Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(4-1) K1 seconds of the left column's deciding action <Y seconds of the left column's shaking action (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, and Y7 seconds)
(4-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds <Right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(5-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(5-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(6-1) Total time of fixed position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(6-2) Total time of fixed-position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(7) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(7-1) Total time of tenpai action in the left column (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) < Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6 and Y7 seconds)
(7-2) Total time of tenpai action in the right column (total time of TP2 and TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5 and Y8 seconds)
(8) Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < total time of shaking action Y seconds (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(8-1) Left column final action K1 sec < total time of left column shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(8-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds < total time of right column shaking action (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(9) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(9-1) Total time of left column fluctuation start action (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds )
(9-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(10) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(10-1) Total time of fixed position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(10-2) Total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(11) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(11-1) Total time of tenpai action in the left column (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, and Y7 seconds)
(11-2) Total time of tenpai action in the right column (total time of TP2 and TP4 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(12) Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1-K3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1-Y8 seconds)
(13-1) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed-position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) + left column decision action K1 second < total time of left column shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, and Y7 seconds)
(13-2) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) + right column decision action K2 seconds < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(14) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(14-1) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed-position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) + left row decision action K1 seconds < left row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(14-2) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) + right column decision action K2 seconds < right column shake action Y seconds (either one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(15) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (16) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (17) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < Variable fixed time (18) Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < Variable fixed time (19) Shaking action Y seconds (Y1 ~ Y8 seconds) > Variable fixed time (20) Variation start action H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) + fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + Decision action K seconds (one of K1 to K3 seconds) > Variable fixed time (21) Total time of action at the start of variation (H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position actions (total time of T1-T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1-TP4 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1-K3 seconds) ) > Variable fixed time (22) Total time of action at the start of variation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (TP1 to TP4) second total time) + total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(23) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T9 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
Regarding (15) to (18) above, the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter. Fixed time", "fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T9 seconds) > variable fixed time", "tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > variable fixed time", " Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds)>variable fixed time” may be satisfied. It should be noted that "either" as used herein may be satisfied as long as any one of them is satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (3-2), at least one of TP2<Y2, TP2<Y5, TP2<Y8, TP4<Y2, TP4<Y5, and TP4<Y8 should be satisfied. The variable fixed time is the variable fixed time of the first main game pattern and the variable fixed time of the second main game pattern, and since there is no concept of totaling them, they are regarded as independent times.

Next, FIG. 171 shows a specific pattern variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state (for example, normal reach production, super reach production, and the first half and second half of battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13). It is a diagram showing the execution timing and execution time of each action of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the right column, and the middle column in reach fluctuation to be performed). In addition, instead of the non-time-reduced game state, various variation modes of the time-reduced game state shown in FIG. 13 may be used. It may be the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the main game symbol. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is possible to hold the trigger of the look-ahead effect as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. It is clear that

First, when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts a specific symbol variation in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbol in the left column changes the action 1 at the start of variation to H1. seconds to run. After that, fixed position action 1 for T1 seconds, shaking action for Y1 seconds, fluctuation start action 2 for H4 seconds, fixed position action 2 for T4 seconds, shaking action for Y3 seconds, tenpai action 1 for TP1 seconds, shaking action 1 Y4 seconds, fluctuation start action 3 for H7 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T7 seconds, shaking action for Y6 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP3 seconds, and shaking action 2 for Y7 seconds. After the shaking action 2, the first decorative pattern in the left row is shaken and fluctuated with the losing pattern, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column is H2 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T2 seconds for fixed position action 1, Y2 seconds for shaking action, 5 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T5 seconds for fixed position action 2, Tenpai Execute action 1 for 2 seconds TP, shake action 1 for Y5 seconds, action 3 at the start of fluctuation for H8 seconds, fixed position action 3 for T8 seconds, tenpai action 2 for TP4 seconds, and shake action 2 for Y8 seconds. After the shaking action 2, the first decorative pattern in the right column is shaken and fluctuated with the losing pattern, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row is H3 seconds for action 1 at the start of fluctuation, T3 seconds for fixed position action 1, H6 seconds for action 2 at the start of fluctuation, T6 seconds for fixed position action 2, and H9 for action 3 at the start of fluctuation. seconds to run. Then, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is fluctuated by the missing pattern in accordance with the shaking fluctuation of the left row and the right row, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuation fixing time. It should be noted that, when targeting the change of the reach that performs the first half and the second half of the losing super reach production and the losing battle reach production, the fixed position action 3 in the middle row, the left row, the middle row, and the right row in the case of winning shown in FIG. is configured not to execute the decision action of the first decorative pattern.

The execution time and variable fixed time of each action in FIG. 171 have the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds one)
(1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < right column shake action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(2) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(2-1) Left column fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds )
(2-2) Right column fixed position action T seconds (any one of T2, T5, or T8 seconds) < Right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(3) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(3-1) Left row tenpai action TP seconds (either one of TP1 or TP3 seconds) < left row shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, or Y7 seconds)
(3-2) Right column tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP2 or TP4 seconds) < right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, or Y8 seconds)
(4) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(4-1) Total time of fluctuation start action in left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(4-2) Total time of fluctuation start action in right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < Total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(5) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(5-1) Total time of fixed-position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(5-2) Total time of fixed-position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(6) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(6-1) Total time of tenpai action in the left column (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) < Total time of shaking action in the left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6 and Y7 seconds)
(6-2) Total time of tenpai action in the right column (total time of TP2 and TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action in the right column (total time of Y2, Y5 and Y8 seconds)
(7) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(7-1) Total time of left column fluctuation start action (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds )
(7-2) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(8) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(8-1) Total time of fixed-position action in left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(8-2) Total time of fixed-position actions in the right column (total time of T2, T5, and T8 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (one of Y2, Y5, and Y8 seconds)
(9) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(9-1) Total time of tenpai action in the left column (total time of TP1 and TP3 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the left column (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, and Y7 seconds)
(9-2) Total time of tenpai action in the right column (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < Y seconds of shaking action in the right column (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(10) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(10-1) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed-position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) < total time of shaking action in left column (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(10-2) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < total time of shaking action in right column (total time of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(11) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shake action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)
(11-1) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the left column (total time of H1, H4, H7 seconds) + total time of fixed-position action in the left column (total time of T1, T4, T7 seconds) + left column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP3 seconds) < left column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(11-2) total time of action at the start of fluctuation in the right column (total time of H2, H5, H8 seconds) + total time of fixed position action in right column (total time of T2, T5, T8 seconds) + right column total time of tenpai action (total time of TP2, TP4 seconds) < right column shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y2, Y5, Y8 seconds)
(12) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H9 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (13) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (14) Tenpai action TP seconds (one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <variable fixed time (15) shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y8 seconds)>variable fixed time (16) action at the start of variation H seconds (Any one of H1-H9 seconds) + Fixed position action T seconds (Any one of T1-T8 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (Any one of TP1-TP4 seconds) > Variable fixed time (17 ) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > fluctuation Fixed time (18) total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) time) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
(19) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H9 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T8 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 to TP4 seconds) <Shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1, Y3, Y4, Y6, Y7 seconds)
Regarding (12) to (14) above, the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter. fixed time", "fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T8 seconds) > variable fixed time", "tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 to TP4 seconds) > variable fixed time" good. It should be noted that "either" as used herein may be satisfied as long as any one of them is satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (3-2), at least one of TP2<Y2, TP2<Y5, TP2<Y8, TP4<Y2, TP4<Y5, and TP4<Y8 should be satisfied.

Next, FIG. 172 shows the first left, right, and middle columns in the specific symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-reduced time gaming state (for example, normal symbol variation with chance look-ahead effect, reach variation) It is a figure which shows the execution timing and execution time of each action of a decorative design. In addition, in FIG. 172, the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance eye look-ahead effect is executed as the pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed with the symbol combination showing the chance eye, the next symbol variation is hit. The ready-to-reach variation for performing the ready-to-win effect is executed as a trigger variation, and these two symbol variations are symbol variations before and after which are connected in time series. It should be noted that the time-reduced game state may be used instead of the non-time-reduced game state, and the pattern change of the second main game pattern may correspond to the pattern change of the second main game pattern instead of the first decorative pattern pattern change corresponding to the pattern change of the first main game pattern. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol. In addition, when normal symbol fluctuation and ready-to-win fluctuation are targeted, it is clear that the fluctuation mode of a1 to a4 shown in FIG.

First, for the first decorative symbol in the left column in the normal symbol variation, the variation start action is performed for H1 seconds, the fixed position action is performed for T1 seconds, and the shaking action is performed for Y1 seconds. After that, the fixed stop of the first decorative pattern in the left column is executed over the variable fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column executes a fluctuation start action for H2 seconds, a fixed position action for T2 seconds, and a shaking action for Y2 seconds. After that, the fixed stop of the first decorative pattern in the right column is executed over the variable fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the middle row executes a fluctuation start action for H3 seconds, a fixed position action for T3 seconds, and a shaking action for Y3 seconds. After that, the fixing stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row is executed over the variable fixed time. It should be noted that the fixed-position action for fixing and stopping the chance symbol may be a fixed-position action different from the fixed-position action shown in FIGS. The fixed position action is an action in which the first decorative pattern bounces, and the fixed position action in the case of fixing and stopping the chance symbol includes an action in which the first decorative pattern jumps and then expands. actions taken). 172 is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed in a symbol combination showing a chance eye, the next symbol variation is shown in FIG. It is also possible to configure the reach variation for performing normal reach performance for winning, the reach variation for performing super reach performance for winning, and the reach variation for performing first half and second half of battle reach performance for winning as trigger variation. 172 is executed as a pre-trigger variation, and after the first decorative symbol is definitely stopped and displayed in a symbol combination showing a chance eye, the next symbol variation is shown in FIG. It may be configured to execute the reach variation for performing the normal reach production of the failure, the reach variation for performing the super reach production for the failure, and the reach variation for performing the first half and the second half of the battle reach production for the failure as the trigger variation. Furthermore, the reach variation shown in FIG. 172 may be set as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. In this case, the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance eye look-ahead effect of FIG. It is configured to execute a reach variation that performs a reach effect for hitting 172 as a trigger variation. In other words, not only does the normal symbol variation accompanied by the chance look-ahead effect of FIG. 172 lead to the reach variation of FIG. It may be configured so as to lead to fluctuations and reach fluctuations of losing in FIG. 171 .

The execution time of each action in the normal symbol variation in FIG. 172 and the variation fixed time are constructed in the following relationship.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H1 to H3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H1 sec < Left column shake action Y1 sec (1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H2 sec < Right column shake action Y2 sec (1-3) During Row fluctuation start action H3 seconds < middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (2) fixed position action T seconds (one of T1 to T3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y3 seconds) )
(2-1) Left column fixed position action T1 sec <left column shaking action Y1 sec (2-2) Right column fixed position action T2 sec <right column shaking action Y2 sec (2-3) Middle column Fixed position action T3 seconds < Middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (3) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) < Total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds) (4) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(5) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(7) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y1 to Y3 seconds)
(8) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (one of Y1 to Y3 seconds) )
(8-1) Left column action at the start of fluctuation H1 sec + Left column fixed position action T1 sec < Left column shaking action Y1 sec (8-2) Right column fluctuation start action H2 sec + Right column constant Position action T2 seconds <right row shaking action Y2 seconds (8-3) middle row fluctuation start action H3 seconds + middle row fixed position action T3 seconds <middle row shaking action Y3 seconds (9) fluctuation start action H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds) < variable fixed time (10) fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds) < variable fixed time (11) shaking action Y seconds (Y1 ~ Any one of Y3 seconds)> Variable fixed time (12) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds) + fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds)> Fluctuation fixed time (13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H1 to H3 seconds) + Total time of fixed position action (total time of T1 to T3 seconds) > Fluctuation fixed time In addition, above (9), ( 10) may be configured so that the variable fixed time is shorter, that is, "variation start action H seconds (any one of H1 to H3 seconds)>variable fixed time", "fixed position action T seconds (any one of T1 to T3 seconds)>variable fixed time" may be satisfied. It should be noted that "either" as used herein may be satisfied as long as any one of them is satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (1), at least one of H1<Y1, H1<Y2, H1<Y3, H2<Y1, H2<Y2, H2<Y3, H3<Y1, H3<Y2, H3<Y3 should be satisfied.

Next, the first decorative pattern in the left column in the reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state is H4 seconds for the action at the start of the fluctuation, T4 seconds for the fixed position action, Y4 seconds for the shaking action, and a tenpai action. TP for 1 second, shake action 1 for Y5 seconds, and decision action for K1 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the left row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. The first decorative pattern in the right column, after the first decorative pattern in the left column starts to fluctuate, has an action at the start of fluctuation for H5 seconds, a fixed position action for T5 seconds, a tenpai action for 2 seconds, a shake action for Y6 seconds, and a decision action. is executed for K2 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the right column is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. For the first decorative pattern in the middle row, after the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns start to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation is executed for H6 seconds, and the decision action is executed for K3 seconds. After the deciding action, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is shaken and fluctuated, and then the fixing and stopping of the first decorative pattern is executed over the fluctuating fixed time. It should be noted that this reach variation may be a time-reduced game state rather than a non-time-reduced game state, or may be the second main game symbol rather than the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. It may be the design variation of the first decorative design corresponding to the design variation of. In the case of this reach fluctuation, the execution timing of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the left column, the middle row, and the right column is not the same but different (the timing at which the action at the start of the fluctuation of each first decorative pattern is different). there is In this way, by differentiating the execution timing of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns, there is a possibility that a specific symbol variation has started for the player at the timing of the variation start. It is possible to suggest that there is something to be done, and to inform the player of the degree of expectation of a big win. Here, the form of the action at the start of variation when the execution timing of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is different, and the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns. (For example, if the execution timing is different, the first decorative pattern shakes vertically , and if the execution timing is the same, the action is such that the first decorative pattern trembles in the horizontal direction). In the case of this reach variation, the execution timings of the actions at the start of variation in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are not the same but different (the actions at the start of variation of each first decorative pattern are executed at different timings). Although an example has been shown, the execution timing of the action at the start of variation in the left column, the middle column, and the right column may be the same as shown in the normal symbol variation. Here, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with the normal reach production, the first decorative pattern in the middle row does not perform the fixed position action, but the normal reach production does not develop into the super reach production. When the performance is continued and the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbols in the middle row may be stopped and displayed by executing the fixed position action. The aspect of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the middle row when the normal reach effect is not developed into the super ready-to-win effect and the normal reach effect is continued and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed is the mode of the fixed position action 3 shown in FIG. The same aspect of the in-place action as , or different aspects of the in-place action may be performed. Here, the case where the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with the normal reach effect is exemplified. It is preferable to configure so that the fixed position action 3 in the middle row is not executed as in the case of hit reach variation shown in FIG. 170 .

Also, the execution time of each action in the specific symbol variation in FIG.
(1) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (one of H4 to H6 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(1-1) Left column fluctuation start action H4 seconds < left column shake action Y seconds (either one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(1-2) Right column fluctuation start action H5 seconds <Right column shaking action Y6 seconds (2) Fixed position action T seconds (either one of T4 or T5 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (Y4 to Y6) seconds)
(2-1) Left column fixed position action T4 seconds < left column shaking action Y seconds (either one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(2-2) Right column fixed position action T5 seconds <right column shaking action Y6 seconds (3) Tenpai action TP seconds (either one of TP1 or TP2 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (Y4 to Y6 seconds) any one)
(3-1) Left row tenpai action TP 1 sec < left row shaking action Y seconds (either one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
(3-2) Right row tenpai action TP 2 seconds < right row shaking action Y 6 seconds (4) Determination action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any of Y4 to Y6 seconds) or one)
(4-1) K1 seconds of the deciding action in the left column < Y seconds of the shaking action in the left column (either one of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(4-2) Right column decision action K2 seconds <Right column shaking action Y6 seconds (5) Total time of fluctuation start action (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) <Total time of shaking action (Y4 to Y6 seconds) total time)
(5-1) Left column fluctuation start action H4 seconds < total time of left column shaking action (total time of Y4 and Y5 seconds)
(6) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 to T5 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(7) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y4-Y6 seconds)
(8) Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (total time of Y4 to Y6 seconds) (9) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) <Shake action Y seconds (one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(10) Total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(11) Total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) < swing action Y seconds (one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(12) Total time of decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shaking action Y seconds (any one of Y4 to Y6 seconds)
(13) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) + total time of decision action (total time of K1-K3 seconds) < total time of shaking action (total time of Y4-Y6 seconds)
(13-1) Left column fluctuation start action H 4 seconds + left column fixed position action T 4 seconds + left column tenpai action TP 1 second + left column decision action K 1 second < total time of left column shaking action (Y4) , Y total time of 5 seconds)
(13-2) Right column fluctuation start action H 5 seconds + right column fixed position action T 5 seconds + right column tenpai action TP 2 seconds + left column decision action K 2 seconds <right column shaking action Y 6 seconds (14) Total time of action at the start of fluctuation (total time of H4-H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (total time of TP1, TP2 seconds) + deciding action total time (total time of K1-K3 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (any one of Y4-Y6 seconds)
(14-1) Left row fluctuation start action H 4 seconds + left row fixed position action T 4 seconds + left row tenpai action TP 1 second + left row decision action K 1 seconds < left row shaking action Y seconds (Y4, one of Y5 seconds)
(15) Action at start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (16) Fixed position action T seconds (any one of T4 or T5 seconds) < fluctuation fixed time (17) Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 or TP2 seconds) < Variable fixed time (18) Determination action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds) < Variable fixed time (19) Shaking action Y seconds (Y4 ~ Y6 seconds) > Variable fixed time (20) Action at the start of fluctuation H seconds (any one of H4 to H6 seconds) + fixed position action T seconds (one of T4, T5 seconds) + Tenpai action TP seconds (any one of TP1 or TP2 seconds) + Decision action K seconds (any one of K1-K3 seconds) > Variable fixed time (21) Total time of action at the start of variation (H4-H6) total time in seconds) + total time of fixed position actions (total time of T4 and T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai actions (total time of TP1 and TP2 seconds) + total time of decision actions (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) ) > Variable fixed time (22) Total time of action at the start of variation (total time of H4 to H6 seconds) + total time of fixed position action (total time of T4, T5 seconds) + total time of tenpai action (TP1, TP2) second total time) + total time of the decision action (total time of K1 to K3 seconds) < shake action Y seconds (either one of Y4 or Y5 seconds)
Regarding (15) to (18) above, the variable fixed time may be configured to be shorter. Fixed time", "Fixed position action T seconds (either one of T4 or T5 seconds) > Variable fixed time", "Tenpai action TP seconds (One of TP1 or TP2 seconds) > Variable fixed time", " Decision action K seconds (any one of K1 to K3 seconds)>variable fixed time” may be satisfied. It should be noted that "either" as used herein may be satisfied as long as any one of them is satisfied, and it is not necessary for both to be satisfied. For example, in the case of (1-1), at least one of H4<Y4 and H4<Y5 should be satisfied.

Next, FIG. 173 is an image diagram from (a) stoppage of determination of the losing symbol to (l) re-fluctuation of the first pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, FIG. 173 shows specific pattern variations on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state (for example, reach variations that perform normal reach effects for winning A3 in FIG. 12, super reach effects for winning A6, battle reach effects It shows each action (b) to (l) in the reach fluctuation performed in the first half and the second half of. In addition, instead of the non-time-reduced game state, it may be various variations of the time-reduced game state shown in FIG. It may be a reach variation that performs the latter half, or a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to a symbol variation of the second main game pattern rather than a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. may be It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is possible to hold the trigger of the look-ahead effect as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. It is clear that

In (a), in the non-time-reduced game state, the hold on the first main game side is 4 and the hold on the second main game side is 0, and the effect display device SG corresponds to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern. It shows that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol to be played are fixed and stopped at "711" which is the missing symbol. In the non-time-reduced game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols is "numbers". Only Then, four first pending displays on the first main game side are displayed, and the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "4", and the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "0".

In (b), as the fluctuation start condition of the first main game pattern is satisfied, the hold is digested, and the hold digest transmission image (for example, the image object of the white circle in the figure) corresponding to the digested hold is displayed. It shows a variation start time action 1 when the displayed first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner. The variation mode of the pattern variation this time is a pattern variation that accompanies two pseudo-runs, and a variation mode in which the jackpot pattern of "777" is displayed after reaching the ready-to-win effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, battle reach effect). , and when the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the action 1 at the start of variation is executed. This action 1 at the start of variation is the timing immediately after the start of the variation display of the first main game symbols (for example, after 0.1 seconds), when the losing symbols shown in (a) are fixed and stopped. The action of enlarging the first decorative patterns in the left, middle and right columns is illustrated. The display area where the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the action 1 at the start (display area for the action at the start), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. A display area larger than the display area (display area for confirmation and stop) is shown as an example, but when executing the action 1 at the start of variation that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the operation at the start is confirmed. The display area becomes smaller than the stop display area.

(c) shows the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns after the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols have started to be displayed in a variable manner. After execution of the action 1 at the start of variation when the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner, the enlarged first decorative symbols are the first decorative symbols that were fixed and stopped. It is configured to reduce to the size of one decorative pattern, and then execute acceleration variation for scrolling downward. Note that the acceleration variation is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of variation of the first decorative symbol.

(d) shows the high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start the accelerated variation. After starting the acceleration variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, it is configured to perform a fast change.

(e) shows the deceleration variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after executing the high speed variation. After performing high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, deceleration variation for variably displaying the first decorative symbols in the left row in a visible state is performed. . It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the slowdown variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing the high speed variation.

In (f), the first decorative pattern of the number "1" in the left column + chick character is temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration fluctuation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column is temporarily stopped. This indicates that the fixed-position action 1 is executed in the display area (display area for the fixed-position action in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 1 is the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped shown in (a), and the first decorative pattern is higher than the first decorative pattern of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). , and expand the first decorative pattern at a position lower than the first decorative pattern of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b), and then return it to the upper position. In addition, this fixed position action corresponds to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element) as a mode of a different fixed position action. It may be configured to perform a positional action that In this case, if the first element shown in the left column is a chick, there is an example in which the chick performs a fixed position action of waving both hands. It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 1, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuation.

(g) executes a shaking action after the first decorative pattern in the left column executes fixed position action 1, and executes deceleration variation of the first decorative pattern in the right column after executing high speed fluctuation. is shown. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to perform the shaking action after performing the fixed position action 1 and then shrinking. In addition, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to perform deceleration variation, which is variably displayed in a visible state, after performing high-speed variation. In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing the shaking action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing the deceleration variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing the high speed variation.

(h) shows that the first decorative pattern in the left column continues to perform the shaking action, and the number "7" in the right column + the first decorative pattern of the lion character performs deceleration fluctuations. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the fixed position action 1 is executed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column is temporarily stopped (the display area of the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the display area of the fixed position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 1 may be the same as the fixed position action 1 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column, or may be different. In addition, when executing a fixed position action different from the left column, a different fixed position action may be executed according to the pattern row of the first decorative pattern, or the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the 1 element+the type of the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element) may be executed. When executing an action corresponding to the type of the first decorative pattern (for example, the type of the first element + the second element, the type of the first element, the type of the second element), the chick of the first element shown in the left column Since the first element is a lion, unlike the positional action of waving both hands, there is an example where the lion performs the positional action of pouncing. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the shaking action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 1, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation. there is

(i) indicates that the pseudo consecutive symbols are performing deceleration variation. The first decorative pattern in the right column is configured to perform the swing action after performing the fixed position action 1 and then shrinking. Then, in a state in which the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column perform the shaking action, the pseudo continuous pattern (“NEXT” pattern) covers the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. It is configured to decelerate and fluctuate to hide. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(j) indicates that the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed-position action 1. FIG. The pseudo-continuous symbols that are decelerating and fluctuating at a low speed are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. At the timing of the temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 1 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row is temporarily stopped (the display area for the fixed position operation in the middle row, which is the display area of the fixed position). do. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row is set so that the temporary stop and the fixed position action are not executed when the pseudo continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 1. is configured to

(k) shows that the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 1. In a state where the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the first decorative symbol of the number "1" and the chick character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT". Then, at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row position action display area). In this embodiment, after the pseudo consecutive symbol (“NEXT” symbol) of (j) executes fixed position action 1, and the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (k) executes fixed position action 1, An example of executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern of (l) was shown, but after the pseudo-continuous pattern of (j) ("NEXT" symbol) executes the fixed position action 1, (1) in (k) The first decorative pattern in the row does not perform the fixed position action 1, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row continues to perform the variable display (the first decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped). (l) re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbols may be executed, or (2) one of the temporary stop candidates in the plurality of first decorative symbols scroll-displayed in the middle symbol row of the pseudo-continuous symbols. One may be set as one, and temporary stop and fixed position action may be performed as the first decorative pattern (for example, if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → While scrolling in the order of . , 1 → 2 → … → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → … while scrolling in order, the first decorative symbols displayed in the main area are sequentially switched and displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. may be configured to do so). It should be noted that the configuration of the pseudo-continuous symbols in this manner is not limited to the pseudo-continuous symbols in FIG. 173, but also the pseudo-continuous symbols in FIG. It is clear that it can be applied to the pseudo consecutive symbols in each embodiment, including the above.In addition, as the display area for the fixed position operation, a display area larger than the display area for the operation at the start and the display area for the fixed stop As an example, when executing the fixed position action 1 to reduce the first decorative pattern, the display area for the fixed position action becomes a smaller display area than the display area for the action at the start and the display area for the fixed stop. Incidentally, the pseudo-continuous symbol corresponds to the "special symbol" used in the pseudo-continuous variation shown in FIG. 20 and the like as a provisional display mode.

(l) shows the re-fluctuation of pseudo consecutive symbols. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are configured to perform acceleration variation for scrolling downward when re-variation (pseudo-continuation) is performed. In addition, after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous pattern will start to change again (pseudo-continuous) with the action at the time of fluctuation start, or by executing a dedicated action (after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped). It is an action that suggests disappearing from the main area, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may disappear by performing an action such as an erasing action described later). The execution time is set to be longer than the erase action in which the pseudo-continuous pattern turns into fog and disappears without a trace, or the action at the start of fluctuation of other first decorative patterns, or the display area used in the action is Perform actions such as increasing the size, increasing the magnification, speeding up the rotation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, and increasing the light emission such as color effects. In addition, in this embodiment, (l) re-fluctuation of the pseudo-continuous symbols is performed, and after executing the action 2 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (m), ( An example of performing high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (o) via accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of n) is shown. However, when executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern in (l) and executing the acceleration fluctuation, or when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the action at the start of fluctuation, when the action at the start of fluctuation is executed, or the pseudo When consecutive patterns perform a dedicated action, action 2 at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns of (m), and the left, middle, and right columns of (n) It may be configured to perform high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (o) without executing the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols (in this case, (n) It is preferable to immediately perform high-speed variation without performing accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns).

Next, FIG. 174 is a state following FIG. 173, and is an image diagram from (m) action 2 at the start of fluctuation to (x) fixed-position action 2 of pseudo consecutive symbols. First, (m) shows the action 2 at the start of variation when starting the first re-variation (pseudo run) of the first decorative symbol. When the first decorative pattern starts to change again, action 2 at the start of change is executed. This action 2 at the start of variation enlarges the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns shown in (k) at the timing immediately after the re-variation is started (for example, 0.1 seconds later). Exemplify actions. The display area where the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the action 2 at the start (display area for the action at the start), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. A display area larger than the display area (display area for confirmation and stop) is shown as an example, but when executing the action 2 at the start of variation that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the operation at the start is confirmed. The display area becomes smaller than the stop display area. Although an example of executing the action 2 at the start of variation when starting the first re-variation (pseudo-run) of the first decorative symbol has been shown, when starting the re-variation (pseudo-run) of the first decorative symbol It is not necessary to execute action 2 at the start of fluctuation.

(n) shows the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the first re-variation (pseudo run). After executing the action 2 at the time of start of variation when the first decorative design starts to re-variate, the enlarged first decorative design is reduced to the size of the first decorative design when it was fixed and stopped, and then , to perform an acceleration variation that scrolls downward. In addition, it is configured to execute the acceleration variation until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative symbol.

(o) shows high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the accelerated fluctuation. After starting the acceleration variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, a predetermined time ( For example, it is configured to perform high-speed variation after 1 second) has elapsed.

(p) shows the deceleration variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after executing the high speed variation. After the high-speed variation of the first decorative pattern is executed, the deceleration variation for variably displaying the first decorative pattern in the left row in a visible state is executed. It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the slowdown variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing the high speed variation.

In (q), the number "1" in the left column + the chick character's first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration variation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column is temporarily stopped. This indicates that the fixed-position action 2 is executed in the display area (the display area for the fixed-position action in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 2 is the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped shown in (a), and the first decorative pattern is higher than the first decorative pattern of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). exemplifies the action of expanding the . It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 2, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuation.

(r) executes a shaking action after the first decorative pattern in the left column executes the fixed position action 2, and executes a deceleration variation of the first decorative pattern in the right column after executing the high speed fluctuation. is shown. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to perform the shaking action after performing the fixed position action 2 and then shrinking. In addition, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to perform deceleration variation, which is variably displayed in a visible state, after performing high-speed variation. In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing the shaking action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing the deceleration variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing the high speed variation.

(s) shows that the first decorative pattern in the left column continues to perform the shaking action, and the first decorative pattern of the number "1" in the right column + chick character performs deceleration fluctuation. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the fixed position action 2 is executed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column is temporarily stopped (the display area for the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the display area of the fixed position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 2 may be the same as or different from the fixed position action 2 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the shaking action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 2, the first decorative pattern in the middle column is performing the high-speed fluctuation. there is

(t) shows the state after execution of the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern in the right column. After executing the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern in the right column, the first decorative pattern in the right column is displayed in a reduced size. The first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are the same number "1" and the first decorative pattern of the chick character. At this time, the first decorative pattern in the right column may perform a shaking action. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(u) shows a tenpai action 1 in a state where the same pattern is displayed as the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. In (t), after the first decorative pattern of the same number "1" and the character of the chick is displayed in the left and right columns, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are displayed. It is configured to perform action 1. This tenpai action 1 executes an action of enlarging the chick character image object as the first element of the first decorative pattern more than the action at the start of fluctuation or the fixed position action. A positional action that performs an action corresponding to the type of decoration pattern (eg, one of the first element + second element type, the first element type, and the second element type) is illustrated. In this example, since the first element is a chick, the action of blowing off the shells above and below the chick is executed. It has become. In addition, as a display area (display area for tenpai action) in which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns perform Tenpai Action 1, the display areas for confirming and stopping the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are displayed, and the operation at the start is performed. , the display area is larger than the display area of the fixed position action, but when executing the tenpai action 1 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area of the tenpai action is the left column and the right column The display area is smaller than the display area for the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol, the display area for the start operation, and the display area for the fixed position operation. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(v) shows shaking action 1 to be executed in the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. This shaking action 1 is performed with the chick character as the first element and the number "1" as the second element of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns after the tenpai action 1 of (u) is executed. , and then swaying the action. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation. It should be noted that after the tenpai action 1 of (u) is executed, the production mode of the normal reach production is executed, and during this normal reach production, the shaking action 1 of (v) is executed, but the super reach production is executed. or a battle reach effect may be executed. In such a configuration, the pseudo consecutive symbols may be temporarily stopped during the super ready-to-win production or battle ready-to-win production, and during the super ready-to-win production or battle ready-to-win production, the shaking action is performed in the same way as during the normal ready-to-win production. good too. Here, it is preferable that the shaking action during the super ready-to-win effect or the battle ready-to-win effect is configured to be different from the shaking action 1 during the normal ready-to-win effect. For example, the shaking action during the Super Reach production and the Battle Reach production has a smaller first decorative pattern than the shaking action 1 during the normal reach production, the first element is erased, and the shaking action is performed with only the second element. It is preferable that the swinging width is small, and the swinging action is slow (the period of one swing is longer than that of the normal ready-to-win effect).

(w) indicates that the pseudo consecutive symbols are performing deceleration variation. With the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column performing a shaking action, the pseudo continuous pattern ("NEXT" pattern) covers the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. is configured to decelerate and fluctuate to In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(x) indicates that the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed-position action 2. The pseudo-continuous symbols that are decelerating and fluctuating at a low speed are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the liquid crystal screen. At the timing of the temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 2 in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row is temporarily stopped (the display area for the fixed position operation in the middle row, which is the display area of the fixed position). do. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed fluctuation, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row is designed not to execute the temporary stop and the fixed position action when the pseudo continuous pattern executes the fixed position action 2. is configured to

Next, FIG. 175 is a state following FIGS. 173 and 174, and is an image diagram from (y) fixed position action 2 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row to (j2) shaking action 2. FIG. First, (y) indicates that the first decorative symbol in the middle row executes the fixed position action 2. In the state where the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the number "7" + the first decoration pattern of the lion character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo consecutive symbols "NEXT". Then, at the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row position action display area) to execute the fixed position action 2. In this embodiment, after the (x) pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) executes the fixed position action 2, and the first decorative symbol in the middle row of (y) executes the fixed position action 2, An example of executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern of (z) was shown, but after the pseudo-continuous pattern of (x) ("NEXT" symbol) executes the fixed position action 2, (1) In (y) The first decorative pattern in the row does not perform the fixed position action 2, and the first decorative pattern in the middle row continues to perform the variable display (the first decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped). (z) re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbols may be executed, or (2) one of the temporary stop candidates in the plurality of first decorative symbols scroll-displayed in the middle symbol row of the pseudo-continuous symbols. One may be set as one, and temporary stop and fixed position action may be performed as the first decorative pattern (for example, if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, 1 → 2 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → While scrolling in the order of . , 1 → 2 → … → 7 → 8 → NEXT → 1 → … while scrolling in order, the first decorative symbols displayed in the main area are sequentially switched and displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. may be configured to do so). It should be noted that the configuration of the pseudo-continuous symbols in this way is not limited to the pseudo-continuous symbols in FIG. 173 and the pseudo-continuous symbols in FIG. From the beginning, it is clear that it can be applied to the pseudo-continuous pattern in each embodiment.Incidentally, as the display area of the fixed position operation, a display area larger than the display area of the operation at the start or the display area of the fixed stop is exemplified. However, when executing the fixed position action 2 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the fixed position action becomes a display area smaller than the display area for the action at the start and the display area for the fixed stop. , the pseudo-continuous symbol corresponds to the "special symbol" used in the pseudo-continuous variation shown in FIG.

(z) shows the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are configured to perform acceleration variation for scrolling downward when re-variation (pseudo-continuation) is performed. In addition, after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous pattern will start to change again (pseudo-continuous) with the action at the time of fluctuation start, or by executing a dedicated action (after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped). It is an action that suggests disappearing from the main area, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may disappear by performing an action such as an erasing action described later). The execution time is set to be longer than the erase action in which the pseudo-continuous pattern turns into fog and disappears without a trace, or the action at the start of fluctuation of other first decorative patterns, or the display area used in the action is Perform actions such as increasing the size, increasing the magnification, speeding up the rotation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, and increasing the light emission such as color effects. In addition, in this embodiment, (z) re-variation of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed, and after executing the action 3 at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (a2), ( An example of performing high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (c2) via accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of b2) is shown. However, when executing the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous pattern of (z) and executing the acceleration fluctuation, or when the pseudo-continuous pattern executes the action at the start of fluctuation, when executing the action at the start of fluctuation, or the pseudo When the continuous pattern executes the dedicated action, the action 3 at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns of (a2), and the left, middle, and right columns of (b2) It may be configured to perform high-speed variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns of (c2) without executing the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols (in this case, (n) It is preferable to immediately perform high-speed variation without performing accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns).

(a2) shows the action 3 at the start of variation when the first decorative symbol starts the second re-variation (pseudo run). When the first decorative pattern starts to change again, action 3 at the start of change is executed. This action 3 at the start of variation enlarges the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns indicated by (y) at the timing immediately after the re-variation is started (for example, 0.1 seconds later). Exemplify actions. The display area where the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the action 3 at the start (display area for the action at the start), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are fixed and stopped. Although a display area larger than the display area (display area for confirmation and stop) is shown as an example, when executing the action 3 at the start of fluctuation that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area for the operation at the start is confirmed. The display area becomes smaller than the stop display area. Although an example of executing the action 3 at the start of variation when starting the second re-variation (pseudo-run) of the first decorative symbol has been shown, when starting the re-variation (pseudo-run) of the first decorative symbol It is not necessary to execute action 3 at the start of fluctuation.

(b2) shows the accelerated variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the first re-variation (pseudo run). After executing the action 3 at the time of start of variation when the first decorative design starts to change again, the enlarged first decorative design is reduced to the size of the first decorative design when it was fixed and stopped, and then , to perform an acceleration variation that scrolls downward. In addition, it is configured to execute the acceleration variation until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the re-variation of the first decorative symbol.

(c2) shows high-speed fluctuations of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns after the first decorative symbols start the accelerated fluctuation. After starting the acceleration variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols, a predetermined time ( For example, it is configured to perform high-speed variation after 1 second) has elapsed.

(d2) shows the deceleration variation of the first decorative symbol in the left column after executing the high speed variation. After the high-speed variation of the first decorative pattern is executed, the deceleration variation for variably displaying the first decorative pattern in the left row in a visible state is executed. It should be noted that while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the slowdown variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing the high speed variation.

In (e2), the number "7" in the left column + the first decorative pattern of the lion character are temporarily stopped while executing the deceleration variation, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the first decorative pattern in the left column is temporarily stopped. It shows that the fixed-position action 3 is executed in the display area (display area of the fixed-position action in the left column, which is the display area of the fixed position). This fixed position action 3 is the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped shown in (a), and the first decorative pattern is higher than the first decorative pattern of the action 1 at the start of fluctuation shown in (b). exemplifies the action of expanding the . In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left column are performing the fixed position action 3, the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns are performing high-speed fluctuation.

In (f2), the first decorative pattern in the left column executes the swing action after executing the fixed position action 3, and the deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the right column after executing the high speed fluctuation. is shown. The first decorative pattern in the left column is configured to perform the shaking action after performing the fixed position action 3 and then shrinking. In addition, the first decorative symbol in the right column is configured to perform deceleration variation that is variably displayed in a visible state after performing high-speed variation. In addition, while the first decorative symbols in the left row are performing the shaking action and the first decorative symbols in the right row are performing the deceleration variation, the first decorative symbols in the middle row are performing the high speed variation.

(g2) shows that the first decorative pattern in the left column continues to perform the shaking action, and the number "7" in the right column + the first decorative pattern of the lion character performs deceleration variation. Temporarily stop, and at the timing of the temporary stop, the fixed position action 3 is executed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the right column is temporarily stopped (the display area for the fixed position operation in the right column, which is the display area of the fixed position). It is shown that. This fixed position action 3 may be the same as the fixed position action 3 executed by the first decorative symbol in the left column, or may be different. In addition, while the first decorative pattern in the left column is performing the swing action and the first decorative pattern in the right column is performing the fixed position action 3, the first decorative pattern in the middle column is performing the high-speed fluctuation. there is

(h2) shows the state after executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the right column. After executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the right column, the first decorative pattern in the right column is displayed in a reduced size. The first decorative patterns in the left and right columns display the same number "7" plus the first decorative pattern of a lion character. At this time, the first decorative pattern in the right column may perform a shaking action. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(i2) shows a tenpai action 2 in a state where the same pattern is displayed as the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. In (h2), after the same number "7" and the first decorative pattern of the lion character are displayed in the left and right columns, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are displayed. It is configured to perform action 2. This tenpai action 2 exemplifies the action of enlarging the image object of the lion character as the first element of the first decorative pattern more than the action at the start of fluctuation or the fixed position action. In addition, as the display area (the display area for the tenpai action), the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns execute the tenpai action 2, the display area for fixing and stopping the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, and the operation at the start. , the display area is larger than the display area of the fixed position action, but when executing the tenpai action 2 that reduces the first decorative pattern, the display area of the tenpai action is the left column and the right column The display area is smaller than the display area for the fixed stop of the first decorative symbol, the display area for the start operation, and the display area for the fixed position operation. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

(j2) shows the shake action 2 executed in the first decorative pattern on the left column and the first decorative pattern on the right column. This shaking action 2 is performed after the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed, and the lion character as the first element and the number "7" as the second element of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. , and then swaying the action. It should be noted that after the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed, the production mode of the normal reach production is executed. It is configured to develop from super reach production or battle reach production. Here, after the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is executed, the production mode of the normal reach production is executed, and during this normal reach production, the shaking action 2 of (j2) is executed. You may comprise so that a reach production may be performed. Further, the normal reach effect may be continued without developing from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect or the battle reach effect. In addition, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is performing high-speed variation.

Next, FIG. 176 is a state following FIGS. 173, 174, and 175, and is an image diagram from (k2) fixed position action 3 of the first decorative symbol in the middle row to (n2) fixed stop. First, in (k2), while the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are performing the shake action 2 in (j2), the first decorative symbol in the middle row performs the fixed position action 3. showing. In a state in which the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are in a tense state and the shaking action 2 is being executed, the first decorative pattern of the number "7" + the lion character in the middle row is decelerated and fluctuates. , and then temporarily stopped. At the timing of the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is displayed in the display area where the first decorative pattern in the middle row is temporarily stopped (fixed position display area in the middle row) The display area of the action) is configured to perform the positional action 3. As the display area of the fixed position action, a display area larger than the display area of the action at the start and the display area of the fixed stop is exemplified, but when executing the fixed position action 3 to reduce the first decorative pattern, The display area for the motion at the fixed position is smaller than the display area for the motion at the start and the display area for the fixed stop. Here, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with a super ready-to-win effect (or battle ready-to-win effect), the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 3, but the normal reach effect is shown. If the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed by continuing the normal reach effect without developing into the super reach effect, the first decorative pattern in the middle row is the first decorative pattern in the middle row without executing the fixed position action 3. 7" may be stopped and displayed. By constructing in this way, when the normal ready-to-win performance results in a big win, the fixed-position action of the first decorative pattern in the middle row is not executed, and the big win pattern is suddenly stopped and displayed, so that a performance that surprises the player is executed. It becomes possible to Here, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with super ready-to-win production (or battle ready-to-win production), an example is shown in which the first decorative pattern in the middle row executes the fixed position action 3, but the middle row may be configured not to execute the fixed position action 3 of . For example, if it is determined whether to perform an action or not depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background), in the pattern variation of the super reach effect (it may be a battle reach effect), the super Due to the leech background, it does not perform positional actions. Then, when the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed, the background is changed from the super ready-to-win background to the normal background, and after that, the first decorative pattern is configured to perform a shaking variation (shake action). By constructing so that the fixed position action is not executed during the super ready-to-win effect, the player can see the super ready-to-win effect without being disturbed by the fixed position action.

(l2) is the ready-to-win effect and after the first decorative pattern in the middle row is temporarily stopped with the fixed position action 3 during the execution of the shake action 2 of the first decorative patterns in the left and right rows, the jackpot pattern is displayed. , and indicates that the decision action is to be executed in the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns. This decision action is to erase the card-shaped image object as the first element of the first decorative pattern and to enlarge the lion character as the first element. , the first decorative pattern is configured to emit light for a moment. In addition, I showed an example where the decision action is configured differently from the action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, tenpai action, and swing action, but it is the same as the action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, tenpai action, and swing action. may be In addition, as the display area (decision action display area) where each of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns executes the decision action, the display area for the fixed stop, the display area for the action at the start, and the display area for the fixed position action The display area and the display area larger than the display area for the shaking motion are exemplified, but when executing the decision action to reduce the first decorative pattern, the display area for the decision action is the display area for the fixed stop, and the display area for the start The display area is smaller than the motion display area, the fixed position motion display area, and the swing motion display area. In addition, after (k2) execution of the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row, an example of executing the deciding action in the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns of (l2) was shown. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with a super ready-to-win effect (it may be a battle ready-to-win effect), after executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row of (k2), the super ready-to-win effect is ended, and the left The swing action of the first decorative symbols in the row, middle row, and right row may be executed, and then the deciding action may be executed in the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows of (l2). In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with a super ready-to-win effect (it may be a battle ready-to-win effect), the super ready-to-win effect is performed without executing the fixed position action 3 of the first decorative pattern in the middle row of (k2). (switching from the display screen of the super reach effect to the normal background display screen), execute the shaking action of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns, then (l2) left column, A decision action may be performed on the first decorative symbols in the middle and right columns.

(m2) indicates that a shaking variation (swinging action) is executed in a state in which the jackpot pattern is displayed after the deciding action. Shake variation (shake action) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) until the final stop timing. Then, (n2) shows a state in which the big-hit symbols are fixed and stopped. The definite stop is configured to definite stop the first decorative symbol over the time indicated by the variable fixed time.

173(i) to 174(m), the number "1" + chick character first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the left column, and the character "7" is temporarily stopped in the right column. After the first decorative pattern of the number + lion character is temporarily stopped, a pseudo-continuous pattern ("NEXT" pattern) is displayed fluctuating at a low speed, temporarily stopped at the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. In the case where the first decoration pattern of the number "1" + chick character is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT", when the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" changes again , the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are configured to perform the action at the start of variation, but may be configured not to perform the action at the start of variation. In this case, when the pseudo-continuous symbol "NEXT" starts to change again, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns are already configured to perform high-speed variation. With this configuration, only the first action at the start of the fluctuation (action 1 at the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 173) can be emphasized in the pattern fluctuation of the pseudo-run where the timing of the re-fluctuation is difficult to understand. It is possible to easily recognize that it is a specific pattern variation. An example in which the number "1" + the chick character's first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is shown, but the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" 135 and 136, in which the first decorative pattern of the character of the number "1" and the chick is not temporarily stopped in the middle row.

173(i) to 174(m), the number "1" + chick character first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the left column, and the character "7" is temporarily stopped in the right column. After the first decorative pattern of the number + lion character is temporarily stopped, a pseudo-continuous pattern ("NEXT" pattern) is displayed fluctuating at a low speed, temporarily stopped at the approximate center of the liquid crystal screen, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. , in the case where the number "1" + the first decoration pattern of the character of the chick temporarily stops in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT", after the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" changes again , the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform the action at the start of fluctuation. In this case, after the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" starts to change again, and after the pseudo-continuous pattern changes at high speed and becomes non-transparent, the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns are displayed. executes action 2 at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, with regard to the pattern variation of the pseudo-run, the degree of expectation for winning is made different depending on the number of times the executed action at the start of the variation is executed (the number of times of execution of the pseudo-run is three times rather than two times). high expectations). An example in which the number "1" + the chick character's first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle row behind the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is shown, but the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" 135 and 136, in which the first decorative pattern of the character of the number "1" and the chick is not temporarily stopped in the middle row. In this case, the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed with two first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, or three patterns (2 The action at the start of fluctuation may be executed with two first decorative symbols and one special design, or the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed only with pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, in the case of pseudo-run variation using pseudo-run symbols, when the first decorative symbol changes again (pseudo-run after reach) after the ready-to-win state in which the first decorative symbol is in the tenpai state is formed. 174 (q) fixed position action 2 via (u) tenpai action 1 via (w) left and right column swaying action of the first decorative symbols} Then, after the formation of the non-reach state in which the first decorative symbol is in the non-tenpai state, the first decorative symbol changes again (non-reach pseudo-continuation). f) The shaking action of the first decorative symbols in the left row and the right row indicated by (i) from the fixed position action 1} are configured to be different. Here, the motion pattern related to the predetermined motion may be the number of types and/or combination of predetermined motions. As for the number of types of predetermined actions, there are three kinds of fixed-position action, tenpai action, and swing action when the pseudo-continuation after reach is executed, and fixed-position action, when non-reach pseudo-continuation is executed. There are two types of swing actions shown in (i), and after the first decorative pattern is in the state of tenpai, the first decorative pattern re-fluctuations (pseudo consecutive after reaching) are formed. Types of actions (three types), and predetermined actions when the first decorative pattern executes a re-variation (non-reach pseudo-continuation) after the non-reach state in which the first decorative pattern is in a non-tenpai state is formed It is configured to be different from the type (two types). Further, the combination of the predetermined actions is a combination of a fixed position action, a tenpai action, and a swing action when executing a pseudo-continuation after reach, and a fixed-position action, FIG. (i) is a combination of swing actions, and a predetermined operation in the case where the first decorative symbol performs a re-fluctuation (post-reach pseudo-continuation) after a ready-to-win state is formed in which the first decorative symbol is in a tenpai state. (a combination of a fixed position action, a tenpai action, and a swinging action), and after the non-reach state in which the first decorative pattern is in a non-tenpai state is formed, the first decorative pattern re-fluctuations (non-reach pseudo-continuation) It is configured so that it differs from the combination of predetermined actions (combination of fixed position action and shaking action) when executed. By configuring in this way, when a popular effect in recent years such as a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the first decoration is displayed according to the effect process (mode of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol) until the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. By varying the chronological content of the actions of the symbols, it is possible to diversify the flow of the conventional uniform quasi-continuous presentation by the difference in the visual aspects of the first decorative symbols.

Next, FIG. 177 corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in a situation where neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held in the (a3) non-time reduction game state. A display from a state in which the first decorative pattern that has undergone a pattern change is fixed and stopped as a lost pattern to (f3) the second shake action, and a display from (a4) the big win end demonstration to (f4) the second shake action. It is an image diagram regarding.

In (a3), in the non-time-reduced game state, the effect display device SG confirms and stops the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol at "711", which is the missing symbol. In the non-reduced time gaming state, the display mode of the first decorative symbols is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols is "numbers only". Neither the first pending display on the first main game side nor the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. In addition, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0". It is in a variable standby state in which there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side. In addition, as (a3), the timing when the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the losing pattern (if there is a variable fixed time, the timing after the variable fixed time has elapsed) is exemplified, but the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end) As the demo end timing, immediately after the end of the jackpot, and immediately after the start of the time-reduced game state, in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side after the end of the jackpot, "777" is the jackpot symbol. etc. may be displayed. In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbols that have undergone symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side. It may be the timing when the winning symbol is confirmed and stopped, or the pattern fluctuation of the second main game symbol in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side in the time shortening game state. It may be the timing at which the first decorative pattern that fluctuates in correspondence with the pattern is fixed and stopped as a lost pattern, or in the time shortening game state, neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is held. It may be the timing at which the first decorative symbol, which has undergone symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation, is confirmed and stopped as a losing symbol.

(b3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and has been fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). When the time elapses, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed. The volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are as described in FIG. 127, and in FIG. The difference is that the display is erased. In the variable standby state, the display of the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are executed again on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the setting of the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment is completed. can be configured to In addition, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are displayed at the timing prior to the first swing action during the variable standby state in FIG. 177 (d3) and the standby movie in FIG. Without the need to operate the cross button SB-2, {in the variable standby state, the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped when the design is lost (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, it can be displayed in }.

In (c3), the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed in the variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed without any operation after the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed. Then, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are deleted. The volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display may be continued until the standby movie is displayed, and the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display may be deleted when the standby movie is displayed. good. In addition, if it is a variable standby state after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed without any operation after the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed, the volume will be adjusted until a new variation starts. The display of the adjustment screen and the display of the light amount adjustment screen may be continued, and the display of the volume adjustment screen and the display of the light amount adjustment screen may be erased when a new change is started.

(d3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and has been fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After that, the first shaking action (second shaking motion) during the variable standby state is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The first swinging action during this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and an action of swinging only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is exemplified. The first swing action during the variable standby state is an example of swinging only the first element of the first decorative symbol, but if it is an action different from swing action 1 or swing action 2, how can it be performed? can be any action. In addition, in the variable standby state, a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and the determination is stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). However, the condition is that a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment setting was completed in the variable standby state. The first swing action during the variable standby state may be executed immediately. Also, in this case, the first decorative pattern is a lost pattern and is fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed) for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, or a variable standby state) 20 seconds, which is the same as the time when the first shaking action starts), the number as the second element may be erased and only the character as the first element may be displayed. By doing so, the first shaking action during the variable standby state will be performed while only the character is displayed. Note that the first shake action during this variable standby state may be performed before the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display of (n) are executed, but this shake action may be performed at any timing. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment can be set even while the shaking action is being executed, and even if the volume adjustment or light amount adjustment is set, the shaking action continues without ending. Also, the first shaking action during the variable standby state is an action that can be started at a timing earlier than the standby movie of (e3) in FIG. 177 .

(e3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and has been fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). When the time elapses, the standby movie is executed. This waiting movie, as shown in FIG. 177, is executed after the first shaking action in the variable waiting state, and includes part of the ready-to-win effect. , a second pending display on the first main game side, a second pending display on the second main game side, a character as the first element included in the standby movie, and information display related to the character ("1", Alphabetic information such as the number "7" and "super") is displayed, and the process is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses. In addition, if a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. display. Also, at the timing of executing the standby movie in (e3), a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed. It is preferable to display it superimposed on the middle movie. If a button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed during execution of the power saving display, the power saving display is terminated and only the standby movie is displayed. Then, when the button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed again, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. It is configured. In other words, the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed unless the button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed twice while the power saving display is being executed. . The second decoration pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie. The size relationship is as follows: 2nd decorative pattern > 2nd pending display on the 1st main game side = 2nd pending display on the 2nd main game side > information display related to the character as the 1st element included in the waiting movie By structuring that the second decorative pattern is stopped in the lost pattern and the number of reservations is 0, which is easier to see than the information display related to the character as the first element, it is related to the game. Symbols related to the game and pending display (numbers) can be emphasized and displayed to the player rather than the information of the waiting movie.

The waiting movie of (e3) in FIG. 177 includes a second decorative symbol, a second pending display on the first main game side, a second pending display on the second main game side, and a first display included in the waiting movie. An example of displaying characters as elements and information display related to the characters (numbers "1" and "7", alphabet information such as "super", etc.) was given, but the display is as follows. good too.
(1) In the standby movie in which the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixed and stopped, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the standby movie, and information related to the character are displayed ( numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed.
(2) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped with the missing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie A character as a first element to be included and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", information of alphabets such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and the second decorative pattern is not displayed.
(3) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped with the missing pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" or "7 ” and alphabetical information such as “super”) are displayed, and the second decorative symbols, the second pending display on the first main game side, and the second pending display on the second main game side are not displayed.

(f3) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed since the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and has been fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After that, the second shaking action during the variable standby state (second shaking action). ) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The second swinging action during this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and an action of swinging only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is exemplified. It should be noted that the second shaking action during the variable standby state, like the first shaking action during the variable standby state, was exemplified by shaking only the first element of the first decorative symbol. Any action can be used as long as it is different from action 2. Note that the second shaking action during the variable standby state may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the settings for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are completed. . It should be noted that the second shaking action during this variable standby state may start immediately after the standby movie ends. In addition, the second shaking action during this variable standby state is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but the shaking action will continue until the next (second) waiting movie is displayed. may In this case, (a3) → (b3) → (c3) → (d3) → (e3) first waiting movie → (f3) second shaking action → second waiting movie → third It may be configured such that the shaking action→waiting movie is looped so that the shaking action . . . Also, as described above, the first decorative pattern is a losing pattern and is fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed) for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, or during the variable standby state) 20 seconds, which is the same as the time when the first shaking action starts), the number as the second element is erased and only the character as the first element is displayed. When starting the second shaking action immediately after the end of the movie, it is possible to display the first decorative pattern with only the first element immediately after the end of the second waiting movie. Immediately after the end of , the display mode may be returned to the display mode of the first decorative pattern consisting of the first element and the second element. Also, the waiting movie and the shaking action of the variable waiting state may be executed at the same time. In this case, by setting the display priority of the standby movie higher than the shaking action in the variable standby state and configuring the standby movie to be transparent, the shaking action in the variable standby state can be seen behind the standby movie. is configured to be If the standby movie is not transparent, only the standby movie can be seen, but behind the scenes, the shaking action of the variable standby state is executed.

(a4) is the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot ends, or immediately after the start of the time-reduced game state). It shows the timing at which "777" or the like is displayed as the jackpot symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, which is a non-existing situation. In addition, in the time reduction game state, the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are only "numbers". However, "numbers + characters" may be used only for the first decorative pattern of a specific type (for example, "numbers + characters" only for 7 patterns and 3 patterns, and only "numbers" for other first decorative patterns ). Neither the first pending display on the first main game side nor the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed as "0". It is in a variable standby state in which there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side. In (a4), the display mode of the first decorative pattern and the display mode of the second decorative pattern are configured to be only "numbers" in the time reduction game state, but (a4) is a specific production stage. , the display mode of the first decorative design and the display mode of the second decorative design are applicable even if they are configured to be only "numbers". Moreover, in this way, the third element may be added to the display mode of the first decorative pattern such as "numbers only" or "numbers + characters". For example, in the case of only "numbers", "numbers+effects" may be used, and in the case of "numbers+characters", "numbers+characters+effects" may be used.

Although not shown, (b4) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot end, or immediately after the start of the time reduction game state). After elapses, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed. Although not shown, "711" of the first decorative design and the second decorative design of the display of the losing design in (b3) becomes "777" of the first decorative design and the second decorative design of the display of the big hit design. is different.

In (c4), although not shown, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed in the variable standby state, and after the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are executed, there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, , 10 seconds), the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display are cleared. Although not shown, "711" of the first decorative design and the second decorative design of the display of the losing design of (c3) becomes "777" of the first decorative design and the second decorative design of the display of the big hit design. is different.

Although not shown, (d4) is a variable standby state, and a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) from the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot end, or immediately after the start of the time reduction game state). , the first shaking action (second shaking motion) during the variable standby state is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Although not shown, "711" of the first decorative design and the second decorative design of the display of the losing design of (d3) becomes "777" of the first decorative design and the second decorative design of the display of the big hit design. is different. The first shaking action in the variable standby state is configured so that the shaking action is executed in the variable standby state in the non-reduced time game state, but not in the variable standby state in the reduced time game state. You may

(e4) is after the end of the special game (big win game), in the variable standby state, and the end timing of the end of the big win (or the end timing of the end of the big win demo, immediately after the end of the big win, or immediately after the start of the time reduction game state). After a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed, the standby movie is executed. The standby movie includes a part of the ready-to-win effect, and the standby movie includes a second decorative symbol, a second hold display on the first main game side, and a second hold on the second main game side. Display, character as the first element included in the waiting movie and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.), number of executions of special games Display of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of the number of profits obtained in a special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of the number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") It is displayed and executed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses. In addition, if a button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. display. Also, when the standby movie is executed, a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed. In this case, the "power saving" image object with a higher display priority than the standby movie It is preferable to display them in an overlapping manner. If a button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed during execution of the power saving display, the power saving display is terminated and only the standby movie is displayed. Then, when the button operation related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment (operation of the cross button SB-2) is performed again, the display of the standby movie is ended and the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. It is configured. In other words, the volume adjustment screen or the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed unless the button operation (operation of the cross button SB-2) related to volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is performed twice while the power saving display is being executed. . The second decoration pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, the information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and the continuous The size relationship between the manor display, profit number display, and executable number display is as follows: executable number display > consecutive manor display > profit number display > second decoration pattern > second reserved display on the first main game side = second main game Second pending display on the side> Information display related to the character as the first element included in the waiting movie, and that the second decorative symbol is stopped with the missing symbol and the pending number is 0. is configured to be easier to see than the information display related to the character as the first element, so that the symbols and pending display (numbers) related to the game are displayed more easily than the information of the waiting movie unrelated to the game. It is possible to emphasize and display to the person.

The waiting movie of (e4) in FIG. 177 includes a second decorative symbol, a second pending display on the first main game side, a second pending display on the second main game side, and a first display included in the waiting movie. A character as an element and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabet information such as "super", etc.), consecutive game display (for example, "three consecutive Sho"), display of the number of profits obtained in the special game (for example, "GET 7200"), display of the number of times that the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 remaining times"). can be displayed as
(1) In the standby movie in which the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixed and stopped, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the standby movie, and information related to the character are displayed ( Numbers such as “1” and “7”, alphabet information such as “super”, etc.), consecutive game display that is the number of times a special game has been executed (for example, “3 consecutive games”), display of the number of profits earned in special games ( For example, "GET7200)", a display of the number of times that the time-reduced game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") is displayed, and a second pending display on the first main game side and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. is not displayed.
(2) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped with the missing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie Character as the first element to be included and information display related to the character (numbers “1” and “7”, alphabetical information such as “super”, etc.), display of consecutive games that is the number of executions of special games (for example , "Triple House"), the number of profits obtained in the special game (for example, "GET 7200"), and the display of the number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (for example, "100 remaining times") are displayed, and the second decoration pattern is displayed. is not displayed.
(3) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped with the missing pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" or "7 ” and alphabetical information such as “super”), display of the number of special games executed (for example, “Triple”), display of the number of profits obtained in the special game (for example, “GET 7200)” , a display of the number of times the time-reduction game state can be executed (for example, "100 remaining times") is displayed, and a second decoration symbol, a second pending display on the first main game side, and a second pending display on the second main game side are displayed. is not displayed.
(4) In the standby movie in which the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol and is fixed and stopped, the second decorative symbol, the character as the first element included in the standby movie, and information related to the character are displayed ( numbers "1" and "7", alphabetical information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the execution of the special game Display of number of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of number of profits obtained in special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of possible number of times of shortened game state (for example, "100 times remaining") is not displayed.
(5) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped with the missing symbol, the second pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the second main game side, and the waiting movie A character as a first element to be included and information display related to the character (numbers "1" and "7", alphabet information such as "super", etc.) are displayed, and a second decorative pattern and a special game are executed. Display of number of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of number of profits obtained in special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of possible number of times of shortened game state (for example, "100 times remaining") is not displayed.
(6) In the waiting movie in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped with the missing pattern, the character as the first element included in the waiting movie and the information display related to the character ("1" or "7 ” and alphabetical information such as “super”) are displayed, the second decorative pattern, the second pending display on the first main game side, the second pending display on the second main game side, and the number of times the special game is executed Display of consecutive games (for example, "3 consecutive games"), display of the number of profits obtained in the special game (for example, "GET7200"), display of the number of times the time-saving game state can be executed (for example, "100 times remaining") are Do not show.
In addition, in the situations (a4) to (d4) and (f4) of FIG. 177 (situation where the standby movie is not displayed), although not shown, a right-handed instruction display is displayed, and (e4) (situation in which the standby movie is displayed), the right-hand hitting instruction display may be configured not to be displayed (switched to non-display). In this configuration, even when (e4) in FIG. 177 is displayed as in (1) to (6) above, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed (switched to non-display). good too. In addition, in the situations (a4) to (d4) and (f4) of FIG. 177 (situation where the standby movie is not displayed), although not shown, a right-handed instruction display is displayed, and (e4) (a situation in which a standby movie is displayed), the right-hand hitting instruction display may be displayed (continued display). When configured in this manner, even when (e4) in FIG. 177 is displayed as in (1) to (6) above, the right-handed instruction display is configured to be displayed (continuously displayed). may

(f4) of FIG. 177 is a variable standby state, and when a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses from the jackpot end timing (or the jackpot end demo end timing, immediately after the jackpot end, or immediately after the start of the time reduction game state). , the second shaking action during the variable standby state (the second shaking action). However, it may also be called a third shaking motion.) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The second swinging action during this variable standby state is a state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and an action of swinging only the character as the first element of the first decorative pattern is exemplified. It should be noted that the second shaking action during the variable standby state, like the first shaking action during the variable standby state, was exemplified by shaking only the first element of the first decorative symbol. Any action can be used as long as it is different from action 2. Note that the second shaking action during the variable standby state may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed after the settings for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are completed. . In addition, the second swing action during the variable standby state is configured so that the swing action is executed in the variable standby state in the non-reduced time game state, but not in the variable standby state in the reduced time game state. You may

The second shake action during the variable standby state shown in (f4) of FIG. 177 may start immediately after the standby movie ends. In addition, the second shaking action during this variable standby state is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but the shaking action will continue until the next (second) waiting movie is displayed. may In this case, (a4) → (b4) → (c4) → (d4) → (e4) first waiting movie → (f4) second shake action → second waiting movie → third It may be configured such that the shaking action→waiting movie is looped so that the shaking action . . . Also, when the second shaking action is started immediately after the end of the standby movie, and the first decorative pattern mode for executing the shaking action is that the number as the second element is deleted and the character as the first element When only is displayed, only the first element may be displayed immediately after the second standby movie ends. Also, the waiting movie and the shaking action of the variable waiting state may be executed at the same time. In this case, by setting the display priority of the standby movie higher than the shaking action in the variable standby state and configuring the standby movie to be transparent, the shaking action in the variable standby state can be seen behind the standby movie. is configured to be In addition, when the standby movie is not transparent, only the standby movie can be seen, but behind the scenes, the shaking action of the variable standby state is executed.

Next, FIG. 178 shows the overlapping relationship between the first decoration symbols of the left and right columns and the first decoration symbols of the middle row in the normal symbol fluctuation on the first main game side and the reach fluctuation in the non-time shortening game state. It is an image diagram showing. First, in the normal pattern fluctuation, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are changed to the first decorative pattern in the middle row and the first overlapping area at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of shaking fluctuation). , but the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are configured so as not to overlap each other. Also, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation), for the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, predetermined timing , during swing fluctuation), the first decorative patterns in the middle row overlap in the second overlapping area, but the first decorative patterns in the left and right rows are configured so as not to overlap each other. Here, as illustrated, the specific pattern variation (for example, the reach variation) is more important than the normal pattern variation in the area where the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns overlap the first decorative pattern in the middle row. Overlap ratio, which is a ratio (= overlapping area where the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern in the middle row overlap / the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern in the middle row Display area of the decorative pattern) is configured to be large (first overlapping area<second overlapping area). In addition, the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) has more timings at which the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns overlap the first decorative symbols in the middle row than in the normal symbol variation. Here, as shown in the figure, the second overlapping area in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) is configured to differ according to the type of predetermined timing, and at the start of variation (action at the start of variation) , the overlap ratio (or overlap area) is larger than when the pattern feed fluctuation in the middle row of the reach, and the overlap ratio (or overlap area) is higher during the decision action or swing fluctuation than at the start of fluctuation (action at the start of fluctuation). or overlap region) is large. At a predetermined timing, an action (for example, an action at the start of fluctuation, a swinging action, a tenpai action, a deciding action) occurs, and the first decorative pattern on the left and right columns and the first decorative pattern on the middle row are card types. The first elements of the image objects (which may be character-type image objects) overlap each other, but the second elements of the number image objects do not overlap each other. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this manner, the character as the first element is permitted to overlap adjacent characters in order to give a feeling of dynamism, while a jackpot mode such as which number will stop is allowed. By configuring the number as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it will be the same so as not to overlap, while diversifying the movement of the first decorative pattern itself, it is the original purpose of the first decorative pattern, which is a big hit. It is possible not to deviate from the role of notifying whether it is a failure. However, in the situation where the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element is displayed (for example, during the fluctuation start action, during the tenpai action, during the shaking action, etc.), the first It is appropriate to configure the elements so that they overlap each other and the second elements do not overlap each other. In the displayed situation, the timing may be such that the second elements overlap each other (for example, it is the timing before returning to the normal background and performing the decision action, and during the super reach effect, "777" display timing, etc.). In addition, in the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element, the first elements overlap and the second elements do not overlap, but not limited to this, the first elements also overlap However, the second elements may also overlap each other, and in such a case, the overlap ratio between the first elements (= the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first decoration in the middle row Overlapping area where the first element of the pattern overlaps / display area of the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row) and the second element Overlapping ratio (= Overlapping area where the second element of the first decorative pattern in the left and right columns and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row overlap/The number of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns display area of the second element and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the middle row), in particular, the overlapping ratio between the first elements can be made larger than the overlapping ratio between the second elements. preferred. In addition, it is not limited to the normal pattern fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, and the non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of. In addition, in the time-reduced gaming state and the specific production mode, unlike the non-time-reduced game state and the predetermined production mode other than the specific production mode, the constituent elements of the first decorative pattern are super ready-to-win production and battle ready-to-win production. The second element may be used without the first element, and if configured in this way, in a time-reduced game state or in a specific production mode, predetermined timings (at the time of fluctuation start action, shaking action, tenpai action time, decision action, etc.), the second elements may overlap each other. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is possible to hold the trigger of the look-ahead effect as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. It is clear that

In FIG. 178, in a situation where the first decorative symbols on the left and right columns are tense when the middle row symbol is sent in the reach fluctuation, the first decorative symbols on the left and right columns are the first decorative symbols on the middle row. Although the display priority is higher than the decorative design, the first decorative design in the middle row may have a higher display priority than the first decorative designs in the right and left columns. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the first decorative symbols in the middle row will result in a big winning symbol combination (whether double eyes). In addition, FIG. 178 shows that when the first decorative patterns on the left and right columns are tense in reach fluctuation, the first decorative patterns on the left and right columns are expanded, and then the first decorative patterns on the middle row are on the left and on the right. This is an example in which scrolling is performed in a size smaller than the first decorative pattern in the row, but in addition to this example, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns do not expand or shrink during tenpai, and then the middle row may be enlarged and displayed in a larger size than the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns while overlapping the first elements of the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns. In that case, it is preferable to make the first decorative pattern in the middle row have a higher display priority than the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns so that the first decorative pattern in the middle row is given attention, but the left and right The first decorative pattern in the row may have a higher display priority than the first decorative pattern in the middle row. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the first decorative pattern does not scale, or is difficult to scale, in normal pattern fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations) compared to reach fluctuations. In addition, in normal pattern fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns are the first decorative pattern in the middle row and the first may be configured so that they do not overlap in the overlap region of .

In addition, in the normal pattern fluctuation, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns overlap the first decorative pattern in the middle row with a predetermined action (for example, action at the start of fluctuation, shaking action, etc.) In a specific pattern variation (e.g., reach variation) than the first time overlapping in the area, the first decorative patterns in the left and right columns perform predetermined actions (e.g., action at the start of variation, shaking action, deciding action etc.), the second time overlapping in the second overlapping area with the first decorative pattern in the middle row is configured to be longer (first time<second time). In such a reach variation with a high expectation of a big hit, by making the time during which the first decorative symbols of the left and right columns overlap with the first decorative symbols of the middle row longer than the normal symbol variation, the first decoration is obtained. While diversifying the movement of the pattern itself, the player can be made to pay attention to each action.

Also, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation), for the first decorative pattern in the left column, a predetermined action (for example, action at the start of variation, tenpai action, shaking action, decision action, etc.) It may overlap with the first decorative design. In this case, in the normal pattern fluctuation, the first decorative pattern in the left column is combined with the first decorative pattern in the right column by a predetermined action (for example, action at the start of fluctuation, tenpai action, shaking action, deciding action, etc.). , is configured to overlap (overlap) in the third overlapping area, and in a specific pattern variation (eg, reach variation), the first decorative pattern in the left column has a predetermined action (eg, variation start Time action, tenpai action, shaking action, deciding action, etc.) are configured to overlap the first decorative pattern in the right column in the fourth overlapping area. A specific pattern variation (for example, a reach variation) is a ratio of the area where the first decorative pattern in the left column overlaps the first decorative pattern in the right column (= the first Overlapping area where 1 decorative pattern and first decorative pattern in right column overlap/display area of first decorative pattern in left column and first decorative pattern in right column) is large (third overlapping region < first 4 overlapping regions). In addition, the specific symbol variation (for example, reach variation) has more timings at which the first decorative symbol in the left column overlaps the first decorative symbol in the right column than the normal symbol variation. Here, the fourth overlap region in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) is configured to differ according to a predetermined action, and the action at the start of variation is the middle row of reach at the time of symbol feeding variation. The overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger than that during the swing action, and the overlapping ratio (or overlapping area) is larger for the decision action, swing action, etc. than for the action at the start of fluctuation. However, in a situation where the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element is displayed (for example, during the fluctuation start action, during the tenpai action, during the shaking action, etc.), the first decoration pattern in the left column The first element of the decorative pattern and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap, and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the second element of the first decorative pattern in the right column do not overlap. However, for example, in a situation where the first decorative pattern composed of the second element without the first element is displayed during the super reach production or the battle reach production, the second elements You may provide an action that overlaps (for example, a decision action, etc.). In addition, in the first decorative pattern composed of the first element and the second element, the first elements overlap and the second elements do not overlap, but not limited to this, the first elements also overlap However, the second elements may also overlap each other, and in such a case, the overlap ratio between the first elements (= the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column) Overlapping area where one element overlaps/display area of the first element of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first element of the first decorative pattern in the right column) and the overlap ratio between the second element (= left column Overlapping area where the second element of the first decorative pattern of and the second element of the first decorative pattern of the right column overlap / The second element of the first decorative pattern of the left column and the first decorative pattern of the right column It is preferable to make the overlap ratio between the first elements larger than the overlap ratio between the second elements. In addition, it is not limited to the normal pattern fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, and the non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of. In addition, in the time-reduced gaming state and the specific production mode, unlike the non-time-reduced game state and the predetermined production mode other than the specific production mode, the constituent elements of the first decorative pattern are super ready-to-win production and battle ready-to-win production. It is also possible to use the second element without the first element, and in the case of such a configuration, in the time-reduced game state or in a specific production mode, predetermined actions (variation start action, shaking action, tenpai action, decision actions, etc.), the second elements may overlap each other. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is possible to hold the trigger of the look-ahead effect as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. It is clear that In addition, the specific design variation (for example, reach variation) is more than the normal design variation, the time when the first decorative design of the left column and the first decorative design of the right column overlap in the third overlapping area, In the fourth overlapping area, the time during which the first decorative pattern in the left column overlaps with the first decorative pattern in the right column is configured to be longer. Note that the first elements of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first elements of the card-shaped image objects (or character-shaped image objects may be used) of the first decorative pattern in the right column overlap each other, but the second elements of the number image objects It is preferable that they are configured so as not to overlap each other. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this manner, the character as the first element is permitted to overlap adjacent characters in order to give a feeling of dynamism, while a jackpot mode such as which number will stop is allowed. By configuring the number as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it will be the same so as not to overlap, while diversifying the movement of the first decorative pattern itself, it is the original purpose of the first decorative pattern, which is a big hit. It is possible not to deviate from the role of notifying whether it is a failure. In addition, in the reach fluctuation with high expectation of a big hit, the time during which the first decorative pattern in the left column overlaps with the first decorative pattern in the right column is made longer than the normal pattern fluctuation, so that the player can watch each action. can be made In addition, in FIG. 178, at the time of start of fluctuation, at the time of shaking fluctuation, at the time of change in pattern feeding in the middle row of the reach, and at the time of the final action, the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns overlap the first decorative symbols in the middle row. Examples have been shown, but at times other than these timings (including the timing of confirmation stop), the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns may overlap the first decorative symbols in the middle row (for example, confirmation duplication in a stopped state) and may not be duplicated.

In addition, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, a predetermined timing (for example, Figure 168, Figure 173 to Figure 176, Figure 178 As shown in , a tenpai action 2 is performed using the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns, and then the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are shaken and fluctuated while tempering ( 178 (at the time of pattern feed fluctuation in the middle row of the reach), the timing when the first decorative pattern in the middle row is enlarged and displayed fluctuating downward) is for a predetermined production that continues the fluctuating display The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may be a character-shaped image object) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern row (for example, the middle row) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action 2 is executed. The first element of the card-type image object (which may be a character-type image object) of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the production pattern rows other than the predetermined production pattern rows (for example, the left row and the right row) It is configured to overlap (overlap) in a second overlap region. In addition, in the normal symbol variation in which the non-reach state is formed on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, a predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 178) when the non-reach state is formed , the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action is being executed. At the timing of temporary stop display with the execution of the fixed position action 3), the first display corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) that is temporarily stopped and displayed and the fixed position action 3 is performed The first element of the decorative design card-type image object (character-type image object may also be used), and other than the predetermined production design row that is temporarily stopped and is performing the shaking action (for example, the left row, The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may be a character-shaped image object) of the first decorative design corresponding to the production design row shown in the right column) overlaps (overlaps) in the first overlapping area. It is Then, the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that continues the variable display at a predetermined timing when the reach state in a specific pattern fluctuation (for example, reach fluctuation) is formed, and provisionally The second overlap region where the first elements of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the left and right columns that are stopped and are performing the shake action 2 overlap (overlap) are more likely to be non-uniform in the normal symbol variation. The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that performs the temporary stop display and performs the fixed position action 3 at the predetermined timing when the ready-to-reach state is formed, and the temporary stop display and the shaking action. The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the left and right columns being executed is larger than the first overlapping area (second overlapping area > first overlapping area) It is In other words, the specific pattern variation (for example, the reach variation) has a larger ratio (overlapping ratio) of the area where the first elements of the first decorative pattern overlap than the normal pattern variation (the second overlap area > first overlapping area). At a predetermined timing, the first elements of the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols in the middle row overlap each other, but the second elements do not overlap each other. When adding movement to the first decorative pattern in this manner, the character as the first element is permitted to overlap adjacent characters in order to give a feeling of dynamism, while a jackpot mode such as which number will stop is allowed. By configuring the number as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it will be the same so as not to overlap, while diversifying the movement of the first decorative pattern itself, it is the original purpose of the first decorative pattern, which is a big hit. It is possible not to deviate from the role of notifying whether it is a failure. In addition, it is not limited to the normal pattern fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, and the non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is possible to hold the trigger of the look-ahead effect as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. It is clear that

In addition, in a specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, a predetermined timing (for example, Figure 168, Figure 173 to Figure 176, Figure 178 As shown in , a tenpai action 2 is performed using the left and right first decorative symbols, and then the left and right first decorative symbols are shaking and fluctuating while tenpai. , the timing when the first decorative symbols in the middle row are enlarged and variably displayed downward), the first decoration corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) that continues to be variably displayed. The first element of the card-shaped image object (which may be a character-shaped image object) of the pattern, and the predetermined effect pattern row other than the one that is temporarily stopped and the shaking action 2 is being executed (for example, the left row, right column) overlaps (overlaps) with the first element of the card-type image object (or character-type image object) of the first decorative design corresponding to the performance design row in the second overlapping area for the fifth time. ) is configured as In addition, in the normal symbol variation in which the non-reach state is formed on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, a predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 178) when the non-reach state is formed , the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the shaking action is being executed. At the timing of temporary stop display with the execution of the fixed position action 3), the first display corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row (for example, the middle row) that is temporarily stopped and displayed and the fixed position action 3 is performed The first element of the decorative design card-type image object (character-type image object may also be used), and other than the predetermined production design row that is temporarily stopped and is performing the shaking action (for example, the left row, right column) overlaps (overlaps) with the first element of the card-type image object (or character-type image object) of the first decorative design corresponding to the performance design row in the first overlapping area for the sixth time. ) is configured as Then, the first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that continues the variable display at a predetermined timing when the reach state in a specific pattern fluctuation (for example, reach fluctuation) is formed, and provisionally The fifth time when the first element of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the left column and the right column that are stopped and are performing the shaking action 2 overlap (overlap) is more non-reach in the normal symbol fluctuation The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the middle row that performs the temporary stop display and the fixed position action 3, and the temporary stop display and the shaking action are executed at the predetermined timing when the state is formed. The first element of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the left column and the right column are configured to be longer than the sixth time (overlapping) (fifth time>sixth time). In other words, the specific pattern variation (for example, reach variation) has a higher ratio of time when the first elements of the first decorative pattern overlap (overlapping ratio) than the normal pattern variation (the first elements are overlapping time is long) is configured (5th time > 6th time). At a predetermined timing, the first elements of the first decorative symbols in the left and right columns and the first decorative symbols in the middle row overlap each other, but the second elements do not overlap each other. In such a reach variation with a high expectation of a big hit, by making the time during which the first decorative symbols of the left and right columns overlap with the first decorative symbols of the middle row longer than the normal symbol variation, the first decoration is obtained. While diversifying the movement of the pattern itself, the player can be made to pay attention to each action. In addition, it is not limited to the normal pattern fluctuation and reach fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, and the non-reach production, normal reach production, super reach production, and battle reach production shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 It may be a reach variation that performs the first half and the second half of. It should be noted that, in the case of targeting reach fluctuations that perform the first and second halves of the super reach effect of losing and the battle reach effect, it is possible to hold the trigger of the look-ahead effect as a variation mode group of group 2 and group 3 shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. It is clear that

Next, FIG. 179 shows, in a non-time-reduced gaming state, a fixed position action when executing a chance look-ahead effect with a first decorative pattern corresponding to a pattern variation of the first main game pattern (a production mode of the chance look-ahead effect ) is an image diagram showing. The performance mode of the chance-read-ahead performance is a performance mode in which color effects such as red, green, and blue are added as the third element to the first decorative pattern when the fixed-position action is executed. Further, as a fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is executed, an action of enlarging the first decorative pattern more than the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped as described above may also be executed. , In this case, the enlargement action is performed when the chance look-ahead effect is not performed, such as expanding the first decorative pattern more than the fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is not performed, or expanding while rotating. It is desirable to differentiate from the positional action aspect. First, in (a) of FIG. 179, in the non-time-reduced game state, the hold on the first main game side is 2, the hold on the second main game side is 0, and the effect display device SG shows the first decorative symbol. The second decorative symbol is determined and stopped at "711", which is the missing symbol. In the non-reduced time gaming state, the display mode of the first decorative symbols is "numbers + characters", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols is "numbers only". Two first pending displays on the first main game side are displayed, and the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "2", the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "0", and the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed. Hold 2 shows a trigger hold. Here, from FIG. 179 onward, in order to make it easier to understand whether the trigger is on hold or not, the first hold display that is not the trigger hold is indicated by "●", and the first hold display that is the trigger hold is indicated by "▲". However, in the actual first pending display, (1) the first pending display in the same display mode regardless of trigger pending or not trigger pending, for example, may be all "●", (2) As shown in the figure, "▴" may be used instead of "" so as to clearly indicate to the player that the trigger is pending ("●" if the trigger is not pending). In such a configuration, it may be determined by lottery whether to display the pending trigger as shown in (1) or as shown in (2) when trigger pending occurs. In this case, (b) perform a loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, and add a blue color effect in addition to the fixed position action 1 of the first decorative pattern of "1" in the left column (for example, in addition to the enlargement action Effect mode of chance look-ahead effect) is executed. In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation modes of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. Next, (c) the fixed position action 2 of the first decorative pattern of "7" in the right column (for example, the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is executed, and then , (d) Execute the fixed-position action 3 of the first decorative symbol of "1" in the middle row (for example, a chance-read-ahead effect of adding a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action). In addition, in (d), an example is shown in which the fixed position action 3 (for example, the production mode of the chance look-ahead production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the expansion action) is executed only for the first decorative pattern in the middle row. However, at the timing of (d), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns may simultaneously execute the blue color effect chance look-ahead effect, in which case the blue color effect is not involved. For normal fixed position actions (actions that enlarge the first decorative pattern), the left column is executed at the timing of (b), the middle column is executed at the timing of (c), and the left column is executed at (d). The blue color effect may be added at the same time to the first decoration symbols of the left, middle, and right columns which are executed at the timing of (d) and temporarily stopped at the timing of (d). In addition, it may be a time-reduced game state instead of a non-time-reduced game state, and it may correspond to a pattern change of a second main game pattern rather than a pattern change of a first decorative pattern corresponding to a pattern change of a first main game pattern. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol.

Next, (e) of FIG. 179 is a state different from (a) to (d) of FIG. The hold on the main game side is 0, and the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern on the effect display device SG are fixed and stopped at "711", which is the missing pattern. Four first pending displays are displayed on the first main game side, and the first pending display on the second main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "4", the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "0", and the first pending display on the first main game side is displayed. Hold 4 indicates a trigger hold. In this case, (f) a fixed position action 4 (for example, left row, middle row, When the first decorative patterns in the right row temporarily stop at the same time, the first decorative patterns in each row perform an enlargement action at the same time, and the first decorative patterns in each row are simultaneously added with a blue color effect. production mode) is executed. In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation modes a1 to a4 shown in FIG. In this way, in the non-time-reduced game state, the occurrence timing of the fixed-position action and the chronological flow differ according to the variation time of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols ( The production mode of the chance look-ahead production is different). Note that even if the production mode of the same blue color effect as the chance look-ahead production appears, in the situation where the trigger hold exists on the first main game side, the hold that is digested prior to the trigger hold is hold 4. → If it is a variation of 3, the variation time is 5 seconds. Due to the variation, all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows temporarily stop at the same time, and the left row and middle row are fixed position actions 4. At the same time, the first decoration pattern in the right column performs an enlargement action and adds a blue color effect. If the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds. , fixed-position action 2, and fixed-position action 3 in that order, and a blue color effect is added in that order. , the magnify actions in that order, but the blue color effect can be done at the same time). Further, even if the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect with the same combination of the first decorative symbols (for example, "117") appears, the trigger is suspended under the condition that the trigger is suspended on the first main game side. If the hold that is digested before is the change of hold 4 → 3, the change time is 5 seconds. As a fixed position action 4, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform the enlargement action and add a blue color effect to execute the performance mode of the chance look-ahead performance, but the first main game side If the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds. In the order of columns, that is, in the order of positional action 1, positional action 2, and positional action 3, enlargement actions are performed, and a blue color effect is added in that order. (or, as noted above, the magnifying actions can be done in that order, but the blue tint effect can be done at the same time). In other words, it is the same type of chance-reading effect (combination of the same color effect and the same first decorative pattern), but the timing of occurrence of fixed-position actions and the chronological flow are different (the appearance of the chance-reading effect is different). is configured as So far, an example has been shown in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance-read-ahead effect is performed by adding a blue color effect. A green or red color effect may be added instead of the color effect of . The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when executing the look-ahead effect for the first chance, the hold that is digested earlier than the trigger hold is held 4 → 3, and the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneously expanded as a fixed position action. A performance mode of a chance look-ahead performance is executed in which an action is taken and a blue color effect is added. In the next hold 3 → 2 change, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform an enlargement action and add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production. do. Furthermore, in the next change from hold 2 to 1, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform enlargement actions at the same time, and a red color effect is added. Execute. Furthermore, in the next hold 2 → 1 change, the left column, the middle column, and the right column are performed as the fixed position actions, that is, the expansion actions are performed in the order of fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3. And, in that order, a performance mode of a chance look-ahead performance for adding a red color effect is executed. In such an anticipation of chance production, as the hold is digested, the color effect changes from blue (low expectation of winning) to green (medium expectation of winning), and further to green (high expectation of winning). It is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the color effect progresses, so that the color effect changes from medium degree) to red color effect (high degree of expectation for winning).

Next, FIG. 180 shows a fixed-position action (performance mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) corresponding to the trigger suspension when executing the chance-read-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the first main game symbols. It is an image diagram showing. The performance mode of the chance-read-ahead performance is a performance mode in which color effects such as red, green, and blue are added as the third element to the first decorative pattern when the fixed-position action is executed. Further, as a fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is executed, an action of enlarging the first decorative pattern more than the first decorative pattern when the losing pattern is fixed and stopped as described above may also be executed. , In this case, the enlargement action is performed when the chance look-ahead effect is not performed, such as expanding the first decorative pattern more than the fixed position action when the chance look-ahead effect is not performed, or expanding while rotating. It is desirable to differentiate from the positional action aspect. First, in (a) of FIG. 180, in the non-time-reduced game state, there is no hold on the first main game side or the second main game side hold is 0, and the effect display device SG shows the second The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of one main game symbol indicate that the symbol is being varied. Then, (b) when four holdings on the first main game side occur during the symbol variation, (c) in the next variation after the symbol variation has stopped, a losing variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the left column , middle row, and right row of the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same time fixed position action 4 (for example, when the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns Execution mode of a chance look-ahead effect that adds a blue color effect). In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation modes a1 to a4 shown in FIG. This fixed position action 4 may be the same action as shown in (f) of FIG. 179, or may be a different action. In addition, it may be a time-reduced game state instead of a non-time-reduced game state, and it may correspond to a pattern change of a second main game pattern rather than a pattern change of a first decorative pattern corresponding to a pattern change of a first main game pattern. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol.

In addition, (d) when two holdings on the first main game side occur during symbol variation, (e) in the next variation after the symbol variation has stopped, a losing variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is executed, and that variation , the fixed-position action 1 (for example, an expansion action and a blue color effect are added in addition to the enlargement action) is executed in the first decorative pattern in the left column. In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 10 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation modes of a1 to a4 shown in FIG. Next, (f) the fixed position action 2 of the symbol "7" in the first decorative symbol in the right column (for example, the production mode of the chance look-ahead production that adds a blue color effect in addition to the enlargement action) is executed. Then, (g) the first decoration pattern in the middle row is a fixed position action 3 (for example, in addition to the expansion action, a blue color effect is added to create a chance look-ahead effect mode). Note that the fixed-position actions 1, 2, and 3 may be the same actions as those shown in (b), (c), and (d) of FIG. 179, or may be different actions. In addition, at the timing of (g), the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns may simultaneously execute the blue color effect chance look-ahead effect, in which case the blue color effect is not involved. For normal fixed position actions (actions that enlarge the first decorative pattern), the left column is executed at the timing of (e), the right column is executed at the timing of (f), and the middle row is executed at the timing of (g). The blue color effect may be added simultaneously to the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns which are executed at the timing of (g) and temporarily stopped at the timing of (g).

In this way, when a trigger hold is caused by entering a ball into the starting hole during pattern fluctuation under a situation where neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side exists, this pattern Depending on whether or not there is a hold that is digested prior to the trigger hold during the variation, and/or depending on how many holds are digested prior to the trigger hold during the pattern variation , fixed-position actions (production mode of chance-read-ahead production) are configured to be different. By constructing in this way, the player is allowed to select whether or not to save the hold at the timing when the player recognizes or guesses that the trigger hold has occurred when executing the chance look-ahead performance using the first decoration pattern. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as giving a difference to the subsequent performance mode. In addition, even if the production mode of the chance look-ahead production of the same blue color effect appears, it will be started during the pattern fluctuation in the situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side. A trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the mouth, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 4 → 3, the change time is 5 seconds. All the first decorative patterns in the row and right column are temporarily stopped at the same time, and as a fixed position action 4, the first decorative patterns in the left, middle and right rows simultaneously perform the enlargement action and have a chance to add a blue color effect. The effect mode of anticipation effect is executed, but trigger suspension is triggered by the entry of a ball into a starting port during pattern fluctuation under the condition that neither the suspension on the first main game side nor the suspension on the second main game side exists. occurs, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds. In other words, it is configured to perform the performance mode of the chance-first read-ahead performance in which the enlargement actions are performed in the order of the fixed-position action 1, the fixed-position action 2, and the fixed-position action 3, and the blue color effect is added in that order. (Alternatively, as noted above, the magnifying actions can be done in that order, but the blue tint effect can be done at the same time). Also, even if the combination of the first decorative symbols is the same combination (for example, "117"), even if the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect appears, there is both a hold on the first main game side and a hold on the second main game side. Trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting hole during pattern fluctuation in a situation where the trigger is not held. Due to the shortened variation of the loss, all the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows are temporarily stopped at the same time, and as a fixed position action 4, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right rows are expanded at the same time. and add a blue color effect. A trigger hold occurs when the ball enters the starting port, and if the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is a change of hold 2 → 1, the change time is 10 seconds. A production form of a chance-read-ahead production in which enlargement actions are performed in the order of the middle row and the right row, that is, in the order of fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3, and a blue color effect is added in that order. (Or, as mentioned above, the expansion actions are performed in that order, but the blue color effect may be performed at the same time), that is, the same type (same color effect or same first decorative pattern combination), but it is configured so that the timing of occurrence of the fixed position action and the chronological flow are different (the production mode of the chance read-ahead effect is different). It should be noted that, when a trigger suspension occurs during a certain pattern variation, it is preferable to configure so that the chance look-ahead effect can be executed from the next symbol variation onward without executing the chance-first look-ahead effect from the certain symbol variation. is. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 180, when there is no hold on either the first main game side or the second main game side hold is 0, the variation time of the first main game symbol is 10 seconds. Even if trigger suspension occurs in a situation where variation is being executed and the remaining time of the variation time is 3 seconds or more (situation in which the variation time for executing the chance look-ahead effect remains), the chance look-ahead effect is not performed. Although the execution time is sufficiently secured, the chance-read-ahead performance is not executed in the certain pattern variation, and the chance-read-ahead performance can be executed from the next pattern variation. So far, an example has been shown in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance-read-ahead effect is performed by adding a blue color effect. A green or red color effect may be added instead of the color effect of . The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when executing the look-ahead effect for the first chance, the hold that is digested earlier than the trigger hold is held 4 → 3, and the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneously expanded as a fixed position action. A performance mode of a chance look-ahead performance is executed in which an action is taken and a blue color effect is added. In the next hold 3 → 2 change, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform an enlargement action and add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production. do. Furthermore, in the next change from hold 2 to 1, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform enlargement actions at the same time, and a red color effect is added. Execute. Furthermore, in the next hold 2 → 1 change, the left column, the middle column, and the right column are performed as the fixed position actions, that is, the expansion actions are performed in the order of fixed position action 1, fixed position action 2, and fixed position action 3. And, in that order, a performance mode of a chance look-ahead performance for adding a red color effect is executed. In such an anticipation of chance production, as the hold is digested, the color effect changes from blue (low expectation of winning) to green (medium expectation of winning), and further to green (high expectation of winning). It is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the color effect progresses, so that the color effect changes from medium degree) to red color effect (high degree of expectation for winning).

Next, FIG. 181 is an image diagram showing a fixed position action when executing a chance look-ahead effect with the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time reduction game state. Although not shown, FIG. 181 shows a right-handed instruction display. First, in (a) of FIG. 181, in the time shortening game state, the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 2, and the effect display device SG shows the first decorative symbol and the second 2 decorative symbols are fixed and stopped at "711" which is a missing symbol. In addition, in the time reduction game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbols is only "numbers", and the display mode of the second decorative symbols is also only "numbers". Two first pending displays on the second main game side are displayed, and the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "0", the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "2", and the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. Hold 2 shows a trigger hold. In this case, (b) perform a loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds, and perform a fixed position action 5 in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time. As in the non-reduced time game state, this fixed position action is to perform the enlargement action of the first decorative symbol and add a blue color effect. It may be in a different mode than the position action, in which case, for example, the first decorative pattern may perform a shrinking action and add a blue color effect. In addition, it is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 5 seconds can be the pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of b1 to b4 shown in FIG. Further, it may be a non-time-reduced game state instead of the time-reduced game state, and it may correspond to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol instead of the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol. It may be a symbol variation of the first decorative symbol. So far, an example has been shown in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform an enlargement action as a fixed position action, and a chance-read-ahead effect is performed by adding a blue color effect. A green or red color effect may be added instead of the color effect of . The green color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue color effect, and the red color effect has a higher hit expectation than the blue and green color effects. Then, when executing a chance look-ahead effect using blue, green, and red color effects, the hold that is digested before the trigger hold is held 4 → 3. In the change of hold 4 → 3, the left column and the middle column are fixed position actions. , the first decorative pattern in the right column simultaneously performs an enlargement action and adds a blue color effect to execute a performance mode of a chance-read-ahead performance. In the next hold 3 → 2 change, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously perform an enlargement action and add a green color effect to execute the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production. do. Furthermore, in the next change from hold 2 to 1, as a fixed position action, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns perform enlargement actions at the same time, and a red color effect is added. Execute. In such an anticipation of chance production, as the hold is digested, the color effect changes from blue (low expectation of winning) to green (medium expectation of winning), and further to green (high expectation of winning). It is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the color effect progresses, so that the color effect changes from medium degree) to red color effect (high degree of expectation for winning).

Next, in (c) of FIG. 181, in the time shortening game state, the hold on the first main game side is 0, the hold on the second main game side is 4, and the effect display device SG shows the first decorative symbol. The second decorative symbol is determined and stopped at "711", which is the missing symbol. Then, four first pending displays on the second main game side are displayed, and the first pending display on the first main game side is not displayed. Also, the second pending display on the first main game side is displayed with "0", the second pending display on the second main game side is displayed with "4", and the first pending display on the second main game side is displayed. Hold 4 indicates a trigger hold. In this case, (d) perform a loss variation with a variation time of 3 seconds, and perform a fixed position action 5 in which the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time. As in the non-reduced time game state, this fixed position action is to perform the enlargement action of the first decorative symbol and add a blue color effect. It may be in a different mode than the position action, in which case, for example, the first decorative pattern may perform a shrinking action and add a blue color effect. It is clear that this loss variation with a variation time of 3 seconds can be a pre-trigger variation of the look-ahead effect as the variation mode of b1 to b4 shown in FIG. In this way, in the time-reduced game state, the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is made the same according to the variation time of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol. is configured to Although the performance mode of the chance look-ahead effect is the fixed position action 5, it may be configured to display a look-ahead-only effect in the time-reduced game state. In that case, the look-ahead-only effect is configured to differ according to the variation time of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols.

Also, as shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 179 and (e) to (f) of FIG. 179, in the non-time reduction game state, the first The fluctuation time on the main game side is different, and the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns of the chance look-ahead effect (the order of fixed position actions) is configured to be different. On the other hand, as shown in (a), (b) of FIG. 181 and (c), (d) of FIG. 181, in the time reduction game state, the second main game side are different, but the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns of the chance look-ahead effect (the order of fixed position actions) is the same. By configuring in this way, the variable time varies depending on the number of reservations in any game state, but in the non-time-reduced game state that emphasizes performance rather than variable efficiency and the time-reduced game state that emphasizes variable efficiency, By differentiating the way of showing the first decorative patterns, the player can recognize in which state the fluctuation is occurring, and the mode of pattern fluctuation of the first decorative patterns suitable for each game state. can do. In addition, the game state can be divided into a game state in which the user can enjoy changing the mode of the fixed-position action according to the difference in the number of reservations, and a game state in which the mode of the fixed-position action is uniformed according to the difference in the number of reservations to realize seamless production progress. You can enjoy the tendency of the mode of the chance number according to the game state. It should be noted that the order of temporary stop in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state may be the order of temporary stop in the normal symbol variation, without being limited to the order of temporary stop at the time of chance look-ahead effect. When the above configuration is applied to the order of temporary stop in the normal symbol variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, for the fixed position action in the normal symbol variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, There is no need to add color effects or lookahead-only effects as a third element.

In addition, regarding the order of start of variation, in both the non-time-reduced gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are designed to start design variation at the same time (substantially simultaneously). is configured to Furthermore, regarding the action at the start of variation, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol is performed regardless of the number of reservations, but in the time-reduced gaming state, the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol is not performed. Or it is configured so that the probability of doing so is low. Specifically, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, regardless of whether the hold on the first main game side is any of 1 to 4, the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is executed. However, in the time-reduced game state, regardless of whether the hold on the second main game side is 1 to 4, the action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is not executed. Alternatively, in the time-reduced game state, only when the hold on the second main game side is 1 (hold is changed from 2 to 1), at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the pattern fluctuation of the second main game symbols. configured to take action. In addition, the chance eye look-ahead effect is configured to be executable in the symbol variation of holding 4→3, the symbol variation of holding 3→2, and the symbol variation of holding 2→1. Then, the chance-th look-ahead effect when the look-ahead wins is configured so that when the power is turned off and restored, the chance-th look-ahead effect corresponding to the trigger suspension is not executed. In other words, a trigger hold occurs during a certain fluctuation in the state where the hold of the first main game side (or the second main game side) is 1 or more, and the chance-first look-ahead effect is executed from the next fluctuation of the certain fluctuation. Even if it was planned, if the power is cut off during the certain fluctuation, even if the power is restored, the next fluctuation of the certain fluctuation will not execute the chance look-ahead effect, and the first main game side ( Or, the second main game side) has a hold of 3 or more, and a trigger hold occurs during a certain change, and the next change of the certain change is followed by a chance look-ahead effect, and the next change of the certain change. However, even if it is planned to execute the chance-first look-ahead effect, if the power is turned off during the one-on-one change, even if the power is restored, the chance-first look-ahead effect will not be executed in the next change of the one-on-one change (the one-on-one change In , since the power return screen is displayed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, that is, the chance look-ahead effect is not executed even in the one after another change).

In addition, in the normal symbol variation in the non-reduced time gaming state, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol may differ depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, but a specific symbol variation (for example, reach fluctuation), depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, there is no difference in the order of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbols, or the probability of the difference in the order of the temporary stop of the first decorative symbols is low. is configured to For example, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 is the left row, the middle row, and the right row. The first decoration symbols in the row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time). The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the symbol variation is configured to be temporarily stopped in the order of the left row, the right row, and the middle row. On the other hand, the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbol in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 is the left row, right row, and middle row. It is configured to temporarily stop in order, and even in the reach fluctuation corresponding to the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 2 → 1, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative pattern is , the left column, the right column, and the middle column are temporarily stopped in this order.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance-first look-ahead effect) may be executed. In , depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, there may be a difference in the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect). ), depending on the number of reservations on the first main game side, there is no difference in the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) or the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern ( It is configured such that the probability of a difference in the order of the chance-read-ahead effect) is low. For example, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4→3 The order is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns simultaneously (substantially simultaneously) perform a fixed position action (a production mode of a chance-read-ahead production), but the first main game side The order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the normal symbol variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold is 2 → 1 (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the left column, the right column , in the order of the middle row, the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect). On the other hand, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol (the effect mode of the chance-first look-ahead effect) in the reach variation corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side becomes 4 → 3 is , left row, right row, and middle row in the order of fixed position actions (a look-ahead effect mode for the first chance). Even in the reach fluctuation corresponding to the pattern fluctuation, the order of the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the left column, the right row, and the middle row. production mode).

In addition, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the non-time-reduced game state, or when the game state is switched from the time-reduced game state to the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game side is held. Regardless of whether or not there is a hold on the second main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variations of the second main game symbols are changed. The first decorative symbol uses the same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortening game state (even if the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is Since the common first decorative symbols are used even in the symbol variation of , for example, if the order of variation is the order of the second main game symbol → the first main game symbol, first the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is used. The first decorative pattern is stopped after the corresponding first decorative pattern is changed, and the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern change of the first main game pattern is started from the stopped display state. (becomes). Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order of start of variation and the order of temporary stop of the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative symbols are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, the fluctuation time tendency is the same (substantially the same) is a limited frequency state when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the non-reduced time gaming state. As a (game state or fluctuation pattern table related to fluctuation patterns), one fluctuation pattern table (for example, the fluctuation pattern selection tendency does not differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side as shown in FIG. 13, but in FIG. 166 A table that applies a variation pattern selection state that does not depend on the number of reservations such as the limited frequency state A and limited frequency state B shown to the non-time reduction game state, and the limited frequency state A or limited frequency state B) shown in FIG. Indicates that it is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of starting the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative patterns in the left column, the middle row, and the right row start the pattern fluctuation at the same time (approximately at the same time), and the order of temporary stop is also the left row, the middle row, and the first decoration pattern. The first decorative symbols in the row and the right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time). By configuring in this way, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuations on the second main game side after the end of the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state are immediately digested. Since it is possible to return to the game on the first main game side, which is the main game of the non-time-reduced game state, which is the game property, the mode of the first decorative pattern is made simple, while corresponding to the non-time-reduced game state. By executing each minimum action, it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the first main game.

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side is temporarily stopped in the non-time-reduced game state, the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance anticipation effect) may be executed, and configured in such a manner. In the case, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the non-time-reduced game state, or when the game state is switched from the time-reduced game state to the non-time-reduced game state, the first main game side is held. Regardless of whether or not there is a hold on the second main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variations of the second main game symbols are changed. The first decorative symbol uses the same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortening game state (even if the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is Since the common first decorative symbols are used even in the symbol variation of , for example, if the order of variation is the order of the second main game symbol → the first main game symbol, first the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is used. The first decorative pattern is stopped after the corresponding first decorative pattern is changed, and the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern change of the first main game pattern is started from the stopped display state. (becomes). Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order of starting the fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns and the order of the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) are the same ( substantially the same). Here, the fluctuation time tendency is the same (substantially the same) is a limited frequency state when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the non-reduced time gaming state. As a (game state or fluctuation pattern table related to fluctuation patterns), one fluctuation pattern table (for example, the fluctuation pattern selection tendency does not differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side as shown in FIG. 13, but in FIG. 166 A table that applies a variation pattern selection state that does not depend on the number of reservations such as the limited frequency state A and limited frequency state B shown to the non-time reduction game state, and the limited frequency state A or limited frequency state B) shown in FIG. Indicates that it is used regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of the start of fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns start changing patterns at the same time (approximately at the same time). Mode) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time). By configuring in this way, the first decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuations on the second main game side after the end of the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state are immediately digested. Since it is possible to return to the game on the first main game side, which is the main game of the non-time-reduced game state, which is the game property, the mode of the first decorative pattern is made simple, while corresponding to the non-time-reduced game state. By executing each minimum action, it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the first main game.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state Use the first decorative pattern. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the first main game side. It is configured such that the fluctuation time trend is changed as shown in FIG. 12 according to the number. In addition, according to the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row is the same (substantially the same), but the order of temporary stop is the first It is configured differently according to the number of reservations on the main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the normal state (normal variation As a pattern table), it indicates that normal states 1 to 4 (normal fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 4) are used according to the number of reservations on the first main game side. It should be noted that the order of starting the variation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start the pattern variation at the same time (substantially at the same time), and the order of the temporary stop is that the number of reservations is large. In the case (suspension 4 → 3, suspension 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left column, middle row, and right column temporarily stop at the same time (approximately at the same time), and if there are few (suspension 2 → 1, suspension 1 → 0) is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, right row, and middle row are temporarily stopped in this order.

In addition, when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed, and when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead production) may be executed. , when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the pattern variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is non-time-reduced. The first decoration pattern in the game state is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the first main game side. It is configured such that the fluctuation time trend is changed as shown in FIG. 12 according to the number. In addition, according to the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the left row, middle row, and right row of the first decorative pattern is the same (substantially the same), but the fixed position action (chance eye The order of the look-ahead effect mode) is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the first main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the normal state (normal variation As a pattern table), it indicates that normal states 1 to 4 (normal fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 4) are used according to the number of reservations on the first main game side. In addition, the order of the action at the start of the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns start the pattern fluctuation at the same time (approximately at the same time). If the number of reservations is large (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the first decorative patterns of the left row, middle row, and right row are executed at the same time (approximately at the same time), When there are few (reservation 2 → 1, reservation 1 → 0), the first decorative symbols in the left column, right column, and middle column are configured to be in the order of fixed position action (production mode of chance ahead reading production). ing.

In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1 → 0 (normal pattern variation of losing, reach goose, etc.) When the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 during non-reach pattern fluctuation such as pseudo-continuous gase, and the hold on the first main game side accumulates to the upper limit ("4"), the second In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of one main game pattern, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row and the right row are started at the same time (approximately at the same time). , On the other hand, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, the left row, right row, and middle row are temporarily stopped in this order). is configured to Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) Pattern variation of non-reach such as fake)}, the order of the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are at the same time (approximately at the same time), and the first decorative symbols The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). However, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1→0 When a game ball enters the first main game start gate A10 during a non-reach pattern fluctuation such as a pseudo-continuous gase, and only "1" is accumulated on the first main game side hold, the first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative pattern is that the first decorative patterns in the left row, the middle row and the right row are started at the same time (substantially at the same time). The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle columns). It is configured. Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 1→0 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) Pattern variation of non-reach such as fake)}, the order of the start of variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), while the first decorative symbols The order of temporary stopping is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in different orders (for example, temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle columns). .

In addition, when the first decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation may be executed, and when the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead production) may be executed. , in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1→0 (normal pattern variation of losing , non-reach pattern fluctuations such as reach and pseudo-continuous), when a game ball enters the first main game start gate A10 and the hold on the first main game side accumulates to the upper limit ("4") , In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol, the order of the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are performed at the same time ( Approximately simultaneously), on the other hand, the order of the fixed position actions of the first decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is that the fixed position actions ( It is configured to execute (for example, the left column, the right column, and the middle column in order). Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol variation such as fake)] is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), and the first The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). However, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1→0 When a game ball enters the first main game start gate A10 during a non-reach pattern fluctuation such as a pseudo-continuous gase, and only "1" is accumulated on the first main game side hold, the first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order of the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative pattern is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row are performed at the same time (substantially at the same time). On the other hand, the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative pattern (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is that the fixed-position actions (the chance-read-ahead effect) are arranged in different orders for the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative patterns. mode) (for example, the left column, the right column, and the middle column are executed in this order). Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol where the hold on the first main game side is 1→0 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols in the non-reach symbol variation such as fake)] is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is that the first decorative patterns in the left, middle, and right columns perform the fixed-position actions (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) in a different order. (For example, it is configured to execute in the order of left column, right column, and middle column).

In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern where the hold on the first main game side becomes 1 → 0 (normal pattern variation of losing, reach goose, etc.) When the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 during the non-reach pattern fluctuation such as pseudo-continuous gase, and the hold on the second main game side accumulates to the upper limit ("4"), the second In the pattern variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of one main game pattern, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row and the right row are started at the same time (approximately at the same time). , On the other hand, the order of temporary stopping of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, the left row, right row, and middle row are temporarily stopped in this order). is configured to Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the hold on the second main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) Pattern variation of non-reach such as fake)}, the order of the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are at the same time (approximately at the same time), and the first decorative symbols The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game pattern where the holding on the first main game side becomes 1→0 When a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 during a non-reach pattern variation such as a pseudo-continuous gase, and only "1" is accumulated on the second main game side hold, the first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order of starting the variation of the first decorative pattern is that the first decorative patterns in the left row, the middle row and the right row are started at the same time (substantially at the same time). The order in which the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped is that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped in a different order (for example, temporarily stopped in the order of the left, right, and middle columns). It is configured. Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the hold on the second main game side is 1→0 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) Pattern variation of non-reach such as fake)}, the order of the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols is that the first decorative symbols of the left row, the middle row, and the right row are at the same time (approximately at the same time), and the first decorative symbols The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously).

Also, in the non-time-reduced game state, when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side starts to fluctuate, the action at the start of fluctuation, and when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side temporarily stops, the fixed position action (chance In such a case, the pattern of the first main game pattern in which the hold on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0 in the non-reduced time game state. During the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the variation (ordinary pattern variation of loss, non-reach pattern variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage), the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, When the hold on the second main game side accumulates to the upper limit ("4"), the order of the action at the start of the first decorative symbol variation in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol. , the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), while the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative symbols (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the left column, The first decorative patterns in the middle row and the right row are configured to execute the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead production) in a different order (for example, the left row, the right row, and the middle row in the order). there is Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the hold on the second main game side is 4 → 3 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol variation such as fake)] is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), and the first The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously). In addition, in the non-time-reduced game state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game pattern where the holding on the first main game side becomes 1→0 When a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 during a non-reach pattern variation such as a pseudo-continuous gase, and only "1" is accumulated on the second main game side hold, the first main game In the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the pattern, the order of the action at the start of the variation of the first decorative pattern is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row are performed at the same time (substantially at the same time). On the other hand, the order of the fixed-position actions of the first decorative pattern (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is that the fixed-position actions (the chance-read-ahead effect) are arranged in different orders for the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative patterns. mode) (for example, the left column, the right column, and the middle column are executed in this order). Then, the next symbol variation {symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol where the hold on the second main game side is 1→0 (normal symbol variation of losing, reach slippage and pseudo-continuous pattern variation) The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol in the non-reach symbol variation such as fake)] is that the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously), and the first The order of the fixed-position actions of the decorative symbols (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is also configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneous (substantially simultaneously).

In addition, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the time shortened game state, or when the game state is switched from the non-time shortened game state to the time shortened game state, the second main game side is held. When there is a hold on the first main game side in a non-existing state, the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the first main game pattern is performed, but the first decorative pattern is in the time reduction game state. The same symbol as the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol is used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the first main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of start of variation and the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns are configured to be the same (substantially the same). Here, the fluctuation time tendency is the same (substantially the same) means the normal state (normal As a fluctuation pattern table), one fluctuation pattern table (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern table that is a normal state shown in FIG. 166) is used regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that the order of starting the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row and the right row start the pattern fluctuation at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

In addition, when the first decorative symbol on the first main game side starts to fluctuate in the time shortening game state, the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, and the fixed position action (chance eye) when the first decorative pattern on the first main game side temporarily stops In the case of such a configuration, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the time shortened game state, or when the time is changed from the non-time shortened game state When the game state is switched to the shortened game state, if there is a hold on the first main game side without a hold on the second main game side, the pattern variation of the first main game pattern is dealt with. Although the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern is performed, the first decorative pattern uses the same pattern as the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variation of the second main game pattern in the time shortening game state. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the first main game side. Regardless of the number, the fluctuation time trends are configured to be the same (substantially the same). In addition, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, the order of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left column, the middle column, and the right column and the order of the fixed position action (the production mode of the chance look-ahead effect) They are configured identically (substantially identically). Here, the fluctuation time tendency is the same (substantially the same) means the normal state (normal As a fluctuation pattern table), one fluctuation pattern table (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern table that is a normal state shown in FIG. 166) is used regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that the order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. , The order of the fixed-position action (the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

Also, pattern 1, which is one of the variation patterns of the first decorative symbols when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. The fluctuation time trend is changed according to the number, but the order of start of fluctuation and the order of temporary stop of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are determined by the second main game side. are configured identically (substantially identically) regardless of the number of reservations. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that, regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side, the order in which the variation starts is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns start varying symbols at the same time (substantially at the same time). The order of temporary stop is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time).

Also, in the time shortening game state, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change, the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, and when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side temporarily stops, the fixed position action (chance eye) In the case of such configuration, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. Pattern 1, which is one of the patterns, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Depending on the number, the fluctuation time trend is changed, but the order of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern in the left, middle, and right columns and the fixed position action (chance look-ahead effect The order of the performance mode) is configured to be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that the order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time), regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. , The order of the fixed-position action (the effect mode of the chance-read-ahead effect) is also configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns are executed at the same time (substantially at the same time).

Also, pattern 2 (a pattern different from pattern 1), which is one of the variation patterns of the first decorative symbols when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. The fluctuation time trend is changed according to the number, but the order of starting the fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. are configured identically (substantially identically). The order of temporary stop is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that the order of starting the fluctuation is configured so that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row and the right row start the pattern fluctuation at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. In the order of temporary suspension, when the number of reservations is large (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the first decorative symbols in the left row, middle row, and right row are temporarily stopped at the same time (approximately at the same time). In each case (holding 2→1, holding 1→0), the left column, the right column, and the middle column are arranged in this order.

Also, in the time shortening game state, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change, the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, and when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side temporarily stops, the fixed position action (chance eye) In the case of such configuration, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. Pattern 2 (a pattern different from pattern 1), which is one of the patterns, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Depending on the number, the fluctuation time trend is changed, but the order of actions at the start of fluctuation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is the number of reservations on the second main game side. Regardless, they are configured identically (substantially identically). It should be noted that the order of the fixed-position actions (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that the order of the actions at the start of the fluctuation is configured such that the first decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns are executed simultaneously (substantially simultaneously) regardless of the number of pending actions on the second main game side. , The order of the fixed position action (the effect mode of the look-ahead effect for the first chance) is that when the number of reservations is large (hold 4 → 3, hold 3 → 2), the first decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right columns are simultaneously displayed ( (substantially simultaneously), and when there are few (reservation 2→1, reservation 1→0), execution is performed in the order of the left column, the right column, and the middle column.

In addition, pattern 3 (a pattern different from pattern 1 and pattern 2), which is one of the variation mode patterns of the first decorative symbol when a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, will be explained. do. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Depending on the number, the fluctuation time trend is changed, but the order of temporary stop is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order in which the variation of the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row is started differs according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. It should be noted that the order of starting the variation of the first decorative pattern of the left column, the middle column, and the right column is, for example, when the number of reservations is large (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the left column, the middle row, and the right column The first decorative pattern is configured to start changing at the same time (approximately at the same time), and when there are few (holding 2 → 1, holding 1 → 0), it is configured to be in the order of the left column, the middle column, and the right column. However, this description is only an example, and it is sufficient if the order of starting the variation is different according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. The order of temporary stop is configured so that the first decoration symbols in the left, middle and right columns are temporarily stopped at the same time (substantially at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. Any one of these patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 3) is adopted as the variation mode pattern of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state.

Also, in the time shortening game state, when the first decorative symbol on the second main game side starts to change, the action at the time of starting the fluctuation, and when the first decorative pattern on the second main game side temporarily stops, the fixed position action (chance eye) In the case of such configuration, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol. Pattern 3 (a pattern different from pattern 1 and pattern 2), which is one of the patterns, will be described. For the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortened game state, the first decorative symbols in the time shortened game state are used. Then, the symbol variation of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol (ordinary symbol variation of losing, non-reach symbol variation such as reach slippage or pseudo consecutive slippage) is reserved on the second main game side. Depending on the number, the fluctuation time trend is changed, but the order of the fixed position action (the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect) is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side (approximately identical). The order of actions at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is configured to differ according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. Here, the variation time trend is changed means that the limited frequency state (variation pattern table), limited frequency states A1 to A4 (variation pattern tables A1 to A4) corresponding to the number of reservations and limited frequency states B1 to B4 (variation pattern tables B1 to B4) corresponding to the number of reservations are used. The order of the actions at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns is, for example, when the number of reservations is large (holding 4 → 3, holding 3 → 2), the left row, middle row, right The first decorative patterns in the row are configured to be executed at the same time (approximately at the same time), and when there are few (holding 2 → 1, holding 1 → 1), it is configured to be the order of the left row, the middle row, and the right row. However, this description is only an example, and it is sufficient if the order of the actions at the start of fluctuation is changed according to the number of reservations on the second main game side. In addition, the order of the fixed position action (the effect mode of the look-ahead effect of the chance) is that the first decorative symbols in the left row, the middle row, and the right row are displayed at the same time (approximately at the same time) regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side. configured to run. Any one of these patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 3) is adopted as the variation pattern of the first decorative symbol when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time shortening game state.

Also, the first decorative pattern is configured as follows.
(1) It is preferable that the first decorative pattern is in a non-transmissive state and does not perform any action during the variable fixed time. The display mode of the first decorative symbol during the variable fixed time is a mode in which the first element and the second element are displayed (however, only the second element may be displayed in the time-reduced game state). Also, the third element may be attached to the first decorative pattern. Furthermore, the display mode of the first decorative pattern is, depending on the game state (low probability low base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state), only the first element or the second element may be displayed. In addition, depending on the game state, the aspect of each element may be configured to be different. 1 element), but in other game states, it is an image of a lion facing sideways (first element), and in a low-probability-low base state, it is an image of the number "7" (second element), but other In the game state, the image of the kanji "7" (second element) is used, and in the low-probability-low base state, the image of "7" is red (third element), but in other game states, the image of "7" The image is gold (third element), or the image of the lion is yellow (third element) in the low-probability-low base state, but the image of the lion is gold (third element) in other game states. good too. It should be noted that, as in the game state, each element may be configured to differ depending on the stage or mode.
(2) It is preferable that the first decorative symbol is in a non-transmissive state and does not perform any action during the deceleration fluctuation. The display mode of the first decorative design during the deceleration fluctuation is preferably the same as the display mode of the first decorative design during the fixed fluctuation time.

Also, the second decorative pattern is configured as follows.
(1) For the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform the action at the start of variation.
(2) Regarding the second decorative symbols, it is preferable not to perform the tenpai action while the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols are changing.
(3) Since the second decorative symbols can always be displayed, it is preferable not to transmit them while the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols are fluctuating.
(4) As for the second decorative design, as shown in FIG. 178, the second decorative design in the left and right columns and the second decorative design in the middle row are configured so as not to overlap each other. It is preferable that the second decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern in the right column are configured so as not to overlap each other.
(5) Regarding the second decorative symbols, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side (or regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side), the order of starting fluctuation and the order of stopping are the same (substantially the same). is preferably configured to
(6) Regarding the second decorative symbols, it is preferable that the order of start of fluctuation and the order of stop are the same (substantially the same) regardless of the game state (non-time-reduced game state, time-reduced game state). .
(7) Regarding the second decoration symbols, regardless of whether the symbol variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side, regardless of the number of reservations, regardless of the presence or absence of the time reduction game state. , the order of starting the fluctuation and the order of stopping the fluctuation are preferably the same (substantially the same).
(8) With respect to the second decorative symbols, it is preferable not to perform the shaking action while the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols are fluctuating.
(9) Regarding the second decorative symbol, it is preferable not to perform the shaking action during the variable standby state.
(10) As for the second decorative symbols, decorations that are always displayed even when the main game symbols and the first decorative symbols are fluctuating, and even during the fluctuation standby state (including the execution of the standby movie). It is a design.
(11) Regarding the second decorative pattern, the display mode is the game state (low probability low base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state) Regardless, only the second element It is preferable that the form of display (for example, outline, color, and type (roman numerals or Chinese numerals) of each number) be the same regardless of the game state. As with the game state, regardless of the stage or mode, only the second element is displayed, and its shape (for example, the outline, color, and type of each number (Roman numerals or Chinese numerals)) may be configured to be the same regardless of

Also, the shaking action is configured as follows.
(1) In the shaking action (first shaking motion) of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including temporary stop), both the first element and the second element are shaking, but the state is fixed and stopped. The swing action of the first decorative symbol in the variable standby state (the first second swing action during the variable standby state, the second second swing action during the variable standby state, and the second swing action during the variable standby state. The second shaking motion is the second shaking motion executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends, but it may also be called the third shaking motion.) only the first element shakes, and the second shaking motion is The two elements are constructed so as not to sway. In other words, the swing action during the symbol fluctuation and the swing action during the fluctuation standby state are different. However, regarding the shaking action of the first element, the shaking action of the first element of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including temporary stop) and the shaking action of the first element of the first decorative symbol during the fluctuation standby state actions are preferably the same. By applying the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during pattern fluctuation (including temporary suspension) to the variable standby state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, even the variable standby state is dull. It is possible to avoid the screen (the screen where the first decorative pattern is just stopped), and it is possible to give movement on the liquid crystal screen, and only the second element (number) is fixed without performing a shaking action. By making such a display, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player misunderstand that the symbols are fluctuating.
(2) The image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element), and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced game state (the image object of the first element) Since the image object and the image object of the second element are different, the aspect of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state and the aspect of the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced game state are different. is configured as
(3) Regarding the execution time of the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during pattern fluctuation, not only the execution time of the ready-to-win effect, but also the first column (eg, left column) and second column (eg, right column) It also includes the shaking action time from when one decorative pattern is temporarily stopped to when it is finally stopped.
(4) The shaking action is to perform a single action within a predetermined period of time (for example, move the first decorative pattern upward and then downward for 0.5 seconds) multiple times. It is configured to be displayed (continuous display, loop display). On the other hand, regarding the action at the start of fluctuation, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, and the final action, the action of performing one action in a predetermined time (for example, the action of gradually expanding the first decorative pattern for 1.0 seconds) is set to 1. It is only executed once and displayed (single-shot display, non-loop display). The predetermined time for the swing action, the predetermined time for the action at the start of fluctuation, the predetermined time for the fixed position action, the predetermined time for the tenpai action, and the predetermined time for the determination action may be the same or different. may
(5) Regarding the shaking action during the variable standby state, the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a losing symbol and is fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed). After a lapse of time (for example, 20 seconds), the first shaking action (second shaking action) during the variable standby state is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) elapses after the main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fixed and stopped (after the variable fixed time has passed, if there is a variable fixed time), 2 during the variable standby state The second shaking action (second shaking action). (also referred to as an operation) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In this manner, the shaking action during the variable standby state is configured to be able to execute the shaking action at a plurality of timings, similar to the shaking action during the variation. It should be noted that at the start of the first shake action during the variable standby state, the stage BGM is being output (continuously output from after the fixed stop), but after the standby movie is executed, the variable standby state The stage BGM is not output at the start of the second shaking action in , and during the shaking action.
(6) Shaking action of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation in the non-time-reduced game state (including temporary stop), and swing action of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation in the time-reduced game state (including temporary stop) It is different from the shaking action. That is, the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced game state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element) and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state (the image of the first element object and the image object of the second element) are different, the mode of the swing action of the first decorative pattern during symbol fluctuation in the non-time-reduced game state (including temporary stop) and the pattern fluctuation in the time-reduced game state It is configured so that the mode of the swing action of the first decorative symbol (including during temporary stop) is different.
(7) The swing action of the first decorative symbol during the variable standby state of the non-reduced time gaming state is different from the swing action of the first decorative symbol during the variable standby state of the reduced time gaming state. That is, the image object of the first decorative symbol in the non-time-reduced game state (the image object of the first element and the image object of the second element) and the image object of the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state (the image of the first element Since the object and the image object of the second element) are different, the swing action mode of the first decorative symbol during the variable standby state of the non-time-reduced gaming state and the first decorative symbol during the variable standby state of the time-reduced gaming state is configured to be different from the swing action mode of the
(8) When the first decorative symbol in the time shortening game state is composed only of the second elements (numbers), it is preferable not to perform the shaking action in the variable standby state of the time shortening game state. In other words, when the first decorative symbol in the time-reduced game state is composed only of the second elements (numbers), the shaking action (first shaking motion) of the first decorative symbol during symbol fluctuation (including temporary stop) is Executed, but the shaking action of the first decorative symbol in the variable standby state, which is the fixed stop state (the first second shaking motion during the variable standby state, the second second shaking motion during the variable standby state. Note that the second shaking motion during the variable standby state is the second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen is finished, but it may also be called the third shaking motion.) should not be performed. is preferred.

Also, the fixed position action is configured as follows.
(1) In the unsuccessful super reach effect, when temporarily stopping the unsuccessful first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row, the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row preferably not. By configuring in this way, if it is a normal pattern change of loss or a normal reach change of loss, it is indicated that it is temporarily stopped by performing a fixed position action even in the first decorative pattern of the middle row, while super reach production of loss Regarding, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the unsuccessful super reach effect and perform a fixed position action, so by omitting the action, the movement of the first decorative pattern is seamless according to the passing effect at the time of failure. realizable. On the other hand, when temporarily stopping the first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row in the normal reach, it is preferable to perform the fixed position action of the first decorative symbol in the third row. , may not perform the positional actions in the third column. By configuring in this way, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the ready-to-win effect and perform a fixed position action for the normal reach effect of losing, as well as the super reach effect. A seamless movement of the first decorative pattern can be realized according to the passing performance of. Here, in the case of a loss in which reach is not established (for example, in the case of stopping at a loose stitch such as "247" or "183"), it is preferable to perform the fixed position action of the third row. In addition, Tenpai with the first decorative pattern of "7" has a higher hit expectation than the first decorative pattern of other numbers, and is configured so that there is no loss in normal reach, or it is always super without becoming normal reach. If the first decorative pattern is "7" and it becomes tenpai because it is configured to develop into a reach production (or it is easier to develop into a super reach production than the first decorative pattern of other numbers is tenpai) , do not perform the positional action of the first decorative symbol in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row, or the third as the final row than the first decorative symbol of other numbers It is preferable to lower the probability of performing the positional action of the first decorative symbol in the row (e.g., the middle row), and the tenpai of the first decorative symbol of other numbers, the positional action of the first decorative symbol of the third row. or, it is preferable to increase the probability of performing the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the third row (for example, the middle row) as the final row than "7" is tenpai .

Also, the tenpai action is configured as follows.
(1) Regarding the tenpai action of the first decorative pattern, it is performed in the first decorative patterns of the first row (eg, left column) and the second row (eg, right column), but the third row as the final row (eg , middle row) is not performed in the first decorative pattern. By configuring in this way, by preparing an action that may be performed only with the first decorative patterns of the left column and the right column, which are the first decorative patterns other than the most focused last column, the final In the process until the first decorative pattern in the row stops, the tenpai to be noticed can be visually notified. On the other hand, actions other than the tenpai action of the first decorative pattern are performed with the first decorative patterns in the first column (eg, left column) and the second column (eg, right column), and the third column as the final column. It can also be done with the first decorative symbol in a row (eg middle row).
(2) It is configured to perform the same tenpai action regardless of whether it is pseudo-continuation from non-tenpai (non-reach pseudo-continuation) or pseudo-continuation from tenpai (post-reach pseudo-continuation). Specifically, in FIG. 168, there is a case where the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is performed without performing a non-reach pseudo-run after performing a non-reach pseudo-run, and a case where a post-reach pseudo-run is performed without performing a non-reach pseudo-run. This means that the tenpai action 2 is the same (common) as in the case of performing the tenpai action 2 of (i2) after performing the tenpai action. Also, in FIG. 168, there are cases where the tenpai action 2 of (i2) is performed without performing the post-reach pseudo-run after performing the non-reach pseudo-run, and when performing the post-reach pseudo-run without performing the non-reach pseudo-run. In the case of performing the tenpai action 1 in (u), the aspects of the tenpai action 2 and the tenpai action 1 may be the same. In addition, in the pseudo variation in the pattern variation of the pseudo series, even if a specific notice effect that is determined to be a reach (for example, a notice effect of red lines in a line notice) occurs, a simulation that the specific notice effect has occurred It is configured so that it may become non-tempered at the time of fluctuation, or may become non-tempered, and when it becomes non-tempered, it may become tenpai in the subsequent pseudo-variation.

Also, the decision action is configured as follows.
(1) In a specific pattern variation (for example, super reach variation) that is a single pattern variation and becomes a big hit, the first decorative pattern and the second column (for example, "7" in the left column) , "7" in the right column) becomes the same pattern, and after executing the tenpai action, the ready-to-win effect is performed, and then the super ready-to-win effect, which is the post-reach effect, is performed. there is Then, in the super ready-to-win production, the first decorative pattern in the third row (for example, "7" in the middle row) is temporarily stopped at the jackpot pattern, and a success pattern in which the jackpot pattern combination "777" is displayed; The first decorative symbols in the third row (for example, "8" in the middle row) are temporarily stopped at the losing symbol, and after displaying the losing symbol combination "787", the variation is executed again, resulting in a jackpot symbol combination. A resurrection pattern displaying '777' is provided, and whether or not to execute a decisive action is determined depending on whether a big win is achieved via the success pattern or via the resurrection pattern. It's like In addition, according to whether the big win is achieved via the success pattern or the big win is achieved via the resurrection pattern, the mode of the decisive action (for example, one of the decisive action A and the decisive action B is selected and executed). ) may be configured differently. In addition, when a big hit is achieved via the resurrection pattern, the decision action may not be executed, or a recovery-dedicated decision action different from the normal decision action may be executed.

In the normal pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern that corresponds to the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern in the non-time-reduced game state, the action at the start of the fluctuation, the fixed position action, and the shaking action are performed, In this non-reduced time game state, at the time of start of fluctuation, with the normal pattern fluctuation of the loss that depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (variation selection tendency differs according to the number of reservations on the first main game side) It is preferably configured to perform an action, a stationary action and a swing action. In addition, in the normal pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern fluctuation of the second main game pattern in the time-reduced game state, at least one of an action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and a fixed position action. is not performed, while the swing action of the first decorative symbol is performed. Variation selection tendency differs depending on the number) In the normal pattern variation of losing, at least one of the action at the start of variation and the fixed position action is not performed, while the shaking action is preferably performed. is. For example, if the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced game state is a loss and the normal symbol variation (particularly, holding 1→0) is executed, the variation start action and the fixed position action are performed, but the time is shortened. If the second main game symbol in the game state is a normal symbol variation of losing (especially, hold 1→0), at least one of the variation start action and the fixed position action may not be performed.

In the normal pattern fluctuation of the first decorative pattern that corresponds to the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern in the non-time-reduced game state, the action at the start of the fluctuation, the fixed position action, and the shaking action are performed, In this non-reduced time game state, at the time of start of fluctuation, with the normal pattern fluctuation of the loss that depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (variation selection tendency differs according to the number of reservations on the first main game side) It is preferably configured to perform an action, a stationary action and a swing action. In addition, in the normal symbol variation of the first decorative symbol that corresponds to the symbol variation of the second main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, the first decorative symbol that corresponds to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state Compared to the normal pattern fluctuations of losing one decorative pattern, the execution probability of at least one of the action at the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern and the fixed position action is configured to be low, while the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is performed. In this time-reduced game state, the normal pattern fluctuation of losing depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side (variation selection tendency differs according to the number of reservations on the second main game side). , it is preferable that the execution probability of at least one of the action at the start of fluctuation and the fixed position action is set to be low, while the swing action is performed. For example, if the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced game state is a loss and the normal symbol variation (particularly, holding 1→0) is executed, the variation start action and the fixed position action are performed, but the time is shortened. If the second main game symbol in the game state is a normal symbol variation of losing (especially, hold 1→0), the execution probability of at least one of the variation start action and the fixed position action is configured to be low (for example, pattern 1: action at the start of fluctuation=50%, fixed-position action=100%, pattern 2: action at the start of fluctuation=100%, fixed-position action=80%).

In the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time shortening game state, at least one of an action at the start of variation of the first decorative symbols, a fixed position action, a tenpai action, and a deciding action. is not performed, the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is performed. Further, in the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the time-reduced gaming state, the symbols of the first decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols in the non-time-reduced gaming state. The execution probability of at least one of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, and the deciding action is configured to be lower than that of the variation, while the shaking action of the first decorative pattern is performed. It is

Also, the variable fixed time and the execution time of each action are configured as follows.
(1) A predetermined time from the first decorative design variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms) until the shaking action in the variable standby state is executed {the first decorative design is a lost design and the fixed stop is In some cases, a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) after the elapse of the variable fixed time) is set longer. By setting in this manner, the time for indicating the definitive stop display of the first decorative pattern is secured as the variable fixing time, and the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during the pattern fluctuation (including the temporary stop) is ensured. is applied even during the variable standby state in which the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. When configured to avoid (give movement on the LCD screen), the next fluctuation will start It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it has been done.
(2) In a specific symbol variation that is one symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal symbol variation such as holding 1 → 0 loss), the execution time of 1 action other than the shake action to be executed is It is preferably configured to be shorter than the execution time of the shaking action.
(3) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (for example, reach variation, normal pattern variation of hold 1 → 0 loss, etc.), the total execution time of each action other than the shaking action is the shaking It is preferably configured to be shorter than the total execution time of actions.
(4) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (for example, reach variation, hold 1 → 0 loss normal symbol variation, etc.), the execution time of 1 action other than the shaking action is the variable fixed time Although it is preferably configured to be shorter than the variable fixed time, it may be configured to be longer than the variable fixed time.
(5) In a specific symbol variation that is a single symbol variation (for example, reach variation, hold 1 → 0 loss normal symbol variation, etc.), the total execution time of each action other than the shaking action is variable. It is preferably configured to be longer than the fixed time.

As for BGM (effect sound), as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, stage BGM is output during symbol variation and variation standby state. It is configured to output reach BGM. At the start of the first shake action during the variable standby state, the stage BGM is output (continuously output after the final stop), but after the standby movie is executed, the shake action during the variable standby state is output. The stage BGM is not output at the start and during the shaking action. For example, at the timing when the first decorative symbol in (a3) of FIGS. 169 and 177 is a lost symbol and the decision is stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), the stage BGM is output. , (d3), the first decorative symbol is a lost symbol, and a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the fixed stop (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), and the variable standby state is in effect. Although the stage BGM is continuously output even at the start of the first shaking action of (d3), the timing after the shaking action of (d3) is executed {the first decorative symbol is a missing symbol and is fixed and stopped (fluctuation fixed If there is time, the stage BGM is not output after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the variable fixed time has elapsed). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 300 seconds) has passed since the fixed stop of the losing pattern (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed), the second (f3) shaking action during the variable standby state It is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), but at that time, the stage BGM is not output. It should be noted that the timing after the swing action (d3) is executed {the first decorative pattern is a lost pattern and is fixed and stopped (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has elapsed) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed}, the stage BGM is configured not to be output. good. Also, at the timing of executing the standby movie in (e3), a power saving display (power saving screen) may be displayed. It is configured so that it is superimposed on the middle movie and displayed, and the stage BGM is not output. In addition, if an error is detected during the variable standby state, even if it is the start of the first shake action during the variable standby state or the second shake action during the variable standby state, the error is configured to output an error sound based on the detection of By applying the shaking action of the first decorative pattern during pattern fluctuation (including temporary suspension) to the variable standby state in which the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, even the variable standby state is dull. It is possible to avoid the screen (the screen where the first decorative pattern is only stopped), and it is possible to give movement on the liquid crystal screen, and when the shaking action is first started in the variable standby state, the game Appropriate production output according to the variable standby state, such as continuing the output of the stage BGM to appeal to the machine, but stopping (muting) the output of the stage BGM to save power when going through the display of the standby movie. Aspects can be made.

Also, the reach voice is configured as follows.
(1) A reach voice occurs when a tenpai action occurs.
(2) There are cases where the reach voice is different even if the ten-pai action at the time of pseudo-continuation after reach and the ten-pai action after that are the same action. For example, output "chance" for the tenpai action at the time of pseudo-continuation after reach, and output "gekiatsu" for the subsequent tenpai action.
(3) There are multiple types of tenpai actions, and the reach voice may be the same even if the tenpai action at the time of pseudo-continuation after reach and the tenpai action after that are different actions. For example, there are tenpai action A and tenpai action B, and the only reach voice corresponding to tenpai action A and tenpai action B is "chance".

As for the standby movie, as explained with reference to FIG. 126, it is possible to display the standby movie in both the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state. state, the first decorative pattern is a lost pattern and the fixed stop (if there is a variable fixed time, after the variable fixed time has passed), and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has passed) seems to be the same is configured to

The volume adjustment screen is configured as follows.
(1) During any of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, fixed position action, tenpai action, shaking action (during variation, during variation standby state), and decision action, the volume adjustment screen is displayed by the player. It can be displayed by operating the cross button SB-2. In this case, each action and the volume adjustment screen can be displayed simultaneously in the display area SG10 (in other words, even when each action is being executed, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed). Note that during the variable fixed time, the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed even if the cross button SB-2 is operated.
(2) The cross button SB-2 is operated during any of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, the shaking action (during variation, during variation standby state), and the final action. , the volume adjustment screen is displayed in the display area SG10. The displayed volume adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the display priority of the volume adjustment screen is set higher than that of the first decorative pattern. However, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate.
(3) If the action of the first decorative pattern is an action during fluctuation, the second decorative pattern is fluctuating but no action is performed, and the action of the first decorative pattern is in a fixed stop state (variation standby state). When the action is the shaking action, the second decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (variable standby state) and is configured not to perform the action. However, the overlapping relationship between the volume adjustment screen and the first decorative symbols is configured so as not to overlap with at least one or more first decorative symbols (for example, the first decorative symbols in the left column). In addition, during fluctuation, the display time of the volume adjustment screen (the time corresponding to one operation of the cross button SB-2, for example, 5 seconds) It is the total time of the action, for example, the execution time of the shaking action executed from the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the left column to the final stop), while the other action time (1 action execution time, total action time). However, the display time of the volume adjustment screen can be extended (the display time timer is restarted or reset) by operating the cross button SB-2 again during the display. Therefore, by operating the cross button SB-2 multiple times while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing the shaking action during the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the shaking action can be performed. It is configured so that the volume adjustment screen is simultaneously displayed over the entire time (period) during or from the shaking action to other actions or super reach.

Also, the light amount adjustment screen is configured as follows.
(1) During any of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, the shaking action (during variation, during the variation standby state), and the decision action, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed by the player. It can be displayed by operating the cross button SB-2. In this case, each action and the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed simultaneously in the display area SG10 (in other words, the light amount adjustment screen can be displayed even when each action is being executed). It should be noted that during the variable fixed time, the light amount adjustment screen may not be displayed even if the cross button SB-2 is operated.
(2) The cross button SB-2 is operated during any of the action at the start of variation of the first decorative pattern, the fixed position action, the tenpai action, the shaking action (during variation, during variation standby state), and the final action. , the light amount adjustment screen is displayed in the display area SG10. The displayed light quantity adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the display priority of the light quantity adjustment screen is set higher than that of the first decorative pattern. However, the light amount adjustment screen and the second decorative pattern are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate.
(3) If the action of the first decorative pattern is an action during fluctuation, the second decorative pattern is fluctuating but no action is performed, and the action of the first decorative pattern is in a fixed stop state (variation standby state). When the action is the shaking action, the second decorative symbol is in a fixed stop state (variable standby state) and is configured not to perform the action. However, the overlap relationship between the light amount adjustment screen and the first decorative pattern is configured so as not to overlap with at least one or more first decorative patterns (for example, the first decorative pattern in the left column). In addition, during fluctuation, the display time of the light intensity adjustment screen (the time corresponding to one operation of the cross button SB-2, for example, 5 seconds) It is the total time of the action, for example, the execution time of the shaking action executed from the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern in the left column to the final stop), while the other action time (1 action execution time, total action time). However, the display time of the light amount adjustment screen can be extended (the display time timer can be restarted or reset) by operating the cross button SB-2 again during the display. Therefore, by operating the cross button SB-2 multiple times while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing the shaking action during the symbol fluctuation of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol, the shaking action can be performed. It is configured so that the light amount adjustment screen is simultaneously displayed over the entire time (period) during or from the shaking action to other actions or super reach. It should be noted that while the first decorative symbol in the left row is performing a swinging action while the first main game symbol or second main game symbol is changing, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed by operating the cross button SB-2 once. is displayed, and while the light amount adjustment screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed by operating the cross button SB-2 once, and the light amount is displayed by operating the cross button SB-2 once while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. By alternately repeating the display operation of the light intensity adjustment screen and the display operation of the volume adjustment screen during the execution of the shaking action so that the adjustment screen is displayed, the shaking action can be performed for the entire time (period) during the shaking action. It is configured so that the light intensity adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen are displayed at the same time from the action to the transition to other actions and super reach (only one of the light intensity adjustment screen and the volume adjustment screen is displayed) In this case, the display of the light amount adjustment screen and the display of the volume adjustment screen are repeatedly switched over the entire time (period) during the shaking action or until the transition from the shaking action to another action or super reach).

Further, the advance notice effect is configured as follows.
(1) The rate at which the notice effect occurs when the first decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed is configured to be higher than the rate at which the notice effect occurs when the first decorative pattern fluctuates in deceleration or immediately before a temporary stop. In addition, the number of notice effects that can be executed when the first decorative pattern changes at high speed in one pattern change is configured to be greater than the number of notice effects that can be executed during deceleration fluctuation of the first decorative pattern or immediately before the temporary stop. . In addition, the number of candidates for the notice effect that can occur when the first decorative pattern changes at high speed in one pattern change is greater than the number of candidates for the notice effect that can occur when the first decorative pattern changes in deceleration or immediately before the temporary stop. It is configured. When the first decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed, it is in a transparent state and no action is executed, so when the notice performance is executed at the time of high speed fluctuation, the player can easily perform the notice performance. While it can be visually recognized, no action is executed even when the first decorative pattern decelerates and changes, but since the first decorative pattern is in a non-transmissive state, even if the notice effect is executed in this state. , is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Then, immediately before the temporary stop time, since the fixed position action is executed, even if the announcement effect is executed in this state, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

Further, the sub-control section uses the image data of the image object generated when displaying the second element of the first decorative design as data when displaying the second element of the second decorative design. For example, the sub-controller (especially the sub-sub-controller SS) controls a frame buffer for storing image data of an image object to be displayed in the decorative design display area SG11, and an image control for controlling the display of the image data stored in the frame buffer. and an enlarging/reducing means for enlarging or reducing image data stored in the frame buffer. A reduction process is performed, and the image control means is configured to display the image data processed by the enlargement/reduction means as the second element of the second decorative design. By using image data in this way, an image object can be generated efficiently.

Supplementally, in the sixth embodiment, the second decorative pattern is always displayed during the variable display, and the fixed stop is always shown. It may be configured to be displayed when it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize, and in this case, the second decorative pattern is not necessarily fixed and stopped.

For each action (variation start action, fixed position action, shaking action, tenpai action, decision action), the action mode may be different depending on whether it is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute an action depending on whether the game is in the time-reduced game state or in the non-time-reduced game state. Also, for each action (variation start action, fixed position action, swing action, tenpai action, decision action), the action mode may be different depending on whether it is the production stage A or the production stage B. Further, whether or not to execute an action may be determined depending on whether it is the production stage A or the production stage B. Also, for each action (variation start action, fixed position action, shaking action, tenpai action, decision action), even if the action mode differs depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background) good. Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute an action depending on whether it is a normal background or a reach background (super reach background).

Regarding tenpai, it has been explained that tenpai is temporarily stopped in the order of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column. may be temporarily stopped at the same time and tempered. In this case, in the first (for example, first) pseudo-variation, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are temporarily stopped in order, and then the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle row. Then, the next (for example, second) pseudo fluctuation is started. Then, in the next pseudo change, the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time, and the ready-to-win effect is executed as it is, or the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It is configured. When the first decorative pattern in the left column and the first decorative pattern in the right column are temporarily stopped at the same time and tense, the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the left column and the fixed position action of the first decorative pattern in the right column Position actions are initiated at the same time.

When a specific notice effect (for example, the next notice effect) is generated during the symbol change, the fixed position action and the tenpai action may not be performed. For example, when the next advance notice effect occurs during pattern fluctuation, the super reach effect is executed without becoming tenpai and without becoming the normal reach effect. In such a configuration, the first decorative pattern on the left column and the first decorative pattern on the right column are arranged so as to make it difficult for the player to understand during the super ready-to-win effect, because it is desired to show the super ready-to-win effect to the player. It is intended to be tenpai and preferably does not take place action and tenpai action. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to show the player that the game is in a tense state at a timing that surprises the player.

Depending on the display mode of the pending display for production of the change and the first pending display immediately before digestion, the mode of the action at the start of the fluctuation (whether it is easy to execute the action at the start of the fluctuation, or the highly anticipated action at the start of the fluctuation (whether it is easy to execute B) may be configured to have different tendencies. For example, in the case of the red pending display for production of the fluctuation or the first pending display just before digestion, the action at the start of fluctuation is always executed, but the white (normal) In the case of pending display, it is configured so that the action at the start of the fluctuation is not necessarily executed, and in the case of the red pending display for production of the relevant fluctuation and the first pending display immediately before digestion, the white (normal) fluctuation than in the case of the pending display for production and the first pending display just before digestion, or the ratio of execution of the action at the start of the fluctuation is higher, or the pending display for production of the red fluctuation In the case of 1 suspension display, the ratio of execution of action B at the start of fluctuation is higher than in the case of white (normal) suspension display for effecting the change or the first suspension display immediately before digestion. , In the case of the white (normal) pending display for the production of the fluctuation and the first pending display just before digestion, the fluctuation start time is higher than the red pending display for production of the relevant fluctuation and the first pending display just before digestion. It is configured such that the rate at which action A is executed is high.

When enlarging by action (action at the start of fluctuation, fixed position action, tenpai action), the enlargement ratios of the first element and the second element may be different. For example, the magnification rate of the first element may be 1.4 times and the magnification rate of the second element may be 1.1 times, or only the first element may be enlarged and the second element may not be enlarged. As for the swing action, the amount of swing movement may differ between the first element and the second element. For example, if the display area of the first element is 1, the amount of movement of the first element swings left and right by 0.1. In this case, it may be swung left and right by 0.2 (or 0.05). However, it is desirable that the time required for one oscillation (period of one oscillation) is the same for both the first element and the second element.

In the explanation so far, as the display mode of the first decorative symbol in each action, game state, and stage, the display modes such as "numbers only" and "numbers + characters" have been described. A third element may be added to the display mode of "numbers + characters". For example, in the case of only "numbers", "numbers+effects" may be used, and in the case of "numbers+characters", "numbers+characters+effects" may be used.

12 and 13, the determination of the variation pattern of the first main game symbols depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (the first main game side The variation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations), and the determination of the variation pattern of the second main game pattern depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side, whether in the time shortened game state or the non-time shortened game state. (The fluctuation selection tendency differs according to the number of reservations on the second main game side), but the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the first main game symbol is the reservation on the first main game side in the time reduction game state. It does not depend on the number (variation selection tendency is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side), but in the non-time reduction game state it depends on the number of reservations on the first main game side (the number of reservations on the first main game side The variation selection tendency differs depending on the number of reservations), and the determination of the variation pattern of the second main game pattern depends on the number of reservations on the second main game side in the time reduction game state (depending on the number of reservations on the second main game side). However, in the non-time-reduced game state, it does not depend on the number of reservations on the second main game side (the tendency of fluctuation selection is the same regardless of the number of reservations on the second main game side). You may

Suspension 4→3, Suspension 3→2, Suspension 2→1, Suspension 1→0, Suspension 4→3, Suspension 3→2, Suspension 2→1, Suspension 1→0 The determination of the variation mode and the symbol variation in the lottery table for use correspond as follows. When the hold is 4→3 and the hold is 4→3, the change mode is determined by referring to the number of holds=3 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the determined variation mode is used to determine the pattern variation. is set to run. When the hold is 3→2 and the hold is 3→2, the variation mode is determined by referring to the number of holds=2 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the determined variation mode is used to determine the pattern variation. is set to run. When the hold is 2→1 and the hold is 2→1, the variation mode is determined by referring to the number of holds=1 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the determined variation mode is used to determine the pattern variation. is set to run. When the hold is 1→0 and the hold 1→0, the variation mode is determined by referring to the number of holds=0 in determining the variation mode in the variation mode determination lottery table, and the determined variation mode is used to determine the pattern variation. is set to run.

In FIG. 127, the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen are displayed separately. good too.

In FIGS. 143 to 167, the first pending display on the first main game side and the second pending display on the first main game side have been described, but the first pending display on the second main game side has been described. And it may be configured to display the second pending display on the second main game side as well.

Further, in FIGS. 143 to 167, an example in which the ready-to-win mode is set in the second decorative pattern has been described, but a configuration in which the ready-to-reach mode is not set in the second decorative pattern (always fluctuating until the final stop) may be employed. .

<<Configuration Related to Display Device>>
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the first main game symbol display unit A21g), which is a display device that mainly displays the first main game symbols, is used as the display device on the main control board side. and a first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h), and a second main game symbol display device B20 (a second main game symbol display portion B21g and a symbol display device comprising a second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h), and an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 which is a display device that mainly displays auxiliary game symbols (an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game A symbol display device including a symbol reservation display portion H21h) and three display devices, but the configuration (position, size, shape, etc.) is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which the display device on the side of the main control board that displays the first main game symbols, the second main game symbols, the auxiliary game symbols, etc., which is different from the configuration described above, is used as one display device will be described in detail below. . Further, although the details will be described later, the following configuration also includes a display device on the sub-control board side. It should be noted that one or more configurations detailed below may be applied to all configurations in this specification without any problem.

First, FIG. 182 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this example. The difference from this embodiment is that a main display device MH20 controlled by the main control board M and a sub display device SH20 controlled by the sub control board S are provided. The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment are the main display devices in this example. It is part of the device MH20, and the details of the main display device MH20 will be described later.

Also, when the big win starts, a round indicator lamp R10 for notifying the number of rounds to be executed in the big win with two 7 segments, and a sticker showing the correspondence between the round indicator lamp R10 and the number of rounds of the big win. and a round display portion R20.

<Display device on the main control board side>
Next, FIG. 183 shows the detailed configuration of the display device. The main display device MH20 of (a) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g, a first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h, and a second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h. , the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and the auxiliary game symbol reserve display portion H21h are integrated.

The first main game symbol display portion A21g is composed of eight lamps. Here, the lamp in this example is a display window through which the player can visually recognize the lighting from the outside of the gaming machine when the LED inside the display unit lights up. , the area visible to the player so that the player can recognize blinking and turning off), the larger the area through which the light of the LED is transmitted. The number of display windows corresponding to each LED inside the display unit is present (for example, if there are eight LEDs, a display window is provided for each of the eight LEDs, and the total number of display windows is there will be 8). Further, lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the lamp means that the player seems to be lighting, blinking, and extinguishing through the display window. Here, lighting means that the LED is emitting light (e.g., emitting light for 10 ms or more), and extinguishing means that the LED is not emitting light (e.g., not emitting light for 10 ms or longer). indicates that the LED repeats light emission and non-light emission at predetermined time intervals (for example, 20 ms intervals). In blinking, the light emission and non-light emission times may be different (for example, the light emission may be 20 ms and the light extinguishing may be 40 ms). In addition, it is supplemented that "lighting" described later may include "lighting" in "blinking" ("lighting" in repetition of "lighting" and "lighting out" may also be included). . As an example, when it is described that lamp A and lamp B are lit in the same color for a certain period, lamp A continues lighting for a certain period, and lamp B continues lighting for a certain period. lamp A blinks in a certain period (for example, 20 ms on → 20 ms off → 20 ms on . . . ), and lamp B blinks in a certain period (for example, 20 ms on → 20 ms off → 20 ms It may be applied to the color to be lit (the color to be lit for 20 ms) in the case of lighting. Note that the lamp or the display window may be referred to as an area in which lighting of the lamp is visible.

A combination of "lighting/flashing/lighting out" or a combination of "lighting/lighting out" may be referred to as a lighting pattern. Specifically, the following may be referred to as a lighting pattern.
(1) A combination of lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of multiple lamps at a certain timing (2) The pattern of lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of one lamp that changes in chronological order (3) Time sequence of multiple lamps The pattern of lighting, blinking, and extinguishing that changes with the above (1) to (3) may not include blinking.

Also, the size of the lamp indicates the size of the display window (the area through which the light of the LED is transmitted), as described above. As described above, blinking means that the LED repeats light emission and non-light emission at predetermined time intervals, that is, repeats lighting and extinguishing at predetermined time intervals. Although the predetermined time for blinking is set to a certain time or more (for example, a time of 20 ms or more), when the LED is lit by dynamic lighting, that is, an extremely short interval (for example, an interval of 4 ms, which is an interval of less than 20 ms) ) is called lighting for the sake of convenience, when it appears to be lit instead of blinking by repeating lighting and extinguishing. As an example, when the LED is blinked at intervals of 20 ms in dynamic lighting, the lighting pattern is such as "20 ms lighting → 20 ms lighting → 20 ms lighting...". Lighting and turning off are repeated at intervals of time (for example, intervals of 4 ms, which are less than 20 ms), but are referred to as lighting for convenience.

The first main game symbol display portion A21g is composed of eight lamps. The first main game symbol display portion A21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the first main game symbol. When the first main game symbols are stopped, the first main game symbol display section A21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the stopped symbols, and when the first main game symbols are fluctuating (for example, 10 pertaining to the main game symbol display process to step 1423 in FIG. 10), lighting is performed in a lighting pattern indicating that the variation is in progress. In addition, when the first main game symbol is stopped, the eight lamps are lit in a combination of lighting and extinguishing of one (a combination of lighting and extinguishing of a plurality of lamps is sometimes referred to as a lighting pattern). On the other hand, in a situation where the first main game symbols are fluctuating, the eight lamps are configured to light while changing the combination of lighting and extinguishing every predetermined time. As an example, in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped with a jackpot symbol, the eight lamps are "○○○●●●○○" (the upper left lamp of the eight lamps in FIG. , are written clockwise, ○ indicates lights off, ● indicates lights on), and in a situation where the first main game pattern is stopped with a losing pattern, the eight lamps are "○●●○○ ○○○", and in the situation where the first main game pattern is fluctuating, the eight lamps are changed to "●○○○○○○○→○●○○○○○○→○○●○○○○ ○→○○○●○○○○ . Another aspect of the situation where the first main game symbol is fluctuating is "●●●●●●●●→○○○○○○○○→●●●●●●●●→○○ ○○○○○○ .

The second main game symbol display portion B21g is composed of eight lamps. The second main game symbol display portion B21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the second main game symbols. When the second main game symbols are stopped, the second main game symbol display section B21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the stopped symbols, and when the second main game symbols are fluctuating (for example, the 10 relating to the second main game symbol display process to step 1423 in FIG. 10), lighting is performed in a lighting pattern indicating that the variation is in progress. Also, in the situation where the second main game symbols are stopped, the eight lamps are lit in one combination of lighting and extinguishing (a combination of lighting and extinguishing of a plurality of lamps is sometimes referred to as a lighting pattern). On the other hand, in a situation where the second main game symbols are fluctuating, the eight lamps are configured to light while changing the combination of lighting and extinguishing every predetermined time. As an example, in a situation where the second main game symbol is stopped with a jackpot symbol, the 8 lamps are "○○○●●●○○" (the upper left lamp of the 8 lamps in FIG. , are written clockwise, ○ indicates lights off, ● indicates lights on), and in a situation where the second main game pattern is stopped with a losing pattern, the eight lamps will be "○●●○○ ○○○", and in the situation where the second main game pattern is changing, the eight lamps are changed to "●○○○○○○○→○●○○○○○○→○○●○○○○ ○→○○○●○○○○ . Also, as another aspect of the situation where the second main game symbol is fluctuating, "●●●●●●●●→○○○○○○○○→●●●●●●●●→○○ ○○○○○○ .

The first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h is composed of two lamps. Up to 4 holds on the first main game side can be stored, and 0 to 4 holds are indicated by two lamps. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184, the lighting pattern is as follows.
0 pending: 2 lamps are off. 1 pending: 1 lamp (upper A21h) lights up, 1 lamp (lower A21h) is off pending 2: 2. When 3 lamps are on hold: 1 lamp (upper A21h) blinks, 1 lamp (lower A21h) is on hold 4 lamps: 2 lamps blink Like this, By configuring so that when one lamp is lit, it indicates one pending item, and when one lamp is blinking, it indicates two pending items, one lamp notifies two pending items. and 2 lamps can signal 0 to 4 pending numbers (more pending numbers than lamps). It should be noted that the number of lamps in the first main game symbol reserved display portion A21h is only an example, and the number of reserved lamps is notified only by lighting and extinguishing of four lamps. There is no problem in changing it, such as indicating 1 piece, and if 1 lamp is blinking, it indicates 1 piece pending. In the case of one hold, one lamp (lower A21h) lights up and one lamp (upper A21h) goes out; in the case of three holds, one lamp (lower A21h) A21h) blinks and one lamp (upper A21h) lights up.

Returning to the description of FIG. 183, the second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h is composed of two lamps. Up to 4 holds on the second main game side can be stored, and 0 to 4 holds are indicated by two lamps. The lighting pattern is the same as that of the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h. It should be noted that the number of lamps in the second main game symbol reserved display portion B21h is only an example, and the number of reserved lamps is notified only by lighting and extinguishing of four lamps. There is no problem in changing it, such as indicating 1 piece, and if 1 lamp is blinking, it indicates 1 piece pending. In the case of one hold, one lamp (lower B21h) lights up and one lamp (upper B21h) goes out. In the case of three holds, one lamp (lower B21h) B21h) blinks and one lamp (B21h on the upper side) lights up.

The auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h is composed of two lamps. Up to four reserves on the auxiliary game side can be stored, and two lamps indicate the status of 0 to 4 reserves. The lighting pattern is the same as that of the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h. It should be noted that the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol reserved display portion H21h is only an example, and the number of reserved lamps is notified only by lighting and extinguishing of four lamps. There is no problem in changing it, for example, if one lamp is blinking, it indicates one pending. In addition, there is no problem even if the upper limit of the number of reservations that can be stored on the auxiliary game side is changed.

The auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g is composed of four lamps. The auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the auxiliary game symbols. In the situation where the auxiliary game design is stopped, it lights up in the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop design, and the situation where the auxiliary game design is fluctuating (for example, from step 1222 in FIG. 7 to step 1226 in FIG. 7 fluctuates ), the light is lit in a lighting pattern indicating that the light is fluctuating. Further, in a situation where the auxiliary game patterns are stopped, the four lamps are configured to be lit by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of 1, while in a situation where the auxiliary game patterns are fluctuating, 4 lamps are turned on. The lamps are configured to be lit while changing the combination of lighting and extinguishing at predetermined time intervals. As an example, in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol hits and stops at symbol A, the four lamps are “●●●●” (the upper left lamp of the four lamps in FIG. , ○ indicates lights off, ● indicates lights on), and in the situation where the auxiliary game pattern hits and stops at pattern B, the four lamps become "●●○○", and the auxiliary game pattern is In the situation where the winning symbol C is stopped, the four lamps become "○○●●", and in the situation where the auxiliary game symbol is stopped with the losing symbol, the four lamps become "○○○○". , In the situation where the auxiliary game pattern is fluctuating, the four lamps are 1 It may be configured such that only one lamp is lit and the lamps that are lit clockwise are changed. In addition, as another aspect of the situation in which the auxiliary game pattern is fluctuating, four lamps are displayed like "●●●●→○○○○→●●●●→○○○○..." It may be configured to blink at the same time. In the case of such a configuration, when the winning symbol A of the auxiliary game symbol stops in the time shortening game state, the opening pattern of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d becomes "open for 5 seconds→close". , When the winning symbol B of the auxiliary game symbol stops in the time shortening game state, the opening pattern of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is "open for 2 seconds→close for 1 second→open for 2 seconds→close". Therefore, when the winning symbol C of the auxiliary game symbol stops in the time shortening game state, the opening pattern of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is "1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed→1 second open→closed", and in the non-time shortening game state, even if any of the auxiliary game symbols A to C stops, the opening pattern of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is "0. It may be configured so as to be “open for 1 second→closed”.

A first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g, a first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h, and a second All the lamps of the main game symbol reservation display portion B21h, the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g, and the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h have the same size (the area of the display window is the same), and all the lamps have the same size. They are configured to light up and flash in the same color (for example, red). In addition, it is not limited to this, and the size, lighting color, and blinking color of some of the lamps may be different (for example, the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g in the main display device MH20 and the second main game The lamp of the symbol display portion B21g is made larger than the lamps of the other display portions in the main display device MH20, and the lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g and the lamp of the second main game symbol display portion B21g in the main display device MH20. may be red, and the lamps of other display units in the main display device MH20 may be blue).

<Display device on the sub control board side>
Next, (b) of FIG. 183 illustrates the sub-display device SH20, and the sub-display device SH20 includes a first sub-symbol display portion AS21g, a second sub-symbol display portion BS21g, and a first sub-hold display. This is a display device in which the portion AS21h and the second sub-hold display portion BS21h are integrated.

The first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is composed of one lamp. The first sub-symbol display portion AS21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the first main game symbol. In a situation where the first main game pattern is stopped as a jackpot pattern, lighting is continued, and in a situation where the first main game pattern is stopped as a losing pattern, lighting is continued and the first main game pattern fluctuates. (for example, a situation in which steps 1417 in FIG. 10 to step 1423 in FIG. 10 relating to the first main game symbol display process are fluctuating), the blinking continues. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g may be composed of a plurality of lamps. In addition, the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g may be referred to as a stop display to light up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the situation in which the first main game symbol is stopped. The fact that the sub-symbol display unit AS21g continues to light up or that it continues to go out may be referred to as stop display.

Further, when the first main game symbol is stopped as a big hit symbol, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The first main game symbol is stopped as a jackpot symbol, and the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g lights up.
(2) A big win is executed, and the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g remains illuminated even during the big win. When power failure occurs during the big win, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display part AS21g is extinguished, and when the power is restored thereafter, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display part AS21g remains extinguished even during the big win. .
(3-1) When neither the first main game side nor the second main game side has a hold at the end of the big win, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g remains illuminated even after the big win. After that, when a predetermined time elapses without symbol variation being executed, a standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG (a game standby state is entered). When the lamp of the first sub-symbol display part AS21g remains lit and the power is cut off, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display part AS21g is extinguished, and when the power is restored after that, the first sub-symbol display is performed. The lamp of the part AS21g remains off.
(3-2) When the first main game side is held at the end of the jackpot, and the second main game side is not held, after the jackpot ends, the first main game symbols start to fluctuate. Then, the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first sub symbol display portion AS21g is switched from lighting to blinking. When the power is cut off from this state, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is extinguished, and when the power is restored thereafter, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g remains extinguished.
(3-3) When the first main game side is not held at the end of the big win, but the second main game side is held, the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g remains displayed even after the big win. The lamp remains lit, and the lighting pattern of the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g, which will be described later, switches from lighting to blinking. When the power is cut off from this state, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g are extinguished. The lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g remains off.
It may be configured as described above.

Further, when the first main game symbol is stopped as a losing symbol, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The first main game symbol stops at a losing symbol, and the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is turned off.
(2-1) After the first main game symbol has stopped with a losing symbol, if no hold has occurred on either the first main game side or the second main game side, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g has been extinguished. remain. After that, when a predetermined time elapses without symbol variation being executed, a standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG (a game standby state is entered).
(2-2) After the first main game symbols stop with the losing symbols, if a hold on the first main game side occurs, the first sub-symbol display section is triggered by the start of fluctuation of the first main game symbols. The lighting pattern of the lamp of the AS 21g switches from off to blinking.
(3) If the lamp of the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g remains unlit and the power is cut off, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g remains unlit. , the lamp of the first sub symbol display portion AS21g remains off.
It may be configured as described above.

Further, during the symbol variation (during the jackpot variation) in which the first main game symbols are stopped at the big win symbols, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g blinks during the big hit variation of the first main game symbols.
(2-1) When the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g remains blinking and the power is cut off, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is extinguished. The lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g remains unlit, and after that, when the jackpot variation of the first main game pattern ends and the jackpot symbols stop, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g lights up. It remains lit even during execution of the big win.
(2-2) When the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g remains blinking and the power is cut off, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is extinguished. The lamp of the first sub-symbol display part AS21g remains extinguished, and after that, even if the jackpot variation of the first main game pattern ends and the jackpot pattern stops, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display part AS21g remains extinguished. , the light remains off even during execution of the jackpot.
It may be configured as described above. The above-described configurations may be combined, for example, a configuration regarding during the big hit fluctuation and a configuration regarding during the execution of the big win may be combined.

Also, the lighting pattern of the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g is not limited to the above configuration. In a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped with a losing symbol, it continues to light up in green, that is, depending on the lighting color of the lamp, the first main game symbol is either stopped with a big winning symbol or stopped with a losing symbol. It may be configured to notify whether there is. In this configuration, when the first main game symbols are fluctuating, it is desirable that the lighting pattern of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is flashing in green.

The second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is composed of one lamp. The second sub-symbol display portion BS21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the second main game symbol. In a situation where the second main game pattern is stopped as a jackpot pattern, lighting is continued, and in a situation where the second main game pattern is stopped as a losing pattern, lighting is continued, and the second main game pattern fluctuates. (for example, a situation in which step 1417 in FIG. 10 to step 1423 in FIG. 10 relating to the second main game symbol display process are fluctuating), the flashing continues. In this way, since the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is a single lamp, it is possible to notify whether the lighting pattern is fluctuating or stopped, but the lighting pattern during the stop continues to be extinguished. However, it is configured so that the stop symbol cannot be notified by the lighting pattern. The second sub-symbol display portion BS21g may be composed of a plurality of lamps without being limited to this. In addition, the fact that the second sub-symbol display part BS21g lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the situation in which the second main game symbols are stopped may be referred to as a stop display. The fact that the sub-symbol display part BS21g continues to light up or that it continues to go out may be referred to as stop display.

In addition, when the second main game symbols are stopped in the jackpot symbols, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The second main game symbol is stopped as a jackpot symbol, and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g lights up.
(2) A big win is executed, and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains illuminated even during the big win. When power failure occurs during the big win, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is extinguished, and when the power is restored thereafter, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains extinguished even during the big win. .
(3-1) When neither the first main game side nor the second main game side is suspended at the end of the big win, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains illuminated even after the big win. After that, when a predetermined time elapses without symbol variation being executed, a standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG (a game standby state is entered). When the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains lit and the power supply is interrupted, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is extinguished, and when the power is restored thereafter, the second sub-symbol display is displayed. The lamp of part BS21g remains off.
(3-2) If a hold on the first main game side has occurred at the end of the big win but no hold on the second main game side has occurred, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g will remain even after the big win ends. remains lit, and the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first sub symbol display portion AS21g is switched from lighting to blinking. When the power is cut off from this state, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g are extinguished. The lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g remains off.
(3-3) When the second main game side is held at the end of the jackpot, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g lights up when the second main game pattern starts to fluctuate after the jackpot ends. The lighting pattern changes from flashing to flashing. When the power is cut off from this state, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is extinguished, and when the power is restored thereafter, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains extinguished.
It may be configured as described above.

In addition, when the second main game symbols stop with the losing symbols, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The second main game symbol is stopped as a losing symbol, and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is turned off.
(2-1) After the 2nd main game symbols stop with the losing symbols, the lamp of the 2nd sub-symbol display part BS21g is extinguished when neither the 1st main game side nor the 2nd main game side is held. remain. After that, when a predetermined time elapses without symbol variation being executed, a standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG (game standby state).
(2-2) After the second main game symbols stop with the losing symbols, if a hold on the second main game side occurs, the second sub-symbol display section is triggered by the start of fluctuation of the second main game symbols. The lighting pattern of the lamp of the BS 21g is switched from off to blinking.
(3) If the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains unlit and the power supply is interrupted, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains extinguished. , the lamp of the second sub symbol display portion BS21g remains off.
It may be configured as described above.

In addition, during the symbol fluctuation (during the jackpot fluctuation) in which the second main game symbols are stopped at the big win symbols, the following configuration may be adopted.
(1) The lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g blinks during the big hit variation of the second main game symbols.
(2-1) When the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g remains blinking and the power is cut off, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is extinguished. The lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains unlit, and after that, when the jackpot variation of the second main game pattern is completed and the jackpot pattern stops, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is lit. It remains lit even during execution of the big win.
(2-2) When the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g remains blinking and the power is cut off, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is extinguished. The lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains extinguished, and after that, even if the jackpot variation of the second main game pattern is terminated and the jackpot pattern stops, the lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g remains extinguished. , the light remains off even during the execution of the jackpot.
It may be configured as described above. The above-described configurations may be combined, for example, a configuration regarding during the big hit fluctuation and a configuration regarding during the execution of the big win may be combined.

Also, the lighting pattern of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is not limited to the above configuration. In a situation where the second main game pattern is stopped with a losing pattern, the lighting continues in green, that is, depending on the lighting color of the lamp, the second main game pattern is either stopped with a big win pattern or stopped with a losing pattern. It may be configured to notify whether there is. In this configuration, when the second main game symbols are changing, it is desirable that the lighting pattern of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is flashing in green.

The first sub-symbol display unit AS21g is configured to blink while the first main game symbols are changing. The first sub-symbol display portion AS21g may be configured to blink even during the period in which the symbol is displayed. In this configuration, the flickering interval of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is shorter than the period during which the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous symbol.

In addition, the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is configured to blink while the second main game symbols are changing, but during the second main game patterns changing, the first decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a pseudo continuous pattern. The second sub-symbol display section BS21g may be configured to blink even during the period in which the second symbol display section BS21g is displayed. In this configuration, the flickering interval of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is shorter than the period during which the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous symbol.

The first sub-hold display portion AS21h is composed of two lamps. Up to 4 holds on the first main game side can be stored, and the states of 0 to 4 holds are indicated by two lamps. More specifically, the lighting pattern is as follows (similar to FIG. 184).
0 pending: 2 lamps are off. 1 pending: 1 lamp (left AS 21h) lights up, 1 lamp (right AS 21h) is off pending 2: 2 lamps. When 3 lamps are on hold: 1 lamp (left AS21h) flashes, 1 lamp (right AS21h) is on hold 4 lamps: 2 lamps flash In this way, 1 lamp When the lamp is lit, it indicates 1 pending, and when 1 lamp is blinking, it indicates 2 pending, so that the 2 lamps indicate 0 to 4 pending numbers can be notified. The number of lamps in the first sub-hold display portion AS21h is merely an example, and the number of lamps on hold is indicated only by turning on and off the four lamps. There is no problem in changing it, for example, if one lamp is blinking, it indicates one pending. In the case of 1 hold, 1 lamp (right AS 21h) lights up and 1 lamp (left AS 21h) goes out, and in the case of 3 holds, 1 lamp (right AS 21h) blinks and one lamp (left AS 21h) lights up.

In addition, in a predetermined display area of the effect display device SG, a display section corresponding to the holding of the first main game side (the first main game side second hold display) may be provided. Further, the first sub pending display portion AS21h and the second pending display (displayed in a predetermined display area of the effect display device SG) may be provided, or only one of them may be provided. In this example, the configuration having only the first sub-holding display portion AS21h will be described in detail. I will add that there is no problem even if it is configured.

The second sub-hold display section BS21h is composed of two lamps. Up to 4 holds on the second main game side can be stored, and 0 to 4 holds are indicated by two lamps. The lighting pattern of the second sub-suspension display section BS21h is the same as that of the first sub-suspension display section AS21h. It should be noted that the number of lamps in the second sub-hold display section BS21h is only an example, and the number of reservations is notified only by lighting and extinguishing of four lamps. There is no problem in changing it, for example, if one lamp is blinking, it indicates one pending. In the case of 1 hold, 1 lamp (right BS 21h) lights up, 1 lamp (left BS 21h) goes out, and in the case of 3 holds, 1 lamp (right BS 21h) blinks and one lamp (BS 21h on the left) lights up.

In addition, in a predetermined display area of the effect display device SG, a display section corresponding to the hold of the second main game side (the second hold display) may be provided. Further, it may have the second sub-holding display portion BS21h and the second holding display (displayed in a predetermined display area of the effect display device SG), or may have only one of them. In this example, the configuration having only the second sub-holding display portion BS21h will be described in detail. I will add that there is no problem even if it is configured.

A first sub-symbol display portion AS21g, a second sub-symbol display portion BS21g, a first sub-suspension display portion AS21h, and a second sub-suspension display portion AS21h, which constitute the sub-display device SH20 shown in (b) of FIG. The BS 21h is configured so that all the lamps have the same size (the area of the display window is the same), and all the lamps light and blink in the same color. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the size, lighting color, and flashing color of some of the lamps of the sub-display device SH20 may be different (for example, the lamps of the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g in the sub-display device SH20 may be different). The lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is made larger than the lamps of the other display portions of the sub-display device SH20, and the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g and the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g of the sub-display device SH20 The lamp may be red, and the lamps of other display units in the sub-display device SH20 may be blue). However, it is preferable that the size of each lamp on the sub-display device SH20 is larger than the size of each lamp on the main display device MH20.

Further, as described above, in this example, all the eight lamps of the main display device MH20 have the same size, all the eight lamps of the sub-display device SH20 have the same size, and the main display device MH20 are configured to be smaller than the respective lamps configuring the sub-display device SH20. In addition, in the case where the sizes of the lamps in one display device are not all the same, the smallest lamp of the sub-display device SH20 is configured to be larger than the largest lamp of the main display device MH20. Alternatively, the average size of the lamps of the sub-display device SH20 may be larger than the average size of the lamps of the main display device MH20. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the lamp on the main control board side (the lamp on the main display device MH20) and the lamp on the sub control board side (the lamp on the sub display device SH20) by the size. It is possible to prevent a player from confusing which of the lamps on the control board side is the lamp on the sub control board side. In addition, by increasing the size of the lamp on the sub control board side and configuring it with a single lamp, it is possible to ensure sufficient visibility in a limited board surface area, while on the other hand, on the main control board side By reducing the size of the lamp and constructing it with a plurality of lamps, it is possible to realize various combinations when indicating the stop pattern. Furthermore, by making the lamps on the sub-control board side more conspicuous than the lamps on the main control board side (with different sizes), the lamps on the main control board side (main display device MH20) can be watched. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the result of a game becomes easily recognized. In this specification, the term “same”, such as lamps having the same size, is not limited to being exactly the same, and may be substantially the same.

In addition, the lamp of the main display device MH20 and the lamp of the sub display device SH20 are lit and blinked in red, while the lamp of the sub display device SH20 is lit and blinked in green. You may make a lighting color and a lighting color differ by . With this configuration, it is possible to easily distinguish between the lamps on the main control board side and the lamps on the sub control board side. Note that the configuration may be applied to all lamps, or may be applied to only some of the lamps. As an example of application to only some lamps, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h and the second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h light up and blink in red, while the first sub-reservation display The portion AS21h and the second sub-holding display portion BS21h may be configured to light up/flash in green (in this case, the lamps on the main control board side and the lamps on the sub control board side other than this may all light up in red). is desirable, but green or any other color is acceptable). As another preferred example, of the lamps of the main display device MH20 and the lamps of the sub display device SH20, only the lamp of the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g and the lamp of the second sub-symbol display unit BS21g are lit in green. It is possible to flash, and the other lamps are configured to light up and flash only in red. It is configured so that it lights up in red, lights up in green when it stops with a losing pattern, and flashes in green when it is fluctuating. In this way, when the game is fluctuating, it is flashed in a color different from the lighting color when stopping with a winning pattern, so that it is possible to clearly indicate that the game is fluctuating and whether it is a win or a loss is not decided yet.

Also, the number of types of lighting colors and blinking colors of the lamps may be different between the lamps on the main control board side and the lamps on the sub control board side. For example, the lamp of the main display device MH20 may light and flash only in red, while the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 may light and flash in either green or blue (or green and red). (It may be turned on or blinked by either of the above). Note that the configuration may be applied to all lamps, or may be applied to only some of the lamps. As an example of application to only some lamps, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h and the second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h light up and blink in red, while the first sub-reservation display The portion AS21h and the second sub-hold display portion BS21h may be configured to light/blink in green and blue (or green and red). Also, the number of types of lighting colors and flashing colors of the lamps may be two for the main control board side and three for the sub control board side, or one for the main control board side and one for the sub control board side. There may be two types of lamps on the board side, or three types of lamps on the main control board side and two types of lamps on the sub control board side. The number of types of lighting colors/blinking colors of the lamp means the number of types of lighting colors/blinking colors that can be used for one type of lamp (for example, the number of types of lighting colors/blinking colors of the first main game symbol holding display portion A21h of the main display device MH20). The number of types of lighting colors and blinking colors that can be used by a lamp), or the number of types of lighting colors and blinking colors that can be used by a plurality of types of lamps (for example, the number of types of lighting colors and blinking colors that can be used by a plurality of types of lamps) number of possible lighting/blinking colors).

In this way, by using one color (or relatively fewer) for the lamps on the main control board side, it becomes difficult to distinguish the lamps corresponding to the respective display units, and it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the results of the game. At the same time, by using a plurality of colors (or relatively increasing the number of lamps) on the sub-control board side, the lamps corresponding to the respective display sections can be easily distinguished, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Also, as shown in FIG. 183, the number of lamps in the first main game symbol display portion A21g is eight, the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g is four, and the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g is four. The number of lamps in the first main game symbol display portion A21g is greater than the number of lamps. Also, the number of lamps in the second main game symbol display portion B21g is 8, and the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g is 4, which is second than the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. The number of lamps in the main game symbol display portion B21g is greater. With this configuration, when a player who is more interested in the symbol variations of the main game symbols than the symbol variations of the auxiliary game symbols visually recognizes the main display device MH20, the main game symbol display unit (first The main game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g may be collectively referred to as the main game symbol display portion). As shown in FIG. 183, the number of lamps in the main game symbol display portion (first main game symbol display portion A21g and second main game symbol display portion B21g) is greater than the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. (total number of lamps) may be increased, and the number of lamps related to main game symbols may be greater than the number of lamps related to auxiliary game symbols.

In addition, the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g is four, the number of lamps in the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is one, and the number of lamps in the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is greater than the number of lamps in the auxiliary game. The number of lamps in the pattern display portion H21g is greater. In addition, the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g is four, the number of lamps in the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is one, and the number of lamps in the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is greater than the number of lamps in the auxiliary game. The number of lamps in the pattern display portion H21g is greater. With this configuration, the lamps of the sub-symbol display section on the sub-control board side (the first sub-symbol display section AS21g and the second sub-symbol display section BS21g may be collectively referred to as the sub-symbol display section). is less than the number of lamps in the main game symbol display section on the main control board side, as well as the number of lamps in the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g on the main control board side. The game pattern display part can be made more conspicuous. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 183, the number of lamps in the sub-symbol display portion (total number of lamps of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g and the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g) is larger than the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. may be configured to increase the number of lamps.

<Lighting pattern of the main game pattern display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an example of the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g will be described in detail. First, in (1) in the figure, the first main game symbol has stopped losing symbols, and four lamps are lit. After that, when the first main game symbols start to change, "(2)->(3)->(4)->(5)->(6)->(2)->(3) . . ." The first main game symbol display portion A21g is lit in a lighting pattern in which the lit lamps are switched (for example, 50 ms). Here, no matter what kind of stop pattern (including not only losing symbols but also winning symbols) of the first main game symbols (no matter what the combination pattern of lighting and extinguishing is), the first main game When the pattern starts to change, the change immediately after the start of the change is always (2) in FIG. This is the same for the second main game symbols. In this example, at least one of the lamps that are lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the variation of the first main game symbols. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. configured to turn off.

Further, when the first main game symbols are stopped, the first decorative symbols are stopped, the second decorative symbols are stopped, and the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g is lit or extinguished corresponding to the stop display. there is Further, during the variation of the first main game symbols, the first decorative symbols are being varied, the second decorative symbols are being varied, and the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is blinking corresponding to the variation. there is

Further, when the second main game symbols are stopped, the first decorative symbols are stopped, the second decorative symbols are stopped, and the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is lit or extinguished corresponding to the stop display. there is Further, during the variation of the second main game symbols, the first decorative symbols are being varied, the second decorative symbols are being varied, and the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is blinking corresponding to the variation. there is

For this reason, the present example may be configured as follows.
(1) At least one of the lamps of the first main game symbol display area A21g that is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the first main game side on the effect display device SG. The piece is configured to light up once when the first decorative symbol is in the process of changing corresponding to the first main game side.
(2) The first main game symbol display portion A21g is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the big win on the first main game side on the effect display device SG. At least one of the lamps is configured to light up once when the first decorative symbol is fluctuating corresponding to the first main game side.
(3) The lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is turned off when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the first main game side on the performance display device SG. ing.
(4) The lamp of the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the big win on the first main game side on the effect display device SG. ing.
(5) At least one of the lamps of the second main game symbol display portion B21g that is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the second main game side on the effect display device SG. The piece is configured to light up once when the first decorative symbol is in the process of changing corresponding to the second main game side.
(6) The second main game symbol display portion B21g is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the big win on the second main game side on the effect display device SG. At least one of the lamps is configured to light up once when the first decorative symbol is fluctuating corresponding to the second main game side.
(7) The lamp of the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is turned off when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the second main game side on the effect display device SG. ing.
(8) The lamp of the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the big win on the second main game side on the effect display device SG. ing.

It should be noted that the display mode corresponding to the loss of the first main game side of the first decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is a specific mode (for example, a mode other than doubles such as "253" and "121"). The display mode corresponding to the loss of the second main game side of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG is specified in a specific mode (for example, other than double numbers such as "253" and "121"). mode).

In addition, when switching the lit lamps from (2) to (3) in FIG. 185, the lit lamps may be switched directly like "(2)→(3)". Alternatively, it may be configured to go through a state in which all the lamps are turned off, such as "(2)→all turned off→(3)".

In this way, for the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp both when indicating a loss (when indicating the stop of a losing pattern) and when fluctuating, With the flow of stopping, it is possible to avoid the situation where all the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g are turned off, and it is possible to make a configuration that does not cause discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to guarantee the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and is subject to board restrictions. It is difficult and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Furthermore, regarding the lamp on the main control board side, a common lamp (first main game symbol display part A21g or second main game symbol By using the display portion B21g), misidentification of the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g and other lamps as the lamps of the main display device MH20 can be made difficult. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. By configuring to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side is turned on as a lamp indicating the result of the game, and it is mistakenly recognized that two results of the game are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. You can prevent things from happening. Also, when the jackpot symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, and the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side also lights up. By configuring so as to do so, it is possible to clearly indicate the big win on both the main control board side and the sub-control board side, and to inform the player that the game ball should be shot into the big winning hole. It is possible to surely inform the player and prevent the player from leaving the seat without noticing that the big win is executed.

In the same figure, (2) to (6) are configured so that two lamps are lit, but this is only an example, and at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g is turned on. There is no problem even if it changes if it is made to light up. In this example, the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g during the variation of the first main game symbols is one. It is configured to have the same lighting pattern with different pattern variations. Also, depending on the fluctuation time, the time from the start of fluctuation (from fluctuation) to the flow of stopping with a losing pattern or a winning pattern is different, so the number of cycles of the lighting pattern may differ, and the losing pattern or winning pattern 185 (for example, (2) or (4) in FIG. 185) may be different.

Also, in this example, the case where there is only one missing symbol was exemplified. Even in the case of such a configuration, at least one of the lamps lit when the losing symbols are stopped in all the losing symbols is configured to light up once during the variation of the first main game symbols. You may The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display area A21g during the variation of the first main game symbols is configured to repeat "(2)→(3)→(4)→(5)→(6)". However, in this case, if the time from when it becomes (2) to when it becomes (2) again is the time of one cycle (50 × 5 = 250 ms in FIG. 185), the time of one cycle At least one of the lamps lit when the losing symbols are stopped may be lit once during the variation of the first main game symbols. For example, if there is a variation time that is shorter than the time of the one cycle, the symbol variation will end before the new (2) becomes (2) again. However, even in such a case, at least one of the lamps lit when the losing symbols are stopped is the first main game symbol in the symbol variation that takes a longer variation time than the time of the one cycle. It may be configured to light up once during the fluctuation. The same applies to the second main game symbol display portion B21g and the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Note that the time of one cycle may be referred to as one cycle or the time for one cycle.

In the figure, the first main game symbol display portion A21g is illustrated, but the second main game symbol display portion B21g and the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g are similarly illuminated when the losing symbols are stopped. At least one of may be configured to light once during fluctuation, and when the losing pattern stops, at least one lamp on the main control board side lights, while the lamp on the sub control board side may be configured to turn off.

<Configuration where the lamp on the auxiliary game side turns off when stopped>
Further, as a modification of the above-described configuration, when the first main game symbol is stopped with a losing symbol, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g is lit, and the second main game symbol is a losing symbol. At least one of the lamps of the second main game symbol display portion B21g is lit up when the symbol is stopped, while the auxiliary game symbol is displayed when the auxiliary game symbol is stopped due to a losing symbol. All the lamps in part H21g may be turned off. In addition, when the first main game symbols stop with the big winning symbols, at least one of the lamps of the first main game pattern display portion A21g is lit, and when the second main game symbols stop with the big winning symbols, At least one of the lamps of the second main game symbol display portion B21g lights up, and when the auxiliary game symbols stop at the hit symbol, at least one of the lamps of the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g lights up. good too. As described above, the winning symbols of the auxiliary game symbols include the winning symbol A, the winning symbol B and the winning symbol C. At least one may be configured to be lit.

With this configuration, a player who is interested in the result of the game visually recognizes the corresponding display device (first main game symbol display portion A21g or second main game symbol display portion B21g) when the main game symbols are stopped. In this case, since all the lamps of the display device (auxiliary game pattern display portion H21g) corresponding to the auxiliary game patterns are turned off, only the lamps corresponding to the main game patterns are visually recognized, making it easy to recognize the stop pattern. can do.

<Position of display device>
In addition, as shown in FIG. 182, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are provided at separate positions. It is located on the right side of the center of the board. In other words, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are provided on opposite sides of the first main game start port A10. By configuring in this way, misidentification of the display device on the main control board side and the display device on the sub control board side can be made difficult.

<Blink interval of the display device>
Even if the blinking interval of the lamp on the main display device MH20 and the blinking interval of the lamp on the sub-display device SH20 (the time required from one lighting to the next lighting in the repetition of “lighting → extinguishing → lighting . . . ”) are different, good. The blinking intervals of all the blinking lamps in main display device MH20 and all the blinking lamps in sub-display device SH20 may be different, or some lamps in main display device MH20 and some in sub-display device SH20 may be different. The flashing intervals of the lamps of the parts may be varied. As an example, the lamp of the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h in the main display device MH20 blinks at intervals of 50ms, while the lamp of the first sub-reservation display portion AS21h blinks at intervals of 100ms. 1 lamp of the first main game symbol display area A21g (for example, the upper left most lamp of the eight lamps of the first main game symbol display area A21g shown in FIG. 183) takes 50 ms. While the lamps of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g blink at intervals, the lamps of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g may be configured to blink at intervals of 100 ms, or the eight lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g are turned on and off. is switched (flashing) at intervals of 50 ms, the lamp of the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g may be configured to flash at intervals of 100 ms. By configuring in this way, misidentification of the display device on the main control board side and the display device on the sub control board side can be made difficult. In addition, the blinking of the lamp is not "on → off → on..." but "off → on → off...". (similar to the case of

The flashing intervals in the first main game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g may be defined as follows.
(1) The shortest time from a given lamp to the next lighting (2) Lighting and extinguishing of a plurality of lamps in the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) The interval at which the combination switches (for example, the interval from (2) to (3) in FIG. 185)

<Right shot lamp>
As a configuration different from that shown in FIG. 183, the main display device MH20 may be configured to have a right-handed lamp. The right-handed lamp has the same shape (size, etc.) and the same lighting color as other lamps of the main display device MH20, such as the lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g. In addition, the right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a right-handed strike should be executed (for example, a time-reduced game state or a jackpot is being executed), and a left-handed strike is performed in a game state (for example, a non-time-reduced game state). is configured so that the right-handed lamp is extinguished.

As a configuration different from that shown in FIG. 183, the sub display device SH20 may be configured to have a sub right-handed lamp. The sub-right-handed lamp has a different shape (size, etc.) from other lamps of the sub-display device SH20, such as the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g. The shape of the sub right-handed lamp may be different from the shape of the other lamps in the sub display device SH20. Further, the lighting color of the sub right-handed lamp may be the same as or different from that of the other lamps in the sub display device SH20.

With this configuration, the sub right-handed lamp is less likely to be confused with the lamps in the other sub display device SH20, and even if the lighting color is the same, it is easy to distinguish that it is a sub right-handed lamp. By making the right-handed lamp the same shape as the other lamps, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the result of the game. As a modification, the lighting color of the sub-right-handed lamp may be different from that of the other lamps in the sub-display device SH20, but may be the same shape as the other lamps in the sub-display device SH20.

<When power failure occurs during fluctuation>
A power failure occurs during symbol fluctuation of the main game symbols (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) (the interruption of the power supply to the gaming machine is called a power failure), and then , when the power is restored, the lamps of the main display device MH20 (first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g, first main game symbol reserve display portion A21h, second main game symbol reserve display portion A21h, The display portion B21h, the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g, and the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21h) are immediately restored (the timing immediately after the power-on is detected, sometimes referred to as the first timing after the power-on). is configured to As an example, if the power supply is interrupted while the first main game symbols are fluctuating, and then the power is restored, the first main game symbol display section A21g will display the continuation of the lighting pattern at the time of the power interruption from the first timing. It is configured to resume lighting and blinking. As a specific example, when the power supply is interrupted during the lighting display in (4) of FIG. If the power supply is interrupted during the lighting display of (4) and then the power is restored, the lighting display may be restarted from (5) in FIG. In this way, if the remaining variation time is not 0 after the power is restored, regardless of the length of the remaining variation time, the lamp of the main display device MH20 makes it possible to recognize that the pattern is changing. As a modified example, if the remaining variation time is not 0 after the power is restored, the lighting/blinking may always be restarted from (2) in FIG. 185 regardless of the lighting pattern at the time of power failure. .

Three configurations can be exemplified as the configuration of the display device on the side of the sub-control board in the case where power failure occurs during symbol variation of the main game symbols (first main game symbol or second main game symbol). The three configurations will be described in detail below as configuration 1 to configuration 3. FIG. In any of the configurations 1 to 3, on the main control board side, the lamp of the main display device MH20 is reset at the first timing.

In addition, regarding the first main game symbol pending display portion A21h, if power failure occurs in a situation where the number of pending on the first main game side is 0, it continues to be turned off even at the first timing after the power is restored. It will be done. As for the second main game symbol pending display portion B21h, if the power is cut off while the number of pending symbols on the second main game side is 0, the light will continue to be extinguished even at the first timing after the power is restored. becomes. Also for the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h, when power interruption occurs in a situation where the number of reservations on the auxiliary game side is 0, it will continue to be turned off even at the first timing after the power is restored.

<Configuration 1>
When the power supply is interrupted while the main game symbols (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) are changing, and then the power is restored, the sub-suspension display section (first sub-suspension display section AS21h and second sub-suspension display section AS21h) The lamps of the display unit BS21h and the display unit BS21h may be collectively called a sub-holding display unit) are restored at the first timing, and the sub-symbol display units (the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g and the second sub-symbol display unit BS21g) are restored. ) remains unlit until the main game symbols whose variation is restarted complete the variation. Here, restarting lighting and blinking from the continuation of the lighting pattern at the time of power failure is called recovery. For example, the lighting pattern at the time of power failure is one lamp (left If the lighting pattern is a combination of the blinking of the AS 21h) and the lighting and blinking of one lamp (the AS 21h on the right), the lighting and blinking will be resumed with this lighting pattern. Even if the lighting pattern at the time of power failure is blinking (lighting timing in lighting→lighting out→lighting …) is also configured to restart from lighting. However, regardless of whether the lighting pattern at the time of power failure is blinking or off, it may be configured to restart from the lights off. If the lighting pattern at the time of power failure was blinking, the lighting resumes from lighting, and if the lighting pattern at the time of power failure was the lighting at blinking, the lighting pattern at the time of power failure resumes from lighting when the lighting pattern is blinking. If so, it may be configured to restart from lighting, and if the lighting pattern at the time of power failure is lighting in blinking, it may be configured to restart from lighting. When the variation of the main game symbols is completed, the lamps of the sub-symbol display section light up in a lighting pattern corresponding to when the main game symbols are stopped. In this case, since the lighting pattern of the lamps of the sub-symbol display part is turned off, even after the main game pattern has finished changing, the sub-symbol display part will not be displayed until the next main game pattern starts to fluctuate. The lamp remains off. It should be noted that when the main game pattern (first main game pattern or second main game pattern) is in the process of changing the power supply and then the power supply is restored, the display of the decorative patterns will also be displayed according to the restarted main game pattern. It is hidden until the fluctuation is completed, and by configuring in this way, the lamp of the sub-pattern display part is fluctuating even though the decorative pattern is hidden (corresponding to the fluctuation By lighting/blinking in the same lighting pattern), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused. In addition, in this example, there is a variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms, which may be changed depending on the game state or the stopped pattern) after the symbol is stopped, and the timing of power cut (timing of power return). In spite of this, a predetermined time can be secured until the holding is completed, so even if the lamp of the sub-holding display part lights up or blinks immediately after the power is restored, the player is not confused and the game situation can be immediately displayed. can be grasped.

It should be noted that the recovery timing of the lamp of the sub-suspend display section after power recovery may be before the first timing instead of the first timing, or may be after the first timing. may

Also, regarding the first sub-suspension display part AS21h, if power interruption occurs in a situation where the number of suspensions on the first main game side is 0, it will continue to be extinguished even at the first timing after the power is restored. becomes. As for the second sub-suspend display part BS21h, if the power supply is interrupted while the number of suspensions on the second main game side is 0, it will continue to be extinguished even at the first timing after the power is restored. .

<Configuration 2>
When the power supply is interrupted while the main game symbols (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) are changing, and then the power is restored, the sub-suspension display section (first sub-suspension display section AS21h and second sub-suspension display section AS21h) The lamps of the display unit BS21h and the display unit BS21h may be collectively called a sub-holding display unit) are restored at the first timing, and the sub-symbol display units (the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g and the second sub-symbol display unit BS21g) are restored. ) is also reset at the first timing (the first timing of the configuration 1, and the same applies to the following). With this configuration, even when the decorative symbols are hidden after the power supply is restored, the lamp of the sub-symbol display unit is restored so that the player can determine whether or not the symbol variation is being executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the is not recognized. Regarding the restoration of the lamps of the sub-symbol display portions (the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g and the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g), whether the lighting pattern at the time of power failure is lit in blinking or extinguished, Although it is configured to restart from , it may be configured to restart from turning off. As a modified example, regarding the restoration of the lamps of the sub-symbol display portions (the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g and the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g), (1) if the lighting pattern at the time of power failure was blinking lighting, (2) if the lighting pattern at the time of power failure was blinking lighting, then restarting from lighting; If the lighting pattern at the time of power failure is extinguished in blinking, it may be configured to restart from lighting.

It should be noted that the recovery timing of the lamp of the sub-suspend display section after power recovery may be before the first timing instead of the first timing, or may be after the first timing. Alternatively, the reset timing of the lamps of the sub-symbol display unit after the power is restored may be before the first timing instead of the first timing, or may be after the first timing. may be

Also, regarding the first sub-suspension display part AS21h, if power failure occurs in a situation where the number of suspensions on the first main game side is 0, it will continue to be extinguished even at the first timing after the power is restored. becomes. As for the second sub-suspend display part BS21h, if the power supply is interrupted while the number of suspensions on the second main game side is 0, it will continue to be extinguished even at the first timing after the power is restored. .

In addition, as described above, the lamp of the sub-symbol display section is configured to be able to blink while the main game symbols are changing, and the lamp of the sub-reservation display section is configured to be able to blink depending on the number of reservations. . The blinking intervals of the lamps in the sub-pattern display portion and the blinking intervals of the lamps in the sub-holding display portion may be the same (or substantially the same) time.

In the case of such a configuration, the flashing start timing of the lamp of the sub symbol display portion (the first lighting timing in the repetition of “lighting → extinguishing → lighting . . . ”) depends on the variation start timing of the main game symbols. Since the blinking start timing of the lamp of the pending display part depends on the pending occurrence timing, it is difficult to synchronize the blinking. If the blinking of the lamp is not synchronized, the visibility will decrease, so after the power is restored after the power failure, the blinking of the lamp in the sub symbol display part and the blinking of the lamp in the sub hold display part will be synchronized. (blinking start timings may be simultaneous) (blinking start timings may be substantially simultaneous).

<Configuration 3>
If the power supply is interrupted while the main game symbols (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) are changing, and then the power is restored, the sub-suspension display unit (first sub-suspension display unit AS21h and second sub-suspension display unit AS21h) The lamp of the display part BS21h is sometimes collectively referred to as a sub-reserved display part) remains off until the main game pattern that restarts the fluctuation ends, and the sub-symbol display part (first sub-symbol display part AS21g , and the lamps of the second sub symbol display portion BS21g) remain extinguished until the variation of the main game symbol that restarts the variation ends. It should be noted that when a power failure occurs while the main game symbols (first main game symbols or second main game symbols) are fluctuating, and then the power is restored, all the displays on the effect display device SG will be displayed on the restarted main game symbol. It is hidden until the variation of the game pattern is completed, that is, neither the display of the decorative pattern nor the reserved display is displayed. Therefore, by configuring as described above, by matching the display on the effect display device SG and the display (lighting pattern) on the lamp of the sub-holding display unit and the lamp of the sub-symbol display unit (lighting pattern), the player can It can be a gaming machine that does not cause any doubts.

In addition, when a right-handed lamp is provided, the right-handed lamp is immediately (the first timing), but in the case of a game state (for example, a non-time reduction game state) in which left-handed hitting should be executed when the power is restored, it is configured to keep the light off.

In addition, when the sub-right-handed lamp is provided, the sub-right-handed lamp is immediately (the above-mentioned second 1), but in the case of a game state (for example, a non-time reduction game state) in which left-handed hitting is to be performed when the power is restored, it is configured to keep the light off. .

<Comparison of size of display device and game ball>
Next, referring to FIG. 186, the size of the game ball is compared with that of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20.

FIG. 186(a) is a comparison of the sizes of the main display device MH20 and the game ball. As shown, one game ball completely hides two lamps of the main display device MH20 (when viewed from the front). More specifically, the diameter of one ramp of the main display device MH20 is A, the shortest distance between the ramps of the main display device MH20 is B, and the diameter of the game ball is X. Since the individual is completely hidden, the following relationship is satisfied.
Formula 1: 2A+B<X

Next, (b) of FIG. 186 is a comparison of the sizes of the sub-display device SH20 and the game ball. As shown, one game ball completely hides one lamp of the sub-display device SH20, while not completely hiding two lamps. More specifically, the shortest distance between the lamps of the sub-display device SH20 is C, the diameter of one lamp of the sub-display device SH20 is D, and the diameter of the game ball is X. Since one lamp is completely hidden and two lamps are not completely hidden, the following relationship is satisfied.
Formula 2: 2D+C>X
Formula 3: D<X

Even when configured as described above, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g, and the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g in the main display device MH20 are Or auxiliary game pattern) At the time of stop, it is configured so that more than two lamps (four lamps in this example) are lit (see (1) in FIG. 185, the same applies to other display units When the main game symbols or auxiliary game symbols are stopped, a plurality of lamps light up), so even when one game ball is placed on the main display device MH20 (in front of the player), the lamp It is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to confirm that the is lit/blinking, and whether the first main game pattern, second main game pattern, and auxiliary game pattern are fluctuating, whether they are stopped For example, it is possible to confirm the stop mode (what is the combination of lighting and extinguishing). However, since the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h and the second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h in the main display device MH20 are composed of two lamps, one game ball is displayed on the main display device. When placed on the MH20 (in front of the player), both of the two lamps may not be visible. However, with respect to the first sub-suspension display portion AS21h and the second sub-suspension display portion BS21h in the sub-display device SH20, one game ball is placed on the sub-display device SH20 (in front of the player). Even in such a case, since both lamps are not blinded, the opportunity for the player to check the pending number is not hindered.

In this example, the size (diameter) of the lamps of the main display device MH20 are all the same, and the size (diameter) of the lamps of the sub display device SH20 are all the same, but they are not limited to this. , the size of the lamps may be different. When configured in this way,
(1) The minimum A and B in the main display device MH20 satisfy the above formula 1, and the minimum C and D in the sub display device SH20 satisfy the above formulas 2 and 3.
(2) The above formula 1 is satisfied with the maximum A and B in the main display device MH20, and the above formulas 2 and 3 are satisfied with the maximum C and D in the sub display device SH20.
It may be configured as described above.

<Distance between display device and transparent plate D16>
The distance between the display device and the transparent plate D16, which is applicable to the game machine in this specification, will be described in detail below. The distance between the display device and the transparent plate D16 is the distance in the direction perpendicular to the transparent plate D16. is on the front side). The main display device MH20 may be replaced with any lamp of the main display device MH20, and the sub-display device SH20 may be replaced with any lamp of the sub-display device SH20.

<Configuration 1>
The sub-display device SH20 is closer (shorter) to the transparent plate D16 than the main display device MH20. You may The distance between the main display device MH20 and the transparent plate D16 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance between the sub-display device SH20 and the transparent plate D16 may be less than the diameter of the game ball.

By configuring in this way, even when the main display device MH20 or the sub display device SH20 is provided in the area where the game ball can flow down, the game ball can be displayed between the main display device MH20 or the sub display device SH20 and the transparent plate D16. Balls do not flow in, the lamps of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 can be prevented from being damaged, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved. In addition, by configuring the sub-display device SH20 to be in front of the main display device MH20, the main display device MH20 can be made less conspicuous, and the game result can be immediately understood by the player. It is possible to prevent deterioration of the properties.

<Configuration 2>
The main display device MH20 is closer (shorter) to the transparent plate D16 than the sub display device SH20. You may In the case of such a configuration, the sub-display device SH20 may be installed on a member such as an accessory or decoration provided near the game area.

By constructing the main display device MH20 so as to be closer to the side than the sub display device SH20, the main display device MH20 can be made more conspicuous and the game machine desired by a player who is concerned about the results of the game. be able to.

Further, when configured as in Configuration 1 or Configuration 2, the sub display device SH20 may be configured to be closer to the effect display device SG than the main display device MH20. With this configuration, it is possible for a player who pays attention to the effect display device SG to easily visually recognize the sub-display device SH20. In addition, since the effect display device SG is larger than the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 (the area in the vertical and horizontal directions is large when viewed from the player), the effect display device SG is configured to stand out. The lamp of the sub-display device SH20 is larger than the lamp of the main display device MH20, in other words, the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 is more conspicuous than the lamp of the main display device MH20. Visibility can be ensured even if it is installed near the SG. It should be noted that "close to the effect display device SG" may be compared with the closest distance between the display device and the effect display device SG (at any point), or the distance from the center of the effect display device SG to the display device. can be compared with

<Lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display section and display mode of the second decorative symbol>
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g and the display mode of the second decorative symbols will be described in detail. In the figure, only the first main game symbols are illustrated, but the same configuration can be applied to the second main game symbols.

First, (A1) in FIG. 187 shows the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at a predetermined big hit symbol. As shown in the figure, when the first main game symbols are stopped at a predetermined jackpot symbol, the first main game symbol display portion A21g has a lighting pattern in which four lamps are lit.

Next, (A2) in FIG. 187 is a lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g in a situation where the first main game symbols are changing. As shown, the first main game symbol display portion A21g has five types of lighting patterns in which two lamps are lit. As described above with reference to FIG. 185, it is configured such that the five types of lighting patterns are repeated during the variation of the first main game symbols. In this way, the lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g in the situation where the first main game symbols are stopped at the jackpot symbols (lighting and extinguishing in the first main game symbol display portion A21g indicating the big win) combination pattern) is configured not to be executed as a lighting pattern during variation of the first main game symbols. It should be noted that the illustrated lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display area A21g is merely an example, and the lighting pattern during the variation of the first main game symbols is configured so that the lighting pattern when the jackpot symbols are stopped is not executed. It is good if it is.

Next, (B1) in FIG. 187 is a part of the display on the effect display device SG in a situation where the first main game symbols are stopped at a predetermined big hit symbol. In the figure, only a part of the display on the effect display device SG is shown, and the pending display and the like are omitted. In addition, the second decorative pattern is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 126 .

As shown in the figure, in a situation where the first main game symbol is stopped at a predetermined jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777". In addition, the second decorative symbols are configured to be stop-displayed in a plurality of display modes such as "333" in addition to "777" in a situation where the first main game symbols are stopped at a predetermined jackpot symbol. All of them are configured so that the patterns such as three numbers are the same (coordinated).

Next, (B2) in FIG. 187 is part of the display on the effect display device SG in the situation where the first main game symbols are changing. In the figure, the second decorative pattern continues to switch between a plurality of types of display modes (combination of numbers) every predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). What is shown in the figure is an example of a plurality of types of display modes of the second decorative symbols during the fluctuation of the first main game symbols. (In this example, the display is repeated as "726"→"314"→"228"→"726" . . . ). Including the display mode not shown, the second decorative symbols are configured so that the three numbers are not the same (double number) during the fluctuation of the first main game symbols. The configuration is a common configuration regardless of the variation mode or the determined pattern. That is, the second decorative symbols are constructed so as not to take a display mode that can be taken when the jackpot symbols are stopped while the first main game symbols are fluctuating.

As described above, in this example, the first main game symbol (or second During the fluctuation of the second main game symbol), the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) is stopped at the big hit symbol (display mode or lighting pattern). It is configured.

By configuring in this manner, a jackpot mode is achieved both when the player visually recognizes the main display device MH20 and when the player visually recognizes the second decorative symbols of the effect display device SG during the fluctuation of the main game symbols. Since it is not displayed (lighted) by , it is possible to avoid misunderstanding the result of the game.

Also, the lighting pattern of the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g during the fluctuation of the first main game symbols repeats the five patterns shown in A2 (the lighting pattern may be simply referred to as a pattern) (Fig. The pattern of (2) to (6) of 185 is repeated), and the pattern is switched every predetermined time A (for example, the predetermined time described above, which is 50 ms). Therefore, the time for one cycle of the lighting pattern of the lamp of the first main game symbol display area A21g ((2) to (6) in FIG. 185 is defined as one cycle) during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is
5 x 50ms = 250ms
It has become.

On the other hand, the display mode of the second decorative symbols during the variation of the first main game symbols is such that the three patterns shown in B2 are repeated, and the predetermined time B (for example, the predetermined time described above, which is 100 ms) is displayed. ), the display mode is switched every time. Therefore, the time for 1 cycle of display mode of the 2nd decorative symbols ("726"→"314"→"228" is regarded as 1 cycle) while the 1st main game symbols are changing is
3 x 100ms = 300ms
It has become.

As described above, in this example, the time during the variation of the first main game symbols is longer than the time for one cycle of the lighting pattern of the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g during the variation of the first main game symbols. The display mode of the two decorative patterns is configured so that the time for one cycle is longer. As an example, the case of the first main game symbols has been illustrated, but the lighting pattern 1 of the lamps of the second main game symbol display portion B21g during the fluctuation of the second main game symbols is similar for the second main game symbols. The time for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbols during the fluctuation of the second main game symbols is longer than the time for the cycle. In the following, similarly, it should be supplemented that the first main game symbol display portion A21g may be replaced with the second main game symbol display portion B21g.

When the time required for one cycle of the first main game symbol display part A21g related to the main control board side and the second decoration symbol of the effect display device SG related to the sub-control board side are the same, the player determines which one of the game results. There is a possibility that it may become unclear whether the information is correctly reported. Therefore, as described above, the second decorative symbols during the variation of the first main game symbols are longer than the time corresponding to one cycle of the lamp lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g during the variation of the first main game symbols. By configuring the display mode so that the time for one cycle is longer, it becomes easier to distinguish between the first main game symbol display portion A21g and the second decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the number of combinations of display modes of the second decorative symbols that can be displayed while the first main game symbols are changing is a combination in which the symbols 1 to 9 are displayed in a pattern other than double,
9×9×9−9=720 ways.

The number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display area A21g that can be displayed during the variation of the first main game symbols is 2 lamps of 8 lamps (2 lamps is just an example, and 3 or more lamps are lit). There is no problem even if it is turned on)
₈ C ₂ =8×7÷2=28 ways.

Comparing the above numbers of combinations, the number of combinations of the display modes of the second decorative symbols is greater than the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display area A21g, so the first main game symbols are fluctuating. Even if the time corresponding to one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative pattern in 2 is configured to be longer, it is configured so that only the same combination is displayed when the player visually recognizes it. be able to. It should be noted that the number of combinations of the display modes of the second decorative symbols that can be displayed during the variation of the first main game symbols and the lighting of the lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g that can be displayed during the variation of the first main game symbols. Since the number of pattern combinations is the maximum number that can be designed in this example, there is no need to configure such that 720 different display modes may be displayed during the variable display of the second decorative pattern. It should be supplemented that it is not necessary to configure the lamps of the first main game symbol display part A21g to be displayed in 28 different lighting patterns while the main game symbols are fluctuating.

Also, the number of combinations of display modes of the second decorative symbols and the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g may be configured as follows.
(1) The number of combinations of the display modes of the second decorative symbols (for example, three in FIG. 187) displayed during the fluctuation of the predetermined first main game symbols, and the number of lamps in the first main game symbol display area A21g. The number of combinations of lighting patterns (for example, 5 in FIG. 187) is larger than the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g.
(2) The number of combinations of the display modes of the second decorative symbols and the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display area A21g, which are displayed while the predetermined first main game symbols are fluctuating, 2 The number of combinations of display modes of decorative patterns is larger.
(3) The number of combinations of display modes of the second decorative symbols and the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display area A21g that can be displayed while all the first main game symbols are fluctuating are The number of combinations of lamp lighting patterns in the main game symbol display area A21g is greater.
(4) The number of combinations of the display modes of the second decorative symbols and the number of combinations of lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display area A21g that can be displayed while all the first main game symbols are changing, 2 The number of combinations of display modes of decorative patterns is larger.
It may be configured as described above. It should be noted that the above (3) and (4) are the combination of the display mode of the second decorative symbols displayed during the variation of the first main game symbols and the combination of the lighting patterns of the lamps of the first main game symbol display area A21g. , may be applied to a case where there are a plurality of types (for example, different depending on the variation mode, different depending on the stop symbol, different depending on the game state, etc.). Also, although the first main game symbol has been exemplified, the second main game symbol can be similarly applied.

All the lamps of the first main game symbol display part A21g have the same shape and the same lighting color. Each number has a different color (3 and 7 are red, 1, 5 and 9 are green, and 2, 4, 6 and 8 are blue). That is, in the first main game symbol display portion A21g, if it can be recognized that the lighting pattern is switched, it is difficult to recognize which lighting pattern it is. If is clearly visible, it becomes easy to recognize in which display mode the symbols are displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the combination of recognized symbols has meaning. Therefore, in contrast to the above configuration, the time for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbols during the variation of the first main game symbols is shorter (for example, the second decoration symbols during the variation of the first main game symbols). The time of one cycle of the display mode of the two decorative patterns is set to 20 ms × 3 = 60 ms), making it difficult for the player to recognize the combination of the numbers of the second decorative patterns, thereby preventing misrecognition of the player. You may make it possible.

As described above with reference to FIG. 187, in this example, both the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) and the second decoration symbols are the first main game symbol. (or the second main game pattern) is changing, a mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game pattern (or the second main game pattern) is stopped at the jackpot symbol. It is configured so that it does not become

In addition to the above configuration, the mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) stops at the losing symbol and/or the small winning symbol. , As with the configuration of the jackpot symbols, it may be configured so that the aspect (display aspect or lighting pattern) that can be taken while the first main game symbols (or the second main game symbols) fluctuates does not occur. That is, in both the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) and the second decorative symbols, the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) is changing. , it may be configured so that it does not become a mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game symbols (or second main game symbols) are stopped.

The first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) repeats the aforementioned cycle while the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is changing. , In the case where the result of the winning/failure determination is winning, the first main game symbol (or The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) immediately before the second main game symbol) stops and the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) is not the same (not continuous) in the situation where the is stopped, in other words, the variation time of the symbol variation Even so, when the timing for stopping the first main game symbols (or the second main game symbols) comes, the first main game symbol display portion A21g will switch to a predetermined lighting pattern. Also, even if the win/loss determination result is non-winning, no matter what timing the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is stopped after the fluctuation time has passed, the first main game symbol The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) immediately before the stop (or the second main game symbol) and the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) The lighting pattern of the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) does not become the same (not continuous) when the game symbols are stopped, in other words, the variation of the symbol variation. Regardless of the time, when the timing for stopping the first main game symbols (or the second main game symbols) comes, the first main game symbol display section A21g will switch to a predetermined lighting pattern.

Similarly, in the case of the second decorative symbols, when the winning judgment result is winning, at what timing does the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) stop after the fluctuation time has elapsed? Also, the display mode of the second decorative symbol immediately before the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) stops (may be a predetermined timing before the stop) and the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) The display mode of the second decorative symbols in the situation where the second main game symbols are stopped is not the same (non-continuous), in other words, the first main game symbols ( Alternatively, when the timing for stopping the second main game symbols is reached, the second decorative symbols are switched to a predetermined display mode. However, when the win/loss determination result is non-winning, unlike the case where the win/loss determination result is winning, the timing of stopping after the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) variation time elapses Depending on the situation, the display mode of the second decorative symbols immediately before the first main game symbols (or the second main game symbols) stop (may be a predetermined timing before stopping) and the first main game symbols (or The display mode of the second decorative symbols in the situation where the second main game symbol) is stopped may be the same (continuous) (for example, when the final display mode of the second decorative symbols is "228"). , Depending on the variation time, if the display mode of the second decorative pattern during variation immediately before the final display mode of the second decorative pattern is displayed is "228" in one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative pattern, which will be described later. there is).

By configuring in this way, both the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) and the second decorative symbols can be changed from just before the main game symbols are stopped to when they are stopped. Connections can be made smoother. In addition, it is not necessary to adjust the variation time of the main game symbols in a more complicated manner due to the concern that the main game symbols will be in the same mode (display mode or lighting pattern) immediately before and when the main game symbols are stopped.

Further, when the first main game symbols are stopped, the first decorative symbols are stopped, the second decorative symbols are stopped, and the first sub-symbol display unit AS21g is lit or extinguished corresponding to the stop display. there is Further, during the variation of the first main game symbols, the first decorative symbols are being varied, the second decorative symbols are being varied, and the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g is blinking corresponding to the variation. there is

Further, when the second main game symbols are stopped, the first decorative symbols are stopped, the second decorative symbols are stopped, and the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is lit or extinguished corresponding to the stop display. there is Further, during the variation of the second main game symbols, the first decorative symbols are being varied, the second decorative symbols are being varied, and the second sub-symbol display part BS21g is blinking corresponding to the variation. there is

For this reason, the present example may be configured as follows.
(1) Lighting pattern of the lamp of the first main game symbol display area A21g, which is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the first main game side on the effect display device SG. Then, the lighting pattern of the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g does not become the same as the first decorative symbol is changing corresponding to the first main game side and immediately before it stops.
(2) The lighting pattern of the lamp of the first main game symbol display area A21g that is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the big win on the first main game side on the effect display device SG. Then, the lighting pattern of the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g does not become the same as the first decorative symbol is changing corresponding to the first main game side and immediately before it stops.
(3) Lighting pattern of the lamp of the second main game symbol display portion B21g, which is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the second main game side on the effect display device SG. Then, the lighting pattern of the lamps of the second main game symbol display portion B21g does not become the same as the first decorative symbol is changing corresponding to the second main game side and immediately before it stops.
(4) Lighting pattern of the lamp of the second main game symbol display portion B21g, which is lit when the first decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the big win on the second main game side on the effect display device SG. Then, the lighting pattern of the lamps of the second main game symbol display portion B21g does not become the same as the first decorative symbol is changing corresponding to the second main game side and immediately before it stops.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the first main game side on the effect display device SG, and the first decorative pattern is the first main game side. It does not become the same as the display mode of the second decorative symbol during variation corresponding to the game side and immediately before stopping.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the big hit on the first main game side on the effect display device SG, and the first decorative pattern is the first main game side. It does not become the same as the display mode of the second decorative symbol during variation corresponding to the game side and immediately before stopping.
(7) The display mode of the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the loss on the second main game side on the effect display device SG, and the first decorative pattern is the second main game side. It does not become the same as the display mode of the second decorative symbol during variation corresponding to the game side and immediately before stopping.
(8) The display mode of the second decorative pattern when the first decorative pattern is stopped in the display mode corresponding to the big hit on the second main game side on the effect display device SG, and the first decorative pattern is the second main game side. It does not become the same as the display mode of the second decorative symbol during variation corresponding to the game side and immediately before stopping.

<Light intensity of sub display device SH20>
As described above with reference to FIG. 127 and the like, the gaming machine in this specification can be configured to be capable of adjusting the amount of light. In the case of such a configuration, even if the level of light amount (sometimes referred to as a light amount level) is changed, the light amount of the lamp of the sub-display device SH (may be referred to as luminance) may not be changed.

As a specific example, when the light amount level is level 1 and when the light amount level is level 3, which is two steps higher than level 1, the light amount (brightness) of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 is the same, but the game effect is The light quantity (luminance) of the lamp D26 may be configured such that the light quantity (luminance) is higher at level 3 than at level 1.

Note that the arrangement of the game effect lamps D26 in FIG. 182 is merely an example, and the game effect lamps D26 whose light quantity (brightness) differs depending on the light quantity level may be provided near the sub display device SH20, or may be provided in the game area (game It may be provided on the right or left side (as viewed from the operator).

In addition, as the emission color (which may be referred to as lighting color/blinking color) of the game effect lamp D26, the same color as the lighting color/blinking color of the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 (recognized as the same color from the player's point of view). color) may be configured so as not to emit light. In the case of such a configuration, the period during which the emission color of the game effect lamp D26 is not the same as the lighting color/blinking color of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 may be configured as follows.
(1) It does not always emit the same color (2) It does not emit the same color except when a predetermined error occurs (3) It does not emit the same color during the occurrence of a predetermined error (4) Main game symbols (5) Not the same luminescent color during Super Reach (6) Not the same luminescent color during Reach (during all Reach including Super Reach and Normal Reach)

The period during which the color of light emitted from the game effect lamp D26 does not match the lighting color/blinking color of the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 may be a period other than the periods (2) to (6). That is, the gaming machine according to this example can be configured so that the color of light emitted from the game effect lamp D26 does not match the lighting color/blinking color of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 during a predetermined period. As a more preferable example, the emission color (which may also be referred to as a lighting color or a flashing color) of the game effect lamp D26 is set to enhance the performance effect (in order to make the light emission of various colors look dramatic). The same color as the lighting color/blinking color of the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 (a color recognized as the same from the player's point of view) may be emitted, but within one change, the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 The game effect lamp D26 is caused to emit light in the same color as the lamp of the sub display device SH20 in a shorter time than the lighting/blinking time of . For example, while an effect (for example, an image in which a friend character defeats an enemy character) is being executed to notify that a big hit will be achieved during Super Reach, the game effect lamp D26 is set to emit the same color as the lamp of the sub display device SH20 ( Red) and different luminescent colors (blue and green) are alternately flashed to extremely reduce the visibility of the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 while the entire game machine emits light with a sense of unity. will disappear.

Also, as the game effect lamp D26, it is provided in the vicinity of the sub display device SH20 (for example, the game effect lamp D26 which is closer to the sub display device SH20 than the distance between the sub display device SH20 and the effect display device SG). The above configurations (1) to (6) may be applied only to the object.

By arranging the sub-display device SH20 away from the vicinity of the sub-display device SH20 in this way, compared to the case where the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the vicinity of the sub-display device SH20, the lighting of the sub-display device SH20 is caused by the light emission of the game effect lamp D26. It is possible to make it difficult to lower the visibility and to easily recognize the result of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 182, the game effect lamp D26 is not provided near the main display device MH20. In other words, in this example, the distance between the sub-display device SH20 and the game effect lamp D26 is longer (farther) than the distance between the main display device MH20 and the game effect lamp D26. Furthermore, although not shown, near the lamp of the main display device MH20 (for example, a plate member that is installed in front of the LED inside the display unit and forms a cavity that becomes the display window of the lamp, that is, the lamp of the main display device MH20 , etc.) is black, which is different from the lighting color/blinking color (for example, red) of the lamp of the main display device MH20. In addition, the vicinity of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 (for example, a plate member that is installed in front of the LED inside the display unit and forms a cavity that becomes the display window of the lamp, that is, the portion other than the display window of the lamp of the sub display device SH20 etc.) is a color different from black (for example, a color other than red such as white or blue).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the visibility of the lamp of the main display device MH20 due to light emission from members near the main display device MH20 and the game effect lamp D26.

<Relationship between hold display and lamp>
As described above, according to this example, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g during the fluctuation of the first main game symbols ((2) to (6) in FIG. 185 is regarded as one cycle. ) minutes is 250 ms.

In addition, the time for one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbols ("726"→"314"→"228" is one cycle) during the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is 300 ms.

Here, even in the suspended display (sometimes referred to as suspended image, suspended icon, etc.) displayed on the effect display device SG, the pattern of the moving image whose display mode changes in time series is repeated (for one pattern The display time of the moving image is called one cycle time. Specifically, for example, the display time of the moving image in which the hold display rotates once clockwise from the reference position is called one cycle time. , the time of one cycle of the pending display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined production stage in a non-time-reduced game state) may be set to 1000 ms. That is, the lighting of the lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g during the fluctuation of the first main game symbols is set for one cycle of the hold display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined effect stage in a non-time-reduced game state). The time may be longer than one cycle of the pattern, or the time may be longer than one cycle of the lamp lighting pattern of the second main game symbol display portion B21g during the variation of the second main game symbols. , the time may be longer than one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbols during the variation of the first main game symbols, or one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative symbols during the variation of the second main game symbols. may be longer than the time of In this way, by making the time of one cycle of the pending display longer than one cycle of the lighting pattern of each lamp or one cycle of the display mode of the second decorative pattern, the player can enjoy the one cycle (holding display). movement) can be easily recognized, and the lighting pattern of each lamp and the variable display of the second decorative pattern can be made less conspicuous by drawing attention to the easily recognizable reserved display.

Also, as described above, the first main game symbol pending display portion A21h, the second main game symbol pending display portion B21h, the first sub pending display portion AS21h, and the second sub pending display portion BS21h are blinking displays. However, the time for one cycle of the pending display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined production stage in a non-time-reduced game state) is longer than the flashing interval of the first main game symbol pending display portion A21h. It may be a long time, or the time of one cycle of the pending display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined production stage in a non-time-reduced game state) is longer than the flashing interval of the second main game symbol pending display portion B21h. Alternatively, the time for one cycle of the suspension display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined production stage in a non-time-reduced game state) may be longer than the blinking interval of the first sub-suspension display unit AS21h. , the duration of one cycle of the suspension display in a predetermined situation (for example, a predetermined stage in the non-time-reduced game state) may be longer than the flashing interval of the second sub-suspension display section BS21h.

<Position of round indicator lamp R10 and round indicator R20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the round indicator lamp R10 according to this example will be described in detail. As described above, the round indicator lamp R10 is composed of two 7-segments, and informs the number of rounds to be executed for the big win when the big win starts. The notification timing may be the time when the big win starts, or the time when the big win symbols are decided and stopped. Further, the round indicator lamp R10 may be composed of a plurality of lamps like the main display device MH20. As an example, the round indicator lamp R10 is composed of four lamps, and when a 10R jackpot is executed, the four lamps are "●●●○" (○ indicates off, ● indicates on. ), and when a 4R jackpot is executed, the four lamps may be configured to be "○●○●". In addition, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds is provided, such as a lamp corresponding to 4R and a lamp corresponding to 10R, is provided separately, and when the big win starts, the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds of the big win is lit. You may In addition, when the round indicator lamp R10 is composed of a plurality of lamps, the lamps may be configured so as to indicate the number of rounds by lighting up instead of blinking.

Next, the round display portion R20 is a sticker attached to the front surface of the game board to display the correspondence relationship between the round indicator lamp R10 and the number of rounds of the big win. A display mode is shown. In addition, in the same figure, the round indicator lamp R10 indicates 16 rounds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 182, the round indicator R10 and the round indicator R20 are located on the right side of the board surface (right side of the first main game start port A10), while the main display device MH20 is located on the board surface. It is located on the left side (left side of the first main game start gate A10). In other words, the round indicator lamp R10 is configured to be closer (closer) to the round indicator R20 than the main display device MH20.

The positions of the round indicator R10, the round indicator R20, and the main display device MH20 are only examples. It may be configured to be located on the left side of the game start gate A10. Even in that case, it is preferable that the round indicator lamp R10 is closer (closer) to the round indicator R20 than the main display device MH20.

With this configuration, the player can confirm the round display lamp R10 while visually recognizing the round display part R20 at the start of the big win, and also prevents the player from being confused by visually recognizing the main display device MH20. can do.

Also, in this example, the round indicator lamp R10 and the round display unit R20 are configured to notify (display) only 4 rounds and 16 rounds, but this is only an example, and the number of types of executable big win rounds is shown. It may be configured to be notified (displayed). Further, in the case where the game is configured to have a small win, the round indicator lamp R10 may be configured to notify that it is one round even when the small win is executed. In that case, the round display section R20 may be configured to display a display mode corresponding to one round, or may be configured not to display it.

<Movable accessories and display device>
Here, the game machine in this example may be configured to have the movable accessories described above. In the case of such a configuration, the movable accessory can execute the above-described accessory presentation, and is configured to perform an operation check after the power is restored in the event of a power failure. A characteristic configuration in the case of having such a movable accessory will be described in detail below.

FIG. 189 is an image diagram regarding the operation check of the movable accessory after the power is turned off. (A1) to (A3) illustrate the case where the movable accessory is at the initial position and the power is cut off.

First, in (A1), the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position (the position where the visibility of the second decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG is not impaired), and the accessory effect is not executed. . In the situation of (A1), when the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the movable accessory is driven as an operation check after the power is restored (the operation check is sometimes referred to as an initial operation). When the movable accessory executes the initial action, as shown in (A2), the movable accessory passes in front of the display area of the second decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device SG. After that, as shown in (A3), the movable accessory ends the initial motion and stops at the initial position.

In this way, the movable accessory is configured to pass in front of the display area of the second decorative design and obstruct the visibility of the second decorative design when performing the initial action. Further, as shown in FIG. 182, since the main display device MH20 and the sub-display device SH20 are at a long (far) distance from the effect display device SG, the movable character does not execute the initial action or the character effect. However, the visibility of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 is not hindered.

With this configuration, even if the power is cut off during the operation of the amusement arcade, it can be confirmed that the movable accessory can be driven without problems by executing the initial operation. Even if the visibility of the second decorative pattern is obstructed, the visibility of the sub-display device SH20 is ensured, so the player can recognize the game situation.

In addition, in the same figure, the case where the main game pattern is stopped is illustrated, but even if the power supply is cut off while the main game pattern is fluctuating, the movable accessory does not have the visibility of the second decorative pattern. will hinder Also, regarding the display of the first and second decorative symbols, in the same figure, the power supply is restored both when the power is interrupted while the symbols are stopped and when the power is interrupted while the symbols are fluctuating. Although the configuration of returning at a later predetermined timing (for example, substantially simultaneously with the return of the main display device MH20) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to return after the end of the pattern fluctuation in , or in the case that the power supply is interrupted while the pattern is stopped or during the pattern fluctuation, it may be configured to return at the start of the next pattern fluctuation after the power is restored. good. In this configuration, a darkened image (an image in which the entire display area is black) is displayed on the effect display device SG until the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are restored after the power is restored. Alternatively, it may be configured to display "Restoring power".

Next, (B1) to (B3) illustrate the case where the power is cut off during execution of the performance of the character.

First, in (B1), the movable accessory is positioned in front of the second decorative pattern during execution of the accessory presentation. When the power is cut off in the situation (B1) and then the power is restored, the movable accessory is driven toward the initial position as shown in (B2). In other words, it drives toward a position that does not hinder the visibility of the second decorative pattern. After that, after moving to the initial position, the movable accessory executes the initial action as shown in (B3).

In addition, in (B1) to (B3) in the same figure, the case where the power cut occurred during the execution of the performance of the role product and the change of the main game pattern was illustrated, but it is not limited to this, and the main game pattern is changed. Even if the power is cut off while the game symbols are stopped, and after the power is restored, the power is cut off again during the execution of the initial operation of the movable accessory, and then the power is restored, (B1) in the same figure. As in (B3), the movable accessory may be configured to perform the initial action after being driven toward the initial position after power is restored.

In this way, even if power is cut off in a situation where the movable accessory is at a position different from the initial position, it is configured to perform the initial operation after driving toward the initial position after the power is restored. As a result, the situation in which the visibility of the second decorative pattern is hindered does not continue.

In addition, it is not limited to this, and if the power is cut off in a situation where the movable accessory is at a position different from the initial position, it must be configured to execute the initial action after returning to the initial position. good too. As a specific example, when a power failure occurs in a situation where the movable accessory is at a position different from the initial position, the initial action is executed from the middle without driving toward the initial position. may be configured. Even when configured in this manner, the situation in which the visibility of the second decorative pattern is hindered does not continue.

In addition, in FIG. 189, the movable accessory obstructs the visibility of the second decorative pattern. , or the movable accessory hinders the visibility of (the display area of) the second decorative pattern, but may be configured so that it is not completely invisible in a front view. The shape of the movable accessory in FIG. 189 is merely an example, and the shape may be such that the display area of the second decorative pattern in the effect display device SG is completely invisible in a front view.

Further, as described above, in the case where the sub display device SH20 is configured to be closer to the effect display device SG than the main display device MH20, when the movable character executes the character effect and/or the initial action is executed. Sometimes, the visibility of the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 is hindered, but the visibility of the main display device MH20 may not be hindered. Even in this configuration, the visibility of the main display device MH20 is ensured, so that the player can grasp the state of the game regardless of the position of the movable accessory. In this case, the sub-display device SH20 may be configured to have a timing when the movable accessory makes the sub-display device SH20 completely invisible when viewed from the front, or the visibility of the sub-display device SH20 is hindered by the movable accessory. However, it may be configured so that it is not completely invisible when viewed from the front.

In this way, the visibility of the lamp of the main display device MH20 is not hindered (or relatively difficult to be hindered) by the movable accessory, but the visibility of the lamp of the sub-display device SH20 is hindered (or relatively can be easily disturbed).

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a detailed description will be given of the case where the power supply is interrupted while the main game symbols are fluctuating. In the figure, the accessory performance is not executed and the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position. In addition, "lighting" in the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 indicates that the lighting pattern is being executed, and the term "lighting" includes extinguishing during the execution of the lighting pattern. On the other hand, "non-lighting" indicates a state in which the lighting pattern is not executed and all the lamps are turned off, such as a state in which power is not supplied to the game machine after a power failure has occurred. . In addition, "during the initial action" for the movable accessory means from the start to the end of the initial action, and "during the initial action" includes the state in which the movable accessory is stopped during the execution of the initial action. is called On the other hand, "stopped" indicates a state in which the initial action is not executed and the movable accessory is stopped at the initial position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 189, the movable role product is provided with a role product lamp that lights up (lights up) when the role product effect and the initial action are executed. In this example, the role product lamp is configured to light up in a predetermined lighting pattern during execution of the role product presentation of the movable role and during execution of the initial action.

Returning to the description of FIG. 190, first, power failure occurs at the timing (1) in the figure. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the power is turned on (the supply of power to the game machine is resumed). After that, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the main game symbols are resumed to be changed, the lighting of the main display device MH20 is resumed, and the lighting of the sub display device SH20 is resumed.

After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, lighting of the accessory lamp relating to the initial operation of the movable accessory starts (visually, the lighting of the accessory lamp starts). After that, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the initial motion of the movable accessory is started (the driving of the initial motion is started apparently). After that, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the initial operation of the movable accessory ends, and lighting of the accessory lamp also ends.

In this way, when the power is cut off while the main game symbols are changing, after the power is restored, after the lighting of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 is restored, the role related to the initial operation of the movable accessory is displayed. The object lamp starts lighting, and then the initial action of the movable accessory starts.

With this configuration, after the power is turned off, the player can resume the game by restoring the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 before the movable accessory and the accessory lamp. The situation can be quickly recognized, and the initial action of the movable accessory can be executed after the player fully grasps the restarted game situation. Also, if the movable accessory starts driving for the initial operation while the accessory lamp is not lit, the movable accessory starts driving while it is unclear whether the accessory lamp is normal. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp that the movable accessory and the accessory lamp are normal by starting the driving related to the initial operation of the driving accessory after the accessory lamp starts lighting.

In FIG. 190, as shown in (3) in the figure, the lighting return timings of the main display device MH20 and the sub-display device SH20 are set at the same time, but the lighting return timings do not need to be completely simultaneous. Substantially simultaneously (includes both completely simultaneous and nearly simultaneous but not completely simultaneous, and what is referred to as "simultaneously" in this specification is replaced with "substantially simultaneously" (There is no problem even if there is no problem) (a shift of about 100 ms may be acceptable).

In addition, in FIG. 190, as shown in (1) in the figure, the lamps of the main display device MH20 and the lamps of the sub display device SH20 are all restored at the time of recovery from power failure. is not limited, and as described above, some of the lamps may be configured to return to lighting when the fluctuation of the main game symbols is stopped or when the next fluctuation is started.

Further, the driving start timing related to the initial motion of the movable accessory and the lighting start timing of the role product lamp related to the initial motion of the movable accessory may be set at the same time (or approximately at the same time).

In addition, at the timing (6) in FIG. 190, the driving end timing related to the initial motion of the movable accessory and the lighting end timing of the accessory lamp related to the initial motion of the movable accessory are set at the same time. (It may be shifted by about 100 ms).

<Initial operation of the sub-input button>
In FIG. 189 and the like, the initial action of the movable accessory has been described in detail, but the sub-input button SB is also configured to perform the initial action at the time of recovery from power failure. Therefore, the initial operation of the sub-input button SB will be described in detail below.

Further, a button lamp (not shown) is provided inside the sub-input button SB, and when the button lamp lights (lights up), the player can visually recognize the lighting from the outside. In this example, the button lamp is configured to light up in a predetermined lighting mode, for example, in white, when the button effect, which is the effect to prompt the player to operate the sub-input button SB, is executed.

It should be noted that the button lamp may be configured to light even in a situation where the button effect is not being executed, or may be configured not to light. When the button lamp is configured to light up even in a situation where the button performance is not executed, in a situation where the button performance is not executed, the lighting mode is different from the predetermined lighting mode when the button performance is executed. Lighting is preferred. In addition, the button lamp is configured to light up (in a specific lighting mode, for example, in red) when notifying that a big win will be executed, for example, other than when the button performance is executed.

Further, in this example, the sub-input button SB is configured so as to be able to execute a button vibration effect in which the sub-input button SB vibrates finely. As a specific example when the button vibe effect is executed,
(1) It is executed during part of the execution of the button presentation, and plays a role of prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB. It is configured such that the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively higher when the button performance accompanied by the button vibe performance is executed than the button performance not accompanied by the button vibe performance.
(2) A button effect is executed in the middle of pattern variation, and then a button vibrator effect can be executed when notifying whether or not the result of the pattern variation being executed will result in a big win. In this case, the player operates the sub-input button SB, and the button vibration effect is not executed when a loss is reported, but the button vibration effect is executed when a big win is reported.
It may be configured as described above.

In addition to the above, the sub-input button SB can be configured to expand and contract, or can be configured to be deformable between a button form and a lever form, so that it can be driven in various ways. may

In the initial operation of the sub-input button SB, it is preferable to be able to check whether the sub-input button SB is functioning normally. This is called a button vibration, and all actions that can be performed during the game, such as the execution of vibrating in the same way as the button vibration effect, are also performed in the initial action.

Here, referring to FIG. 190, the execution of the initial operation of the sub-input button SB will be described in detail. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the power is turned on (the supply of power to the game machine is resumed). After that, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the main game symbols are resumed to be changed, the lighting of the main display device MH20 is resumed, and the lighting of the sub display device SH20 is resumed.

Thereafter, although not shown, the button lamp associated with the initial operation of the sub-input button SB starts lighting (apparently, the button lamp starts lighting), and the button vibration associated with the initial operation of the sub-input button SB is executed. is started.

With this configuration, after the power is turned off, the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are restored before the button lamp and the button vibration, and the player can check the game status. In addition to being able to recognize it quickly, the initial operation of the sub-input button SB can be executed after the player fully grasps the restarted game situation.

In this example, the start of lighting of the button lamp and the start of execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB are performed at the same time. may be present).

In addition, when the button vibration effect related to the variation of the main game symbols is selected as the effect to be executed, and the execution timing of the button vibration effect comes while the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub input button SB is being executed. (For example, when the next variation starts after the power is turned off during the variation of the main game symbols, the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub input button SB is still being executed, or the main game symbols stop After returning from a power cut in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, a new ball is entered into the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. (e.g., when the variation of the main game symbols starts, the button vibration related to the initial action of the sub input button SB is still being executed), the button vibration related to the initial action may be prioritized. . In such a configuration, only the button vibration related to the initial action may be performed and the button vibration effect may not be executed, or the button vibration effect may be executed after the button vibration related to the initial action is completed. If the period remains, it may be configured so that the button vibe effect can be executed from the middle. However, it is preferable not to do so.

When the button effect is executed during execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB (when the operation valid period of the sub-input button SB is reached), the sub-input button SB is operated. may be configured to be valid. For example, in the middle of execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB, when a button image written as "PUSH" is displayed substantially in the center of the liquid crystal screen (effect display device SG), the sub-input It may be configured such that the advance notice of the dialogue is triggered by the operation of the button SB. In other words, even during the execution of the initial action, the effect triggered by the operation of the sub-input button SB may be executed.

The main display device MH20 in this specification may be referred to as a main game display section. In addition, the first main game symbol display portion A21g and the second main game symbol display portion B21g in this specification may be referred to as identification information display portions (only one may be used, or two may be collectively used. good). In addition, the first main game symbol pending display portion A21h and the second main game symbol pending display portion B21h in this specification may be referred to as main game pending display portions (only one may be may be used). Also, the sub-display device SH20 in this specification may be referred to as a sub-game display section. Also, the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g and the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g in this specification may be referred to as an effect information display portion (only one may be used, or both may be collectively referred to). . In addition, the first sub-holding display portion AS21h and the second sub-holding display portion BS21h in this specification may be referred to as a sub-game holding display portion (only one may be used, or two may be collectively ).

<<Specific example of configuration>>
The configurations relating to the display device described above may be combined in any way, and an example of combining one configuration or a plurality of configurations described above and the effects thereof will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
A first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g, a first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h, a second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h, an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g, In the auxiliary game symbol reserved display portion H21h, all the lamps have the same size (the area of the display window is the same).
(Part or all) of the lamps of the sub-display SH20 are larger than (some or all) of the lamps of the main display MH20.

<effect>
For the lamp on the sub-control board side, by increasing the size and configuring it with a single lamp, it is possible to ensure sufficient visibility in a limited board surface area, while on the other hand, the lamp on the main control board side As for , by reducing the size and configuring it with a plurality of lamps, various combinations can be realized when indicating the stop symbol. Furthermore, by making the lamps on the sub-control board side more conspicuous than the lamps on the main control board side, the result of the game can be easily recognized by watching the lamps (main display device MH20) on the main control board side. It is possible to prevent a situation where

<Configuration 2>
At least one of the lamps that are lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the variation of the first main game symbols. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. configured to turn off.

<effect>
Regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp when indicating a loss (when indicating the stop of a losing pattern) and during fluctuation, the flow of stopping with a losing pattern from fluctuation , the situation in which all the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g are turned off can be avoided, and a configuration can be made so as not to cause discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to guarantee the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and is subject to board restrictions. It is difficult and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Furthermore, the lamp on the main control board side can be used as a lamp for the main display device MH20 by using a common lamp both when indicating a failure (when indicating the stoppage of a losing pattern) and when the symbol is fluctuating. It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the 1 main game symbol display part A21g and other lamps. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. By configuring to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side is turned on as a lamp indicating the result of the game, and it is mistakenly recognized that two results of the game are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. You can prevent things from happening.

<Configuration 3>
At least one of the lamps that are lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the variation of the first main game symbols. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. configured to turn off.
The main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are provided on opposite sides of the first main game start port A10.
The blinking interval of a predetermined lamp in the first main game symbol display portion A21g or the second main game symbol display portion B21g and the blinking interval of a specific lamp in the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g or the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g are different. different.

<effect>
Regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp when indicating a loss (when indicating the stop of a losing pattern) and during fluctuation, the flow of stopping with a losing pattern from fluctuation , the situation in which all the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g are turned off can be avoided, and a configuration can be made so as not to cause discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to guarantee the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and is subject to board restrictions. It is difficult and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Furthermore, the lamp on the main control board side can be used as a lamp for the main display device MH20 by using a common lamp both when indicating a failure (when indicating the stoppage of a losing pattern) and when the symbol is fluctuating. It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the 1 main game symbol display part A21g and other lamps. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. By configuring to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side is turned on as a lamp indicating the result of the game, and it is mistakenly recognized that two results of the game are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. You can prevent things from happening.
It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the display device on the main control board side and the display device on the sub control board side.
By arranging the lamp on the main control board side and the lamp on the sub control board side diagonally across the first main game start port A10 and by varying the lighting intervals, the lamp on the main control board side and the sub control board side It is possible to prevent a situation in which the lamp on the control board side is viewed at the same time, and attention can be paid to the effect on the effect display device SG.

<Configuration 4>
If the power supply is interrupted while the main game symbols (the first main game symbols or the second main game symbols) are changing, and then the power is restored, the lamp of the main display device MH20 immediately turns on (the first main game symbol after the power is turned on). ), the lamp of the sub-reservation display part returns at the first timing, and the lamp of the sub-symbol display part remains extinguished until the fluctuation of the main game pattern that restarts the fluctuation ends. Become.

<effect>
To prevent a situation in which a player is confused by the fact that the lamps in the sub-symbol display part are fluctuating (lighting up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fluctuating) even though the decorative patterns are not displayed. can be prevented.
After the power is restored, regardless of the remaining variation time, the lamp of the main display device MH20 makes it possible to recognize that the pattern is being varied.
After the symbol stops, there is a variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms, which may be changed depending on the game state or the stopped symbol), and regardless of the timing of power interruption (timing of power restoration), until the pending digestion can guarantee a predetermined time, so that even if the lamp of the sub-retention display part is turned on immediately after the power supply is restored, the player is not confused and the game situation can be grasped immediately.

<Configuration 5>
A first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g, a first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h, a second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h, an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g, In the auxiliary game symbol reserved display portion H21h, all the lamps have the same size (the area of the display window is the same).
(Part or all) of the lamps of the sub-display SH20 are larger than (some or all) of the lamps of the main display MH20.
In both the first main game symbol display area A21g (or the second main game symbol display area B21g) and the second decorative symbols, during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) , It does not become a mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is stopped.

<effect>
For the lamp on the sub-control board side, by increasing the size and configuring it with a single lamp, it is possible to ensure sufficient visibility in a limited board surface area, while on the other hand, the lamp on the main control board side As for , by reducing the size and configuring it with a plurality of lamps, various combinations can be realized when indicating the stop symbol. Furthermore, by making the lamps on the sub-control board side more conspicuous than the lamps on the main control board side, the result of the game can be easily recognized by watching the lamps (main display device MH20) on the main control board side. It is possible to prevent a situation where
In both the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) and the second decorative symbols, it is possible to smoothen the connection from immediately before the main game symbols stop to when they are stopped. . In addition, it is not necessary to adjust the variation time of the main game symbols in a more complicated manner due to the concern that the main game symbols will be in the same mode (display mode or lighting pattern) immediately before and when the main game symbols are stopped.

<Configuration 6>
At least one of the lamps that are lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the variation of the first main game symbols. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. configured to turn off.
When the power is cut off during the fluctuation of the main game symbols, after the power is restored, after the lighting of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 is restored, the character lamp related to the initial operation of the movable character is lit. starts, and then the initial motion of the movable accessory starts.

<effect>
Regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp when indicating a loss (when indicating the stop of a losing pattern) and during fluctuation, the flow of stopping with a losing pattern from fluctuation , the situation in which all the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g are turned off can be avoided, and a configuration can be made so as not to cause discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to guarantee the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and is subject to board restrictions. It is difficult and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Furthermore, the lamp on the main control board side can be used as a lamp for the main display device MH20 by using a common lamp both when indicating a failure (when indicating the stoppage of a losing pattern) and when the symbol is fluctuating. It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the 1 main game symbol display part A21g and other lamps. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. By configuring to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side is turned on as a lamp indicating the result of the game, and it is mistakenly recognized that two results of the game are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. You can prevent things from happening.
After the power is turned off, the player can quickly recognize the game situation by restoring the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 before the movable accessory and the accessory lamp. At the same time, the initial action of the movable accessory can be executed after the player fully grasps the restarted game situation. Also, if the movable accessory starts driving for the initial operation while the accessory lamp is not lit, the movable accessory starts driving while it is unclear whether the accessory lamp is normal. Therefore, by starting the drive related to the initial operation of the driving accessory after the accessory lamp starts lighting, it is possible to clearly grasp that the movable accessory and the accessory lamp are normal.

<Configuration 7>
At least one of the lamps that are lit when the losing symbols are stopped is configured to be lit once during the variation of the first main game symbols. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. configured to turn off.
The main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 are provided on opposite sides of the first main game start port A10.
The blinking interval of the predetermined lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g or the second main game symbol display portion B21g and the blinking interval of the specific lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g or the second sub-symbol display portion BS21g are different. different.
When the power is cut off during the fluctuation of the main game symbols, after the power is restored, after the lighting of the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 is restored, the character lamp relating to the initial operation of the movable character is lit. starts, and then the initial motion of the movable accessory starts.

<effect>
Regarding the lamp on the main control board side, by using a common lamp when indicating a loss (when indicating the stop of a losing pattern) and during fluctuation, the flow of stopping with a losing pattern from fluctuation , the situation in which all the lamps of the first main game symbol display portion A21g are turned off can be avoided, and a configuration can be made so as not to cause discomfort. On the other hand, for the lamps on the sub-control board side, in order to guarantee the display of the lamps on the main control board side, the minimum lighting pattern (only on and off) is used, which increases versatility and is subject to board restrictions. It is difficult and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Furthermore, the lamp on the main control board side can be used as a lamp for the main display device MH20 by using a common lamp both when indicating a failure (when indicating the stoppage of a losing pattern) and when the symbol is fluctuating. It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the lamp of the 1 main game symbol display part A21g and other lamps. Also, when the losing symbols are stopped, at least one lamp of the first main game symbol display portion A21g on the main control board side lights up, while the lamp of the first sub-symbol display portion AS21g on the sub control board side lights up. By configuring to turn off, only the lamp on the main control board side is turned on as a lamp indicating the result of the game, and it is mistakenly recognized that two results of the game are displayed on the main control board side and the sub control board side. You can prevent things from happening.
It is possible to make it difficult to misidentify the display device on the main control board side and the display device on the sub control board side.
By arranging the lamp on the main control board side and the lamp on the sub control board side diagonally across the first main game start port A10 and by varying the lighting intervals, the lamp on the main control board side and the sub control board side It is possible to prevent a situation in which the lamp on the control board side is viewed at the same time, and attention can be paid to the effect on the effect display device SG.
After the power is turned off, the player can quickly recognize the game situation by restoring the main display device MH20 and the sub display device SH20 before the movable accessory and the accessory lamp. At the same time, the initial action of the movable accessory can be executed after the player fully grasps the restarted game situation. Also, if the movable accessory starts driving for the initial operation while the accessory lamp is not lit, the movable accessory starts driving while it is unclear whether the accessory lamp is normal. Therefore, by starting the drive related to the initial operation of the driving accessory after the accessory lamp starts lighting, it is possible to clearly grasp that the movable accessory and the accessory lamp are normal.

<Configuration 8>
If the power supply is interrupted while the main game symbols (the first main game symbols or the second main game symbols) are changing, and then the power is restored, the lamp of the main display device MH20 immediately turns on (the first main game symbol after the power is turned on). ), the lamp of the sub-reservation display part returns at the first timing, and the lamp of the sub-symbol display part remains extinguished until the fluctuation of the main game pattern that restarts the fluctuation ends. Become.
In both the first main game symbol display area A21g (or the second main game symbol display area B21g) and the second decorative symbols, during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol (or the second main game symbol) , It does not become a mode (display mode or lighting pattern) that can be taken in a situation where the first main game symbol (or second main game symbol) is stopped.

<effect>
To prevent a situation in which a player is confused by the fact that the lamps in the sub-symbol display part are fluctuating (lighting up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fluctuating) even though the decorative patterns are not displayed. can be prevented.
After the power is restored, regardless of the remaining variation time, the lamp of the main display device MH20 makes it possible to recognize that the pattern is being varied.
After the symbol stops, there is a variable fixed time (for example, 500 ms, which may be changed depending on the game state or the stopped symbol), and regardless of the timing of power interruption (timing of power restoration), until the pending digestion can guarantee a predetermined time, so that even if the lamp of the sub-retention display part is turned on immediately after the power supply is restored, the player is not confused and the game situation can be grasped immediately.
In both the first main game symbol display portion A21g (or the second main game symbol display portion B21g) and the second decorative symbols, it is possible to smoothen the connection from immediately before the main game symbols stop to when they are stopped. . In addition, it is not necessary to adjust the variation time of the main game symbols in a more complicated manner due to the concern that the main game symbols will be in the same mode (display mode or lighting pattern) immediately before and when the main game symbols are stopped.

(Seventh embodiment)
Here, although some of them have been described in the above-described embodiments, an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the above-described embodiments will be described in detail below as a seventh embodiment. For example, a configuration including the first decorative pattern (first effect pattern) and the second decorative pattern (second effect pattern) described in the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern (first effect pattern) of the fourth embodiment All the configurations described in this specification, such as the configuration of the image display that overlaps the pattern) and the second decorative pattern (second effect pattern), can be appropriately combined with the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 199, control processing executed by sub-main control unit SM will be described. First, FIG. 191 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (especially sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. Here, the processing of FIG. 4(d) is processing on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting such as when power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the game machine is powered on, in step 2002, the sub-main control section SM executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, When various information commands are received → Reset the information related to the performance at the time of power failure in the RAM on the sub side). After that, the process shifts to loop processing for repeatedly executing (f), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. to run. Next, at step 2700, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2800, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes decorative symbol display control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 2900, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes special game-related display control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form of performing loop processing of the sub-main side routine (S2500 to S2999) after resetting. Further, the processing of FIG. 4(e) is the interrupt processing of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM receives the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line described above). Then, at step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command sent from the main control board M side in the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored, and the process executed immediately before this interrupt process is resumed.

Next, FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and receives a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to the occurrence of a new reservation from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the reservation information related to the game design has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 controls the binding reservation counter in the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game, Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the second main game). Next, at step 2506, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 temporarily stores the command relating to the new reservation validity result and stop pattern information transmitted from the main control board M side in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Remember. Next, at step 2508, the drawing pending information display control means SM22 displays pending information (in particular, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) based on the pending generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , temporarily stored in the book binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b. In addition, if the information related to the win/fail result, the stop pattern, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information is not transmitted from the main side, in step 2506 or step 2508, the information is stored in the reserved information temporary storage area. will not be stored temporarily. Next, at step 2509, the binding hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new hold is the hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes at step 2509, at step 2550, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 executes a first main game win time look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2520. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2509, at step 2650, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 executes second main game winning time look-ahead determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2520.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2511, the design reserve information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to see if it has received a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 2511, at step 2512, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 2514, the design pending information display control means SM22 displays the pending information (especially, win/fail result, stop pattern information, variation mode group, and variation mode random number delimiter information) related to the design variation as the design pending information Delete from the temporary storage means SM22b and shift the remaining pending information. Next, at step 2516, the design reservation information display control means SM22 turns on the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2520. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2520 also in the case of No in step 2511 .

Next, at step 2520, the design pending information display control means SM22 displays the temporary storage means SM22b on the performance display device SG (in particular, the first pending display section SG12 and the second pending display section SG13). The same number of suspension display lamps as the drawing suspension counter value are displayed in white (when the suspension display mode does not change, the suspension display mode is white), and the next process (process of step 2700) is performed. Transition.

Next, FIG. 193 is a flow chart of the first main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. This process will be described by dividing it into two processes, ie, the process related to the prefetch lottery prohibition condition and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the former prefetching lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2552, the pending prefetching effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game pending (first main game pending) It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is digested with priority over the game side. In the case of Yes at step 2552, at step 2554, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and the suspension having the information indicating that the trigger suspension exists in the suspension. Determine whether or not there is Here, the trigger suspension is a suspension of winning the prefetching lottery when winning (first prefetching lottery when winning main game, prefetching lottery when second main game winning). In the case of Yes at step 2558, at step 2560, the suspension look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the design suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not there is a suspension prior to the new suspension that will result in a big hit. determine whether If Yes at step 2560 , go to step 2562 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery processing, first, in step 2562, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new pending is a big hit pending. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k executes a win-time prefetch lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new pending, Go to step 2574 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2562, in step 2568, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the new pending variation mode group is group 3. determine whether Incidentally, when determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes at step 2568, at step 2570, the suspension lookahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a win-time lookahead lottery for the new suspension with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example), Go to step 2574 . It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2574 also in the case of No in step 2568 .

Next, at step 2574, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2574, at step 2576, the pending prefetch effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k puts "trigger pending" in the new hold that has been won in the prefetch lottery at the time of winning in the temporary storage means SM22b for the design reserve information. The information to the effect that it exists is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2512).

On the other hand, if No at step 2552 (if there is a second main game hold in the hold), at step 2578, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores the binding hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" from the information related to the stored hold (if there is no hold that has information to the effect that it is a trigger hold, this process is not executed and the next ), and then to the next process (step 2520). Note that even if No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process (step 2520). In addition, in the processing of step 2578, when there is (occurs) a hold on the second main game side, in a gaming machine with a preferential completion of the second main game side as in the seventh embodiment, the newly generated second Since the hold on the main game side is consumed first, it is not possible to change the planned order of variation, and this is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which a look-ahead effect over a plurality of variations is not normally executed. In addition, as a prohibition condition for the look-ahead lottery, the condition that there is no hold of a specific variation mode group (or hold of a specific variation mode random number delimiter information) in the hold before the new hold is set as a prohibition condition good too.

Next, FIG. 194 is a flow chart of the second main game win time look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. This processing will be described by dividing it into processing related to prohibition conditions for the prefetching lottery and processing related to the prefetching lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2602, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether the current game state is the time reduction game state. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the suspension prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and if there is a suspension having information indicating that it is a trigger suspension in the suspension. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes at step 2604, at step 2606, the suspension look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k refers to the binding suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not there is a suspension that will result in a big hit in the suspension before the new suspension. determine whether If Yes in step 2606 , go to step 2608 .

Next, in the latter prefetch lottery processing, first, in step 2608, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new pending is a big hit pending. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the pending prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new pending, Go to step 2620 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the pending look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the design pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new pending variation mode group is group C. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the pending prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning prefetch lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example) for the new pending, Go to step 2620 . On the other hand, if No in step 2612 , go to step 2620 .

Next, at step 2620, the pending look-ahead effect execution enable/disable determination means SM26k determines whether or not the win-time look-ahead lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 2620, at step 2622, the pending look-ahead effect executability determination means SM26k puts "trigger pending" in the new hold that has been won in the win-time look-ahead lottery in the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information to the effect that it exists is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). Note that even if No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606, or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520).

Next, FIG. 195 is a flow chart of the decorative pattern display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, at step 2702, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 2702, at step 2704, the design display content determination means SM21n turns off the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2706, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( With reference to the stopped symbols/variation modes related to the main game symbols) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the design variation, the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols {for example, when the stopped symbols related to the main game symbols are the jackpot symbols, decides a double stitch such as "7, 7, 7", or a loose stitch such as "1, 3, 5" in the case of a missing pattern} and a variation mode, and the temporary storage means for binding display related information SM21b ( And it is temporarily stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and the ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b).

Next, at step 2712, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (step 2800). Transition. Note that even if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2800).

Next, FIG. 196 is a flow chart of decorative design display control processing relating to the subroutine of step 2800 in FIG. First, at step 2802, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. If Yes at step 2802, at step 2804, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design content decision flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2806, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2809, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the design variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2810. It should be noted that even if No in step 2802 , the process proceeds to step 2810 .

Next, at step 2810, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2810, at step 2811, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 2812, the decorative design display control means SM21, based on the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the decorative design. Determine whether or not it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , go to step 2824 .

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2812, at step 2816, the decorative design display control means SM21 performs decoration based on the design variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2816, at step 2818, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 2824 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2816, in step 2820, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM24b). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2820, at step 2822, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command for the notice image and reach image (display command transmission control process at step 2999). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2824 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2820 , the process proceeds to step 2824 .

Next, at step 2824, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current game state is the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2824, at step 2826, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the currently executed symbol variation is the button repeated effect execution variation (non-time reduction game and first It is determined whether or not it is a part of the variation in which the variation time of the symbol variation related to the main game symbol is 60 seconds. Note that the repeated button-hit effect is not executed in duplicate with the single-shot button effect, which will be described later. In the case of Yes at step 2826, at step 2850, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes button repeated hitting effect execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2830. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2826, at step 2828, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the symbol variation currently being executed is the button single-shot effect execution variation (non-time reduction game and It is determined whether or not the symbol variation associated with the first main game symbol is part of the variation in which the variation time is 60 seconds. In the case of Yes in step 2828, in step 2950, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes the button single-shot effect execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2830. It should be noted that if step 2824 or step 2828 is No, the process proceeds to step 2830 as well. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the button effect (the effect in which the effect display mode changes or the effect result is displayed when the player operates the sub-input button) is the button repeated effect and the button effect. It has two button effects, one-shot effect and one-shot effect. The execution condition of the button effect may be changed, it may be configured so that it can be executed in a time-reduced game state, or it may be configured so that it can be executed with a symbol variation in which the variation time is less than 60 seconds. However, it may be constructed so that it can be executed even when the second main game symbols change. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the hold for execution of the prefetching lottery on the first main game side is a hold for a big hit, a hold for a loss, and a hold for a variable time of 60 seconds, and button presentation is executed. Fluctuations (variation in the execution of repeated button hits, variation in the execution of a single button effect) are symbol variations that result in a variation time of 60 seconds for the first main game symbol, so the button effect is executed as a look-ahead effect on the first main game side. It may be configured to be able to execute a look-ahead effect suggesting that (for example, the pending display mode of the trigger pending becomes a display similar to the shape of the sub-input button, etc.). In the seventh embodiment, the variation time of the button effect execution variation is set to 60 seconds, but the 60 seconds is an example of a long variation time. A pattern variation with a variation time longer than 60 seconds can also be a button effect execution variation It may be configured such that the pattern variations of 60 seconds, 80 seconds, and 120 seconds can be the button effect execution variations.

Next, at step 2830, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game symbol is displayed from the main control board M side). determines whether or not information indicating that the symbol is to be stopped is received). In the case of Yes at step 2830, at step 2831, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets a decorative design stop display command (determined display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 2999). be done). Next, at step 2832, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 2834, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). do. Note that even if No in step 2810 or step 2830, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2490).

Next, FIG. 197 is a flow chart of the button repeated effect execution process related to the subroutine of step 2850 in FIG. First, in step 2851, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines that the current button repetition valid period (the period during which the repetition effect is displayed by pressing the sub-input button ASB). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes at step 2851, at step 2852, the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n executes a treasure box opening effect (a effect to be executed during the effective period of repeated button presses, the details of which will be described later). Next, at step 2853, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the sub input button ASB is newly input (the sub input button ASB is turned off). → It is determined that a long press has been made when the on state continues for 0.5 seconds after turning on). In the case of Yes in step 2853, in step 2854, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n selects the auto repeated hitting enable flag (the flag is ON and If it is the button repeated hitting effective period, the automatic repeated hitting effect is executed) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2856 . It should be noted that even if the result of step 2853 is No, the process proceeds to step 2856 .

Next, at step 2856, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the auto repeated hitting enable flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2856, at step 2858, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n executes the auto repeated effect and proceeds to step 2864. Note that the auto repeated hit effect is an effect like an effect that occurs in duplicate with the treasure box opening effect when the player presses and holds the sub-input button ASB for a long time. In the case of continuing, one consecutive hit effect is continuously executed every 0.2 seconds (an effect is generated). It should be noted that the effect mode of the automatic repeated hit effect and the effect mode of the single-shot repeated effect described later are the same effect mode, and may be collectively referred to as the repeated hit effect. On the other hand, if No at step 2856, at step 2860, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the sub input button ASB has been pressed once ( If the sub-input button ASB turns from OFF to ON and then turns OFF again without continuing the ON state for 0.5 seconds, it is determined that there has been a single pressing operation). In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n executes a single-shot repeated effect, and proceeds to step 2864. Note that the single-shot continuous-hit effect is an effect like an effect that occurs in duplicate with the treasure-box-opening effect when the player presses the sub-input button ASB single-shot. Each time the button is pressed once, a repeated hit effect is executed (an effect is generated). Next, at step 2864, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the continuous hit effect has been executed a predetermined number of times during the effective period of one continuous button press. do. Note that the predetermined number of repeated hits may be a predetermined number of times, which is the total number of the repeated hits performed in the automatic repeated hits effect and the number of repeated hits performed in the single repeated hits effect. It is 10 times. If Yes at step 2864 , go to step 2868 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2864, in step 2866, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines the end timing of the button repeat valid period (in this example, the button repeat valid period 4 seconds after the start timing). If Yes in step 2866, the process proceeds to step 2868. If No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2830). Next, at step 2868, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n expects a big hit as a result of the treasure box opening effect (for example, a "star" appears, a "ska" appears, etc.). degree) is displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2830). It should be noted that the degree of expectation of a big hit is the ratio of occurrence of the big hit variation to the total of the loss variation and the big hit variation that will cause the same effect If the appearance rate of the pattern variation where the second time is "star" and the third time is "ska" is "losing variation: jackpot variation = 3:7", the expectation of big hit is 70%).

Further, if No at step 2851, at step 2870, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the current auto repeated hit acceptance period (by pressing and holding the sub-input button ASB It is determined whether or not it is a period during which the continuous hit effect is displayed continuously. In the case of Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n displays a treasure chest discovery effect (an effect to be executed during the period during which the automatic continuous pressing is valid and not during the continuous button pressing valid period, details of which will be described later). do). Next, at step 2874, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the sub-input button ASB has been long pressed again. In the case of Yes in step 2874, in step 2876, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n turns on the auto repeated hitting enable flag in the flag area of the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the next process (process of step 2830) is performed. ). Note that even if No in step 2874, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2830).

On the other hand, if No at step 2870, at step 2878, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the auto repeated hitting enable flag is on. do. In the case of Yes at step 2878, at step 2880, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the sub input button ASB is off (whether the sub input button ASB has been pressed long). or not) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2880, in step 2882, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n turns off the auto repeated hitting enable flag in the flag area of the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and performs the next process (process of step 2830). ). Note that even if No in step 2878 or step 2880, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2830).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the execution period of the button effect. In the same figure, the symbol variation is illustrated in which a repeated button-hit effect with a variation time of 60 seconds is executed. First, the sub-input button ASB is disabled for 3 seconds after the start of pattern variation, and the decorative pattern is varied. After that, the auto repeated hit reception period starts at the timing after 3 seconds from the start of the symbol variation. At this timing, the effective period of repeated button presses has not yet started. After that, after two seconds, the valid period of the first repeated button presses starts (the valid period of repeated button presses is provided three times for one symbol variation). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the automatic repeated-press acceptance period is provided before the start timing of the first repeated button-press valid period. Even if the long press of the sub-input button ASB is started before, the automatic repeated hitting performance is started from the start timing of the effective period of the first repeated button hitting. After that, the valid period of the first repeated button presses ends four seconds after the start timing of the valid period of the first repeated button presses, but the automatic repeated presses accepting period continues. After that, the effective period of repeated button presses will stop for 2 seconds from the end of the effective period of the first repeated button presses, and after that, the effective period of the second repeated button presses will be valid for 4 seconds. It is configured so that it is no longer a valid period, and then becomes a valid period for the third repeated button press for 4 seconds. In addition, the auto-repeat accepting period continues until the end timing of the effective period of the third button repeat hits. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, three consecutive button-press valid periods are provided for one symbol change, and the automatic consecutive-press accepting period is two seconds before the start timing of the first button repeated-press valid period. to the end of the effective period of the third repeated button presses. button repetition valid period), the period other than the button repetition effective period is also the auto repetition acceptance period.

Next, FIG. 198 is a flow chart of the single-shot effect execution processing for the button in the subroutine of step 2950 in FIG. First, in step 2952, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines that the current single-shot button effective period (the operation of the sub-input button in the symbol variation in which the button single-shot effect is executed is valid). For example, it is determined whether it is the timing after 5 seconds from the start of fluctuation). In the case of Yes at step 2952, at step 2954, the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n displays a single button image (for example, a button image displaying "PUSH") on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2956, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and selects any sub-input button (sub-input button ASB, sub-input button BSB-2 or sub-input button). CSB-3) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2956, in step 2958, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n erases the single-shot button image being displayed, and cut-in effect (execution to be displayed by operating the sub-input button) is performed. Effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit of the middle pattern variation) is executed (executed for 3 seconds, for example), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2830).

On the other hand, if No at step 2956, at step 2960, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the one-shot button effective period ends (for example, when the one-shot button effective period start timing end after 3 seconds). In the case of Yes at step 2960, at step 2962, the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n erases the single button image being displayed (the cut-in effect is not executed because the sub-input button was not operated), and the next process is performed. (Processing of step 2830). It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2952 or step 2960, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2830). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, only the sub-input button ASB is effective in operation when executing the button repeated effect, whereas the operation is effective in executing the single button effect. The corresponding sub-input buttons are all sub-input buttons (sub-input button ASB, sub-input button BSB-2 and sub-input button CSB-3). Since the sub-input button CSB-3 is turned on by pulling it forward, it is difficult to repeatedly press the sub-input button CSB-3. It is longer than the sub-input button ASB and sub-input button BSB-2. The sub-input button BSB-2 is in the shape of a cross, and is composed of four buttons (including four sensors) of "up", "down", "left", and "right". The shape is not very suitable for repeated hitting operations, such as when trying to perform a repeated hitting operation, a plurality of the four buttons are pressed at the same time and the operation becomes invalid. With this configuration, only the sub-input button ASB button, which is a sub-input button that is formed from one button and has a relatively short stroke required for one operation, can be used to perform repeated hitting effects. It is configured so that the operation is effective when the game is played, making it a user-friendly game machine with good operability. The game machine can be executed and the capacity of the sub-control board S is less burdened. In addition, since there is no problem if the sub-input button can be operated once in the button single-shot effect, all the sub-input buttons are configured to be effective.

Next, FIG. 199 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2900 in FIG. First, at step 2902, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes at step 2902, at step 2904, background effect display control means SM23 refers to main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes at step 2904, at step 2910, the background effect display control means SM23 increments the value of the consecutive villa number counter SM23c2 by one. Next, in steps 2912 and 2914, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and a big hit is made on the effect display device SG. Start display is performed (appropriate display is performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 2916 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2902 , the process proceeds to step 2916 .

Next, at step 2916, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side. It may be executed appropriately as necessary based on the type, etc.). Next, in step 2918, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the number of consecutive villas counter SM23c2 and determines whether or not the counter value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 10). In the case of Yes at step 2918, at step 2922, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the display of the ending effect (effect that can be executed in the special game when the number of consecutive mansions counter value reaches a predetermined value). , go to step 2926 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2918, at step 2924, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command relating to the display of the progress of the big win, and proceeds to step 2926. In addition, the condition for executing the ending effect is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed when a plurality of combined conditions are satisfied.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make special effects displayed during the execution of the big win based on the number of consecutive big wins (regarded as consecutive big wins unless the number of consecutive game counter SM23c2 is cleared). is configured as follows.

Next, at step 2926, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes at step 2926, at step 2928, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the end of the big win on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big win). Next, at step 2930, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). . It should be noted that even if No in step 2904 or step 2926, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

Next, FIG. 200 is an image diagram of execution of repeated hit effects according to the seventh embodiment. In the same figure, a case is illustrated in which the automatic repeated hitting effect is executed in one variation of the decorative symbol for which the repeated button hitting effect is executed. First, the variation of the decoration pattern related to the execution variation of the repeated button-hit effect (the variation of the symbol that causes the repeated button-hit effect to be executed) is executed. After that, the automatic repeated hit acceptance period is started, and the first treasure box discovery effect is executed. Incidentally, the treasure box finding effect is configured to be executed during the period during which the automatic continuous pressing is accepted and which is not during the continuous button pressing valid period. After that, the effective period of the first repeated button presses is started, and the first treasure box opening effect is executed. In addition, an automatic repeated hit effect is executed as a result of the player's long pressing of the sub-input button. It should be noted that the treasure box opening effect is configured to be executed during the effective period of repeated button presses. After that, the effective period of the first repeated button presses ends, and a "star" comes out of the treasure box as the effect result of the first treasure box opening effect executed. Furthermore, there are “stars” and “skas” as the effect results of the treasure box opening effect. It is configured so that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the symbol variation is high.

After that, the second treasure box discovery effect is executed. After that, the second repeated button-press valid period is started, and the second treasure box opening effect is executed. In addition, an auto repeated hit effect is executed as a result of the player's long pressing of the sub-input button. In this example, the player newly presses the sub-input button for a long time during the valid period of the second repeated button presses. However, the automatic continuous hitting effect is executed in the second treasure box opening effect. After that, the effective period of the second successive button presses ends, and "Ska" comes out of the treasure box as the effect result of the second treasure box opening effect executed.

After that, the third treasure box discovery effect is executed. After that, the effective period of the third repeated button presses is started, and the third treasure box opening effect is executed. In addition, an auto repeated hit effect is executed as a result of the player's long pressing of the sub-input button. In this example, the player newly presses the sub-input button for a long time during the effective period of the third repeated button presses. Even if the sub-input button is kept pressed for a long time from the beginning, the automatic continuous hitting effect is executed in the third treasure box opening effect. After that, the effective period of the third repeated button presses and the period for accepting automatic repeated presses are terminated, and a "star" comes out of the treasure box as a result of the third treasure box opening presentation executed. After that, the total number of "stars" found in the three treasure chest presentations (expectation for big hit) is displayed. After that, the ready-to-win effect is executed due to the completion of all the button repeated effect.

With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment, in the pattern variation in which the button repeated effect is executed, three button repeated effective periods are provided, and the first button effect period starts. By starting the auto repeated hit acceptance period before the timing, even if the sub input button (sub input button ASB) is long pressed just before the start timing of the first button repeat effective period, the first button will be accepted. The automatic repeated hitting effect is executed from the start timing of the repeated hitting effective period, and the period between a certain button repeated hitting valid period and the next button repeated hitting valid period, which is not the button repeated hitting valid period, is also regarded as an auto repeated hitting receiving period. As a result, the player can continue to press the sub-input button (sub-input button ASB) for a long period of time to execute the automatic repeated hitting effect during all three button repeated hitting effective periods, which is more user-friendly. It can be a gaming machine. In addition, the sub-input button CSB-3, which is difficult to press repeatedly because it is turned on by pulling it toward you, is not effective in the repeated button-pressing effect, and the sub-input button ASB, which is easy to press repeatedly, is effective in the repeated button-pressing effect. By constructing it so as to obtain a more user-friendly game machine, and by configuring it so that repeated hitting operations can be performed with only one sub-input button, it is possible to perform unified repeated hitting determination and the capacity of the sub-control board S. Therefore, it is possible to make the game machine less burdensome.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment, by configuring the start timing of the auto repeated hit reception period before the start timing of the first button repeated hit valid period, the first button Even if the player starts to press the sub-input button ASB for a long time during execution of the treasure box finding effect before the start of the continuous hitting effective period, the long pressing is maintained to complete the first button continuous hitting effective period, that is, the first time. Continuous hitting effect will be executed in the treasure box opening effect of .

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment, a period that is not the button repeated effective period between the button repeated effective periods (for example, between the first button repeated effective period and the second button repeated effective period period) is also set as the auto-repeat acceptance period, so that even if the player stops long-pressing the sub-input button ASB after the expiration of the first button-repeat valid period, the period during which the button-repeat valid period is not valid or the second press is accepted. If you press and hold the sub-input button ASB again during the effective period of repeated button presses, the continuous-press effect will be executed during the effective period of the second repeated button presses. A stressful event such as the performance not being executed is less likely to occur, and the game machine can be made more user-friendly.

Further, in the configuration of the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment, in which the sub-input button ASB is continuously pressed for a long time, the automatic repeated hit effect is executed during all the button repeated effective periods. (for example, valid period of repeated button presses for the first time = 4 seconds) → period not valid for repeated button presses = 2 seconds → effective period of repeated button presses for the second time = 4 seconds ”→“Period not valid for repeated button presses=2 seconds”→“Effective period for third repeated button presses=4 seconds”). (because it does not use extra processing capacity).

(Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment)
Here, in the seventh embodiment, as the effect mode of the repeated button hitting effect, the treasure box opening effect is executed a plurality of times, and the effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big hit of the symbol variation being executed is executed. is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is defined as Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment, and only the modifications from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 201 is a flow chart of button repeated hitting effect execution processing related to the subroutine of step 2850 in FIG. 196 in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are steps 2884 (variant 1) to step 2888 (variant 1), that is, after the treasure box opening effect is executed in step 2852, the notice effect display is performed in step 2884 (variant 1). The content determining means SM24n displays an auto repeated hitting effective effect on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to step 2853. Here, the automatic repeated hitting effect is an effect for informing the player that the automatic repeated hitting effect will be executed by pressing the current sub-input button ASB for a long time. Further, after the result of the treasure box opening effect is displayed at step 2868, at step 2885 (variant 1), the notice effect display content determining means SM24n refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the special symbol is scheduled to stop. It is determined whether or not. Here, the special symbol is a temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol, which is a pseudo-continuous variation (a symbol that appears to the player as if multiple symbol variations are executed in one variation of the decorative symbol). It is a stop symbol that suggests that a variation) will be executed. In addition, in the modification example 1 from the seventh embodiment, as the execution mode of the button repeated hitting effect, three types of repeated button hitting effective periods, namely, the button repeated effective period is once, the button repeated effective period is twice, and the button repeated effective period is three times. There are repeated button hits for the number of times during the period (there are multiple button hits that have the same number of button repeated effective periods, but there are multiple effects with different results), and a lottery is used to produce the repeated button hits. , and the effect mode of the button repeated hitting effect are determined (may be determined based on the variation mode of the main game symbols and the variation mode of the decorative symbols). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, when the repeated button hitting effect with a large number of button repeated effective periods is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the repeated button hitting effect with a small number of button repeated effective periods is executed. It may be constructed so as to be higher, or it may be constructed so that it is definite that the number of times of the effective period of repeated button pushes is one, and that the repeated button pushes will result in a big win. In the case of Yes in step 2885 (variant 1), in step 2886 (variant 1), the announcement effect display content determining means SM24n stops displaying the special symbol, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2830). On the other hand, even if No in step 2885 (variant 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2830).

In addition, after executing the treasure box discovery series in step 2872, in step 2888 (variation 1), the announcement effect display content determination means SM24n displays a countdown effect on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to step 2874. Here, the automatic repeated hitting effective effect is an effect for notifying the player of the current automatic repeated hitting accepting period and how many seconds later the automatic repeated hitting accepting period will end.

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the execution period of the button effect. The difference from the seventh embodiment is that the number of valid periods of repeated button presses is set to three types, 1, 2, and 3. As shown in FIG. If they are different, the execution period of the repeated button-press effect and the automatic repeated-press acceptance period are configured to be different. Further, the special symbols are stopped during a period between a certain button continuous hitting valid period and the next button continuous hitting valid period, which is not the button repeated hitting valid period.

Next, FIG. 202 is a modification example of the repeated hit effect execution image diagram according to modification example 1 from the seventh embodiment. In the same figure, similar to the image diagram of execution of repeated button hits shown in the seventh embodiment, the automatic repeated hits effect is executed in one variation of the decorative pattern in which the repeated button hits effect is executed, and the repeated button hits are performed. A case in which the number of valid periods is three is illustrated. The changes from the seventh embodiment are that the countdown effect is executed when the treasure box discovery effect is executed, the auto repeated hitting effect effect is executed when the treasure box opening effect is executed, and the result of the treasure box opening effect. When "continued" appears as a special symbol, the "continued" symbol stops. In addition, in the modification 1 from the seventh embodiment, when "Continued" appears as a result of the treasure box opening effect, the special symbols are stopped, and then the next treasure box discovery effect is executed. When "reach" appears as a result of the treasure box opening effect, the reach effect is executed thereafter. In addition, since the special symbols are stopped and the pseudo-continuous variation is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win increases, so the player feels anticipation that "continuation" will appear as a result of the treasure box opening effect. In other words, the later the start of execution of the ready-to-win effect is, the more the expectation that the symbol variation will be a big hit can be heightened. In this example, the auto repeated hitting effect is executed (displayed) only during execution of the treasure box opening effect, in other words, only during the effective period of button repeated hitting. In other words, it may be configured so that it is always executed (displayed) during the auto repeated hit acceptance period. The countdown effect is configured to display the time until the end timing of the treasure box effect, that is, the start timing of the effective period of repeated button presses (the displayed time value decreases as the timing approaches). When the timing is reached, the display becomes "0 seconds left until opening", and the display is erased.

In the modified example 1 from the seventh embodiment, the special symbol is stopped when the treasure box opening effect results in "Continue", but the effect mode of the repeated button press effect is different from this. For example, as a result of the treasure box opening effect, a "star" or "ska" will appear as in the seventh embodiment to increase the expectation of the big hit of the change, and apart from the treasure box opening effect, It may be configured to execute an effect to incite whether or not the special symbol is stopped (whether or not the pseudo continuous variation is executed).

In this example, when a predetermined number of repeated hits (in this example, 10 times) are performed during the valid period of button repeated hits, that is, when it is detected that the sub-input button SB has been pressed a predetermined number of times, the treasure box is opened. Although it is configured to display the effect as a result of the opening effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and a point is given each time the sub-input button SB is pressed once during the button-successive-hit valid period in the pattern variation in which the button-smashing effect is executed. It may be configured such that when it is possible to acquire (acquisition points are displayed) and the pressing of the sub-input button SB a predetermined number of times is detected, the total points acquired for the predetermined number of times is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can expect that the symbol variation will result in a big win each time the acquired points are displayed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko game machine according to the modification 1 from the seventh embodiment, when executing the button repeated hitting effect, the special symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the ready-to-win effect is executed at a late timing. By configuring so that the degree of expectation for the big hit of the symbol variation being executed is high, the player has a sense of anticipation that the special symbol will be stopped and displayed, and longs for the execution timing of the ready-to-win performance scheduled to be executed to be delayed. It will be possible to create a novel game property.

In the modified example 1 from the seventh embodiment, regardless of the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation is performed, the variation time of the symbol variation is set to 60 seconds. In the pattern variation in which the button repeated effect is executed, the variation time of the symbol variation in which the pseudo-continuous variation is performed once is 60 seconds, the variation time of the symbol variation in which the pseudo-continuous variation is performed twice is 80 seconds, and the pseudo-continuous variation. The variation time of the pattern variation performed three times may be set to 120 seconds, and the variation time may be increased as the number of pseudo-continuous variation increases. With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the performance execution time of super ready-to-win performance and the like even when the pseudo-continuous variation is executed many times.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this example, the interval between repeated hits of the automatic repeated hits effect executed by pressing the sub input button ASB for a long time is executed) can be changed by the player. As an example of a specific change method, when the variation of the main game symbols is not executed and the special game is not being performed (or the sub-input button is not being played), the sub-input button ASB is pressed to set the auto repeated hitting interval adjustment mode. (the effect display device SG displays that the interval between repeated hits in the automatic repeated hits effect can be changed), and by operating the sub-input button BSB-2 in the automatic repeated hits interval adjustment mode, the automatic repeated hits effect is performed. By changing the interval of the repeated hitting effect, and pressing the sub input button ASB again, the changed interval of the repeated hitting effect of the automatic repeated hitting effect may be determined, or the variation of the main game pattern is executed. When the sub-input button ASB is pressed and held for a long time when the sub-input button ASB is not being played and the special game is not in progress (or during the small win), the mode shifts to the automatic repeated hitting interval adjustment mode, and the sub-input button ASB is pressed in the automatic repeated hitting interval adjusting mode. The player hits repeatedly, and the interval between the repeated hits measured for a predetermined time is determined as the interval of the repeated hits effect of the auto repeated hits effect (for example, by measuring the total number of times the sub input button ASB is pressed by the player in 3 seconds). , to calculate the average of the interval between successive hits).

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this example, by pressing the sub input button ASB for a long time, it is possible to execute an automatic repeated hit effect. In the example, it is configured so that automatic repeated hitting can be started when it continues for 0.5 seconds. may Specifically, when the automatic repeated hitting button is pressed during the button repeated effective period, the automatic repeated hitting effect is started when the automatic repeated hitting button is switched from off to on.

(Eighth embodiment)
The gaming machine according to the present example can also be configured so that one set value can be set from a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, an example of a configuration having a plurality of setting values will be described in detail below as an eighth embodiment.

First, FIG. 203 is an example of the first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table) in the case of changing the winning probability of the main game symbols according to the set value in the eighth embodiment. . In this example, the setting 1, the setting 2, and the setting 3 are configured so that the profit rate given to the player increases in that order. More specifically, the setting 1 win (jackpot) winning probability during the non-probability variation game is set to about 1/320, and the setting 2 win (jackpot) winning probability during the non-probability variation game is It is set to about 1/318, and the winning probability of setting 3 in the non-probability variation game is set to about 1/317. In addition, the winning (jackpot) winning probability of setting 1 during the probability variation game is set to approximately 1/160, and the winning (jackpot) winning probability of setting 2 during the probability variation game is set to approximately 1/159. The winning probability of setting 3 (jackpot) during the probability variation game is set to about 1/158. Therefore, the winning (jackpot) winning probability during the probability variation game is about twice the winning (jackpot) winning probability during the non-probability variation game, and the ratio is configured to be common to all settings. . This point is the same for the first main game side and the second main game side.

In addition, as shown in the figure, it is determined to be a hit (big hit) in the setting 2 of the non-probability variation game even in the random value range determined to be a hit (big hit) in the setting 1 at the time of the non-probability variation game. Both the random number range and the random number range determined as winning (jackpot) in the setting 3 at the time of non-probability variation game include "0 to 204" as a common range. Therefore, for example, when a hold with a random value of one of "0 to 204" occurs during a non-probability variation game, the hold is won ( (and if the random number determined to be a hit (jackpot) outside the range of "0 to 204" is not notified in advance), that The higher the frequency that the hold is digested and the winning lottery is performed (resulting in a big hit) without the advance notification (prefetching effect) being executed, the higher the possibility of setting 3 (the set value It can also be configured so that suggestions can be made) (In the order of setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, the number of random numbers determined as hits (big hits) outside the range of “0 to 204” increases. be). This point can be similarly applied to the probability variation game, and can be applied to both the first main game side and the second main game side. Also, since the random number range determined to be a hit (small hit) for a certain set value does not overlap with the random number range determined to be a hit (big hit) for other set values, which set value is Regardless of whether or not a hit (minor hit) is determined to be a random number that belongs to the range of random values, if a hold occurs, the hold will be a hit (small hit) before the hold is digested and the lottery If you pre-notify that you are going to be a hit), you can pre-notify a win (minor win) regardless of the set value (pre-determination processing related to the look-ahead effect can be shared).

On the other hand, it is also possible to configure so that setting values are not suggested by the look-ahead effect, and an example thereof will be shown below. The look-ahead determination table in the table below is a pre-determination table that the main control board M has. When a suspension occurs, the main control board M derives a prefetch code by referring to the prefetch determination table based on the random value associated with the suspension, and transmits it to the sub control board S. For example, if the main control board M side is set to 3, the sub control board S corresponds to one of the prefetch codes A, B, and C based on the information related to the setting value transmitted from the main control board M in advance. If the main control board M side is set to 2, advance notification of a hit (big hit) is made only in the case of either the look-ahead code A or B, and the main control If the board M side is set to 1, advance notice to the effect that it is a hit (big hit) is given only in the case of the look-ahead code A. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to guess the setting on the main control board M side from the execution tendency of the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 203 illustrates a configuration having three levels of setting values, setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, as setting values that can be set. You may change the content of a number or a setting value. As a specific example, it may be configured to have six levels of setting values of "setting 1, setting 2, setting 3, setting 4, setting 5, setting 6", or "setting 1, setting 3, setting 5". It may be configured to have three levels of setting values, or may be configured to have three levels of setting values of "setting 1, setting 4, setting S", or one level of "setting value 1" It may be configured to have a setting value of only It should be noted that it is preferable to be able to shift to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode even when the setting value is set in only one stage. With this configuration, in the setting change mode, even if the RAM clear button is pressed, the setting value display (setting value data) is not changed, and the setting value is determined by turning off the setting key switch. may be configured to

(How to change settings)
Next, FIGS. 204 and 205 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method using the setting key switch and the RAM clear button. The setting change method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like releases the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game clerk opens the front frame D14, if the power switch Ea of the game machine is off, the setting key switch is off, and the RAM clear button is off, the next procedure is performed. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on or the setting key switch is on, it is turned off to proceed to the next step.
(3) A game clerk or the like turns the setting key switch to the right to turn it on, turning on the RAM clear button.
(4) When the game clerk or the like turns on the power switch Ea, the game machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the set value is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to display a default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), or may be configured to display the currently set setting value. good too. Also, in order to make it possible to grasp that the mode is the setting change mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a voice saying "setting is being changed" is output. The setting value display device is controlled by the main control board M.
(5) Once the RAM clear button is turned off (6) Each time the game clerk presses the RAM clear button (every time it is turned on from off), the set value (set value data, sometimes referred to as set value candidate) ) is changed to the next set value (set value data), and the set value (set value data) is displayed on the set value display device. In the same figure, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and changed to the setting value 2, but the settings are jumped (for example, setting 1 → setting 3 → setting 5, setting 2 → setting 4 → setting 6, etc.). Even if it is configured, it is preferable to configure it so that the next set value (for example, set value 1 is changed to set value 3). Also, if the game clerk or the like presses the setting change button once, the setting may be decremented by -1. In this case, setting 6 is preferably the setting with the lowest jackpot probability, and the default setting value is preferably 6. Furthermore, characters or symbols that can be displayed on the set value display device of the 7-segment display may be used as settings, such as L (LOW) or H (HIGH). Here, display of setting values and selection candidates of setting values can be changed, and the setting is determined when the determination condition is satisfied. That is, the display of the setting value display device displays "1" when the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and each time the setting change button is operated, the display switches to "1→2→3→1→2". The setting value is set (fixed) to 2 when the confirmation condition is satisfied when the display of the setting value display device is "2".
(7) The setting is confirmed when the game clerk turns the setting key switch to the left to turn it off (the confirmation condition is satisfied and the setting change mode ends), and is displayed on the setting value display device of the game machine. The setting value display is cleared. It should be noted that the setting value may be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the setting is confirmed.
(8) Close the front frame D14. Incidentally, the configuration may be such that the game can be executed when the setting is confirmed, or the game can be executed when the front frame D14 is closed. The gaming machine according to this example has a sensor capable of detecting whether the front frame D14 is closed or open.

(Setting confirmation method)
Next, FIG. 206 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method using the setting key switch and RAM clear button. The setting confirmation method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like releases the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) The power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off, the setting key switch is off, and the RAM clear button is off.
(3) (4) When the game clerk turns the setting key switch to the right to turn it on and turns on the power switch Ea, the gaming machine shifts to a setting confirmation mode (also called a setting display mode). , the current set value is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is in the setting confirmation mode, it may be configured to output a sound "Confirming settings". is not output (the output of the game sound is stopped), and only the sound "Checking settings" is output, or the game sound and "Checking settings" are output at the same time. It is good also as a structure.
(5) When the game clerk or the like turns off the setting key switch, the game machine terminates the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. At this time, the configuration may be such that a voice saying "The setting confirmation is finished" is output.
(6) The game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. In the setting confirmation mode, since the progress of the game (variation of special symbols, etc.) is continued without being paused, even if the front frame is closed during the variation of the special symbols, the effect display device SG Variation of decorative patterns and effect display are continued. In the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped. In this case, when the setting key switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is entered, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped, and the setting key switch is turned on. When turned off, the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the temporary stop is released, and the game continues to progress. Here, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, unlike the case of shifting to the setting change mode, the probability state is maintained in the state immediately before shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

<<Configuration Related to Sub Input Button SB>>
Next, as a configuration relating to the sub-input button SB applicable to the pachinko game machine in the present specification, a sub-input button drive effect (sometimes referred to as an operation member drive effect) driven by the sub-input button SB can be executed. You may The sub-input button drive effect includes a button vibration effect in which the entire sub-input button SB vibrates (sometimes referred to as an operation member vibration effect), and a structure inside the sub-input button SB (or the sub-input button SB itself) that rotates. A button rotation effect (sometimes referred to as an operation member rotation effect), a button expansion/contraction effect in which the sub-input button SB is driven up and down (sometimes referred to as an operation member expansion/contraction effect), and a change in the shape of the sub-input button SB. It is possible to configure such that a button deformation effect (sometimes referred to as an operation member deformation effect) can be executed. In the following, a pachinko game machine configured to be able to execute a button vibe effect as a sub-input button drive effect will be described in detail. Note that the button vibration effect in this specification is merely an example of a sub-input button drive effect, so there is no problem in replacing the button vibration effect with a button rotation effect, a button expansion/contraction effect, or a button deformation effect. Supplement. Further, the operation members controlled by the sub-control board S may be provided in addition to the sub-input buttons SB (they may be provided separately from the sub-input buttons SB, or may be provided separately from the sub-input buttons SB. member may be provided), for example, an operation member in the shape of a telephone that detects the player's operation when the receiver is picked up, or a pistol-shaped member that detects the player's operation when the trigger is pulled. It may be configured to have an operation member, an operation member that is in the shape of a sword or a lever and that detects the player's operation by being pulled toward you, and such an operation member also includes sub-units described in detail below. It is possible to apply all the configurations of the operation member driving presentation of the input button SB. As an example, when the operation member vibration effect related to the telephone-shaped operation member is configured to be executable, the handset-shaped operation member is configured to vibrate. It should be noted that one or more configurations detailed below may be applied to all configurations in this specification without any problem.

<A: Button vibe effect>
First, FIG. 207 is an image diagram relating to the button vibe effects that can be executed by the sub-input button SB and the button vibes related to the initial action. First, the button vibration effect shown in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail.

Also, although not shown, in this example, the sub-input button SB has a button lamp that can be lit in a plurality of lighting modes, and the effect associated with the sub-input button SB is not executed. A lighting mode in a situation is called a normal mode. It should be noted that the button lamp may be extinguished in a situation in which the effect related to the sub-input button SB is not being executed (it should be noted that the lighting in the normal mode hereinafter may be replaced with "extinction"). back).

First, in the figure (a), the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol is a ready-to-win with seven symbols, and the second decorative symbol is They are all fluctuating, and the button lamp of the sub-input button SB is lit in a normal mode (for example, gray).

Note that reach means, for example, in a decorative pattern having three columns, a left row, a middle row, and a right row, the left row and the right row are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, and the middle row is fluctuating. This is a situation in which the remaining one symbol is fluctuating and the other symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol.

It should be noted that the configuration of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern when describing the configuration of the sub-input button SB in detail is merely an example, and it should be noted that all configurations according to this specification are applicable. Keep As an example of a modification, there is no problem even if the configuration shown in the figure is changed such that when the first decorative pattern becomes ready-to-win, the second decorative design also becomes ready-to-win.

Next, in FIG. 4(b), a button effect is executed, and a button image (an image simulating a sub-input button) and "Press!!" This is sometimes referred to as an instruction display, the details of which will be described later) is displayed. In the figure, the button lamp is configured to be in the normal mode even during execution of the button effect, but this is not a limitation. (For example, the button lamp may be configured to light up in blue, green, etc., which have higher illuminance than gray) (at least turn off so that the player can recognize that the sub-input button SB should be operated). not be configured). With this configuration, the player can recognize the situation in which the sub-input button SB should be operated by visually recognizing the button lamp. It should be noted that the lighting mode of the sub-input button SB may be configured to suggest or notify the degree of expectation for execution of the special game. In such a configuration, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is relatively high. Or, in the case of reporting, it lights up in red instead of white, and when suggesting or reporting that the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is certain), it is colored rainbow instead of white or red. may be illuminated. In addition, in the same figure, in order to clarify the state in which the button vibration effect is being executed and the state in which the button vibration effect is not being executed, in the situation where the button vibration effect is not being executed, the button lamp is lit in the normal mode. is exemplified, there is no problem even if it is changed, and in various situations when the button vibration effect is not being executed, there is no problem even if the button lamp is lit in a lighting mode other than the normal mode. Note that the button image may be referred to as a specific image or a first image.

Next, in (c) of the same figure, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect, execution of the button vibration effect is started. When the button vibe effect is executed, the sub-input button SB vibrates, and the button lamp lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the button vibe effect (for example, blue, suggesting or announcing that the execution expectation of the special game is relatively high). It is configured to light up in green when the special game is to be executed, and in rainbow colors when suggesting or notifying that the execution expectation of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is definite). At this time, the lighting mode of the button lamp differs before and after the operation of the sub-input button SB (or before and after the button effect is started). may be white and become green or rainbow after being operated, green before being operated and becoming rainbow after being operated, etc.). In addition, the lighting mode of the button lamp is the same before and after the operation of the sub-input button SB (or before and after the start of the button effect execution) (for example, the sub-input button White before the operation of the SB and white after the operation, green before the operation of the sub-input button SB and green after the operation, rainbow color before the operation of the sub-input button SB and rainbow color after the operation, etc.). With this configuration, when the button effect and the accompanying button vibration effect are executed twice within one variation, the sub-input button SB is activated by the first button effect and the second button effect. Before the operation and after the operation (or before the start of the button effect execution and after the start of the button effect execution), the switching pattern of the lighting mode of the button lamp is different. It becomes green after the second sub-input button SB is operated, and becomes green before the second sub-input button SB is operated, and becomes rainbow after the second sub-input button SB is operated. It may be configured such that the button SB is white before the button SB is operated and becomes rainbow after the operation). In this way, the button vibe effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the execution expectation of a big hit (special game) is high. In other words, when suggesting or notifying that the degree of expectation for execution of a big hit is high, the button vibration effect can be executed. Note that the button effect has a valid period (sometimes referred to as an operation valid period), and when the button effect accompanied by the button vibration effect is executed and the valid period elapses, the sub input button SB is activated. It is configured so that the button vibration effect starts to be executed even if it is not operated. It should be noted that the configuration related to the button lamps in this specification is an example of the decoration LED that the pachinko game machine has, and the configuration of the button lamps according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, which is the decoration LED. However, it may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. Also, the button lamp is sometimes called a decoration lamp, and the game effect lamp D26 is sometimes called a decoration lamp. Here, when the configuration of the button lamp according to the present specification is applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26, when the button effect (or button vibration effect) is executed, the type of lighting mode of the button lamp The number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, 6 types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) is greater than the number (for example, 3 types of white, red, and rainbow colors). With such a configuration, various lighting patterns can be realized for the game effect lamp D26 which is easily visible to the player, and the button lamp which is difficult to be seen by the player can be used by a skilled player (even if the button lamp is used to execute a special game). It is possible to make it easier for a player who knows that the degree of expectation is suggested or reported to grasp which lamp pattern it is. The number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is either one (for example, only red) or two types. (For example, two types of white and red), the number of types of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of types of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibration effect) is executed. It is preferable, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time to restore the power supply, and the execution of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is deterministic) not be misidentified.

In the gaming machine according to the present specification, the modes of operation of the sub-input button SB are single press (sometimes referred to as single press operation), long press (sometimes referred to as long press operation), repeated hits (repeated hits). operation).
(1) A single press is an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is switched from off to on and then turned off again without continuing the on state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).
(2) A long press is an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is switched from off to on and remains on for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer.
(3) Continuous pressing is an operation mode in which a single pressing is executed multiple times during the effective period of the sub-input button SB (effective period of continuous pressing).
It should be noted that when the sub-input button SB is operated or the sub-input button SB is pressed without any particular mention of the operation mode, the sub-input button SB can be replaced with a single press.

Returning to the description of the image diagrams, in FIG. 4D, the execution time of the button vibration effect has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds have passed since the button vibration effect started to be executed), and the button vibration effect ends. After that, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are determined and stopped at the big hit pattern. Thus, in this example, the execution of the button vibe effect is completed by the time the symbol variation in which the execution of the button vibe effect is started is completed (the main game symbol is stopped). Further, even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB during the execution of the button effect and the effective period elapses and the button vibe effect is executed, the pattern variation that started the button vibrate effect ends. The button vibration effect is configured to finish executing by the time it is done. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the button vibe production will end (for example, end during the fluctuation fixed time) by the time the next pattern fluctuation of the pattern fluctuation in which the execution of the button vibe production is started starts. may be configured.

As described above, in this example, the button vibration effect can be executed as the button effect, and there are cases where the button vibration effect is executed at various timings. When the sub-input button SB is operated at the timing of informing the result (in other words, whether or not to shift to a special game) of the ready-to-win effect (especially the super ready-to-win effect such as the battle ready-to-win effect to be described later), button vibration effect is performed. is configured to execute (in the case of a jackpot). Such a button effect at the timing of notifying the result of the ready-to-win effect may be referred to as a win-lose branch effect, a button effect related to a win-lose branch, or a win-lose branch operation effect. In the case of suggesting or notifying that a big hit has been achieved in the winning/losing branch production, by operating the sub-input button SB (or by the expiration of the operation valid period), during the battle production (during the production in which the hero and the enemy are fighting) The movable accessory moves and emits light in rainbow colors, after which the letters ``Victory'' are displayed in gold, and then the first decorative pattern is displayed in doubles such as ``777'', indicating that there is no big hit in the win-lose branch effect. When suggesting or notifying, the movable accessory does not operate due to the operation of the sub-input button SB (or due to the lapse of the operation effective period), the characters "defeat" are displayed in white, and then the first decorative pattern. is displayed in an out-of-reach mode such as "787". Further, when the button effect is executed at the timing of informing the result of the ready-to-win effect, and in the case of informing that the symbol variation being executed is a loss, the button vibrator effect is not produced even if the player operates the sub-input button SB. It is not executed, and after that, the first decorative design and the second decorative design stop at the losing design. Note that the button effect is sometimes referred to as an operation effect, and the button vibe effect (vibration of the sub-input button SB when executing the button vibe effect) is sometimes referred to as the effect action or the predetermined action.

Further, as described above, the following configuration can be applied as the configuration of the button vibe effect applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification.
(1) A button effect is executed in the middle of a pattern change, and when the player operates the sub-input button SB or the effective period elapses, a button vibration effect is executed.
(2) It is executed during part of the execution of the button presentation, and plays a role of prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB. In other words, even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, the button vibration effect is executed when the execution timing of the button effect comes, and the effective period of the sub-input button SB is started (at a predetermined timing thereafter). This button vibe effect may be referred to as a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB and has an effective period.
(3) This is a performance executed as a kind of notice performance, and even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, the button vibration performance is executed at the execution timing and the effective period of the sub-input button SB does not start. Also, the button image is not displayed. The button vibration effect may be called a button vibration effect requiring no operation of the sub-input button SB and having no valid period, or may be called a button vibration effect requiring no operation of the sub-input button SB.

In this specification, a button effect is defined as an effect that has a period during which the operation of the sub-input button SB is effective (has a valid period), and after the effective period starts and after the sub-input button SB is operated (or , after the effective period has elapsed) until the end of the effect (including the button vibe effect) is the execution period of the button effect, but it is not limited to this, and after the sub input button SB is operated (or valid After the period of time has elapsed) from the start of the effect (including the button vibration effect) to the end of the effect may be referred to as the button effect, and the operation of the sub-input button SB described above is unnecessary and effective. An effect involving the action of the sub-input button SB, such as a button vibration effect that does not have a period, may be referred to as a button effect.

<B: Button vibration related to initial operation>
In addition, as described above, in this example, the sub-input button SB is configured to perform an initial operation when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). The vibration may be referred to as button vibration associated with the initial operation. The operation of the sub-input button SB can be checked by executing the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored. An example in which the button vibration related to the initial operation is executed will be described in detail below.

First, in the same figure (e), the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol is a ready-to-win with 7 symbols, and the second decorative symbol is All of them are fluctuating, and the button lamp of the sub-input button SB is lit in the normal mode.

Next, at (f) in the figure, a power failure occurs (power supply to the game machine is cut off). Next, at (g) in the same figure, a predetermined timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the power supply is resumed) after the power is restored (the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed) In , the effect display device SG displays "Power is being restored", indicating that the display in the effect display device SG is being restored (processing to restore the display is being executed), and the sub-input button SB Button vibration related to the initial operation is being executed.

Next, in (h) of the same figure, the same symbol variation as in (e) of the same figure is continuously executed, the display of the effect display device SG is restored, and the background image and the like are displayed. However, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are hidden. In the figure, when the pattern variation being executed ends (or when the next pattern variation starts), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed. In addition, it is not limited to this, and when the display of the effect display device SG is restored after the power is restored (when the display of "power is being restored" is finished), even if the pattern fluctuation is not finished, the first decorative pattern and/or the display of the second decorative pattern may also be restored. In addition, as another mode of power restoration, power failure occurs (supply of power to the game machine is cut off), and then power is restored (supply of power to the game machine is restarted). At a predetermined timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the supply of power is resumed), the effect display device SG is restored to display "Restoring power supply" (the display is not displayed). (Processing to restore power is being executed) is displayed, and the display of "Returning power" continues until the pattern fluctuation is completed, and when the pattern fluctuation is completed, the display of "Recovering power" is displayed. After the end, the background image is displayed, and as the stop symbols exclusively for when the power is restored, "711" is displayed as the first decorative design and "711" is displayed as the second decorative design. In other words, except after the power is restored, "711" may not be stop-displayed (not selected as a stop design) as a missing design in either the first decorative design or the second decorative design. When configured in this way, the execution timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB is set to "power "Restoring" is being displayed, and if the remaining time of the fluctuation display at the time of power failure is short (for example, 3 seconds), after the display of "Restoring power" ends (background image, first 1 decorative pattern, 2nd decorative pattern, etc. are being displayed). Although details will be described later, depending on the timing of the power off, the initial A button vibration related to the operation may be performed. As an example, the button vibration associated with the initial operation of the sub-input button SB is started at the timing 10 seconds after the timing at which the display of "Restoring power" is started and continues for 5 seconds. In addition, it is appropriate that the execution timing (or execution start timing) of the initial action of the movable role and the button vibration related to the initial action do not overlap (for example, the initial action of the movable role is the display of "Restoring power"). (initial operation is performed for 10 seconds). However, in the case of having two or more movable accessories, the execution timing of the button vibration related to the initial action of any of the movable accessories may not overlap. In order to complete it quickly, the execution timings of the initial action of one movable accessory and the button vibration related to the initial action may overlap (at least part of the period overlaps).

In addition, in (h) of the figure, the button vibration related to the initial action continues, and although the details will be described later, the button vibration related to the initial action is configured to be executed across the next symbol change. .

Vibration of the sub-input button SB as a button vibration effect and vibration of the sub-input button SB as a button vibration related to the initial action may be collectively referred to as an operation member operation or an operation member operation execution. .

<Action 1 regarding power interruption>
Next, FIG. 208 is an operation diagram regarding power-off and button vibration related to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB. First, the action 1 related to power-off shown in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail.

In the situation where the main game symbols are fluctuating, at the timing of (1) in the figure, a power cut occurs (the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off), and the main game patterns do not fluctuate (symbols The variation is not executed because the power supply to the game machine is cut off, not because the variation has ended).

After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the power is restored (the power supply to the game machine is restarted), and the fluctuation of the main game symbols is restarted. After that, at the timing (4) in the figure, the button vibration relating to the initial operation of the sub-input button SB starts to be executed based on the restoration of the power supply. After that, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the executed symbol variation is terminated, but the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation is continued. After that, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the next symbol variation is started, and the button vibration relating to the initial operation is continuously performed.

As described above, in this example, the pattern variation in which the button vibration relating to the initial action is executed is completed, and even after the next symbol variation starts, the button vibration relating to the initial action can be continuously executed. ing. In other words, the button vibration related to the initial action is configured to be executed across a plurality of symbol variations. Also, the button vibration related to the initial operation may be executed during the variable fixed time. It should be noted that the button vibration associated with the initial action may be simply referred to as the initial action.

On the other hand, as described above, in the button vibe performance, the execution of the button vibe performance is completed by the time the symbol variation in which the button vibe performance is started is completed (the main game symbols are stopped). In other words, the button vibe effect is configured not to be executed across a plurality of symbol variations. Also, the button vibe effect is configured not to be executed during the variable fixed time.

Further, as the look-ahead effect, a button vibe look-ahead effect in which a button vibe effect can be executed may be configured to be executable. Note that the button vibe look-ahead effect is not a button effect (a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB, and is an effect in which the button image corresponding to this button vibe effect is not displayed. This is a button vibration effect that does not require operation of the button SB and does not have an effective period). As an example, immediately after the start of each symbol variation over three symbol variations (the button vibe continues for 1 second after 0.5 seconds from the start of the symbol variation), a button vibe look-ahead effect is executed (3 variations In the case where the eye becomes a trigger variation), (1) the button vibe effect is executed (three times in total) in the first variation, the second variation, and the third variation, and (2) the first variation and the second variation. In other words, it may be configured such that the button vibe effect is executed by pattern variation (sometimes referred to as pre-trigger variation) other than trigger variation. In this way, even when the button vibe effect is executed over a plurality of symbol variations as the look-ahead effect, the button vibe effect may not be executed across a plurality of symbol variations.

By configuring in this way, in a situation where the game is progressing normally, it is possible to configure it so that the button vibration effect can be executed over a plurality of symbol changes, thereby improving the interest of the game. By constructing so that the button vibe performance is not executed over a plurality of pattern variations, the separation of the button vibe performance becomes clear, and the confusion of the player can be prevented. On the other hand, when the power supply is restored after the power failure occurs, the button vibration related to the initial operation can be performed over a plurality of pattern fluctuations, so that the vibration of the sub-input button SB can be performed normally. priority can be given to confirming

In addition, in the configuration described above, the button vibe effect is configured so that it is not always executed across a plurality of symbol variations, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured as follows.
(1) Predetermined game state (for example, non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state, non-probability variable game state and time-reduced game state, probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state, probability variable game state and time In the shortened game state), the button vibe effect is not executed across a plurality of symbol variations.
(2) In a predetermined production mode (sometimes referred to as production stage, stay stage, and background production), the button vibe production is not executed over a plurality of pattern variations.
(3) During execution of the button vibe look-ahead effect, the button vibe effect is not executed over a plurality of symbol variations.
(4) During execution of the button vibe look-ahead effect, the button vibe effect can be executed over a plurality of symbol variations.
(5) When a certain symbol variation and the next symbol variation are in the same game state, there is a case where the button vibe effect is executed across a certain symbol variation and the next symbol variation, but there is a certain symbol variation. When the game state is different between the next symbol variation and the next symbol variation, the button vibration effect is not executed across a certain symbol variation and the next symbol variation.
It may be configured to have one or more of the configurations described above.

<Action 2 regarding power interruption>
Next, the action 2 related to power-off shown in the lower part of the figure will be described in detail.

Under the condition that the main game symbols are fluctuating and the setting key switch is off, at the timing of (1) in the figure, a power failure occurs (the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off), and the main game symbols The variation becomes non-variable (the variation is not executed because the power supply to the game machine is cut off, not because the symbol variation has ended).

After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the power is restored (the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed), and the fluctuation of the main game pattern is resumed (at this point, the fluctuation of the main game pattern is resumed). may not be present, and may be resumed after the setting key switch (to be described later) is turned off from on). After that, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the setting key switch is turned on from off. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, it becomes the execution start timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation in the same way as the above-mentioned "action 1 regarding power failure". At the timing of (4) in the figure, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed.

As described above, in the "operation 2 related to power failure", when the power failure occurs while the setting key switch is off, and then the power is restored while the setting key switch is off, the initial operation is performed. If the setting key switch turns from off to on before the start timing of the button vibration (and/or after the start timing of the display of "returning power"), the initial operation is performed while the setting key switch is on. The button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed even when the execution timing of the button vibration related to is reached.

By configuring in this way, for example, when you want to check the game operation after the power is restored, when you want to check the operation other than the button vibration such as the operation of the movable accessory, and when you do not want to generate a vibration error. If the manager of the game parlor does not want the button vibration related to the initial operation to be executed, by performing a special operation of turning on the setting key switch after the power is restored, the button vibration related to the initial operation will not occur. It is possible to improve the convenience of inspection of the game machine.

In the figure, by turning the setting key switch from off to on before the timing of executing the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed. The setting key switch is not limited to this, and by turning the setting key switch from off to on until the display of "Restoring power" on the effect display device SG described above with reference to FIG. When it is time to execute the button vibration related to the initial operation while it is on, the button vibration related to the initial operation may not be executed. Also, if the power is turned off while the setting key switch is off, and then the power is restored while the setting key switch is off, before the start timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation and/or Alternatively, the setting key switch turns from off to on after the display start timing of "Returning power", and thereafter, a specific timing (for example, the button vibrator for the initial operation If the setting key switch is turned off from on one second before the execution start timing of (1 second before the execution start timing of (), the button vibration related to the initial operation may be executed at the execution timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation. .

In addition, similarly to the "action 2 related to power-off", when the setting key switch is turned on, the timing (4) in the figure is reached, which is the start timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation, but the button related to the initial operation When the vibration is not executed, the subsequent action may be configured as follows.
(1) If the setting key switch is turned off during the execution period of the button vibration related to the initial operation starting from (4) in the figure, the button vibration related to the initial operation will be resumed from the middle to the remaining Run only for a period of time.
(2) If the setting key switch is turned off during the execution period of the button vibration related to the initial operation starting from (4) in the figure, the button vibration related to the initial operation is restarted from the beginning. Execute.
(3) Even if the setting key switch is turned off during the execution period of the button vibration related to the initial operation starting from (4) in the figure, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed.

<A: Button effect image 1>
Next, FIG. 209 shows a button effect image 1 and a button effect image 2. FIG. First, the button effect image 1 will be described in detail.

First, in FIG. 4(a), the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are all changing in the performance display device SG.

Next, in FIG. 4(b), a button effect is executed, and a button image and an instruction display of "Push!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG.

Next, in FIG. 4C, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect, a cut-in effect in a fox display mode is displayed on the effect display device SG. A button effect in which a button image is displayed on the effect display device SG in this way may be referred to as a front button effect. In addition, although the details will be described later, the cut-in effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit (the degree of expectation for execution of a special game), and is accompanied by a button vibration effect (sub There is a case where the input button SB is vibrated) and a case where the operation of the sub-input button SB is not accompanied by button vibration effect (the sub-input button SB is not vibrated). In addition, the display mode of the fox shown in FIG. It is configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit of symbol variations to be executed in the future is different. In addition, as a display mode of the cut-in effect, when displayed, it is almost definite (or definite) that the symbol variation being executed or the symbol variation to be executed in the future will be a big hit (for example, the universe It may be configured to have a human display mode). Even in front button effects other than cut-in effects, when displayed, it is almost definite (or definite) that the symbol variation being executed or the symbol variation to be executed in the future will be a big hit (for example, It may be configured to have an alien display mode). It should be noted that the button vibrate effect is only performed when the symbol variation being executed or the symbol variation to be executed in the future is almost definite (or definite) that it will be a big hit (for example, the display mode of the alien). In addition to this, for example, it is not certain that it will be a big hit, but the degree of expectation of the jackpot is relatively very high (for example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is 55%). display mode) may be accompanied by a button vibe effect (in that case, the expectation of a big hit is relatively low (for example, the expectation of a big hit is 10%). In some cases, the button vibration effect is not accompanied, or the button vibration effect is difficult to execute).

It should be noted that there is a case where the symbol variation in which the front button effect is executed becomes a big hit. In addition, the cut-in effect has a different execution timing from the timing win-lose branch effect that notifies the result of the reach effect described above (it is an effect that is executed before the win-lose branch effect), and before the reach occurs (reach It is configured to be executed both before reaching) and after occurrence of reach (after reaching reach).

In the figure, the case where the button image is displayed as the face button effect is exemplified.

<B: Button effect image 2>
Next, button effect image 2 in FIG. 209 will be described in detail.

First, in (d) of the figure, the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are all being varied on the performance display device SG. In addition, three pending images are displayed, and the variable image (pending digestion transmission image, pending image, pending icon, variable icon, etc.) is displayed (similar display mode to the above-mentioned small hold).

After that, in (e) of the same figure, the sub-input button SB is repeatedly pressed, and an effect is generated on the changing image. It should be noted that an effect is generated each time the sub-input button SB is operated. After that, in FIG. 4(f), the sub-input button SB is hit a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), and the display mode of the variation image changes from the display mode similar to the ZAKO HOLD to the characters "Chance".

As shown in (e) and (f) of the same figure, in this example, the button image is not displayed, but by operating the sub-input button SB (in the same figure, repeated hitting operation), an effect is generated. The display mode of the variable image is configured to change, and such an effect is sometimes referred to as a back button effect. That is, the execution period of the back button effect is the effective period related to the operation of the sub-input button SB, but the image such as the button image that prompts the player to operate the sub-input button SB is not displayed. Note that the button vibration effect is not executed when the back button effect is executed (when the sub input button SB related to the back button effect is operated). In addition, "Zako reserve" is a variation image with an expectation of a big win of 5%, and "Chance" is a variation image with an expectation of a big win of 20%. In addition to this, it will change to a "hot" character (the variation image with a 70% chance of hitting the jackpot), or hold an alien (the variation image that is almost certain (or certain) that it will be a big hit) , but the button vibration effect is not executed in any display mode.

Next, in the same figure (g), the first decorative pattern becomes a reach with 7 patterns. After that, at (h) in the same figure, the face button effect (hit-lose branch effect mentioned above) is executed, and the button image and the instruction display of "Press!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG. After that, although not shown, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during the effective period of the button effect, the button vibrate effect (and the action and light emission of the movable role, the display of the characters "Victory", etc.) is activated. After that, the first decorative design and the second decorative design are confirmed and stopped at the big hit design in the same figure (i). In this way, there is a case where the symbol variation becomes a big hit both when the front button effect is executed and when the back button effect is executed. In addition, like "button effect image 2", it is configured to be able to execute front button effect and back button effect with one symbol change. It is configured to execute button effects. In addition, without being limited to this, it is also possible to execute (a) to (i) in the same figure in chronological order. The effect is executed in the order of the second table button effect. In that case, the time from the start of the first front button effect to the start of the back button effect is, for example, 120 seconds, and the time from the start of the back button effect to the start of the second front button effect is 60 seconds. In order not to delay the result of the back button effect to the result of the second front button effect (so as not to interrupt the expectation), the second front button after the start of the back button effect is executed. It is desirable that the time until the performance start is shorter. However, the time from the start of the first front button effect to the start of the back button effect is, for example, 60 seconds, and the time from the start of the back button effect to the start of the second front button effect is 120 seconds. Execution of the second front button effect from the start of the back button effect, such as extending the effect result of the back button effect to the effect result of the second front button effect (to sustain the expectation). The time to start may be longer. Further, it is preferable that the second front button effect is easier to execute the button vibration effect by operating the sub-input button SB than the first front button effect.

In addition, the display mode of "chance" shown in the figure is only an example, and there are a plurality of display modes (effect modes) for the back button effect. It is configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit of the symbol variation being executed or the symbol variation to be executed in the future is different. In addition, as the display mode of the back button effect, when displayed, it is almost definite (or definite) that the symbol variation being executed or the symbol variation to be executed in the future will be a big hit (for example, It may also be configured to have a display mode such as an alien who has made a decision, "Are you sure?!", "Congratulations", etc.).

Thus, in this example, the button effects include front button effects and back button effects, and both the front button effects and the back button effects are effects suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit. In addition, when executing the front button performance, the button vibration performance can be executed as the front button performance, but when executing the back button performance, the button vibration performance is not executed as the back button performance.

With this configuration, in the secret back button presentation, it is possible to prevent the surroundings from recognizing that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, so that the player can feel a sense of satisfaction that only the player can recognize. In the non-secret front button presentation, the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority by making the surroundings aware that the expectation of a big hit is high.

In addition, as the front button effect, the above-mentioned win-lose branch effect in FIG. During the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation when returning (for example, when power is cut off in the game standby state or variable standby state as described above and then when the power is restored, a new variable display starts During execution of the button vibration related to the initial action executed during the new variable display), it is possible to execute a front button effect different from the win-lose branch effect such as a cut-in effect, but the win-lose branch effect is executed. may be configured not to In addition, in the win-lose split effect, a button vibration effect is executed (when the sub-input button SB is operated or the valid period passes), and the button lamp is lit in a lighting mode (for example, rainbow color) corresponding to the button vibration effect. A win-lose branch effect that lights up and notifies a big win may be used. In addition, the configuration that does not execute the win-lose branch effect during the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation includes the non-probability variable game state and non-time shortening game state, the non-probability variable game state and time shortening game state, and the probability variable game state. And it may be applied only in one or a plurality of game states of the non-time-reduced game state, the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state. The configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. When applied to both, as described above, when the button effect is executed, the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 is greater than the number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps (for example, three types of white, red, and rainbow colors). (For example, 6 types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) are configured to increase, thereby realizing a variety of lighting patterns for the game effect lamp D26, which is easily visible to the player. A skilled player (a player who knows that the degree of expectation for execution of a special game is suggested or reported even by a button lamp) grasps which lamp pattern it is for the button lamps that are difficult to see. can be made easier. The number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is either one (for example, only red) or two types. (For example, two types of white and red), the number of types of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of types of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibration effect) is executed. It is preferable, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time to restore the power supply, and the execution of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is deterministic) not be misidentified.

By configuring in this way, even if the power is cut off and the pattern variation is executed during the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored, the win-lose branch effect that informs the big win is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player misunderstands that a big win is confirmed due to the vibration of the sub-input button SB.

<Lighting Mode of Button Lamp>
Next, FIG. 210 is a list of lighting modes of the button lamps of the sub-input buttons SB.

<Button vibration related to initial operation>
In the button vibration related to the initial operation after power recovery, the button lamp has the following lighting modes.
Lighting mode: Pattern 1 Base color: Red Execution timing: When the power is turned on The button lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs. It may also be a color in which many LEDs are lit. In addition, even if the base color is red, there may be LEDs that are lit in colors other than red. If they are different, the lighting modes are different. In addition, since the button lamp is repeatedly lit in a combination of multiple lighting colors at a predetermined time period, there is a lighting mode that repeats "combination 1→combination 2→combination 3" and "combination 2→combination 1→combination 3". The repeated lighting modes have the same possible combination types, but may be different lighting modes.

As described above, in the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored, the button lamp has only one lighting mode. is configured to

<Button vibe production>
In the button vibe effect, the button lamp has the following lighting modes.
Lighting mode: Pattern 2 Base color: Blue Trigger: Lighting mode during cut-in effect: Pattern 3 Base color: Green Trigger: Lighting mode during cut-in effect: Pattern 4 Base color: Rainbow Trigger: Cut-in effect Lighting mode during execution: Pattern 5 Base color: Rainbow color Execution trigger: When a success effect is executed for a win-lose branch It should be noted that the lighting mode with a rainbow-colored base color will appear rainbow-colored when the player visually recognizes the combination of a plurality of LEDs. It is in lighting mode. In addition, the winning/losing branch effect for notifying the aforementioned big hit is called a winning/losing branch success effect. In addition, the win-lose branch effect that notifies of a loss may be referred to as a win-lose branch failure effect.

As described above, in the button vibe effect, the button lamp has four types of lighting modes (three types of basic colors), and the lighting mode may differ depending on the type of button effect that triggers the execution. Even in the same kind of button effect (for example, cut-in effect), the lighting mode is configured to be different depending on the effect mode. In addition, when the win-lose branch success effect is executed, only the pattern 5 whose basic color is rainbow can be executed, and by visually recognizing the pattern 5, the player can see that the pattern variation being executed is a big hit. It is possible to clearly recognize that it will be (In addition, when the hit-drop branch failure effect is executed, it will be white in the normal mode (or turn off), that is, return to the state before the button effect).

In addition, in the same figure, in the case of the button effect having the case of accompanying the button vibration effect and the case of not accompanying the button vibration effect, only the case of accompanying the button vibration effect is exemplified.

Also, during the execution of button effects (cut-in effects, etc.) other than the win-lose branch effects, even if the button effects are the same, depending on whether the button vibrating effect is involved or not, the The lighting mode of the button lamp or the selection tendency of the lighting mode may be varied.

Thus, in this example, there are more types of lighting modes of the button lamp when executing the button vibration effect than when executing the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored. ing. It should be noted that two or more types of button lamp lighting modes may be used when executing the button vibration associated with the initial operation after the power is restored. It is preferable to configure so that there are more types of lighting modes of the button lamp during execution of the button vibe effect than there are more types of lighting modes of the button lamp during execution.

By configuring in this way, in the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored, it is only necessary to satisfy the minimum necessity of operation confirmation, so the capacity can be reduced by not having variations in the lighting mode. It becomes possible. On the other hand, since the button vibe effect is an effect that suggests a big hit, the excitement is improved by having a wide variety of lighting mode variations according to the execution timing of the button vibrate effect and the effect mode of the accompanying button effect. can be made

The configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. As an example, the number and details of the lighting modes of the button lamps when executing the button vibes related to the initial operation in FIG. It is possible to replace with the lighting mode of the lamp D26. However, as described above, when executing the button effect, the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, white) is larger than the number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps (for example, three types of white, red, and rainbow colors). , blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) are arranged in such a way that a variety of lighting patterns are realized for the game effect lamp D26, which is easily visible to the player. To make it easier for a skilled player (a player who knows that the degree of expectation for execution of a special game is suggested or reported even by a button lamp) to grasp which lamp pattern is the button lamp that is difficult to see. can be done. The number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is either one (for example, only red) or two types. (For example, two types of white and red), the number of types of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of types of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibration effect) is executed. It is preferable, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time to restore the power supply, and the execution of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is deterministic) not be misidentified.

<Features of button production>
In this example, the cut-in effect was exemplified as an example of button effects other than the win-lose branch effect. Alternatively, it may be configured to have a button effect other than the cut-in effect without having the cut-in effect. Here, an example of a configuration having a button effect other than the cut-in effect and other notice effects as the button effects other than the win-lose branch effect will be described in detail below.

The pachinko game machine according to this example may be configured to have the cut-in effect described above with reference to FIG. 209 and the singing effect in which the character sings as button effects. are detailed below. Note that the singing effect may not be the button effect (the effect may be one in which the operation of the sub-input button SB is not required and the button image is not displayed).

<Cut-in production>
The cut-in effect is configured to be executed at various timings of pattern fluctuations, and has a case accompanied by a button vibration effect and a case not accompanied by a button vibration effect. In addition, the cut-in effect is configured to be executed even in pre-trigger variation during execution of the look-ahead effect. Note that the cut-in effect may be configured to be executed even when the trigger changes during execution of the look-ahead effect, or may be configured not to be executed when the trigger changes during execution of the look-ahead effect. Also, the cut-in effect may be configured to be executed even when the look-ahead effect is not being executed. Note that the cut-in effect should always be executed as a button effect (requires the operation of the sub-input button SB, and it is desirable that the button image is displayed. However, if the operation valid period has passed, , the cut-in effect is executed without any operation).

In addition, as described above, the cut-in effect has a plurality of effect modes, and also has a display mode in which it is almost certain (or certain) that the symbol variation during execution will result in a big hit. The cut-in performance of the display mode in which the symbol variation being executed is almost definite (or definite) that the big win will be won is not performed in the pre-trigger variation, but can be performed in the trigger variation.

<Singing performance>
The singing effect is configured to be executed at various timings during pattern variation, and is configured to be accompanied by a button vibration effect when executed. The singing performance is a performance with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, a degree of expectation for a big hit of 60%). Also, the singing effect is not executed in the pre-trigger variation during execution of the look-ahead effect, but is configured to be executed in the trigger change during execution of the look-ahead effect. Also, the singing effect may be configured to be executed even when the look-ahead effect is not being executed. As described above, the singing effect may not be the button effect (the effect may be one in which the operation of the sub-input button SB is not required and the button image is not displayed).

Also, the singing effect has only one type of effect mode, and does not have a display mode in which it is almost definite (or definite) that the symbol variation during execution becomes a big hit. It should be noted that two or more production modes of the singing production may be used. It is preferable to configure

<Dialogue>
As an effect different from the cut-in effect and singing effect, it is an effect in which lines are displayed after a predetermined character is displayed. However, unlike the cut-in production and singing production, there is no button vibration production. There are seven types of dialogue text colors: white, blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, and the expectation of a big hit increases in this order (for example, the color of the text is white). If the color of the text is blue, the expectation of winning is 2%. If the color of the text is yellow, the expectation of winning is 5%. If the color of the text is green, the expectation of winning is 10%. If it is red, the expectation of a big hit is 20%, if the color of the text is gold, the expectation of a big hit is 50%, and if the color of the text is rainbow, it is almost certain (or definite) that the pattern change during execution will be a big hit. be).

The dialogue effect may be configured to be executed even when the trigger changes during execution of the look-ahead effect, or may be configured not to be executed when the trigger changes during execution of the look-ahead effect. Also, the dialogue effect may be configured to be executed even when the look-ahead effect is not being executed. However, the dialogue effect of the display mode in which it is almost definite (or certain) that the pattern variation being executed will result in a big win is not executed in the pre-trigger variation, but is configured to be executed in the trigger variation.

Here, the cut-in effect and the singing effect do not overlap in execution timing with the button vibe look-ahead effect described above, but the dialogue effect is configured so that the execution timing can overlap with the button vibe look-ahead effect described above. Specifically, the button vibration look-ahead effect that is not a button effect (a button vibration effect that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB, and is an effect in which the button image corresponding to this button vibration effect is not displayed) is performed three times. Immediately after the start of each symbol variation (the button vibe continues for 1 second after 0.5 seconds from the start of the symbol variation) button vibe look-ahead effect is executed (the third variation is the trigger variation ), when the button vibe production is executed (three times in total) in the first, second, and third variations, 0.5 seconds after the pattern variation of the third variation, which is the trigger variation, starts After that, the button vibrator look-ahead effect is executed for 1 second, but at the execution timing of this button vibrator look-ahead effect, the dialogue effect can also be executed at the same time (in other words, the situation where the button vibrator is being executed while the dialogue effect is being executed). can occur). On the other hand, cut-in effects and singing effects are not always executed at the execution timing of the button vibe look-ahead effect (they are executed at a timing later than the execution timing of the button vibe look-ahead effect). In addition, it is possible to execute dialogue effects (character color is white or blue only) even in pre-trigger fluctuations (first and second fluctuations). Overlapping timing. Here, the execution time of the button vibrator effect of the button vibrator prefetch effect executed by the trigger fluctuation is longer than the execution time of the button vibrator effect of the button vibrator prefetch effect executed by the pre-trigger fluctuation. (eg, 1 second for pre-trigger variations, 2 seconds for trigger variations, etc.).

In addition, the dialogue production can be executed simultaneously with other productions (for example, a step-up production in which characters suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit are gradually switched), but the singing production is configured not to be executed simultaneously with other productions. there is As a modification, the number of types of other effects (for example, step-up effects) that can be performed simultaneously with the singing effect is larger than the number of types of other effects (for example, step-up effects) that can be performed simultaneously with the dialogue effect. It may be configured to be less. Furthermore, the line production can be executed before reaching reach, but the singing production is configured not to be executed before reaching reach, or the line production is set to reach reach before reaching reach. It may be configured so that it is easier to execute than after, and the singing effect is easier to execute after reaching reach than before reaching reach.

Also, the button presentation may be configured as follows.
(1) The cut-in effect can be executed at the same time as other effects (for example, a step-up effect in which a character indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit gradually changes), but the singing effect is not executed at the same time as other effects (2 ) The number of types of other effects (for example, step-up effects) that can be performed at the same time as the singing effect is smaller than the number of types of other effects (for example, step-up effects) that can be performed at the same time as the cut-in effect ( 3) The cut-in effect can be executed before reaching reach, but the singing effect is not executed before reaching reach. (4) The cut-in effect is performed before reaching reach than after reaching reach. (5) The singing effect is more likely to be executed after reaching the reach than before the occurrence of the reaching (6) The singing effect is more likely to be executed than the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect (7) The execution time of the button vibration effect related to the singing effect is relatively shorter than the execution time of the button vibration effect related to the cut-in effect ( 8) The execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect is relatively shorter than the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect (9) The execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect Also, the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the pre-trigger variation is relatively shorter, and the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect is shorter. Execution time of the vibe effect is relatively longer (10) Cut-in than the difference between the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect and the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the pre-trigger variation The difference between the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the effect and the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the trigger fluctuation is relatively longer (11) Execution time and trigger of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect The difference between the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect and the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the trigger change is greater than the difference in the execution time of the button vibe effect related to the button vibe look-ahead effect in the previous change. is relatively short

Further, during the pattern variation, the degree of expectation for the big hit of the pattern variation may be relatively higher when the singing effect is performed than when the cut-in effect is performed. In other words, depending on the display mode of the cut-in effect, the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher than when the singing effect is performed, but the average value of the expectation for the big hit when the cut-in effect is performed (selection rate of each display mode and the big hit A weighted average value considering the degree of expectation) and an average value of the degree of expectation of a big hit when the singing performance is performed may be configured so that the degree of expectation of a big win is higher in the latter. In the case of such a configuration, even if the singing effect in which the button vibrating effect is executed is not executed, the button vibrator effect may be executed in the cut-in effect, thereby maintaining the player's expectation. can be made In addition, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the effect in which the button vibe effect can be executed.

Although the cut-in effect and the singing effect have been illustrated as examples of button effects, these are merely examples, and there is no problem if the features of the cut-in effect and the singing effect described above are applied to other button effects. do not have.

<Button effect image 3>
Next, FIG. 211 shows button effect image 3. FIG.

First, in FIG. 4(a), the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are all changing in the performance display device SG, The sub-input button SB is illuminated in a normal manner.

Next, in FIG. 4(b), a button effect is executed, and a button image and an instruction display of "Push!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG.

Next, in FIG. 4C, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect, a cut-in effect in a fox display mode is displayed on the effect display device SG. Since the cut-in effect is a cut-in effect accompanied by a button vibrator effect, execution of the button vibrator effect is started. It should be noted that execution of the button vibe effect is also started when the effective period of the sub-input button SB has passed.

Next, in the same figure (d), the first decorative pattern becomes the reach with 7 patterns. In the figure, the button vibe effect associated with the cut-in effect is configured to end at the reach timing of FIG. It may be configured so that the button vibration effect can be executed across the timing when becomes ready.

Next, in (e) of the same figure, a button effect is executed as a win-lose branch effect. Next, in (f) of the same figure, when the player operates the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect, execution of the button vibration effect is started. When the button vibration effect is executed, the sub-input button SB is vibrated, and the button lamp is lit in a lighting mode (for example, pattern 5 described above) corresponding to the button vibration effect (win-lose branch effect). there is Since the executed win-lose branch effect is a win-lose branch success effect for reporting a big win, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are fixed and stopped at the big win pattern. The configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. As described above, when the button effect is executed, the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, white) is greater than the number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps (for example, three types of white, red, and rainbow colors). , blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) are arranged in such a way that a variety of lighting patterns are realized for the game effect lamp D26, which is easily visible to the player. To make it easier for a skilled player (a player who knows that the degree of expectation for execution of a special game is suggested or reported even by a button lamp) to grasp which lamp pattern is the button lamp that is difficult to see. can be done. The number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is either one (for example, only red) or two types. (For example, two types of white and red), the number of types of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of types of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibration effect) is executed. It is preferable, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time to restore the power supply, and the execution of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is deterministic) not be misidentified.

As described above, in this example, the button effect can be executed a plurality of times in the symbol variation that results in a big win (sometimes referred to as "big win variation"). In addition, in the pattern variation that becomes a big hit (sometimes referred to as a big hit variation), the button vibe effect (button effect accompanied by the button vibe effect) can be executed multiple times.

In addition, when the button vibe effect is executed twice in one big hit variation, the execution time (the sub input button SB vibrates) is longer for the second button vibrator effect than for the first button vibrator effect. time) is long. In addition, when the button vibration effect is executed twice in one big hit variation, the execution time of the second button vibration effect is relatively longer than the execution time of the first button vibration effect. It may be configured to

Here, as described above, the button effect plays a role of prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB. When it is time to execute the button vibrator effect, the button vibrator effect is started without the player's operation), for example, as shown in FIG. The first button vibration effect of (b) to (c) in (b) to (c) may be a button vibration effect that can be executed without the player's operation of the sub-input button SB. Note that the button vibration effect that can be executed without the player's operation of the sub-input button SB may be a button vibration effect that does not require the operation of the sub-input button SB and has a valid period. It is also possible to provide a button vibe effect that does not require the operation of and does not have an effective period.

In this case, the button vibration effect is executed twice in the variation of the big win, and the first button vibration effect is executed at the execution timing even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB. The second button vibration effect is a button vibration effect executed by the player's operation of the sub-input button SB, and the second button vibration effect is performed rather than the first button vibration effect. , the execution time (time during which the sub-input button SB is vibrating) is longer.

By configuring in this way, by executing the button vibe production two or more times for one symbol variation, it is possible to have expectations for a big hit multiple times for one symbol variation, and the button vibe is generated. Diversification and unexpectedness of button vibe performance generation timing are created by classifying performances into performances requiring the player's operation of the sub-input button SB and performances not requiring the player's operation of the sub-input button SB. can do.

<Effects during special game execution>
Next, FIG. 212 is an action diagram regarding a case where a button vibe effect is executed with a big hit variation, and then a special game (big hit) is executed.

A big hit variation is executed as a symbol variation of the main game pattern, the button vibration effect is not executed, and the special game is not executed, at the timing of (1) in the figure, the button vibration effect is executed. be started. Any of the configurations described above can be applied to the button vibration effect of (1) in the figure, but as an example, the button vibration effect, which is a win-lose branch effect, is triggered by the player's operation of the sub-input button SB. The performance is started.

After that, under the condition that the fluctuation time of the main game symbols has not ended, the button vibe effect ends at the timing (2) in the figure. At the timing of (2) in the figure, the variation time of the main game symbols may not have ended, and the first decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped as the big hit symbols.

After that, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the variation of the main game symbols is finished (the big hit symbols are fixed and stopped). After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the special game start demonstration time ends, and the first round of the special game is started.

After that, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the first round of the special game is being executed, and the button vibration effect during the special game is started to be executed. Thus, in this example, it is configured so that the button vibration effect can be executed even during the execution of the special game, and the button vibration effect that can be executed includes any button described in detail in this specification. Vibration production may be applied. That is, the above-described button vibration effect requiring the player's operation of the sub-input button SB and/or the button vibration effect not requiring the player's operation of the sub-input button SB may be executed. As an example, when a button image is displayed and the player operates the sub-input button SB, the execution of the button vibration effect is started, the effect of increasing the number of execution rounds of the notified special game, or after the special game is finished The game state may be configured to execute an effect for notifying that the game state is changed to the probability variable game state.

After that, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the first round of the special game ends, and the execution of the button vibe effect continues. After that, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the execution of the second round of the special game is started, and the execution of the button vibe effect is continued.

After that, at the timing of (8) in the figure, the second round of the special game is being executed, and the button vibe effect ends.

Thus, in the configuration illustrated in the figure, it is configured so that the button vibration effect can be executed while the main game symbols are changing, and it is configured so that the button vibration effect can be executed even during the execution of the special game. ing. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the button vibes effect during the variation of the main game symbols and the button vibes effect during execution of the special game are different effects modes.

In addition, the button vibe effect during the variation of the main game pattern is completed during the variation time of the symbol variation that is being executed when the button vibe effect is started (executed over the execution of the special game) is configured so that there is no In addition, the button vibration effect during execution of the special game is executed over the next round of the round being executed when the button vibration effect is started (continuing even at the start of the next round). configured to obtain As a modification, if the type of special game being notified is a special game that triggers the transition to the probability variation game state, or if the number of executed rounds is relatively large (for example, 10 rounds), that Simultaneously with the execution of the performance notifying that effect, a button vibration performance (a performance in which the operation of the sub-input button SB is not required and the button image is not displayed) may be executed over the jackpot start demonstration time and the first round. .

<Types of indication display>
As described above, the pachinko game machine according to this example is configured to display the button image and the instruction display when executing the button effect. As the instruction display, the display mode of "Press!!" has been described above, but the display mode of the instruction display is not limited to this. The display mode of the instruction display and the display mode of the button image applicable to the pachinko gaming machine in the present specification will be described in detail below. Note that the instruction display may be referred to as a second image or a predetermined image.

First, the types of instruction display will be described in detail. The one-shot instruction display is a display mode of "Press!!" as described above, and is an instruction display for prompting single-shot pressing of the sub-input button SB.

Next, the continuous hitting instruction display is a display mode of "Hit repeatedly!", and is an instruction display for prompting repeated hitting of the sub-input button SB.

Next, the long-press instruction display is a display mode of "Long press!", and is an instruction display that prompts the user to press the sub-input button SB for a long time.

In this example, when the button effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the button vibration effect is executed when the sub-input button SB is operated differs depending on the display mode of the instruction display. The degree of expectation for execution of the button vibration effect is "single-shot instruction display <repeated-hit instruction display <long-press instruction display" from the lowest. The degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that the button vibe effect will be executed when the elements other than the instruction display such as the button image are the same (or similar). The configuration may be applied to all game states, or a predetermined game state (for example, non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state, non-probability variable game state and time-reduced game state, probability variable game state and It may be applied to a non-time shortened gaming state, a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state). In the case where the button effect is executed, the probability of driving the movable accessory when the sub-input button SB is operated may differ depending on the display mode of the instruction display. Further, it has a button effect A whose instruction display is a single-shot instruction display, a button effect B whose instruction display is a single-shot instruction display (or repeated hit instruction display), and a button effect C whose instruction display is a long-press instruction display. In this case, the degree of expectation for execution of the button vibe performance is, from low to high, "button performance A<button performance B<button performance C", but the degree of expectation for a big hit when the button vibe performance is executed is from low to high. It may be configured such that "button effect C < button effect B < button effect A". In such a configuration, the button effect A is a button vibration effect when the sub-input button SB is operated once. is executed once, and its execution time is relatively long (for example, 10 seconds). It may be executed multiple times (for example, three times), and each execution time is relatively short (for example, 4 seconds, but the last third time is 10 seconds), and button effect C is a sub-input button. By holding down the SB operation, there is a possibility that the button vibration effect will be executed multiple times (for example, 5 times), and each execution time is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds, but the last 10 seconds for the fifth time). In this case, furthermore, when the button vibration effect is executed in the button effect A, it becomes almost definite (or definite) that the symbol variation during execution will result in a big win, and the button effect B is the final third button vibration effect. is executed, it becomes almost definite (or definite) that the symbol variation being executed will result in a big hit (10% expected to hit the first time, 30% expected to hit the second time), and the button effect B is When the last 5th button vibration effect is executed, it is almost certain (or certain) that the pattern variation being executed will be a big hit (1st time is 5% expected to be a big hit, 2nd time is expected to be a big hit 10%, 20% for the third time, and 30% for the fourth time).

<Display mode of button image>
In the pachinko game machine according to this example, the button images displayed when executing the button effect also have a plurality of types of display modes.

The normal mode is a button image when the above-described button effect is executed (for example, the button image in (b) of FIG. 207).

The fixed mode is a button image having a color different from that of the normal mode. When the confirmation mode is displayed as the button image when the button effect is executed, it is almost definite (or definite) that the pattern variation during execution will result in a big win. As an example, when a button effect is executed as a win-lose branch effect, and the button image is displayed in a confirmation mode, it is almost certain that a win-lose branch success effect for notifying a big win is executed (executed). target (or deterministic).

The giant aspect is a button image that is larger than the normal aspect. In the figure, the color is different from that of the normal mode, and the indication display is also larger. It is not limited to this, and the color may be the same as the normal mode, or only the size of the button image may be different.

In this example, when the button effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the button vibration effect is executed when the sub-input button SB is operated differs depending on the display mode of the button image. The degree of expectation for execution of the button vibe effect is "normal mode<huge mode<definite mode" from low to high. The degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that the button vibe effect will be executed when the elements other than the button image such as the instruction display are the same (or similar). Further, when the button image in the confirmation mode is displayed during execution of the button effect, the probability of executing the button vibe effect due to the operation of the sub-input button SB may be 100%. In the case where the button effect is executed, the probability of driving the movable accessory when the sub-input button SB is operated may differ depending on the display mode of the button image.

With this configuration, the button vibration effect is executed when the sub-input button SB is operated according to the display mode of the display prompting the player to operate the sub-input button SB, such as an instruction display or a button image. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation as to what kind of presentation mode the button presentation will be executed before the occurrence of the button presentation. In addition, when the player directly operates the sub-input button SB to experience the button vibrating effect as a tactile sensation, the button vibrating effect can be obtained without touching the sub-input button SB depending on the display of the effect display device SG and the lighting mode of the button lamp. It can be configured to have a case of recognizing the execution of the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game and the participation of the player.

Further, as described above, as operation members other than the sub-input button SB, there may be a telephone-shaped operation member, a pistol-shaped operation member, a sword-shaped operation member, or a lever-shaped operation member. In the case where it is configured, it may be configured so that a button image similar to that of the operation member can be displayed when the button effect is executed. In the case of such a configuration, when button images similar to the operation members other than the sub-input button SB are displayed, rather than button images similar to the sub-input button SB in the normal mode in FIG. It may be configured such that the button vibe effect is relatively easily executed.

<Display mode of held image>
The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the pending image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification is configured to be able to change the display mode of the pending image as a look-ahead effect. The display mode in white is a display mode in which the display mode has not changed as the look-ahead effect, and the display mode in red and rainbow colors is the display mode after the display mode has changed as the look-ahead effect. Incidentally, when the suspension corresponding to the suspension image whose display mode has changed as the prefetch effect is completed, the variable image is shift-displayed in the same display mode. Note that the display mode may change again when the shift display is performed, or the display mode of the variation image may be changed while the variation image is being displayed (during the variation display of the trigger variation). good too.

With this configuration, when the button effect is executed in the pre-trigger variation during execution of the look-ahead effect, the button displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated is displayed according to the display mode of the hold image related to the trigger hold. Vibration effects (button vibration effects during execution of the aforementioned cut-in effects, singing effects, dialogue effects, hit-and-fall branching effects, etc.) and button vibration effects that do not require operation of the sub-input button SB (above-mentioned button vibration look-ahead effects and singing It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the execution of the effect, dialogue effect, etc., is different. The degree of expectation for execution of the button vibe effect is "white<red<rainbow color" from the lowest. Note that when the hold image related to the trigger hold is displayed in rainbow color, the probability of executing the button vibe effect by operating the sub-input button SB may be set to 100%.

In addition, when the button effect is executed due to the trigger variation during execution of the look-ahead effect, the button vibration effect (the above-mentioned cut-in Button vibration effects during execution of effects, singing effects, dialogue effects, win-loss branch effects, etc.) and button vibration effects that do not require operation of the sub-input button SB (execution of the above-mentioned button vibration look-ahead effects, singing effects, dialogue effects, etc.) It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for execution of the button vibration effect at the time) is different. For example, the degree of expectation for execution of the button vibe effect is "white<red<rainbow" from the lowest. Note that when the variable image related to the pending trigger is displayed in rainbow color, the probability that the button vibe effect is executed by operating the sub-input button SB may be 100%.

Further, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect in which the background effect changes can be executed, and as the background effect, a blue background, a gold background, and a rainbow background can be displayed. In the case of such a configuration, when the button effect is executed by the trigger fluctuation during execution of the look-ahead effect, the button vibration when the sub-input button SB is operated depends on the display mode of the displayed background effect. Effect (button vibe effect at the time of execution such as cut-in effect, singing effect, dialogue effect, hit-and-lost branch effect, etc.) and button vibe effect that does not require operation of the sub-input button SB (above-mentioned button vibe look-ahead effect and singing effect) , button vibration effect at the time of execution of dialogue effect, etc.) may be configured to have different expectations. The degree of expectation for execution of the button vibe effect is "blue background<golden background<rainbow background" from low to high. Note that when the background effect is displayed with a rainbow background, the probability of executing the button vibration effect by operating the sub-input button SB may be 100%.

In this way, when the button effect is executed while the prefetch effect is being executed (trigger variation or pre-trigger variation), the sub-input button Button vibration effect when SB is operated (button vibration effect when executing the above-mentioned cut-in effect, singing effect, dialogue effect, win-win branch effect, etc.) and button vibration effect that does not require operation of the sub-input button SB (mentioned above) It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for execution of the button vibe look-ahead effect, singing effect, dialogue effect, etc.) is different, or the trigger change such as the display mode of the pending image is executed. Depending on the content of the effect (may be the content of the advance notice effect or the ready-to-win effect), the degree of expectation that the button vibe effect will be executed when the sub-input button SB is operated may differ.

Further, as an example of the configuration when configured in this way, when the button effect is executed due to the trigger fluctuation during execution of the look-ahead effect, the long-press instruction display is displayed as the instruction display and the look-ahead effect is displayed. When the single instruction display is displayed as the instruction display and the background effect related to the look-ahead effect is a golden background, the button vibration effect is more pronounced when the sub-input button SB is operated than when the background effect is a blue background. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation of execution is high.

That is, when the button effect is executed due to the trigger variation during execution of the look-ahead effect, the instruction display B, which has a relatively high degree of expectation that the button vibrator effect will be executed, is displayed and the button vibrate effect is executed. An instruction display A with a relatively low expectation for execution of a button vibe performance is displayed and a button The button vibration effect is executed when the sub-input button SB is operated when the look-ahead effect B, which has a relatively high degree of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect, or the effect content B during the execution of the trigger variation is executed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for

<Normal jackpot and revival jackpot>
Next, the ready-to-win effect applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

<A: Normal jackpot>
First, the case of the normal jackpot shown in the upper part of the figure will be described in detail. In (a) of the same figure, the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols are ready-to-win with seven symbols, and the second decorative symbols are all changed. The button lamp of the sub-input button SB is illuminated in the normal mode. Also, a battle ready-to-win effect is displayed as a ready-to-win effect on the effect display device SG. More specifically, an effect is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character are fighting.

Next, in (b) of the same figure, a button effect is executed, and a win-lose branch effect is executed in which a button image and an instruction display of "Press!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG.

Next, in (c) of the figure, the player operates the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect, thereby starting the execution of the button vibe effect, and as a result of the battle reach effect, the main character An effect of winning over the enemy character (an effect of notifying that a big hit will be achieved) is displayed (a win-lose branch success effect is executed). It should be noted that execution of the button vibe effect is also started when the effective period of the sub-input button SB has passed.

Next, in (d) of the figure, the execution time of the button vibe effect has passed (for example, 10 seconds have passed since the button vibe effect started to be executed), so that the button vibe effect ends. The 1st decorative pattern and the 2nd decorative pattern are determined and stopped at the big hit pattern.

In this way, the case in which the fact that the ready-to-win effect results in a big win (in the figure, the main character wins against the enemy character) is called a normal big win (or a normal big win effect).

<B: Resurrection Jackpot>
Next, a detailed description will be given of the case of the revival jackpot as shown in the lower part of the figure. In the same figure (e), the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols are ready with 7 symbols, and the second decorative symbols are all changed. The button lamp of the sub-input button SB is illuminated in the normal mode. Also, a battle ready-to-win effect is displayed as a ready-to-win effect on the effect display device SG. More specifically, an effect is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character are fighting.

After that, although illustration is omitted, a button effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. However, next, in (f) of the same figure, the player operates the sub-input button SB during the execution of the button effect, and as a result of the battle ready-to-win effect without executing the button vibrate effect, the main character is defeated by the enemy character (basically, it is a production that informs you that it will not be a big hit, but as described later, a resurrection production may be executed, so it can be executed even when the big hit fluctuates) is displayed. (hit-fall branch failure effect is executed). It should be noted that the period from the start of the battle ready-to-win production to the figure (f) is substantially the same as the period from the start of the battle ready-to-win production to the figure (c). As a modification, the button image may not be displayed (the button effect may not be executed) when the win-lose branch failure effect occurs.

After the display of the main character being defeated by the enemy character in (f) of FIG. After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, an effect in which the main character stands up is displayed as a resurrection effect related to the battle reach effect, and a button vibration effect (button An image is not displayed, and a button vibration effect executed without operating the sub-input button SB) is executed.

Next, in (h) of the figure, the execution time of the button vibe effect has passed (for example, 5 seconds have passed since the button vibe effect started to be executed), so that the button vibe effect ends. The 1st decorative pattern and the 2nd decorative pattern are determined and stopped at the big hit pattern.

In this way, it is not displayed that a big hit will be achieved as a result of the ready-to-win effect (in the figure, the effect that the hero is defeated by the enemy character is displayed), and then the resurrection effect is executed, so that the symbol being executed is displayed. The case of notifying that the change will be a big hit is called a resurrection big hit (or resurrection big hit production).

In this way, in this example, when the same ready-to-win effect of battle ready-to-win effect (may be super ready-to-win effect or SP ready-to-win effect) is executed in the variation of the big hit, the normal big hit pattern is used as the effect pattern. and a pattern that becomes a revival jackpot.

In both the normal big win pattern and the resurrection big win pattern, it is constructed so that the button vibration performance can be executed after reaching the ready-to-win state, and in the normal big win pattern, the sub-input button SB is operated by the player. is operated, and in the pattern of the resurrection jackpot, the button vibration effect is executed at the execution timing even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB. .

In addition, the start timing of the button vibration effect in the normal jackpot pattern is shown in FIG. The start timing of the button vibes effect is earlier than the start timing of the button vibes effect in the pattern of the revival jackpot. In addition, the start timing of the button vibe effect in the normal jackpot pattern is a relatively early timing when the button vibe effect is executed. In addition, the start timing of the button vibe effect in the pattern of the resurrection big hit is relatively late timing when the button vibe effect is executed. The start timing of the button vibration effect may be the timing at which the sub input button SB starts vibrating, or the timing at which the sub input button SB starts vibrating or the timing at which the button effect starts to be executed, whichever is earlier. It may be the timing. Whether the timing is early or not can be determined by comparing the elapsed time from the start of the pattern variation or by comparing the elapsed time from the ready-to-win timing. good.

By constructing in this way, the variation of the performance is increased by having the performance pattern in which the player participates and the performance pattern in which the player does not participate as the button vibration performance at the time of winning the jackpot, and the player does not participate. In the button vibe performance of the performance pattern, by relatively delaying the execution timing, the unexpectedness can be enhanced and the expectation of the player can be maintained even in the latter half of the pattern variation.

<Configuration related to button image display>
Next, FIG. 215 shows a configuration relating to button image display applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification.

<A: Image of a single button press effect>
First, a detailed description will be given of the case where the one-shot button press effect shown in the upper part of the figure is executed. In (a) of the same figure, the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols are ready-to-win with seven symbols, and the second decorative symbols are all changed. The button lamp of the sub-input button SB is illuminated in the normal mode.

Next, in FIG. 4(b), a single button push effect is executed, and a button image and a single instruction display of "Push!!" are displayed on the effect display device SG. Further, in this example, an indicator image indicating the effective period of the sub-input button SB is displayed when the button effect is executed. When the indicator image is displayed, the meter of the indicator image decreases over time, and when the meter reaches 0 (when it disappears), the effective period of the sub-input button SB elapses (remaining 0). is configured to Incidentally, when the valid period of the sub-input button SB elapses during execution of the button effect, the effect is the same as when the player operates the sub-input button SB. Note that the effective period of the sub-input button SB related to the single button press effect is 3 seconds.

Next, in FIG. 4(c), when the player presses the sub-input button SB once during execution of the button effect (during the effective period of the sub-input button SB), the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are displayed. is hidden, the execution of the button vibe performance is started, the button lamp lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the button vibe performance, and the first decoration pattern temporarily stops at the jackpot design of ``777''. A button vibration effect associated with a single pressing operation is configured to continue for 10 seconds from the start of execution. It should be noted that the second decorative pattern is in the process of changing at the timing of FIG. As described above, in the single button press effect, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden when the sub-input button SB is operated. Further, in the single button press effect, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden when the button vibration effect is executed. The above shows the case of a big hit, but when it is not a big hit, even if the player presses the sub-input button SB single-shot during the execution of the button single-press effect, the button vibration effect is not executed, such as "787". is displayed. The configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. As described above, when the button effect is executed, the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, white) is greater than the number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps (for example, three types of white, red, and rainbow colors). , blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) are arranged in such a way that a variety of lighting patterns are realized for the game effect lamp D26, which is easily visible to the player. To make it easier for a skilled player (a player who knows that the degree of expectation for execution of a special game is suggested or reported even by a button lamp) to grasp which lamp pattern is the button lamp that is difficult to see. can be done. The number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is either one (for example, only red) or two types. (For example, two types of white and red), the number of types of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of types of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibration effect) is executed. It is preferable, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time to restore the power supply, and the execution of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is deterministic) not be misidentified.

<B: Button mash execution image>
Next, a detailed description will be given of the case where the repeated button hitting effect shown in the lower part of the figure is executed. In (d) of the same figure, the symbol variation is executed in a predetermined game state, and in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols are ready-to-win with seven symbols, and the second decorative symbols are all varied. The button lamp of the sub-input button SB is illuminated in the normal mode.

Next, in (e) of the same figure, a repeated button hitting effect is executed, and a button image, a repeated hitting instruction display of "Hit repeatedly!", and an indicator image are displayed on the effect display device SG. Note that the effective period of the sub-input button SB related to the repeated button-hit effect is 5 seconds.

Next, in (f) of the same figure, when the player repeatedly hits the sub-input button SB during execution of the button effect, the execution of the button vibration effect is started, and the button lamp lights up corresponding to the button vibration effect. Lights up in a manner. More specifically, the execution of the button vibration effect is started when the number of repeated hits reaches a predetermined number, and is not started when the number of repeated hits is less than the predetermined number. This predetermined number of times is determined between 1 and 20 times. The button vibration effect associated with the continuous hitting operation is configured to continue for a maximum of 15 seconds from the start of execution. More specifically, the button vibration effect is executed for 10 seconds in addition to the time (up to 5 seconds) from the start of execution of the button vibration effect to the elapse of the effective period of the sub input button SB. . Also, every time the sub-input button SB is operated within the effective period of the sub-input button SB as a continuous hitting operation, an effect is displayed near the button image. It should be noted that during execution of the repeated button effect, the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are continuously displayed during the effective period of the repeated button effect even after the sub-input button SB is operated. The above shows the case of a big hit, but when it is not a big hit, even if the player repeatedly hits the sub-input button SB during execution of the button repeated effect, the button vibration effect is not executed, and "787" etc. is displayed. be done. The configuration of the button lamp according to this specification may be replaced with the configuration of the game effect lamp D26, or may be applied to both the button lamp and the game effect lamp D26. As described above, when the button effect is executed, the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 (for example, white) is greater than the number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps (for example, three types of white, red, and rainbow colors). , blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) are arranged in such a way that a variety of lighting patterns are realized for the game effect lamp D26, which is easily visible to the player. To make it easier for a skilled player (a player who knows that the degree of expectation for execution of a special game is suggested or reported even by a button lamp) to grasp which lamp pattern is the button lamp that is difficult to see. can be done. The number of types of lighting modes of the button lamps when the power is restored is one (for example, only red), and the number of types of lighting modes of the game effect lamp D26 when the power is restored is either one (for example, only red) or two types. (For example, two types of white and red), the number of types of lighting modes when the power is restored can be configured to be relatively smaller than the number of types of lighting modes when the button effect (or button vibration effect) is executed. It is preferable, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that it is time to restore the power supply, and the execution of the special game is the highest (execution of the special game is deterministic) not be misidentified.

Next, in (g) of the figure, the effective period of the sub-input button SB related to the button repeated effect has passed, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden, and the button vibration effect continues to be executed. , and the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the jackpot symbol. In addition, at the timing of (g) in the figure, the second decorative pattern is in the process of changing. In this manner, in the repeated button-pressing effect, even if the sub-input button SB is operated (single-pressing one or more times, that is, repeated pressing), the button image, instruction display, and indicator image are not hidden. It is configured. Further, in the repeated button-strike effect, even if the sub-input button SB is operated during the valid period and the button vibration effect is executed, the button image, the instruction display and the indicator image are not hidden. As a modified example, in the button repeated effect, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden when the sub-input button SB is operated during the effective period and the button vibration effect is executed. You may In addition, the timing at which the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image in the button repeated effect are hidden includes the timing when the valid period has passed (the display is not hidden until the valid period has passed), a predetermined effect (jackpot confirmation effect etc.) is started to be executed (it is not hidden until a predetermined effect is started to be executed).

In this way, in this example, the execution of the button vibration effect triggers a single button press effect in which the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden, and the execution of the button vibration effect triggers the button image and the instruction display. The display and the indicator image are not hidden, and the button repeatedly hit effect is provided. In addition, in both the single button pressing effect and the repeated button pressing effect, the execution time of the button vibration effect is longer than the effective period of the sub input button SB related to the button effect.

By constructing in this manner, the period for congratulating a big win can be made longer than the period during which the player's operation is required, and the player is immersed in a sense of superiority and increases the desire to play. be able to. In addition, since the execution time of the button vibration effect differs depending on the operation mode instructed to the game machine, by expecting in advance which operation mode will be instructed, the user can feel the expectation before the button effect occurs. can hold

It should be noted that, during execution of the button repeated effect, even before the effective period of the sub input button SB has passed, the first timing at which the predetermined number of continuous tap operations is detected during the effective period or the effective period has passed. At the second timing, the execution of an effect for informing that a big win will occur may be started, and the button image, the instruction display and the indicator image may be hidden. In such a configuration, the button vibration effect may be started at the first timing or the second timing, and the button vibration effect may end at a predetermined timing. That is, although the predetermined timing at which the button vibe effect ends does not differ depending on the operation status (continuous hit status) of the sub input button SB, the first timing at which the button vibe effect starts execution depends on the operation status of the sub input button SB ( In other words, the execution time of the button vibration effect may differ depending on the operation status (successive pressing status) of the sub-input button SB. Note that the first timing is the latest timing when the sub-input button SB is not operated when the button repeated effect is executed, and the button vibration effect is executed after the effective period has elapsed. has the shortest execution time. With this configuration, when the single button press effect is executed, the execution time of the button vibration effect does not differ depending on the operation status of the sub-input button SB. The execution time of the button vibration effect may differ depending on the operation status of the button SB.

It should be noted that in the button long-press effect, similarly to the button repeated effect, even if the sub-input button SB is operated (depressed), the button image, instruction display, and indicator image may not be hidden. Alternatively, the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image may be configured so as not to be hidden even when the button vibe effect is executed. Further, the characteristic structure of the button repeated effect described above may be applied to the button long-press effect.

It should be noted that after the start of execution of the button vibration effect, the effect in which the movable accessory operates may be executed. The button SB may be configured to vibrate.

<Other applicable configurations>
The configuration regarding the button vibe applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present specification will be described in detail below. Note that the configurations described in detail below may be applied to all configurations in this specification, and there is no problem even if they are applied in combination.

<Configuration related to volume adjustment>
In the pachinko game machine according to the present specification, one or more of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration related to volume adjustment.
(1) The volume can be adjusted by operating the cross button SB-2 while the button vibration effect is being executed. (2) The volume adjustment screen is displayed and the button vibration effect is being executed. (3) The volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority (referred to as display priority or visibility) than the button image related to the button vibration effect (prompting the user to operate the sub-input button SB that triggers the execution of the button vibration effect). (4) The volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority (display priority (5) The volume can be adjusted by operating the cross button SB-2 during the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored. (6) The initial operation after the power is restored. By operating the cross button SB-2 during the button vibration related to the operation, the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, but the volume level may be changed. (7) The volume adjustment screen is displayed and the initial operation (8) The light amount can be adjusted by operating the cross button SB-2 during execution of the button vibe effect (9) The light amount adjustment screen is displayed, and (10) The light amount adjustment screen is displayed more than the button image (prompts the operation of the sub-input button SB that triggers the execution of the button vibe effect) related to the button vibe effect. (11) The light amount adjustment screen is higher than the button image related to the button vibration effect (prompts the user to operate the sub-input button SB that triggers the execution of the button vibration effect). has a lower display priority (sometimes referred to as display priority or visibility). (13) The light intensity adjustment screen may not be displayed by operating the cross button SB-2 during the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored, but the light intensity level may be changed. (14) Light intensity adjustment screen is displayed and the button vibration related to the initial operation is being executed. Note that the volume adjustment screen is replaced with the display of the current volume level that is displayed when the volume level is changed. good too. Further, the light amount adjustment screen may be replaced with a display of the current light amount level displayed when the light amount level is changed. Also, the volume adjustment screen and the light amount adjustment screen may be replaced with a volume and light amount adjustment screen that integrates both.

<Configuration related to errors>
In the pachinko game machine according to the present example, a predetermined error (for example, an abnormality in which the tray (upper tray) is full due to the fact that the game balls cannot be stored in the tray (upper tray) any more, or a startup error during execution of the button vibration effect) In the event of an illegal ball entry into the mouth, an abnormal start-up winning prize based on excessive ball entry, a door open error based on the opening of the outer frame D12 or the front frame D14, etc.), the button vibration effect will continue. However, the lighting mode of the button lamp and/or the game effect lamp D26 may be changed to a lighting mode corresponding to a predetermined error.

<Possible errors>
Errors that can occur in the gaming machine according to the present specification will now be described in detail.

As an error related to game ball ejection; the payout control board; refers to its own counter; when the counter reaches a predetermined number (accumulated number of excess payouts exceeds the allowable number); stop payout operation , and the display of the error number (1) on the error indicator (7-segment indicator). In addition, when the power is turned off, the payout operation is canceled and the error number is hidden. When an error related to another game ball payout is duplicated, the payout operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Further, the effect display device SG may perform error notification by displaying an error, blinking a frame decoration LED, and reproducing an error notification sound.

Next, as an error related to the game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor; detects an abnormal signal from the sensor; stops the payout operation, and Display the error number (3) on the error indicator (7-segment indicator). Also, when the power is restored after the power is turned off, the payout operation is resumed and the error display is hidden. When an error related to another game ball payout is duplicated, the payout operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Also, the error number displayed on the error indicator (7-segment indicator) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to the game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor; when the ball entry signal from the sensor is detected when the payout control is not executed ; Stop the payout operation and display the error number (5) on the error indicator (7-segment indicator). Also, by operating the error release switch; the payout operation is resumed and the error display is hidden. When an error related to another game ball payout is duplicated, the payout operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Also, the error number displayed on the error indicator (7-segment indicator) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to the game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor; When an incoming ball signal exceeding 1 is detected; the payout operation is stopped, and the error number (5) is displayed on the error indicator (7 segment indicator). Also, by operating the error release switch; the payout operation is resumed and the error display is hidden. In addition, when an error related to another game ball payout occurs, the payout operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Also, the error number displayed on the error indicator (7-segment indicator) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to the game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the payout motor sensor; When there is no rotational displacement of 100 minutes; the payout operation is stopped (or the retry operation is executed), and the error number (7) is displayed on the error indicator (7-segment indicator). Also, by operating the error canceling switch or by elapse of a predetermined period (for example, two minutes) after the occurrence of the error; the payout operation is resumed and the error display is hidden. When an error related to another game ball payout is duplicated, the payout operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Also, the error number displayed on the error indicator (7-segment indicator) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to the game ball payout; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the count sensor; time), when the sensor detects a ball entry signal for less than the predetermined number of minutes; ) is displayed. Also, by operating the error canceling switch or by elapse of a predetermined period (for example, two minutes) after the occurrence of the error; the payout operation is resumed and the error display is hidden. When an error related to another game ball payout is duplicated, the payout operation is kept stopped, and the notification control is configured to preferentially display the one with a higher priority. Also, the error number displayed on the error indicator (7-segment indicator) is merely an example, and the error number may be different for each item.

Next, as an error related to abnormal winning; the main control board (for example, main control board M); Winning mouth C20 ball entering detection device); When detecting a game ball entering the first (second) big winning mouth outside the first (second) big winning mouth valid period (* However, special During execution of the game, the ball may be detected a predetermined number of times during the execution of one special game); Execute. When the power is turned on again while the RAM clear button is pressed, or when a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses after the occurrence of the error, the error notification is terminated.

Next, as an error related to door opening; the payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the door open sensor; when the door open sensor changes from off to on; Prohibition of ball lending, flashing of frame decoration LED, error display on effect display device SG, error notification sound reproduction, detection of ball entry into the first (second) main game start opening or auxiliary game start opening will play a dedicated incoming ball sound effect. In addition, when the door opening sensor changes from ON to OFF; the dispensing operation is resumed, ball lending is permitted, and the error display, error notification sound reproduction, and ball entry sound effect reproduction are terminated (even after the error is canceled, The flashing of the frame decoration LED continues until the predetermined time elapses). It should be noted that, in the event that an error related to the detection of an abnormality in another large winning opening overlaps, the stop of the payout operation and the prohibition of lending the ball are maintained, and regarding the notification control, the abnormality detection of the large winning opening is prioritized. . In addition, the main control board may be the main control board, and when an error with a high priority (for example, detection of an abnormality in a large winning opening) occurs, the treatment for the error with a high priority may be preferentially executed. Also, the time from error cancellation to the end of error notification sound reproduction can be within the shortest variation time of the main game pattern, while the time from error cancellation to the end of flashing of the frame decoration LED is the shortest variation time of the main game pattern. It should be noted that it is configured to exceed

Next, as an error related to the frame; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the frame open sensor; when the frame open sensor changes from off to on; Prohibition of lending, flashing of the frame decoration LED, error display on the performance display device SG, and reproduction of error notification sound are executed. Also, when the open detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from ON to OFF; the error display and reproduction of the error notification sound are terminated (even after the error is cleared, the frame decoration LED continues blinking until a predetermined time elapses). Incidentally, the main control board may be used as the main body of detection.

Next, as an error related to the large winning hole abnormality detection; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); 2nd big winning hole C20 ball entry detection device); When detecting the entry of a game ball into the first (second) big winning hole outside the first (second) big winning hole valid period; Invalidating the ball entry related to the occurrence of the error, lighting the frame decoration LED, the board surface decoration LED, and the monitor LED, displaying the error on the performance display device SG, and reproducing the error notification sound are executed. Also, when the power is turned on again, or when the open detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off; the error notification ends. Note that the frame decoration LED (and the board surface decoration LED) are lit rather than blinking. Also, although the error cancellation conditions are the same as those for opening the frame, the extinguishing conditions for the frame decoration LED are different.

Next, as an error related to the abnormal detection of the winning opening, the main control board (for example, the main control board M) refers to the radio wave sensor, the entrance sensor of all the entrances, and the first (second) big winning opening sensor. ; Abnormal radio wave detection, detection of winning sensor or out switch being ON for a certain period of time, detection of a predetermined number or more of game balls entering the big winning opening during a special game; related to the occurrence of the error Invalidate ball entry, turn on frame decoration LED, board surface decoration LED, and monitor LED, display error on performance display device SG, and reproduce error notification sound. Also, when the power is turned on again, or when the open detection sensor of the front frame unit changes from on to off; the error notification ends.

Next, as an error related to the normal electric accessory winning abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); Refer to; When a predetermined number A (15 balls) or more game balls enter the second main game start opening during the period of flag OFF → ON → OFF during the validity period of the second main game start opening, or the second main game start When a predetermined number B (10 balls) or more of game balls enter the second main game start port with the flag off during the mouth valid period, or during normal electric accessory winning abnormality (for example, during the error occurrence) When a predetermined number C (one ball) or more of game balls enter the second main game start hole; sub-input buttons (eg, sub-input button SB), button lamps, and other various LEDs flash or light up, and effect display Error display on device SG {*End after predetermined time A (300 seconds) if error is not cleared}, Play error notification sound {*End after predetermined time B (90 seconds) if error is not cleared} Execute. Also, by turning on the power again {for example, start of main processing on the main control board side in (a) of FIG. 8}, the error notification is terminated. Incidentally, the number of errors that do not affect the progress of the game satisfies a predetermined number A>predetermined number B>predetermined number C. In addition, while the display mode of the sub-input button system LED does not depend on the effect, the display mode of the effect display device SG is configured to be dependent on the effect and the error display is also executed.

Next, as an error related to the big winning opening winning abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); 2nd big winning opening C20 entrance ball detection device); during the execution of the small hit, the period from the small hit execution flag on to the small hit waiting flag on → off {for example, the first (second ) During the period when the flag is ON during the valid period of the big winning opening}, if a predetermined number A (11 balls) of game balls enter the big winning opening, the main game that is stopped in the big winning opening during the execution of the special game When a predetermined number N of game balls based on the pattern enter, and when a predetermined number B (3 balls) of game balls enter the big prize opening when the small hit execution flag is turned off and the condition device operation flag is turned off, the big prize gate is won. When a predetermined number C (1 ball) of game balls enter the big winning hole during an abnormality (for example, during the error); sub-input button sensor (for example, sub-input button SB), sub-input button decoration LED (not shown), other various LEDs blink or light, error display on the effect display device SG {* If the error is not canceled, it will end after a predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, error notification sound playback {* error canceled If not, end after a predetermined time B (90 seconds)} is executed. Also, by turning on the power again; the error notification is terminated. Note that the occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Also, the predetermined number N is determined by the main game symbols that are stopped, and the predetermined number N may be different even if the special game consists of the same number of rounds. Further, it is configured such that the predetermined number A>predetermined number B>predetermined number C. In addition, it should be supplemented that the minimum value of the predetermined number N is the same as the value of the predetermined number A when the same big winning opening is opened.

Next, as an error related to the start opening winning abnormality; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); refers to the first main game start opening sensor and the first main game start opening confirmation sensor; first main game start When the ball entry counter value is greater than the first main game start hole confirmation counter value by a predetermined number (100 balls) or more; jog sensor (eg, sub-input button SB), jog decoration LED (not shown), other LED blinks or lights, error display on effect display device SG {*If error is not canceled, end after predetermined time A (300 seconds)}, Error notification sound played {*If error is not canceled, predetermined time B end after (90 seconds)}. Also, by turning on the power again {for example, start of main processing on the main control board side in (a) of FIG. 8}, the error notification is terminated. Note that the occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. Further, it is preferable that the first main game start sensor is a non-contact sensor and the first main game start confirmation sensor is a contact sensor. Also, the first main game starting opening sensor may be a contact sensor, and the first main game starting opening confirmation sensor may be a non-contact sensor.

Next, as an error related to the receptacle (upper plate) full tank abnormality; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the receptacle (upper plate) full tank sensor (not shown); the prize ball payout device When the receptacle full error flag is turned from OFF to ON by the operation of KE or the game ball lending device R; the payout operation is stopped, and the effect display device SG displays an error and reproduces an error notification sound. Also, when the receptacle full error flag is changed from ON to OFF; the dispensing operation is resumed and the error notification is ended. In addition, the error notification sound is emitted when a predetermined main game pattern (jackpot pattern) is stopped and when the conditional device activation flag is turned on (especially, even in a special game consisting of the same number of rounds, winning balls is easy. It is configured to be reproduced only during a special game related to a long open jackpot. Also, the main control board may be the main control board.

Next, as an error related to the door opening error; the payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH); refers to the door open sensor and the frame open sensor; when the frame open sensor changes from off to on; Stopping the payout operation, moving the sub-control production accessory (the accessory that does not hinder the visibility of other error notifications) to the initial position, lighting the frame decoration LED, and displaying the error on the production display device SG, Execute error notification sound reproduction {*end of reproduction after a predetermined time (300 seconds) from the occurrence of an error}. Also, when the door open sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when the frame open sensor changes from ON to OFF; the dispensing operation is resumed, and after a predetermined time A (30 seconds) after the error is cleared, the frame decoration LED is turned on. The light is turned off, the error display is terminated, and the reproduction of the error annunciation sound is terminated after a predetermined time B (5 seconds) after the error is cleared. In addition, if the sub-control production accessory is configured to make it difficult to see the error display, it is configured to make other error displays easier to see by moving to the initial position when an error occurs. may Also, the main control board may be the main control board.

Next, as an error related to abnormal winning; the main control board (for example, main control board M); Refer to the large winning opening sensor (for example, the first large winning opening C10 ball entry detection device or the second large winning opening C20 ball detection device); game balls enter a predetermined number A (10 balls) or more, or when the flag is turned off during the validity period of the first (second) big winning opening, a predetermined number A (10 Execute the lighting of the frame decoration LED {*turning off after a predetermined time A (1 second) from the occurrence of the error}. ; Also, when the flag is turned off during the validity period of the second main game start opening, a predetermined number B (30 balls) or more of game balls enter the second main game start opening, or during the validity period of the first (second) big winning opening When the game ball enters the first (second) big prize hole with a predetermined number B (30 balls) or more when the flag is off; the frame decoration LED lights up {* turns off after a predetermined time B (30 seconds) after the error occurs} is executed. do. Note that the occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. In addition, the two error notification modes are accompanied by two or more error notification completion timings and different error occurrence conditions.

Next, as an error related to the discharge error; the main control board (for example, the main control board M); Starting entrance ball detection device B11s, first big prize mouth C10 ball detection device, second big prize mouth C20 ball detection device, general prize mouth ball detection device) and switch for entering ball confirmation (not shown in particular) However, one or more switches that are different from the switch for detecting the entry of a ball into each ball entrance) through which the game ball that enters each ball entrance passes; When the difference between the numerical counter value (for example, the number of game balls detected by the ball entry sensors of all ball entry holes) and the number of game balls detected by the entry confirmation switch exceeds a predetermined number (100); Error display on the display device SG {* error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from the occurrence of the error}, error notification sound playback {* error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from the error occurrence}, frame decoration LED (for example , frame decoration lamp D18-L) lights up {*error notification ends after a predetermined time (30 seconds) from the occurrence of the error}. Note that the occurrence of an error does not affect the progress of the game. In addition, there are more error notification modes than abnormal winning errors, and there are fewer error notification end conditions.

<Configuration at power-on>
One or more of the following configurations may be applied as a configuration related to power-on.
(1) If the power is turned off and neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on after that, the button vibration related to the initial operation is executed. (2) The power is turned off, If the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on after that, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed during the setting change mode. In the case, the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed in the setting confirmation mode

<Vibration time of sub-input button SB>
One or more of the following configurations may be applied as a configuration relating to the vibration time of the sub-input button SB.
(1) The vibration time of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect is relatively longer than the vibration time of the sub input button SB in the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored ( 2) The longest vibration time of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect is longer than the longest vibration time of the sub input button SB in the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored. (3) The shortest vibrating time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect is greater than the shortest vibrating time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibrating related to the initial operation after the power is restored. (4) The vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that is not a win-lose branch effect is relative to the vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that is a win-lose branch effect. (5) The vibration of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that is not the win-lose branch effect is shorter than the longest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that is the win-lose branch effect. (6) The shortest vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect, which is a win-lose branch effect, is shorter than the shortest time in the button vibration effect, which is not a win-lose branch effect. The shortest time of the vibration time of the sub-input button SB is shorter. (7) The vibrating time of the sub-input button SB is shorter than the vibrating time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that starts before reaching the reach. The vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibe effect that starts after the reach is relatively short. (8) The sub-input button in the button vibe effect that starts before reaching reach. The maximum vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that starts after reaching reach is shorter than the maximum vibration time of SB. (9) Reach and The shortest vibration time of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect that starts to be executed after reaching reach is shorter than the shortest time of the vibration time of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect that starts to be executed before reaching reach. (10) 1 cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect is shorter than the vibration time of 1 cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored. is relatively longer than the vibration time of (11) button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored. (12) Vibration time of one cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored (13) Sub-input in button vibration effect, which is a win-lose split effect The vibration time for one cycle of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that is not the win-lose branch effect is relatively shorter than the vibration time for one cycle of the button SB. The longest vibration time of one cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect is shorter than the longest vibration time of one cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect. (15) 1 cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect that is not the win-lose branch effect is shorter than the shortest time of the vibration time of 1 cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect that is the win-lose branch effect. (16) Reach is shorter than the vibrating time of one cycle of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that starts before reach. The vibration time of one cycle of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that starts to be executed later is relatively short. The longest vibration time for one cycle of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that starts after reaching reach is shorter than the longest vibration time for one cycle of the input button SB. (18) A button vibration effect that starts to be executed after reach is longer than the shortest time of the vibration time of one cycle of the sub input button SB in the button vibration effect that is started before reach is reached. (19) The vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration effect that is not the win-lose split effect is the initial period after the power is restored. It may be shorter than the vibration time of the sub-input button SB in the button vibration related to the operation. When the sub-input button SB vibrates like this: 3 seconds with vibration → 0.2 seconds without vibration → 0.3 seconds with vibration → 0.2 seconds without vibration → . . . .2+0.3=0.5 seconds". In addition, in the case of a vibration pattern that repeats "0.3 second vibration → 0.2 second no vibration → 0.5 second vibration → 0.2 second no vibration", the repeated time value is regarded as one period. In this case, the period of vibration time is "0.3+0.2+0.5+0.2=1.2 seconds". When there is only one kind of vibration time, the one kind of vibration time is the longest time and the one kind of vibration time is the shortest time. That is, even if the number of types of vibration time is not two or more, it has the longest time and the shortest time.

In this specification, regarding the "average value" in "the average value of time of A is shorter than the average value of time of B", the time value that can be selected for A and the frequency of selection thereof The average value of time calculated based on B is compared with the average value of time calculated based on the selectable time value of B and its frequency of selection. The same interpretation can be applied to long time, and the same interpretation can be applied to large, small, long, short, and the like.

In addition, in this specification, that A is relatively shorter than B means comparing the average value of the time that A can take (same as the average value described above) and the average value of the time that B can take Then A may be shorter than B, and A is shorter than B by comparing the most frequently selected time value of A with the most frequently selected time value of B. , and A may choose shorter time values more frequently than B. The same interpretation can be applied to long time, and the same interpretation can be applied to large, small, long, short, and the like.

<Regarding duplication of button vibrations>
In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present specification, during the vibration of the sub input button SB with the button vibration related to the power restoration, the button vibration effect can be determined by the sub control board S as the effect executed with the symbol variation, or During the execution of the symbol variation determined by the sub control board S, the sub-input button SB can be vibrated with the button vibration at the time of power restoration. good too. When configured in this manner, one or more of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) If it is time to execute the button vibration effect during the vibration of the sub-input button with the button vibration associated with the initial operation when the power is restored, the button vibration associated with the initial operation when the power is restored is given priority. In other words, the button vibration associated with the initial operation when the power is restored is continuously executed, and the button vibration effect is not executed during the vibration time of the button vibration associated with the initial operation when the power is restored (2) as described in (1) above. , when the vibration time of the button vibration related to the initial operation at the time of power recovery has passed, the button vibration effect is not executed even if the vibration time of the button vibration effect remains from the execution timing of the button vibration effect ( 3) When configured as in (1) above, when the vibration time of the button vibration related to the initial operation at the time of power return has passed, the vibration time of the button vibration effect remains from the execution timing of the button vibration effect. In this case, the button vibration effect is executed from the middle until the vibration time elapses

<Look-ahead performance>
In addition, in the pachinko game machine according to the present specification, one or more of the following configurations may be applied as the configuration relating to the look-ahead effect.
(1) When executing the look-ahead effect, the hold image related to the trigger hold is a hold image with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit, and the button vibe effect (button vibe look-ahead effect) can be executed with the fluctuation before the trigger. (2) When the look-ahead effect is executed, if a power outage occurs in a predetermined situation where the button vibration effect (button vibrator look-ahead effect) is being executed due to the pre-trigger fluctuation, and then the power is restored, before the power is turned off Although the button vibration effect that has been executed is not executed, the button vibration related to the initial operation when the power is restored is executed.
(3) When configured as in (2) above, while the sub-input button SB may vibrate before the trigger variation is executed, the sub-input button SB does not newly vibrate during the trigger variation. (4) Look-ahead effect , the hold image related to the trigger hold is a hold image with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit, and if the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the big hit expected that was displayed before the power was turned off. The hold image with a relatively high degree is not displayed in a display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit until the trigger fluctuation ends. ) is being executed, and then the power is restored, the vibration of the sub-input button SB can be executed before the trigger fluctuation ends. When the power is cut off in a situation where the hold image is a hold image with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit, and then the power is restored, the hold with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit that was displayed before the power cut While the image is not displayed in a display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit until the trigger variation starts, when the look-ahead presentation is executed, the button vibe presentation (button vibe look-ahead presentation) is being performed with the pre-trigger variation. If the power supply is interrupted and then the power is restored, the vibration of the sub input button SB can be executed before the trigger fluctuation starts. If a power outage occurs in a situation where a high background effect is displayed, and then the power is restored, the background effect with a relatively high expectation of a big hit that was displayed before the power outage will not be displayed until the trigger fluctuation ends. On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect is executed, if a power failure occurs in the situation where the button vibration effect (button vibrate look-ahead effect) is being executed in the pre-trigger fluctuation, and then the power is restored, the vibration of the sub input button SB is triggered. (7) During the execution of the look-ahead effect that can be executed (execution started) before the fluctuation ends, a power cut occurs in a situation where a background effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed as the background effect, and then When the power is restored, the background effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit that was displayed before the power was turned off will not be displayed until the trigger fluctuation starts. If the power is turned off while the vibration anticipation effect is being executed, and then the power is restored, the vibration of the sub input button SB can be executed (started) before the trigger fluctuation starts.

<Power off during execution of button vibration effect>
In the case where the power is turned off during the execution of the button vibration effect, the following action may be taken. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: “Button vibrating effect starts → Power failure occurs during button vibrating effect → Power is restored (does not shift to setting confirmation mode or setting change mode) → Button vibrator effect does not resume (remaining execution time minute is not executed) → button vibration related to the initial operation starts"
Configuration 2: "Button vibrating effect starts → Power failure occurs during execution of button vibrating → Setting key switch turns from off to on → Power is restored → Shift to setting confirmation mode → Button vibrating effect is not restarted ( The remaining execution time is not executed), and the button vibration related to the initial action is not executed → Setting confirmation mode ends → The button vibration effect is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed) → The button vibration related to the initial action is not executed start execution
Configuration 3: “Button vibration effect starts → Power failure occurs during button vibration effect → Setting key switch turns from off to on → Power is restored while RAM clear button is on → Shift to setting change mode → The button vibration effect is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), and the button vibration related to the initial operation is not executed → Setting change mode ends → The button vibration effect is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed) →The button vibration related to the initial operation starts executing.”
In addition, the button vibration associated with the initial operation after the power is restored is configured to start after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed after the power is restored so that the player does not misunderstand that the button vibration effect has been executed from the continuation. may Also, the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode and the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are merely examples, and may be changed without any problem.

<Power off during execution of button vibration effect and character effect>
In the case where the power is cut off during execution of the button vibe effect and the character object effect, the following actions may be performed. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: “The button vibe effect is being executed and the character effect is being executed → Power failure occurs during the button vibration effect → Power is restored (does not shift to setting confirmation mode or setting change mode) → Button vibration effect is It is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed) and the performance of the character is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed) → Button vibration related to the initial action starts → The initial action of the movable character is executed start"
Configuration 2: "The button vibration effect is being executed and the character effect is being executed → The power is cut off during the execution of the button vibration effect → The setting key switch turns from off to on → Power is restored → Transition to setting confirmation mode → button The vibrator production is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), the button vibration related to the initial action is not executed, the character production is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), and the movable role is not executed. The initial action of the object is not executed → Setting confirmation mode ends → The button vibration effect is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), and the character effect is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed) → Initial Execution of the button vibration related to the action starts → Execution of the initial action of the movable accessory starts"
Configuration 3: "The button vibration effect is being executed and the character effect is being executed → Power failure occurs during the execution of the button vibration effect → The setting key switch turns from OFF to ON → Power is restored while the RAM clear button is ON → Switch to setting change mode → Button vibration effect is not restarted (remaining execution time is not executed), button vibration related to initial operation is not executed, and character production is not restarted (remaining execution time) is not executed), the initial action of the movable character is not executed → end of the setting change mode → the button vibration effect is not restarted (the remaining execution time is not executed), and the character effect is not restarted (the remaining execution time time is not executed) → Button vibration related to initial action starts execution → Initial action of movable accessory starts execution"
In addition, the button vibration associated with the initial operation after the power is restored is configured to start executing after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is restored so that the player does not misunderstand that the button vibration effect has been executed from the continuation. may The initial action of the movable role after the power is restored may be configured to start after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the power is restored so that the player does not mistakenly think that the performance of the role is continued. good. Also, the conditions for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode and the conditions for transitioning to the setting change mode are only examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed. Also, the execution start timing of the initial motion of the movable accessory may be earlier than the execution start timing of the button vibration relating to the initial motion, or the execution period of the button vibration relating to the initial motion and the initial motion of the movable accessory may be configured so as not to overlap with the execution period of In addition, the button vibration related to the initial action after the power is restored starts after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the power is restored, and the initial action of the movable accessory after the power is restored is the predetermined time after the power is restored. It may be configured to start execution after a lapse of (for example, 1 second). In addition, when two or more movable accessories are mounted, and at least the movable accessory A and the movable accessory B are provided, in the configuration 1 to the configuration 3, either the movable accessory A or the movable accessory B Only the movable accessory A and the movable accessory B may be applied.

<Relationship between binding action and button vibration>
The relationship between the binding action and the button vibration may be configured as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: During execution of the fixed position action related to the above-described decorative design (first decorative design), the button vibration effect is not executed.
Configuration 2: During execution of the tenpai action related to the aforementioned decorative design (first decorative design), the button vibration effect is not executed.
Configuration 3: During execution of the shaking action related to the above-described decorative pattern (first decorative pattern), a button vibe effect can be executed (for example, a cut-in effect is executed as a button effect during execution of the shaking action, and then button vibrator effect is executed).
Configuration 4: During the execution of the action at the start of fluctuation related to the above-described decorative pattern (first decorative pattern), a button vibe effect can be executed (for example, during the execution of the action at the start of fluctuation, the button vibrator look-ahead effect is executed. ).
Configuration 5: During the execution of the decision action related to the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) described above, a button vibe effect can be executed (for example, during the execution of the decision action, the operation of the sub input button SB is unnecessary and the valid period (A button vibrating effect that does not have a button is executed).
It should be noted that the button vibration effect may not be executed during execution of the shaking action in a situation where the number of pending is 0 and the first decorative symbol is stopped (variable standby state).

<Button vibration effect according to game state>
The button vibration effect corresponding to the game state may be configured as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: During the fluctuation of the first main game pattern in the non-time-reduced game state (low base state), the button vibe look-ahead effect, the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect, the button vibe effect related to the singing effect, and the win-lose branch effect. However, during the fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the non-time-reduced game state, the button vibe look-ahead effect and the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect are not executed (related to the singing effect A button vibrator effect, a button vibrator effect related to a win-lose branch effect, and the like can be executed).
Configuration 2: During the fluctuation of the second main game pattern in the time-reduced game state (high base state), button vibrator look-ahead effect, button vibrator effect related to cut-in effect, button vibrator effect related to singing effect, win-lose divergence effect Such a button vibe effect can be executed, but during the fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the time-reduced game state, the button vibe look-ahead effect and the button vibe effect related to the singing effect are not executed (the button vibe effect related to the cut-in effect Effect, button vibrator effect related to win-lose branch effect, etc. can be executed).

<Button vibration before the start of the valid period>
It may be configured to execute a button vibration effect (sometimes referred to as a first button vibration effect) in which the button vibration is executed before or at the start of the effective period of the sub-input button SB. In that case, it may be configured as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: When the first button vibration effect is executed as a single button press effect, the button vibration continues during the valid period, and the button vibration can continue even after the sub input button SB is single pressed during the valid period. .
Configuration 2: When the first button vibration effect is executed as a button repeated effect, the button vibration continues during the effective period, and the button vibration can continue even when the sub input button SB is repeatedly pressed during the effective period. (It may be configured such that when a long-pressing operation is performed during the valid period, an auto repeated hit effect is executed).
Configuration 3: When the first button vibration effect is executed as a button long press effect, the button vibration continues during the effective period, and the button vibration continues even when the sub input button SB is long pressed during the effective period. can.

<Configuration related to button operation>
A configuration related to button operation may be configured as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: There are cases where the button vibration effect is executed during the execution of the repeated button-pressing operation during the execution period of the repeated button-pressing effect.
Configuration 2: There are cases where the button vibration effect is executed during the execution of the automatic continuous hitting effect (during the execution of the long press operation).

<Configuration related to errors>
The error configuration may be configured as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: When the first error occurs during the execution of the button vibration effect, the execution of the button vibration effect is interrupted.
Configuration 2: Even if a second error occurs during execution of the button vibration effect, the execution of the button vibration effect is not interrupted.
Configuration 3: Even if the first error occurs during execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation, the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation is not interrupted.
Configuration 4: Even if a second error occurs during execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation, the execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation is not interrupted.
The first error corresponds to an abnormal winning error and the like, and the second error corresponds to a saucer (upper tray) full tank error, an error related to game ball payout, and the like.

<Button lamp during button vibration>
A configuration relating to the button lamp during the button vibration may be configured as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: The amount of light can be adjusted even during execution of the button vibe effect (for example, it can be performed by operating the cross key), and even if the light amount level is changed by adjusting the light amount, the button vibe effect is still being performed. The light intensity of the button lamp does not change.
Configuration 2: Even while the button vibe effect is being executed, the light amount can be adjusted (for example, it can be executed by operating the cross key), and when the light amount level is changed by the light amount adjustment, the button vibe effect is being performed. The light intensity of the button lamp is also changed.
Configuration 3: Light intensity adjustment is possible even during execution of the button vibration related to the initial operation (for example, it can be performed by operating the cross key), and even if the light intensity level is changed by the light intensity adjustment, the initial operation is performed. The amount of light of the button lamp is not changed while the button vibration is being executed.

<Timeline of button vibe production>
As a configuration related to the time series of the button vibe effect, the configuration may be as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: Button vibe effects may be executed two or more times for one symbol change (for example, button vibe effects related to cut-in effects → button vibe effects related to win-lose branch effects).
Configuration 2: In the case where the button vibe effect is executed twice with one pattern change, the character effect is executed when the button vibe effect to be executed later is executed (the movable character moves ). In addition, when two or more movable accessories are installed, and at least movable accessories A and B are provided, when the button vibration effect is executed twice with one symbol change, it is executed first. When the button vibe effect to be executed is executed, neither the character effect related to the movable accessory A nor the character effect related to the movable accessory B is executed, and when the button vibe effect to be executed later is executed At least one of the character production for the movable accessory A and the character production for the movable accessory B is executed (the movable accessory operates).
Configuration 3: When the button vibe effect is executed twice with one symbol change, the first decoration pattern is displayed on the effect display device SG during the execution of the button vibe effect that is executed first (variation display). The first decorative symbol is not displayed on the effect display device SG (or has a period during which it is not displayed) during execution of the button vibe effect to be executed later.

<Relationship between button vibes and decorative patterns>
The configuration relating to the relationship between the button vibe effect and the decorative pattern may be configured as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: While the second decorative symbol is stopped (during fixed stop), the button vibe effect is not executed.
Configuration 2: A predetermined super reach (for example, battle reach) is executed with a certain pattern variation that becomes a big hit, and the temporary stop pattern (for example, "787") of the first decorative pattern after execution of the predetermined super reach is It may be different from the fixed stop symbol (for example, "777") of the second decorative symbol in the certain symbol variation.
Configuration 3: In the above-described certain symbol variation, the fixed stop design of the first decorative design (or the temporary stop design before the fixed stop) is the same as the fixed stop design of the second decorative design (for example, "777"). , When the temporary stop pattern of the first decorative pattern different from the fixed stop pattern of the second decorative pattern (for example, "787") is stopped or a predetermined time before it is stopped (for example, 2 seconds before), the button vibrate Although the performance is configured not to start execution, when the fixed stop pattern of the first decoration pattern (or the temporary stop pattern before fixed stop, for example, "777") is stopped or for a predetermined time. Before (for example, two seconds ago), the button vibration effect can be started to be executed.

<Relationship between win-lose branch effects and button images>
The configuration relating to the relationship between the win-lose branch effect and the button image may be configured as follows. It should be noted that a plurality of configurations below may be combined, or all configurations in this specification may be combined.
Configuration 1: During the execution of the win-lose branch effect, a button effect that makes the big win almost definite (or definite) is executed (a button image that makes the big win almost definite (or definite) is displayed, button lamp is lit in a lighting mode in which the big hit is almost definite (or definite)), the resurrection effect (button vibration related to the resurrection effect) is not executed as the effect in the symbol variation.
Configuration 2: Prior to the execution of the winning/losing branch effect, a notice effect (effect other than the button effect) in which the big hit is almost definite (or definite) is executed, and the big win is almost definite (or definite) during the execution of the winning/losing branch effect. When a button effect other than the button effect that becomes the target) is executed, a resurrection effect (button vibe related to the resurrection effect) can be executed as the effect in the symbol variation.

<<Concrete example of configuration>>
The configurations related to the sub-input button SB described above can be combined in any way, and an example of combining one configuration or a plurality of configurations described above and the effects thereof will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
The button vibes associated with the initial action can be performed over a plurality of pattern variations.
The button vibe effect is not executed across a plurality of pattern variations.

<effect>
In a situation where the game is progressing normally, it can be constructed so that the button vibration effect can be executed over a plurality of symbol changes, thereby improving the interest of the game and extending over a plurality of symbol changes. By constructing so that the button vibration effect is not executed by pressing the button vibration effect, the delimitation of the button vibration effect becomes clear, and the confusion of the player can be prevented. On the other hand, when the power supply is restored after the power failure occurs, the button vibration related to the initial operation can be performed over a plurality of pattern fluctuations, so that the vibration of the sub-input button SB can be performed normally. priority can be given to confirming

<Configuration 2>
If the setting key switch is off and the power is turned off, and then the power is restored while the setting key switch is still off, set before the start timing of the button vibration related to the initial operation. When the key switch is turned on from off, even if the execution timing of the button vibration relating to the initial operation comes while the setting key switch remains on, the button vibration relating to the initial operation is not performed.

<effect>
If you want to check the game operation after the power is restored, if you want to check the operation other than the button vibration such as the operation of movable accessories, or if you do not want to cause a vibration error, etc. By turning on the setting key switch when the user does not want the vibration to be executed, it is possible to prevent the button vibration associated with the initial operation from being generated, thereby improving the convenience of inspecting the game machine.

<Configuration 3>
When the power is restored after a power outage, while the button vibration related to the initial action is being executed, it is possible to execute a front button effect different from the win-lose branch effect such as a cut-in effect, but the win-lose branch effect is executed. not.

<effect>
Even when the power supply is cut off and the symbol variation is executed during the execution of the button vibration relating to the initial operation after the power is restored, the win-lose branch presentation for notifying the big win is not executed, and the sub-input button SB. By vibrating, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player misunderstands that a big win is confirmed.

<Configuration 4>
As button effects, there are front button effects and back button effects.
Both the front button production and the back button production are productions that suggest a big hit.
While the button vibration effect can be executed when the front button effect is executed, the button vibration effect is not executed when the back button effect is executed.

<effect>
In the secret back button performance, it is possible to prevent the surroundings from recognizing that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, so that the player can feel a sense of satisfaction that only the player can recognize, and in the non-secret front button performance. can make the surroundings recognize that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, so that the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority.

<Configuration 5>
There are more types of lighting modes of the button lamps when executing the button vibe effect than when executing the button vibes related to the initial operation after the power is restored.

<effect>
In the button vibration related to the initial operation after the power is restored, it is only necessary to satisfy the minimum necessity of confirming the operation. On the other hand, since the button vibe effect is an effect that suggests a big hit, the excitement is improved by having a wide variety of lighting mode variations according to the execution timing of the button vibrate effect and the effect mode of the accompanying button effect. can be made

<Configuration 6>
When the singing production is executed, it is accompanied by the button vibration production.
When the line production is executed, there are cases where the button vibration production is accompanied and cases where the button vibration production is not accompanied.

<effect>
Even if the singing performance in which the button vibe performance is executed is not executed, the button vibe performance may be executed in another performance, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained. In addition, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the effect in which the button vibe effect can be executed.

<Configuration 7>
It is configured such that the button effect can be executed a plurality of times in the symbol variation that becomes a big hit (sometimes referred to as a big hit variation).
In the symbol variation that becomes a big hit (sometimes referred to as a big hit variation), the button vibe production (button performance with button vibe production) can be executed multiple times.
When the button vibe effect is executed twice in one big hit variation, the execution time (the time during which the sub-input button SB is vibrating) is longer for the second button vibrator effect than for the first button vibrator effect. ) is long.
In the variation of the big win, the button vibration performance is configured to be executed twice, and the first button vibration performance is the button vibration performance which is executed at the execution timing even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB, and 2. The second button vibe effect is a button vibe effect that is executed when the player operates the sub-input button SB, and the execution time (sub-input time during which the button SB is vibrating) becomes long.

<effect>
By executing the button vibration performance twice or more for one pattern variation, the player can have expectations for a big hit multiple times for one pattern variation, and the button vibration performance is performed by the player's sub input button. Diversification and unexpectedness of the generation timing of the button vibe performance can be created by dividing the performance into the performance requiring the operation of the SB and the performance not requiring the player's operation of the sub-input button SB.

<Configuration 8>
When the button effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the button vibe effect is executed when the sub-input button SB is operated differs depending on the display mode of the instruction display.

<effect>
The player can have a sense of anticipation as to what kind of presentation mode the button presentation will be executed before the button presentation occurs. In addition, when the player directly operates the sub-input button SB to experience the button vibration effect as a tactile sensation, the button vibration can be generated without touching the sub-input button SB by the display of the effect display device SG or the lighting mode of the button lamp. It can be configured to have a case of recognizing the execution of the effect, and the interest of the game and the participation of the player can be improved.

<Configuration 9>
In the case where the same ready-to-win performance of battle ready-to-win performance (may be super ready-to-win performance or SP ready-to-win performance) is executed in the variation of the big hit, there are a normal big-hit pattern and a resurrection big-hit pattern as performance patterns. are doing.
In both the normal big win pattern and the resurrection big win pattern, it is constructed so that the button vibration performance can be executed after reaching the ready-to-win state, and in the normal big win pattern, the sub-input button SB is operated by the player. is operated, and in the pattern of the resurrection jackpot, the button vibration effect is executed at the execution timing even if the player does not operate the sub-input button SB. .
The start timing of the button vibration effect in the normal jackpot pattern is earlier than the start timing of the button vibration effect in the recovery jackpot pattern.

<effect>
As the button vibration effect at the time of winning a big hit, the effect patterns in which the player participates and the effect pattern in which the player does not participate are provided, thereby increasing the variation of the effect, and in the button vibration effect of the effect pattern in which the player does not participate. By relatively delaying the execution timing, it is possible to increase the degree of surprise, and to maintain the player's sense of expectation even in the second half of the pattern variation.

<Configuration 10>
A single button press effect in which the button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden when the button vibration effect is executed, and a button image, the instruction display, and the indicator image are hidden in the event of the button vibration effect. It has a button repeated effect that does not occur.
In both the single button pressing effect and the button repeated effect, the execution time of the button vibration effect is longer than the effective period of the sub input button SB related to the button effect.

<effect>
The period for congratulating the player for winning a big hit can be made longer than the period during which the player's operation is required, and the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority and increase his or her willingness to play. In addition, since the execution time of the button vibration effect differs depending on the operation mode instructed to the game machine, by expecting in advance which operation mode will be instructed, the user can feel the expectation before the button effect occurs. can hold

The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and the concepts listed below can be added to these concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments, as well as the combination and separation (higher-level concepts) of these concepts. may

<<Configuration related to hold change effect>>
Next, the pending change effect applicable to the pachinko game machine in this specification will be described. Some of the pending change effects have been described in the above-described second embodiment, and an example of a configuration that can be further applied to this embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the pending change effects described below can be appropriately combined in the configurations of the present embodiment and the third to eighth embodiments.

<<Significance of terms>>
The significance of each term in the pending change rendering will be detailed below. Note that the configuration related to the term can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Non-time reduction game state>
The non-shortening gaming state is a gaming state indicating a low base state, and is also called a non-shortening gaming state or a normal gaming state. In this example, the non-time-reduced gaming state is a low-probability-low base state, but the high-probability-low base state that does not execute the time-reduced game, which is relatively shorter than the normal game state, is a non-probability-low base state. It is good also as a time shortening game state.

<Time reduction game state>
The time reduction game state is a game state indicating a high base state. In this example, the time shortening gaming state, the high certainty high base state, and the low certainty high base state.

<Hold display>
The pending display is a display showing the number of symbol variations that have not yet been executed. The pending display informs the player of the pending number, which is the number that remains unchanged between the first pending display and the second pending display.

<First hold display>
The first pending display is a pending display using a pending image (sometimes called an icon). A pending image has a pending icon and the change icon. In this example, there are five types of display modes for the pending icon and the variable icon: a rainbow icon, a red red icon, a green green icon, a blue blue icon, and a white icon that is the default icon. It uses two icons. Note that display modes other than the five types may be provided, for example, a display mode imitating a character, a display mode imitating a character, or the like. As a display mode modeled after a character, a small hold as shown in FIG. 60 or the like is exemplified. The pending icon and the variable icon are different in size. The pending icon and the variable icon may differ only in shape, may differ in both size and shape, or may have the same size and shape. All five types of pending icons have the same size and shape. Some or all of the five types of pending icons may have different sizes or shapes. The winning expectations indicated by the reserved images are "rainbow color -> red -> green -> blue ->white" from the highest. In addition, white white icons (white circle display mode icon, white triangle display mode icon, white inverted triangle display mode icon, white square display mode icon, etc.) are normally reserved images ( normal icon), the blue icon is the first special pending image (first icon), the green icon is the first special pending image (first icon), the red icon is the second special pending image (second icon) ), the rainbow icon is also referred to as a third special reserved image (third icon), the blue icon is the first special reserved image A (first icon A), and the green icon is reserved different from the first special reserved image A. The image may be referred to as a first special reserved image B (first icon B).

Here, with respect to the normal reserved image, a first normal reserved image of a white icon that is a lighting state of a white circle, and a white icon that is a blinking state of a white circle (or a state having a size larger than that of the first normal reserved image) and a second normal reserved image, wherein the second normal reserved image has a higher chance of winning than the first normal reserved image, and/or the second normal reserved image has a higher probability of winning than the first normal reserved image It may be configured such that the degree of expectation of change to the special reserved image is high. Similarly, a white icon that is a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode, and a white triangle/inverted triangle blinking mode (or a mode that is larger than the white icon that is a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode). and has a white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode in a white triangle/inverted triangle flashing mode (or a white icon in a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode). and/or a white triangle/inverted triangle flashing mode (or a white triangle / A white icon having a larger size than a white icon, which is an inverted triangular lighting mode, may be configured to have a higher degree of expectation for a change to another special hold image. As described above, the first pending display is a general term for the pending icon and the variable icon (a pending display for effecting the variable described later), but the first pending display is the variable rights display (variable rights image). may be called. In other words, a pending image that includes a pending icon and the variable icon may be referred to as a variable rights display (a variable rights image). In that case, the normal reserved image may be referred to as the first variable rights display or the normal variable rights display, the special reserved image may be referred to as the second variable rights display or the special variable rights display, and the blue blue icon may be referred to as the second variable rights display. A (first icon), green green icon for second variation right display A (first icon), red red icon for second variation right display B (second icon), rainbow colored rainbow icon for second variation Also called right display C (third icon), the blue icon is the second variation right display A-1 (first icon A), and the green icon is the second variation that is a reserved image different from the second variation right display A-1. It may also be referred to as right display A-2 (first icon B). In addition, the pending icon is referred to as a variable rights display corresponding to a pending condition that does not satisfy the conditions for starting variable display of identification information, and the variable icon refers to the identification performed when the conditions for starting variable display of identification information are satisfied. It may also be called a variable rights image corresponding to variable display of information.

<Special hold image (special icon)>
The first special reserved image, the second special reserved image, and the third special reserved image are special reserved images different from the normal reserved image. Note that a special hold image (special icon) including the first special hold image, the second special hold image, and the third special hold image is referred to as an icon related to the special hold sound. A white triangle icon, a white inverted triangle icon, and a white square icon may be used as special pending images (special icons). Holding sounds including special holding sounds will be described later, but holding sounds can also be referred to as fluctuating right sounds in the same way as holding images. The special holding tone may be called a second fluctuating right tone or a special fluctuating right tone. Note that the special holding tone will be described later.

<Second hold display>
The second reserved display is a reserved display which is displayed so as to be visible to the player at all times or when the player has difficulty in visually recognizing the first reserved display or when the player cannot visually recognize the first reserved display. The second hold display is displayed with a number image showing a number. In order to clearly distinguish the second pending representation from the variable rights representation (in particular, the second variable rights representation) in terms of wording, the second pending representation may also be referred to as a pending number representation or a variable rights representation.

<First reserved display area>
The first reserved display area SG12 is an area for displaying the first reserved display. A display indicating the upper limit number of the first pending display may be performed. A pending icon is displayed in the first pending display area SG12. The first reserved display area SG12 may be an area including the reserved display area for effecting the change, and in that case, it is called an icon display area or a variable rights display area (variable rights image area).

<Second reserved display area>
The second pending display area SG13 is an area for displaying the second pending display. A number image indicating the number of reservations on the first main game side and a number image indicating the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed in the second reservation display area SG13. The second reserved display area SG13 may also be referred to as a reserved number display area or a fluctuating rights number display area.

<Reservation display for production of the relevant fluctuation (holding digestion transmission image, fluctuation corresponding image)>
The suspension display for effecting the change is also called the variation icon (holding digestion transmission image, variation corresponding image), and is an image displayed when a certain suspension is digested. As described above, the variable rendering pending display is one of the first pending displays (holding display using a pending image), and is also called a variable right display (variable right image).

<Reserved display area for effecting the change>
The suspension display area for effecting the variation is an area for displaying a suspension image of the variation icon to be displayed when a certain suspension is completed. Although the reserved display area for effecting the variation and the first reserved display area SG12 are displayed as separate display areas, they may be unified display areas. A unified display area is referred to as an icon display area or variable rights display area (variable rights image area).

<Pending Occurrence Display (Pending Occurrence Animation)>
Suspension occurrence display (suspension occurrence animation) is when the number of reservations increases based on the game ball entering the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 (or the first main game side And when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 in a situation where the number of reservations on the second main game side is 0), a new first reservation display is produced. This is the display of the moving image when displayed on the SG. The pending occurrence display includes a pending occurrence display of a pending icon and a pending occurrence display of the variable icon. When the number of reservations has reached the upper limit, the number of reservations does not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game starter A10 or the second main game starter B10, so the reservation occurrence display of the reservation icon is executed. not. However, if the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 in a situation where the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is 0, the change icon is reserved. Occurrence indication can be performed. In the non-time shortening game state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is not 0 and does not reach the upper limit, the game ball enters the second main game start port B10. Also, the hold occurrence display is not executed, but in the non-time shortened game state, there is neither hold on the first main game side nor hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are stopping fluctuation. In the case of , when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the pending occurrence display of the variation icon is executed. Furthermore, in the non-time shortening game state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is not 0 and has not reached the upper limit, the game ball enters the first main game start port A10. Then, the hold occurrence display is executed, and the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern are in a non-reduced time state, and neither the first main game side hold nor the second main game side hold is stopped. In this case, when the game ball enters the first main game start opening A10, the pending occurrence display of the variation icon is executed. Also, in the time shortening game state, when the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is not 0 and has not reached the upper limit, the game ball enters the first main game start port A10. However, in the time-reduced game state, there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are stopping fluctuation. In this case, when the game ball enters the first main game start opening A10, the pending occurrence display of the variation icon is executed. Furthermore, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time reduction game state and the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side is not 0 and has not reached the upper limit. When the hold occurrence display is executed, the time shortening game state is set, and there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are in fluctuation stop. When a game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the pending occurrence display of the variation icon is executed. It should be noted that the pending occurrence display may collectively refer to the pending occurrence display of the pending icon and the pending occurrence display of the variable icon as variable rights occurrence display. In addition, the pending occurrence display may be configured to have only the pending occurrence display of the pending icon and not have the pending occurrence display of the variable icon, or the display mode of the pending occurrence display of the pending icon (for example, It is displayed gradually from the top, and the display is enlarged from a small display at first, but when it is completely displayed, it is displayed smaller than the variable icon), and the display mode of the pending occurrence display of the variable icon (for example, It may be displayed gradually from the bottom, enlarged from a small display at first, and displayed larger than the pending icon when the display is completely displayed, etc.). In addition, as a modification, in the non-time-reduced game state, there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are in fluctuation stop. If the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the display of the pending occurrence of the variation icon is not executed, and the time shortening game state is the first main game side hold and the second main game side. When the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are in a state of stop of variation without any suspension on the game side, and when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the variation icon is suspended. It may be arranged that the occurrence display is not executed.

<Shift Display (Shift Animation)>
Shift display (shift animation) refers to the display when the pre-existing hold, which is a pre-existing hold, is reduced by satisfying the condition for starting the variable display of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol. FIG. 10 is a display of a moving image when moving the pending icon that has been displayed. FIG. It should be noted that the destination of the hold icon is not limited to the first hold display area SG12, but also includes the inside of the hold display area for the effect of the change (that is, the hold 1 on the first main game side in the non-time reduction game state). The corresponding hold icon moves into the effect pending display area for the change, or the hold icon corresponding to Hold 1 on the second main game side moves into the effect hold display area for the change in the time shortening game state. ). When the number of reservations on the second main game side is 0 and the number of reservations on the first main game side is 1 or more in the non-time shortening game state, and the condition for starting the variable display of the first main game symbols is satisfied and the second When the number of holds on the 1 main game side decreases, when moving the displayed hold icon on the 1st main game side, the hold icon on the 1st main game side (hold 2 to 4 on the 1st main game side ) and the corresponding variable icon on the first main game side (target is the hold icon of hold 1 on the first main game side) are configured to be shift-displayed. In the non-time shortening game state, when the number of reservations on the second main game side is 1 or more, and when the condition for starting the variable display of the second main game symbols is satisfied and the number of reservations on the second main game side decreases. , the shift display of the variation icon on the second main game side (holding 1 on the second main game side) is executed (holding icon on the second main game side (second main game The shift display of the hold icons of the hold 2 to 4 on the side) is not executed). When the number of reservations on the second main game side is 1 or more in the time shortening game state, and when the condition for starting the variable display of the second main game symbols is satisfied and the number of reservations on the second main game side decreases. , when moving the displayed hold icon on the second main game side, the hold icon on the second main game side (holding icons 2 to 4 on the second main game side are targeted) and the second main game side The shift display of the variable icon (holding icon of holding 1 on the second main game side) is executed. In the time reduction game state, when the number of reservations on the second main game side is 0 and the number of reservations on the first main game side is 1 or more, the condition for starting the variable display of the first main game symbols is satisfied and the first When the number of holds on the main game side decreases, the shift display of the relevant variation icon on the first main game side (subject to Hold 1 on the first main game side) is executed (first main game side The shift display of the hold icon on the game side (hold icons of hold 2 to 4 on the first main game side are targeted) is not executed). Note that the shift display may also be referred to as a move display or a variable rights transfer display. In addition, the shift display may be configured to have only the shift display of the pending icon and not have the shift display of the variable icon, or the display mode of the shift display of the pending icon (for example, moving at a low speed , move without enlarging) and the display mode of the shift display of the variable icon (for example, move at high speed, move while enlarging, etc.) may be different. In addition, as a modification, when the second main game is in a non-reduced time gaming state and the number of reservations on the second main game side is 1 or more, the condition for starting the fluctuation display of the second main game symbols is satisfied and the second main game side Even if the number of reservations is reduced, the shift display of the variation icon on the second main game side (subject to the reservation 1 on the second main game side) is not executed, and the second main game is in the time shortening game state. When the number of reservations on the game side is 0 and the number of reservations on the first main game side is 1 or more, and the condition for starting the variable display of the first main game symbols is satisfied and the number of reservations on the first main game side decreases. However, the shift display of the change icon on the first main game side (subject to hold 1 on the first main game side) may be configured not to be executed.

<Holding tone>
The holding sound is output from the speaker D24 along with execution of the holding occurrence display when the number of holdings increases based on the gaming ball entering the first main game start opening A10 or the second main game starting opening B10. It's a sound effect. When the number of reservations has reached the upper limit, the number of reservations does not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game starter A10 or the second main game starter B10, so the reservation sound is not output, but the reservation is made. A sound different from the sound may be output. In the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the number of reservations on the second main game side has not reached the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the holding sound (normal holding sound and special holding sound) sound) is configured not to be output, but the same sound as the normal hold sound and special hold sound on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced game state may be output. When the number of reservations on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit in the time shortening game state, even if the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the holding sound (normal holding sound and special holding sound ) is configured not to be output, but the same sound as the normal hold sound and the special hold sound on the second main game side in the time-reduced game state may be output. The normal holding sound for the first main game side in the non-time-reduced game state and the normal hold sound for the second main game side in the time-reduced game state may be different holding sounds. The special holding sound on the first main game side and the special holding sound on the second main game side in the time shortened game state may be different holding sounds, but a specific special holding sound among a plurality of special holding sounds It may be common to the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state and the second main game side in the time shortening game state.

<Normal hold tone>
The normal hold sound means that, in the non-time-reduced game state, when the number of holds increases due to the game ball entering the first main game start port A10, the hold occurrence of a circle, triangle, or inverted triangle white icon. This is the sound that is output when the display is executed. The normal holding tone is, for example, the scale of "Do" in Doremifasolashi, but other scales and sounds may be used. A game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in a non-time-reduced game state, when there is no hold on the first main game side, and when the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are stopping fluctuation. Triggered by the event, the normal holding tone is output together with the display of the corresponding change icon (holding occurrence display) of the white icon. In the non-time-reduced game state, the reserve on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4), and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fluctuating, the game ball is the second Triggered by the entry of a ball into the main game start opening A10, a white pending icon (holding occurrence display) is displayed and a normal holding sound is output. When the number of reservations on the first main game side reaches the upper limit, the number of reservations does not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, so the normal reservation sound is not output, but the normal reservation is performed. A sound different from the sound may be output. As a modification, it may be configured such that when the first normal hold image is displayed, the normal hold sound is not output, and when the second normal hold image is displayed, the normal hold sound is output. As another modification, when the first normal hold image is displayed, normal hold sound A (for example, "do") is output, and when the second normal hold image is displayed, normal hold sound B (for example, , “dodo”) may be output. Similarly, when a white icon that is a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode is displayed, for example, "do" is output, and a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode (or a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode) is output. For example, "dodo" may be output even when a white icon having a larger size than a white icon is displayed. In the time-reduced game state, when a square white icon is newly displayed, the normal hold sound is output in the same manner as in the non-time-reduced game state. It should be noted that the normal on-hold tone is output when the on-hold occurrence display is triggered, but the normal on-hold tone is not output when the shift display is triggered. The normal holding tone may be referred to as the first fluctuating right tone. Also, special holding tones, which will be described later, may be referred to as second fluctuating right tones (second fluctuating right tones A to C).

<First hold tone>
The first holding sound is a blue icon when the number of holdings increases based on the game ball entering the first main game start port A10 in the non-time shortening game state and when the prefetch lottery is won. Or, it is a sound that is output along with the execution of the pending occurrence display of the green icon. The first holding tone is a sound different from the normal holding tone, for example, the scale of "re" in do-re-mi-fa-so-rashi, but other scales and sounds (such as do-re), and a volume that is louder than the volume of the normal holding tone. or low volume. A game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in a non-time shortened game state and when there is no hold on the first main game side and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are in fluctuation stop. Triggered by this, the first holding tone is output together with the display of the change icon (holding occurrence display) of the blue icon or the green icon. In the non-time-reduced game state, the reserve on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4), and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fluctuating, the game ball is the second Triggered by the entry of the ball into the 1 main game start opening A10, a blue or green hold icon (hold occurrence display) is displayed and a first hold sound is output. When the number of reservations on the first main game side reaches the upper limit in the non-time shortening game state, the number of reservations does not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, so the first A hold tone is not output, but a sound different from the first hold tone may be output. Also, if you win the prefetch lottery and the displayed white icon changes to a blue icon or a green icon, the timing of the pending change (for example, when the shift icon is displayed when the shift icon is displayed, when the change icon is displayed when the shift icon is displayed, before the trigger The first holding tone is output even at a predetermined timing during fluctuation, a predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, etc.). The sound output in the case of the blue icon may be the first holding sound A, and the sound output in the case of the green icon may be the first holding sound B, which is different from the first holding sound A. FIG. In the time-reduced game state, when the blue icon or the green icon is displayed on hold occurrence display or shift-displayed, the first hold sound is output in the same manner as in the non-time-reduced game state. Also, the sound output in the case of the white icon may be the first hold sound. The first holding tone may be referred to as the second fluctuating right tone A. The first holding tone A may be called a second fluctuating right tone A1, and the first holding tone B may be called a second fluctuating right tone A2.

<Second hold tone>
The second hold sound is a red icon when the number of holds increases based on the game ball entering the first main game start port A10 in the non-time shortened game state and when the prefetch lottery is won. This is the sound that is output along with the execution of the on-hold occurrence display. The second hold tone is a sound different from the normal hold tone and the first hold tone. The volume may be higher or lower than the volume of the first hold tone. A game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in a non-time-reduced game state, when there is no hold on the first main game side, and when the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are stopping fluctuation. Triggered by the event, the second holding tone is output together with the display of the corresponding change icon (holding occurrence display) of the red icon. In the non-time-reduced game state, the reserve on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4), and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fluctuating, the game ball is the second Triggered by the entry of a ball into the first main game start opening A10, a second hold sound is output together with the display of a red hold icon (hold occurrence display). When the number of reservations on the first main game side reaches the upper limit in the non-time shortening game state, the number of reservations does not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, so the second A hold tone is not output, but a sound different from the second hold tone may be output. Also, if you win the pre-reading lottery and the displayed white icon, blue icon, or green icon changes to a red icon, the timing of the pending change (for example, when the shift icon is displayed when the change icon is displayed , predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, etc.), the second holding tone is output. In the time shortened game state, when the red icon is displayed on hold or shift-displayed, the second hold tone is output in the same manner as in the non-time shortened game state. The second holding tone may be referred to as a second fluctuating right tone B.

<Third hold tone>
The third hold sound is a rainbow icon when the number of holds increases based on the game ball entering the first main game start port A10 in the non-time shortening game state and when the prefetch lottery is won. This is the sound that is output when the on-hold occurrence indication is executed. The third hold sound is a sound different from the normal hold sound, the first hold sound, and the second hold sound, for example, the scale of "Fa" in Doremifa Sorashi, but other scales and sounds (for example, Doremifa) , the volume may be larger or smaller than the volume of the normal holding tone, the first holding tone, or the second holding tone. A game ball enters the first main game start port A10 in a non-time-reduced game state, when there is no hold on the first main game side, and when the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are stopping fluctuation. Triggered by the event, the change icon (hold occurrence display) of the rainbow icon is displayed and the third hold tone is output. Non-time reduction game state, non-time reduction game state, holding on the first main game side has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4), and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is fluctuating In the case of , when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the rainbow icon holding icon (holding occurrence display) is displayed and the third holding sound is output. When the number of reservations on the first main game side reaches the upper limit, the number of reservations does not increase even if the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, so the third reservation sound is not output, but the second 3 A sound different from the holding tone may be output. In addition, if the pre-reading lottery is won and the displayed white icon, blue icon, green icon, or red icon changes to a rainbow icon, the third hold tone is output at the timing of the hold change. there is In the time-reduced game state, when the rainbow icon is displayed on hold or shift-displayed, the third hold sound is output in the same manner as in the non-time-reduced game state. The third holding tone may be referred to as the second fluctuating right tone C.

<Special hold tone>
The first holding tone, the second holding tone, and the third holding tone are special holding tones that are different from the normal holding tone.

<Stage>
The stage is also referred to as a production stage, mode, production mode, etc., and is a production mode indicated by a background image. The stage in this example has four types of stage A, stage B, stage C, and stage D. FIG. Stage A, stage B, and stage C are stages in a non-reduced time game state. In addition to this, a stage in a non-reduced time game state may be provided. Stage D is a stage in a reduced time game state. In addition to this, a stage in a time-reduced game state may be provided. In this example, as a special stage, a battle stage in which a battle production (one type of super reach production) is performed while stage A is displayed, and a super reach production other than the battle production A reach performance, a super reach performance of a story that becomes a big hit when a puzzle is completed, a full rotation performance described above, etc.), a big hit game stage during a big win game, etc. are provided. Stage A corresponds to production stage A (production stage A or stage A in the sixth embodiment), and stage B corresponds to production stage B (production stage B or stage B in the sixth embodiment). Stage D corresponds to production stage C described above (production stage C or stage C in the sixth embodiment).

<Notice (notice display, production)>
The notice (notice display, effect) is mainly to suggest the degree of expectation of the change, but it can be used to suggest that there is a hit within the hold (eg: pre-reading notice, pre-reading effect, etc.) There is also

<Trigger pending>
A trigger hold is a hold determined to execute a prefetch lottery for an already existing hold or a newly generated hold, win the lottery, and execute a prefetch effect (for example, a hold change effect). . Trigger suspension includes trigger suspension indicating a hit (big win, small win) as a result of a lottery and trigger suspension indicating a loss.

<Holding change effect>
The hold change effect is a hold change look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a trigger hold within the hold by the display mode of the change icon or the hold icon. The pending change effect is a effect that can suggest whether or not there is a hit trigger pending within the icon in the icon display area. The pending change effect may be simply referred to as a change effect, or may be referred to as a variable right display change effect or a variable right change effect.

<Board lamp (board light source)>
The board lamp is a lamp that lights up (lights up) together with the output of a holding tone when the number of holdings increases based on the gaming ball entering the first main game start opening A10. The board lamp is composed of one LED, and is provided inside the first main game start port A10 (not shown). As for the board lamp, since the first main game start port A10 is made of a substantially transparent member, the player can confirm the light emission and the light emission color of the board lamp. The board lamp may be provided at any position on the game board. The board lamp may be illuminated when the number of pending games increases based on the gaming ball entering the second main game start port B10. The board lamp is not limited to one LED, and may be composed of a plurality of LEDs. For example, it may be configured with five LEDs, one LED corresponding to the variable icon, and the other LEDs corresponding to the pending icon of the first pending display. Board lamps are not limited to LEDs. The board lamp is controlled by the sub control board S, but may be controlled by the main control board M. The board lamp (board light source) may be referred to as a first light emitting section.

Here, lighting means that the LED is emitting light (e.g., emitting light for 10 ms or longer). "Extinguishing" means that the LED does not emit light (for example, it does not emit light for 10 ms or more), and "blinking" means that the LED repeats light emission and non-light emission (turning off) at predetermined time intervals (for example, 20 ms intervals). pointing to In blinking, the duration of light emission and non-light emission may be different (for example, light emission may be 20 ms and light off may be 40 ms). "Lighting" may include "lighting" in "blinking" ("lighting" in repetition of "lighting" and "lighting out" may also be included). As an example, if it is stated that the board lamp and the frame lamp will light up in the same color, red, during a certain period, the board lamp will continue to light up in a certain period, and the frame lamp will continue to light up in a certain period. , it may be applied to the lighting color, and the board lamp blinks in a certain period (for example, 20 ms lighting → 20 ms lighting → 20 ms lighting ...), and the frame lamp flashes in a certain period (for example, 20 ms lighting → 20 ms It may be applied to the lighting color (20 ms lighting color) in the case of turning off → lighting for 20 ms. Note that lighting and blinking may be collectively referred to as light emission.

<Frame lamp (frame light source)>
The frame lamp is the game effect lamp D26. The game effect lamp D26 is configured to perform lighting (light emission) corresponding to the effect displayed by the effect display device SG, lighting (light emission) corresponding to the type of error, lighting (light emission) when the power is restored, and the like. there is The frame lamp is controlled by the sub control board S, but may be controlled by the main control board M. The frame lamp (frame light source) may be referred to as a second light emitting section.

<Special light emission>
The special light emission is the lighting mode (light emission mode) of the board lamp when the suspension change effect is executed. The special luminescence corresponding to the blue icon displayed in pending occurrence display, shift display, etc. (including predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, etc.) is called first special luminescence A, and the board lamp is blue. emits light. The special luminescence corresponding to the green icon displayed in pending occurrence display, shift display, etc. (including predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, etc.) is called first special luminescence B, and the board lamp is green. emits light. The first special light emission A and the first special light emission B are collectively referred to as the first special light emission. The special luminescence corresponding to the red icon displayed in pending occurrence display, shift display, etc. (including predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, etc.) is called the second special luminescence, and the board lamp is red. luminous. The special luminescence corresponding to the rainbow icon displayed in pending occurrence display, shift display, etc. (including predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, etc.) is called the 3rd special luminescence. luminous. The first special light emission A, the first special light emission B, the second special light emission, and the third special light emission are collectively referred to as special light emission. In addition, when the pending change is not executed, it is normal light emission in which the board lamp emits white light. In addition, when the first normal hold image is displayed, the normal light emission may be in the lighting mode, and when the second normal hold image is displayed, the normal light emission may be in the flashing mode, and the second normal hold image may be displayed. The image may be displayed from the first normal pending image not only at the time of pending occurrence (during pending occurrence display), but also at shift display, predetermined timing during pre-trigger fluctuation, predetermined timing during trigger fluctuation, and the like. Similarly, when a white icon with a white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode is displayed, it is normal light emission but in a lighting mode, and a white triangle/inverted triangle flashing mode (or white triangle/inverted triangle lighting mode) is displayed. Even when a white icon is displayed in a mode that is larger in size than the white icon that is the lighting mode, the light emission may be normal but may be in a flashing mode. / A white icon that is larger in size than a white icon, which is a lighting mode of an inverted triangle), not only at the time of suspension occurrence (during suspension occurrence display), but also at the time of shift display, predetermined timing during fluctuation before trigger, during trigger fluctuation may be displayed from a white icon, which is a white triangular/inverted triangular lighting mode, at a predetermined timing.

<Specific performance>
A specific effect is an effect that can be executed by the effect display device SG when a new hold occurs and the number of holds exceeds a predetermined number. Specifically, it is a button vibration effect in which the sub-input button SB vibrates when the number of pending is three or more. When a new hold occurs and the number of holds exceeds a predetermined number, the specific effect and the hold sound based on the new hold occurrence can be executed substantially simultaneously. Moreover, when the number of holdings becomes 3 or more, an effect of outputting a notification sound for holding 3 or more from the speaker D24 may be a specific effect. In this case, the 3 or higher notification sound output when the number of holds is 3 and the 3 or higher notification sound output when the number of holds is 4 are composed of the same sound, but they may be different. good. When a new hold occurs and the number of holds is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a hold 3 or higher notification sound is output instead of a hold sound (for example, a normal hold sound) that can be executed substantially simultaneously with a button vibration effect as a specific effect. It may be configured to The 3rd or higher notification sound is different from the normal on-hold sound, the first on-hold sound, the second on-hold sound, and the third on-hold sound. In the time shortening game state, the number of reservations on the second main game side is likely to be 3 or more, so it is preferable not to execute the specific effect even if the number of reservations on the second main game side reaches a predetermined number or more. is. In the time reduction game state, since the game is mainly played with the second main game symbols, it is preferable not to execute the specific effect even if the number of reserved symbols on the first main game side reaches a predetermined number or more. Also, in the non-time-reduced game state, since the game is mainly played with the first main game symbols, it is preferable not to execute the specific effect even if the number of reservations on the second main game side reaches a predetermined number or more. .

<First selection operation>
The first selection operation is a function that enables the setting of the game machine to be changed to the first setting or the second setting by operating the sub-input button SB, cross button SB-2, or the like. In addition, the first selection operation can be set to either the first setting or the second setting even in the variable waiting state or during the fluctuation, but it is configured so that it cannot be set during the jackpot game. there is However, even during fluctuation standby, settings can be made in stages A, B, and C, but not in stage D, and even during fluctuations, settings can be made in stages A, B, and C. is configured to be unsettable in Stage D. Furthermore, even in stages A, B, and C, a situation where a specific effect is not executed (for example, a situation where Super Reach is not executed, a situation where a decision action is not executed) and a specific effect is executed. A situation in which a predetermined effect is being performed (for example, a situation in which normal reach is being performed, a situation in which a fixed-position action that is not in the mode of the anticipation of chance effect is being performed, and a mode of effect of the anticipation of chance effect. It can be set if a fixed position action is being executed, a situation where a change start action is being executed, a situation where a tenpai action is being executed), but a situation where a specific effect is being executed (e.g. , a situation in which super reach is being performed, a situation in which a decision action is being performed), the setting is disabled.

<First setting>
The first setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the specific effect is 0%. When the first setting is set by the first selection operation, the specific effect is not executed even when the number of reservations is 3 or more. Note that the first setting is not limited to 0% in the execution probability of the specific effect, and may be a setting as long as the execution probability is lower than the second setting. In other words, the first setting is a setting in which the frequency of execution of the specific effect is lower than the second setting.

<Second setting>
The second setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the specific effect is 100%. When the second setting is set by the first selection operation, the specific effect is always executed when the number of reservations is 3 or more. In the second setting, the execution probability of the specific effect is not limited to 100%, and any setting is acceptable as long as the execution probability is higher than the first setting. In other words, the second setting is a setting in which the frequency of execution of the specific effect is higher than that in the first setting.

<Second selection operation>
The second selection operation is a function capable of changing the settings of the game machine to the third and fourth settings by operating the sub-input button SB, cross button SB-2, and the like. The range of the execution probability of the effects (hold change effect, special hold sound) executed with the third setting and the fourth setting based on the second selection operation is executed with the first setting and the second setting based on the first selection operation It is configured to be within the range of the execution probability of the effects (button vibration effect, hold 3 or higher notification sound). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine with a good performance balance. In addition, the second selection operation can be set to either the third setting or the fourth setting even in the variable standby state or during the fluctuation, but it is configured so that it cannot be set during the jackpot game. there is However, even during fluctuation standby, settings can be made in stages A, B, and C, but not in stage D, and even during fluctuations, settings can be made in stages A, B, and C. is configured to be unsettable in Stage D. Furthermore, even in stages A, B, and C, a situation where a specific effect is not executed (for example, a situation where Super Reach is not executed, a situation where a decision action is not executed) and a specific effect is executed. A situation in which a predetermined effect is being performed (for example, a situation in which normal reach is being performed, a situation in which a fixed-position action that is not in the mode of the anticipation of chance effect is being performed, and a mode of effect of the anticipation of chance effect. It can be set if a fixed position action is being executed, a situation where a change start action is being executed, a situation where a tenpai action is being executed), but a situation where a specific effect is being executed (e.g. , a situation in which super reach is being performed, a situation in which a decision action is being performed), the setting is disabled.

<Third setting>
The third setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the hold change effect and the special hold tone is 5%. When the third setting is set by the second selection operation, the probability of winning the prefetch lottery is set to 5%. Specifically, since the winning probability of the holding change effect is set to 5%, the execution probability of the special holding tone is 5%. Note that the execution probability of the look-ahead effect other than the special holding tone may also be set to 5%. In the third setting, the execution probability of the special holding tone is not limited to 5%, and any setting that is higher than the fourth setting is acceptable. In other words, the third setting is a setting in which the frequency of execution of the hold change effect and the frequency of output of the special hold tone are higher than those in the fourth setting. Regarding this execution probability (5%), for example, assuming a winning probability of 1/200, the execution probability (approximately 4.7%) at the time of losing suspension and the execution probability (approximately 60%) at the time of winning suspension It is total.

<4th setting>
The fourth setting is a setting in which the execution probability of the hold change effect and the special hold tone is 1%. When the fourth setting is set by the second selection operation, the probability of winning the prefetch lottery is set to 1%. Specifically, since the winning probability of the holding change effect is set to 1%, the execution probability of the special holding tone is 1%. Note that the execution probability of the look-ahead effect other than the special holding tone may also be set to 1%. In the fourth setting, the execution probability of the special holding tone is not limited to 1%. In other words, the fourth setting is a setting in which the frequency of execution of the hold change effect and the frequency of output of the special hold sound are lower than those in the third setting. Regarding this execution probability (1%), for example, assuming a winning probability of 1/200, the execution probability (approximately 0.55%) at the time of losing suspension and the execution probability (approximately 90%) at the time of winning suspension It is the total. When changing the execution probability (frequency) of the special holding tone based on the second selection operation, the probability (frequency) of outputting the special holding tone (first holding tone) after outputting the normal holding tone is higher than the fourth setting. Although setting 3 is higher, the probability (frequency) of outputting another special holding tone (second holding tone) after outputting this special holding tone (first holding tone) is higher than that of the third setting. The setting is higher. Further, when changing the execution probability (frequency) of the special holding tone based on the second selection operation, the probability (frequency) of changing from a white icon to a blue icon is higher with the third setting than with the fourth setting, The probability (frequency) of changing from a blue icon to a red icon is higher with the fourth setting than with the third setting. In other words, in the fourth setting, it is difficult to output the first-stage special holding tone (difficult to change to the first-stage special holding image) after outputting the normal holding tone (normal holding image), but the first-stage special holding tone When a holding sound (special holding image) is generated, the special holding sound of the second stage or higher is easily output (easy to change to the special holding image of the second stage or higher). By constructing in this way, it is possible to create a game property in which even a performance with a low degree of expectation for winning can be expected to change the degree of expectation for winning more if it occurs, so that the amusement of the game is improved. be able to.

The pending change effect in stage A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 is an image diagram of a pending change effect that can be executed in stage A. FIG.

(a) In stage A in the non-reduced time game state, there are three holds on the first main game side, and there are no holds on the second main game side. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. There are three holdings on the first main game side, three holding icons of white icons are displayed in the first holding display area SG12, and holdings on the first main game side in the second holding display area SG13. In the number area (left area), 3 is displayed as a number image indicating three holds. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a number image indicating that there is no hold in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side of the second hold display area SG13. 0 is displayed as In addition, although the variation icon of the white icon is displayed in the suspension display area for effecting the variation, it may be erased at the timing of stopping the determination of the losing pattern, or before the timing of stopping the determination of the losing pattern. (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(b) Accompanying the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the hold is canceled and the first fluctuation of the first main game symbols starts. Further, in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner. In (b), since the hold on the first main game side is exhausted, the hold on the first main game side becomes two, and the number of the first main game symbols in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side. The design has changed.

(c1) In the situation where the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the first main game symbol There are three pending on the game side, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. At the timing when the white icon based on the on-hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the on-hold occurrence display), the sub-control board S outputs the holding tone (normal holding tone) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. is controlled, and the board lamp is controlled to emit white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. The frame lamp does not have to emit light based on pending occurrences. The white icon display timing, the holding tone output timing, the board lamp emission timing, and the frame lamp emission timing may be the same (substantially the same) timing, or may be different timings. In particular, the frame lamp may start emitting white light before the timing when the white icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (for example, white light emission during game standby state/fluctuation standby state). It is acceptable to continue emitting light in white even after the start of fluctuation), and the board lamp also starts emitting light in white before the timing when the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG. (For example, white light may be emitted during the game standby state/variation standby state, and white light emission may be continued even after the start of variation). In addition, the frame lamp is in a state where there is no hold on the first main game side and no hold on the second main game side and the first main game pattern or the second main game pattern is fluctuating, or the first main game pattern In a state where there is no hold on the game side and no hold on the second main game side and the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are in a state of fluctuation and stop (including a fluctuation standby state), light emission is controlled in white. is preferred, but other colors may also be emitted.

(d1) The symbol variation of the 1st main game symbol of the 1st variation stops, and as the condition for starting the variation of the next 1st main game symbol is satisfied, the hold is canceled and the 1st main game symbol is satisfied. The pattern variation of the second variation starts. The number of reservations on the first main game side is 2, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design corresponding to the first main game design are variably displayed. It is displayed by a pending change effect from a white icon to a blue icon. The sub control board S controls the output of the first hold sound (special hold sound) "re" corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the white icon to the blue icon, and also turns on the board lamp. Special light emission control is performed with blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white. The frame lamp emits white light from before the timing when the blue icon is displayed on the effect display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in another color (for example, blue). It suffices that the other color is emitted at the timing of the hold change to .

(c2) In the situation where the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the first main game symbol There are three pending on the game side, and a blue icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. The sub control board S outputs the first hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display). In addition to controlling the output of "Re", the board lamp is specially controlled to emit blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. At the timing when the blue icon based on the on-hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the on-hold occurrence display), the first on-hold tone (special on-hold tone) corresponding to the blue icon output from the speaker D24, "Re", is displayed. , at the timing of the hold change from the first hold-displayed white icon to the blue icon described in (d1), the first hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the blue icon output from the speaker D24 " "Re" is the same holding tone. To provide a user-friendly pachinko game machine by structuring in this way, since even when a player misses the performance of the performance display device SG, the execution of the holding change performance can be known by the holding sound. can be done. Further, the sub-control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, at the timing when the blue icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display). It is preferable that the frame lamp emits white light from before the timing when the blue icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG.

(d2) The symbol variation of the 1st main game symbol of the 1st variation stops, and as the condition for starting the variation of the next 1st main game symbol is satisfied, the hold is canceled and the 1st main game symbol is fulfilled. The pattern variation of the second variation starts. The number of reservations on the first main game side is 2, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design corresponding to the first main game design are variably displayed. It is displayed by a pending change effect from a blue icon to a green icon. The sub control board S controls the output of the first hold sound (special hold sound) "re" corresponding to the green icon from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the blue icon to the green icon, and also turns on the board lamp. Special light emission control is performed with green, which is the color corresponding to the green icon. In this way, by making the holding tone (first holding tone) corresponding to the blue icon and the holding tone (first holding tone) corresponding to the green icon common (identical), it is possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM. In addition, by making the special light emission corresponding to the blue icon and the special light emission corresponding to the green icon non-common (non-identical), the pachinko can attract the player's line of sight to the game machine (especially the game board). Amusement machines can be provided. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white. The frame lamp emits white light from before the timing when the green icon is displayed on the effect display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in another color (for example, green). It suffices that the other color is emitted at the timing of the hold change to .

(c3) In the situation where the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the first main game symbol There are three pending on the game side, and a blue icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. The sub control board S outputs the first hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display). In addition to controlling the output of "Re", the board lamp is specially controlled to emit blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, at the timing when the blue icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display). It is preferable that the frame lamp emits white light from before the timing when the blue icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG.

(d3) The symbol variation of the 1st main game symbol of the 1st variation stops, and as the condition for starting the variation of the next 1st main game symbol is satisfied, the hold is canceled and the 1st main game symbol The pattern variation of the second variation starts. The number of reservations on the first main game side is 2, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design corresponding to the first main game design are variably displayed. It is displayed by a pending change effect from a blue icon to a red icon. The sub control board S controls the output of the second hold sound (special hold sound) "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the blue icon to the red icon, and also turns on the board lamp. Special light emission control is performed with red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. In this way, by making the holding tone with high probability of success corresponding to the red icon different from the holding tone with low probability of success (first holding tone) corresponding to the blue icon or green icon, It is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation for winning, and even when the player misses the performance of the performance display device SG, execution of the pending change performance is performed by means of a dedicated pending sound, thereby enhancing the degree of expectation for winning. A user-friendly pachinko game machine can be provided because it is possible to know that a high performance has been executed. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white. The frame lamp emits white light from before the timing when the red icon is displayed on the effect display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in another color (for example, red). It suffices that the other color is emitted at the timing of the hold change to .

Next, the hold change effect in stage B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is an image diagram of a pending change effect that can be executed in stage B. FIG. The difference from the pending change effect of stage A in FIG. 216 is that the display mode of the white icon of the first pending display of stage A and the display mode of the white icon of the first pending display of stage B are different. Specifically, the outline of the white icon of stage A is circular, while the outline of the white icon of stage B is triangular, so that the white icon is displayed differently between stages. Also, the outline of the white icon of stage C is an inverted triangle (not shown). Although the display mode of the white icon differs between stages, the normal hold sound corresponding to the white icon, the first hold sound corresponding to the blue icon and the green icon, the second hold sound corresponding to the red icon, The third holding tone corresponding to the rainbow icon is configured such that the holding tone common to Stage A, Stage B, and Stage C is output. Therefore, even in a non-time-reduced game state having a plurality of stages, the pachinko game in which the player can execute the game with peace of mind because the notification (advance notice) of the degree of winning expectation to the player can be shared. machine can be provided.

In addition, since special reserved images such as blue icon, green icon, red icon, and rainbow icon are configured to have a display mode common to stages A, B, and C, the frequency of display is low. By using the special holding image with high winning expectation as a common image for the stage, even in a non-time-reduced game state having a plurality of stages, it is possible to share the notification (announcement) of the winning expectation to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that allows a player to play a game with peace of mind.

It should be noted that the display mode of the blue icon and the green icon with a low probability of winning may also be different among stages A, B, and C. FIG. Specifically, the outline of the blue icon for stage A is a circle, the outline of the blue icon for stage B is a triangle, the outline of the blue icon for stage C is an inverted triangle, and the outline of the green icon for stage A is a circle. On the other hand, the outline of the green icon of stage B is assumed to be a triangle, and the outline of the green icon of stage C is assumed to be an inverted triangle.

Next, specific effects and game machine settings (game machine customization) in the non-time-reduction gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is an image diagram relating to specific effects and game machine settings that can be executed in the non-time reduction gaming state. In the following, an example of specific effects and game machine settings in stage A in the non-time-reduced gaming state will be shown, but stage B and stage C may also be used.

(a) In stage A in the non-reduced time game state, there are three holds on the first main game side, and there are no holds on the second main game side. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. Although the gaming machine setting screen is displayed based on the confirmation stop with the missing symbol, the gaming machine setting screen may be displayed based on the operation of the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, or the like. Further, the gaming machine setting screen may be displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the game is fixed and stopped with the missing symbols. In addition, in any of the game standby state/variation standby state, during variation, and in the fixed stop state, the game machine setting screen is configured to switch from the non-display state to the display state based on the operation of the cross button SB-2, or The game machine setting screen is configured to switch from the non-display state to the display state based on the operation of the cross button SB-2 in any of the game standby state/variation standby state and during variation. It is more preferable to configure so that the game machine setting screen is not switched from the non-display state to the display state even if there is an operation of SB-2. In addition, although the details will be described later, there is a situation where the game machine setting screen is not displayed even if the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. are operated (during execution of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect described later). exist. The situation will be described later, but in addition to the situation described later, the situation in which the first selection operation or the second selection operation described above is impossible (a situation in which a specific effect is being performed, for example, Super Reach is performed the game machine setting screen is not displayed. As a modification, the game machine setting screen may be always displayed if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is possible, or if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible It may be configured so that it is not displayed if necessary. As a modification 1 of the display of the game machine setting screen and the display of the customization screens A to C, which will be described later, the volume adjustment screen is displayed by pressing the left and right buttons instead of the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 (operating either the left or right button to change from non-display to display) and volume adjustment (When the volume adjustment screen is displayed, pressing the left button once reduces the volume by one level, and pressing the right button once reduces the volume by one level. display of the gaming machine setting screen with the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 (changing from the non-display state to the display state by operating one of the up and down buttons) and the display of the customization screen A. (Change from non-display state to display state by operating one of the up and down buttons while the gaming machine setting screen is displayed), select customization screen B or customization screen C (operate either up or down button while customization screen A is displayed) , and then switch between the first and second settings by operating the up and down buttons on the customization screen B/switch between the third and fourth settings by operating the up and down buttons on the customization screen C). (If the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible, the gaming machine setting screen will not be displayed even if the up and down buttons are operated). In addition, as modification 2 of the display of the game machine setting screen and the display of customization screens A to C described later, if the game machine setting screen in the above-described modification 1 is in a state where the first selection operation or the second selection operation is possible, However, if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible, it may be configured not to be displayed. In addition, the game setting screen and customization screens A to C can be displayed simultaneously with the volume adjustment screen, and adjustment and setting can be performed simultaneously while maintaining both displays (limited to situations where both screens can be displayed). It should be noted that the display of the volume adjustment screen and the volume adjustment can be performed even during the execution of the high-expectation effect, the first predetermined effect, and the second predetermined effect, which will be described later. In addition, a situation where a specific effect is not executed (for example, a situation where Super Reach is not executed, a situation where a decision action is not executed) and a specific effect is not executed but a predetermined effect is executed. Situation (for example, a situation in which normal reach is being executed, a situation in which a fixed-position action that is not the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production is executed, a situation in which a fixed-position action that is the production form of the chance-read-ahead production is executed, fluctuation Even in situations where a starting action is being executed, a situation where a tenpai action is being executed), a situation where a specific production is being executed (for example, a situation where a super reach is being executed, a decision action is being executed) The display of the volume adjustment screen and the volume adjustment can be executed even in a situation where the volume is In addition, a situation where the first selection operation or the second selection operation is possible (situation in which normal reach is being performed, situation in which a fixed position action that is not in the stage of chance look-ahead effect is being performed, and in the stage of chance look-ahead effect a situation in which a fixed position action is being executed, a situation in which a change start action is being executed, a situation in which a tenpai action is being executed), and a situation in which the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible (to be described later) During the execution of the first predetermined performance, during the execution of the second predetermined performance, and in a situation where a specific performance such as super reach or decision action is being executed), the button performance can be executed, and the first selection operation or the second selection operation is performed. If selection operation is possible, execution of button effect (display of button image), execution of volume adjustment (display of volume adjustment screen), and execution of first selection operation or second selection operation (game setting screen and customization Display of screens A to C) can be executed at the same time, but if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible, execution of button effect (display of button image) and execution of volume adjustment ( display of the volume adjustment screen) can be executed at the same time, but the execution of the first selection operation or the second selection operation (display of the game setting screen and the customization screens A to C) may not be executed at the same time. . When executing button effects (button image display) and volume adjustment (volume adjustment screen display) at the same time, even if the sub input button is operated and the image after operation in the button effect is displayed, the volume is adjusted. The display of the screen is maintained, the display of the game setting screen and the customization screens A to C is also maintained, and the display of the button effects, the game setting screen and the customization screens A to C is also maintained even if the operation for adjusting the volume is performed, It is preferable to configure so that the button effect and the display of the volume adjustment screen are also maintained as the first selection operation or the second selection operation. The volume adjustment screen disappears after 3 seconds from the start of display if there is no operation for new volume adjustment. The 3 seconds of the display time of the adjustment screen is reset, but the 3 seconds of the display time of the volume adjustment screen is not reset even if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is performed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed ( Therefore, if the first selection operation or the second selection operation is performed while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment screen can be hidden while the game setting screen and customization screens A to C are being displayed. Also good. In addition, the game setting screen and customization screens A to C disappear after 3 seconds from the start of display if there is no new first selection operation or second selection operation, while the game setting screen and customization screens A to C are displayed. Triggered by the execution of the first selection operation or the second selection operation during this period, the display time of the game setting screen and the customization screens A to C is reset to 3 seconds, but the game setting screen and the customization screens A to C are reset. , the display time of the game setting screen and customization screens A to C is not reset to 3 seconds even if an operation is performed to adjust the volume while the is displayed. The game setting screen and customization screens A to C may be hidden while the volume adjustment screen is displayed when an operation for volume adjustment is performed. Note that the button image or post-operation image in the button effect can be superimposed on the volume adjustment screen, game setting screen, and customization screens A to C, while the volume adjustment screen, game setting screen, and customization screens A to C are superimposed on each other. preferably not. Furthermore, the button image, the volume adjustment screen, the game setting screen, and the customization screens A to C in the button effect can be displayed superimposed with the first decorative pattern, but not superimposed with the second decorative pattern, and after the operation in the button effect It is preferable that the image can be superimposed on the first decorative design and the second decorative design. Also, if the button effect is a repeated hit effect, it is assumed that there have been multiple operations (repeat operation) by long pressing the sub input button, but for volume adjustment, long pressing of the left and right buttons (long pressing of the left button or a long press of the right button) is not regarded as multiple operations and the volume is adjusted only by one step. A configuration may be adopted in which even a long press of a button is not regarded as a plurality of operations, and screens and settings are switched only once.

(b) The customization screen A is displayed while the finalization of the lost symbols is stopped. The customization screen A is displayed based on a predetermined operation of the sub-input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. in the state where the gaming machine setting screen is displayed. The customization screen A is a screen on which the customization screen B or the customization screen C can be selected based on a predetermined operation A such as the sub-input button SB and the cross button SB-2. The customization screen B is a screen in which the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on a predetermined operation B such as the sub-input button SB and the cross button SB-2. It is a screen (see c) that allows selection of the first setting or the second setting in which the execution probability of the specific effect is 100%. The customization screen C is a screen in which the third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on a predetermined operation C such as the sub-input button SB and the cross button SB-2. Specifically, the execution probability of the special hold tone is 5%. or the fourth setting in which the execution probability of the special holding tone is 1% (see f). In this customization screen A, the customization screen B (first and second setting screens) is selected based on the operation of the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, and the like.

(c) If the customization screen B is selected while the finalization of the missing symbols is stopped, the customization screen B is displayed. In this customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub-input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. In (c), the first setting is selected. do. In the first selection operation during variation, when the first setting or the second setting is selected (with the selected variation), it switches to the selected setting. The same applies to the first selection operation during the game standby state/variation standby state (switches to the selected setting at the time of selection).

(d) Accompanying the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the hold is canceled and the first fluctuation of the first main game symbols starts. In (d), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, there are two holds on the first main game side, and the first main game in a situation where there is no hold on the second main game side. It is a pattern change of the game pattern.

(e) Under the condition that the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, by performing the predetermined operation B1 such as the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. , the customization screen B is displayed. In this customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub-input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. In (e), the second setting is selected. do.

(f) Under the condition that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, by performing the predetermined operation C1 of the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. , the customization screen C is displayed. In this customization screen C, it is possible to select the third setting or the fourth setting based on the second selection operation, which is the operation of the sub-input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. In (f), the fourth setting is selected. do. In the second selection operation during variation, when the third setting or the fourth setting is selected (with the selected variation), it switches to the selected setting. The same applies to the second selection operation during the game standby state/variation standby state (switches to the selected setting at the time of selection). As a modified example, in the second selection operation during the change, the selected setting may not be switched to when the third setting or the fourth setting is selected, but may be switched to the selected setting at the next change after the selected change. Well, even if it is configured in such a manner, the second selection operation in the game standby state/variation standby state switches at the time of selection (switches to the selected setting at the time of selection).

(g) Under the situation where the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the first main game symbol There are three pending on the game side, and a white icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation, in (g), the sub control board S displays the white icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display). Timing), along with executing the button vibrator effect, output from the speaker D24 a "do dodo", which is a notification sound for holding 3 or more. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the board lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, and controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, based on the pending occurrence. The frame lamp starts emitting light in white before the timing when the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG, but the light emission may be controlled in a color according to the game situation. For example, if the timing of (g) is the reach state, blue light emission may be controlled, and in the case of an error, red light emission may be controlled.

(h) A production in which a high-expectation character is displayed as a high-expectation production under a situation in which the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner. is executed, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes four, and a red icon is displayed as the newly caused hold image. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation, at (h), the sub control board S displays the red icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display). Timing), along with executing the button vibrator effect, output from the speaker D24 a "do dodo", which is a notification sound for holding 3 or more. It should be noted that a sound different from "Dododo" may be output as the information sound for the level 3 or higher, which is the level 3 or higher indicator sound corresponding to the red icon "Mimimi". Further, the sub control board S outputs a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display). It is controlled not to output a certain "mi" (limit the output). In this way, by executing the specific effect desired and selected by the player with priority over other effects, the player's interest in the game can be improved. The sub-control board S performs control so that the 3rd or higher notification sound is given priority over the special holding sound and output from the speaker D24. You can control it like this. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the board lamp in red corresponding to the red icon, and controls light emission of the frame lamp in white corresponding to the white icon, based on the pending occurrence. The frame lamp starts emitting white light before the timing when the red icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in a color according to the game situation. For example, if the lamp effect corresponding to the high expectation effect in (h) is a blue lamp effect, light emission is controlled in blue, and if the lamp effect corresponding to the high expectation effect is a red lamp effect or an error Light emission may be controlled in red. In addition, the high-expectation effect is not limited to the one in which the exemplified high-expectation character is displayed, and may be an advance notice effect such as a zone effect or a pseudo-continuous effect, but it is a effect that is executed before the reach. is preferred. As a modification, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs in a situation where a high-expectation effect is being executed, a special hold image such as a red icon is not displayed as the newly-occurred hold image. Or, in a situation where a high-expectation effect is not being executed (for example, a situation in which a low-expectation character is displayed or a situation in which no advance notice effect such as a character is displayed), the first main game side is newly held. The probability that a special pending image such as a red icon will be displayed as the newly occurring pending image may be lower (for example, the probability may be 0). However, in the situation where the high-expectation production is being executed, the situation where the high-expectation production is not being executed (for example, the situation where the low-expectation character is displayed or the advance notice production such as the character is not displayed at all It may be configured such that the probability that the variable icon is displayed in the special hold image is higher than in the situation).

Further, as shown in (h), even during the high-expectation performance, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation. If the first setting is set based on the first selection operation before the new hold occurrence, the button vibration effect and the hold 3 or higher notification sound based on the new hold occurrence in (h) are not executed, and the speaker D24 , outputs "mi", which is the second hold tone (special hold tone) corresponding to the red icon. On the other hand, if the second setting is set based on the second selection operation before the new hold occurrence, as described above, in (h), the button vibration effect is executed and the hold 3 or higher notification sound is output.

Although not shown, the third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on the second selection operation even during the high-expectation effect. If it is set to the first setting based on the first selection operation and set to the third setting based on the second selection operation before the new pending occurrence, and there is no trigger hold in the hold, In the look-ahead lottery based on the new hold occurrence in (h), a look-ahead lottery with a winning probability of 5% is performed, and if the look-ahead lottery is won, a hold change effect is executed and a special hold sound is output for the trigger hold. . In addition, when the second setting is set, a hold change effect is executed for the trigger hold, and a hold 3 or higher notification sound is output without outputting a special hold sound (output is limited). .

On the other hand, if the first setting is set based on the first selection operation, and the fourth setting is set based on the second selection operation before the occurrence of a new hold, and there is no trigger hold in the hold performs a pre-reading lottery with a winning probability of 1% in the pre-reading lottery based on the new hold occurrence in (h), and if you win the pre-reading lottery, execute a hold change effect and a special hold sound for the trigger hold. Output. When the second setting is set, a hold change effect for the trigger hold is executed, and a hold 3 or higher notification sound is output without outputting a special hold sound (output is limited). In addition, as described above, in the second selection operation during variation, it is configured not to switch to the selected setting at the time when the third setting or the fourth setting is selected, but to switch to the selected setting at the next variation after the selected variation. In the case of such a configuration, even if the setting is switched from the third setting to the fourth setting during the fluctuation, during the fluctuation the winning probability is 5% instead of the prospective lottery with the winning probability of 1%. It is preferable to configure to perform a prefetch lottery of probability (it is preferable to configure to perform a prefetch lottery with a winning probability of 1% for the hold newly generated from the next change).

In addition, regardless of the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the effect display device SG, if the third setting or the fourth setting is selected based on the second selection operation in a state where there is already a trigger hold in the hold, pre-reading It is configured to limit the lottery without executing it, and to release the restriction of the prefetch lottery on condition that the trigger hold existing in the hold is consumed. Therefore, if there is no trigger hold in the hold and the third setting or the fourth setting is selected based on the second selection operation, a new setting is made for the existing hold and the newly occurring hold. It is configured so that the prefetching lottery can be executed with the execution probability set. For example, even if the prefetch lottery is executed in the state set to setting 4 in (f), and as a result, even if all the pending lotteries do not win the prefetch lottery, it is set to setting 3 in (g) In this case, the prefetching lottery can be executed with the execution probability of the setting 3 for the hold for which the prefetching lottery was executed in (f) and the newly generated hold.

Next, the execution of the specific effect during execution of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect will be described using FIG. FIG. 219 is an image diagram regarding a specific effect during execution of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. In the following description, a battle effect, which is one type of super ready-to-win effect, is exemplified as the first predetermined effect, and a revival effect is exemplified as the second predetermined effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, an example of the specific effect during execution of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the stage A in the non-time-reduced game state will be shown below, but the stage B and the stage C may be used.

(a) In stage A in the non-reduced time game state, there are two holds on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side, and the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. There are two holds on the first main game side, two holding icons of white icons are displayed in the first holding display area SG12, and holding on the first main game side in the second holding display area SG13. In the number area (left area), 2 is displayed as a number image indicating two holds. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a number image indicating that there is no hold in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side of the second hold display area SG13. 0 is displayed as In addition, although the variation icon of the white icon is displayed in the suspension display area for effecting the variation, it may be erased at the timing of stopping the determination of the losing pattern, or before the timing of stopping the determination of the losing pattern. (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(b) Accompanying the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the hold is canceled and the first fluctuation of the first main game symbols starts. Further, in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner. In (b), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, there is one hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. It is a pattern change of the game pattern.

(c) In a situation where the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, a high-expectation character after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation. is being displayed, a customization screen B is displayed by a predetermined operation B2 such as the sub-input button SB or the cross button SB-2. In this customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub-input button SB, cross button SB-2, etc. In (c), the second setting is selected. do. It should be noted that during the high-expectation production, the third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on the second selection operation on the customization screen C, and the fourth setting is set in (c).

(d1) After the execution of the high-expectation degree effect of the first variation is completed, reach is established and the first predetermined effect is executed. As the first predetermined effect, a battle effect in a game state (for example, a battle stage) other than the stage A after the high-expectation effect is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sub-control board S selects the second setting when a new hold on the first main game side occurs and the number of holds on the first main game side becomes 3 as shown in (d1) during the battle production. Although it is in the state, the sub-control board S controls the execution of the button vibration effect and not to output the notification sound. In other words, the sub-control board S controls to limit the execution of the specific effect regardless of the game machine setting and the number of reservations during the battle effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the confusion of the player due to the specific effect set in stage A (or stage B or C) being executed in another game state (battle stage, etc.). In addition, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate performance corresponding to the state of the game so that the main performance is not disturbed by the specific performance.

In addition, the sub-control board S also prevents the execution of the hold change effect and the output of the special hold sound during the battle effect (limits the execution). In other words, the sub-control board S performs control so as not to execute the prefetch lottery on the first main game side during the battle performance even if the newly generated hold can be a trigger hold. In addition, during the battle production of (d1), a pending image is displayed to explain the number of pending, but since the battle production is mainly performed as a production, the pending image (the change icon and the pending icon) It is preferable not to display the reserved display area for effecting the change and the first reserved display area SG12. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the confusion of the player due to the performance related to the suspension being executed in the game state (battle stage, etc.) in which the suspension image is not displayed. To clearly provide a performance to a player. Further, as a modified example, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the first predetermined effect is being executed, a special hold image such as a red icon is not displayed as the newly caused hold image. Or, in a situation where the first predetermined effect is not being executed (for example, a situation where the reach is not established and a low-expectation character is displayed, or a situation where no advance notice effect such as a character is displayed). The probability of displaying a special pending image such as a red icon as the newly generated pending image may be lower (for example, the probability may be 0) than when the pending of the main game side occurs. During the battle effect of (d1), it is preferable to maintain the display of the second reservation display area SG13. Further, during the battle effect of (d1), the pending icon and the first pending display area SG12 may be hidden, and the variable icon and the variable effect pending display area may be displayed. In this case, the change icon and the reserved display area for the change effect may be hidden during a part of the battle effect (for example, during the time when the ally character wins the effect). Well, the change icon displayed in the situation where the first predetermined effect is being executed is the situation in which the first predetermined effect is not being executed (for example, before the reach is established and the low expectation character is displayed) , characters, etc. are not displayed at all), the probability of changing to a high-expectation special pending image may be higher than that of the variable icon displayed. In addition, the first predetermined effect may be the effect during the jackpot game when the pattern variation of the first variation results in a jackpot, and the reserved image is not displayed in the game state (jackpot game stage) during the jackpot game. It is in play state.

Further, neither the customization screen B nor the customization screen C can be displayed during the first predetermined effect. That is, on the customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting cannot be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. The third setting or the fourth setting cannot be selected based on the second selection operation, which is the operation of the input button SB, cross button SB-2, or the like.

(d2) After the execution of the high expectation level performance of the first variation is completed, the second predetermined performance is executed. As the second predetermined effect, a resurrection effect after execution of the high-expectation effect is exemplified, but it is not limited to this. During the resurrection production, the combination of decorative patterns that indicate a loss is temporarily stopped during the super reach production, and after re-fluctuation in stage A, which transitions after the super reach production is completed, the decorative pattern that indicates the hit is changed. It is a production that stops temporarily and then stops definitively. The second predetermined effect is an effect executed at a timing different from that of the first predetermined effect, but may be an effect executed at the same timing. Also, the second predetermined effect may be executed after the first predetermined effect is executed. During the second predetermined effect, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs as shown in (d2) and the number of holds on the first main game side becomes two, the newly occurring hold image is red. icon is displayed. The sub control board S outputs a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display). In addition to controlling the output of "Mi", the board lamp is controlled to emit red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. By constructing in this way, even if the player misses the performance of the performance display device SG, the execution of the pending change performance can be known by the pending sound, so that a user-friendly pachinko game machine can be provided. can. Further, as a modified example, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the second predetermined effect is being executed, a special hold image such as a red icon is not displayed as the newly caused hold image. Or, in a situation where the second predetermined effect is not being executed (for example, a situation where a low-expectation character is displayed before the reach is established or a situation where no advance notice effect such as a character is displayed) The probability of displaying a special pending image such as a red icon as the newly generated pending image may be lower (for example, the probability may be 0) than when the pending of the main game side occurs. In addition, during the resurrection effect of (d2), a pending image is displayed to explain the number of suspensions, but since the resurrection effect is mainly performed, the suspended image (the variable icon and the suspended icon) It is preferable not to display the reserved display area for effecting the change and the first reserved display area SG12. Also, during the resurrection effect of (d2), it is preferable to maintain the display of the second reservation display area SG13.

Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the board lamp in red corresponding to the red icon, and controls light emission of the frame lamp in white corresponding to the white icon, based on the pending occurrence. The frame lamp starts emitting white light before the timing when the red icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in a color according to the game situation. For example, if the lamp effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect of (d2) is a blue lamp effect, blue light is emitted, and if the lamp effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect is a red lamp effect or an error, red light is emitted. You may make it control by light emission.

Also, during the second predetermined effect, both the customization screen B and the customization screen C are configured to be displayed. That is, on the customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. The third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on the second selection operation, which is the operation of the input button SB, cross button SB-2, or the like.

(d3) After the execution of the high expectation level performance of the first variation is completed, the second predetermined performance is executed. As the second predetermined effect, the resurrection effect is exemplified as in (d2), but it is not limited to this. The second predetermined effect is an effect executed at a timing different from that of the first predetermined effect, but may be an effect executed at the same timing. Also, the second predetermined effect may be executed after the first predetermined effect is executed. During the second predetermined effect, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs as shown in (d3) and the number of holds on the first main game side becomes three, the newly occurring hold image is white. icon is displayed. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation in (c), the sub-control board S displays a white icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG in (d3). At the timing (timing of pending occurrence display), a specific effect (execution of button vibration effect, output of 3 or higher notification sound “Dododo”) is executed. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the board lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, and controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, based on the pending occurrence. The frame lamp starts emitting light in white before the timing when the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG, but it may be controlled to emit light in a color according to the game situation. For example, if the lamp effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect in (d3) is a blue lamp effect, light emission is controlled in blue, and if the lamp effect corresponding to the second predetermined effect is a red lamp effect or an error, red may be used to control light emission. In this way, by executing the specific effect desired and selected by the player with priority over other effects, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, as a modified example, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the second predetermined effect is being executed, a special hold image such as a red icon is not displayed as the newly caused hold image. Or, in a situation where the second predetermined effect is not being executed (for example, a situation where a low-expectation character is displayed before the reach is established or a situation where no advance notice effect such as a character is displayed) The probability of displaying a special pending image such as a red icon as the newly generated pending image may be lower (for example, the probability may be 0) than when the pending of the main game side occurs. In addition, during the resurrection effect of (d3), a pending image is displayed to explain the number of suspensions. It is preferable not to display the reserved display area for effecting the change and the first reserved display area SG12. Also, during the resurrection effect of (d3), it is preferable to maintain the display of the second reservation display area SG13.

Also, during the second predetermined effect of (d3), both the customization screen B and the customization screen C are configured to be displayed. That is, on the customization screen B, the first setting or the second setting can be selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. The third setting or the fourth setting can be selected based on the second selection operation, which is the operation of the input button SB, cross button SB-2, or the like.

The second predetermined effect may be the effect of the pattern variation of the second variation when the pattern variation of the first variation is lost, and in that case, (d2) and (d3) are high in the second variation. It can also be used as an expectation performance. In that case, control such as (h) in FIG. 218 or (c) in FIG. 219 is possible.

As shown in (d1) of FIG. 219, it is configured such that neither the first selection operation nor the second selection operation can be executed during the first predetermined effect. On the other hand, as shown in (d2) and (d3) of FIG. 219, both the first selection operation and the second selection operation are executable during the second predetermined effect. By configuring in this way, the player is confused by the performance related to suspension (special suspension sound and 3 or higher notification sound) being executed in the state of the game in which the suspension image is not displayed (state during the first predetermined performance). can be suppressed, and an effect related to suspension (special hold sound or 3 or higher notification sound) is executed in the state of the game in which the hold image is displayed (state during the second predetermined effect) The period of sound frequency adjustment can be optimized.

Next, a supplementary explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 219 regarding the specific effect during execution of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

(a) to (c) In the stage A in the non-reduced time game state, the sub control board S controls to output the BGM for the stage A from the speaker D24.

(d1) The sub-control board S controls to output the BGM for the battle stage from the speaker D24 during the battle production. The sub-control board S restricts the execution of the specific performance regardless of the game machine settings and the number of reservations during the battle performance and during the output of the BGM for the battle stage. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent player confusion due to the specific effect set in stage A (or stage B or C) being executed in another game state (battle stage, etc.). In addition, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate performance corresponding to the state of the game so that the main performance is not disturbed by the specific performance.

Further, the sub-control board S also limits the execution of the hold change effect and the output of the special hold sound during the output of the BGM for the battle stage during the battle effect. In other words, even if the newly occurring hold can be a trigger hold, the sub-control board S performs the prefetch lottery on the first main game side during the battle stage BGM output during the battle production. Control to restrict (do not execute). In addition, during the battle production of (d1) and during the output of the BGM for the battle stage, the pending image (the change icon and the hold icon), the hold display area for the change effect, and the first hold display area SG12 are displayed. preferably not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the confusion of the player due to the performance related to the suspension being executed in the game state (battle stage, etc.) in which the suspension image is not displayed. To clearly provide a performance to a player. It should be noted that the first predetermined effect may be an effect during the big hit game when the pattern variation of the first variation becomes a big hit, and in that case, the state of the game during the big win game (big win game stage) is a reserved image. is not displayed, and BGM for a big win game is output. Further, as a modified example, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs while the BGM for the battle stage is being output, a special hold image such as a red icon is used as the newly occurring hold image. is not displayed, or the first predetermined effect is not executed (for example, a situation where a low-expectation character is displayed before the reach is established, or a situation where no advance notice effect such as a character is displayed) The probability of displaying a special pending image such as a red icon as the newly occurring pending image is lower than when the first main game side pending occurs (for example, the probability may be 0). good. In the situation where the BGM for the battle stage of (d1) is being output, it is preferable to maintain the display of the second reserved display area SG13. In addition, in the situation where the BGM for the battle stage of (d1) is being output, the reserved icon and the first reserved display area SG12 are hidden, and the change icon and the reserved display area for effect of the change are displayed. In such a configuration, during a part of the situation in which the BGM for the battle stage is being output (for example, during the period during which the ally character wins an effect) The variation icon and the reserved display area for the effect of the variation may be configured to be hidden, and the variation icon displayed in the situation where the BGM for the battle stage is being output is the BGM for the battle stage. is not being output (for example, a situation in which a low-expectation character is displayed before reach is established, or a situation in which BGM for stage A is output without any advance notice effect such as a character being displayed. ) may be configured to have a higher probability of changing to a high-expectation special hold image than the change icon displayed in .

(d2) While the resurrection effect is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is output, as shown in (d2), a new hold on the first main game side occurs and the first main game is played. When there are two pending on the side, a red icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. At the timing when the red icon based on the suspension occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the suspension occurrence display), the sub control board S displays the red icon along with the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) from the speaker D24. The corresponding second holding tone (special holding tone) "mi" is output-controlled. Further, the sub-control board S controls the light emission of the board lamp in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. By constructing in this way, even if the player misses the performance of the performance display device SG, the execution of the pending change performance can be known by the pending sound, so that a user-friendly pachinko game machine can be provided. In addition, by outputting a special hold sound corresponding to the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect), it is possible to create a performance that does not feel out of place with the stage being displayed. Further, as a modified example, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs in a situation where the resurrection effect is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is being output, A situation where a special pending image such as a red icon is not displayed as a newly generated pending image, or a situation where the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the reviving effect) is not being output during the resurrection effect (for example, In situations where low-expectation characters are displayed before reach is established, or in situations where BGM for stage A is output without any advance notice effects such as characters being displayed, the first main game side is newly held. The probability that a special pending image such as a red icon will be displayed as the newly occurring pending image may be lower (for example, the probability may be 0). In addition, in the situation (d2) in which the resurrection effect is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is being output, a pending image is displayed to explain the number of pending events. However, it is preferable not to display the pending image (the variable icon and the pending icon), the variable effect pending display area, and the first pending display area SG12 because the effect is mainly the resurrection effect. Also, in the situation where (d2) the resurrection effect is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is being output, it is preferable to maintain the display of the second reserved display area SG13. is.

(d3) While the resurrection effect is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is being output, as shown in (d3), a new hold on the first main game side occurs and the first main game is played. When there are three pending on the side, a white icon is displayed as the newly generated pending image. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation in (c), the sub-control board S displays a white icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG in (d3). At the timing (the timing of the pending occurrence display), the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is output (continue output), and the specific effect (execution of button vibration effect, holding 3 or higher notification sound “Dododo” output). In this way, by executing the specific effect desired and selected by the player with priority over other effects, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, as a modified example, when a new hold on the first main game side occurs in a situation where the resurrection effect is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is being output, A situation where a special pending image such as a red icon is not displayed as a newly generated pending image, or a situation where the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the reviving effect) is not being output during the resurrection effect (for example, In situations where low-expectation characters are displayed before reach is established, or in situations where BGM for stage A is output without any advance notice effects such as characters being displayed, the first main game side is newly held. The probability that a special pending image such as a red icon will be displayed as the newly occurring pending image may be lower (for example, the probability may be 0). In addition, in the situation (d3) in which the resurrection effect is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is being output, a pending image is displayed to explain the number of pending events. However, it is preferable not to display the pending image (the variable icon and the pending icon), the variable effect pending display area, and the first pending display area SG12 because the effect is mainly the resurrection effect. Also, in the situation where (d3) the resurrection effect is in progress and the BGM for stage A (or the BGM dedicated to the resurrection effect) is being output, it is preferable to maintain the display of the second reserved display area SG13. is.

The second predetermined effect may be the effect of the pattern variation of the second variation when the pattern variation of the first variation is lost, in which case (d2) and (d3) are the BGM for the stage A. is preferably the second variation of stage A where is output.

Next, the holding change effect in the non-time-reduced game state and the time-reduced game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is an image diagram regarding a hold change effect that can be executed in the non-time shortening game state and the time shortening game state.

(a) In the stage A in the non-time-reduced game state, the left column and middle corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the first main game-side hold nor the second main game-side hold exists. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the column and the right column are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. Since there is no hold on the first main game side, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the area (left area) displays 0 as a numeric image indicating that there is no hold. Similarly, since the hold on the second main game side does not exist, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the area indicating the number of holds on the second main game side in the second hold display area SG13. (Right area) displays a 0 as a numeric image indicating that there is no hold.

(b) A new hold on the side of the second main game occurs, and the second main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied. starts. In the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols of the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the non-time-reduced game state start to be displayed in a variable manner. In (b), the sub-control board S displays the variation icon, which is a round white icon, in the suspension display area for effecting the variation, triggered by the occurrence of suspension on the second main game side. The round white icon, which is the variation icon corresponding to the second main game symbols in the non-time-reduced gaming state, is displayed differently from the square white icon, which is the variation icon corresponding to the second main game symbols in the time-reduced gaming state. The same applies to the pending icon. In addition, the sub control board S displays the white icon based on the occurrence of the hold on the second main game side on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display), the hold corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. While controlling the output of the sound (usually holding tone) "do", the board lamp is normally illuminated in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. At this timing, the frame lamp emits light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not have to emit light based on pending occurrence. As described above, in the non-time-reduced game state, even if an icon different from the icon in the time-reduced game state is displayed as the icon for the second main game, the special hold sound and the special light emission are not executed. are doing. Specifically, in the non-time-reduced game state, even if a circle-shaped icon different from the square-shaped icon is displayed as the icon for the second main game, the special holding tone and the special It is configured not to emit light. In addition, in the non-reduced time game state, even if a hold that can be a trigger hold occurs as a hold on the second main game side, the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed. Here, a hold that can be a trigger hold is a hold in the case where the prefetch lottery was actually conducted and the result was not won, or a hold in which the prefetch lottery was not conducted but there is a possibility of winning if the prefetch lottery is conducted. . For example, in the latter case, if a hold on the second main game side occurs as a new hold in the non-time-reduced gaming state, no prefetching lottery is performed, but a hold on the second main game side as a new hold in the time-reduced game state. It is a hold that may be won by executing a prefetch lottery when is generated.

In the non-time-reduced game state, if the icon on the first main game side is a white icon, it is more than non-reach (non-reach, normal reach, super reach production by low-expectation giraffe, super-reach production by high-expectation battle production At least one of the hit production such as reach production, full rotation production, etc.) is executed, and in the case of blue icon, it is more than normal reach (normal reach, super reach production by giraffe with low expectation, super reach production by battle production with high expectation , At least one of the jackpot confirmation effects such as full rotation effects) is executed, and in the case of a green icon, the low-expectation super reach (super reach by low-expectation giraffe) or more (super reach by low-expectation giraffe Production, super reach production by high-expectation battle production, at least one of jackpot confirmation production such as full rotation production) is executed, and in the case of a red icon, high-expectation super reach (super reach by high-expectation battle production) Reach production) and above (at least one of a super reach production by a high-expectation battle production, a big hit confirmation production such as a full rotation production) is executed, and in the case of a rainbow icon, a big hit confirmation production such as a full rotation production is executed. The game machine may be set as follows. In other words, the type of icon that can be displayed may be associated with the effect to be executed. In the gaming machine set in this way, even if the symbol variation of the second main game symbols in the non-time-reduced game state is a symbol variation equal to or greater than the normal reach, the icon on the second main game side in the non-time-reduced game state (Holding icon or the change icon) does not display a blue icon, and even if the pattern fluctuation is higher than the low-expectation super reach, the second main game side icon (holding icon or The variation icon) does not display a green icon, and even if the pattern variation is higher than the highly anticipated super reach, the second main game side icon (holding icon or the variation icon) in the non-reduced time gaming state , does not display a red icon, even if it is a pattern variation that becomes a big hit confirmation effect such as a full rotation effect, the icon (holding icon or the variation icon) on the second main game side in the non-time reduction game state is a rainbow It is preferable not to display the icon. Therefore, the icons on the second main game side in the non-time-reduction game state are configured so that the special hold tone and special light emission are not executed.

(c) In a situation where the number of reserved symbols on the first main game side is 0, and the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are being variably displayed, the first main game is newly added. A hold on the side occurs, the hold on the first main game side becomes one, and a white icon is displayed as the newly caused hold image. At the timing when the white icon based on the on-hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the on-hold occurrence display), the sub-control board S outputs the holding tone (normal holding tone) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. is controlled, and the board lamp normally emits light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not have to emit light based on pending occurrence.

(d) The pattern variation of the second main game symbol of the first variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state has stopped, and the hold is canceled as the next first main game symbol variation start condition is satisfied. , the symbol variation of the first main game symbol of the second variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state starts. Under the condition that the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed, a red icon is displayed as the pending image of the newly generated first main game side. The sub control board S outputs a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display). In addition to controlling the output of "Mi", the board lamp is controlled to emit red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not have to emit light based on pending occurrence. In addition, the second main game symbols are changing in the non-time shortening game state, or the second main game symbol is on hold (for example, immediately after the high base state ends and the transition to the low base state, the second main game In a situation where there are multiple reserves on the game side and the pattern variation of the second main game symbols related to the reserve has started, etc.), when a new reserve on the first main game side occurs, the new first Do not display the hold image related to the hold on the main game side as a special hold image (for example, the hold occurrence display / shift display of the hold icon related to the hold on the new first main game side, the new first main game side Even if the hold occurrence display/shift display of the variable icon related to the hold is executed, the hold icon/the variable icon on the first main game side is not displayed as the special hold image), and furthermore, the new Even if the hold on the first main game side occurs, the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed (for example, the hold occurrence display / shift display of the hold icon related to the hold on the new first main game side, the new second 1. Even if the hold occurrence display/shift display of the variable icon related to the hold on the main game side is executed, the special hold sound and special light emission related to the hold icon/variable icon on the first main game side are not executed) You can

(e) In stage D in the time-reduced game state, the left row and middle row correspond to the pattern fluctuations of the second main game symbols in a situation where there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side. , the first and second decorative symbols in the right column are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. The first decoration symbols of the second main game symbols in the time shortening game state are symbols to which characters are not added unlike the first decoration symbols of the first main game symbols in the non-time shortening game state. Since there is no hold on the first main game side, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the area (left area) displays 0 as a numeric image indicating that there is no hold. Similarly, since the hold on the second main game side does not exist, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the area indicating the number of holds on the second main game side in the second hold display area SG13. (Right area) displays a 0 as a numeric image indicating that there is no hold. In addition, in the time-reduced game state, an image of a right-handed instruction display, which is a display to the effect that a right-handed player should be played, is displayed.

(f) A new hold on the side of the first main game occurs, and with the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the first main game symbol fluctuation occurs as the first fluctuation in the time-reduced game state. Start. In the performance display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols of the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortening game state start to be displayed in a variable manner. In (f), the sub-control board S displays the variation icon, which is a square white icon, in the suspension display area for effecting the variation, triggered by the occurrence of suspension on the first main game side. The square white icon, which is the variation icon corresponding to the first main game symbol in the time-reduced gaming state, is displayed differently from the round white icon, which is the variation icon corresponding to the first main game symbol in the non-time-reduced gaming state. The same applies to the pending icon. In addition, the sub control board S responds to the white icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the square white icon based on the occurrence of the hold on the first main game side is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display). In addition to controlling the output of "do", which is the hold sound (normal hold sound), the board lamp is normally illuminated in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. At this timing, the frame lamp emits light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not have to emit light based on pending occurrence. Thus, in the time shortening game state, even if an icon different from the icon in the non-time shortening game state is displayed as the first main game side icon, the special hold sound and the special light emission are not executed. are doing. Specifically, in the time-reduced game state, even if an icon with a square display mode different from the icon with a circle display mode is displayed as the first main game side icon, the special hold sound and the special light emission are displayed. is configured not to run It should be noted that, in the time shortening game state, even if a hold that can be a trigger hold occurs as a hold on the first main game side, the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed. Here, a hold that can be a trigger hold is a hold in the case where the prospective lottery was actually conducted and the result was not won, or a hold in which the prospective lottery was not conducted but there is a possibility of winning if the prefetch lottery is conducted. . For example, in the latter case, if a hold on the first main game side occurs as a new hold in the time-reduced game state, no prefetch lottery is performed, but in the non-time-reduced game state, a new hold on the first main game side is held. It is a hold that may be won by executing a prefetch lottery when is generated. The normal hold sound in the time-reduced game state may be different from the normal hold sound in the non-time-reduced game state.

In addition, in the time-reduced game state, if the icon on the second main game side is a white icon, it is more than non-reach (non-reach, normal reach, super reach by low-expectation Kirin, super-reach by high-expectation battle production At least one of the big hit confirmation effects such as production and full rotation production) is executed, and in the case of a blue icon, it is more than normal reach (normal reach, super reach production by giraffe with low expectation, super reach production by battle production with high expectation, At least one of the big hit confirmation effects such as full rotation effects) is executed, and in the case of a green icon, the low expectation super reach (super reach effect by low expectation giraffe) or more (super reach effect by low expectation giraffe , At least one of a high-expectation battle production, a jackpot confirmation production such as a full rotation production) is executed, and in the case of a red icon, a high-expectation super reach (super reach by a high-expectation battle production) Production) and above (at least one of the super reach production by the high-expectation battle production, the big hit confirmation production such as the full rotation production) is executed, and in the case of the rainbow icon, the big hit confirmation production such as the full rotation production is executed. You may set the gaming machine to In other words, the type of icon that can be displayed may be associated with the effect to be executed. In the gaming machine set in this way, even if the symbol variation of the first main game symbols in the time shortened game state is a symbol variation equal to or higher than the normal reach, the first main game icon (holding) in the time shortened game state The icon and the variation icon) do not display the blue icon, and even if the pattern variation is higher than the low-expectation super reach, the icon on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (the hold icon or the variation icon ) does not display a green icon, and even if the pattern variation is higher than the high-expectation super reach, the icon on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state (holding icon or the variation icon) is a red icon is not displayed, and even if it is a pattern change that becomes a big hit confirmation effect such as a full rotation effect, the icon on the first main game side in the time shortening game state (holding icon or the change icon) is not displayed as a rainbow icon. is preferred. Therefore, the icon on the first main game side in the time shortening game state is configured so that the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed.

(g) In a situation where the number of reserved symbols on the first main game side is 0, and the first decorative symbols and second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are being variably displayed, the second main game is newly added. A hold on the side occurs, the number of holds on the second main game side becomes one, and a white icon is displayed as the newly caused hold image. At the timing when the white icon based on the on-hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the on-hold occurrence display), the sub-control board S outputs the holding tone (normal holding tone) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. is controlled, and the board lamp normally emits light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not have to emit light based on pending occurrence. In the time-reduced game state, when an icon (square white icon) different from the icon in the non-time-reduced game state is displayed as the icon for the first main game, and then a new icon for the second main game is displayed. When such a hold occurs, the display mode of the square white icon on the first main game side is maintained. On the other hand, in the non-time-reduced game state shown in (d), when the changed icon (red icon) on the first main game side is displayed, and then a new hold on the second main game side occurs. When it occurs, the changed icon (red icon) on the first main game side is configured to change to another icon (for example, a white circle icon). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's confusion by returning the changed icon to the proper mode in the non-time-reduction game state.

(h) As the symbol variation of the first main game symbol of the first variation in the time shortening game state stops, and the condition for starting the variation of the next second main game symbol is satisfied, the hold is canceled, The symbol variation of the second main game symbol of the second variation in the time shortening game state is started. Under the condition that the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the second main game symbols are variably displayed, a red icon is displayed as the newly generated suspended image. Although the red icon in the time-reduced gaming state has a rectangular outer shape, it may have the same outer shape (display mode) as the red icon in the non-time-reduced game state. The sub control board S outputs a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display). "Mi" output is controlled, and the board lamp is controlled to emit red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, but the frame lamp does not have to emit light based on pending occurrence. In addition, during the pattern fluctuation of the first main game symbol in the time shortening game state or in a situation where there is a hold on the first main game side (for example, immediately after moving from the low base state to the high base state via the jackpot game, the second In a situation where there are multiple holds on the 1 main game side and the pattern variation of the 1st main game pattern related to the hold has started, etc.), when a new hold on the 2nd main game side occurs, the new Do not display the hold image related to the hold on the second main game side as a special hold image (for example, the hold occurrence display / shift display of the hold icon related to the hold on the new second main game side, the new second main game Even if the hold occurrence display/shift display of the variable icon related to the hold on the side is executed, the hold icon/the change icon on the second main game side is not displayed as a special hold image), and furthermore, the Even if a new hold on the second main game side occurs, the special hold sound and special light emission are not executed (for example, the hold occurrence display/shift display of the hold icon related to the new hold on the second main game side, the new Even if the hold occurrence display/shift display of the variable icon related to the hold on the second main game side is executed, the special hold sound and special light emission related to the hold icon/variable icon on the second main game side are not executed) You can configure it like this. Also, on the contrary, during the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern in the time shortening game state, or in a situation where there is a hold on the first main game side (for example, from the low base state to the high base state via the jackpot game) Immediately after the transition, there are multiple holds on the first main game side, and the pattern change of the first main game pattern related to the hold has started), and a new hold on the second main game side occurs. Even if there is, the hold image related to the hold on the new second main game side is displayed as a special hold image (for example, the hold occurrence display / shift display of the hold icon related to the hold on the new second main game side, When the hold occurrence display/shift display of the variable icon related to the hold on the new second main game side is executed, the hold icon on the second main game side/the variable icon can be displayed as a special hold image. In addition, even if the new hold on the second main game side occurs, special hold sound and special light emission are executed (for example, the hold icon related to the new hold on the second main game side Occurrence display/shift display, suspension occurrence display/shift display of the relevant variable icon related to the suspension of the new second main game side When the occurrence display/shift display is executed, the suspension icon of the second main game side/special suspension related to the variation icon sound and special lighting can be performed).

As shown in FIG. 220(d), in the stage A (stages B, C) in the non-reduced time game state, the hold occurrence of the first main game side (the hold occurrence when displayed in the display mode of the special icon) or the icon It is possible to output a special hold sound at the time of change, but as shown in FIG. It is configured not to output a special holding tone as a trigger. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform appropriate hold tone output control according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 220(d), in the stage A (stages B, C) in the non-reduced time game state, the hold occurrence of the first main game side (the hold occurrence when displayed in the display mode of the special icon) or the icon It is possible to execute special light emission with the board lamp when the change is triggered, but as shown in FIG. ) is used as a trigger, the board lamp is configured not to perform special light emission. By configuring in this way, appropriate light emission control of the board lamp can be executed according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 220(h), in stage D in the time-reduced game state, a special hold sound can be output when a hold occurs on the second main game side or an icon change occurs, but as shown in FIG. 220(b) Furthermore, in stage A (stages B and C) in the non-reduced time game state, it is configured not to output a special hold sound triggered by a hold occurrence on the second main game side (a hold occurrence of a white circle icon). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform appropriate hold tone output control according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 220(h), in stage D in the time-reduced game state, special light emission can be executed with the board lamp when the second main game side pause occurs or the icon changes. As shown, in the stage A (stages B, C) in the non-time-reduced game state, when the second main game side's hold occurrence (the round white icon's hold occurrence) is used as a trigger, the board lamp does not emit special light. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform appropriate hold tone output control according to the game state.

Next, the output timing of the holding tone and the emission timing of the board lamp will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the holding sound and the emission timing of the board lamp in the non-time reduction game state.

(a) In the stage A in the non-time-reduced game state, the left column and middle corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation where neither the first main game-side hold nor the second main game-side hold exists. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the column and the right column are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. Since there is no hold on the first main game side, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the area (left area) displays 0 as a numeric image indicating that there is no hold. Similarly, since the hold on the second main game side does not exist, no icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and the area indicating the number of holds on the second main game side in the second hold display area SG13. (Right area) displays a 0 as a numeric image indicating that there is no hold. In this state, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S controls the speaker D24 to turn OFF so that the holding tone is not output. Further, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S controls the board lamp to be OFF so as not to emit light. Furthermore, as shown in the timing chart, when the power is turned on (more precisely, after the power is turned on, the sub control board S emits light in a specified mode as an initialization operation as an initialization operation. Since the frame lamp is controlled to emit white light (ON) from the variable standby state) or from the variable standby state, it is controlled to continue emitting white light.

(b) A new hold on the side of the first main game occurs, and with the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the first main game symbol changes as the first variation in the non-time-reduced game state. starts. In the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols of the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols in the non-time-reduced game state start to be displayed in a variable manner. As shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S outputs a hold sound (normal hold (sound) is output (ON) for the first holding tone output time, and then controlled to be OFF. Further, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S sets the board lamp to a color corresponding to the white icon at the timing when the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display). Normal light emission (ON) is controlled in white. Further, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S emits the frame lamp in white ( ON), control is performed so that white light emission is continued at the timing of pending occurrence display. In addition, when the power is turned on (more precisely, after the period in which the specified mode of light emission, which is the light emission for notifying the initialization as an initialization operation after the power is turned on, has ended) or from the variable standby state, the board lamp is also white. The light emission (ON) control may be performed with , and the control may be performed so that the white light emission is continued. That is, the board lamp may be controlled to emit white light (ON) from a timing before the timing when the white icon based on the suspended occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG, and may be controlled to continue emitting white light.

(c) At a predetermined timing C under the condition that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are variably displayed, the variation icon changes from the white icon to the blue icon. It is displayed by changing production. As shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S outputs the first hold sound (special hold sound) "re" corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the white icon to the blue icon. 2 Output (ON) for the holding tone output time and then control to OFF. In addition, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S controls special light emission by changing the board lamp to blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon, at the timing of the pending change from the white icon to the blue icon. . At this time, control may be performed such that normal white light emission (ON) is once turned OFF (for example, OFF for 0.5 seconds) and then blue special light emission (ON) is performed. Alternatively, control is performed so that normal white light emission (ON) is turned off, purple light emission is turned on for 0.5 seconds, and after the purple light emission (ON) is turned off, blue special light emission (ON) is performed. Also good. Furthermore, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S continues to control the frame lamp to emit white even at the timing of the hold change from the white icon to the blue icon. At the timing of the hold change, control is performed so that white light emission is continued without controlling blue special light emission.

(d) At a predetermined timing D under the condition that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are variably displayed, the variation icon changes from the blue icon to the red icon. It is displayed by changing production. As shown in the timing chart, the sub control board S outputs the second hold sound (special hold sound) "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold change from the blue icon to the red icon. 3 Output (ON) for the holding tone output time and then control to OFF. In addition, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S controls special light emission by changing the board lamp to red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, at the timing of the pending change from the blue icon to the red icon. . At this time, control may be performed such that the blue special light emission (ON) is temporarily turned OFF (for example, 0.5 seconds OFF), and then the red special light emission (ON) is performed. Alternatively, control is performed so that the blue special light emission (ON) is turned off, the purple light emission is turned on for 0.5 seconds, the purple light emission (ON) is turned off, and then the blue special light emission (ON) is performed. Also good. Furthermore, as shown in the timing chart, the sub-control board S continues to control the frame lamp to emit white even at the timing of the hold change from the blue icon to the red icon. At the timing of the hold change, the red special light emission is not controlled, and the white light emission is controlled to continue. The first holding tone output time, the second holding tone output time, and the third holding tone output time may be the same time (for example, 2 seconds), or may be different times (for example, the first holding tone output time is 1 second, the second holding tone output time is 2 seconds, and the third holding tone output time is 3 seconds). In addition, the first time is the time from when the white icon starts to be displayed as the variable icon until the blue icon starts to be displayed, and the first time is the time from when the blue icon starts to be displayed as the variable icon to when the red icon starts to be displayed. The second times, which are times, may be the same time, but are preferably different times. For example, the time from the start of displaying a white icon as a variable icon to the start of displaying a blue icon, and the time from the start of displaying a blue icon as a variable icon to the start of displaying a red icon are always 5. Seconds or more, the white icon as the variable icon is started to be displayed, the blue icon is started to be displayed, and further, the blue icon is started to be displayed as the variable icon, and then the red icon is started to be displayed. When the fluctuation time related to display (e.g., 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, excluding fluctuation times of less than 30 seconds) is relatively long (e.g., 90 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) Compared to the case where the fluctuation time is relatively short (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, etc.), the time from the start of displaying the white icon as the changing icon to the start of displaying the blue icon is The number of candidates for the time from when the blue icon starts to be displayed as the time and the variable icon until when the red icon starts to be displayed increases (for example, if the variable time is relatively long, the first time is 10 seconds. , 20 seconds and 30 seconds are candidates, and 25 seconds, 35 seconds and 45 seconds are candidates for the second time, and 10 seconds is a candidate for the first time if the fluctuation time is relatively long. and 15 seconds is a candidate for the second time), and furthermore, the blue icon is displayed as the time from when the white icon is started to be displayed as the variable icon to when the blue icon is started to be displayed. The difference between the time from the start to the start of displaying the red icon tends to increase (for example, if the fluctuation time is relatively long, the difference between the first time and the second time is the average 15 seconds, but if the fluctuation time is relatively long, the difference between the first time and the second time is 5 seconds on average). Although FIG. 221 describes the pending change of the variable icon, the pending change of the pending icon may be configured in the same manner as the pending change of the variable icon. However, since the hold icon changes only once in one variation display (changes only once at a predetermined timing of shift display or pre-trigger variation), for example, pre-trigger variation A (three variations before trigger variation) )→pre-trigger variation B (2 variations before trigger variation)→pre-trigger variation C (1 variation before trigger variation), hold at pre-trigger variation A executed in suspension 4→3. A white icon is already displayed in 3 (it is a white icon and normal white light emission is being performed before shift display), and shift display is triggered by shift display in pre-trigger variation B executed in suspension 3 → 2. The blue icon is displayed from the white icon and special blue light is emitted, and with the shift display triggered by the pre-trigger variation C executed in the hold 2 → 1, the blue icon to the red icon is displayed and the red special light is emitted in the hold 1 In this case, it is preferable that all of the pre-trigger fluctuations A to C are always 4 seconds or longer. However, in any of the pre-trigger fluctuations A to C, the blue icon may be displayed after the white icon is started to be displayed as the fluctuation icon, and the red icon may be displayed after the blue icon is started to be displayed as the fluctuation icon. It is desirable to configure it to be relatively shorter (eg, 5 seconds or 7 seconds) than the variation time associated with possible variable displays (eg, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds) .

In addition, it is configured so that the second holding tone (special holding tone) "mi" is not output for at least a predetermined period (T2) from the state in which the first holding tone (special holding tone) "re" is output. be done. On the other hand, the board lamp is configured to emit light in the red mode B within a predetermined period (T2) from the state in which the board lamp emits light in the blue mode. For details, as shown in FIG. 221, starting from the timing T1 before the timing when the output of the first holding tone (special holding tone) “re” is turned off, during the period T2, which is a predetermined period, the second 2 is configured not to output the holding tone (special holding tone) "mi". On the other hand, starting from the timing T1 before the timing when the board lamp emits light in the red mode from the state where the board lamp emits light in the blue mode, the board lamp is in the red mode B during the period T2, which is a predetermined period. It is configured to be capable of emitting light. The predetermined period T2 is preferably longer than T1 and shorter than the second hold tone output time.

As shown in FIG. 221(b), when an icon (for example, the variable icon) is displayed as a white icon, both the board lamp and the frame lamp are configured to emit white light. Also, as shown in (c) and (d) of FIG. 221, when the icon (for example, the variable icon) is displayed with blue, green, red, and rainbow icons, only the board lamp corresponds to the icon. Special light is emitted in blue, green, red, and rainbow modes, and the frame lamp is configured to emit white light. In addition, the frame lamp is configured to be able to emit light even during the pattern variation in the variable standby state or the non-suspended state of FIG. 221(b). Even if the board lamp and the frame lamp emit light in a manner in which the colors of the board lamps and the frame lamps do not correspond to each other in this way, the degree of expectation for winning can be increased by confirming the board lamp at a position where the player can more easily visually recognize the board lamp than the frame lamp. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can be confirmed.

As shown in (c) to (d) of FIG. 221, the special on-hold tone (first on-hold tone “re” and second on-hold tone “mi”) and special light emission (first special light emission blue While the light emission and the second special light emission (red light emission) are executed substantially at the same time, the special hold tone is configured to end earlier. Also, the special holding tone and special light emission are executed multiple times corresponding to one piece of holding information. The hold tone "mi") is not executed, but the second special light emission (red light emission, which is the second special light emission) is executed while the previous special light emission (blue light emission, which is the first special light emission) is being executed. It is configured so that there is a possibility that it will be In this way, by providing a period in which no special hold sound is output between the first special hold sound and the second special hold sound, the sounds become distinct without being mixed, and what kind of icon is generated (what kind of sound?) It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that reliably conveys to a player whether the icon has changed to the type of icon. The normal light emission (white light emission) of the board lamp is referred to as light emission of the first mode, and the special light emission (other than white light emission, blue, green, red, and rainbow light emission) of the board lamp is referred to as light emission of the second mode. It may also be called luminescence. The second mode A for blue light emission and green light emission (the second mode A1 for blue light emission and the second mode A2 for green light emission), the second mode B for red light emission, and the second mode for rainbow light emission You may call it the aspect C. Also, white light emission from the frame lamp may be referred to as third mode light emission or normal light emission from the frame lamp. In addition, other than white light emission in the frame lamp, for example, yellow light emission instead of white light emission during the fox background production described later, orange light emission instead of white light emission during the battle production, and rainbow light emission during the decision action In the case of light emission, these light emission modes may be referred to as light emission of the fourth mode or special light emission in the frame lamp. The second mode has a role of suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher (than the first mode), and the fourth mode also has a role of suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher (than the third mode). In other words, the second mode is a lighting mode when the expectation of a big win is higher (than the first mode), and the fourth mode is also a lighting mode with a higher expectation of a big win (than the third mode).

Next, the holding change effect during the special effect, during the special effect, and during the super reach (SP reach) effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is an image diagram relating to a hold change effect that can be executed during a special effect, during a special effect, and during a super ready-to-win effect in a non-time shortening game state.

(e) Under the condition that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are variably displayed, the variation icon is displayed as a red icon. In addition, (e) is a diagram at the next timing of (d) in FIG. The sub-control board S controls the special light emission by changing the board lamp to red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in a white mode.

(f) Under the condition that the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are variably displayed, and the variation icon is displayed as a red icon. A special performance is executed at a timing F before a predetermined timing in . Although a darkening effect is exemplified as a special effect, a stage change effect or the like may be used. The sub-control board S hides (restricts) the display of the red icon that has been displayed in the reserved display area for the effect of the change during the execution of the special effect. Specifically, since the special effect image has a higher display priority than the red icon image, the red icon image is not displayed. In addition, the display of the second reserved display, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, the icon display area, the stage background, etc. is hidden by the special effect. Note that even if the red icon is not displayed in the effect display section, the board lamp is specially illuminated in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, and the frame lamp is illuminated in white. .

(g) Under the condition that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are variably displayed and the variation icon is displayed as a red icon. A special effect is executed at a timing G before a predetermined timing in . As a special effect, the fox background effect that displays the background of the fox character is exemplified, but the effect that suggests that the expectation of winning is very high or that the hit is certain (for example, the premiere effect) It may be the case that an alien as a jackpot determination character is displayed, or the pseudo continuous effect is executed four times exceeding the predetermined number of three times. The sub-control board S continues to display the change icon of the red icon that was displayed in the reserved display area for the change effect during the period during which the special effect is being executed. Further, the sub-control board S restricts the light emission of the board lamp, which has been specially lighted in a red mode corresponding to the red icon, during the period during which the special performance is being executed, and temporarily interrupts the special light emission. Specifically, the sub-control board S controls the board lamp to emit light in a color (for example, yellow) corresponding to the special effect, but may perform extinguishing control to turn off the light emission of the board lamp. On the other hand, the frame lamp is controlled to emit light in a white mode or in a color (for example, yellow) corresponding to the special effect (when the alien of the jackpot determination character, which is a premium effect, is displayed, the light emission is controlled in rainbow color and simulated If the continuous effect exceeds the predetermined number of three times and is executed four times, the light emission is controlled in rainbow colors). In FIG. 222, the special effect is executed after the special effect is executed, but the special effect may be executed without executing the special effect, or the special effect may be executed before the special effect is executed. good. Alternatively, the special effect may be executed while the special effect is not executed. In any case, it is sufficient that the special effect and the special effect are not executed at the same time (execution timings do not overlap). By preventing simultaneous execution in this manner, at least one of the special effects or the special effects can be executed before the predetermined timing. By configuring the special effects and the special effects in this way, even in the situation where each effect (special effects or special effects) is executed, the expectation of winning is indicated by either the display of the icon or the light emission of the board lamp. Since the performance is guaranteed, the player can always grasp the current hit expectation.

The special effect may be configured such that the execution probability can be changed to the fifth setting (execution probability of 3%) or the sixth setting (execution probability of 1%) based on the third selection operation in the game machine setting. Specifically, new items such as "5th and 6th settings" are added to the customization screen A that is displayed after the game machine setting screen (including variations) is displayed, and the new item is selected. By doing so, items of "5th setting" and "6th setting" which are the customization screen D are configured to be displayed. For example, if the game machine setting screen is in a state where the first selection operation, the second selection operation, or the third selection operation is possible, it may be always displayed, and the first selection operation, the second selection operation, or the third selection operation may be configured so that it is not displayed if it is impossible to In addition, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed by pressing the left and right buttons instead of the up and down buttons on the cross button SB-2 (by operating either the left or right button, the display state can be changed from the non-display state to the display state) and the volume can be adjusted (the volume adjustment screen is displayed). When the left button is pressed once, the volume is decreased by one level, and the right button is pressed once, the volume is increased by one level). display (change from non-display state to display state by operating one of the up or down buttons) and display of customization screen A (change from non-display state to display state), select customization screen B, customization screen C, or customization screen D (select one by operating the up and down buttons while displaying customization screen A, and then select the first setting by operating the up and down buttons on customization screen B). Switching to the 2nd setting/Switching to the 3rd or 4th setting by operating the up/down button on the customization screen C/Switching to the 5th or 6th setting by operating the up/down button on the customization screen D) can be executed. (If the first selection operation, the second selection operation, or the third selection operation cannot be performed, the game machine setting screen is not displayed even if the up and down buttons are operated). Alternatively, the game machine setting screen is always displayed when the first selection operation, the second selection operation, or the third selection operation is possible, and is displayed when the first selection operation or the second selection operation is impossible. It may be configured not to Also, the game setting screen and customization screens A to D can be displayed simultaneously with the volume adjustment screen, and adjustments and settings can be made simultaneously while maintaining both displays (limited to situations where both screens can be displayed). It should be noted that the display of the volume adjustment screen and the volume adjustment can be performed even during the execution of the high-expectation effect, the first predetermined effect, and the second predetermined effect, which will be described later. In addition, a situation where a specific effect is not executed (for example, a situation where Super Reach is not executed, a situation where a decision action is not executed) and a specific effect is not executed but a predetermined effect is executed. Situation (for example, a situation in which normal reach is being executed, a situation in which a fixed-position action that is not the production mode of the chance-read-ahead production is executed, a situation in which a fixed-position action that is the production form of the chance-read-ahead production is executed, fluctuation Even in situations where a starting action is being executed, a situation where a tenpai action is being executed), a situation where a specific production is being executed (for example, a situation where a super reach is being executed, a decision action is being executed) The display of the volume adjustment screen and the volume adjustment can be executed even in a situation where the volume is In addition, in the third selection operation during variation, it may be configured so that the selected setting is not switched at the time when the fifth setting or the sixth setting is selected, and the selected setting is switched to the next variation after the selected variation. In such a configuration, even if the setting is switched from the fifth setting to the sixth setting during the fluctuation, it is preferable that the effect lottery with the sixth setting is applied from the next fluctuation. Regarding the execution probability of the fifth setting (3%), for example, assuming a hit probability of 1/200, the execution probability of losing hold (approximately 2.75%) and the execution probability of hit hold (approximately 50% ), and for the execution probability (1%) of the sixth setting, for example, assuming a hit probability of 1/200, the execution probability (approximately 0.55%) during loss suspension and execution during hit suspension It is the sum with the probability (approximately 90%). In this way, the execution probability of the special performance can be adjusted, and the occupation rate of the special performance can be increased in the variation of winning symbols. can be improved. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure the special effect so that the execution probability cannot be adjusted.

(h) Under the situation where the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, and under the circumstances after the execution of the special effect or the special effect, Variation icons are displayed as red icons. The sub control board S continues to display the change icon of the red icon in the effect pending display area for the change after the execution of the special effect or the special effect. In addition, the sub-control board S causes the special effect or after the execution of the special effect to cause the board lamp, which has been temporarily interrupted to emit special light, to emit special light in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, and change the frame lamp to white. light in a manner.

(i) Timing under the situation where the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols of the first variation are variably displayed and the special effect or after the execution of the special effect. At I, a ready-to-win effect (for example, a normal ready-to-win effect) is executed. The sub control board S displays the variation icon of the red icon in the suspension display area for the variation effect during the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being executed. Further, the sub-control board S causes the board lamp to emit special light in a red mode corresponding to the red icon, and the frame lamp to emit white light during the period during which the ready-to-win effect is being executed.

(j) Under the condition that the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation are displayed in a variable manner, and at a predetermined timing under the condition that the ready-to-win effect is being executed, The ready-to-reach production is executed by developing from the normal-to-reach production to the super ready-to-reach production. Here, the predetermined timing is the timing when the normal ready-to-win effect develops into the super ready-to-win effect. The sub control board S restricts the display of the red icon displayed in the reserved display area for effect of the change during the period during which the super ready-to-win effect is being executed after a predetermined timing. Specifically, the image of the red icon is hidden (erased) at a predetermined timing. Further, at a predetermined timing, if a suspended icon exists, the suspended icon is also hidden (deleted), and the effect display area for the change and the first suspension display area SG12 are also hidden (deleted). Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the background image showing stage A is also hidden (erased), and the background image of the super ready-to-win effect is displayed (the stage is changed to the SP ready-to-win stage in the figure). In the period during execution of the super ready-to-win performance after a predetermined timing, the light emission of the board lamp, which has been specially emitted in a mode of red corresponding to the red icon, is restricted, and the special emission is interrupted. Note that (g) shows an example in which the special light emission is temporarily interrupted, but for the special light emission, if the special effect is not executed, a predetermined pattern variation (super reach variation shown in this first variation) It can be executed continuously until the timing. The sub-control board S turns off the light emission of the board lamp, but may control the light emission of the board lamp in a color (for example, red) corresponding to the degree of expectation for winning the super reach effect. When the board lamp emits light in red as a color corresponding to the hit expectation of the super ready-to-win effect, it is preferable to adopt a light emission mode different from the second special light emission (special light emission). Specifically, although the second special light emission is made to emit light in a red lighting mode, it is preferable to make it emit light in a red blinking mode corresponding to the expected degree of winning of the super ready-to-win effect. On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white mode or in a color (for example, red) corresponding to the expected degree of winning of the super ready-to-win effect.

(k) This is the timing at which the super ready-to-win effect is completed in a situation where the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation is temporarily stopped in a losing mode and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. At a specific timing, the stage is displayed in a state where it is changed to stage A. The sub-control board S displays the variation icon of the red icon in the suspension display area for the effect of the variation during the period from after the specific timing to the timing of the first variation finalization stop of (l). In addition, the sub-control board S restricts the special light emission of the board lamp in the red mode, which is the color corresponding to the red icon, during the period from after the specific timing to the timing of the fixed stop of the first variation in (l), Continue to suspend the special flash. Specifically, the sub-control board S turns off the light emission of the board lamp, but causes the board lamp to emit normal light (white light). As a modification, the board lamp may emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period (for example, yellow, which is a color different from the special light emission). Note that no special light emission is performed during the period from (j) to (l). On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white mode or in a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period.

Here, in (k), although not shown, a case in which a rainbow icon is displayed will be described. In this case, not only the rainbow icon is displayed at the timing of (k), but also the rainbow icon may be displayed before (i). At a specific timing when the super ready-to-win effect is finished, the stage is changed to stage A, and the winning display of 777 is displayed by the first decoration pattern. The sub-control board S displays the variation icon of the rainbow icon in the suspension display area for the effect of the variation during the period from after the specific timing to the timing of the finalization stop of the first variation in (l). During the period from after the specific timing to the timing of the fixed stop of the first variation in (l), the board lamp is specially illuminated in a rainbow mode corresponding to the rainbow icon. In addition, the frame lamp also emits light in the form of a rainbow, which is a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period. In the case of a hit in this way, the board lamp can be made to emit light in the form of a rainbow even after a specific timing, and all the lamps including the board lamp and the frame lamp are used to indicate that the game is a hit. Since it can be visually recognized by other players, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration.

(l) At the timing when the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol of the first variation is confirmed and stopped, the red icon in the reserved display area for the effect of the variation is displayed. erased. The sub-control board S continues turning OFF the light emission of the board lamp, and continues the board lamp light emission with normal light emission (white light emission). As a modification, the board lamp may emit light in a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period (for example, yellow, which is a color different from the special light emission). On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white mode or in a color corresponding to the state of the game during this period.

Next, the hold change effect during the initialization operation based on power-on will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224. FIG. FIG. 223 is an image diagram of a pending change effect that can be executed during the initialization operation based on power-on. FIG. 224 is an image diagram regarding the initialization operation during symbol variation and the holding change effect after the initialization operation.

The initialization operation is based on the operation of the RAM clear button after turning on the power of the pachinko game machine (step S1002 in FIG. 5), the RAM clearing process (step S1004 in FIG. 5) of the main control board M and the sub-main control Initial processing of part SM (for example, when RAM clear information in FIGS. 18 to 26 is received → RAM on the sub side is initialized, when various information commands are received → production related information at the time of power failure is transferred to RAM on the sub side This is the operation of the effect display device SG, the speaker D24, the lamps (including board lamps and frame lamps), and the movable accessory YK, which are executed when the game is reset to . Note that the initialization operation may be an operation when the power is turned on without clearing the RAM.

The initialization operation of the effect display device SG is the operation of displaying the initialization screen shown in (a1), and the initialization operation of notifying "initializing" continues until the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed. screen is displayed. When the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the screen of stage A shown in (b1) is displayed (the screen of stage A is displayed regardless of the stage before the power is cut off). If the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, the screen of the stage before the power was turned off is displayed. As a modification, when the power is turned on without clearing the RAM, if the stage before the power is turned off is stages A to C, the screen of stage A is displayed, and if it is stage D, the screen of stage D is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed.

The initialization operation of the speaker D24 is an operation of outputting an initialization sound (for example, a sound such as "initializing" or "the power is turned on"), and continues until the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is completed. and an initialization sound is output. When the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is completed, it becomes possible to output a sound corresponding to the game, and as shown in (c1), it is possible to output a special holding sound, an effect sound during symbol fluctuation, and the like. This initialization sound may be called a prescribed sound.

The lamp initialization operation is an operation of emitting light in an initialization lamp pattern (for example, a lamp pattern that emits light in the order of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow), and continues until the lamp initialization operation is completed. is emitted with the initialized ramp pattern. When the initialization operation of the lamps is completed, the lamps can emit light in a mode corresponding to the game, and as shown in (d1), the board lamp can emit white light, and the frame lamp and the like can emit white light. Light emission in this initialization lamp pattern may be referred to as prescribed light emission.

The initialization operation of the movable accessory YK is the operation of stopping for a predetermined second from the first position, which is the upper position shown in (a1), to the second position, which is the lower position shown in (b1), and returning to the first position. There is, and the movable accessory repeatedly executes this operation until the initialization operation is completed. When the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK is completed, the operation of the movable accessory YK corresponding to the game can be executed.

(a1) of FIG. 223 shows a non-reduced time gaming state in which a hold on the first main game side has newly occurred under the condition that all the initialization operations based on power-on are being executed. The RAM clear processing of the main control board M has been completed, and the sub-control board S has not completed various initialization operations, but is ready to receive commands from the main control board M. The newly created hold is the hold that can be displayed with a white icon. The sub-control board S should display a white icon in the suspension display area for the effect of the change at the timing of the suspension occurrence, but since the effect display device SG is being initialized, the change icon is displayed. and continue to display the initialization screen. In addition, the sub control board S should output "Do", which is the holding tone (normal holding tone) corresponding to the white icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the holding occurrence, but the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is performed. Therefore, the output of the hold tone is restricted, and the initialization tone is continuously output. Furthermore, at the timing of pending occurrence, the sub control board S restricts the light emission of the board lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, and limits the light emission of the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation. Limit and fire with the initialization lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK is executing the initialization operation at the timing of the suspension occurrence.

(b1) Shows the state in which the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed under the condition that the initialization operation of the lamp, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK are being executed based on power-on. . At the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the sub control board S displays the change icon of the white icon in the effect pending display area for the change. In addition, the sub control board S should output a sound effect corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, but the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is being performed. Therefore, the output of the sound effect corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation is restricted, and the initialization sound is continuously output. Furthermore, at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the sub-control board S continues to limit the light emission in the color corresponding to the white icon of the board lamp, and the effect of the pattern variation of the frame lamp. continue to limit the light emission in the color corresponding to, and emit light in the initialized lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK continues the initialization operation at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed.

(c1) Shows the state in which the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed under the condition that the initialization operation of the lamp, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK are being executed based on power-on. . In this state, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes one, and a red icon is displayed as the newly caused hold image. The sub control board S outputs a second hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the red icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the hold occurrence display). Limit the output of "mi" and continue to output the initialization sound. In addition, at the timing of the pending occurrence display, the sub control board S continues to limit the special light emission in the color corresponding to the red icon of the board lamp, and the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation. Light continues to be limited and flashes in the initialization ramp pattern. The movable accessory YK continues to perform the initialization operation at the timing of the pending occurrence display.

In addition, when the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is completed in (c1), the sub control board S displays the red icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display). , to output the second holding tone (special holding tone) "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24.

(d1) Under the circumstances after all the initialization operations based on the power-on are completed, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the hold on the first main game side becomes two, and the new hold occurs. A white icon is displayed as a pending image. At the timing when the white icon based on the on-hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the on-hold occurrence display), the sub-control board S outputs the holding tone (normal holding tone) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. is output, and the board lamp is caused to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. In addition, since there is a red icon in front of the white icon based on the pending occurrence, at the timing of the pending occurrence display, the board lamp will light up in red, which corresponds to the red icon in front, instead of white, which corresponds to the white icon. can be Further, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also emit in white, which is a color corresponding to the white icon. In addition, when a red icon is displayed as a newly generated pending image (when there is no trigger pending in front), at the timing when the red icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of pending occurrence display) , a special holding tone "mi" corresponding to the red icon is output from the speaker D24, and the board lamp is caused to emit special red light corresponding to the red icon.

(a2) Shows a non-time-reduced game state in which a hold on the first main game side has newly occurred under the condition that all initialization operations based on power-on are being executed. The RAM clear processing of the main control board M has been completed, and the sub-control board S has not completed various initialization operations, but is ready to receive commands from the main control board M. The newly created hold is the hold that can be displayed with a blue icon. The sub-control board S should display a blue icon in the suspension display area for the effect of the change at the timing of the suspension occurrence, but since the effect display device SG is being initialized, the change icon is displayed. and continue to display the initialization screen. In addition, the sub control board S should output "re", which is the first hold sound (special hold sound) corresponding to the blue icon, from the speaker D24 at the timing of the hold occurrence, but the speaker D24 is initialized. Since it is operating, the output of the special hold tone is restricted, and the initialization tone is continuously output. Furthermore, the sub control board S restricts the special light emission in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon of the board lamp, at the timing of the pending occurrence, and the light emission in the color corresponding to the design variation of the frame lamp. and emit light with the initialization lamp pattern.

(b2) Shows the state in which the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed under the condition that the initialization operation of the lamp, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK are being executed based on power-on. . At the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the sub control board S should display a blue icon in the effect reserved display area for the change, but displays the change icon of the white icon. At the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the change icon of the blue icon may be displayed in the effect pending display area for the change. In addition, the sub control board S should output a sound effect corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, but the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is being performed. Therefore, the output of the sound effect corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation is restricted, and the initialization sound is continuously output. Further, at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed, the sub-control board S continues to limit the special light emission in the color corresponding to the blue icon of the board lamp, and the pattern variation of the frame lamp. Light emission in the color corresponding to the effect is continuously restricted, and light is emitted in the initialization lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK continues the initialization operation at the timing when the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed.

(c2) Shows the state in which the initialization operation of the effect display device SG is completed under the condition that the initialization operation of the lamp, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK are being executed based on power-on. . In this state, the white icon (the blue icon when the blue icon is displayed) in the reserved display area for effecting the change is changed to the green icon. The sub control board S limits the output of the first hold sound (special hold sound) "re" corresponding to the green icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the green icon based on the hold change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. and continue to output the initialization sound. In addition, at the timing when the green icon based on the pending change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG, the sub control board S continues to limit the special light emission in the color corresponding to the green icon of the board lamp, and the frame lamp. Light emission in a color corresponding to the performance of the pattern variation is continuously restricted, and light is emitted in an initialization lamp pattern. The movable accessory YK continues to perform the initialization operation at the timing when the green icon based on the pending change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG.

(d2) Under the circumstances after all the initialization operations based on power-on are completed, the green icon in the effect pending display area for the change is changed to a red icon. At the timing when the red icon based on the hold change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG, the sub control board S outputs the special hold sound "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24, and also changes the board lamp to the red icon. It emits special light in red, which is the color corresponding to . In addition, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation (for example, controls light emission in white). good.

In the initialization operation based on power-on, the initialization operation of the speaker D24 is configured to end (complete) earlier than the initialization operation of the lamp. It should be noted that the initialization operation of the speaker D24 should be completed (completed) earlier than the initialization operation of the lamp in a normal case without a retry or the like. Therefore, in (d2), the initialization operation of the speaker D24, the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK, and the initialization operation of the effect display device SG are completed under the condition that the initialization operation of the lamp is being executed based on the power-on. In the case of indicating the state of holding, the sub control board S outputs a special holding sound "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the red icon based on the holding change production is displayed on the production display device SG. On the other hand, it controls to limit the special light emission in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon of the board lamp. In addition, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation (for example, controls light emission in white). good.

The initialization operation of the speaker D24 may be completed (completed) later than the initialization operation of the effect display device SG, the initialization operation of the lamp, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK. In the case of such a configuration, in (d2), under the condition that the speaker D24 is initialized based on power-on, the initialization operation of the lamp, the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK, and the effect display device SG are performed. When indicating that the initialization operation is completed, the sub-control board S displays a red icon corresponding to the red icon on the board lamp at the timing when the red icon based on the pending change effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. While performing control to emit light, control is performed to limit the output of the special holding tone "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24. In addition, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation (for example, controls light emission in white). good. It should be noted that the specified sound can be output from the speaker during a specific period after the power has been turned off. In addition, the board lamp and the frame lamp are configured to emit light in a specified manner during a specific period after recovery from power failure. During this specific period, all of the initialization operations of the effect display device SG initialization operation, the speaker D24 initialization operation, the lamp initialization operation, and the movable accessory YK initialization operation are completed after the power is turned on. It is good if the period is up to For example, from power-on to the timing when the last initialization operation among the initialization operation of the effect display device SG, the initialization operation of the speaker D24, the initialization operation of the lamp, and the initialization operation of the movable accessory YK is completed. The time period can be a specific time period.

The probability that the special holding tone and the special light emission are performed differs depending on whether the character object position YK is the first position (initial position) or the second position (post-movement position). For example, when the accessory position YK is set to be located at the second position during the execution of the jackpot game state or the super ready-to-win effect, the special holding sound and special light emission are not executed in the big win game state or the super ready-to-win effect. Therefore, when the role object position YK is at the second position (post-movement position), the probability of executing the special hold tone and special light emission is set to zero. On the other hand, during the pattern fluctuation of the first main game pattern such as stage A in the non-time-reduced game state, since the role object position YK is mainly set to be positioned at the first position, a blue icon or a red icon is displayed. It is configured such that a special hold tone and a special light emission associated with is executed. Therefore, when the role object position YK is the first position, the probability of executing the special holding tone and the special light emission is higher than when it is the second position. However, at least during the initializing operation of the speaker D24 and during the initializing operation of the lamp, and during the initializing operation of the movable accessory YK, at either the first position or the second position, special Since the hold tone is not output and the special light emission is not executed, the probability that the special hold tone and the special light emission are executed is low when the character object position YK is at the first position and when it is at the second position. 0.

When the role item position YK is at the second position in this way, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the hold icon, so it is preferable to suppress the execution frequency of the hold change effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that maintains game balance.

Next, the processing of the pending change effect during the initialization operation based on the power-on during the symbol variation and the pending change effect after the completion of all the initialization operations based on the power-on will be described with reference to FIG. (e) shows the pattern variation during the second variation at the timing after (d1) in FIG.

In (f), the power is turned off in the state of (e), and all initialization operations (initialization operation of the effect display device SG, initialization of the speaker D24 initializing operation, lamp initializing operation, and movable accessory YK initializing operation) are being executed. The sub control board S hides the display of the change icon with the special icon (red icon that is the trigger suspension) and the display of the suspension icon with the white icon of suspension 1 ( limit) and display the initialization screen. In addition, the sub-control board S outputs an initialization sound from the speaker and causes the board lamp to emit light in the initialization lamp pattern. Even if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or a special icon occurs in this state, the output of the hold sound and special hold sound is restricted (not output), and the normal light emission and special light emission are limited. . Furthermore, the sub-control board S limits the light emission of the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation, and causes the frame lamp to emit light in the initialization lamp pattern. Furthermore, the sub-control board S restricts the prefetching lottery for existing holds in this state, and also restricts the prefetching lottery when a new hold occurs. In addition, ``can be displayed with normal icons or special icons'' means that the existing hold and the newly occurring hold are more than non-reach (non-reach, normal reach, super reach production by low-expectation giraffe, high-expectation At least one of the super reach effect by the battle effect, the big hit confirmation effect such as the full rotation effect) is executed, it can be displayed with a normal icon (white icon), normal reach or higher (normal reach, A special icon (blue icon), low-expectation super reach (low-expectation giraffe super-reach production) or more (low-expectation giraffe super-reach production, high-expectation battle production super-reach production, full rotation At least one of the big hit confirmation effects such as effects) can be displayed with a special icon (green icon) if it is a hold related to the variation that is executed, and a high-expectation super reach (a super reach due to a high-expectation battle effect Reach production) or more (at least one of the super reach production by the high-expectation battle production, and the jackpot confirmation production such as the full rotation production) is executed. It means that it can be displayed with a special icon (rainbow icon) if it is a hold related to a variation in which a big hit confirmation effect such as a full rotation effect is executed.

(g) A state in which all the initialization operations based on power-on are completed, and the second variation of the pattern is in progress. In this state, the sub-control board S restricts the display of the variable icon displayed in (e) as a special icon (red icon) and the display of the pending icon as a white icon, and restricts the display as a white icon. indicate. In addition, the sub-control board S limits the output of the special hold sound, outputs the sound effect corresponding to the effect of the pattern change from the speaker D24, and sets the board lamp to the off state or normal light emission (white light emission control). Limit light emission. In addition, if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or a special icon occurs in this state, normal and special hold sounds are output, and the board lamp is controlled by normal light emission and special light emission. good. Further, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also emit in white, which is a color corresponding to the white icon. Furthermore, since the sub-control board S is executing the symbol variation corresponding to the trigger pending red icon displayed in (e) in this state (the symbol variation of the variable icon that won the prefetching lottery) is being executed. , to limit the look-ahead lottery. The target of the restriction of the prefetch lottery is the existing hold and the newly occurring hold. In addition, ``can be displayed with normal icons or special icons'' means that the existing hold and the newly occurring hold are more than non-reach (non-reach, normal reach, super reach production by low-expectation giraffe, high-expectation At least one of the super reach effect by the battle effect, the big hit confirmation effect such as the full rotation effect) is executed, it can be displayed with a normal icon (white icon), normal reach or higher (normal reach, A special icon (blue icon), low-expectation super reach (low-expectation giraffe super-reach production) or more (low-expectation giraffe super-reach production, high-expectation battle production super-reach production, full rotation At least one of the big hit confirmation effects such as effects) can be displayed with a special icon (green icon) if it is a hold related to the variation that is executed, and a high-expectation super reach (a super reach due to a high-expectation battle effect) Reach production) or more (at least one of the super reach production by the high-expectation battle production, and the jackpot confirmation production such as the full rotation production) will be executed. It means that it can be displayed with a special icon (rainbow icon) if it is a hold related to a variation in which a big hit confirmation effect such as a full rotation effect is executed. In addition, as a modification, until the pattern variation of the second variation is completed, the special icon (red icon) of the variation icon that was displayed as a special icon (red icon that is pending trigger) as in (f) Hide (limit) the display of and the display of the hold icon with the white icon of Hold 1, display the initialization screen, output the initialization sound from the speaker, and make the board lamp emit light in the initialization lamp pattern, Even if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or a special icon occurs, the output of the hold sound and special hold sound is limited (not output), and the normal light emission and special light emission are limited, and the sub control board S Limits the light emission in the color corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation of the frame lamp, emits light with the initialization lamp pattern, restricts the prefetch lottery for the hold that exists in this state, and creates a new hold When doing so, the prefetching lottery may be restricted.

(h) In the second variation, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes two, and a white icon is displayed as the newly occurred hold image. At the timing when the white icon based on the on-hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the on-hold occurrence display), the sub-control board S outputs the holding tone (normal holding tone) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. , a sound effect corresponding to the performance of the pattern variation is output, and the board lamp is caused to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also emit in white, which is a color corresponding to the white icon. Furthermore, since the sub-control board S is executing the symbol variation corresponding to the trigger pending red icon displayed in (e) in this state (the symbol variation of the variable icon that won the prefetching lottery) is being executed. , to limit the look-ahead lottery. The prefetch lottery restrictions apply to existing holds and newly occurring holds. In addition, even if a hold that can display a new special icon in this state (a hold that may become a trigger hold if a prefetch lottery is performed) occurs, since the prefetch lottery is restricted, the display of the special icon, Although the output of the special hold sound and the output of the special light emission are restricted, when the restriction on the prefetching lottery is canceled and the special icon is displayed on the effect display device SG based on the hold occurrence, the timing of the hold occurrence display is set. , a special hold tone and a board lamp corresponding to the special icon may be output from the speaker D24 in a special light emission mode. In addition, ``can display special icons'' means that the existing hold and newly occurring hold are higher than normal reach (normal reach, super reach performance by low-expectation giraffe, At least one of the jackpot fixed effects such as effects and full rotation effects) can be displayed with a special icon (blue icon) if it is a hold related to the variation that is executed, low expectation super reach (low expectation Super reach performance by Kirin) or more (At least one of super reach performance by low-expectation giraffe, super-reach performance by high-expectation battle performance, and jackpot confirmation performance such as full-rotation performance) Suspension related to the variation that is executed If it is, it can be displayed with a special icon (green icon), high-expectation super reach (super reach production by high-expectation battle production) or higher (super reach production by high-expectation battle production, full rotation production (At least one of the big hit confirmation production such as) is executed, it can be displayed with a special icon (red icon), and the suspension related to the variation in which the big hit confirmation production such as full rotation production is executed means that it can be displayed with a special icon (rainbow icon).

(i) In the third variation, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes two, and a white icon is displayed as the newly occurred hold image. At the timing when the white icon based on the on-hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the on-hold occurrence display), the sub-control board S outputs the holding tone (normal holding tone) corresponding to the white icon from the speaker D24. , a sound effect corresponding to the performance of the pattern variation is output, and the board lamp is caused to emit light in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. Further, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also emit in white, which is a color corresponding to the white icon. Furthermore, in this state, the sub-control board S restricts the prefetching lottery because the suspension that existed when the power was turned off between (e) and (f) is digested and remains as the variable icon. The prefetch lottery restrictions apply to existing holds and newly occurring holds. In addition, even if a hold that can display a new special icon in this state (a hold that may become a trigger hold if a prefetch lottery is performed) occurs, since the prefetch lottery is restricted, the display of the special icon, Although the output of the special hold sound and the output of the special light emission are restricted, when the restriction on the prefetching lottery is canceled and the special icon is displayed on the effect display device SG based on the hold occurrence, the timing of the hold occurrence display is set. , a special hold tone and a board lamp corresponding to the special icon may be output from the speaker D24 in a special light emission mode. In addition, in (i), since the hold that was the trigger hold in (e) has been digested and does not remain, the restriction on the prefetching lottery may be lifted from this timing. In this case, the target of the prefetching lottery is the existing hold and the newly occurring hold, but it may be possible to target only the newly occurred hold. In addition, ``can display special icons'' means that the existing hold and newly occurring hold are higher than normal reach (normal reach, super reach performance by low-expectation giraffe, At least one of the jackpot fixed effects such as effects and full rotation effects) can be displayed with a special icon (blue icon) if it is a hold related to the variation that is executed, low expectation super reach (low expectation Super reach performance by Kirin) or more (At least one of super reach performance by low-expectation giraffe, super-reach performance by high-expectation battle performance, and jackpot confirmation performance such as full-rotation performance) Suspension related to the variation that is executed If it is, it can be displayed with a special icon (green icon), high-expectation super reach (super reach production by high-expectation battle production) or higher (super reach production by high-expectation battle production, full rotation production (At least one of the big hit confirmation production such as) is executed, it can be displayed with a special icon (red icon), and the suspension related to the variation in which the big hit confirmation production such as full rotation production is executed means that it can be displayed with a special icon (rainbow icon).

(j) In the fourth variation, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes two, and a blue icon is displayed as the newly occurred hold image. At the timing when the blue icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display), the sub control board S emits a special holding tone "re" corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24 and the corresponding pattern variation. Along with outputting a sound effect corresponding to the production of , the board lamp is specially illuminated in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation, but may also emit white, which is a color corresponding to the blue icon. Furthermore, in this state, the sub-control board S cancels the restriction on the prefetching lottery because all the suspensions that existed when the power was turned off between (e) and (f) have been consumed. running The target of the prefetch lottery is the existing hold and the newly generated hold. Although not shown in (j), the customization screen B is displayed, and the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation, which is the operation of the sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, or the like.

(k) shows a state in which the power is turned off in the state of (j), and all initialization operations at power-on are performed without clearing the RAM upon subsequent power-on. The sub-control board S restricts the display of the white icon of the variable icon, the display of the special icon (blue icon) and the suspended icon with the white icon, and displays the initialization screen. Further, the sub-control board S outputs an initialization sound from the speaker and causes the board lamp to emit light in the initialization lamp pattern. In addition, even if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or a special icon occurs in this state, the output of the normal hold sound and special hold sound is limited (not output), and the normal light emission and special light emission are limited. do. Furthermore, the sub-control board S limits the light emission of the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the effect of the pattern variation, and causes the frame lamp to emit light in the initialization lamp pattern. Furthermore, the sub-control board S restricts the prefetching lottery for existing holds in this state, and also restricts the prefetching lottery when a new hold occurs. In addition, ``can be displayed with normal icons or special icons'' means that the existing hold and the newly occurring hold are more than non-reach (non-reach, normal reach, super reach production by low-expectation giraffe, high-expectation At least one of the super reach effect by the battle effect, the big hit confirmation effect such as the full rotation effect) is executed, it can be displayed with a normal icon (white icon), normal reach or higher (normal reach, A special icon (blue icon), low-expectation super reach (low-expectation giraffe super-reach production) or more (low-expectation giraffe super-reach production, high-expectation battle production super-reach production, full rotation At least one of the big hit confirmation effects such as effects) can be displayed with a special icon (green icon) if it is a hold related to the variation that is executed, and a high-expectation super reach (a super reach due to a high-expectation battle effect) Reach production) or more (at least one of the super reach production by the high-expectation battle production, and the jackpot confirmation production such as the full rotation production) will be executed. It means that it can be displayed with a special icon (rainbow icon) if it is a hold related to a variation in which a big hit confirmation effect such as a full rotation effect is executed.

(l) A state in which all initialization operations based on power-on have been completed, and the fourth variation of the symbol is in progress. In this state, the sub-control board S restricts the display of the white icon displayed in (e), the special icon (blue icon), and the suspended white icon, and displays them all as white icons. . In addition, the sub-control board S limits the output of the special hold sound, outputs the sound effect corresponding to the effect of the pattern change from the speaker D24, and sets the board lamp to the off state or normal light emission (white light emission control). Limit light emission. Further, the sub-control board S causes the frame lamp to emit light in a color corresponding to the effect of the symbol variation. Furthermore, the sub-control board S restricts the prefetch lottery because the hold that was the trigger hold in (k) exists in this state. The target of the restriction of the prefetch lottery is the existing hold and the newly occurring hold. In addition, as a modification, until the pattern variation of the fourth variation is completed, the special icon (red icon) of the variation icon that was displayed as a special icon (red icon that is pending trigger) as in (f) and the display of the hold icon with the white icon of hold 1 are hidden (restricted), the initialization screen is displayed, the initialization sound is output from the speaker D24, and the board lamp emits light in the initialization lamp pattern. Even if a new hold that can be displayed with a normal icon or a special icon occurs, the output of the hold sound and special hold sound is restricted (not output), the normal light emission and special light emission are limited, and the sub control The board S restricts the light emission of the frame lamp in a color corresponding to the performance of the pattern variation, emits light in the initialization lamp pattern, restricts the prefetch lottery for the existing hold in this state, and creates a new hold. The pre-reading lottery may be restricted even when is generated.

At this timing, a new hold on the first main game side occurs, the number of holds on the first main game side becomes three, and a white icon is displayed as the newly caused hold image. Since the second setting is selected based on the first selection operation, in (l), the sub control board S displays the white icon based on the pending occurrence on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display). Timing), along with executing the button vibrator effect, output from the speaker D24 a "do dodo", which is a notification sound for holding 3 or more. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the board lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, and controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon, based on the pending occurrence. The frame lamp starts emitting light in white before the timing when the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG, but the light emission may be controlled in a color according to the game situation.

In this way, the special icon and special light emission displayed before the initialization operation (before the power is turned off) are restricted after all the initialization operations are completed after the power is turned on. is configured to keep its settings. Therefore, the player can execute the game with desired effect setting without setting the second setting based on the first selection operation again after completing all the initialization operations after turning on the power. As a modification, if the power is turned off and then turned on without clearing the RAM, regardless of whether the setting based on the first selection operation before turning off the power is the first setting or the second setting, the power is turned on without clearing the RAM. The configuration may be such that the first setting is always set. In that case, the situation shown in (l) (a new hold on the first main game side occurs, and the hold on the first main game side is 3 and a white icon is displayed as the newly-occurring pending image), at the timing when the white icon based on the pending occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the pending occurrence display), the button vibrates. The effect is not executed, and the 3 or higher notification sound "Dododo" is not output from the speaker D24.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, a description will be given of a pending change effect accompanied by a specific advance notice effect suggesting icon change. FIG. 225 is an image diagram regarding a pending change effect accompanied by a specific advance notice effect suggesting icon change.

The specific advance notice effect is a pattern variation of the main game pattern, and during the pattern variation of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the main game pattern, a snake as a specific character appears and jumps into the icon. This is a pending change suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the icon by executing the action of no action, and is hereinafter also referred to as an action effect. The pending change effect has at least a first change pattern in which the icon is changed without executing a specific advance notice effect suggesting icon change, and a second change pattern in which the icon is changed after executing the specific advance notice effect. . The specific advance notice effect is composed of a specific advance notice effect A (first half) and a specific notice effect B (second half), both of which correspond to action effects. When the specific advance notice effect A is executed and then the specific advance notice effect B is further executed, the icon display mode changes, and when the specific advance notice effect B is not executed despite the specific advance notice effect A being executed, the icon display mode is changed. does not change.

First, using (a1) to (d1) in FIG. 225, the first change pattern will be described.

(a1) In stage A in the non-reduced time game state, there are two holds on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side, and the pattern fluctuation of the first main game symbols. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. There are two holds on the first main game side, two holding icons of white icons are displayed in the first holding display area SG12, and holding on the first main game side in the second holding display area SG13. In the number area (left area), 2 is displayed as a number image indicating two holds. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a number image indicating that there is no hold in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side of the second hold display area SG13. 0 is displayed as In addition, although the variation icon of the white icon is displayed in the suspension display area for effecting the variation, it may be erased at the timing of stopping the determination of the losing pattern, or before the timing of stopping the determination of the losing pattern. (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(b1) Accompanied by the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the hold is canceled and the first fluctuation of the first main game symbols starts. Further, in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner. In (b1), the hold on the first main game side has been canceled, but a new hold has occurred, so there are two holds on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. It is a symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the situation where it is not. The timing of the new suspension occurrence is the same timing as the timing of (b2) described later, and is the timing when the remaining variation time is 20 seconds. Since the newly generated pending image is the pending corresponding to the blue icon, the blue icon is displayed in the first change pattern at the timing of the pending occurrence (with the pending occurrence display as a trigger). The sub-control board S controls the output of a special hold sound "re" corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display). At the same time, the board lamp is made to emit special light in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but it may also control light emission in a color corresponding to the game state or effect.

(c1) Shows the first main game symbol during the first variation of the symbol. (c1) is after the first predetermined period of (b1) has elapsed, and is the same timing as the timing of (c2), which will be described later, and is the timing when the remaining variation time is 15 seconds. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of the effect sound corresponding to the pattern variation from the speaker D24, and continues the special light emission of the board lamp in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but it may also control light emission in a color corresponding to the game state or effect.

(d1) Shows the first main game symbol during the first variation of the symbol. (d1) is after the second predetermined period of (c1) has elapsed, and is the same timing as the timing of (d2), which will be described later, and is the timing when the remaining variation time is 10 seconds. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of the effect sound corresponding to the pattern variation from the speaker D24, and continues the special light emission of the board lamp in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but it may also control light emission in a color corresponding to the game state or effect.

Next, using (a2) to (d2) in FIG. 225, the second change pattern will be described. (a2) In stage A in the non-time-reduced game state, there are two holds on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side, and the pattern fluctuation of the first main game symbols. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. There are two holds on the first main game side, two holding icons of white icons are displayed in the first holding display area SG12, and holding on the first main game side in the second holding display area SG13. In the number area (left area), 2 is displayed as a number image indicating two holds. There is no hold on the second main game side, and the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side of the second hold display area SG13 shows a number image indicating that there is no hold. 0 is displayed as In addition, although the variation icon of the white icon is displayed in the suspension display area for effecting the variation, it may be erased at the timing of stopping the confirmation of the losing pattern, or before the timing of stopping the confirmation of the losing pattern. (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(b2) Accompanied by the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the hold is canceled and the first fluctuation of the first main game symbols starts. Further, in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner. In (b2), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, there is one hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. It is a pattern change of the game pattern. Also, (b2) is the timing when the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts and the remaining variation time is 20 seconds, which is the same timing as the timing of (b1). At the timing of (b2), a snake, which is a specific character, appears. At the timing when the snake, which is the specific character, is displayed on the effect display device SG, the sub control board S generates an action sound A (3 "Nyoro Nyoro Nyoro") as a sound effect corresponding to the specific advance notice effect A in which the specific character, the snake, appears. Second sound effect) is controlled to output, and the board lamp emits white light corresponding to the white icon (continuously emits white light). Further, the sub-control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, but may control the emission in a color corresponding to the specific advance notice effect A (for example, purple).

(c2) Shows the first main game symbol during the first variation of the symbol. (c2) is the timing when the symbol variation of the first main game symbol starts and the remaining variation time is 15 seconds, which is the same timing as the timing of (c1). At the timing of (c2), an action rendering of whether or not the snake, which is the specific character, jumps into the first reserved white icon is executed. (c2) shows a specific advance notice effect B in which a snake, which is a specific character, jumps into the first reserved white icon. The sub control board S generates an action sound B (“Shhh!” sound effect for 2 seconds) is controlled, and the board lamp is caused to emit white light corresponding to the white icon (continuously emits white light). Further, the sub control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, but may control the emission in a color corresponding to the specific advance notice effect B (for example, orange). In this way, the action sound A is output for 3 seconds and the action sound B is output for 2 seconds, thereby forming the second change pattern, and as shown in (d2), the snake, which is the specific character, is the first suspended character. As a result of jumping against the white icon, the blue icon will be displayed. In addition, when the snake, which is the specific character, runs away from the first white icon on hold without jumping in (when the specific notice effect B is not executed), the action sound which is the effect sound corresponding to the specific notice effect B B is not output, but the board lamp emits white light corresponding to the white icon (continuously emits white light). Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white. Note that the action sound A and the action sound B may be the same action sound, and for example, the action sound C may be output for five seconds as an effect sound corresponding to the specific advance notice effects A and B.

(d2) Shows the first main game symbol during the first variation of the symbol. (d2) is the timing when the pattern variation of the first main game pattern starts and the remaining variation time is 10 seconds (5 seconds after the specific character snake jumps into the first reserved white icon) later), which is the same timing as the timing of (d1). At the timing of (d2), a blue icon is displayed as a result of the specific character snake jumping into the first reserved white icon. At the timing when the blue icon is displayed (when the specific character snake jumps into the first white icon on hold), the sub-control board S outputs a special hold sound corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24. In addition to controlling the output of "Re", the board lamp is made to emit special light in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but may control light emission in a color corresponding to the specific advance notice effect B (for example, orange).

In this way, the same special hold tone (in this example, the special hold tone corresponding to the blue icon) can be executed regardless of the first change pattern or the second change pattern, and the same special light emission can be performed. (in this example, blue special light emission).

Also, with respect to the second change pattern, compared with the first change pattern, the action sound A and the action sound B (generally and simply referred to as an action sound) can be output. By outputting the action sound in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the hold change will be performed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

As shown in (a1) to (d1) of FIG. 225, a trigger suspension occurs during a certain symbol variation and the remaining time of the certain symbol variation is a predetermined period (for example, the remaining time is 20 seconds). Even if it is a period during which the second change pattern can be executed, the second change pattern is not executed in the certain symbol variation, but the first change pattern can be executed.

However, in the symbol variation next to the certain symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation of the second variation), both the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are configured to be executable. Specifically, when neither the first change pattern nor the second change pattern is executed in the certain symbol variation, at least one of the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern is executed in the symbol variation next to the certain symbol variation. When the symbol variation next to the certain symbol variation is the pre-trigger variation, any one variation pattern is executed, and the symbol variation next to the certain symbol variation is the trigger variation. Either one of the cases is executed once or multiple times, or both of the change patterns are each executed once or multiple times. Further, even when the first variation pattern is executed in the certain symbol variation, at least one of the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern can be performed in the symbol variation next to the certain symbol variation. When the symbol variation next to a certain symbol variation is the pre-trigger variation, any one variation pattern is executed, and when the symbol variation next to the certain symbol variation is the trigger variation, any one is performed once. or multiple times, or both patterns of change are each performed once or multiple times. It should be noted that at least one of the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern is executed in the trigger variation, and then the total number of executions of the first variation pattern and the number of executions of the second variation pattern is multiple times, the trigger In the variation, the pending change effect is executed multiple times, for example, from the white icon to the blue icon (changes in the first change pattern or the second change pattern), from the blue icon to the red icon (first change pattern Or change in the second variation pattern), it is possible to change from a red icon to a rainbow icon (change in the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern). By configuring in this way, even if there is a margin in the remaining variation time of the symbol variation, it is possible to prevent a complicated pending change effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, a description will be given of a pending change effect accompanied by a specific advance notice effect in a symbol change following a certain symbol change. FIG. 226 is an image diagram relating to a pending change effect accompanied by a specific advance notice effect in the next symbol change of a certain symbol change.

First, using (e1) to (h1) in FIG. 226, the first variation pattern in the pattern variation in which the second variation is not trigger pending will be described. (e1) is a continuation of (d1) in FIG. (e1) In stage A in the non-time-reduced game state, there are two holds on the first main game side, and there are no holds on the second main game side, and the first main game symbol changes. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. There are two reserves on the first main game side, a total of two reserve icons, one white icon and one blue icon, are displayed in the first reserve display area SG12, and the second reserve display area SG13. 2 is displayed as a number image indicating two holds in the area (left area) showing the number of holds on the first main game side. There is no hold on the second main game side, and a number image indicating that there is no hold in the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side of the second hold display area SG13. 0 is displayed as In addition, although the variation icon of the white icon is displayed in the suspension display area for effecting the variation, it may be erased at the timing of stopping the determination of the losing pattern, or before the timing of stopping the determination of the losing pattern. (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(f1) Accompanied by the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the hold is canceled and the second fluctuation of the first main game symbols starts. Further, in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner. In (f1), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, there is one hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. It is a pattern change of the game pattern. This timing is the start timing of the first main game symbol pattern variation (symbol variation with a variation time of 120 seconds) (timing with a remaining variation time of 120 seconds). At this timing (triggered by the shift display), the blue icon is changed to the red icon with the first change pattern and displayed. At the timing when the red icon is displayed on the effect display device SG, the sub control board S controls the output of the special hold tone "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24, and also changes the board lamp to the color corresponding to the red icon. A special red light is emitted. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but it may also control light emission in a color corresponding to the game state or effect.

(g1) Shows the symbol variation of the second variation of the first main game symbol. (g1) is the timing after 5 seconds have passed since (f1) and the remaining fluctuation time is 115 seconds. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of the effect sound corresponding to the pattern variation from the speaker D24, and continues the special light emission of the board lamp in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but it may also control light emission in a color corresponding to the game state or effect.

(h1) Shows the symbol variation in the second variation of the first main game symbol. (h1) is the timing after 5 seconds have passed since (g1) and the remaining fluctuation time is 110 seconds. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of the effect sound corresponding to the pattern variation from the speaker D24, and continues the special light emission of the board lamp in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but it may also control light emission in a color corresponding to the game state or effect.

In (e1) to (h1), the pending change effect that executes the first change pattern has been described, but in (e1) to (h1), as a pending change effect that executes the second change pattern described below, Also good. In such a configuration, no hold change is made at (f1), a specific character snake appears, and hold change is made at (g1).

Next, using (e2) to (h2) of FIG. 225, the second variation pattern in the pattern variation in which the second variation is trigger pending will be described. (e2) is a continuation of (d2) in FIG. (e2) In stage A in the non-time-reduced game state, there is one hold on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side, and the first main game symbol changes in pattern. The first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right columns corresponding to are fixed and stopped as lost symbols. There is one hold on the first main game side, one hold icon of a blue icon is displayed in the first hold display area SG12, and a hold on the first main game side in the second hold display area SG13. In the number area (left area), 1 is displayed as a number image indicating one hold. There is no hold on the second main game side, and the area (right area) showing the number of holds on the second main game side of the second hold display area SG13 shows a number image indicating that there is no hold. 0 is displayed as In addition, although the variation icon of the white icon is displayed in the suspension display area for effecting the variation, it may be erased at the timing of stopping the confirmation of the losing pattern, or before the timing of stopping the confirmation of the losing pattern. (for example, 0.5 seconds before).

(f2) Accompanied by the fulfillment of the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first main game symbols, the hold is canceled and the second fluctuation of the first main game symbols starts. Further, in the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols in the left, middle and right columns corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner. In (f2), since the hold on the first main game side has been exhausted, the hold on the first main game side becomes 0, and the number of the first main game symbols in the situation where there is no hold on the second main game side. The design has changed. The timing of (f2) is the timing when the remaining variation time of the first main game symbol variation is 120 seconds, and at this timing, the specific character snake appears. At the timing when the snake, which is the specific character, is displayed on the effect display device SG, the sub control board S generates an action sound A (3 "Nyoro Nyoro Nyoro") as a sound effect corresponding to the specific advance notice effect A in which the specific character, the snake, appears. Second sound effect) is output-controlled, and the board lamp is specially illuminated in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon (continuously emitting blue light). Further, the sub-control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, but may control the emission in a color corresponding to the specific advance notice effect A (for example, purple).

(g2) Shows the symbol variation in the second variation of the first main game symbol. At the timing of (g2), an action presentation of whether or not to jump into the blue icon is executed. The timing of (g2) is the timing when the remaining variation time of the first main game symbol variation is 115 seconds, and indicates a specific advance notice effect B in which a snake, which is a specific character, jumps into the blue icon. The sub-control board S generates an action sound B (a 2-second sound effect of "Shah!") as a sound effect corresponding to the specific advance notice effect B at the timing of executing the action effect in which the snake, which is the specific character, jumps into the blue icon. ) is controlled, and the board lamp is specially illuminated in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but may control light emission in a color corresponding to the specific advance notice effect B (for example, orange). In this way, the action sound A is output for 3 seconds and the action sound B is output for 2 seconds, thereby forming the second change pattern, and as indicated by (h2), the specific character snake is the variable icon. As a result of jumping against the blue icon, the red icon will be displayed. Note that when the specific character snake runs away from the blue icon, which is the variable icon, without jumping into it (when the specific advance notice effect B is not executed), an action sound, which is a sound effect corresponding to the specific notice effect B, is generated. B is not output, but the board lamp emits light in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon (continuously emits light in blue). Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white.

(h2) Shows the symbol variation in the second variation of the first main game symbol. The timing of (h2) is the timing when the remaining variation time of the symbol variation of the first main game symbol is 110 seconds, and as a result of the specific character snake jumping into the blue icon, the red icon is displayed. At the timing when the red icon is displayed, the sub control board S controls the output of the special holding tone "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24, and also turns the board lamp in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Make a special light. Further, the sub control board S controls the emission of the frame lamp in white, but may control the emission in a color corresponding to the specific advance notice effect B.

In (e2) to (h2), the suspension change effect of executing the second change pattern has been described, but in (e2) to (h2), the suspension change effect of executing the first change pattern may be used. In the case of such a configuration, the change is suspended at (f2), and the red icon is maintained and continuously displayed at (g2).

Thus, the same special hold tone (in this example, the special hold tone corresponding to the red icon) can be executed regardless of whether the first change pattern or the second change pattern, and the same special light emission (in this example, red special light emission). It should be noted that the first variation pattern is not only executed at the time of the pending occurrence display or the shift display, but also after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display (for example, if the variable display is 120 seconds, 5 seconds have passed, 30 seconds have passed, 65 seconds have passed). seconds), and the second variation pattern is also executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display (for example, if the variation display is 120 seconds, 15 seconds have elapsed, 40 seconds have elapsed, and 90 seconds have elapsed. It may be executed at any timing during the passage of time.

Also, with respect to the second change pattern, compared with the first change pattern, the action sound can be executed over the predetermined period of (f2) to (g2) before the special holding sound is executed. By executing the action sound in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the hold change will be performed, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

After the occurrence of the trigger suspension in this way, both the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern can be executed in the symbol variation next to a certain symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation of the second variation). is configured as By configuring in this way, it is possible to maintain a state in which the expectation for the pending change performance is maintained regardless of any fluctuation after the occurrence of the trigger pending, so that the player's interest in the game is reduced. You can play games without

Also, the probability (frequency) of selecting the second variation pattern is different depending on the type of symbol variation next to a certain symbol variation. For example, if the next pattern variation is not a pattern variation for the trigger suspension (symbol variation that executes the first variation pattern in FIG. 226), the pattern variation for the trigger suspension (the second variation pattern in FIG. 226 Executed symbol variation) is configured such that the execution probability of the specific advance notice effect (the frequency at which the specific advance notice effect is selected) is higher. In other words, the execution probability of the specific notice effect in the pattern fluctuation in trigger pending (the frequency of selecting the specific notice effect) is the execution probability of the specific notice effect in the pattern change that is not trigger pending (the frequency of selecting the specific notice effect) constructed higher than By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate pending change effect according to the number of pending executions until the pattern change of the trigger pending and the hit expectation degree of the trigger pending.

Also, for example, the next symbol variation is the symbol variation before the trigger suspension, and is the symbol variation before the trigger suspension rather than the symbol variation in the state of many suspensions (for example, the state of four). It may be configured so that the execution probability of the specific advance notice effect (the frequency of selecting the specific advance notice effect) is higher in the pattern variation in the state where there are few pending (for example, the state where there is one). .

Next, the pending change effect when the alternative display is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is an image diagram regarding the pending change effect when the alternative display is executed.

The alternative display is a display simulating an icon related to the special holding sound or a display reminiscent of the icon related to the special holding sound. An example of large icon display in icon rendering is shown. Also, the alternative display may be referred to as an icon associated with the special hold tone. Further, since the alternative display is also a display imitating the special on-hold image (second variable right display) that is the icon related to the special on-hold music, the alternative display may be referred to as the second pseudo variable right display.

(a) In stage A in the non-reduced time game state, there are two holds on the first main game side, and there is no hold on the second main game side. It indicates that the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of the left column, middle column, and right column corresponding to are in the process of pattern fluctuation. At this timing, a game explanation effect (alternative display) displaying "Red is super hot!" is executed. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of a sound effect for explaining the game (for example, a 2.5-second sound effect of “Jajan!”) and changes the board lamp to white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. to emit light (continuously emitting white light). Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but may control light emission in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the effect of explaining the game.

(b) Shows the first main game symbol during the first variation of the symbol. (b) shows the state after the predetermined time of (a) has passed, but even at the timing of (b), the game explanation effect (alternative display) displaying "Red is super hot!" is continuously executed. ing. Then, at the timing of (b), the change icon from the white icon is changed to the red icon and displayed in the first change pattern of the pending change effect. At the timing when the red icon is displayed on the effect display device SG (the timing of the change of hold), the sub-control board S controls the output of the special hold sound "mi" corresponding to the red icon from the speaker D24, and turns on the board lamp. Special light is emitted in red, which is the color corresponding to the red icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but it may also control light emission in a color corresponding to the game state or effect.

(c) This is the first symbol variation of the first main game symbol and indicates that the ready-to-win effect is in progress. (c) shows the state after the predetermined time has elapsed in (b), and is a normal ready-to-win effect with 7 symbols. At this timing, an alternative display such as a game explanation effect or a large icon effect can be executed, but an example in which it is not executed is shown in (c). Also, at this timing, a red icon is displayed as the variation icon, and the board lamp emits special red light corresponding to the red icon. Also, although the frame lamp emits white light, it may emit light in a color corresponding to the normal reach effect.

(d) This is the first symbol variation of the first main game symbol and indicates that the super ready-to-win effect is in progress. (d) shows the predetermined timing under the situation during the ready-to-win effect, showing the ready-to-win effect developed from the normal ready-to-win effect to the super ready-to-win effect. The predetermined timing is the timing when the normal ready-to-win effect develops into the super ready-to-win effect. During the period during which the super ready-to-win effect is being executed after a predetermined timing, the display of the red icon, which has been displayed in the reserved display area for the effect of the change, is restricted. Specifically, the image of the red icon is erased at a predetermined timing. In addition, at a predetermined timing, the two white reserved icons displayed in the first reserved display area SG12 are also erased, and the effect display area for the change and the first reserved display area SG12 are also erased. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the background image showing stage A is also erased, and the background image of the super ready-to-win effect is displayed (in the figure, the stage is changed to the SP ready-to-win stage). In addition, during the period during execution of the super ready-to-win performance after a predetermined timing, the light emission of the board lamp, which has been specially lighted in the mode of red corresponding to the red icon, is restricted, and the special light emission is interrupted. Specifically, the light emission of the board lamp is turned off and restricted, but the board lamp may be made to emit light in a color (for example, red) corresponding to the expected degree of winning of the super reach effect. When the board lamp emits light in red as a color corresponding to the degree of expectation of winning in the super ready-to-win effect, it is preferable to adopt a light emission mode different from that of the second special light emission (special light emission). Specifically, the second special light emission is emitted in a red lighting mode, but is emitted in a red flashing mode corresponding to the degree of expectation for winning in the super ready-to-win effect. On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white mode or in a color (for example, red) corresponding to the expected degree of winning of the super ready-to-win effect.

(e) At stage A in the non-reduced time game state, after the first variation is completed, there is one hold on the first main game side, and there is a hold on the second main game side. It indicates that the symbol variation of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols of the left row, middle row and right row corresponding to the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the absence situation is in progress. At this timing, a game explanation effect (alternative display) displaying "Red is super hot!" is executed. At this timing, the sub-control board S controls the output of a sound effect for explaining the game (for example, a 2.5-second sound effect of “Jajan!”), and changes the board lamp to white, which is the color corresponding to the white icon. to emit light (continuously emitting white light). Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but may control light emission in a color corresponding to the state of the game or the effect of explaining the game.

(f) Shows the symbol variation of the second variation of the first main game symbol. (f) shows the time after the predetermined time of (e) has passed, and at this timing, the game explanation effect (alternative display) displaying "Red is intense heat!" Since a new hold on the 1st main game side has occurred, there are two holds on the 1st main game side, and there is no hold on the 2nd main game side. It's becoming Since the newly generated pending image is the pending corresponding to the blue icon, the blue icon is displayed in the first change pattern at the timing of the pending occurrence. The sub-control board S controls the output of a special hold sound "re" corresponding to the blue icon from the speaker D24 at the timing when the blue icon based on the hold occurrence is displayed on the effect display device SG (timing of the hold occurrence display). At the same time, the board lamp is made to emit special light in blue, which is the color corresponding to the blue icon. Further, the sub-control board S controls light emission of the frame lamp in white, but it may also control light emission in a color corresponding to the game state or effect.

(g) It is the symbol variation of the second variation of the first main game symbol and indicates that the ready-to-win effect is in progress. (g) shows the state after the predetermined time has elapsed in (f), and is a normal ready-to-win effect with 7 symbols. At this timing, an alternative display such as a game explanation effect or a large icon effect can be executed, and an example of executing the large icon effect is shown. The large icon effect is a effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the icon, and moves from the top to the bottom of the effect display device SG (executes the specific advance notice effect A) and collides with the icon in the icon display area. This is an action presentation where the large icon collides with the icon in the icon display area, resulting in a success pattern in which the display mode of the icon changes (a pattern in which a specific advance notice presentation B is executed), and a pattern in which the large icon is the icon in the icon display area. There is a failure pattern (a pattern in which the specific advance notice effect B is not executed) in which the display mode of the icon does not change due to collision with the . Although the result is not shown here, it shows an example where the failure pattern is executed and the icon does not change. At this timing, a blue icon is displayed as the variation icon, and the board lamp emits special blue light corresponding to the blue icon. Also, although the frame lamp emits white light, it may emit light in a color corresponding to the normal reach effect. When the large icon moves from the top to the bottom of the effect display device SG, a sound effect of "dada dan da dan", which is the action sound A, is output for 3 seconds, and the large icon collides with the icon in the icon display area. If the ball is not bounced back, the sound effect of "Boom", which is the action production B, is output for two seconds.

(h) This is the symbol variation of the second variation of the first main game symbols and indicates that the super ready-to-win effect is in progress. (h) shows the predetermined timing under the situation during the ready-to-win effect, showing the ready-to-win effect developed from the normal ready-to-win effect to the super ready-to-win effect. During the period during which the super ready-to-win effect is being executed after a predetermined timing, the display of the white icon that has been displayed in the reserved display area for the effect of the change is restricted. Specifically, the image of the white icon is erased at a predetermined timing. Further, at a predetermined timing, the reserved icons of the white icon and the blue icon displayed in the first reserved display area SG12 are also erased, and the effect display area for the change and the first reserved display area SG12 are also erased. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing, the background image showing stage A is also erased, and the background image of the super ready-to-win effect is displayed (in the figure, the stage is changed to the SP ready-to-win stage). In addition, during the period during execution of the super ready-to-win performance after a predetermined timing, the light emission of the board lamp, which has been specially emitted in the mode of blue corresponding to the blue icon, is restricted, and the special emission is interrupted. Specifically, the light emission of the board lamp is turned off and restricted, but the board lamp may be made to emit light in a color (for example, blue or red) corresponding to the expected degree of winning of the super reach effect. When the board lamp emits light in blue as a color corresponding to the hit expectation degree of the super ready-to-win effect, it is preferable to adopt a light emission mode different from the first special light emission (special light emission). Specifically, the first special light emission is made to emit light in a blue lighting mode, but is made to emit light in a blue flashing mode corresponding to the degree of expectation of winning in the super ready-to-win effect. On the other hand, the frame lamp emits light in a white mode or in a color (for example, blue) corresponding to the expected degree of winning of the super ready-to-win effect.

As shown in (a), (b), (e) to (g) of FIG. 227, in a situation where an alternative display (for example, a game explanation effect or a large icon effect) is displayed outside the icon display area, a special Icons related to special music on hold (e.g. special icons such as blue icons and red icons) are displayed more than icons related to special music on hold (e.g. special icons such as blue icons and red icons) are displayed in the icon display area is not displayed in the icon display area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to spread the recognition of an icon (for example, a red icon) with a high probability of winning to the extent that the player does not misunderstand.

Also, as shown in (a) and (e) of FIG. 227, icons related to special holding sounds (for example, a red icon for game explanation effects and a red icon for large icon effects) are displayed outside the icon display area. In some cases, the special hold tone and special light emission may not be performed. Since the icon associated with the special holding sound is not an icon for notifying the actual degree of expectation of winning, the player misunderstands the degree of expectation of winning by constructing so that the special holding sound and special light emission corresponding to the icon are not executed. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that does not have a problem. It is preferable that all the icons displayed in the icon display area are normal icons, but the icons displayed in the icon display area may include special icons.

In addition, as shown in (f) of FIG. 227, when an icon (for example, a red icon used in the game explanation effect) related to one special holding sound is displayed outside the icon display area, It is configured such that an icon (for example, a blue icon) related to the special holding tone other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

In addition, when a new hold occurs in a situation where an icon related to a special hold sound (for example, a game explanation effect of a red icon) is displayed outside the icon display area as shown in (f) of FIG. Triggered by the occurrence of such a hold, an icon related to a special hold sound (for example, a blue icon is displayed in (f), but a red icon is displayed) may be displayed in the icon display area. is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to spread the recognition of the icon with a high probability of winning (for example, a red icon), and to provide the player with the expectation that the icon will actually change to the icon with a high probability of winning. be able to.

It should be noted that the icon related to the special hold sound (for example, the red icon for the game explanation effect and the red icon for the large icon effect) is displayed outside the icon display area only in the non-reduced time game state (for example, low base state). , and is configured so as not to be displayed in the time reduction game state (for example, high base state).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, a situation in which an icon related to a special hold sound (for example, a red icon for a game explanation effect or a red icon for a large icon effect) is displayed outside the icon display area is before a predetermined timing. It is configured not to be displayed after a predetermined timing.

Even if the execution probability of the special on-hold music is changed to the third setting or the fourth setting based on the second selection operation, the icon color (for example, red icon) corresponding to the special on-hold music and the color of the same family It is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, a dialogue effect in which the expected degree of winning is 20% and the characters of the dialogue are red), and the fourth setting (execution probability 1%) is the third setting (execution probability 5%). When a special holding sound is generated, the special holding sound is more likely to be a special holding sound of the same system color of the advance notice effect. For example, when a red dialogue announcement is executed in the third setting, a blue icon is more likely to occur than a red icon (including changing to a red icon after a blue icon occurs). The hold tone is less likely to occur than the special hold tone that accompanies the blue icon. On the other hand, in the fourth setting, when the red dialogue announcement is executed, the red icon (including changing to the red icon after the blue icon occurs) is more likely to occur than the blue icon (or the blue icon occurs In some cases, the icon changes to a red icon more easily than in the third setting), so the special holding tone associated with this red icon is more likely to occur than in the third setting. In other words, when the red notice effect is executed with a change that generates a special hold sound (or a change that is executed when the hold that generates a special hold sound is digested), the fourth setting is used rather than the third setting. There is a higher possibility that the special hold accompanied by the red icon will be executed as the special hold tone. Further, in the fourth setting, the special holding tone accompanying the red icon is more likely to occur than the special holding tone accompanying the blue icon. It should be noted that the execution probability of the notice effect of the third setting (for example, a line effect in which the character of the line with the expectation of winning is 20% is red) is the same as that of the notice effect of the fourth setting (for example, the line with the expectation of winning of 20%). It is the same probability as the execution probability of the dialogue production with red characters). In this way, by designing a design that enhances the relevance of the pending change effect (including special hold sound) and the same system (same color system) effect of the notice effect, the occurrence of the red notice effect of the notice effect It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine capable of creating a game property that makes the player expect red-based hold change performance and red-based special hold sound generation.

The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and the concepts listed below can be added to these concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments, as well as the combination and separation (higher-level concepts) of these concepts. may

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (1) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stop-displayed within the certain one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first performance symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when temporarily stopped is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that the second effect symbols variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period. be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (1-2) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
A game information transmission means for transmitting necessary game information to the sub-game part side when the performance display is executed on the sub-game part side, and the second identification information is variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed. is configured so that the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling the first performance symbols to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the second performance symbols in the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display unit;
Both the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be variably displayed within the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display. and is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
When the second identification information is stop-displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
The first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stopped and displayed within the certain effect period, and the temporary When the symbol for the first effect is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the pattern for the first effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern for the first effect A special stop display mode that is not displayed when the symbol is definitely stop-displayed is configured to be temporarily stop-displayed,
A pachinko game characterized in that the second performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period are configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stop-displayed within the certain one performance period. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (2) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying a plurality of types of first effect symbols on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), one type or a combination of multiple types of first effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, a first effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to stop display on the effect display device SG);
After variably displaying a plurality of types of second effect symbols on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), one type or a combination of a plurality of types of second effect symbols is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, Second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to stop display on the performance display device SG),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed within a certain one performance period, they are definitely stopped and displayed, and within the one certain performance period. is configured to deterministically stop display after the second production pattern is variably displayed,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stop-displayed within the certain one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is configured to be variably displayed again within the one effect period, and when the first effect pattern is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, at the time of the stop display A special stop display mode indicating that the special game will not be executed while indicating that there is a possibility that the special game will be executed after that can be stop-displayed as the first effect symbol that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. is composed of
The pattern for the second effect, which is variably displayed within a certain effect period, cannot be temporarily stop-displayed before it is definitely stop-displayed within the certain effect period, or Even if the temporary stop display is performed before the definitive stop display within the period, the special stop display mode is used as the second effect symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types. Even when the second performance symbols are definitely stop-displayed and cannot be stopped-displayed, the special stop display mode is configured not to be stop-displayed as the second performance symbols that are a combination of one type or a plurality of types. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (3) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
A first effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitely stop-displayed within the certain one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first performance symbol is confirmed. A special stop display mode that is not displayed when temporarily stopped is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
The second effect symbol that is variably displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain one effect period,
As the display state of the first performance symbols within a given performance period, there are a first display state in which the variably displayed first performance symbols are visible to the player, and a first variably displayed first performance symbol. is hidden, or a second display state in which the symbols for the first effect are more difficult to see for the player than the first display state, and the second effect within a certain effect period The pattern for use is configured to be displayed at least in the second display state,
When the special stop display mode is temporarily stop-displayed as the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, a specification that cannot be included when the first effect symbol is definitely stop-displayed It is configured to be a first special stop display mode that includes the first effect symbol of the type or a second special stop display mode that does not include the first effect symbol of the specific type,
When the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed within a certain effect period, the second special stop display mode is temporarily stopped rather than the first special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the execution expectation of the special game after the end of the one performance period is higher when the pachinko game machine is statically displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (4) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, symbol reservation means MJ32) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that the reservation occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period,
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to the certain hold are satisfied, if the predetermined conditions are met, the certain hold is designated as a specific hold, and at the time when the certain specific hold occurs , if there is one or more holds that satisfy the conditions for starting variable display of identification information prior to the specific hold, the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to the pending hold for earlier consumption exist. Within one effect period corresponding to the case of being satisfied, the special stop display mode is definitely stop-displayed as the effect symbol only when the effect symbol is definitely stop-displayed, while the identification related to the specific hold is Within one effect period corresponding to the condition for satisfying the variable display start condition of information, the special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect pattern only when the effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (5) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that suspension occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period,
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
If the special stop display mode is stop-displayed as the performance symbol when the performance symbols are definitely or provisionally stop-displayed within a certain performance period, at least one special performance symbol and the special It is configured to be combined with a plurality of normal production patterns that are different types from the production patterns,
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to the certain hold are satisfied, if the predetermined conditions are met, the certain hold is designated as a specific hold, and at the time when the certain specific hold occurs , if there is one or more holds that satisfy the conditions for starting variable display of identification information prior to the specific hold, the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to the pending hold for earlier consumption exist. When the special stop display mode is definitively or temporarily stop-displayed within one performance period corresponding to the case of being satisfied, the plurality of normal performance symbols cannot be of the same type, while the identification related to the specific suspension When the special stop display mode is definitively or provisionally stop-displayed within one performance period corresponding to the satisfaction of the information variable display start condition, the plurality of normal performance symbols can be of the same type. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (6) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state attached to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), and when displaced to the open state, the second start port (for example, the second A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult to enter the ball compared to the state where it is impossible to enter or in the open state;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
First game content determining means (e.g., game content a decision means MN);
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is variably displayed, and then the second identification information is displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
Second game content determining means (e.g., game content a decision means MN);
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second identification information is displayed. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the second identification information;
After the winning judgment result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning judgment result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21),
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and the design for performance can be variably displayed within a certain one performance period. has been
The performance symbols variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are temporarily stop-displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the one performance period, and when the design for performance is definitely or provisionally stopped and displayed, the definite or provisional stop While indicating that the special game will not be executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating the possibility of executing the special game after the definite or provisional stop display is definite or provisional It is configured so that it can be stopped and displayed on
Within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display, and within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the special stop The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode is configured so that the ratio of the fixed display or the provisional stop display is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (7) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. Random number temporary storage means (for example, suspension control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that suspension occurs;
When the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are based on the result of the decision. game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) for determining the mode;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
If there is a predetermined number of reservations at any timing within a certain production period, the first production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period are displayed within the certain production period. It is performed when the conditions for starting variable display of identification information related to any of the predetermined number of reservations are satisfied after the variable display continues even after the end of the one performance period without being definitely stopped and displayed. Within one performance period, while the first performance symbol that is continuously displayed in a variable manner is definitely stopped and displayed,
Even if there is a predetermined number of reservations at any timing within a certain production period, the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period are displayed within the certain production period. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be definitely stopped and displayed at.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (8) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
a game content determining means (for example, game content determining means MN) that executes a win-or-fail decision based on the random number and determines a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game pattern display section A21g, the second main game pattern display section B21g). identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the identification information after
After the result of the winning/failure determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means capable of executing a game (for example, special game control means MP30);
Game information transmission means (eg, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part (eg, sub-control board S) MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After variably displaying the first performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the first performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A first effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
After variably displaying the second performance symbols in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the second performance symbols are controlled to be stopped and displayed in the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). and a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21),
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be variably displayed within a certain performance period,
There are a plurality of types of first performance symbols, and when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the win/fail judgment is winning, the combination of the first performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination is non-winning, the combination of the first performance symbols that are not of the same type is stopped and displayed,
There are a plurality of types of second performance symbols, and when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed when the result of the winning judgment is winning, the combination of the second performance symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination is non-winning, when the second performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the combination of the second performance symbols that are not of the same type is configured to be stopped and displayed,
The combination of the second performance symbols that can be stop-displayed when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is non-winner is larger than the total number of combinations of the first performance symbols that can be stop-displayed when the result of the win-fail judgment is non-won. It is configured so that the total number is smaller,
The effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) has a plurality of types of effect display modes as effect display modes that are dependent when controlling the effect display contents displayed,
When displaying a certain first effect symbol among the plurality of types of first effect symbols, a display attribute related to the certain first effect symbol in a certain type of effect display mode, and a certain type Different from the display attribute related to the certain first effect pattern in a different type of effect display mode from the effect display mode,
When displaying a certain second effect symbol among the plurality of types of second effect symbols, a display attribute related to the certain second effect symbol in a certain type of effect display mode, and the certain type The display attribute of the certain second effect pattern in a different type of effect display mode is configured to be different from the effect display mode,
The result of the success/failure determination is non-won than the probability that the certain first performance symbol is included in the combination of the first performance symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the success/failure determination is non-win. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the combination of the second performance symbols that can be stop-displayed in any case has a higher probability that the certain second performance symbols are included.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (9) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first pending number image and the second pending number image,
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are configured not to be displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (10) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be different display modes. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (11) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
In the normal game state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of holdings of the second holding can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display section, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display section. is viewable and
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first reserved number image and the second reserved number image can be displayed on the effect display section in both the normal game state and the specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (12) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reservations that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied Display of a variation-compatible image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is performed,
In the normal game state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image can be displayed, and when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image is displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it does not.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (13) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved number image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the effect display unit, the second effect pattern and the first reserved image are configured so that they are not displayed in an overlapping manner,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the effect display part is configured so that the second effect pattern and the first reserved number image are not displayed in an overlapping manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (14) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first pending number indicating the pending number of the first pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operation state of the operation member while the variable display is stopped or during the variable display,
a volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display unit when the volume level can be adjusted;
The volume adjustment image, the first effect pattern, and the second effect pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern, and the display priority of the second effect pattern is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern,
the volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first reserved image or the second reserved image, and the display priority of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is the first reserved image or the second reserved image is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
While the fluctuation display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second effect pattern do not overlap,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the sound volume adjustment image and the pattern for second performance do not overlap even during the variable display.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (15) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second pending number when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (16) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image when the display mode of the image is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the specific display mode is more likely than the final display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the first reserved number immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image will be in the specific display mode as the final display mode is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reservation number image when the first retention number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display It is the same as the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start It is a pachinko game machine that features.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (17) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal game state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first performance symbols that can be displayed after the display mode becomes the special display mode is larger than the total number of combination patterns.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (18) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second start port,
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
When the execution of the pending image movement effect is started during execution of the pending image generation effect, the pending image generation effect and the pending image moving effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image generation effect being executed, and when execution of the pending image generation effect is started during execution of the pending image movement effect, the pending image movement effect and the pending image generation effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image movement effect being executed;
When a new variable display starts during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image Execute a second update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image after the execution is finished,
When there is a new entry in the first start opening or the second start opening during the execution of the second update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image, the first reservation number image or the second The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the two reservation number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (19) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first pending number image and the second pending number image,
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are configured not to be displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (20) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation image and the second reservation image are configured to have different display modes,
Even if the number of reservations of the first reservation and the number of reservations of the second reservation are the same, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be different display modes,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (21) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
with
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
In the normal game state, the number of first pending images corresponding to the number of holdings of the first holding and the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of holdings of the second holding can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. is viewable and
In both the normal game state and the specific game state, the first reservation number image and the second reservation number image are configured to be displayed on the effect display unit,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold count image or the second hold count image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (22) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A first area and a second area different from the first area are provided as game areas in which game balls can flow down,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reservations that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied Display of a variation-compatible image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is performed,
In the normal game state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image can be displayed, and when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the variable corresponding image is displayed. is configured not to
A first notification image for notifying that the game ball should be shot toward the first area can be displayed on the effect display unit,
A second notification image for notifying that the game ball should be shot toward the second area can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the first pending number image is updated in the specific game state, it is configured to display the second notification image,
The second notification image can be displayed overlapping with the first production pattern, while the second production pattern, the first reserved image, the second reserved image, the first reserved number image, the second reserved number image and is configured not to display duplicates,
Regardless of whether the first reserved number image is updated in the specific game state, the image should be different from the first notification image and the second notification image, and the game ball should be shot toward the second area side. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that a special notification image for notifying that a special notification image can be displayed on the effect display section.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (23) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start hole than the normal game state,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved number image can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
In the effect display unit, the second effect pattern and the first reserved image are configured so that they are not displayed in an overlapping manner,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the effect display part is configured so that the second effect pattern and the first reserved number image are not displayed in an overlapping manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (24) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). Second performance symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
with
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operation state of the operation member while the variable display is stopped or during the variable display,
a volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display unit when the volume level can be adjusted;
The volume adjustment image, the first effect pattern, and the second effect pattern can be displayed at the same time,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern, and the display priority of the second effect pattern is higher than the display priority of the first effect pattern,
the volume adjustment image, the first pending image or the second pending image, the first pending number image or the second pending number image can be displayed simultaneously,
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first reserved image or the second reserved image, and the display priority of the first reserved number image or the second reserved number image is the first reserved image or the second reserved image is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first effect pattern can be displayed in an overlapping manner,
While the fluctuation display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second effect pattern do not overlap,
It is configured so that the volume adjustment image and the pattern for the second effect do not overlap even during the variable display,
The total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal game state is configured to be greater than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (25) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
When the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a stop display, it is configured not to start a new variable display for a predetermined variable display stop time,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that
The suspension change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information under the condition that the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and the plurality of first suspensions remain. In the case, while the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, the display mode of the first pending number image is configured not to be changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
It is possible to update the display of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
It is possible to update the display of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second starting port,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the change stop time of the first identification information or the change display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (26) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending holds can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A first hold number image indicating the number of holds of the first hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
A second hold number image indicating the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image when the display mode of the image is the second display mode,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, the specific display mode is more likely than the final display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first reserved immediately before the start of the variable display When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved image,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the first reserved number immediately before the start of the variable display Relatively longer than the variable display time of the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the image is in a specific display mode,
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the first production pattern in the variable display related to the first reserved number image will be in the specific display mode as the final display mode is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a specific display mode as the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reservation number image when the first retention number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first pending number image when the first pending number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display is the variable display It is the same as the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first retention number image when the first retention number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start,
The total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the first performance symbols in the normal game state is configured to be greater than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second performance symbols in the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (27) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal game state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state It is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbols that can be displayed after the special display mode as the display mode,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
The first display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect pattern corresponding to the first effect mode, and the second display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect pattern corresponding to the second effect mode, are different. It is configured to be a display mode,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the first rendering mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the first rendering mode, the specific first rendering pattern, which is the first display mode, can be variably displayed. is configured to
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second performance mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second performance mode, the pattern for the specific first performance, which is the second display mode, can be variably displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (28) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is one of the remaining first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that
The suspension change effect is executed during the variable display of the first identification information under the condition that the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and the plurality of first suspensions remain. In the case, while the display mode of the first pending image displayed corresponding to the change target pending can be changed, the display mode of the first pending number image is configured not to be changed,
A pending image generation effect can be executed when a new first pending image or a new second pending image is displayed,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the first holding number image when a new ball enters the first starting port,
A first update display can be executed as a display update of the second holding number image when a new ball enters the second start port,
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image,
It is possible to execute a reserved image movement effect for moving the first reserved image or the second reserved image when a new variable display is started,
When the execution of the pending image movement effect is started during execution of the pending image generation effect, the pending image generation effect and the pending image moving effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image generation effect being executed, and when execution of the pending image generation effect is started during execution of the pending image movement effect, the pending image movement effect and the pending image generation effect can be simultaneously executed without interrupting the pending image movement effect being executed;
When a new variable display starts during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image Execute a second update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image after the execution is finished,
When there is a new entry in the first start port or the second start port during the execution of the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first hold number image or the second The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first update display of the first reservation number image or the second reservation number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the two reservation number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (29) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed during the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to differ,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of The advance notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured differently depending on the contents of the pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (30) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be different depending on whether the type of is a look-ahead performance A or a look-ahead performance B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (31) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the prefetching effect is relatively higher when M types of prefetching effects are executed among the types of prefetching effects. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (32) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
In a situation where a specific hold, which is a first hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, exists, a look-ahead effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the specific hold can be executed by the effect display unit,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. It is constructed so that the probability of displaying the special display mode in the variable display related to the holding which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is relatively higher when M types of look-ahead effect are executed out of the types of look-ahead effect. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (33) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operating member, within one effect period, and by operating the operating member while the operation promoting effect is being displayed, a plurality of types of operations are supported. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
The probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the first operation promoting effect is displayed when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed when the second operation promoting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing after the timing at which the 2-operation promotion effect is displayed is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (34) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operating member, within one effect period, and by operating the operating member while the operation promoting effect is being displayed, a plurality of types of operations are supported. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (35) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of development performances that are performances to be executed after establishment of ready-to-win, and has a plurality of types of post-reach performances that can occur after establishment of ready-to-win and before execution of development performance,
A pachinko machine characterized in that the probability of displaying a special display mode after the occurrence of the post-reach performance is different depending on which of the plurality of types of post-reach performance is generated. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (36) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are configured to be different. ,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the second effect mode are configured to be the same. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (37) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the content of
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period varies according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (38) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
As the types of the specific display modes, a plurality of types including at least a specific display mode A and a specific display mode B are provided, and among the plurality of types of specific display modes, the specific display mode A is the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern. or whether the specific display mode B among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is configured to be different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, the specific display mode A is selected as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern from among the plurality of types of specific display modes, or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is selected as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the type of
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period varies according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (39) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to the hold that is the trigger for executing the prefetching effect is relatively higher when M types of prefetching effects are executed among the types of prefetching effects. and
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of the specific display mode being displayed within a given effect period varies according to the number of times the mode is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (40) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display part, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format,
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-change is executed, or whether the re-change is executed It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
A case where N (N>0) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects, and a case where M (M>N) types of prefetching effects are executed out of a plurality of types of prefetching effects. It is constructed so that the probability of displaying the special display mode in the variable display related to the holding which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect is relatively higher when M types of look-ahead effect are executed out of the types of look-ahead effect. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (41) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the start of variable display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain one effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. Triggered by the display of a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period, or whether or not the special display mode is the provisional display of the first performance pattern within a certain performance period The probability that the specific display mode will be displayed within the certain effect period is different depending on the number of times the mode is displayed,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operating member, within one effect period, and by operating the operating member while the operation promoting effect is being displayed, a plurality of types of operations are supported. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (42) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
an operation member (for example, cross button SB-2) that can be operated by the player;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display part, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format,
Depending on which one of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set, whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-change is executed, or whether the re-change is executed It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different,
It is possible to display an operation prompting effect, which is a effect prompting the user to operate the operating member, within one effect period, and by operating the operating member while the operation promoting effect is being displayed, a plurality of types of operations are supported. It is configured to be able to display one of the productions,
At least a first operation promoting effect and a second operation promoting effect are provided as types of the operation promoting effect, and when the first operation promoting effect is displayed, the timing is after the timing when the first operation promoting effect is displayed. and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation prompting effect is displayed when the second operation prompting effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (43) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
Expectation level of execution of special game when special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within one rendering period in first rendering mode and special display mode within one rendering period in first rendering mode is displayed N+1 times, the difference in the execution expectation of the special game is the execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N>0) times within a given effect period in the second effect mode. It is configured to be smaller than the difference between the degree of expectation and the degree of expectation of execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N+1 times within one performance period in the second performance mode,
It has a plurality of types of development performances that are performances to be executed after establishment of ready-to-win, and has a plurality of types of post-reach performances that can occur after establishment of ready-to-win and before execution of development performance,
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed after the occurrence of the after-reach performance, or the probability of displaying the special display mode, according to which of the plurality of types of after-reach performance has occurred. is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (44) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, a first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first 1 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A);
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information;
According to the determination by the first game content determining means, the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) is controlled to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop displaying the first identification information. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, a second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second 2 main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B);
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the variable display mode of the second identification information;
(e.g., game content determination means MN), according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit, the second identification information is stopped display second Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) an advantageous state for the player; ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S) to the side of the sub-game part,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Effects display content control means (for example, , production display control means SM20),
After the first production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG), the final display mode of the first production pattern is displayed by the production display unit (for example, production display device SG). A first performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
After the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG), the final display mode of the second performance symbols is displayed by the performance display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). A second performance symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls to cause
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be variably displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the pattern for the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the special display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first design for effect, the special display mode A among the plurality of types of special display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first design for effect, or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the special display mode B among the types of special display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the special display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the symbol type of the first effect symbol in the second effect mode are different,
The switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the first effect mode and the switching display mode for switching and displaying the pattern type of the second effect pattern in the second effect mode are the same. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine (A1) according to aspect (45) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. Control so that it can be displayed with
At least one or more production patterns are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the production patterns,
When a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information scheduled to stop and display the identification information in the predetermined manner, it is displayed when the variable display of the new identification information is started after recovery from the power failure. and new identification information after recovery from the power interruption in the event of a power interruption during variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stop-displayed in a mode other than the predetermined mode. It is configured to be the same as the number combination of the production pattern displayed at the start of the variable display of
It has multiple types of production modes when special games are not executed,
A new identification after recovery from the power interruption in the event of a power interruption during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner under a situation in which a certain production mode is set. The number combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the information, and the identification information scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the predetermined mode under the condition that the certain performance mode is set. If the number combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information after recovery from the power failure in the event of a power failure during the variable display is the same. Also, in the situation where the certain production mode is set, when the identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, when the power is interrupted during the variable display of the identification information, after the power is restored from the interruption The display format of the production pattern displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information, and the schedule for the identification information to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode under the circumstances where the certain production mode is set. In the case where the power is cut off during the variable display of the identification information, the display format of the performance pattern displayed when the variable display of the new identification information is started after recovering from the power cut can be different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine (A2) according to aspect (46) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
Identification information display that, when the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, controls the identification information display unit to display the identification information variably and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number related to the certain hold. a control means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. Control so that it can be displayed with
It is possible to execute a final announcement effect for notifying, during the variable display of the identification information, that it is certain that the variable display of the identification information will be stop-displayed in the predetermined manner,
It is possible to execute a definite look-ahead performance for notifying that there is a winning suspension in which the execution of the special game is definite among the remaining suspensions before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to the winning suspension is satisfied. can be,
When the power supply is interrupted during the variable display of the identification information in which the fixed advance notice effect is executed, and the power supply is recovered after that, the change display of the identification information that triggered the execution of the fixed advance notice effect is performed in the predetermined manner. The combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game executed by the stop display is the performance symbol combination A,
When a power failure occurs during the identification information variable display in which the confirmed look-ahead effect is executed, and then the power is restored from the power-off, the identification information variation display corresponding to the winning suspension that triggered the execution of the fixed look-ahead effect. is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, the combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the end of execution of the special game is the performance symbol combination B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance symbol combination A and the performance symbol combination B are configured so that the performance symbol combinations are different.

The pachinko gaming machine (A3) according to aspect (47) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
The rendering movable body is capable of executing a predetermined rendering operation within the one rendering period, and visibility of rendering display contents displayed on the rendering display section by the rendering movable body executing the predetermined rendering operation. is configured to reduce
The rendering movable body is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after power is restored,
When the movable body for performance executes the predetermined performance operation within the one performance period, the first design for performance is hidden, while the second design for performance can be displayed. ,
When the performance movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after the power supply is restored, both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be displayed. has been
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information in which the performance movable body is scheduled to perform the predetermined performance operation in the one performance period to the start of the execution of the predetermined performance operation is the power supply interruption. From the start of the execution of the predetermined initializing action in the case where the rendering movable body executes the predetermined initializing action within a predetermined period after returning from the start to the end of the execution of the predetermined initializing action The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be longer than the period of .

The pachinko gaming machine (A4) according to aspect (48) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
In the normal game state and when the combination of the symbols for the first effect is displayed outside the one effect period, when the power is cut off, the symbols for the first effect to be displayed after the power is turned off are displayed. The combination is configured so that the first performance symbols can be displayed in a display format different from the display format of the first performance symbols before the power interruption occurs,
In the specific game state and when the combination of the symbols for the first effect is displayed outside the one effect period, if the power is cut off, the symbols for the first effect to be displayed after the power is turned off will be displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the combination is configured to be the first performance symbols in the same display format as the first performance symbols before the power cutoff occurs.

The pachinko gaming machine (A5) according to aspect (49) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
Identification information display that, when the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, controls the identification information display unit to display the identification information variably and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number related to the certain hold. a control means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period, and after the performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed on the performance display section. Control so that it can be displayed with
If the power is cut off during the identification information change display in a situation where the identification information that triggers the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state is displayed and the change does not remain and does not occur again, the relevant When the combination of performance symbols is displayed after the power is turned off, the combination of performance symbols is displayed once in the display format corresponding to the specific game state, and then displayed in the display format corresponding to the normal game state. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a combination of performance symbols at the same time.

The pachinko gaming machine (A6) according to the aspect (50) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
In response to occurrence of a predetermined error, a predetermined error screen can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined error screen and the combination of the first effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined error screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbols,
When the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first effect symbols and the combination of the second effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the first effect symbols overlap. is configured so that the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the second effect pattern do not overlap,
Even when the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first performance symbols and the combination of the second performance symbols are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment screen is displayed based on the predetermined player operation to adjust the volume level. is adjustable and
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect pattern and the combination of the second effect pattern are displayed at the same time, the display of the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect pattern,
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect pattern and the combination of the second effect pattern are displayed at the same time, the display area of the volume adjustment screen and the display area of the first effect pattern overlap, but the volume adjustment screen This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display area of and the display area of the pattern for second performance are configured so as not to overlap each other.

The pachinko gaming machine (A7) according to aspect (51) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
It is possible to display an operation instruction effect to prompt the operation of a predetermined operation member within the one effect period on the effect display unit, and it is possible to detect that the predetermined operation member is operated under the condition that the operation instruction effect is displayed. Correspondingly, a predetermined effect can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the operation instruction effect and the first effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the operation instruction effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol,
In a situation in which the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member under the condition in which the operation instruction effect is displayed, the predetermined effect, the first effect pattern, and the second effect. When the symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect pattern, while the display of the predetermined effect is higher than the second effect symbol. display priority is lower than the display of ,
The display area for the predetermined effect is larger than the display area for the operation instruction effect, and while the display area for the operation instruction effect and the display area for the first effect pattern may overlap, the display area for the operation instruction effect and the display area for the first effect pattern may overlap. It does not overlap with the display area of the second production pattern,
In the situation in which the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member under the condition in which the operation instruction effect is displayed, the display area of the predetermined effect is the first effect symbol. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display area and the display area of the pattern for second performance are overlapped.

The pachinko gaming machine (A8) according to the aspect (52) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
Under the specific game state, the first change state and the first change state have at least a second change state in which the selection tendency of the change display time of the identification information is different, and under the normal game state. Both the first variation state and the second variation state have at least a normal variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
It is possible to shift from the specific game state and first fluctuation state to the specific game state and second fluctuation state, and from the specific game state and second fluctuation state to the normal game state and normal fluctuation state.
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display part within the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
The display format of the first effect symbols when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state, and the combination of the first effect symbols in the specific game state and the second variation state Although the display format is the same as the display format of the symbols for the first effect when displayed, the symbols for the first effect are used when the combination of the symbols for the first effect is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state. As for the display format of the symbols, when the combination of symbols for the first effect is displayed in the specific game state and the second variation state, the display format of the first effect symbols is also the first effect in the normal game state and the normal variation state. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display format of the symbols for first performance when the combination of symbols for use is displayed is different from that of the symbols for first performance.

The pachinko gaming machine (A9) according to the aspect (53) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
It has at least a production mode A and a production mode B as production modes when the special game is not executed,
Regarding the first performance symbols that are variably displayed within the one performance period under the situation where the performance mode A is set, the first performance is performed before the final combination of the first performance symbols is displayed. When the provisional display mode of the design for use can be displayed and the provisional display mode of the design for the first performance is displayed, the re-variation is executed to variably display the design for the first performance again within the one performance period. possible, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed, a special display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect pattern is configured to be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed for the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within the one effect period under the condition that the effect mode B is set,
The final combination of the first performance symbols is displayed within the one performance period corresponding to the stop display of the identification information in a mode other than the predetermined mode under the condition that the performance mode A is set. In such a case, a specific combination may be displayed, but under the situation where the presentation mode B is set, the first display is performed within the one presentation period corresponding to the stop display of the identification information in a mode other than the predetermined mode. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific combination is not displayed when the final combination of performance symbols is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A10) according to the aspect (54) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
At least one or more first effect symbols are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the first effect symbols,
At least one or more second effect symbols are provided with numbers as constituent elements of the second effect symbols,
In the event that a power failure occurs while the identification information is to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner, the identification information is displayed when the identification information starts to be changed and displayed again after the power is restored from the power failure. In the event that a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode, the combination of the symbols for the first effect that has been performed and the identification information has been recovered from the power failure. is configured to be the same as the combination of the first effect symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information,
When a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information scheduled to stop and display the identification information in the predetermined manner, it is displayed when the variable display of the new identification information is started after recovery from the power failure. and a combination of the numbers of the symbols for the second effect that is present, and the identification information is to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode. is configured to be the same as the number combination of the second effect symbol displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information,
It has multiple types of production modes when special games are not executed,
When a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode under a situation in which a certain production mode is set, the new power supply after the power failure is recovered. The identification information is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode under the circumstances where the combination of the first effect symbol displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information and the certain effect mode is set. The combination of the first performance symbols displayed at the start of the new identification information fluctuation display after recovery from the power interruption in the event of a power interruption during the identification information fluctuation display is the same. Even if it becomes, the display format of the first production pattern is configured to be different,
A new identification after recovery from the power interruption in the event of a power interruption during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined manner under a situation in which a certain production mode is set. The number combination of the second effect symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of information, and the identification of the scheduled display of the identification information to be stop-displayed in a manner other than the above-mentioned predetermined mode under the circumstances in which the certain effect mode is set. The number combination of the second performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information after recovering from the power failure in the event of power failure during the variable display of information becomes the same. Even in such a case, when the power is cut off during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stop-displayed in the predetermined manner under the circumstances where the certain production mode is set The display format of the second effect pattern displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information after returning, and the identification information in a situation other than the predetermined mode under the condition that the certain effect mode is set In the event that a power failure occurs during the variable display of the identification information that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed, the display of the second effect pattern that is displayed at the start of the variable display of the new identification information after recovery from the power failure. The format is configured to be the same as
With respect to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display mode can be displayed. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute re-variation to be displayed in a variable manner again within the one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the last of the first effect symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as a display mode can be displayed,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the special display mode is not displayed within a certain one performance period for the second performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain one performance period.

The pachinko gaming machine (A11) according to the aspect (55) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
Identification information display that, when the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, controls the identification information display unit to display the identification information variably and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number related to the certain hold. a control means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
For the first performance symbols variably displayed within one performance period, the provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In some cases, when a specific display mode not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed, one of the plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. and
Among the plurality of types of specific display modes in which the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, the specific display mode A is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, or Contents of the advance notice effect displayed before the specific display mode is displayed with the probability that the specific display mode B among the specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect. are configured differently depending on the
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
It is possible to execute a final announcement effect for notifying, during the variable display of the identification information, that it is certain that the variable display of the identification information will be stop-displayed in the predetermined manner,
It is possible to execute a definite look-ahead performance for notifying that there is a winning suspension in which the execution of the special game is definite among the remaining suspensions before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to the winning suspension is satisfied. can be,
When the power supply is interrupted during the variable display of the identification information in which the fixed advance notice effect is executed, and the power supply is recovered after that, the change display of the identification information that triggered the execution of the fixed advance notice effect is performed in the predetermined manner. The combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the execution of the special game executed by the stop display is the performance symbol combination A,
When a power failure occurs during the identification information variable display in which the confirmed look-ahead effect is executed, and then the power is restored from the power-off, the identification information variation display corresponding to the winning suspension that triggered the execution of the fixed look-ahead effect. is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, the combination of the performance symbols displayed at the start of the variable display of the identification information after the end of execution of the special game is the performance symbol combination B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the performance symbol combination A and the performance symbol combination B are configured so that the performance symbol combinations are different.

The pachinko gaming machine (A12) according to aspect (56) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
The rendering movable body is capable of executing a predetermined rendering operation within the one rendering period, and visibility of rendering display contents displayed on the rendering display unit by the rendering movable body executing the predetermined rendering operation. is configured to reduce
The rendering movable body is configured to be able to perform a predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after power is restored,
When the movable body for performance executes the predetermined performance operation within the one performance period, the first design for performance is hidden, while the second design for performance can be displayed. ,
When the performance movable body executes the predetermined initialization operation within a predetermined period after the power supply is restored, both the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol can be displayed. has been
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information in which the performance movable body is scheduled to perform the predetermined performance operation in the one performance period to the start of the execution of the predetermined performance operation is the power supply interruption. From the start of the execution of the predetermined initializing action in the case where the rendering movable body executes the predetermined initializing action within a predetermined period after returning from the start to the end of the execution of the predetermined initializing action is configured to be longer than the period of
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns of the final combination of first performance symbols is configured to be greater than the total number of patterns of the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A13) according to aspect (57) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
In the normal game state and when the combination of symbols for the first performance is displayed outside the one performance period, when the power is cut off, the combination of the symbols for the first performance is restored after the power is cut off. When is displayed, it is configured so that the display format can be different from the display format of the first effect symbol before the power failure occurs,
In the specific game state, when the power supply is interrupted under the condition that the combination of symbols for the first effect is displayed outside the one effect period, the combination of the symbols for the first effect is performed after the power is recovered from the power loss. When is displayed, it is configured to be the same display format as the display format of the first production pattern before the power failure occurs,
At least a first effect mode and a second effect mode are provided as effect modes depending on which effect display contents to be displayed in the effect display unit are determined,
The first display format, which is the display format of the specific first performance symbols corresponding to the first performance mode, and the second display format, which is the display format of the specific first performance symbols corresponding to the second performance mode, are different. It is configured to be a display format,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the first presentation mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the first presentation mode, the pattern for the specific first presentation, which is the first display format, can be variably displayed. is configured to
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second performance mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second performance mode, the pattern for the specific first performance, which is the second display format, can be variably displayed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine (A14) according to aspect (58) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second 2 main game start gate B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
Identification information display that, when the conditions for starting the variable display of identification information related to a certain hold are satisfied, controls the identification information display unit to display the identification information variably and then stop displaying the identification information based on the random number related to the certain hold. a control means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a starting hole than in the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the game is controlled to be in the specific game state after execution of the special game is finished. game state control means;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
If a power outage occurs during the variable display of identification information that is scheduled to transition from the specific game state to the normal game state and does not remain pending, the design for production will be displayed after returning from the power outage. When the combination is displayed, the combination of performance symbols is once displayed in the display format corresponding to the specific game state, and then the combination of performance symbols is displayed in the display format corresponding to the normal game state. has been
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific advance notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period,
In the effect display section, the shooting notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect pattern, while the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect pattern. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine (A15) according to aspect (59) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
In response to occurrence of a predetermined error, a predetermined error screen can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined error screen and the combination of the first effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined error screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbols,
When the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first effect symbols and the combination of the second effect symbols are displayed at the same time, the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the first effect symbols overlap. is configured so that the display area of the predetermined error screen and the display area of the second effect pattern do not overlap,
Even when the predetermined error screen, the combination of the first performance symbols and the combination of the second performance symbols are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment screen is displayed based on the predetermined player operation to adjust the volume level. is adjustable and
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect pattern and the combination of the second effect pattern are displayed at the same time, the display of the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect pattern,
When the combination of the volume adjustment screen, the first effect pattern and the combination of the second effect pattern are displayed at the same time, the display area of the volume adjustment screen and the display area of the first effect pattern overlap, but the volume adjustment screen The display area of and the display area of the second effect pattern are configured so as not to overlap,
For the first performance symbols variably displayed within one performance period, the provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In some cases, when a specific display mode not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed, one of the plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. and
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the content of
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns of the final combination of first performance symbols is configured to be greater than the total number of patterns of the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A16) according to the aspect (60) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
It is possible to display an operation instruction effect to prompt the operation of a predetermined operation member within the one effect period on the effect display unit, and it is possible to detect that the predetermined operation member is operated under the condition that the operation instruction effect is displayed. Correspondingly, a predetermined effect can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the operation instruction effect and the first effect symbol are displayed at the same time, the display of the operation instruction effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect symbol,
In a situation in which the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member under the condition in which the operation instruction effect is displayed, the predetermined effect, the first effect pattern, and the second effect. When the symbols are displayed at the same time, the display of the predetermined effect has a higher display priority than the display of the first effect pattern, while the display of the predetermined effect is higher than the second effect symbol. display priority is lower than the display of ,
The display area for the predetermined effect is larger than the display area for the operation instruction effect, and while the display area for the operation instruction effect and the display area for the first effect pattern may overlap, the display area for the operation instruction effect and the display area for the first effect pattern may overlap. It does not overlap with the display area of the second production pattern,
In the situation in which the predetermined effect is displayed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation member under the condition in which the operation instruction effect is displayed, the display area of the predetermined effect is the first effect symbol. It is configured to overlap both the display area and the display area of the second effect pattern,
For the first performance symbols variably displayed within one performance period, the provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In some cases, when a specific display mode not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed, one of the plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. and
With respect to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display mode can be displayed. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a re-variation to be displayed in a variable manner again within the one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, the last of the first effect symbol It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as a display mode can be displayed,
The display mode is different from the specific display mode and the special display mode,
At least a first operation instruction presentation and a second operation instruction presentation are provided as types of operation instruction presentation, and when the first operation instruction presentation is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation instruction presentation is displayed. and the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation instruction effect is displayed when the second operation instruction effect is displayed. configured differently,
The probability that the special display mode is displayed at the timing after the timing at which the first operation instruction effect is displayed when the first operation instruction effect is displayed, and the probability that the special display mode is displayed when the second operation instruction effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the probability of displaying the special display mode is different at the timing after the timing when the 2-operation instruction performance is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (A17) according to the aspect (61) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state control means for controlling;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
Under the specific game state, the first change state and the first change state have at least a second change state in which the selection tendency of the change display time of the identification information is different, and under the normal game state. Both the first variation state and the second variation state have at least a normal variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
It is possible to shift from the specific game state and first fluctuation state to the specific game state and second fluctuation state, and from the specific game state and second fluctuation state to the normal game state and normal fluctuation state.
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
The display format of the first effect symbols when the combination of the first effect symbols is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state, and the combination of the first effect symbols in the specific game state and the second variation state The display format is the same as the display format of the symbols for the first effect when displayed, but for the first effect when the combination of the symbols for the first effect is displayed in the specific game state and the first variation state. As for the display format of the symbols, when the combination of symbols for the first effect is displayed in the specific game state and the second variation state, the display format of the first effect symbols is also the first effect in the normal game state and the normal variation state. It is configured to be different from the display format of the first production pattern when the combination of patterns is displayed,
For the first performance symbols variably displayed within one performance period, the provisional display mode of the first performance symbols is displayed before the final combination is displayed within the one performance period. In some cases, when a specific display mode not included in the final combination of the first effect symbols is displayed, one of the plurality of types of development effects is executed after the specific display mode is displayed. and
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A notice effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. are configured differently depending on the content of
The effect display unit can execute a prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the remaining hold,
As types of look-ahead effects, a plurality of types including at least a look-ahead effect A and a look-ahead effect B are provided,
When the specific display mode is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern, whether the specific display mode A among the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect pattern or the plurality of A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B among the types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. is configured to differ depending on whether the type of is prefetching effect A or prefetching effect B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total number of patterns of the final combination of first performance symbols is configured to be greater than the total number of patterns of the final combination of second performance symbols.

The pachinko gaming machine (A18) according to the aspect (62) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display section during the one performance period, the final combination of the first performance symbols is made. is displayed on the production display unit, and after the second production pattern is variably displayed by the production display unit within the one production period, the final combination of the second production pattern is produced. Control so that it can be displayed in the department,
It has at least a production mode A and a production mode B as production modes when the special game is not executed,
Regarding the first performance symbols that are variably displayed within the one performance period under the situation where the performance mode A is set, the first performance is performed before the final combination of the first performance symbols is displayed. When the provisional display mode of the design for use can be displayed and the provisional display mode of the design for the first performance is displayed, the re-variation is executed to variably display the design for the first performance again within the one performance period. possible, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed, a special display mode that is not included in the final combination of the first effect pattern is configured to be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed for the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within the one effect period under the condition that the effect mode B is set,
The final combination of the first performance symbols is displayed within the one performance period corresponding to the stop display of the identification information in a mode other than the predetermined mode under the condition that the performance mode A is set. In such a case, a specific combination may be displayed, but under the situation where the presentation mode B is set, the first display is performed within the one presentation period corresponding to the stop display of the identification information in a mode other than the predetermined mode. The specific combination is configured not to be displayed when the final combination of the performance symbols is displayed,
While the variable display format of the first performance symbols in the performance mode A and the variable display format of the first performance symbols in the performance mode B are different,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the variable display format of the second performance symbols in the performance mode A and the variable display format of the second performance symbols in the performance mode B are the same.

The pachinko gaming machine (B1) according to the aspect (63) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within one performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
At least a first element (e.g., character) and a second element (e.g., number) are included as elements of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking action that can be executed when a predetermined time has passed after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a state other than the predetermined mode in a state where no hold remains,
The first swing motion is a mode in which the first element and the second element swing, and the second swing motion is a mode in which the first element swings while the second element does not swing. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be.

When the first production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the swinging action of the first production pattern is changed to a variable standby state in which the first production pattern is definitely stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen in which the design for production is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to give movement to the liquid crystal screen. Only the second element (number) is fixedly displayed without swinging, so that an effect can be provided that does not make the player misunderstand that the pattern is fluctuating.

The pachinko gaming machine (B2) according to the aspect (64) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking action that can be executed when a predetermined time has passed after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a state other than the predetermined mode in a state where no hold remains,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the predetermined time is longer than the variable fixed time.

While securing the time for indicating the definitive stop display of the first production pattern as a variable fixed time, when the first production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the first By applying the swaying motion of the performance symbols even during the variable standby state in which the first performance symbols are displayed in a definite stop state, even in the game standby state after the lapse of the variable fixed time, a dull screen ( In the case of configuring to avoid (giving movement on the liquid crystal screen) to avoid the screen where the design for production is just stopped), it is necessary to start the shaking action after at least the time of the fixed fluctuation time. By configuring it, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the next fluctuation has started.

The pachinko gaming machine (B3) according to aspect (65) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a speaker (for example, a speaker D24) that outputs a production sound;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
In a situation where a predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed, the effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the effect symbols,
The standby demo screen can be displayed on the effect display unit when a specific time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no hold remains,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined time, which is shorter than the specific time, elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no suspension remains. and
The second shaking motion can be executed even after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where no pending state remains,
When the second shaking motion is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information was stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no suspension remains, the second shaking motion is started at the timing of starting the second shaking motion. While directing sound can be output,
A second wobbling action to be performed after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where no pending remains The pachinko game machine is characterized in that during the execution of the third swinging motion, which is the swinging motion of (1), the effect sound is not output.

When the first production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the swinging action of the first production pattern is changed to the variable standby state in which the first production pattern is definitely stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen in which the design for production is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to give movement to the liquid crystal screen. When the shaking motion (second shaking motion) is first started in the variable standby state, the production sound (stage BGM) is continued to be output to appeal to the game machine, while the standby demo screen (standby movie) is displayed. If the shaking motion is performed after the display (for example, the second shaking motion or the third shaking motion that is the second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends), power saving Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate effect output mode according to the variable standby state, such as stopping (muting) the output of the effect sound.

The pachinko gaming machine (B4) according to aspect (66) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined action includes at least a special action (for example, tenpai action) that can be executed when the design for production forms a ready-to-win state,
The performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows are configured to be capable of executing a special action, while the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows of the predetermined performance symbol rows. is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute special actions.

One display row (first production pattern in the left column, first production pattern in the right column) other than the other display row (first production pattern in the middle row, which is the final By preparing an action that may be performed only with the first performance pattern of one performance pattern), the other display row (first performance pattern of the middle row, which is the last row) It is possible to visually notify the notable tenpai in the process until the pattern stops.

The pachinko gaming machine (B5) according to aspect (67) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to execute re-variation of the performance symbols,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
An operation pattern related to a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the ready-to-win state is formed, and a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the non-reach state is formed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so that the operation pattern is different from the related operation pattern.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B5) according to aspect (67) is
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the motion pattern associated with the predetermined motion is a predetermined number of types and/or combinations of motions.

In recent years, popular effects such as pseudo-continuous effects (effects with re-fluctuations) are performed. To diversify the flow of a conventional uniform quasi-continuous performance by the difference in the visual mode of the first performance pattern by varying the chronological contents of the action of the first performance pattern. can be done.

The pachinko gaming machine (B6) according to aspect (68) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined motion includes at least a fixed position motion that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display section,
When the final combination of the performance symbols indicating that the special game is not executed after the ready-to-win state is formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows. A pachinko game machine characterized in that the symbols are configured so as to be capable of performing a fixed position operation, while the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol sequence are configured not to perform a fixed position operation. is.

In addition, the pachinko game machine (B6) according to the aspect (68), as shown in FIG.
When the final combination of the performance symbols indicating that the ready-to-win state is not formed and the special game is not executed is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row (for example, the middle row). A pachinko machine characterized in that both the performance symbols corresponding to the columns (for example, the left row and the right row) and the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol rows are configured to be able to perform fixed position operations. It is a game machine.

By configuring in this way, by performing a fixed position operation even in the first production pattern of the display row (middle row) that does not form a reach state if the normal pattern variation of the loss or the normal reach variation of the loss is temporarily On the other hand, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the unsuccessful super ready-to-win effect and perform the fixed position operation further, so that the fixed position operation is omitted, so that the unsuccessful super ready-to-win effect is omitted. It is possible to realize the seamless movement of the pattern for the first production according to the route production.

The pachinko gaming machine (B7-1) according to aspect (69) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows among the plurality of performance symbol rows. cage,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that is variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row temporarily stopped and displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is constructed so that the pattern for performance corresponding to the row can be overlapped at a predetermined timing when a ready-to-win state is formed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B7-1) according to aspect (69) is
The ratio of overlap between the first element of the performance symbol of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol fluctuation forming the ready-to-win state is It is larger than the overlap ratio of overlapping of the first element of the performance pattern of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol fluctuation to be in the non-reach state. The pachinko game machine is characterized by:

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B7-2) according to aspect (70) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
At a predetermined timing within one performance period, the performance symbols of one performance pattern row and the performance symbols of the other performance symbol rows are configured to overlap,
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the performance pattern of one performance pattern row overlaps with the first element of the performance pattern of another production pattern row, but the first element of the performance pattern of the other performance pattern row The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second element of the performance pattern of the pattern row and the second element of the performance pattern of the other performance pattern row are configured so as not to overlap each other.

In this way, when adding movement to the pattern for the first production, the character as the first element is allowed to overlap adjacent characters in order to give a sense of dynamism, while the big hit is which number will stop. By configuring the number as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it becomes a mode so that it does not overlap, while diversifying the movement of the first production pattern itself, it is possible to achieve the original purpose of the first production pattern. It is possible not to deviate from the role of notifying a certain big hit or loss.

The pachinko gaming machine (B8) according to the aspect (71) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
In a situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the specific hold is suggested or notified using the production pattern. ) can be executed in the effect display unit,
When a specific hold is triggered by a ball entering a starting hole during pattern fluctuation under a situation where no hold remains, is there any hold that is digested prior to the specific hold during the pattern fluctuation? Depending on whether or not, and/or depending on how many reserves are digested prior to the specific reserve during the pattern fluctuation, the performance mode of the design pre-reading performance for performance is configured to be different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize or guess that a specific hold (trigger hold) has occurred when executing the look-ahead effect (chance look-ahead look-ahead effect) suggested or notified using the first effect pattern. By allowing the player to select whether or not to accumulate the reserves at the timing, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as making the subsequent performance mode different.

The pachinko gaming machine (B9) according to the aspect (72) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance patterns (for example, three first performance patterns of the left row, the middle row, and the right row) are produced in the one production period. a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit after the variable display is performed on the display unit;
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
In the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of suspensions is the first number and the variable display is started, and the number of suspensions fluctuates in the second number, which is larger than the first number. While the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the display is started is different, in the specific game state, the number of suspensions is the first number and the predetermined number when the display is started The order of stop display of the number of performance symbols is the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols in the case where the number of reservations starts to change with the second number. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

By configuring in this way, in the normal game state (non-time shortened game state) that emphasizes production rather than the variation efficiency, and the specific game state (time shortened game state) that emphasizes the variation efficiency, the first production pattern is shown. By differentiating the direction, the player can recognize in which state the variation occurs, and the pattern variation of the first performance symbol can be made suitable for each state.

The pachinko gaming machine (B10) according to the aspect (73) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the first random number obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the variable display time of the first identification information is selected, and the first identification information is displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed by the first identification information display unit. first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the second identification information is selected, and the second identification information is displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed by the second identification information display unit. a second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display;
Special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a second starting port than the normal game state as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is regarded as one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance symbols (for example, the left column, the middle column, and the right column) are displayed within the one performance period. a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of performance symbols in the performance display unit after variably displaying the performance symbols in the performance display unit;
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
When the first identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of first reservations is the first number and the variable display is started, and the number of first reservations While the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols is different when the variable display is started with the second number larger than the first number, the first identification information is variable display in the specific game state. In the case where the number of first reservations is the first number and the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started, and the number of the first reservations is the second number when the variable display is started is configured to be the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols in
When the second identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of second reservations starts to be variably displayed with the first number, and the number of second reservations is configured to be the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started with the second number, and when the second identification information is variable and displayed in the specific game state, the second The order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of second reservations starts to be displayed fluctuating with the first number, and the predetermined number when the number of second reservations starts fluctuating display with the second number The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the stop display order of the performance symbols is the same as that of the .

By configuring in this way, the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state) or the specific game state (time-reduced game state) after the end of the second identification information for the first production pattern corresponding to the change, Since it is possible to return to the game on the side of the first identification information, which is the main game of the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), which is the original game property, by configuring it to be consumed immediately, the mode of the first effect symbol While the is simple, by performing the minimum actions corresponding to the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the game on the side of the first identification information. .

The pachinko gaming machine (B11) according to the aspect (74) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
At least a first element (e.g., character) and a second element (e.g., number) are included as elements of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined motion includes at least a swinging motion of the design for production,
As a swing motion
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a state other than the predetermined mode in a state where no hold remains,
The first swing motion is a mode in which the first element and the second element swing, and the second swing motion is a mode in which the first element swings while the second element does not swing. is configured to be
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the execution time of one predetermined motion other than the swing motion is shorter than the execution time of the swing motion in one performance period.

When the first performance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during symbol fluctuation), the swinging action of the first performance symbol is changed to the variable standby state in which the first performance symbol is definitely stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen in which the design for production is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to give movement to the liquid crystal screen. Only the second element (number) is fixedly displayed without performing a swinging motion, so that an effect can be provided that does not make the player misunderstand that the pattern is fluctuating.

The pachinko gaming machine (B12) according to the aspect (75) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined motion includes at least a swinging motion of the design for production,
As a swing motion
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the identification information was stopped and displayed in a state other than the predetermined mode in a state where no hold remains,
The predetermined time is configured to be longer than the variable fixed time,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total execution time of a predetermined motion other than a swinging motion is longer than the variable fixed time within a given performance period.

While securing the time for indicating the definitive stop display of the first effect pattern as a variable fixed time, when the first effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the first By applying the swaying motion of the performance pattern even during the variable standby state in which the first performance symbol is definitely stopped and displayed, a dull screen is displayed even in the game standby state after the variable fixed time elapses ( In the case of a configuration that avoids making a screen where the production pattern is just stopped (giving movement on the liquid crystal screen), it is necessary to start the shaking action after at least the time of the fixed fluctuation time. By configuring it, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the next fluctuation has started.

The pachinko gaming machine (B13) according to the aspect (76) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a speaker (for example, a speaker D24) that outputs a production sound;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
The performance symbols that are variably displayed within a certain performance period can be provisionally stop-displayed before they are definitely stop-displayed within the certain one performance period, and are definitely stop-displayed. When the
In a situation where a predetermined effect mode is set when the special game is not executed, the effect sound can be output at least during the variable display of the effect symbols,
The standby demo screen can be displayed on the effect display unit when a specific time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no hold remains,
The design for production can execute a predetermined operation,
The predetermined motion includes at least a swinging motion of the design for production,
As a swing motion
a first shaking motion that can be executed when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed;
and a second shaking motion that can be executed when a predetermined time shorter than the specific time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a state other than the predetermined mode in a state where the suspension does not remain. cage,
The second shaking motion can be executed even after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where no pending state remains,
When the second shaking motion is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information was stopped and displayed in a non-predetermined manner in a situation where no suspension remains, the second shaking motion is started at the timing of starting the second shaking motion. While directing sound can be output,
A second wobbling action to be performed after the display of the standby demo screen ends in a situation where no pending remains During the execution of the third shaking motion, which is the shaking motion of , the production sound is not output,
The execution time of one predetermined motion other than the swinging motion is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the swinging motion within one performance period,
This pachinko game machine is characterized in that the total execution time of a predetermined motion other than a swinging motion is longer than the variable fixed time within a given performance period.

When the first production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (including during pattern fluctuation), the swinging action of the first production pattern is changed to the variable standby state in which the first production pattern is definitely stopped and displayed. By applying it to the inside, it is possible to avoid a dull screen (a screen in which the design for production is just stopped) even in the variable standby state, and it is possible to give movement to the liquid crystal screen. When the shaking motion (second shaking motion) is first started in the variable standby state, the production sound (stage BGM) is continued to be output to appeal to the game machine, while the standby demo screen (standby movie) is displayed. If the shaking motion is performed after the display (for example, (for example, the second shaking motion, or the third shaking motion that is the second shaking motion that is executed after the display of the standby demo screen ends)) , the output of the effect sound is stopped (silenced) for power saving.

The pachinko gaming machine (B14) according to aspect (77) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of effect pattern rows, and is configured to be able to variably display the effect symbols in each of the plurality of effect pattern rows,
Among the plurality of performance symbol rows, the same kind of performance symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol row, thereby forming a ready-to-win state.
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
The predetermined action includes at least a special action (for example, tenpai action) that can be executed when the design for production forms a ready-to-win state,
The performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows are configured to be capable of executing a special action, while the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows of the predetermined performance symbol rows. is configured not to perform any special actions,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that is variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row temporarily stopped and displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is constructed so that the pattern for performance corresponding to the row can be overlapped at a predetermined timing when a ready-to-win state is formed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B14) according to aspect (77) is
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the effect pattern of one display row and the first element of the effect pattern of the other display row overlap, but the effect symbol of the one display row overlaps. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second element of the second element and the second element of the effect pattern of another display row are configured so as not to overlap.

One display row (first production pattern in the left column, first production pattern in the right column) other than the other display row (first production pattern in the middle row, which is the final By preparing an action that may be performed only with the first performance pattern of one performance pattern), the other display row (first performance pattern of the middle row, which is the last row) It is possible to visually notify the notable tenpai in the process until the pattern stops.

The pachinko gaming machine (B15) according to aspect (78) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows among the plurality of performance symbol rows. cage,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to execute re-variation of the performance symbols,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
An operation pattern related to a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the ready-to-win state is formed, and a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the non-reach state is formed. It is configured to be different from the related operation pattern,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that is variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row temporarily stopped and displayed. Designs for production corresponding to the row are configured to be able to overlap at a predetermined timing when the ready-to-win state is formed,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be performed, while the shaking motion is configured to be performed. It is a pachinko machine.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B15) according to aspect (78) is
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the effect pattern of one display row and the first element of the effect pattern of the other display row overlap, but the effect symbol of the one display row overlaps. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second element of the second element and the second element of the effect pattern of another display row are configured so as not to overlap.

In recent years, when popular effects such as pseudo-continuous effects (effects with re-fluctuation) are performed, depending on the effect process (the first effect pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed) until the pseudo-continuous is performed, To diversify the flow of conventional uniform quasi-continuous performance by different modes of visual first performance patterns by varying the chronological contents of the action of the first performance patterns. can be done.

The pachinko gaming machine (B16) according to aspect (79) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode; a game state control means for controlling the specific game state in which the ball is easily entered into the winning opening, and the specific game state after execution of the special game is completed;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
When the final combination of the performance symbols indicating that the special game is not executed after the ready-to-win state is formed is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance symbols corresponding to the performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows. While the symbols are configured to be capable of performing a fixed position operation, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row are configured not to perform a fixed position operation,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

By configuring in this way, if the normal pattern fluctuation of the loss or the normal reach fluctuation of the loss, the first production pattern of the display row (middle row) that does not form the reach state is also temporarily operated by performing the fixed position operation On the other hand, it is redundant to return to the normal screen from the unsuccessful super ready-to-win effect and perform a fixed position operation further, so that the fixed position operation is omitted. It is possible to realize the seamless movement of the pattern for the first production according to the route production.

The pachinko gaming machine (B17-1) according to aspect (80) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode; a game state control means for controlling the specific game state in which the ball is easily entered into the winning opening, and the specific game state after execution of the special game is completed;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than the predetermined performance symbol rows among the plurality of performance symbol rows. cage,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, the performance symbols corresponding to the predetermined performance symbol row that is variably displayed and the performance symbols other than the predetermined performance symbol row that is temporarily stopped and displayed. Designs for production corresponding to the row are configured to be able to overlap at a predetermined timing when the ready-to-win state is formed,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine (B17-1) according to aspect (80) is
The overlapping ratio of the first element of the performance pattern of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol fluctuation that forms the ready-to-win state is It is larger than the overlapping ratio of overlapping of the first element of the performance pattern of one performance symbol row and the first element of the performance symbol of the other performance symbol row in the predetermined operation of the symbol fluctuation to be in the non-reach state. The pachinko game machine is characterized by:

The pachinko gaming machine (B17-2) according to aspect (81) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode; a game state control means for controlling the specific game state in which the ball is easily entered into the winning opening, and the specific game state after execution of the special game is completed;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
Having at least a first element and a second element as components of the design for production,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
In the pattern variation in which the ready-to-win state is formed, at a predetermined timing when the ready-to-win state is formed, the effect symbols corresponding to the predetermined effect symbol row which is being variably displayed and the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped are displayed. It is configured so that the production pattern corresponding to the production pattern row other than the predetermined production pattern row can be overlapped,
At a predetermined timing within one performance period, the performance symbols of one performance pattern row and the performance symbols of the other performance symbol rows are configured to overlap,
In a predetermined operation executed at a predetermined timing, the first element of the performance pattern of one performance pattern row overlaps with the first element of the performance pattern of another production pattern row, but the first element of the performance pattern of the other performance pattern row The second element of the design pattern of the pattern row and the second element of the design pattern of the other pattern row are configured so as not to overlap,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

In this way, when adding movement to the pattern for the first production, the character as the first element is allowed to overlap adjacent characters in order to give a sense of dynamism, while the big hit is which number will stop. By configuring the number as the second element that emphasizes whether or not it becomes a mode so that it does not overlap, while diversifying the movement of the first production pattern itself, it is possible to achieve the original purpose of the first production pattern. It is possible not to deviate from the role of notifying a certain big hit or loss.

The pachinko gaming machine (B18) according to the aspect (82) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and within the one performance period, the performance symbols (for example, the first performance symbols) are variably displayed on the performance display unit, and then the performance symbols. and a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A non-reach state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying different types of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows. ,
After the reach state or the non-reach state is formed, it is configured to be able to execute re-variation of the performance symbols,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
An operation pattern related to a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the ready-to-win state is formed, and a predetermined operation when performing re-variation of the design for performance after the non-reach state is formed. It is configured to be different from the related operation pattern,
In a situation where there is a specific hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, the performance display unit executes a performance symbol prefetch effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the special game related to the specific suspension using the performance symbol. is possible and
When a specific hold is triggered by a ball entering a starting hole during pattern fluctuation under a situation where no hold remains, is there any hold that is digested prior to the specific hold during the pattern fluctuation? Depending on whether or not, and/or depending on how many reserves are digested prior to the specific reserve during the pattern fluctuation, the performance mode of the design pre-reading performance for performance is configured to be different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize or guess that a specific hold (trigger hold) has occurred when executing the look-ahead performance (chance look-ahead look-ahead performance) suggested or notified using the first performance pattern. By allowing the player to select whether or not to accumulate the reserves at the timing, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as making the subsequent performance mode different.

The pachinko gaming machine (B19) according to the aspect (83) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
an identification information display portion capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g, a second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a predetermined winning hole than the normal game state are provided as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance patterns (for example, three first performance patterns of the left row, the middle row, and the right row) are produced in the one production period. a performance symbol display control means for controlling the final combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed on the performance display unit after the variable display is performed on the display unit;
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
The start operation when the production pattern starts the variable display,
A fixed position operation that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
In the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of suspensions is the first number and the variable display is started, and the number of suspensions fluctuates in the second number, which is larger than the first number. While the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the display is started is different, in the specific game state, the number of suspensions is the first number and the predetermined number when the display is started The order of stop display of the number of performance symbols is the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of pending is the second number and the variable display is started,
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

By configuring in this way, in the normal game state (non-time shortened game state) that emphasizes production rather than the variation efficiency, and the specific game state (time shortened game state) that emphasizes the variation efficiency, the first production pattern is shown. By differentiating the direction, the player can recognize in which state the variation occurs, and the pattern variation of the first performance symbol can be made suitable for each state.

The pachinko gaming machine (B20) according to the aspect (84) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a first identification information display portion (for example, a first main game symbol display portion A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the first random number obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the variable display time of the first identification information is selected, and the first identification information is displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed by the first identification information display unit. first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the variable display time of the second identification information is selected, and the second identification information is displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed by the second identification information display unit. a second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display;
Special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A normal game state and a specific game state in which a ball is easier to enter a second starting port than the normal game state as game states while the special game is not being executed, and the specific game state can be set after execution of the special game is finished. and a game state control means for controlling,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is regarded as one performance period, and a predetermined number of performance symbols (for example, the left column, the middle column, and the right column) are displayed within the one performance period. a performance symbol display control means for controlling to stop and display the final combination of performance symbols in the performance display unit after variably displaying the performance symbols in the performance display unit;
It has a plurality of performance symbol rows, and is configured to be able to variably display performance symbols in each of the plurality of performance symbol rows,
A ready-to-win state can be formed by temporarily stopping and displaying the same kind of performance symbols in performance symbol rows other than a predetermined performance symbol row among the plurality of performance symbol rows,
It is possible to execute a predetermined action by the production pattern,
For a given action,
A start operation when the production pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner,
a fixed position operation that can be executed when the design for performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position of the performance display unit;
A shaking motion that can be executed when the design for production is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A special action that can be executed when the production pattern forms a reach state (for example, tenpai action) is included,
When the first identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of first reservations is the first number and the variable display is started, and the number of first reservations While the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols is different when the variable display is started with the second number larger than the first number, the first identification information is variable display in the specific game state. In the case where the number of first reservations is the first number and the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started, and the number of the first reservations is the second number when the variable display is started is configured to be the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols in
When the second identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state, the order of stop display of the predetermined number of performance symbols when the number of second reservations starts to be variably displayed with the first number, and the number of second reservations is configured to be the same as the order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the variable display is started with the second number, and when the second identification information is variable and displayed in the specific game state, the second The order of stop display of the predetermined number of production symbols when the number of second reservations starts to be displayed fluctuating with the first number, and the predetermined number when the number of second reservations starts fluctuating display with the second number It is configured so that the stop display order of the production patterns is the same as
During one performance period with a specific game state, at least one of the starting motion, fixed position motion, and special motion is configured not to be executed, while the shaking motion is configured to be executed. It is a pachinko machine.

By configuring in this way, the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state) or the specific game state (time-reduced game state) after the end of the second identification information for the first production pattern corresponding to the change, Since it is possible to return to the game on the side of the first identification information, which is the main game of the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), which is the original game property, by configuring it to be consumed immediately, the mode of the first effect symbol While the is simple, by performing the minimum actions corresponding to the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state), it is possible to seamlessly and comfortably transition to the game on the side of the first identification information. .

The pachinko gaming machine (342) according to the aspect (85) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
A game information transmission means for transmitting necessary game information to the sub-game part side when the performance display is executed on the sub-game part side, and the second identification information is variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed. is configured so that the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed, the first effect pattern is displayed. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific advance notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period,
In the effect display section, the shooting notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect pattern, while the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect pattern. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine (187) according to the aspect (86) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display areas or display positions are different, even if the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display area or the display position of the second effect pattern is the same even if the second effect pattern is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (2342) according to the aspect (87) is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
When a new first hold occurs, the display content displayed in the first hold image display area can be changed, and a new first hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information The display content displayed in the first reserved image display area can be changed without the occurrence of
When a new second hold occurs, the display content displayed in the second hold image display area can be changed, and a new second hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information The display content displayed in the second reserved image display area can be changed without the occurrence of
When a new first hold occurs, the display content displayed in the first hold number display area can be changed, and a new first hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information If there is no occurrence, it is configured not to change the display contents displayed in the first pending number display area,
When a new second hold occurs, the display content displayed in the second hold number display area can be changed, and a new second hold is made within a certain production period corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information If there is no occurrence, it is configured not to change the display contents displayed in the second pending number display area,
When changing the display content displayed in the first reserved image display area, the first reserved image display area can be displayed without changing the number of first reserved images displayed in the first reserved image display area. changing the display mode of at least one of the first reserved images displayed by
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display content is displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first reserved image is displayed in the first reserved image display area. While the first reserved image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, the plurality of types of effect displays are displayed even when the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a first reserved number in a first reserved number display area even if a second effect display form of the forms is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (536) according to the aspect (88) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific advance notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position where it can overlap with the first effect symbol during variable display, and the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the first effect symbol during variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position to obtain,
In the effect display unit, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap the second effect symbol during variable display, while the specific advance notice effect overlaps the second effect symbol during variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position to obtain,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display mode or the display position of the pattern for the first effect is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second effect pattern or the display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
The display size of the first effect pattern when the final display mode of the first effect pattern is displayed on the effect display unit is the second size when the final display mode of the second effect pattern is displayed on the effect display unit. It is configured to be larger than the display size of the design for production,
A first display mode, which is a display mode of a specific first effect pattern corresponding to the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats, and the specific first effect corresponding to the second effect display format. It is configured to be a different display mode from the second display mode, which is the display mode of the pattern for
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the first effect display format and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the first effect display format, the specific first effect symbol that is the first display format is configured so that it can be displayed variably,
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the case of the second effect display format and the variable display of the second identification information in the case of the second effect display format, the specific first effect symbol that is the second display format The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to variably display the .

The pachinko gaming machine (806) according to the aspect (89) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for, when a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, temporarily storing the acquired random number until a condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied, and for controlling to cause suspension;
a game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on the random number related to a certain hold, and determining a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player after the identification information is stop-displayed after winning is determined as a result of winning/failure determination based on the random number;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second effect pattern display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect pattern to be displayed by the effect display unit after the second effect pattern is variably displayed by the effect display unit;
The game information receiving means has at least prefetching effect display contents A and prefetching effect display contents B different from the prefetching effect display contents A as prefetching effect display contents to be displayed based on the information about the suspension received by the game information receiving means. When the information about the hold is received by, when the received information about the hold satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect display unit displays the prefetch effect display content A that suggests or notifies the existence of the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition and a look-ahead effect display control means for controlling so that it can be displayed at
During the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display, the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be variably displayed,
When the identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the variation of the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to display,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode,
The period from the start of variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured to display a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display content is displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display areas or display positions are different, even if the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. However, the display area or display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
The timing at which the display of the look-ahead effect display content A is started is the timing at which the variable display of the identification information is started after the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition has occurred,
If the prefetch effect display content A is displayed in a situation where there is a pre-hold that satisfies the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information before the pre-hold that satisfies the predetermined condition, identification related to the pre-hold The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the special display mode is not displayed within one performance period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display performed when a variable display start condition of the information is satisfied. is.

The pachinko gaming machine (537) according to the aspect (90) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific notice effect can be displayed in the effect display unit,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position where it can overlap with the first effect symbol during variable display, and the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the first effect symbol during variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position to obtain,
In the effect display unit, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap the second effect symbol during variable display, while the specific advance notice effect overlaps the second effect symbol during variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the position to obtain,
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display content is displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first reserved image is displayed in the first reserved image display area. While the first reserved image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, the plurality of types of effect displays are displayed even when the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a first reserved number in a first reserved number display area even if a second effect display form of the forms is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (538) according to the aspect (91) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means, the obtained first random number as a first hold until a first right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the first right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a first game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the first identification information;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing, when a second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means, the obtained second random number as a second hold until a second right/wrong judgment permission condition is satisfied;
When the second right or wrong judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the right or wrong judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the right or wrong judgment a second game content determining means for determining a variable display mode of the second identification information;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display mode or the display position of the pattern for the first effect is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second effect pattern or the display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
The number of first pending images corresponding to the number of remaining first pending pending can be displayed in the first pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The number of second pending images corresponding to the number of remaining second pending pending can be displayed in the second pending image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the number of remaining first holds, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the number of remaining second holds, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
When the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first reserved image is displayed in the first reserved image display area. While the first reserved image is not displayed when the second effect display format is displayed, the plurality of types of effect displays are displayed even when the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a first reserved number in a first reserved number display area even if a second effect display form of the forms is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine (343) according to the aspect (92) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display mode or the display position of the pattern for the first effect is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second effect pattern or the display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
A specific advance notice effect can be displayed on the effect display unit within a certain effect period,
In the effect display section, the shooting notification effect is displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol, and the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the first effect symbol. ,
In the effect display section, the firing notification effect is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second effect pattern, while the specific advance notice effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the second effect pattern. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine (761) according to the aspect (93) is
A first start port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the second area side;
A second starting port arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side can enter;
a variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state;
a first identification information display section capable of displaying the first identification information;
a second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
a first random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting port;
a first game content determination means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a first identification information display control means for controlling the display of the first identification information to be stopped after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
a second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
a second game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail decision based on a second random number and determining a stop display mode and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail determination;
a second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to stop and display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of winning judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of winning judgment based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped displayed , a special game control means capable of executing a special game capable of making the variable winning port advantageous to the player;
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the ball is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state, and the specific game state is set after execution of the special game is finished. a game state transition control means capable of controlling
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The second identification information is not variably displayed while the first identification information is variably displayed, and the first identification information is not variably displayed while the second identification information is variably displayed,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the first performance symbols and the second performance symbols can be variably displayed. is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode It is configured to be able to execute the fluctuation display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect pattern corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect use corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the pattern,
The period from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
With regard to the first effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period, the temporary display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain one effect period, and the temporary display can be performed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one effect period, and when the temporary display mode of the pattern for the first effect is displayed, the first effect It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the pattern can be displayed,
The special display mode is configured so as not to be displayed within the certain production period for the second production symbols that are variably displayed within the certain production period,
A plurality of types of effect display formats are provided, any one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed in the effect display unit, and when the effect display contents are displayed, the effect display format being displayed corresponds to the effect display format. It is configured to be able to display the
The pattern for the first effect is displayed according to whether the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed or the second effect display format is displayed among the plurality of types of effect display formats. While the display mode or the display position of the pattern for the first effect is different, even if the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the second effect of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the display format is displayed, the display mode of the second effect pattern or the display position of the second effect pattern is configured to be the same,
A shooting notification effect for notifying to prompt the shooting of the game ball to the second area can be displayed on the effect display part, and while the shooting notification effect is not displayed under the condition of the normal game state, the shooting notification effect is displayed. is configured to be displayed under certain gaming conditions,
All of the first effect pattern, the second effect pattern, and the launch notification effect can be displayed at the same time,
In the effect display unit, the firing notification effect is configured to be displayed at a position that overlaps with the first effect pattern and does not overlap with the second effect pattern,
Expectation degree of execution of a special game when ready-to-win display is achieved using the first performance symbols that are the first display mode and special in the case of ready-to-win display using the first performance symbols that are the second display mode It is configured to be different from the execution expectation of the game,
While the first performance pattern is being variably displayed within a certain performance period, when the ready-to-win display is performed using the first performance pattern, the ready-to-win display using the second performance pattern is performed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it does not occur.

Regarding the "stop display" so far, the expression of "stop display" simply "stop display" instead of "temporarily stop display" or "definitely stop display" It includes both the display mode and the definitely stop display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A1) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display portion (eg, first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g) and main game pending display portion (eg, first main game symbol pending display portion A21h, second main game symbol pending display portion) a main game display unit (for example, a main display device MH20) having at least a display unit B21h);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
Effect information display portion (for example, first sub-symbol display portion AS21g, second sub-symbol display portion BS21g) and sub-game pending display portion (for example, first sub-pending display portion AS21h, second sub-pending display portion BS21h) At least a sub game display unit (for example, sub display device SH20),
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The main game pending display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The performance information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The sub-game pending display unit is configured to include at least one or more lamps,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A pending display corresponding to the number of remaining pending pending can be displayed on the main game pending display unit,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section during the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first effect information display control means for controlling to stop and display
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one effect period, and after the second effect information is variably displayed by the effect information display part in the one effect period, the second effect information is displayed as the effect information. A second performance information display control means for controlling to stop display in the part,
It is possible to display the number of pending pending remaining in the secondary game pending display unit,
The size of the area where the lighting of the lamp in the identification information display section is visible and the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp in the main game holding display section is visible are the same,
The size of the area in which the lighting of the lamps in the identification information display section is visible is larger than the area in which the lighting of the lamps in the effect information display section is visible,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that the size of the area in which lighting of the lamp in the sub-game holding display part is visible is larger than the size of the area in which lighting of the lamp in the main game holding display part is visible. is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A2) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a main game display portion (eg, main display device MH20) having at least an identification information display portion (eg, first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
a sub-game display unit (eg, sub-display device SH20) having at least a performance information display unit (eg, first sub-symbol display unit AS21g, second sub-symbol display unit BS21g);
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display unit includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The performance information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section during the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first effect information display control means for controlling to stop and display
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one effect period, and after the second effect information is variably displayed by the effect information display part in the one effect period, the second effect information is displayed as the effect information. A second performance information display control means for controlling to stop display in the part,
A predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit is configured to be lit in a situation where the first effect information is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit in a specific manner,
The predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit may be lit in a situation where the first effect information is variably displayed on the effect display unit,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the lamp of the performance information display section is turned off when the first performance information is stopped and displayed on the performance display section in the specific mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A3) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a main game display portion (eg, main display device MH20) having at least an identification information display portion (eg, first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
a sub-game display unit (eg, sub-display device SH20) having at least a performance information display unit (eg, first sub-symbol display unit AS21g, second sub-symbol display unit BS21g);
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display unit includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The performance information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section during the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first effect information display control means for controlling to stop and display
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one effect period, and after the second effect information is variably displayed by the effect information display part in the one effect period, the second effect information is displayed as the effect information. A second performance information display control means for controlling to stop display in the part,
A predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit is configured to be lit in a situation where the first effect information is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit in a specific manner,
The predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit may be lit in a situation where the first effect information is variably displayed on the effect display unit,
The lamp of the effect information display unit is configured to be extinguished in a situation where the first effect information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode on the effect display unit,
The shortest time from when the predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit is turned on to when it is turned off and then turned on again is the first time in a situation where the first effect information is variably displayed on the effect display unit. and
The second time is the shortest time from when the lamp of the effect information display unit is turned on until it is turned on again after the lamp of the effect information display unit is turned off in a situation where the first effect information is variably displayed on the effect display unit,
the first time and the second time are of different lengths;
When the starting opening is taken as a reference position, the identification information display section and the performance information display section are provided in different directions in the horizontal direction of the reference position, and the identification information display section and the performance information display section are arranged in different directions. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that each is provided in a different vertical direction of the reference position.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A4) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display portion (eg, first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g) and main game pending display portion (eg, first main game symbol pending display portion A21h, second main game symbol pending display portion) a main game display unit (for example, a main display device MH20) having at least a display unit B21h);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
Effect information display portion (for example, first sub-symbol display portion AS21g, second sub-symbol display portion BS21g) and sub-game pending display portion (for example, first sub-pending display portion AS21h, second sub-pending display portion BS21h) At least a sub game display unit (for example, sub display device SH20),
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The main game pending display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The performance information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The sub-game pending display unit is configured to include at least one or more lamps,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
It is possible to display the number of pending pending remaining in the main game pending display unit,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section during the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first effect information display control means for controlling to stop and display
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one effect period, and after the second effect information is variably displayed by the effect information display part in the one effect period, the second effect information is displayed as the effect information. A second performance information display control means for controlling to stop display in the part,
It is possible to display the number of pending pending remaining in the secondary game pending display unit,
When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is interrupted at the first timing during the identification information fluctuation display, and the power is restored after that, the display of the identification information display unit is changed to the second. The display of the main game pending display portion is restored at the second timing, the display of the sub game pending display portion is restored at the second timing, and the effect information display portion is displayed. is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to return at the second timing.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A5) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display portion (eg, first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g) and main game pending display portion (eg, first main game symbol pending display portion A21h, second main game symbol pending display portion) a main game display unit (for example, a main display device MH20) having at least a display unit B21h);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
Effect information display portion (for example, first sub-symbol display portion AS21g, second sub-symbol display portion BS21g) and sub-game pending display portion (for example, first sub-pending display portion AS21h, second sub-pending display portion BS21h) At least a sub game display unit (for example, sub display device SH20),
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display unit includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The main game pending display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The performance information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The sub-game pending display unit is configured to include at least one or more lamps,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
It is possible to display the number of pending pending remaining in the main game pending display unit,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display, the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be variably displayed,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode,
The period from the start of variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbols is started within a certain effect period, a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the first effect symbols is displayed within the certain one effect period. have
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
After the performance information is variably displayed in the performance information display unit within a certain performance period, the performance information is stopped and displayed in the performance information display unit,
It is possible to display the number of pending pending remaining in the secondary game pending display unit,
The size of the area where the lighting of the lamp in the identification information display section is visible and the size of the area where the lighting of the lamp in the main game holding display section is visible are the same,
The size of the area in which the lighting of the lamps in the identification information display section is visible is larger than the area in which the lighting of the lamps in the effect information display section is visible,
The size of the area in which the lighting of the lamp in the sub-game holding display section is visible is larger than the size of the area in which the lighting of the lamp in the identification information display section is visible,
When the special game is executed after the identification information is stopped and displayed, the identification information display unit can display the plurality of lamps in a state in which the identification information is stopped and displayed, and in a state in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. is configured so that the display mode of the plurality of lamps at a predetermined timing immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed is not the same,
When the special game is executed after the final display mode of the pattern for the second effect is displayed, the final display mode of the pattern for the second effect and the pattern for the second effect are variably displayed, and the pattern for the second effect is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode of the pattern for second performance at a predetermined timing immediately before the final display mode of the pattern is displayed is not the same.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A6) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a main game display portion (eg, main display device MH20) having at least an identification information display portion (eg, first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
a sub-game display unit (eg, sub-display device SH20) having at least a performance information display unit (eg, first sub-symbol display unit AS21g, second sub-symbol display unit BS21g);
a operable movable object;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The movable accessory has a light-emitting accessory lamp,
The identification information display unit includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The performance information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section during the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first effect information display control means for controlling to stop and display
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one effect period, and after the second effect information is variably displayed by the effect information display part in the one effect period, the second effect information is displayed as the effect information. A second performance information display control means for controlling to stop display in the part,
A predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit is configured to be lit in a situation where the first effect information is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit in a specific manner,
The predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit may be lit in a situation where the first effect information is variably displayed on the effect display unit,
The lamp of the effect information display unit is configured to be extinguished in a situation where the first effect information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode on the effect display unit,
When the power supply to the pachinko game machine is interrupted and the power supply is restored after that, the movable accessory is configured to operate in the initial operation pattern,
When the movable accessory operates in the initial operation pattern, the accessory lamp is configured to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern,
When a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the display of the identification information display unit is restored at the first timing, and the accessory lamp emits light in the predetermined light emission pattern at the second timing. is started, and at a third timing after that, the movable accessory starts the action of the initial action pattern.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A7) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
a main game display portion (eg, main display device MH20) having at least an identification information display portion (eg, first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
a sub-game display unit (eg, sub-display device SH20) having at least a performance information display unit (eg, first sub-symbol display unit AS21g, second sub-symbol display unit BS21g);
a operable movable object;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The movable accessory has a light-emitting accessory lamp,
The identification information display unit includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The performance information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period, and after the first performance information is variably displayed on the performance display section during the one performance period, the first performance information is displayed on the performance display section. a first effect information display control means for controlling to stop and display
A period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one effect period, and after the second effect information is variably displayed by the effect information display part in the one effect period, the second effect information is displayed as the effect information. A second performance information display control means for controlling to stop display in the part,
A predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit is configured to be lit in a situation where the first effect information is stopped and displayed on the effect display unit in a specific manner,
The predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit may be lit in a situation where the first effect information is variably displayed on the effect display unit,
The lamp of the effect information display unit is configured to be extinguished in a situation where the first effect information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode on the effect display unit,
The shortest time from when the predetermined lamp of the identification information display unit is turned on to when it is turned off and then turned on again is the first time in a situation where the first effect information is variably displayed on the effect display unit. and
The second time is the shortest time from when the lamp of the effect information display unit is turned on until it is turned on again after the lamp of the effect information display unit is turned off in a situation where the first effect information is variably displayed on the effect display unit,
the first time and the second time are of different lengths;
When the starting opening is taken as a reference position, the identification information display section and the performance information display section are provided in different directions in the horizontal direction of the reference position, and the identification information display section and the performance information display section are arranged in different directions. Each is provided in a different direction in the vertical direction of the reference position,
When the power supply to the pachinko game machine is interrupted and the power supply is restored after that, the movable accessory is configured to operate in the initial operation pattern,
When the movable accessory operates in the initial operation pattern, the accessory lamp is configured to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern,
When a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the display of the identification information display unit is restored at the first timing, and the accessory lamp emits light in the predetermined light emission pattern at the second timing. is started, and at a third timing after that, the movable accessory starts the action of the initial action pattern.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (A8) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
Identification information display portion (eg, first main game symbol display portion A21g, second main game symbol display portion B21g) and main game pending display portion (eg, first main game symbol pending display portion A21h, second main game symbol pending display portion) a main game display unit (for example, a main display device MH20) having at least a display unit B21h);
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
Effect information display portion (for example, first sub-symbol display portion AS21g, second sub-symbol display portion BS21g) and sub-game pending display portion (for example, first sub-pending display portion AS21h, second sub-pending display portion BS21h) At least a sub game display unit (for example, sub display device SH20),
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the performance,
The identification information display unit includes at least a plurality of lamps,
The main game pending display section includes at least one or more lamps,
The performance information display unit includes at least one or more lamps,
The sub-game pending display unit is configured to include at least one or more lamps,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing a random number obtained by the random number obtaining means while holding the obtained random number until a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped, based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
It is possible to display the number of pending pending remaining in the main game pending display unit,
The sub-game department
effect display content control means for controlling effect display content to be displayed in the effect display unit;
a first performance symbol display control means for controlling a final display mode of the first performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the first performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
a second performance symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second performance symbols to be displayed by the performance display unit after the second performance symbols are variably displayed by the performance display unit;
During the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display, the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be variably displayed,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are displayed. It is configured to be able to display the final display mode,
The period from the start of variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
After the variable display of the first effect symbols is started within a certain effect period, a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the first effect symbols is displayed within the certain one effect period. have
The second effect symbols that are variably displayed within a certain effect period are configured so that the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period,
After the performance information is variably displayed in the performance information display unit within a certain performance period, the performance information is stopped and displayed in the performance information display unit,
It is possible to display the number of pending pending remaining in the secondary game pending display unit,
When the special game is executed after the identification information is stopped and displayed, the identification information display unit can display the plurality of lamps in a state in which the identification information is stopped and displayed, and in a state in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. is configured so that the display mode of the plurality of lamps at a predetermined timing immediately before the identification information is stopped and displayed is not the same,
When the special game is executed after the final display mode of the pattern for the second effect is displayed, the final display mode of the pattern for the second effect and the pattern for the second effect are variably displayed, and the pattern for the second effect is displayed. It is configured so that the display mode of the second effect pattern at a predetermined timing immediately before the final display mode of the pattern is displayed is not the same,
When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine is interrupted at the first timing during the identification information fluctuation display, and the power is restored after that, the display of the identification information display unit is changed to the second. The display of the main game pending display portion is restored at the second timing, the display of the sub game pending display portion is restored at the second timing, and the effect information display portion is displayed. is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to return at the second timing.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (204) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
It has a plurality of types of production modes (for example, stages), any one of the plurality of types of production modes can be displayed on the production display unit, and when displaying the production display content, the displayed production mode It is configured to be able to display the corresponding
As a variable right display, a first variable right display (e.g., white icon) belonging to a first group (e.g., low expectation group white icon, blue icon, green icon) and having a plurality of display modes, and a second group (e.g., white icon) For example, it has at least a second variable rights display (e.g., a red icon) that belongs to the high expectation group (red icon, rainbow icon) and has a different display mode from any of the plurality of first variable rights displays,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
As a production mode, it has at least a first production mode (for example, stage A) and a second production mode (for example, stage B) different from the first production mode,
The display mode of the first variable right display in the first rendering mode (for example, the outline is circular) and the display mode of the first variable right display in the second rendering mode (for example, the outline is triangular) are configured to be different. On the other hand, the first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") in the first rendering mode and the first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") in the second rendering mode can be the same sound. A pachinko game machine characterized by:

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the program capacity by sharing multiple types of special hold sounds with low expectations (special hold sounds with blue icons and special hold sounds with green icons). Special hold sounds (special hold sounds with a red icon and special hold sounds with a rainbow icon) make it possible to create a sense of anticipation by preparing special sounds.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (205) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
an operation member that can be operated by a player;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The frequency of outputting the second fluctuating right sound based on the operation of the operation member is changed from a first setting (for example, a third setting) in which the frequency is a predetermined frequency to a second setting (for example, a third setting) in which the frequency is lower than the predetermined frequency. 4 settings) is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be changeable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the needs of users who want to recognize high-expectation hold not by the display mode (visual) but by the hold tone (auditory).

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (206) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
an operation member that can be operated by a player;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As a variable right sound (for example, "do"), a first variable right sound that can be output when the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second variable right display are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The frequency of outputting the second fluctuating right sound based on the operation of the operation member is changed from a first setting (for example, a third setting) in which the frequency is a predetermined frequency to a second setting (for example, a third setting) in which the frequency is lower than the predetermined frequency. 4 settings) can be changed,
As the second variable rights display, at least a second variable rights display A (for example, a blue icon) and a second variable rights display B (for example, a red icon), which is a display mode different from the second variable rights display A, are used. has
In a situation where the first setting (for example, the third setting) is set and the second variable rights display A is displayed as the variable rights display, the variable rights display is changed to the second variable rights display A. (e.g., blue icon) is set to the second setting (e.g., fourth setting) than the frequency of displaying with the second variable right display B (e.g., red icon) and changes In a situation where the second variable rights indication A is displayed as the right indication, change the variable rights indication from the second variable rights indication A (eg, blue icon) to the second variable rights indication B (eg, red icon) This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the display frequency is higher.

By configuring in this way, a game property is created in which even if a hold with a low degree of expectation changes, subsequent changes can be expected.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (207) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
an operation member that can be operated by a player;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
The effect display content is configured to be capable of executing a high-expectation-level effect (for example, an effect in which a high-expectation-level character is displayed) indicating that the execution expectation of the special game is high,
As the effect display content, a first predetermined effect (for example, battle effect) can be executed after the high expectation effect is executed,
The effect display content is configured to be able to execute a second predetermined effect (for example, a resurrection effect) different from the first predetermined effect after the high expectation effect is executed,
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The frequency of outputting the second fluctuating right sound based on the operation of the operation member is changed from a first setting (for example, a third setting) in which the frequency is a predetermined frequency to a second setting (for example, a third setting) in which the frequency is lower than the predetermined frequency. 4 settings) can be changed,
As the second variable rights display, at least a second variable rights display A (for example, a blue icon) and a second variable rights display B (for example, a red icon), which is a display mode different from the second variable rights display A, are used. has
In a situation where the first setting (for example, the third setting) is set and the second variable rights display A is displayed as the variable rights display, the variable rights display is changed to the second variable rights display A. (e.g., blue icon) is set to the second setting (e.g., fourth setting) than the frequency of displaying with the second variable right display B (e.g., red icon) and changes In a situation where the second variable rights indication A is displayed as the right indication, change the variable rights indication from the second variable rights indication A (eg, blue icon) to the second variable rights indication B (eg, red icon) It is configured to display more frequently,
In a state in which the high-expectation effect is being executed, the frequency of outputting the second holding tone based on the operation is configured to be changeable,
While the frequency of outputting the second holding tone based on the operation cannot be changed in a state where the first predetermined effect is being executed, in a state where the second predetermined effect is being executed , the frequency of outputting the second holding tone based on the operation is configured to be changeable,
While the second holding sound is not output when a new ball is entered into the starting hole while the first predetermined effect is being executed, the starting hole is in the state where the second predetermined effect is being executed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second holding tone can be output when a new ball enters the pachinko machine.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to optimize the period for adjusting the frequency of the holding tone.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (208) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
an operation member that can be operated by a player;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
It has a plurality of types of production modes (for example, stages), any one of the plurality of types of production modes can be displayed on the production display unit, and when displaying the production display content, the displayed production mode It is configured to be able to display the corresponding
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
As the production mode, at least a normal production mode (for example, stage A) corresponding to the normal game state and a specific production mode (for example, stage D) corresponding to the specific game state are provided,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when a new ball enters the starting hole, and the first variable right when the conditions for starting the variable display of the identification information are satisfied. It is configured so that the second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when a variable right representation different from the first variable right representation is displayed from the display can be the same sound,
In the normal production mode (eg, stage A), the second variable right sound is output when the second variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole. On the other hand, in the specific effect mode (for example, stage D), the second fluctuating right sound is not output when a new ball enters the starting hole. It is a game machine.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to output an appropriate holding tone according to the game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (209) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the output of the second fluctuating right sound starts and the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the timing of finishing is earlier than the timing of finishing the light emission of the first light emitting portion in the second mode.

By configuring in this way, duplication with other sounds can be avoided.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the aspect (210) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
In response to a variable right indication, the second variable right sound can be output a plurality of times, and the first light emitting unit can emit light a plurality of times in the second mode. ,
At least a second fluctuation right sound A (for example, "re") and a second fluctuation right sound B (for example, "mi") different from the second fluctuation right sound A are provided as the second fluctuation right sound. and
As the light emission mode of the second mode of the first light emitting unit, at least a second mode A (e.g., blue) and a second mode B (e.g., red) different from the second mode A are provided,
The second fluctuating right sound B is configured not to be output for at least a predetermined period from the state in which the second fluctuating right sound A is output, while the first light emitting unit emits light in the second mode A. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be capable of emitting light in the second mode B within the predetermined period from the state.

By configuring in this way, the sense of anticipation is heightened by executing the holding tone and light emission multiple times triggered by the on-hold occurrence, and as for the holding tone, it is easy to recognize each sound, and for the light emission, it is easy to recognize the change. can be made easier.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (211) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
The period from the start of the variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
It is configured to be able to display the second variable right display from after the start of a certain effect period to a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when it develops into a super ready-to-win effect),
The first light emitting unit is configured to emit light in the second mode (for example, red) from after the start of the one rendering period to the predetermined timing,
While the second variable right display is not displayed after the predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the super ready-to-win effect ends) in the one performance period, the second variable right display is not displayed after a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The display (e.g. red icon) is configured to be visible again,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that, when the second variable right display is displayed after the specific timing, the first light emitting unit emits light in a light emission mode different from the second mode (e.g., red). be.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that does not place a burden on the lamp more than necessary by emitting light according to the changing situation.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (212) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
A plurality of types of production modes are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of production modes can be displayed on the production display section, and when displaying the production display contents, the one corresponding to the displayed production mode is displayed. configured to allow
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
As the production mode, at least a first production mode (for example, stage A) corresponding to the normal game state and a specific production mode (for example, stage D) corresponding to the specific game state are provided,
In the first production mode (for example, stage A), when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed triggered by a new entry into the starting hole, the first light emitting unit is While configured to be capable of emitting light in the second mode (e.g., red), in the specific production mode (e.g., stage D), the second variable right display (e.g., , white square icon) is displayed, the first light emitting unit is configured not to emit light in the second mode (for example, red),
In the first production mode (for example, stage A), the certain variable right display is displayed as the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied. While the first light emitting unit is configured to be capable of emitting light in the second mode (for example, red) when the Triggered by the fulfillment, when the certain variable rights display is displayed as the second variable rights display (e.g., white square icon), the first light emitting unit is in the second mode (e.g., red) The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to emit light.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to output appropriate light emission according to the game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (213) is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
As the effect display content, it is configured to be able to execute the first notice effect,
As the effect display content, a second notice effect different from the first notice effect is configured to be executable,
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
The period from the start of the variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
It is configured to be able to display the second variable right display from after the start of a certain effect period to a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when it develops into a super ready-to-win effect),
The first notice effect (for example, dark effect) is configured to be executable before the predetermined timing (for example, timing to develop into super ready-to-win effect),
When the first notice effect (for example, black effect) is executed in a situation where the second variable right display is displayed and the first light emitting unit is emitting light in the second mode, the second variable right While the display is not displayed, the first light emitting unit is configured to emit light in the second mode (for example, red),
The second notice effect (for example, intense heat background effect) is configured to be executable before the predetermined timing (for example, timing to develop into super ready-to-win effect),
When the second notice effect (for example, intense heat background effect) is executed in a situation where the second variable right display is displayed and the first light emitting unit is emitting light in the second mode, the second While the display of the variable right display is continued, the first light emitting unit is configured not to emit light in the second mode (for example, red),
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first notice effect (for example, darkening effect) and the second notice effect (for example, intense heat background effect) are not executed at the same time.

By configuring in this way, even in a situation where each effect is executed, either the icon or the light emission is secured, so that the current degree of expectation can always be grasped.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (214) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
A specified sound (for example, initialization sound) can be output from the speaker during a specific period after recovery from power failure,
During the specific period after recovery from power failure, the first light emitting unit is configured to emit light in a specified manner (eg, initialization lamp pattern),
At the first timing during the specific period, the second fluctuating right display (for example, a red icon) can be displayed on the effect display section with the new ball entering the starting hole as a trigger. It is configured to limit the output of two-fluctuation right sounds (for example, "mi"),
At the first timing during the specific period, triggered by a new entry into the starting hole, the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) can be displayed on the effect display unit, configured to limit light emission in the second mode (e.g., red) of the first light emitting unit,
At a second timing after the first timing during the specific period, the restriction on the output of the second fluctuating right tone (for example, "mi") is lifted,
A pachinko machine characterized in that it is configured such that, at a third timing after the second timing during the specific period, the restriction on light emission of the first light emitting unit in the second mode (for example, red) is lifted. It is a game machine.

By configuring in this way, even if power is cut off during a game due to unforeseen circumstances, while appropriately executing the power cut restoration notification, at least one of them can be executed in advance, thereby enabling icon changes to be performed. Production can be restored as quickly as possible.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (215) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
When the variable rights representation is displayed in the second variable rights representation, the variable rights representation is displayed in the second variable rights representation without executing a change suggesting effect (for example, an action effect) that suggests that the display mode of the variable rights representation changes. It is possible to execute either a first change pattern to display the variable rights display, or a second change pattern to display the variable rights display with the second variable rights display after executing the change suggestion effect,
The second variation right sound (eg, "re") that can be output when the second variation right display (eg, blue icon) is displayed by the first variation pattern, and the second variation right sound by the second variation pattern It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "re") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, blue icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
According to the second mode (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting unit capable of emitting light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed by the first change pattern, and the second change pattern The second aspect (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting unit that can emit light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed can be the same light emission aspect,
When the variable right indication is displayed as the second variable right indication (eg, blue icon) according to the second change pattern, and the second variable right sound (eg, "re") is output, the While a specific sound (for example, an action sound) can be output for a predetermined period of time before the output of the second variable right sound, the second variable right display (for example, blue icon) and when the second fluctuating right sound (for example, "re") is output, the specific sound (for example, action sound) is not output,
The period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one performance period,
Even if there is a new ball entering the start opening after the start of one performance period and the remaining period of the one performance period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the first change pattern is used. While the variable rights representation corresponding to the entry is configured to be displayed as the second variable rights representation, the second variation pattern causes the floating rights representation corresponding to the entry to become the second floating rights representation (for example, It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to be displayed with a blue icon).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a complicated presentation even if there is some margin in the variation.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (216) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
When the variable rights representation is displayed in the second variable rights representation, the variable rights representation is displayed in the second variable rights representation without executing a change suggesting effect (for example, an action effect) that suggests that the display mode of the variable rights representation changes. It is possible to execute either a first change pattern to display the variable rights display, or a second change pattern to display the variable rights display with the second variable rights display after executing the change suggestion effect,
The second variation right sound (eg, "re") that can be output when the second variation right display (eg, blue icon) is displayed by the first variation pattern, and the second variation right sound by the second variation pattern It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "re") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, blue icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
According to the second mode (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting unit capable of emitting light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed by the first change pattern, and the second change pattern The second aspect (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting unit that can emit light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed can be the same light emission aspect,
When the variable right indication is displayed as the second variable right indication (eg, blue icon) according to the second change pattern, and the second variable right sound (eg, "re") is output, the While a specific sound (for example, an action sound) can be output for a predetermined period of time before the output of the second variable right sound, the second variable right display (for example, blue icon) and when the second fluctuating right sound (for example, "re") is output, the specific sound (for example, action sound) is not output,
The period from the start of the variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
Even if there is a new ball entering the start opening after the start of one performance period and the remaining period of the one performance period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the first change pattern is used. While the variable rights representation corresponding to the entry is configured to be displayed as the second variable rights representation, the second variation pattern causes the floating rights representation corresponding to the entry to become the second floating rights representation (for example, blue icon) is configured not to be displayed,
If there is a new ball entering the start hole at a timing when the remaining period of the certain production period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time after the start of the certain production period, the next production period of the certain production period. wherein the variable right representation corresponding to the incoming ball is displayed with the second variable right representation according to the first change pattern,
If there is a new ball entering the start hole at a timing when the remaining period of the certain production period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time after the start of the certain production period, the next production period of the certain production period. 3, the pachinko game machine is characterized in that the variable right display corresponding to the entering ball can be displayed with the second variable right display according to the second change pattern.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately execute the next variation that avoids complicated effects.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (217) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable right display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting opening can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
At least a third mode (e.g., white) and a fourth mode (e.g., red), which is a light emission mode different from the third mode, are provided as the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
When the variable rights representation is displayed in the second variable rights representation, the variable rights representation is displayed in the second variable rights representation without executing a change suggesting effect (for example, an action effect) that suggests that the display mode of the variable rights representation changes. It is possible to execute either a first change pattern to display the variable rights display, or a second change pattern to display the variable rights display with the second variable rights display after executing the change suggestion effect,
The second variation right sound (eg, "re") that can be output when the second variation right display (eg, blue icon) is displayed by the first variation pattern, and the second variation right sound by the second variation pattern It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "re") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, blue icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
According to the second mode (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting unit capable of emitting light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed by the first change pattern, and the second change pattern The second aspect (e.g., blue) of the first light emitting unit that can emit light when the second variable right display (e.g., blue icon) is displayed can be the same light emission aspect,
When the variable right indication is displayed as the second variable right indication (eg, blue icon) according to the second change pattern, and the second variable right sound (eg, "re") is output, the While a specific sound (for example, an action sound) can be output for a predetermined period of time before the output of the second variable right sound, the second variable right display (for example, blue icon) and when the second fluctuating right sound (for example, "re") is output, the specific sound (for example, action sound) is not output,
The period from the start of the variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
Even if there is a new ball entering the start opening after the start of one performance period and the remaining period of the one performance period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the first change pattern is used. While the variable rights representation corresponding to the entry is configured to be displayed as the second variable rights representation, the second variation pattern causes the floating rights representation corresponding to the entry to become the second floating rights representation (for example, blue icon) is configured not to be displayed,
If there is a new ball entering the start hole at a timing when the remaining period of the certain production period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time after the start of the certain production period, the next production period of the certain production period. wherein the variable right representation corresponding to the incoming ball is displayed with the second variable right representation according to the first change pattern,
If there is a new ball entering the start hole at a timing when the remaining period of the certain production period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time after the start of the certain production period, the next production period of the certain production period. wherein the variable right representation corresponding to the ball entry is configured to be displayed as the second variable right representation according to the second change pattern,
If there is a new ball entering the start hole at a timing when the remaining period of the certain production period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time after the start of the certain production period, the next production period of the certain production period. Depending on the type of variable display of identification information (for example, whether or not it is a variable display of trigger pending), the variable right display corresponding to the entry will be displayed in the next one performance period after the one performance period. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the frequency of displaying the second variable right display is different depending on the second change pattern.

By configuring in this way, the next variation that avoids complicated effects can be appropriately executed according to the variation mode (the number of reservations, the degree of expectation, etc.).

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (218) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting hole can be displayed in the variable rights display area of the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
In a display area other than the variable rights display area, a display imitating a second variable rights display (e.g., a red icon) or a second pseudo variable rights display (e.g., a red icon for game explanation effect) that evokes the second variable rights display ) can be displayed,
When the second variable rights display (e.g., red icon) is not displayed in the variable rights display area, the second variable rights display (e.g., red icon) is displayed in the variable rights display area. The second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon for game explanation effect) is more likely to be displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display unit,
Triggered by the display of the second pseudo variable right display (e.g., red icon for game explanation effect) in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display unit, the second variable right sound (e.g., "Mi") is configured not to be output,
Triggered by the display of the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display unit, the first light emitting unit A pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to emit light in a mode (for example, red).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to spread awareness of the high-expectation icon to the extent that the player does not misunderstand.

The pachinko gaming machine according to aspect (219) is
a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
A variable rights display (for example, an icon) that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting hole can be displayed in the variable rights display area of the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
having at least a first floating rights representation (e.g., white icon) and a second floating rights representation (e.g., red icon) different from the first floating rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound (for example, "do") that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit, and the second fluctuating right sign are displayed on the effect display unit. has at least a second fluctuating right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when displayed as
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second variable right sound (for example, "mi") that can be output when the second variable right display (for example, a red icon) is displayed by the first change effect, and the second change sound by the second change effect It is configured so that the second variable right sound (eg, "mi") that can be output when the two-variable right display (eg, red icon) is displayed can be the same sound,
The first light emitting unit has at least a first mode (e.g., white) and a second mode (e.g., red) that is a light emission mode different from the first mode as a light emission mode,
In a display area other than the variable rights display area, a display imitating a second variable rights display (e.g., a red icon) or a second pseudo variable rights display (e.g., a red icon for game explanation effect) that evokes the second variable rights display ) can be displayed,
When the second variable rights display (e.g., red icon) is not displayed in the variable rights display area, the second variable rights display (e.g., red icon) is displayed in the variable rights display area. The second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon for game explanation effect) is more likely to be displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display unit,
Triggered by the display of the second pseudo variable right display (e.g., red icon for game explanation effect) in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display unit, the second variable right sound (e.g., "Mi") is configured not to be output,
Triggered by the display of the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of a game explanation effect) in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display unit, the first light emitting unit configured not to emit light in a mode (e.g., red),
When the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of game explanation effect) is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section, the second pseudo variable right display area is displayed. configured so that the second variable rights display (e.g., blue icon) in a display mode different from the rights display (e.g., red icon) may be displayed,
When the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon of game explanation effect) is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section, triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole configured such that the second variable rights display (e.g., red icon) may be displayed in the variable rights display area;
The period from the start of the variable display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one performance period,
During a period after the start of a certain effect period and before a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the super ready-to-win effect develops), the second pseudo variable right is displayed in a display area other than the variable right display area of the effect display section. While the display (for example, the red icon of the game explanation effect) is configured to be displayable, in a period after the predetermined timing (for example, the timing to develop into the super ready-to-win effect), the variable right display area of the effect display unit. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the second pseudo variable right display (for example, a red icon for game explanation effect) is not displayed in a display area other than the display area.

By configuring in this way, a situation is created in which it can be expected that the icon will actually change to a high-expectation icon during or immediately after the recognition of the high-expectation icon is being spread.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entering ball determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance ball entrance determination means MJ11-C10 1st major winning entrance determination Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning entrance ball determination means MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-H Auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 Reservation control means MJ31 Reservation digestion control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition sufficiency determination means MJ32 Symbol reservation means MJ32-A First main game symbol reservation means MJ32b-A First main game symbol reservation information temporary Storage means MJ32-B Second main game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-B Second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Winner lottery means MN11-A First main game lottery means, MN11ta-A First main game lottery table MN11-B Second main game lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determination means , MN51-A First main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B Second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP Game progress means MP10 Display control means, MP11-C First and second main game symbol control means MP11t-C First and Second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP21-B Second main Game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP22t-B Second main game starter electric accessory open timer MP30 Special game control means MP31 Condition determination means MP32 Special game content determination means MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special Game execution means, MP33-C 1st and 2nd big prize mouth electric role item opening and closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability variation end condition determination means, MP52 Time saving end condition determination means MP52c Time saving number counter, MB Game state temporary storage means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C First and second main game pattern information temporary storage means MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH Prize ball payout determination Means A 1st main game peripheral device A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit A21h 1st main game Symbol reserve display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start opening B11s 2nd main game start entrance detection device, B11d 2nd main game start electric accessory B20 2nd main game pattern display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display portion B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display portion, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st big winning port, C11s 1st big winning port winning detection device C11d 1st big winning Mouth electric accessory, C20 2nd large winning opening C21s 2nd large winning opening winning detection device, C21d 2nd large winning opening electric accessory H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start opening H11s Auxiliary game start opening ball detection device , H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM sub-game control means (sub-main control unit)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative pattern display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta lottery table for design variation content determination SM21ta-2 decorative design performance table, SM21b: design related information temporary storage means SM21t-1: first design change time management timer; SM22: design reservation information display control means;
SM22b Design pending information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information Temporary storage means SM25 Ready-to-win effect display control means SM25n Ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25b Ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM27 Right hitting display control means SM40 Information transmission/reception control means SS Effects display means (sub-sub control unit) SS10 Sub Information transmission/reception control means SS20 Image display control means SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Effect display device SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area SG12 First reservation display area SG13 Second reservation display area KH Prize ball payout control Substrate KE Prize ball payout device MH20 Main display device, SH20 Sub display device R10 Round indicator light, R20 Round display unit

Claims (1)

a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a speaker that outputs sound;
a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit provided on a game board or a frame enclosing the game board;
a production display unit capable of displaying production;
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
a game content determining means for executing a win-or-fail judgment when a win-or-fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, and determining a stop display mode of identification information and a variable display mode of identification information based on the result of the win-or-fail judgment;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
an effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed in the effect display unit,
As a game state during non-execution of the special game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
It is configured to be able to display the fluctuating right display that is newly displayed when a new ball enters the starting port on the effect display unit,
When a new variable right display is displayed on the effect display unit, the variable right sound can be output from the speaker,
A plurality of types of production modes are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of production modes can be displayed on the production display section, and when displaying the production display contents, the one corresponding to the displayed production mode is displayed. configured to allow
having at least a first variable rights representation and a second variable rights representation different from the first variable rights representation as variable rights representations,
As the fluctuating right sound, a first fluctuating right sound that can be output when the first fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit and output when the second fluctuating right indication is displayed on the effect display unit having at least a possible second variation right note,
Triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first change effect can be executed to display the variable right display corresponding to the new ball into the second variable right display,
It is configured to be able to execute a second change effect of displaying a certain variable right display with the second variable right display when a condition for starting variable display of identification information is satisfied,
The second fluctuating right sound that can be output when the second fluctuating right display is displayed by the first change effect, and the second fluctuating right sound that can be output when the second fluctuating right display is displayed by the second change effect The second fluctuating right sound is configured to be the same sound,
As a light emission mode of the first light emitting unit, at least a first mode and a second mode that is a light emission mode different from the first mode are provided,
As the light emission mode of the second light emitting unit, at least a third mode and a fourth mode that is a light emission mode different from the third mode are provided,
When the first variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the first mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
When the second variable right display is displayed on the effect display section, the first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the second mode, and the second light emitting section emits light in the third mode. configured to allow
The time when the second fluctuating right sound starts to be output and the time when the first light emitting unit in the second mode starts to emit light are substantially the same, while the second fluctuating right sound is output. is configured to be before the time when the light emission of the first light emitting unit ends in the second mode,
As the production mode, at least a normal production mode corresponding to the normal game state and a specific production mode corresponding to the specific game state are provided,
In the normal effect mode, when the second variable right display is displayed triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first light emitting unit is configured to emit light in the second mode, In the specific effect mode, when the second variable right display is displayed triggered by a new ball entering the starting hole, the first light emitting unit is configured not to emit light in the second mode,
In the normal effect mode, when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, the first light emitting unit is changed to the second variable right display when the certain variable right display is displayed as the second variable right display. On the other hand, in the specific effect mode, the certain variable right display is displayed as the second variable right display when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A pachinko game machine characterized in that the first light emitting unit is configured so as not to emit light in the second mode when the game is played.

Images